MagentoGo UserGuide
Content
Error! No text of specified style in document. Error! No text of specified style in document.Error! No text of specifi
Note: This document is subject to change without notice. We recommend that, rather than print this document, that you visit the Magento Go support site to download the latest version.
Ver: 1.2.0
Error! No text of specified style in document. Error! No text of specified style in document.Error! No text of specifi
Important Notice
Magento reserves the right to make corrections, modifications, enhancements, improvements, and other changes to its products and services at any time and to discontinue any product or service without notice. Customers should obtain the latest relevant information before placing orders and should verify that such information is current and complete. All products are sold subject to Magento's terms and conditions of sale supplied at the time of order acknowledgment. Magento warrants performance of its products to the specifications applicable at the time of sale in accordance with Magento's standard warranty. Testing and other quality control techniques are used to the extent Magento deems necessary to support this warranty. Except where mandated by government requirements, testing of all parameters of each product is not necessarily performed. Magento assumes no liability for applications assistance or customer product design. Customers are responsible for their products and applications using Magento components. To minimize the risks associated with customer products and applications, customers should provide adequate design and operating safeguards. Magento does not warrant or represent that any license, either express or implied, is granted under any Magento patent right, copyright, mask work right, or other Magento intellectual property rights relating to any combination, machine, or process in which Magento products or services are used. Information published by Magento regarding third-party products or services does not constitute a license from Magento to use such products or services or a warranty or endorsement thereof. Use of such information may require a license from a third party under the patents or other intellectual property of the third party, or a license from Magento under the patents or other intellectual property of Magento. Resale of Magento products or services with statements different from or beyond the parameters stated by Magento for that product or service voids all express and any implied warranties for the associated Magento product or service and is an unfair and deceptive business practice. Magento is not responsible or liable for any such statements. All company and brand products and service names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders. Magento™ is a trademark of Magento Copyright © 2012 Magento A division of X.commerce, Inc., an eBay Company
Contents
Part I: Getting Started CHAPTER 1: Magento Go Will Take You Places! 1
Your Login Credentials ........................................................................................... 2 For Your Records ............................................................................................ 3 Where to Find Help .................................................................................................. 4
CHAPTER 2:
A Quick Tour
7
The Path to Purchase.............................................................................................. 8 Home Page ............................................................................................................. 10 Category Page ....................................................................................................... 11 Search Results Page ............................................................................................. 13 Product Detail Page .............................................................................................. 14 Shopping Cart Page .............................................................................................. 16 Checkout Page ...................................................................................................... 17
CHAPTER 3:
Quick Start Guide
19
Start My Store ........................................................................................................ 19
CHAPTER 4:
Your Magento Account
25
Updating Your Contact Information .................................................................... 26 Changing Your Password .................................................................................... 27 Upgrading Your Plan............................................................................................. 28 Setting Up a Custom Domain ............................................................................... 30 Adding a Custom SSL Certificate ........................................................................ 32 Using Magento Connect ....................................................................................... 34
Magento Go User Guide
v
Contents
CHAPTER 5:
Your Back Office
37
Admin Panel ........................................................................................................... 38 Using the Dashboard ............................................................................................ 42 Sales Charts .................................................................................................. 43 Summary Reports .......................................................................................... 43 Dashboard Settings ....................................................................................... 44 Updating Your Store Information ........................................................................ 46 Countries Options .......................................................................................... 46 Locale Options ............................................................................................... 47 Currency Setup .............................................................................................. 48 Store Contact Information ............................................................................. 50 Store Email Addresses .................................................................................. 51 Configuring the Contact Us Form ....................................................................... 52 Managing Permissions ......................................................................................... 54 Creating an Admin User ................................................................................ 54 Creating a Custom Role ................................................................................ 56 Unlocking User Accounts .............................................................................. 58 Multiple Store Views ............................................................................................. 59 Understanding Store Scope .......................................................................... 60 Changing the Store Language ............................................................................. 61 Changing the Default Store View .................................................................. 62
CHAPTER 6:
Customer Accounts
63
Customer Accounts .............................................................................................. 64 Customer Login Options ...................................................................................... 65 PayPal Access ............................................................................................... 66 Setting Up PayPal Access ............................................................................. 69 Setting Up Customer Groups ............................................................................... 70 Creating a Customer Account ............................................................................. 71 Adding a Customer Address ......................................................................... 73
Part II: Design & Content CHAPTER 7: Themes and Page Layout 77
Understanding Page Layout ................................................................................ 78 Home Page Layout ........................................................................................ 80
vi
Magento Go User Guide
Contents Choosing a Theme ................................................................................................ 81 Changing the Current Theme ........................................................................ 83 Adding Your Logos ............................................................................................... 84 Header Logo .................................................................................................. 84 Email Logo ..................................................................................................... 86 Favicon .......................................................................................................... 87
CHAPTER 8:
Creating Content
89
Sample Content Pages ......................................................................................... 90 Editing a Content Page ......................................................................................... 92 Creating a New Page ............................................................................................. 96 Changing the Home Page ........................................................................... 100 Using the Editor ................................................................................................... 101 Inserting Links ............................................................................................. 101 Inserting Images .......................................................................................... 102 Embedding Video ........................................................................................ 104 Organizing Your Pages ....................................................................................... 105 Adding Nodes .............................................................................................. 105 Page Hierarchy Configuration ..................................................................... 110 Creating Blocks of Content ................................................................................ 111 Changing the Footer ........................................................................................... 112 Changing the Copyright Notice ................................................................... 113 Creating Banners ................................................................................................ 114 Inserting Variables ....................................................................................... 117 Using Custom Variables .............................................................................. 117 Inserting a Frontend App ............................................................................. 119 Adding Related Promotions ......................................................................... 120 Changing the Column Layout ............................................................................ 121 Compare Products ....................................................................................... 121 Troubleshooting ........................................................................................... 121
CHAPTER 9:
Creating Brand Advocates
125
Product Reviews ................................................................................................. 126 Moderating Reviews .................................................................................... 128 Managing Ratings ........................................................................................ 129 Tags ...................................................................................................................... 131 Polls ...................................................................................................................... 132
Magento Go User Guide
vii
Contents Configuring the Poll ..................................................................................... 134 Email a Friend ...................................................................................................... 135 Add to Wishlist .................................................................................................... 136
CHAPTER 10: Managing Email & Newsletters
137
Adding a New Email Template ........................................................................... 138 Using Custom Variables in Email ...................................................................... 139 Configuring Email Templates ............................................................................ 139 Newsletters .......................................................................................................... 142 Subscription Options ................................................................................... 142 Preview the Newsletter Confirmation Template .......................................... 143 Managing Your List of Subscribers ............................................................. 145 Managing Requests to Unsubscribe ........................................................... 145
Part III: Building Your Catalog CHAPTER 11: Mastering Search 149
Storefront Search Tools ..................................................................................... 150 Quick Search ............................................................................................... 151 Advanced Search ........................................................................................ 153 Popular Search Terms ........................................................................................ 154 Using the Search Results List ........................................................................... 156 Page Controls .............................................................................................. 157 Search Terms ....................................................................................................... 159 Managing Search Terms ............................................................................. 160 Using the Search Terms List ....................................................................... 162 Adding a Search Term................................................................................. 164 Using Product Attributes in Search .................................................................. 167 Weighted Search ......................................................................................... 168 Reporting and Analysis ...................................................................................... 169 Search Term Report .................................................................................... 169 Top Search Terms ....................................................................................... 171 Google Analytics .......................................................................................... 171 Back Office Search Tools ................................................................................... 172 Global Search .............................................................................................. 173 List Filters and Controls ............................................................................... 173 Refreshing the Search Index ....................................................................... 175
viii
Magento Go User Guide
Contents
CHAPTER 12: Navigation by Category
177
Breadcrumb Trail................................................................................................. 178 Breadcrumb Trails on Content Pages ......................................................... 178 Top Navigation .................................................................................................... 179 Creating Categories ............................................................................................ 180 Moving Categories ....................................................................................... 183 Layered Navigation ............................................................................................. 184 Anchor Categories ....................................................................................... 184 Layered Navigation Settings ....................................................................... 187 General Information ............................................................................................ 188 Display Settings .................................................................................................. 190 Custom Design .................................................................................................... 192 Category Products .............................................................................................. 194 Category View Optimization ............................................................................... 195 Category Configuration ...................................................................................... 196 Category Depth ........................................................................................... 196 Category URL Options ................................................................................ 197 Sitemap ................................................................................................................ 199
CHAPTER 13: Understanding Product Types
201
“Standalone” Products ....................................................................................... 202 “One-to-Many” Product Relationships ............................................................. 203 Creating a Simple Product ................................................................................. 204 Points to Remember .................................................................................... 208 Creating a Virtual Product .................................................................................. 209 Points to Remember .................................................................................... 211 Creating a Gift Card ............................................................................................ 212 Managing Gift Card Accounts ..................................................................... 215 Configuration Settings ................................................................................. 218 Points to Remember .................................................................................... 219 Creating a Grouped Product .............................................................................. 220 Configuring Thumbnail Images ................................................................... 222 Points to Remember .................................................................................... 222 Creating a Configurable Product ....................................................................... 223 Overview of the Process.............................................................................. 223
Magento Go User Guide
ix
Contents Configuring Thumbnail Images ................................................................... 232 Overriding Default Prices............................................................................. 233 Additional Inventory Settings ....................................................................... 233 Points to Remember .................................................................................... 234 Creating a Bundle Product ................................................................................. 235 Points to Remember .................................................................................... 240 Troubleshooting Tips.......................................................................................... 240
CHAPTER 14: Product Information
241
General ................................................................................................................. 242 Prices .................................................................................................................... 245 Tier Pricing .................................................................................................. 245 Special Pricing ............................................................................................. 246 Meta Information ................................................................................................. 248 Images .................................................................................................................. 249 Product Image Placeholders ....................................................................... 250 Product Image Watermarks ......................................................................... 252 Resizing Catalog Images............................................................................. 254 Description ........................................................................................................... 256 Using the WYSIWYG Editor ........................................................................ 257 Design .................................................................................................................. 259 Inventory .............................................................................................................. 261 Websites ............................................................................................................... 266 Categories ............................................................................................................ 267 Product Relationships ........................................................................................ 268 Related Products ......................................................................................... 268 Up-sells ........................................................................................................ 269 Cross-sells ................................................................................................... 270 Custom Variants and Options ............................................................................ 271 Product View Optimization ................................................................................. 273
CHAPTER 15: Managing Attributes
275
Attribute Input Types .......................................................................................... 276 Attribute Quick Reference .................................................................................. 278 Managing Labels and Options ........................................................................... 281
x
Magento Go User Guide
Contents Creating an Attribute........................................................................................... 282 Summary of Attribute Properties ....................................................................... 285 Creating an Attribute Set .................................................................................... 290 Creating a New Attribute Group .................................................................. 292
CHAPTER 16: Promotional Price Rules
293
Catalog Price Rules............................................................................................. 294 Conditions .................................................................................................... 296 Actions ......................................................................................................... 298 Shopping Cart Price Rules ................................................................................. 299 Rule Information .......................................................................................... 299 Conditions .................................................................................................... 301 Actions ......................................................................................................... 302 Price Rule Labels ........................................................................................ 304 Price Rule Banners ............................................................................................. 305
Part IV: Sales & Fulfillment CHAPTER 17: Processing Orders 309
Order Process Overview .................................................................................... 310 Terms and Conditions ........................................................................................ 312 Managing Sales Orders ...................................................................................... 314 Fulfilling and Completing Orders ................................................................. 314 Invoicing an Order ....................................................................................... 314 Shipping an Order ....................................................................................... 316 Creating New Orders ................................................................................... 317 Editing an Order .......................................................................................... 318 Canceling an Order ..................................................................................... 318 Putting an Order “On Hold” ......................................................................... 319 Handling Backorders ................................................................................... 319 Updating the Shopping Cart .............................................................................. 320 Applying a Coupon Code ............................................................................ 321 Adding Products to a Shopping Cart ........................................................... 321 Adding Wishlist Items .................................................................................. 321 Adding Comparison Items ........................................................................... 322 Adding Recently Viewed Items .................................................................... 322 Adding Previously Ordered Items ................................................................ 322 Managing Refunds and Store Credit ................................................................. 323
Magento Go User Guide
xi
Contents
CHAPTER 18: Shipping Methods
325
Shipping Methods During Checkout ................................................................. 326 Shipping Settings ................................................................................................ 327 Shipping Rates .................................................................................................... 328 Rates ........................................................................................................... 328 Table Rate Shipping .................................................................................... 329 Flat Rate ...................................................................................................... 334 Free Shipping ...................................................................................................... 337 Shipping Carriers ................................................................................................ 339
CHAPTER 19: Payment Methods
341
Bank Transfer Payment ...................................................................................... 342 Cash on Delivery ................................................................................................. 344 Check / Money Order .......................................................................................... 346 Purchase Order ................................................................................................... 348 Zero Subtotal Checkout ...................................................................................... 350
CHAPTER 20: Payment Services & Gateways
353
Payment Services................................................................................................ 353 Payment Gateways.............................................................................................. 353 Worldwide .................................................................................................... 354 North America.............................................................................................. 354 Europe ......................................................................................................... 355 Asia .............................................................................................................. 356 Oceania ....................................................................................................... 356 PayPal ................................................................................................................... 357 Express Checkout ....................................................................................... 357 Website Payments Pro ................................................................................ 357 Website Payment Standard ......................................................................... 358 Website Payments Pro Payflow Edition ...................................................... 358 Payflow Pro Gateway .................................................................................. 359 Getting Started With PayPal ........................................................................ 360 Setting Up a PayPal Sandbox Account ....................................................... 361 Setting Up PayPal Express Checkout ......................................................... 365
xii
Magento Go User Guide
Contents
CHAPTER 21: Tax Settings
369
Setting Up Taxes ................................................................................................. 369 Retail Tax Calculations ....................................................................................... 375 Value Added Tax (VAT) ....................................................................................... 383
CHAPTER 22: Reports
389
Sales Reports ...................................................................................................... 390 Shopping Cart Reports ....................................................................................... 392 Products in Cart ........................................................................................... 392 Abandoned Carts ......................................................................................... 392 Product Reports .................................................................................................. 393 Bestsellers Report ....................................................................................... 393 Products Ordered Report ............................................................................ 394 Most Viewed Report .................................................................................... 394 Low Stock Report ........................................................................................ 395 Customer Reports ............................................................................................... 396 New Accounts Report .................................................................................. 396 Customers by Orders Total ......................................................................... 396 Customers by Number of Orders ................................................................ 397 Reviews Reports ................................................................................................. 398 Customer Reviews ...................................................................................... 398 Product Reviews .......................................................................................... 399 Tag Reports ......................................................................................................... 400 Customers Tags Report .............................................................................. 400 Products Tags Report.................................................................................. 401 Popular Tags Report ................................................................................... 402 Search Terms Report .......................................................................................... 403 Refresh Statistics ................................................................................................ 404
Part V: Improving Operations CHAPTER 23: Importing and Exporting Data 407
Importing Data ..................................................................................................... 408 Importing Configurable Products ................................................................. 409 Importing Product Images ........................................................................... 411 Exporting Data ..................................................................................................... 413
Magento Go User Guide
xiii
Contents Working with Product CSV Files ....................................................................... 415 Common Issues........................................................................................... 416 Custom Attributes ........................................................................................ 416 Working With Customer CSV Files .................................................................... 417
CHAPTER 24: Site Maintenance
419
“Under Construction” Message ......................................................................... 419 Maintenance Mode .............................................................................................. 420 Task Notifications ............................................................................................... 421
CHAPTER 25: SEO Best Practices
423
Using a Robots.txt File ....................................................................................... 423 Generating the File ...................................................................................... 424 URL Keys ............................................................................................................. 427 URL Rewrites ....................................................................................................... 428 Protecting Your “Link Juice” ........................................................................ 428 URL Redirection 301 and 302 ..................................................................... 429 Using Third-Party Scripts ................................................................................... 430 Google Sitemap ................................................................................................... 431 Configuring Your Google Sitemap............................................................... 434 Google Analytics ................................................................................................. 436 Google Website Optimizer ................................................................................. 437
Appendices Appendix A: Appendix B: Appendix C: Glossary Editor Toolbar Buttons Shipping Carriers 440 447 453
UPS ....................................................................................................................... 454 USPS ..................................................................................................................... 457 FedEx .................................................................................................................... 460 DHL ....................................................................................................................... 463
xiv
Magento Go User Guide
Contents
Appendix D: Appendix E:
Country Codes Payment-Related Services
467 468
3D Secure Credit Card Validation ...................................................................... 469 Kount Fraud Detection........................................................................................ 472
Appendix F:
Payment Service Providers
473
CCAvenue ............................................................................................................ 474 Google Checkout ................................................................................................. 476 Paybox Direct ...................................................................................................... 478
Appendix G: Appendix H:
PCI Compliance Guidelines Payment Gateways
480 481
Authorize.Net ....................................................................................................... 482 Braintree ............................................................................................................... 485 Card Gate Plus ..................................................................................................... 487 CyberSource (SOAP Toolkit) ............................................................................. 489 DIBS Payment Services ...................................................................................... 492 eWAY Direct ......................................................................................................... 495 First Data Global Gateway Web Service API .................................................... 497 Ogone DirectLink ................................................................................................ 500 PAYONE.de .......................................................................................................... 503 PSi Gate ................................................................................................................ 505 Sage Pay Direct ................................................................................................... 507
Appendix I: Product System Attributes Appendix J: Customer System Attributes
510 514
Editing Customer Attributes .............................................................................. 514 General Customer Attributes ............................................................................. 515 Customer Address Attributes ............................................................................ 516
Magento Go User Guide
xv
Contents
Appendix K:
Translating Your Store
517
Changing the Locale ........................................................................................... 517 Catalog ........................................................................................................ 518 Products ...................................................................................................... 519 CMS Content ............................................................................................... 519 Static Blocks ................................................................................................ 520 Banners ....................................................................................................... 520 Polls ............................................................................................................. 520
Index
521
xvi
Magento Go User Guide
Part I: Getting Started
Chapter 1:
Your Login Credentials
CHAPTER 1:
Magento Go Will Take You Places!
Welcome to Magento Go, an online service that helps small business merchants like you build powerful stores to sell products and services, quickly and easily. With Magento Go there is no software to install, and no servers to manage. We handle the technology, so you can focus on running and growing your business. To get started, we recommend that you sign up for a free 30-day trial. If you’re in a hurry to get started, you can sign up right away for one of our monthly plans. Our plans are available without any setup or transaction fees, and include 24/7 customer support to help to you get going. Let’s begin!
Part I: Getting Started
1
Chapter 1: Magento Go Will Take You Places!
Your Login Credentials
Your Login Credentials
Welcome to the Magento community! You are now a member of the fastestgrowing and most dynamic community of eCommerce merchants and developers in the world! Before you go any further, let’s make sure you have all the information you need to access your Magento Go account and services.
Welcome Email The Welcome email and log in instructions you received contain important information about your account. Make sure to keep them in a safe place where they can be easily found.
Store URL The store URL takes you to the Home page of your store. It is based on the domain name you chose when you opened your account. If you installed the sample data, it may look something like this: mystore.gostorego.com
Admin URL The admin URL takes you to the login page to the “back office” Admin panel of your store. The address is the same as for your store, but it ends with /admin. mystore.gostorego.com/admin
2
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 1: Magento Go Will Take You Places!
Your Login Credentials
Your Magento Account Your Magento account provides access to information about your current products and services, account settings, billing history, and support resources. Simply visit the Magento Go site and click the Login link. http://go.magento.com
For Your Records
It’s a good idea to keep a record of your login credentials and the email address that are associated with your account. Write them down, and keep the information in a safe, but convenient place. Store URL: Admin URL: ________________________________________________ ________________________________________________
Admin Login
User Name: Password: ________________________________________________ ________________________________________________
Magento Account Login
User Name: Password: Email Address: ________________________________________________ ________________________________________________ ________________________________________________
Part I: Getting Started
3
Chapter 1: Magento Go Will Take You Places!
Where to Find Help
Where to Find Help
Magento provides a wide range of support resources to help you get up and running in a hurry. Please let us know how we can be of assistance!
Knowledge Base The Magento Go Knowledge Base is continually updated with the latest information. You’ll find a link to the Knowledge Base in the top navigation of the Magento Go site, and in the Admin panel of your store. Go there now!
Video Tutorials A picture is worth a thousand words! Check our support site for the latest Magento Go video tutorials. Go there now!
Community Forum Here’s a chance to meet other users, share tips, and ask questions. Be sure to join the Magento Go community, so you can learn, and also share your experience and knowledge with others. Go there now!
4
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 1: Magento Go Will Take You Places!
Where to Find Help
Support Site Have a question? Please let us know how we can help you succeed. To access our support site, click the Support link in the upper-right corner of the Admin panel. Go there now!
Blog Keep up with the latest product news, trends, and featured stores on the Magento Go blog. Go there now!
Webinars Sign up to attend a free webinar, taught by a Magento expert. Go there now!
Guides Learn everything you need to know about building your store by downloading the complete set of documentation from our website. Go there now!
Part I: Getting Started
5
Chapter 1: Magento Go Will Take You Places!
Where to Find Help
Notes:
_______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________
6
Magento Go User Guide
CHAPTER 2:
A Quick Tour
In this guide, you’ll find just about everything you need to build your store, manage your store, and expand your store. Build Your Store Manage Your Store Expand Your Store
There’s a lot to learn, and the best place to begin is right here. So, let’s take a look around your store!
The Home Page
Part I: Getting Started
7
Chapter 2: A Quick Tour
The Path to Purchase
The Path to Purchase
The ultimate purpose of your store is to sell products, and the path a visitor follows that leads to a sale is called the path to purchase. The term conversion refers to the process of transforming a visitor into a paying customer. Here are the main pages in your Magento Go store that shoppers visit along the way.
Home Your Home page is like the front display window of your store. It is the primary landing page of your site, and is designed to entice visitors to come inside for a closer look.
Product List This page lists items that the shopper wants to see. The selection can be based on category or attribute, such as price, size, color, and so on. Any item can be examined more closely, or placed directly into the shopping cart.
Product Detail The Product Detail page provides detailed information about a specific item. Shoppers can read reviews, add the product to their wishlists, compare it to other products, share the link with friends, and most importantly, place the item into their shopping carts.
8
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 2: A Quick Tour
The Path to Purchase
Shopping Cart The Shopping Cart lists each item by price and quantity selected, and calculates the subtotal. Shoppers can apply discount coupons and gift cards, and generate an estimate for shipping and tax charges.
Checkout During Checkout, the necessary billing, shipping, and payment information is gathered to complete the order. New customers can open an account or if they prefer, checkout as a guest. Regular customers can speed through checkout by logging in to their accounts.
Review and Place Order The final step in the checkout process is to review the order, including any additional charges, and approve the purchase. This visitor is now your customer!
Part I: Getting Started
9
Chapter 2: A Quick Tour
Home Page
Home Page
Did you know that most people spend only a few seconds on a page before they decide to stay or go somewhere else? That’s not long to make an impression! If you were to do an eye-tracking study of this page, you would discover that the eyes of most people gravitate toward the “Free Shipping” offer in the upper-left corner. Shoppers love free shipping, but there’s more to it than that. For most people, that general area on the page is the “sweet spot.” Studies show that people also love photographs, especially of other people. Whatever design you choose, everything on the page should move visitors along toward the next step in the sales process. The idea is to guide their attention, in a cohesive flow from one point of interest to the next.
Home Page
10
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 2: A Quick Tour
Category Page
Category Page
People who find your site through a search engine may land on a category page with a list of products, and miss your Home page entirely. All the more reason to make sure that category pages have interesting content! The categories that you create for your catalog become the navigation options that appear across the top of your site. They can also be found in the breadcrumb trail, and in the layered navigation that runs down the left column of some pages. In addition to the standard list of products, you can add images, video, and keyword-rich descriptions to category pages. You can even create special designs that are timed to appear for a promotion or season. The product description provides shoppers with enough information to merit a closer look. While those in a hurry—who know what they’re looking for—might just add the product to their shopping carts and go!
Product List by Category
Part I: Getting Started
11
Chapter 2: A Quick Tour
Category Page Here’s a different take on a category page that uses a two-column, rather than three-column layout. You can have fun experimenting with different column layouts, and even apply different layouts to different categories—all within the same theme. You might be surprised by what you discover! This page lists only the products in the category, without the added distraction of images or text. There is nothing wrong with this straight-forward approach. In fact, there is a distinct advantage to having products listed “above the fold,” because people don’t have to scroll down to see them. It’s good to remember that most people who arrive at a category page are often in a hurry, and might be looking for something specific.
Product List by Category
12
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 2: A Quick Tour
Search Results Page
Search Results Page
Did you know that people who use search are nearly twice as likely to make a purchase as those who rely on navigation alone? You might consider these shoppers to be “pre-qualified.” Your Magento Go store has a Quick Search box in the upper-right corner, and a link to Advanced Search in the footer. Magento Go keeps track of all the search terms shoppers submit through your site, so you can see exactly what they’re looking for. You can offer suggestions, and enter synonyms and common misspellings. Then, display a specific page when a search term is entered.
Search Results List
Part I: Getting Started
13
Chapter 2: A Quick Tour
Product Detail Page
Product Detail Page
The Product Detail page is where you make the pitch. The first thing that catches your eye is the product image with a high-resolution zoom, and a thumbnail gallery of additional images. In addition to the price and availability, there’s a tabbed section with the product description and addition information. Depending on the product, there may also be additional options to select or configure. In addition to the featured product, you can offer the shopper a hand-picked selection of related products, and suggest other products they might find interesting. As you learn more about your customers, you can target offers and personalize promotions. As you can see on the next page, the shopping experience becomes much more personalized for customers who shop while logged in to their accounts.
Product Detail
14
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 2: A Quick Tour
Product Detail Page
Part I: Getting Started
15
Chapter 2: A Quick Tour
Shopping Cart Page
Shopping Cart Page
The Shopping Cart is where the total cost of the order can be determined, based on estimated shipping and tax. This is also where coupon codes and gift cards can be applied toward the purchase price. The shopper can change the quantity of items in the cart, or delete items if necessary. The Shopping Cart is a great place to display your trust badges and seals. You should also include a link to your Privacy Policy in the footer. Many merchants put their toll-free number in the header, so it is always readily available. Just like standing in the checkout line, the Shopping Cart is an ideal opportunity to offer one last item. You can carefully select certain items to be offered whenever a specific item is in the Shopping Cart. It’s the classic cross-sell, “Would you like some fries with that?”
Shopping Cart
16
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 2: A Quick Tour
Checkout Page
Checkout Page
As soon as the customer clicks the “Proceed to Checkout” button, the transaction shifts to a secure, encrypted channel. A padlock symbol appears in the address bar of the browser, and the URL changes from “http” to “https.” From this point on, the goal is to gather the information necessary to complete the transaction. The Checkout page leads the customer through each step of the process, starting with the billing, shipping, and payment information, and finally a review of the order. Customers who are logged into their accounts can skip some of these steps, if the information is already in their accounts. The last step is for the customer to agree to the terms and conditions of the sale, and place the order. To learn what happens next, see: “Order Process Overview,” on page 310.
Checkout
Part I: Getting Started
17
Chapter 2: A Quick Tour
Checkout Page
Notes:
_______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________
18
Magento Go User Guide
CHAPTER 3:
Quick Start Guide
Magento Go leads you through the process of setting up your store, step-by-step. You can refer to this chapter for more detailed information as you go through the “Start My Store” process. When you’re done, your store will be ready to go live!
Start My Store
To launch Start My Store: 1. Log in to the Admin panel with the credentials you received in your Welcome
email.
2. From the Dashboard, click Start My Store. You will find it in the upper-left
corner of the orange header at the top of the page. To close the guide, click anywhere in the orange bar at the top of the page.
Admin Panel: Start My Store
Part I: Getting Started
19
Chapter 3: Quick Start Guide
Start My Store
Step 1:
Language Preference
Magento Go gives you the ability to participate in the global marketplace, with support for multiple languages, currencies, and tax rules. When your store is first created, the language is set to English (United States). You can change the language and add additional languages, depending on your plan. To learn more, see: “Locale Options,” on page 47.
Start My Store: Language Preference
Step 2:
Contact Information
Get started right away by letting customers know who you are and how to reach you. Your contact information appears on email messages, invoices, packing slips, and newsletters sent to your customers. To learn more, see: “Store Contact Information,” on page 50.
Start My Store: Contact Information
20
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 3: Quick Start Guide
Start My Store
Step 3:
Design
Magento Go helps you create compelling and professional stores that engage your customers, regardless of your design skills. You can use a theme “right out of the box,” or customize it with your own design. You can use the Design Settings Editor to make simple changes, or work directly with the CSS Editor for more creative control. To learn more, see “Understanding Page Layout,” on page 78.
Start My Store: Design
Step 4:
Plan
As your business grows, Magento Go can grow with you. With a wide range of configurable features and a variety of plans to meet your needs as the size of your business grows, Magento Go is the ideal way to launch your online business. To learn more, see: “Upgrading Your Plan,” on page 28.
Start My Store: Plan
Part I: Getting Started
21
Chapter 3: Quick Start Guide
Start My Store
Step 5:
Products
Magento Go lets you create a wide variety of products, with custom attributes and input controls. You will learn how to create configurable products with dropdown lists of options, grouped and customizable products, gift cards, and more. To learn more, see: “Understanding Product Types,” on page 201.
Start My Store: Products
Step 6:
Payments
Magento Go lets you accept credit cards and alternative payments directly from your store through PayPal and other trusted partners. Our payment systems are safe for your customers and provide you with the security and PCI compliance that you need to confidently sell online. To learn more, see: “Payment Methods,” on page 341.
Start My Store: Payments
22
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 3: Quick Start Guide
Start My Store
Step 7:
Shipping
Magento Go supports a wide range of shipping methods and carriers offering services in all parts of the world. To learn more, see: “Shipping Methods,” on page 325.
Start My Store: Shipping
Step 8:
Get Going
When you are ready to launch your store and open for business, click the Go button to remove the demo store notice and officially launch your store. With the “Under Construction” message removed, you’re open for business! To learn more, see: “Site Maintenance,” on page 419.
Start My Store: Get Going
Part I: Getting Started
23
Chapter 3: Quick Start Guide
Start My Store
Notes:
_______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________
24
Magento Go User Guide
CHAPTER 4:
Your Magento Account
You can find the information related to the products and services you have signed up to receive, as well as your contact and billing information in your Magento account. Your Magento account has a separate login from your store, and can be accessed from either the Magento website or the Admin panel of your store.
To log in to your Magento account: 1. Point your browser to the Magento Go site:
http://go.magento.com
2. In the upper-right corner, click the Log In link.
3. Enter your User Name or Email Address, and Password, and click the Log In
button. Your User Name appears next to a placeholder image.
4. Click your User Name to open your Magento account dashboard.
Part I: Getting Started
25
Chapter 4: Your Magento Account
Updating Your Contact Information
Updating Your Contact Information
Your contact information was entered when you first opened your account. It can be updated and expanded as needed to include additional information, such as your photo, signature line, and a detailed profile.
Account Settings: Contact Information
To update your contact information: 1. In the panel on the left under Account Settings, click Contact Information. 2. Make any changes that are necessary. 3. When complete, click the Save button.
26
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 4: Your Magento Account
Changing Your Password
Changing Your Password
Initially, the password for your Magento account and store Admin panel are the same. If you decide to change your Magento account password, make sure to keep a record of it with the rest of your login credentials. Changing your Magento account password has no effect on the Admin password for your store.
Account Settings: Change Password
To change your Magento password: 1. In the panel on the left under Account Settings, click Change Password. 2. Type your Current Password. 3. Type your New Password. Then in the Confirm New Password box, type it
again.
4. Click the Save button.
Part I: Getting Started
27
Chapter 4: Your Magento Account
Upgrading Your Plan
Upgrading Your Plan
Magento Go offers several plans that are designed to meet your needs as your business grows. Please visit our site to learn more about each plan. If you started with a free trial, you can upgrade to a paid plan and keep all of your data, if you upgrade within the thirty-day trial period. Your plan can be upgraded—and downgraded—at any time from your Magento account dashboard.
My Account: Upgrade to Paid Plan
To upgrade your plan: 1. From your account panel, click the Upgrade to Paid Plan link. 2. Find the plan that is right for you, and click the Choose Plan button.
My Account: Upgrade to Paid Plan - Choose Plan
28
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 4: Your Magento Account
Upgrading Your Plan
3. Complete the billing and payment information, and click the Review Order
button.
My Account: Upgrade to Paid Plan – Billing Information
4. After reviewing your order, click the Confirm your Plan button. 5. A confirmation email with a link to your invoice will be sent to the email address
that is associated with your account.
Part I: Getting Started
29
Chapter 4: Your Magento Account
Setting Up a Custom Domain
Setting Up a Custom Domain
A domain name is an address that makes it easy for people to find your store. It is also tool for branding your store. Affordable domain names can be purchased from numerous domain registrars and Internet hosting companies. To learn more about domain names, visit the Internet Corporation for Assigned Names and Numbers (ICANN) at www.icann.org. When you first set up your Magento Go store, you choose a store name. This name becomes part of the URL for your store, such as “mystore.gostorego.com.” However, most merchants prefer to have their own, custom “dot com” domain, such as www.mystore.com. Magento Go makes it easy to assign a custom domain to your store. The process takes three steps: Step 1: Step 2: Step 3: Add the domain to Magento Go Point the domain to your store Set your store’s Active Domain
After you have set it up, it takes about 24-48 hours for the change to take effect. When the process is complete, you will see your Magento Go store home page when you visit the URL of your custom domain.
Step 1:
Add the Domain to Magento Go
1. From your account panel, under Products and Services, click the Add link next to
Custom URL. (If you have multiple stores, click the link next to the correct store.)
2. Type the custom URL for your Magento Go store, and click OK.
Step 2:
Point the Domain to Your Store
After you add the domain to your Magento Go account, follow the instructions from your domain registrar to point the “A” record of your domain to the following IP address: 173.203.30.100 Your registrar might manage this in a slightly different way. We suggest that you contact your registrar directly, or consult their knowledge base for instructions.
30
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 4: Your Magento Account
Setting Up a Custom Domain
To configure your domain with GoDaddy: 1. Log in to your GoDaddy.com account. 2. In the Domains menu, under My Account, select Domain Management. 3. Select your domain name, and click Manage Domain. 4. Under DNS Manager, click Launch. 5. At the top of the Zone File list, click Add Record. 6. When prompted to Add DNS Record, set Record type to A (Host), and click OK.
Then, complete the following settings: Host Name: IP Address: TTL: @ 173.203.30.100 1 Hour
When complete, click OK.
7. Click the Save Zone File button to save your changes.
Note: It can take up to forty-eight hours for the DNS changes to take effect. We recommend that you wait a day or two before completing the next step. If you’re not sure, point your browser to the new domain and see what happens. Your domain will display a temporary home page until it is associated with your store.
Step 3:
Set Your Store’s Active Domain
The final step is to select your custom domain as the “Active Domain” for your Magento Go store.
1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. In the Configuration panel on the left, under General, click Web. 3. Click to expand the Active Domain section. Then, in the list of active domains,
select your custom domain.
4. Click the Save Config button to save changes.
Now, when you point your browser to your custom domain, you will see the home page of your Magento Go store.
Part I: Getting Started
31
Chapter 4: Your Magento Account
Setting Up a Custom Domain
Adding a Custom SSL Certificate
All Magento Go stores are initially equipped with a shared SSL certificate and secure checkout process which meet the requirements of the Payment Card Industry (PCI). To learn more, see: “PCI Compliance Guidelines,” on page 480. A secure session is established whenever a customer begins the checkout process, where sensitive information is shared. During the secure transaction, the URL prefix changes from: http:// to https:// https://[yourstore].gostorego.com Even if you have a custom domain, your customers will be redirected to the shared, secure environment during checkout. A shared security certificate is an easy and affordable way to provide secure transactions for your customers. A Custom SSL Certificate makes it possible for your customers to complete a purchase transaction from your site, without being redirected from your custom domain. If your store is on the Going Places, Go Beyond, or Go Anywhere plan, you can add a Custom SSL Certificate. The certificate can be purchased from any Certificate Authority (CA), such as VeriSign, and GeoTrust, Comodo, and GoDaddy. Note: If asked to specify the server type when purchasing a SSL certificate, select Apache.
My Account: My Products and Services – Custom SSL
32
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 4: Your Magento Account
Setting Up a Custom Domain
To set up a Custom SSL Certificate: 1. Log in to your Magento account. 2. From your account panel, under Products and Services, click the Add link next to
Custom SSL Certificate. (If you have multiple stores, click the link next to the correct store.)
3. Enter your payment information, and click Go.
After this step, a technical support team member will contact you to complete the set up process.
Part I: Getting Started
33
Chapter 4: Your Magento Account
Using Magento Connect
Using Magento Connect
Magento Go can be customized by adding Trusted Extensions from Magento Connect. Magento Connect offers a wide range of third-party tools and services, including: Site management utilities Marketing tools and services Customer experience add-ons Themes and more!
New extensions and services are always being added, so stop by often to see what’s new. magentoconnect.com
Magento Connect
34
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 4: Your Magento Account
Using Magento Connect
Step 1:
Purchase a Trusted Extension
Extensions help you attract customers, add features, manage your store more effectively and much, much more. Look for the Magento Connect Trusted Extensions badge, and find the extension you need to succeed.
To purchase an extension: 1. Log in to your Magento account. 2. Find the Magento Go Trusted Extension that you want to install. 3. Set the Platform list to Magento Go. Then, do one of the following:
For a free extension, click the Get It Now button. Then when prompted, click the Place Order button. For a paid extension, click the Buy Now button. When prompted, complete your Billing Address and Payment Information, and click the Place Order button. When the order is complete, you will receive the confirmation message, “Your extension has been installed.”
4. To verify the installation, click View in My Account. You will find the extension
listed in the My Products and Services section, under My Go Extensions.
My Account: My Products and Services – My Go Extensions
Part I: Getting Started
35
Chapter 4: Your Magento Account
Using Magento Connect
Step 2:
Activate the Extension
1. Log in to your Magento customer account. 2. To view your Magento Go Extensions, from the My Account dashboard, click My
Go Extensions.
3. If you have multiple stores, set the Store Name list to the store where the
extension is installed.
4. Find the extension in the list. Then in the Status column, click Disabled to
change the status to Enabled. Note: If you ever want to disable this extension in the future, simply click Enabled to change the status to Disabled. For more information, see the instructions provided by the extension developer.
My Go Extensions: Status Enabled
36
Magento Go User Guide
CHAPTER 5:
Your Back Office
The Admin panel is your “virtual back office,” and gives you the ability to control all aspects of your online store. In this chapter, you will learn how to find your way around the menus, commands, configuration utilities, and reports that make up the Admin panel.
To log in to the Admin panel: 1. In the address bar of your browser, type the domain for your store, followed by
/admin. If you have a standard domain such as mystore, type this: http://mystore.gostorego.com/admin If you have a custom domain such as mystore.com, type this: http://www.mystore.com/admin
2. Type your User Name and Password, and click the Log In button.
If you don’t remember your User Name or Password, you can find them in the Welcome email you received when your store was created.
Admin Login
Part I: Getting Started
37
Chapter 5: Your Back Office
Admin Panel
Admin Panel
All of the commands you need to manage your store are located in the top navigation of the Admin panel. Over time, you’ll learn to use them all!
Dashboard The Dashboard provides an overview of the sales and customer activity on your site. It is usually the first page that appears after you log in to the Admin panel.
Sales Menu The Sales menu is where you can find everything related to processing an order, including current and past orders, invoices, shipments, credit memos, terms and conditions, and taxes.
Catalog Menu The Catalog menu controls everything related to your product catalog, including products, categories, attributes, URL rewrites, search terms and indexing, product reviews, ratings and tags, Google Content and Google Sitemap.
38
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 5: Your Back Office
Admin Panel
Design Menu The Design menu lets you change the design of your store by customizing and applying different themes, editing text, moving blocks, and making code changes with CSS and JavaScript.
Customers Menu The Customers menu lets you manage customer accounts, groups, and gift cards. You can also add new attributes, or specialized fields, to the customer record.
Promotions Menu The Promotions menu lets you set up Catalog and Shopping Cart Price Rules, which trigger an action whenever a set of conditions is met. Rules can be used to extend a discount to a customer group or product, or be based upon the items in the shopping cart.
Part I: Getting Started
39
Chapter 5: Your Back Office
Admin Panel
Newsletter Menu The Newsletter menu is used to manage the list of subscibers to any newsletters you publish.
CMS Menu The CMS menu lets you create new content pages and edit existing ones. In addition, you can create static blocks of content, and set up dynamic frontend apps, such as a rotating banner or list of new products. You can also create polls and monitor the responses.
Reports Menu The Reports menu provides a broad selection of reports on every aspect of your store, including sales, shopping cart, products, customers, reviews, tags, and search terms.
40
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 5: Your Back Office
Admin Panel
System Menu The System menu provides configuration utilities for every aspect of your store. In addition, you can manage your account, set permissions, import/export data, manage email templates, currency and translations, and create additional store views.
Add-Ons The Add-Ons command provides access to the Magento Connect marketplace, where you will find Trusted Extensions for your store.
Part I: Getting Started
41
Chapter 5: Your Back Office
Using the Dashboard
Using the Dashboard
The Dashboard is the first page that appears after you log in to the Admin panel, and gives an overview of your sales and the customer activity on your site.
To set the date range:
Set Select Range to one of the following: Last 24 Hours Last 7 Days Current Month YTD 2YTD
To adjust the scope of the report:
Set Choose Store View to limit the reports to a specific website or store view. (The availability of additional store views is determined by your plan.)
Dashboard
42
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 5: Your Back Office
Using the Dashboard
Sales Charts
The charts at the top of the Dashboard provide a quick snapshot of your orders and amounts, within the specified date range. Orders The Orders tab shows the number of orders during the time range specified. Amounts The Amounts tab shows the revenue during the time range specified. The block below the charts displays the current revenue, quantity, tax, and shipping amounts of your orders.
Summary Reports
The blocks on the left of the Dashboard provide summary information about your lifetime sales, average order amount, last five orders, and search terms. The tabs at the bottom provide quick reports about your best-selling and most viewed products, new customers and those who have purchased the most.
Bestsellers Lists your best-selling products, showing the price and quantity ordered.
Most Viewed Products Lists the most recently viewed products and the number of times viewed.
New Customers Lists recently registered customers.
Customers Lists the customers who have ordered the most during the specified range of time.
Part I: Getting Started
43
Chapter 5: Your Back Office
Using the Dashboard
Dashboard Settings
The Dashboard is displayed by default as the start-up page for the Admin panel. If you prefer, you can change the configuration so you see a different page when you log in. You can also set the starting dates used in Dashboard reports, and disable the display of the charts section.
To set the starting dates: 1. From the Admin panel, go to System > Configuration.
2. Then in Configuration panel on the left, under General, select Reports. 3. In the Dashboard section, do the following:
a. Set Year-To-Date Starts to the month and year that the current year began. b. Set Current Month Starts to the current month.
System > Configuration > Reports > Dashboard
44
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 5: Your Back Office
Using the Dashboard
To change the Admin startup page: 1. From the Admin panel, go to System > Configuration. Then in the
Configuration panel on the left, under Advanced, select Admin.
2. In the Admin UI section, set Startup Page to the page you want to appear
whenever you log in to the Admin Panel.
3. Click the Save Config button to save the setting.
System > Configuration > Advanced > Admin > Admin UI
To use static data:
If you have a lot of data to process, the performance of the Dashboard can be improved by turning off the display of real time data.
1. From the Admin panel, go to System > Configuration. Then in the
Configuration panel on the left, under Sales, select Sales.
2. Click to expand the Dashboard section. Then, set Use Aggregated Data (beta)
to “Yes.”
To disable the chart: 1. From the Admin panel, go to System > Configuration. Then in the
Configuration panel on the left, under Advanced, select Admin.
System > Configuration > Advanced > Admin > Dashboard
2. In the Dashboard section, set Enable Charts to “No.” 3. Click the Save Config button to save the setting.
A message on the Dashboard indicates that the chart is disabled.
Part I: Getting Started
45
Chapter 5: Your Back Office
Updating Your Store Information
Updating Your Store Information
If you completed the Start My Store steps, then you have already entered some of your store settings. Now, you will learn where these settings are located in the Admin panel, so you can complete the configuration. We’ll start from a global perspective to configure your country, language, and time zone, and work our way down to the local level.
Countries Options
1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. On the General page, click to expand the Countries Options section. 3. Set Default Country to the country where your business is located. 4. In the Allow Countries list, select each country from which you accept orders. By
default, all countries in the list are selected. (To select individual countries, hold the Ctrl key down and click each option.)
5. When finished, click the Save Config button.
System > Configuration > General > Countries Options
46
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 5: Your Back Office
Updating Your Store Information
Locale Options
The Locale Options configure your time zone and language, and identify the days of your work week.
1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. On the General page, click to expand the Locale Options section. 3. Select your Timezone from the list. 4. Set Locale to the language for your store. 5. Set First Day of the Week to the day that is considered to be the first day of the
week in your area.
6. In the Weekend Days list, select the days which falls on a weekend in your area.
(Hold the Ctrl key down to select more than one option.)
7. When finished, click the Save Config button.
System > Configuration > General > Locale Options
Part I: Getting Started
47
Chapter 5: Your Back Office
Updating Your Store Information
Currency Setup
Magento Go lets you customize your store for currencies that are used in more than two hundred countries around the world.
1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. On the General page, click to expand the Currency Setup section. 3. Set Base Currency to the primary currency that is used for online transactions. 4. Set Default Display Currency to the currency used to display pricing in your
store.
5. In the Allowed Currencies list, select all currencies you accept. (To select
multiple currencies, hold the Ctrl key down and click each option.)
6. When finished, click the Save Config button.
System > Configuration > General > Currency Setup > Currency Options
48
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 5: Your Back Office
Updating Your Store Information
Currency Rates and Symbols
In addition to setting your accepted currencies, you can also manage currency rates for your store. If accepting payment in currencies from other currencies, it is important to carefully manage currency rates, because they can fluctuate and directly affect your bottom line. Currency rates can be set manually, or imported from the Webservicex Import Service.
To set currency rates: 1. From the Admin panel, select System > Manage Currency > Rates.
The Manage Currency Rates page displays a table with currency rates in relation to your base currency rate (the default currency rate for your store).
2. Do one of the following:
To manually control currency rates, click the field in the column for the currency, and type the changes. An alternative is to import the latest currency rates from Webservicex Import Service by clicking Import. This updates your currency rates to the most current rates.
3. When complete, click the Save Currency Rates button. To customize currency symbols:
Currency symbols are used throughout your store, and appear in product prices, store orders, invoices, and so on.
1. From the Admin panel, select System > Manage Currency > Symbols.
Each enabled currency for your store appears in the Currency list.
2. Enter a custom symbol to use for each currency, or choose the standard symbol
by selecting the Use Standard checkbox to the right of each currency.
3. When complete, click the Save Currency Symbols button.
Part I: Getting Started
49
Chapter 5: Your Back Office
Updating Your Store Information
Store Contact Information
Your store contact information includes the store name and address, telephone number and email addresses. The information appears on email messages, invoices, and other communications sent to your customers.
To complete your store contact information: 1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration.
2. On the General page, click to expand the Store Information section. 3. Type your Store Name, as you want it to appear on customer communications. 4. Type your Store Contact Telephone number, formatted as you want it to appear
on customer communications.
5. In the Store Contact Address box, type the mailing address of your store.
System > Configuration > General > Store Information
50
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 5: Your Back Office
Updating Your Store Information
Store Email Addresses
You can use five different email addresses to represent distinct functions or departments within your business. Each identity and its associated email address can appear as the “sender” of automated email messages which are sent to your customer. In addition to three predefined email identities, there are two additional custom identities that you can set up according to your preference. General Contact Sales Representative Customer Support
To enter your store email addresses: 1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. In the Configuration panel on the left, under General, click Store Email
Addresses.
3. Click to expand the General Contact section. Then, do the following:
a. In the Sender Name box, type the name that you want to appear as the sender of email messages associated with the General Contact identity. b. In the Sender Email box, type the associated email address.
System > Configuration > Store Email Addresses > General Contact
4. Repeat the process to configure the email addresses for the two predefined email
addresses, and the custom email addresses, as needed: Sales Representative Customer Support Custom Email 1 Custom Email 2
5. When complete, click the Save Config button.
To learn more, see: “Managing Email & Newsletters,” on page 137.
Part I: Getting Started
51
Chapter 5: Your Back Office
Configuring the Contact Us Form
Configuring the Contact Us Form
The Contact Us link in the footer of the page provides an easy way for customers to contact you. The form is enabled by default, but can be configured to send inquiries to a specific email address, and to reply from a specific identity.
Contact Us Form
52
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 5: Your Back Office
Configuring the Contact Us Form
To configure the Contact Us form: 1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. In the Configuration panel on the left, under General, click Contacts. 3. Click to expand the Email Options section. Then, do the following:
a. Enter the email address that the Contact form should Send Emails To. b. Set Email Sender to the identity you want to use for any replies sent in response to inquiries you receive. c. Select the Email Template that is used to format the data that you receive from the form.
System > Configuration > General > Contacts > Email Options
Part I: Getting Started
53
Chapter 5: Your Back Office
Managing Permissions
Managing Permissions
Magento Go uses roles and permissions to provide different levels of access to the Admin panel. Each person who needs access to the Admin panel is assigned a role and set of permissions which determines the level of access. The number of Admin accounts that you can create is determined by your plan. When your store is first set up, the login credentials you receive have full permissions. However, you can restrict the level of permissions for other people who work on your site. For example, a designer can be given access to only the Design area of the site, and not to areas that contain customer and sales information. When the designer logs in to the Admin panel, the first page displayed will be the Theme Editor, rather than the Dashboard. As a security measure, user accounts are locked after six failed attempts to log in. The account can be unlocked by another user who has Administrator permissions.
Creating an Admin User
As a best practice, you should have more than one user account that has full Administrator permissions. That way, you can use one account for your everyday Administrative activities, and reserve the other as a “Super Admin” account.
System > Permissions > Users
54
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 5: Your Back Office
Managing Permissions
To create an additional Admin account: 1. From the Admin panel, select System > Permissions > Users. 2. Click the Add New User button.
System > Permissions > Users – Account Info
3. In the Account Information section, do the following:
a. Enter the User Name for account. The User Name should be something easy to remember, and is not casesensitive. b. Complete the following information: First Name Last Name Email address This email address must differ from the one associated with your original Admin account. c. Assign the Password for the account. The password should be seven or more characters long, and include both letters and numbers. d. In the Password Confirmation box, repeat the password to make sure it was entered correctly.
4. Set This Account is to “Active.”
Part I: Getting Started
55
Chapter 5: Your Back Office
Managing Permissions
5. In the User Information panel on the left, click User Role. Then, in the list of
Roles, select Administrators. (Initially, it will be the only role available.)
Permissions: Users – Add New, User Role
6. When complete, click the Save User button.
You now have two accounts with Administrator permissions.
Creating a Custom Role
To give someone restricted access, the first step is to create a role with the appropriate level of permissions. After the role is created, you will add the new user, set up the login credentials, and assign the role to the user account.
System > Permissions > Roles
Step 1:
Define the Role
1. From the Admin panel, select System > Permissions > Roles. 2. Click the Add New Role button. 3. In the Role Name box, type a descriptive name for the new role.
Permissions: Roles - Role Name
56
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 5: Your Back Office
Managing Permissions
4. In the Role Information panel on the left, click Role Resources. 5. Set Role Access to “Custom.” Then in the Resources tree, select the checkbox of
each area of the Admin panel that you a person with this role to have access.
System > Permissions > Roles - Role Resources
6. When complete, click the Save Role button.
Step 2:
Add the New User
1. From the Admin panel, select System > Permissions > Users. 2. Click the Add New User button. 3. In the Account Information section, do the following:
a. Assign a User Name for the account. The User Name should be something easy to remember, and is not casesensitive. b. Complete the following information: First Name Last Name Email address
c. Assign the Password for the account. The password should be seven or more characters long, and include both letters and numbers. d. In the Password Confirmation box, repeat the password to make sure it was entered correctly.
Part I: Getting Started
57
Chapter 5: Your Back Office
Managing Permissions
4. Set This Account is to “Active.” 5. In the User Information panel on the left, click User Role. Then, in the list of
Roles, select the option for the role you want to assign to the new user.
Permissions: Users – Add New, User Role
6. When complete, click the Save User button.
Unlocking User Accounts
For the security of your site, a user account will be locked after six failed attempts to log in to the Admin panel. The account can be unlocked by any other user with full Administrator permissions.
To unlock a user: 1. From the Admin panel, select System > Permissions > Locked.
Any locked user accounts appear in the list.
2. In the list, select the checkbox of the locked account. 3. Set the Actions list in the upper-right corner of the list to “Unlock.”
Permissions > Locked: Action - Unlock
4. Click the Submit button to unlock the user account.
58
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 5: Your Back Office
Multiple Store Views
Multiple Store Views
Magento Go lets you create up to three separate views of your store, according to the capabilities of your plan. Usually, store views are used to offer support for multiple languages, but they can also be used to target a specific demographic. If your current plan supports only one language, you will need to upgrade your plan before you can create multiple store views. For more information, see: “Upgrading Your Plan,” on page 28.
System > Configuration > Manage Stores
To create a store view: 1. From the Admin panel, select System > Manage Stores. 2. Click the Create Store View button to display the New Store View page. 3. Under Store View Information, complete the following fields:
a. Set Store to “Main Store.” b. In the Name field, assign a meaningful name to the store view. c. If using the store view for a language, you can use the store language for the name. (For example, Spanish.) d. In the Store Code field, assign a meaningful code to identify the store. e. Set Status to “Enable” to activate the store view. f. (Optional) In the Sort Order field, enter a number to determine the sequence in which this view appears when listed with other views.
4. Click the Save Store View button to save your changes.
Part I: Getting Started
59
Chapter 5: Your Back Office
Multiple Store Views
Understanding Store Scope
If your Magento Go site has multiple stores or views, you can set the scope of a configuration setting, product, category, or attribute, to apply to a specific store or view. The scope provides context for the configuration setting. The “Choose Store View” list box in the upper-left corner of most pages is used to set the configuration scope for items on that page. If an admin user’s access is restricted to a specific store or view, the list includes only the areas they have permission to access.
Choose Store View on Dashboard
60
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 5: Your Back Office
Changing the Store Language
Changing the Store Language
You can instantly translate a store view by changing the locale. Changing the “locale” doesn’t actually translate the text word-for-word, but references a different translation table that is used to generate the text displayed throughout the site. After changing the locale, you can fine-tune the translation by using the Theme Text Editor to make additional changes. To learn more, see the Magento Go Design Guide.
To change the locale of a view: 1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. In the upper-left corner, set the Current Configuration Scope to the store
view that needs to be translated.
3. On the General configuration page, click to expand the Locale Options
section.
Locale Options
4. Set Locale to the new language for the store view. 5. Click Save to save your changes.
To learn more, see: “Changing the Locale,” on page 517.
Part I: Getting Started
61
Chapter 5: Your Back Office
Changing the Store Language
Changing the Default Store View
The Manage Stores tool allows you to choose the view that is used for the primary store. Customers can then switch from the primary view to another.
To change the default store view: 1. From the Admin panel, select System > Manage Stores. 2. In the Manage Stores list, click to open the store view you would like to use as
your default store view. Then, do the following: a. Set Root Category to the category you want to use as the default for all stores. Note: Currently Magento Go supports one root category per store. The selected root category becomes the default for all store views. To learn more, see: “Top Navigation,” on page 179. b. Set Default Store View to the store view you want to use as the default. If you are using Store Views for different languages, the Default Store View will determine the default language of your store.
3. Click the Save Store button to save your changes.
62
Magento Go User Guide
CHAPTER 6:
Customer Accounts
Visitors to your site are encouraged to register and open an account with your store. The header of every page extends an invitation to “Log in or register” and provides a “quick access” link to the account Login page. Faster Checkout
Registered customers move through checkout faster, because much of the information needed to process the order is already in their accounts. You can specify whether you want to require customers to register before making a purchase, or will accept purchases from “guests.” Ability to Self-Serve
Registered customers can update their information, check the status of orders, and even reorder from their Account Dashboard. Build Your “House List”
You can use information from customer accounts, including order history, to create customer groups, targeted mailings, and price rules.
Customer Account Dashboard
Part I: Getting Started
63
Chapter 6: Customer Accounts
Changing the Store Language
Customer Accounts
You can configure your store to allow unregistered customers to make purchases as guests, or require that they register to create an account. Registered customers can move through checkout faster, and track the status of their orders.
Customer Account Login
To set your guest checkout preference: 1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. In the Configuration panel on the left, under Sales, select Checkout. 3. Click to expand the Checkout Options section. 4. Then, set Allow Guest Checkout to your preference. 5. Click the Save Config button to save your setting.
Checkout Options
64
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 6: Customer Accounts
Customer Login Options
Customer Login Options
To streamline the experience for customers who log in to their accounts, you can offer the convenience of PayPal Access and choose which page to display when they log in to their accounts. Enable PayPal Access PayPal Access lets your customers use information that is already in their PayPal account when opening a new account with your store. This means less typing and fewer passwords to remember, which is good! First Page After Login When customers first log in to their account, you have the option to display their Account Dashboard, or to let them continue shopping. It’s a matter of preference. Displaying the Account Dashboard can help customers to become familiar with the features available through their accounts.
To configure the customer login options: 1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. In the Configuration panel on the left, under Customers, select Customer
Configuration.
3. Click to expand the Login Options section, and do the following: 4. To Enable Log in with PayPal Access, select “Yes.” 5. To Redirect Customer to Account Dashboard after Logging in, select “Yes.” 6. Click the Save Config button to save your settings.
System > Configuration > Customers: Customer Configuration – Login Options
Part I: Getting Started
65
Chapter 6: Customer Accounts
Customer Login Options
PayPal Access
PayPal is the world leader in online payment solutions, used by over 100 million customers and accepted by millions of stores worldwide. Magento Go and PayPal have joined forces to bring you PayPal Access—a streamlined registration process that makes it easier than ever for people to open an account with your store. When customers with PayPal Access register with your store, they no longer have to type their address or contact information, because it is read directly from their PayPal account. Benefits for you: Streamlined sign-up and checkout Access to 100M active, verified accounts Enhances merchant credibility
Benefits for your customers: Fewer forms to complete Fewer passwords to remember Easier to register with your store
PayPal Access gives your customers an easier and faster way to register with your store and access their accounts.
How It Looks to Your Customers
When you enable PayPal Access for your Magento Go store, the following changes take place:
Header:
The PayPal Access login button appears in the header, after the Welcome message and “Log In or register” links.
PayPal Access Login
66
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 6: Customer Accounts
Customer Login Options
Create an Account Page:
The “Create an Account” page now invites customers to log in with PayPal and skip the registration!
Create an Account
Log In Page:
The “Login or Create an Account” page includes a new option to “Log In Using Your PayPal Access Account.”
Login or Create an Account
Part I: Getting Started
67
Chapter 6: Customer Accounts
Customer Login Options
Account Dashboard:
The Account Dashboard gives customers the ability to link or unlink their store accounts to their PayPal accounts.
Account Dashboard
Checkout Process:
When customers proceed to checkout, they are invited to “Log In Using Your PayPal Access Account.”
Checkout Process
68
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 6: Customer Accounts
Customer Login Options
Setting Up PayPal Access
It is easy to set up PayPal Access for your Magento Go store. Here’s how:
To enable PayPal Access: 1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. In the Configuration panel on the left, under Customers, select Customer
Configuration.
3. Click to expand the Login Options section. 4. Set Enable Log in with PayPal Access to “Yes.” 5. Click the Save Config button to save your changes.
For the most current information about the full range of PayPal services for Magento Go merchants, see: “Understanding PayPal” in our Knowledge Base.
Part I: Getting Started
69
Chapter 6: Customer Accounts
Setting Up Customer Groups
Setting Up Customer Groups
Customer groups give you the ability to offer different pricing and promotions to customers based upon their demographic or order history. Each customer is initially assigned to one of the following default customer groups: General Not Logged In Retailer
You can create, modify and manage these groups to fit your needs and strategy.
To create a Customer Group: 1. From the Admin panel, select Customers > Customer Groups.
Customers > Customer Groups
2. Click the Add New Customer Group button. Then in the Group Information
section, do the following: a. Enter a descriptive Group Name. For example: Wholesaler b. Select an appropriate Tax Class for the group.
Group Information
3. Click the Save Customer Group button to save your configuration.
70
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 6: Customer Accounts
Creating a Customer Account
Creating a Customer Account
Customers usually create their own accounts from your store. However, you can also create customer accounts directly from the Admin panel, which is useful for customers who prefer to order by phone.
To create a customer: 1. From the Admin panel, choose Customers > Manage Customers. 2. Click the Add New button.
Customers > Manage Customers
3. In the Associate to Website list, select one of the following:
Admin Main Website
You can associate a customer to the Admin website to require that orders are placed only through the Admin panel. Customers associated with the Admin website cannot log in to their accounts from the store.
4. Assign the customer to a Customer Group.
Tip: To change the Default Group assignment, select System > Configuration > [CUSTOMERS] > Customer Configuration and assign a new Customer Group in Default Group.
5. Complete the rest of the customer information.
Part I: Getting Started
71
Chapter 6: Customer Accounts
Creating a Customer Account
Customer Information
6. In the Password Management section, do one of the following:
Manually assign a password. Select the Send auto-generated password checkbox to generate a random password after the customer information is saved.
Password Management
7. Select the Save and Continue Edit button to save the customer settings.
72
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 6: Customer Accounts
Creating a Customer Account
Adding a Customer Address
To add an address to a customer: 1. Select Addresses tab on left column and complete the customer Address
information.
2. Assign a Default Address to this new address by checking either Default Billing
Address or Default Shipping Address to the right.
3. To add a new address, click Add New Address in Customer Addresses box.
Follow steps as above and assign a default address if needed.
4. Click the Save Customer button to save your changes.
Customer Information - Addresses
Part I: Getting Started
73
Chapter 6: Customer Accounts
Creating a Customer Account
Notes:
_______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________
74
Magento Go User Guide
Part II: Design & Content
CHAPTER 7:
Themes and Page Layout
Magento Go includes a growing library of professionally-designed themes which you can use “off the shelf,” or customize to suit your needs. In this chapter, you will learn the basics of page layout, how to preview and apply a theme, and brand your store and email messages with your logo. Understanding Page Layout Choosing a Theme Adding Logos
To learn more about customizing themes, see the Magento Go Design Guide.
Design > Themes Editor
Part II: Design & Content
77
Chapter 7: Themes and Page Layout
Understanding Page Layout
Understanding Page Layout
Each page of your store has a fixed header and footer, with a content area that is divided into one, two, or three columns. The manner in which page layouts are used throughout your store is determined by the theme. In addition, you can apply different layouts to any content page you create, including your home page.
1 Column The “1 Column” layout can be used to create a dramatic home page with a large image or focal point. It’s also a good choice for any content page that has a large amount of text, or a combination of text, images, and video. A single-column layout can give the appearance of multiple columns if the text is formatted into columns using HTML and CSS.
2 Columns with Left Bar The “2 Columns with Left Bar” layout is often used for pages with navigation on the left, such as a catalog or search results pages with “layered navigation.” It is also an excellent choice for home pages that need additional navigation, or blocks of supporting content on the left.
78
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 7: Themes and Page Layout
Understanding Page Layout
2 Columns with Right Bar The “2 Columns with Right Bar” layout is the one that is used for the home page examples in this guide. The main content area is large enough for an eye-catching image or banner. This layout is also often used for Product View pages that have blocks of supporting content on the right.
3 Columns The “3 Column” layout has a center column that is wide enough for a column of text, with room on each side for additional navigation and blocks of supporting content. The Customer Service page in the sample data is based on the 3 Column layout. (You will find a link to that page in the footer of your store.)
Part II: Design & Content
79
Chapter 7: Themes and Page Layout
Understanding Page Layout
Home Page Layout
The Home page that is featured in this guide is based on the “Modern Theme,” with a “2 Columns with Right Bar” layout. It’s a clean design, but the logo uses space which might otherwise be available for the top navigation. When choosing a theme, look for the best use of space for the content you want to display. Colors, fonts, and styles can all be changed, but the column layouts are fixed templates that determine how the space in the content area is allocated, although the column position and widths can be modified in the CSS Editor. To learn more about page layout and theme customization, see the Magento Go Design Guide.
“2 Column with Right Bar” Layout
80
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 7: Themes and Page Layout
Choosing a Theme
Choosing a Theme
You can preview any theme using the actual content from your store, without interrupting the operation of your site. While in Preview mode, you can explore each menu and option. Make sure to examine every page to see how items are arranged within the space. Note: To preview a theme, your browser must be set to allow pop-ups.
To preview a theme: 1. From the Admin panel, select Design > Themes Editor.
Design > Themes Editor
2. Click the Preview link below the thumbnail image of any theme. A preview
window opens to show how the theme looks when applied to your store.
Part II: Design & Content
81
Chapter 7: Themes and Page Layout
Choosing a Theme
Previewing the “Texture” Theme
3. To try a different theme, select its name from the Change Theme list in the
upper-left corner of the page, and click the Change Theme button.
4. To close the preview window, click the Quit Preview button at the top of the
page.
5. When you find a theme you want to try, make a copy that you can edit.
a. Click the Duplicate link below the thumbnail image of the theme you want to copy. b. Enter a new Theme Name and Description if you like, and click the Save button. A new copy of the theme you have chosen, called by the name you have assigned, appears in the left column under My Customizations. This is now your working copy of the theme.
82
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 7: Themes and Page Layout
Choosing a Theme
Changing the Current Theme
To apply the new theme to your store: 1. From the Theme Editor, under Current Theme, scroll down to the My
Customizations section.
2. Under the thumbnail image of your theme, click Apply.
Your new theme now appears at the top of the list under Current Theme.
3. To see the new theme in your store, open a new tab or browser window and type
your store URL in the address bar. If you have a standard domain such as mystore, type this: http://mystore.gostorego.com If you have a custom domain such as mystore.com, type this: http://www.mystore.com If the new theme doesn’t immediately appear, press the Refresh (F5) button.
Applying a Theme
Part II: Design & Content
83
Chapter 7: Themes and Page Layout
Adding Your Logos
Adding Your Logos
Your Magento Go store uses three different logo files. The first appears in the header of your store, the second on email messages sent from your store, and the third is the favicon in the address bar of your browser. To achieve the best resolution, it’s best to upload your logo images at their actual display size, rather than resize them in the code. If you want to use the exact size of the sample logo in a theme, you can right-click the logo to find the exact width and height of the image. The information is listed under Properties. You can also use the CSS Editor to modify the dimensions and relative position of the logo, if necessary. For more information, see the Magento Go Design Guide.
Header Logo
Your store logo appears in the upper-left header of your store with a clickable link back to your home page. The general size and position of the store logo file is determined by the theme.
To upload the Header logo: 1. From the Theme Editor, under Current Theme, scroll down to the My
Customizations section.
2. Under the thumbnail image of your theme, click Customize. 3. In the Theme Customization panel on the left, click Design Settings Editor.
Theme Customization: Design Settings Editor - Header Settings
84
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 7: Themes and Page Layout
Adding Your Logos
Adding Alt Text
The Alt text that is associated with an image appears whenever a visitor to your site hovers over the image with their mouse. The text is indexed by search engines, and also improves the accessibility of your site for people who use screen readers. It’s a best practice to include Alt text for each image on your site.
Logo Image Alt Text
To add Alt text to your logo: 1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. In the Configuration panel on the left, under General, select Design. 3. Click to expand the Header section. 4. Type the Logo Image Alt text that you want to appear whenever someone hovers
over your logo.
System > Configuration > General > Design > Header
5. Click the Save Config button.
Part II: Design & Content
85
Chapter 7: Themes and Page Layout
Adding Your Logos
Email Logo
This logo appears at the top of automated email messages sent to customers. These messages are referred to as “transactional emails” and are based on templates. To learn more, see: “Adding a New Email Template,” on page 138.
To upload your Email logo: 1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. In the Configuration panel on the left, under Design, select Transactional
Emails.
System > Configuration > Design > Transactional Emails
3. Click the Browse button and select the Logo Image from your computer. 4. In the Logo Image Alt field, type the Alt text you want to use for the image. 5. When complete, click the Save Config button.
Logo Image on Transactional Email
86
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 7: Themes and Page Layout
Adding Your Logos
Favicon
The favicon (short for favorite icon) is the little icon in your browser address bar before the URL. The favicon also appears on the tab of each browser page. By default, the Magento logo is the favicon that appears in your Magento Go store.
Default Magento Favicon
Favicons are generally 16x16 pixels or 32x32 pixels in size. Although Magento accepts .ico, .png, .jpg, .jpeg, .apng and .svg file types, not all browsers support these formats. The safest format to use for a favicon file is an .ico. Many free favicon converter tools are available online to convert other, more common image types, like .pngs, .gifs, and .jpegs to the .ico format. Because Magento Go does not convert an image from one format to another, any file conversion should take place before the file is uploaded to your store.
Step 1:
Create a favicon
1. Create a 16x16 or 32x32 graphic image of our logo, using in the image editor of
your choice.
2. Use one of the available online tools to convert the image to the .ico format.
Name the file “favicon.ico” and save it to your computer.
Step 2:
Upload the favicon to your store
1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. In the Configuration panel on the left, under General, select Design. Then, click
to expand the HTML Head section.
3. In the Favicon Icon field, click the Browse button to find your favicon file. 4. Click the Save Config button to save your changes.
Part II: Design & Content
87
Chapter 7: Themes and Page Layout
Adding Your Logos
Notes:
_______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________
88
Magento Go User Guide
CHAPTER 8:
Creating Content
The old adage, “content is king” is as true now as ever. The quality of your content helps distinguish your store from others, increases your visibility to search engines, provides support to your customers, and gives them more reason to come back. Your content should reflect the branding of your store, including both the visual presentation and the voice that is used to convey your message. Your Magento Go store includes a powerful content management system (CMS) that is used to create and maintain the information that is available on your site. To help you get started, your store has several sample pages and blocks of content, which you can modify with your own information, or replace with others of your own design. Pages Content pages appear in the main content area of your site, according to the column layout of the page. A page can be linked to other pages, and incorporated into the navigation of your site. You can organize your content pages into hierarchy with menus and navigation. Each page has a URL that appears in the address bar of the browser. Content pages are indexed by search engines, and can be leveraged to improve the visibility of your store. Blocks A block is a chunk of information that can be included on a page, or positioned in a column to the left or right of the main content area of a page. A block can include static information such as text, images, video, and dynamic information such as data from your catalog.
Part II: Design & Content
89
Chapter 8: Creating Content
Sample Content Pages
Sample Content Pages
Magento Go comes with several default content pages that you can use to get started. At the very least, you will need to update the Home, About Us, and Customer Service pages to replace the sample data with content that is suitable for your store. The other pages do not contain sample data, but can be improved by incorporating the visual presentation and voice of your brand.
Home This sample Home page is based on the “2 columns with right bar” layout. The main content area of this page includes a static image and a dynamic list of new products.
About Us This sample About Us page is based on the “1 column” layout, but uses HTML to create three columns of text. You can use this page as a template, or try a different approach. By default, a link to the About Us page appears in the footer of your store.
Customer Service This sample Customer Service page is based on the “3-columns” layout, and can be used as a template for your own information. By default, a link to the Customer Services page appears in the footer of your store.
90
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 8: Creating Content
Sample Content Pages
Page Not Found The “404” Page Not Found page is based on the “2 columns with left bar” layout, and is named for the response code that is returned when a page cannot be found. This page appears if there is a broken link on your site, or if a URL to a page no longer exists.
Enable Cookies The Enable Cookies page appears if a visitor to your site does not have cookies enabled for their browser. The page provides step-by-step, illustrated instructions to enable cookies for the most popular browsers. The page is based on the “1 column” layout.
Service Unavailable The “503” Service Unavailable page is named for the response code that is returned when a server is unavailable. This page can be set to appear when your store is in Maintenance Mode.
Part II: Design & Content
91
Chapter 8: Creating Content
Editing a Content Page
Editing a Content Page
All content pages on your site use HTML tags to format the text. Unlike a word processor, Magento Go’s content editor inserts the proper codes directly into the text, even if you don't know HTML. You can work in the “what you see is what you get” text mode, or directly with the HTML. The Show/Hide Editor button lets you toggle between the two modes. If you don’t yet know HTML, you can learn some basic coding by using the editor. The toolbar of the editor provides a rich assortment of formatting options and tools. For the complete list of toolbar buttons, see: Editor Toolbar Buttons on page 447.
To edit an existing content page: 1. From the Admin panel, select CMS > Pages > Manage Content. 2. In the Manage Pages list, click to select the page you want to edit.
CMS > Pages > Manage Content
92
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 8: Creating Content
Editing a Content Page
3. In the Page Information panel on the left, select Content. The page appears in
the content editor.
CMS > Pages > Manage Content > Content
4. If you prefer to work in full screen mode, click the Fullscreen button. Click the
button again to return to the content editor.
Fullscreen Button
5. From the content editor, click the Show/Hide Editor button to view the code.
Then, click the button again to return to the content editor.
Part II: Design & Content
93
Chapter 8: Creating Content
Editing a Content Page
Underlying HTML Code
6. In the Content Heading box, type the text that you want to use as the main
heading at the top of the page. This text is tagged with the HTML heading level 1 (<h1>). The format of the <h1> tag is determined by the CSS stylesheet that is associated with the page. By default, the editor uses the CSS stylesheet from the current theme.
7. Click the Preview button to see how the page appears when published to your
site. Then, close the Preview window to return to the content editor.
Preview Page
94
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 8: Creating Content
Editing a Content Page
The sample “About Us” page is based on a 1-column layout, but uses HTML to create a three-column format. If you like the layout of this page, you can carefully type over the text, without interfering with the underlying code.
8. Complete your content, using the formatting buttons in the toolbar, as you would
with any text editor.
9. Because this page is live on your site, click the Preview button to check the
content and formatting before saving your changes. Then, close the Preview window to return to the content editor.
10. When the page is complete, click the Save button. The updated page is
immediately published to your store.
Part II: Design & Content
95
Chapter 8: Creating Content
Creating a New Page
Creating a New Page
The process of adding a new content page to your store is essentially the same for any type of page you create. Any page can include static text, images, and blocks, and dynamic frontend apps and banners. In addition, you can use Page Hierarchy to provide structure and navigation for your body of content. A Privacy Policy is one of the first content pages you should create. When the page is ready, you can include it as a link in the footer of your store.
Step 1:
Add a New Page
1. From the Admin panel, select CMS > Pages > Manage Content. 2. Click the Add New Page button. 3. In the Page Information section, do the following:
a. Enter a Title for the new page. b. Enter a URL Key for the page that is based upon the Title. It should be all lowercase characters, with hyphens instead of spaces. The URL Key is added to the base URL for your store, to create the online address for the page. c. In the Store View list, select each view where this page will be available. d. Set Status to “Disabled.” (This will be changed when the page is ready to publish.) e. Set Under Version Control to one of the following: Yes: To keep a backup of previous versions of the page, named New Page 1, New page 2, and so on. No: To write over previous version of the page.
Note: This option is set to “Yes” by default. If you make frequent changes, we recommend setting this to “No” to avoid creating multiple copies which are only slightly different from each other.
96
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 8: Creating Content
Creating a New Page
Add New Page: Page Information
4. With the required fields complete, click the Save and Continue Edit button.
Step 2:
Select the Page Layout
1. In the Page Information panel on the left, select Design. 2. In the Page Layout section, set Layout to one of the following:
1 column 2 columns with left bar 2 columns with right bar 3 columns
Page Information: Page Layout
Part II: Design & Content
97
Chapter 8: Creating Content
Creating a New Page
Step 3:
Complete the Content
1. In the Page Information panel on the left, select Content. 2. In the Content Heading box, type the text you want to appear as the main
heading at the top of the page.
3. Complete the remaining content, as you want it to appear in the main content
column, according to the page layout selected. The content can include text, images, video and audio, banners, and lists of dynamic data. For more information on the range of possibilities, see the Magento Go Design Guide.
4. To insert an image, do the following:
a. Click the Show / Hide Editor button to view the code. Then, click the Insert Image button. b. From Media Storage, click the Browse Files button. c. Find the image on your computer, and click the Upload Files button. The image appears in Media Storage.
Media Storage: Insert File
d. Click the thumbnail of the image and click the Insert File button. The required code appears in the edit box. The image code is inserted into the HTML of the page.
98
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 8: Creating Content
Creating a New Page
Insert Image (Code View)
5. Click the Show / Hide Editor button to return to the content editor, where the
image appears in relation to the rest of the content on the page.
6. Complete the content, and preview your work as needed. 7. Click the Save and Continue Edit button.
Step 4:
Complete the Meta Data
1. In the Page Information panel on the left, select Meta Data. 2. Complete the Keywords and Description for the page. This information is used
by search engines to index the page.
Page Information: Meta Data
Part II: Design & Content
99
Chapter 8: Creating Content
Creating a New Page
Step 5:
Publish the Page
1. In the Page Information panel on the left, select Page Information. 2. Set Status to “Published.” 3. Click the Save Page button.
Changing the Home Page
Your Home page is like the front window of your store, and should showcase both your brand and your merchandise. You can experiment with different column layouts and content, and create Home pages that change with the season.
1. To make a page appear as the Home page of your store, do the following:
a. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. b. In the Configuration panel on the left under General, select Web. c. In the Default Pages section, set CMS Home Page to your new page.
System > Configuration > Web: Default Pages
2. Click the Save Config button to save the setting.
The new page is now the Home page for your store.
100
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 8: Creating Content
Using the Editor
Using the Editor
Magento Go provides an easy way to create and format content without having to learn or write any HTML or CSS code. The Editor gives you the ability to create and edit HTML code while working in a “What You See Is What You Get” view of the content. When working in the product catalog, the Editor is accessed by clicking the WYSIWYG Editor button.
Inserting Links
One of the best things you can do to improve the indexing of your site by search engines is to create internal links to other content pages in your site. In addition, you might want to provide a link to an outside site, as well. When you offer a link to an outside site, you should set the link to open in a new window, so the visitor doesn’t leave your store.
To create a link: 1. Highlight the text where you want to create the link. Then, in the Editor toolbar,
click the Link button.
Link Button
2. In the Link URL field, type the web address of the page to be linked. 3. Set Target to one of the following:
Open link in the same window Open in a new window
4. In the Title field, enter the tooltip text that appears when someone hovers over
the link.
5. Click the Insert button to create the link.
Part II: Design & Content
101
Chapter 8: Creating Content
Using the Editor
Inserting Images
You can insert a link to an image that resides on another server, or link to an image from your store’s Media Storage library.
Method 1: Link to an Online Image
Use this method to link to an image that is available online, but resides on another server. You must have the URL of the image to complete the process.
1. Position your cursor in the text where you want the image to appear. 2.
In the Editor toolbar, click the Insert Image button.
Insert Image Button
3. In the Image URL field, paste the full Web address to the image. 4. In the Image Description field, write a brief description of the image. 5. In the Title field, write a relevant title for the image. 6. Click the Insert button to complete the process.
Method 2: Link to an Image in Media Storage
1. From the Editor, click the Show / Hide Editor button to display the content in
Code view.
2. Position the cursor where you want the code to be inserted. Then, click the Insert
Image button.
3. To upload a new image to Media Storage, do the following:
a. Click the Browse Files button. Then, find the file on your computer. b. Find the file on your computer. Click to select it, and click the Open button to copy the file name to Media Storage. c. Click the Upload File button to add the image to Media Storage.
102
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 8: Creating Content
Using the Editor
4. To insert a HTML link to the file, click to select the image. Then, click the Insert
File button.
Media Storage: Insert File
The code is inserted as a Dynamic Media URL, and looks something like this: <img src="{{media url="go-logo_1.png"}}" alt="" />
5. To complete the Alt tag, position the cursor between the double-quotes, and type
the text.
6. To return to the Editor, click the Show / Hide Editor button.
Part II: Design & Content
103
Chapter 8: Creating Content
Using the Editor
Embedding Video
You can easily embed links to videos into your content pages. This example shows how to use the Media button in the Editor toolbar to embed a YouTube video in a content page.
To embed video: 1. From the Editor, click the Insert Media button.
Insert Media button
2. In the File/URL field, type the URL to the media file you want to embed. For
example, it could be a link to a YouTube video.
3. Click the Insert button to complete the process.
Embedded Video
104
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 8: Creating Content
Organizing Your Pages
Organizing Your Pages
Magento Go’s Page Hierarchy system gives you the ability to organize your content pages and add pagination, navigation, and menus. If you plan to publish large amounts of content on a regular basis, you can use Page Hierarchy to help you manage the content, and make it easy for people to find articles of interest. Page hierarchy can be managed from an individual CMS page and also by using the Manage Page Hierarchy command.
CMS > Pages > Manage Hierarchy
Adding Nodes
A node is a reference that identifies related pieces of content, and is used to organize content pages into a structure of parent/child relationships. A parent node is like a folder which can contain child nodes and pages. The relative position of each node and page in the hierarchy is shown as a tree on the left side of the Manage Pages Hierarchy page. A node can contain other nodes and content pages, and a single content page can be associated with multiple nodes and other content pages. The following example shows how to create a node with simple navigation to content pages. Although the node does not have a content page associated with it, it does have a URL Key which can be referenced elsewhere in your site. For example, you can create a node called “Press Releases” with navigation to individual press releases. Then, include the link on your About Us page.
Part II: Design & Content
105
Chapter 8: Creating Content
Organizing Your Pages
Step 1:
Create a Node
1. From the Admin panel, select CMS > Pages > Manage Hierarchy. 2. Click the Add Node button. 3. In the Page Properties section, type a Title for the node. Then create a suitable
URL Key using all lowercase characters, with hyphens instead of spaces.
4. Click the Save Pages Hierarchy button to save the node. The node appears as a
folder in the tree.
Step 2:
Add Pages to the Node
1. In the hierarchy tree, click to open the node. 2. Scroll down to the CMS pages section, and select the checkbox of each page you
want to include.
Add Selected Pages to Tree
3. Click the Add Selected Pages(s) to Tree button. Each selected page appears in
the tree below the node folder.
Hierarchy Tree with Node and Associated Pages
106
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 8: Creating Content
Organizing Your Pages
Step 3:
Add Navigation
1. In the tree, click to open the node. 2. In the Pagination Options for Nested Pages section, set Enable Pagination to
“Yes.”
3. In the Navigation Menu Options section, and set Enable Navigation Menu to
“Yes.”
4. Scroll back up to the Node Properties section, and click the Preview link.
Previewing the Node with Menu and Page Navigation
5. Click the Save Pages Hierarchy button to save the settings. Node Properties
Setting Title Description (Required) The Title of the node appears in the browser tab and title bar of the page. (Required) The URL key becomes part of the address to the page. Click this link to preview the page.
URL Key
Preview
Part II: Design & Content
107
Chapter 8: Creating Content
Organizing Your Pages
Render Metadata in HTML Head
Setting First Description Identifies this as the first page in the collection. Options include: Yes / No. Determines if links to the next and previous pages are displayed. Options include: Yes / No. Enables chapter and section divisions. A section appears only for top-level nodes and pages, and defines the hierarchy for SEO. Options include: Yes / No. Identifies this as a chapter or section. Options include: Yes / No.
Next/Previous
Enable Chapter/Section
Chapter/Section
Pagination Options for Nested Pages
Setting Enable Pagination Description Enables pagination for nested pages. Options include: Frame Use Parent Yes No
Determines how many links are displayed at once. If the current frame doesn’t include links to all available pages, creates a link from the current position to the next group of pages, plus or minus this value.
Frame Skip
Navigation Menu Options
Setting Enable Navigation Menu Description Displays a side navigation panel for
108
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 8: Creating Content
Organizing Your Pages
Setting
Description content pages in the hierarchy. Options include: Yes / No.
Menu Layout
Determines where the navigation menu appears. Options include: Use Default Content Left Column Right Column
Menu Detalization
Determines the pages included in the navigation menu. Options include: Only Children: Includes only subpages in the navigation. Neighbors and Children: Includes subpages and co-existing pages.
Maximal Depth
Determines the number of node levels included in the navigation menu. Determines whether the menu is based on a bulleted or numbered list. Options include: Unordered (bullet) Ordered (numbered)
List Type
List Style
Determines the style of bullet used for unordered lists, and the number style for ordered lists. Options include: Default Circle, Disc, Square Ordered list options include: Numbers (1, 2, 3, …) Lower Alpha (a, b, c, …) Upper Alpha (A, B, C, …) Lower Roman (i, ii, iii, …) Upper Roman (I, II, III, …)
Part II: Design & Content
109
Chapter 8: Creating Content
Organizing Your Pages
Page Hierarchy Configuration
The basic operation of Page Hierarchy is determined by your system configuration. Here’s where to look to change the basic settings:
To configure the page hierarchy settings: 1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. In the Configuration panel on the left, under General, select Content
Management.
3. Click to expand the CMS Page Hierarchy section, and make any changes that are
necessary.
System > Configuration > General > Content Management: CMS Page Hierarchy
4. Click to expand the CMS Versioning section, and make any changes necessary. 5. Click the Save Config button to save your changes.
Setting Enable Hierarchy Functionality Description Enables the use of page hierarchy. Options include: Yes / No Lets you associate meta data with pages in the hierarchy. Options include: Yes / No Determines the default menu style. Options include: Content Left Column Right Column
Enable Hierarchy Metadata
Default Layout for Hierarchy Menu
110
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 8: Creating Content
Creating Blocks of Content
Creating Blocks of Content
Magento Go gives you the ability to create blocks of content that can be used throughout your store. Static blocks can be added to any page, or group of pages, and used as a Frontend App. To learn more, see the Magento Go Design Guide.
To create a static block: 1. From the Admin panel, select CMS > Static Blocks. 2. Click the Add New Block button. Then, do the following:
a. Assign a descriptive Block Title. b. Assign a unique Identifier to the block. Use all lowercase characters, with underscores instead of spaces. The identifier is used for internal reference. c. Select the Store View(s) where this content block will be visible. d. Set Status to “Enabled” to make the block visible in the store. e. Complete the Content for the block. You can use the Editor to format text, create links and tables, add images, video, and audio.
3. When complete, click the Save Block button.
CMS > Static Blocks: Add New – General Information
Part II: Design & Content
111
Chapter 8: Creating Content
Changing the Footer
Changing the Footer
The page links in the footer of your site are located in static block that is easy to change. If you have created a Privacy Policy page, you can include a link to the page in the footer.
Footer Links
To add a link to a page in the footer: 1. From the Admin panel, go to CMS > Static Blocks. 2. In the Static Blocks list, click to open the Footer Links block. 3. To insert a new link, do the following:
a. Position the insertion point at the end of a line and press the Enter key to insert a new line. b. Type the text, as you want it to appear in the footer link. Then, drag to select the text you typed. c. In the toolbar, click the Insert Link button. d. In the Link URL box, type the URL Key for the page. For example, the URL Key for your Privacy Policy page might be “privacy-policy.”
Insert Link
112
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 8: Creating Content e. Set Target to “Open Link in Same Window.” f.
Changing the Footer
In the Title box, type the text you want to appear when someone hovers over the link.
g. Click the Save Block button to save the changes.
Changing the Copyright Notice
While you’re working in the footer, here’s another thing you can do. Because you own the content that you create, your site should include a copyright notice that declares your company as the legal owner of the content.
To change the copyright notice: 1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. In the Configuration panel on the left, under General, click Design. 3. Click to expand the Footer section. 4. In the Copyright text box, type the copyright notice that you want to appear in
the footer of each page. You can use the &Copy; character code to insert a copyright symbol.
System > Configuration > Web > Footer
Part II: Design & Content
113
Chapter 8: Creating Content
Creating Banners
Creating Banners
Banners display an image or block content, and can be set to appear for a specific period of time for a promotion. You can create a banner that appears only for certain customer groups, or when price rule conditions apply. When designing banners for your store, you should take into consideration both the page layout and the theme you are using. To make it easy, each banner type is associated with a specific area of the page. Although the header and footer are a fixed width, the width of the content area and left and right columns varies according to page layout.
2 Columns with Left Bar
2 Columns with Right Bar
3 Columns
1 Column
114
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 8: Creating Content
Creating Banners
To create a banner: 1. From the Admin panel, select CMS > Banners.
CMS > Banners
2. Click the Add Banner button. 3. In the Banner Name field, enter an appropriate name for the banner. 4. Set Active option to “Yes.” 5. In the Applies To list, do one of the following:
Select Any Banner Type. Select one of the Specified Banner Types. Then in the list, choose the banner type you want to use. (To select more than one, hold the Ctrl key down and click each option.)
Specific Banner Types
Part II: Design & Content
115
Chapter 8: Creating Content
Creating Banners
6. In the Banner Information panel on the left, select Content. Then in the Default
Content section, type or paste any HTML code needed to define the banner.
7. To insert an image, click the Insert Image button and select the image from
Media Storage.
Banner Default Content
8. The default content you have created is initially available to all store views. To
customize the content for view, clear the Use Default check box, and complete the content for the each view.
9. Click the Save Banner button to save your changes.
Banner Type Content Area Description The width of the main content area varies, depending on the column layout. The bottom section of the page contains the footer links and copyright notice. The top section of the page contains your logo, account links, search box, and top navigation. The left column of a two- or threecolumn layout. The right column of a two-or threecolumn layout.
Footer
Header
Left Column
Right Column
116
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 8: Creating Content
Creating Banners
Inserting Variables
You will recognize some of the variables in the list as the contact names for your store. In addition to these, you can create additional variables and include them in your content.
To insert a variable: 1. From the Default Content section, click the Insert Variable button. 2. Then in the list, click to select the variable you want to insert. 3. Click the Save Banner button to save your changes.
Insert Variable
Using Custom Variables
Custom variables can be incorporated into email templates, static blocks, and content pages. Variables might be considered an advanced topic, but they actually easy to create and use. Here’s how:
Step 1:
Define the Variable
1. From the Admin panel, select System > Custom Variable to display a list of
defined variables.
2. Click the Add New Variable button to be redirected to custom variable page. 3. Enter an identifier in the Variable Code field. Use all lowercase characters,
without spaces. (For example: store_hours.)
Part II: Design & Content
117
Chapter 8: Creating Content
Creating Banners
4. Enter a name in the Variable Name field for internal reference. 5. In the Variable HTML Value text field, enter content using basic HTML tags. You
can also forgo this option and enter plain text in the Variable Plain Value field.
6. Click the Save button to save your changes.
Note: The HTML code for this example would be
{{CustomVar code= "store_hours"}}
Step 2:
Add the Variable to the Block
1. From the Admin panel, select CMS > Static Block. 2. Do one of the following:
Click to edit a predefined block. Click the Add New Block button to create a new static block.
3. Complete the General Information. 4. From the Editor, click the Insert Variable button, or expand the default insert list
by clicking Show/Hide Editor and click Insert Variable.
5. Select the custom variable that you created. 6. Click the Save Block button to save your changes.
118
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 8: Creating Content
Creating Banners
Inserting a Frontend App
A Frontend App is a predefined block of dynamic content which can be incorporated into banners and other content. For example, types of Frontend Apps include: Banner Rotator Catalog New Product List Recently Viewed Products
To learn more about Frontend Apps, see the Magento Go Design Guide.
To insert a frontend app: 1. From the Default Content section, click the Insert Frontend Apps button. 2. Then in the list, click to select the type of app you want to insert. 3. Click the Save Banner button to save your changes.
Insert Frontend App
Part II: Design & Content
119
Chapter 8: Creating Content
Creating Banners
Adding Related Promotions
A price rule is an action that is applied when a set of conditions is met. Price rules can be set up that perform an action, based upon a set of conditions. To learn more, see: “Promotional Price Rules,” on page 293.
To add a related promotion: 1. In the Banner Information panel on the left, select Related Promotions. 2. Do one of the following:
In the Related Shopping Cart Price Rules section, select the checkbox of each price rule which you want to associate with this banner. In the Related Catalog Price Rules, select the checkbox of each price rule which you want to associate with this banner.
3. Click the Save Banner button to save your changes.
Related Promotions
120
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 8: Creating Content
Changing the Column Layout
Changing the Column Layout
You can achieve some interesting results if you experiment with different column layouts. For example, some of the built-in blocks are associated with a specific column. As a result, they might be available, but have nowhere to go. Just because your theme uses a certain layout, doesn’t mean that you can’t change it!
Compare Products
Compare Products is an example of a block that is set up to appear in the far right column, or side bar. It provides a detailed, side-by-side comparison of two or more products. You can customize the report to include additional attributes, or remove ones that you don’t want to include. Here’s how it works:
To compare products: 1. From your store, select a category from the top navigation. 2. For each product that you want to compare, click the Add to Compare link. 3. In the Compare Products block in the right column, click the Compare button.
The report opens in a new window.
4. To clear the Compare Products list, click the Clear All link.
Troubleshooting
But what if the Compare Products block doesn’t appear in your store? The Compare feature could be turned off, or your theme could be using a single column layout for the category list page.
Part II: Design & Content
121
Chapter 8: Creating Content
Changing the Column Layout
Add to Compare
Compare Products Report
122
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 8: Creating Content
Changing the Column Layout
Enabling the Compare Feature
Compare Products can be enabled and disabled by changing a single setting in your system configuration.
To enable Compare Products: 1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. In the Configuration panel on the left, under General, select Feature. 3. Click to expand the Compare Products section. Then, set Enable Compare
Products to “Yes.”
System > Configuration > General: Feature - Compare Products
4. Click the Save Config button to save your setting.
Changing the Column Layout
The Product Compare block is initially associated with the right column. So if your theme uses a one-column format, the Product Compare block won’t appear. You can make it show up by changing the page layout of the category from the one-column layout to the two-column layout with right bar.
To change the category column layout: 1. From the Admin panel, select Catalog > Manage Categories. 2. In the Categories tree, select the category level you want to change. 3. On the Custom Design tab, set Page Layout to “2 columns with right bar.” 4. Click the Save Category button.
Part II: Design & Content
123
Chapter 8: Creating Content
Changing the Column Layout
Notes:
_______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________
124
Magento Go User Guide
CHAPTER 9:
Creating Brand Advocates
Your Magento Go store has many features which you can use to build a sense of community, and keep customers engaged. In this chapter, you’ll learn how to use these tools to turn your customers into advocates of your brand: Product Reviews Tags Polls Add to Wishlist Email a Friend
Opportunities for Customer Engagement
Part II: Design & Content
125
Chapter 9: Creating Brand Advocates
Product Reviews
Product Reviews
Product reviews help build a sense of community, and are considered to be more credible than any advertising money can buy. In fact, Google gives sites with product reviews a higher ranking than those without. For those who find your site by searching for a specific product, a product review can become the landing page of your store. Product reviews help people find your store, keep them engaged, and often lead to a sale. Five Star Rating
The five star rating system can include any parameters you want. Initially, the reviewer’s evaluation is based on the default parameters of Value, Quality, and Price. The score appears below the title on the product list and detail pages. Read a Review A link to existing product reviews appears below the product name on the product detail page. If no reviews have been written, the customer is invited to “Be the first to review this product.”
Write a Review The reviewer gives the product a score from one to five stars, based on the rating parameters you want to use. The review text and summary can be typed or pasted into the form. As an option, a reviewer can provide a Nickname to appear as a “byline” when the review is published.
126
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 9: Creating Brand Advocates
Product Reviews
Submit the Review When a review is submitted, it appears in the list of reviews with a status of “Pending” until it is approved for publication.
Accept for Moderation The moderator can open a review in Edit mode, and after making any changes that are necessary, change the status to “Approved” or “Not Approved.
Publish Review If approved, the reviewer’s score is added to the “five star” rating of the product, and the review appears at the bottom of the Product Detail page.
Customer Dashboard All reviews written by customers are listed in their Account Dashboard. Customers can view the details, but not edit or delete the review.
Part II: Design & Content
127
Chapter 9: Creating Brand Advocates
Product Reviews
Moderating Reviews
Customers can write reviews for any product in your catalog. This can be done from the product view page by clicking the “Be the first to review this product” link. If the product already has been reviewed, there will be a “Write Your Own Review” section where the customer review it and give it a star rating. The number of stars indicates the satisfaction rating. Visitors to your site can click the Review(s) link to read the reviews and write their own. When a review is submitted, it is sent for moderation. When approved, the review is published in your store.
To edit and approve customer reviews: 1. From the Admin panel, select Catalog > Reviews and Ratings > Customer
Reviews > Pending Reviews.
Catalog > Reviews and Ratings > Customer Reviews > Pending Reviews
2. In the list, click a pending review to view the details, and edit if necessary. 3. To approve a pending review, change the Status field from “Pending” to
“Approved.” To reject a review, select “Not Approved.”
4. Click the Save Review button to save your changes.
128
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 9: Creating Brand Advocates
Product Reviews
Managing Ratings
Magento Go lets you create your own rating system, using terminology that relates to your products and customers.
Catalog > Reviews and Ratings > Manage Ratings
To create your own ratings: 1. From the Admin panel, select Catalog > Reviews and Ratings > Manage
Ratings.
2. Click the Add New button. 3. In the Rating Title section, enter the Default Value for the new rating. Then,
enter the translation for each language supported by your store.
Manage Ratings - Rating Title
Part II: Design & Content
129
Chapter 9: Creating Brand Advocates
Product Reviews
4. In the Rating Visibility section, select each store view where the rating will be
used. (Hold down the Ctrl key to select multiple options.)
Manage Ratings: Rating Visibility
5. To save the new rating, click the Save Rating button.
The new rating is now included in the list of “5 star” ratings.
Write Your Own Review
130
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 9: Creating Brand Advocates
Tags
Tags
Tags are one-word descriptors that act as keywords. They can be assigned to products by registered customers who are logged in, or by guests. They help customers organize and remember the products that they have seen, offer quick navigation, and help search engines index your store. Each product page has an Add Your Tags field at the bottom of the page in your store. To add a tag, a customer simply needs to enter a tag and click the Add Tags button.
Add Your Tags
To add a tag: 1. From any Product Detail page, scroll down to the Product Tags section at the
bottom of the page.
2. Type your tags in the Add Your Tags text box.
To enter multiple tags, separate each with a blank space. To enter a phrase, enclose the text in single quotes.
3. Click the Add Tags button.
The tag will be submitted for review and published on the site when approved.
To edit and approve a tag: 1. In the Admin panel, select Catalog >Tags > Pending Tags. 2. Select a pending tag.
From this screen, you can modify the tag (if misspelled) and change its Status.
3. To approve the tag, change the Status from Pending to Approved. To
disapprove, change this to Disapproved.
4. Click the Save Tag button to save changes.
Part II: Design & Content
131
Chapter 9: Creating Brand Advocates
Polls
Polls
Polls are powerful marketing tools, and Magento Go makes it easy to find out your customers’ opinions on just about everything. A poll occupies a small amount of space on the pages and is likely to be answered by many people. The poll results appear immediately after a response is submitted.
Community Poll on Home Page
If you set up multiple polls, a new poll will appear each time the page is visited or refreshed.
Community Poll on Product Detail Page
132
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 9: Creating Brand Advocates
Polls
To create a poll: 1. From the Admin panel, select CMS > Polls.
Poll Manager
2. In the upper-right corner of the Poll Manager, click the Add New button. 3. In the Poll Information section, enter the Poll Question. This is the question that
will appear in the Community Poll box.
4. The Status field is “Open” by default. To remove the poll from your store, set
Status to “Closed.”
5. In the Visible In list, select each store view where you want the poll to appear. 6. In the Poll Information panel on the left, select Poll Answers. Then, do the
following: a. Click the Add New Answer button to add a new answer. b. In the Answer Title field, enter the answer as it will appear in the website. c. To weight an answer, enter a number in the Votes Count field. The number will increment each time a customer chooses the answer. Repeat this step to add more answers.
Assigned Answers
7. Click the Save Poll button to save your poll.
Part II: Design & Content
133
Chapter 9: Creating Brand Advocates
Polls
Configuring the Poll
You can protect the poll results by preventing people from voting multiple times from the same IP Address.
To configure poll voting: 1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. In the Configuration panel on the left, under General, select Web. 3. Click to expand the Polls section, and set Disallow Voting in a Poll Multiple
Times from Same IP-address to “Yes.”
4. Click the Save Config button to save the setting.
System > Configuration > General: Web - Polls
134
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 9: Creating Brand Advocates
Email a Friend
Email a Friend
The Email a Friend link makes it easy for your customers to share links to products with their friends. A customer can send only five messages an hour.
To email a friend: 1. On the Product Detail page, click the Email a Friend link. When prompted,
either log into your customer account or register to open an account.
2. Complete the Message and recipient Name and Email Address.
To send the message to more than one person, click the Add Recipient button and complete the recipient information.
3. When ready to send the message, click the Send Email button.
Email a Friend
Message Received
Part II: Design & Content
135
Chapter 9: Creating Brand Advocates
Email a Friend
Add to Wishlist
Customers can add products to their Wishlist, and then share it with their friends. The Wishlist is maintained in the customer’s Account Dashboard, where it can be updated, or added to the Shopping Cart.
To add a product to the Wishlist: 1. Click the Add to Wishlist link. If you are logged in, your customer account will
open to the My Wishlist page.
Add to Wishlist
2. To share your Wishlist with friends, click the Share Wishlist button. 3. To purchase the item, click the Add to Cart button.
Wishlist in Account Dashboard
136
Magento Go User Guide
CHAPTER 10:
Managing Email & Newsletters
There are many opportunities to communicate with your customers from your store. Email messages are sent to welcome new accounts, when an order is invoiced, when an account changes, a shopping cart abandoned, and when products come back in stock. Magento Go includes a set of default templates that are designed for a variety of circumstances. These messages are referred to as "transactional emails" because they are sent automatically. In this chapter, you’ll learn how to: Create new email templates Use variables in email templates
System > Transactional Emails
Part II: Design & Content
137
Chapter 10: Managing Email & Newsletters
Adding a New Email Template
Adding a New Email Template
Make sure to take the time to preview the content of each email template to make sure that it is consistent with your message and branding. You can customize any email template and create new ones by editing the text, changing the HTML, modifying the CSS, and inserting variables.
To add a new template: 1. From the Admin panel, select System > Transactional Emails. 2. Click the Add New Template button. 3. In the Template list, select a default template from the list of predefined
templates.
Transactional Emails: Load Default Template
4. In the Locale list, select the language for the email, and click the Load Template
button.
Transactional Emails: Template Information
138
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 10: Managing Email & Newsletters
Adding a New Email Template
5. In the Template Information section, do the following:
a. Enter a Template Name for the new email template. b. In the Template Subject field, type the text to appear in the Subject header of the message. c. Complete the Template Content, according to your needs.
6. To insert a variable, do the following:
a. Position the cursor in the text where you want the variable to appear. b. Click the Insert Variable button. c. In the list of available variables, click the variable you want to insert into the template.
Using Custom Variables in Email
Custom variables are reusable pieces of information that can be created once and used in multiple places, such as email templates, blocks, and content pages.
Step 1:
Define the Variable
1. From the Admin panel, select System > Custom Variable. 2. Click the Add New Variable button. 3. Enter an identifier in the Variable Code field. Use all lowercase characters,
without spaces. (For example: store_hours.)
4. Enter a Variable Name, which is used for internal reference. Then, do one of the
following: In the Variable HTML Value text field, enter any content you want to include, using basic HTML tags. This option allows you to format the value. In the Variable Plain Value field, enter the variable value as plain text.
Part II: Design & Content
139
Chapter 10: Managing Email & Newsletters
Adding a New Email Template
System > Custom Variable
5. Click the Save button to save your changes.
Note: The HTML code for this example would be:
{{CustomVar code= "store_hours"}}
Step 2:
Add the Variable to the Email Template
1. From the Admin panel, select System > Transactional Emails. 2. Do one of the following:
Click to edit a predefined template. Click the Add New Template button to create a new one.
3. In the Template Content field, position the cursor where you want to insert the
custom variable.
4. Click the Insert Variable button, and select the custom variable to insert.
140
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 10: Managing Email & Newsletters
Adding a New Email Template
5. Click the Save Template button to save your changes.
Configuring Email Templates
The email template that is used to generate each transactional sales message is determined by your system configuration. If you create new templates, make sure to update your configuration so the correct template is used for each message sent.
To assign templates to a transactional messages: 1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. In the Configuration panel on the left, under Sales, select Sales Emails. Then,
select the appropriate templates for each of the following sections: Order and Order Comments Invoice and Invoice Comments Shipment and Shipment Comments Credit Memo and Credit Memo Comments
3. When complete, click the Save Config button to save your changes.
Part II: Design & Content
141
Chapter 10: Managing Email & Newsletters
Newsletters
Newsletters
Magento Go provides newsletter functionality enabling store administrators to enroll customers who have registered to receive newsletters. You can use this subscription list to send newsletters through a third- party service provider.
Newsletter Sign-Up
Subscription Options
To configure newsletter settings for your store: 1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. In the Configuration
panel on the left, under Customers, select Newsletter.
Configuration: Customers – Newsletter – Subscription Options
142
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 10: Managing Email & Newsletters
Newsletters
2. Click to expand the Subscription Options section, and do the following:
a. Set Need to Confirm to “Yes” to require each subscription to be confirmed by email. This double opt-in technique requires customers to confirm twice to reduce the number of customers who consider your newsletter to be spam. b. Set allow Guest Subscription to “Yes” to allow visitors to your site to subscribe without opening an account.
3. Click the Save Config button to save the settings.
Preview the Newsletter Confirmation Template
Magento Go has a standard set of newsletter templates, including a confirmation template, and others to confirm a request to subscribe or unsubscribe. You should preview each of the templates, and make any changes necessary to keep the message consistent with your voice and brand.
To modify the newsletter template: 1. From the Admin panel, select System > Transactional Emails. 2. In the Template List, select “Newsletter Subscription Confirmation.” Then, click
the Load Template button.
3. Click the Preview button, to open the template in a new window. 4. If you want to make changes, do the following:
a. Enter a new Template Name. b. Make any changes necessary to the Template Content.
5. Click the Save Template button.
Part II: Design & Content
143
Chapter 10: Managing Email & Newsletters
Newsletters
To update the default confirmation template: 1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. In the Configuration panel on the left, under Customers, select Newsletter. 3. Click to expand the Subscription Options section, and make any changes that
are necessary.
Subscription Options
4. Click the Save Config button to save your changes.
144
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 10: Managing Email & Newsletters
Newsletters
Managing Your List of Subscribers
Magento Go allows store administrators to manage a list of newsletter subscribers. You can export the list as a CSV or XML file. You can also unsubscribe and delete newsletter subscribers.
To export a subscriber list: 1. From the Admin panel, select Newsletter > Newsletter Subscribers. 2. Click the Reset Filter button to load the complete subscriber list. Then, do one of
the following: To select all subscribers, click the Select All link in the upper-left corner of the list. To select individual subscribers, select the checkbox of each record. To select only the records with a Status of “Subscribed,” set the search filter for the Status column to “Subscribed.” Then, click the Search button.
3. To export the selected subscribers, set the Export to list to one of the following:
CSV XML
4. Then, click the Export button. 5. When prompted, Save the file to your computer.
Managing Requests to Unsubscribe
To unsubscribe to the newsletter: 1. From the Admin panel, select System > Newsletter. 2. Click the Reset Filter button. 3. To select all available users, click Select All or you can select individual
subscribers by checking on their corresponding boxes.
4. Set the Actions list to “Unsubscribe.” 5. Click the Submit button to save your changes.
Part II: Design & Content
145
Chapter 10: Managing Email & Newsletters
Newsletters
Notes:
_______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________
146
Magento Go User Guide
Part III: Building Your Catalog
Part III: Building Your Catalog
147
CHAPTER 11:
Mastering Search
Research shows that people who use search are more likely to make a purchase than those who rely on navigation alone. In fact, according to some studies, people who use search are nearly twice as likely to make a purchase. Magento Go has a powerful search engine which you can use as is, or fine-tune to make it even more effective. In this chapter, you will learn how to take full advantage of catalog search, by shaping the way search terms are used, and monitoring the results.
Search Results List
Part III: Building Your Catalog
149
Chapter 11: Mastering Search
Storefront Search Tools
Storefront Search Tools
Your Magento Go store includes a variety of search methods to help customers find products, and also to improve the indexing of your store by search engines.
Quick Search The Quick Search box is located in the header of each page, and helps visitors find products in your catalog. The search term can be either a full or partial match or any other word or phrase to describe a product.
Advanced Search Advanced Search provides an easy way for people to search your catalog by typing text directly into a form. You can configure the form to include any fields from your product catalog. The link to Advanced Search is in the footer of your store.
Popular Search Terms The Popular Search Terms page lists search terms as a “tag cloud,” using text size to indicate the popularity of the term. The link to the Popular Search Terms page is in the footer of your store.
150
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 11: Mastering Search
Storefront Search Tools
Quick Search
The Quick Search box in the upper-right corner helps visitors find products in your catalog. The search term can be the full or partial product name, or any other word or phrase that describes the product.
Quick Search with Suggestions
In addition to the product names and terms from your catalog, you can configure the search to offer close matches, display search term frequency, and to make suggestions as text is typed.
To configure the search box: 1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. In the Configuration panel on the left, under Catalog, select Catalog. Then, click
to expand the Catalog Search section.
System > Configuration > Catalog: Catalog – Catalog Search
3. Complete the settings according to your preference. 4. Click the Save Config button to save your changes.
Part III: Building Your Catalog
151
Chapter 11: Mastering Search
Storefront Search Tools
Catalog Search Settings
Setting Minimal Query Length Description The minimal number of characters required for a valid search term. The maximum number of characters accepted in a valid search term. The maximum number of words accepted in a valid search term. If set to “Yes,” the Search box offers up to ten suggestions as text is typed. Options include: Yes / No Note: This option can impact the performance of the search. Show Results Count for Each Suggestion Shows the number of times each suggested search term has been used by others. Only search terms with actual results are offered as suggestions. Options include: Yes / No Enable Search Recommendations If set to “Yes,” the Search box displays a list of close matches based on search queries made by other people. Options include: Yes / No
Maximum Query Length
Maximum Query Words Count
Enable Search Suggestions
152
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 11: Mastering Search
Storefront Search Tools
Advanced Search
Advanced Search provides an easy way for people to search your catalog by entering what they are looking for directly into a form. Because the form contains multiple fields, a single search can include several parameters. The result of the search is a list of the products which match the values entered in the form. The link to Advanced Search is in the footer of your store. Each field in the form corresponds to an attribute from a product record. You can determine which fields to include by setting the attribute properties to “Include in Advanced Search.” As a best practice, you should include only the fields that your customers are most likely to use to find a product, because using too many can impact the speed of the search.
Advanced Search
Part III: Building Your Catalog
153
Chapter 11: Mastering Search
Popular Search Terms
Popular Search Terms
The Popular Search Terms pages lists search terms which have been entered by visitors to your store, and ranks them by popularity. Search terms are listed in a “tag cloud” format, where the size of the text indicates the popularity of the term. The link to the Popular Search Terms page is located in the footer of your store. You can leverage your growing selection of search terms by including them on the Popular Search Terms page. Because the Search Terms page is indexed by search engines, any terms included on the page will help improve your search engine ranking, and the visibility of your store.
Popular Search Terms
154
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 11: Mastering Search
Popular Search Terms
To enable Popular Search Terms: 1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. In the Configuration panel on the left, under Catalog, select Catalog. Then, do
the following: a. Click to expand the Search Engine Optimizations section. b. Set Popular Search Terms to “Enable.”
3. Click the Save Config button to save the setting.
Part III: Building Your Catalog
155
Chapter 11: Mastering Search
Using the Search Results List
Using the Search Results List
The Search Results list displays all products which match the query text submitted through the Quick Search box or Advanced Search form. The Search Results list and the Product list are actually the same list. The only difference is that one is the result of a search query, and the other is the result of category navigation. The products can be displayed in either a grid or list format, and the records can be sorted by any number of parameters. Page controls are used to sort the list, change the format, and to advance from one page to the next. The left column of the Search Results page may also include layered navigation under the “Shop By” heading, which lists products by category and attribute. You can control the format and operation of the Search Results list from System > Configuration.
Search Results List
156
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 11: Mastering Search
Using the Search Results List
Page Controls
Control Description View As Displays the list in either a Grid or List format. Sort By Changes the sort order of the list. Show Per Page Changes how may products are shown per page. Pagination Links Lets the user navigate to other pages in the search results list.
To configure the list: 1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. In the Configuration panel on the left, under Catalog, select Catalog. Then, click
to expand the Frontend section.
3. Complete the settings according to your preference, and click the Save Config
button.
Catalog Frontend Search Configuration
Part III: Building Your Catalog
157
Chapter 11: Mastering Search
Using the Search Results List
Configuration Settings
Setting List Mode Description Determines the format of the search results list. Options include: Grid Only: Formats the list as a grid of rows and columns. Each product appears in a single cell of the grid. List Only: Formats the list with each product on a separate row. Grid (default) / List: By default, products appear in Grid View. List (default) / Grid: By default, products appear in List View. Products per Page on Grid Allowed Values Determines the number of products displayed in Grid View. To provide a selection of options, enter multiple values separated by commas. Determines the number of products displayed per page by default, in Grid View. Determines the number of products displayed per page by default, in List View. If set to “Yes,” includes the “ALL” option in the “Show per Page” control. Determines the sort order of the search results list. The selection of options is determined by the Display Settings of the category and the available attributes. The default is set to “Use All Available Attributes,” and typically includes: Best Value Name Price
Products per Page on Grid Default Value
Products per Page on List Default Value
Allow All Products per Page
Product Listing Sort By
158
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 11: Mastering Search
Search Terms
Search Terms
Search Terms List The Search Terms list displays all search query terms submitted by visitors to your store. You can use the information to learn more about what your customers are looking for, and to display targeted search results and landing pages.
Search Term Information Every search term in the list can be edited, and new terms added. The Search Term information page records how many times the term has been entered, and any synonyms, landing pages, and related search terms associated with the term.
Search Term Report The Search Term report lists the number of results generated from each query term submitted, and the number of times each was submitted within the range of time specified for the report. The report data can be exported, and opened in Excel for further analysis.
Part III: Building Your Catalog
159
Chapter 11: Mastering Search
Search Terms
Managing Search Terms
The stronger your store’s search capability, the sooner shoppers will be able to find what they want. And the sooner they find what they want, the more likely they will make a purchase. You can learn what your customers are looking for by examining the list of search terms they have used in your store. Perhaps they’re looking for a product you don’t carry. If enough people are looking for the same product, perhaps it’s time to add it to your catalog.
Suggestions
Search terms can be suggested as text is typed into the Quick Search box. Up to ten qualified search terms can appear as suggestions below the search box. Only search terms which have been submitted from your store and have produced results are offered as suggestions.
Quick Search Box with Suggested Search Term
If a search returns no results, and there is not an alternate landing page set up for the term, a close match is offered as a possible solution. The text, “Did you mean:” appears with a list of possible “close match” suggestions.
Search Results List without Results
160
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 11: Mastering Search
Search Terms
Landing Pages
Magento Go lets you associate each search term with a specific landing page. The landing page can be a content page, a category page, a product detail page, or even a page on a different site. When people look for a product that you don’t carry, rather than leave them empty handed, why not redirect them to a similar product in your catalog? Or, if you exchange referrals with another store, you might send some business their way. The source of the referral would show up in their analytics, and they might return the favor.
Synonyms
You can improve the effectiveness of catalog search by including different terms that people may use to describe the same item. For example, you don’t want to lose a sale just because someone is looking for a “sofa,” and your product is listed as a “couch.” You can expand your ability to capture a broader range of search terms by entering the words, “sofa, “davenport,” and “loveseat” as synonyms for “couch.” Then, you can direct them all to the same landing page.
Trapping Misspelled Words
You can use search terms to capture common misspellings and redirect them to the appropriate page. For example, if you sell wrought iron patio furniture, you know that many people misspell the term as “rod iron,” or “rot iron.” Why not enter them as search terms and synonyms for “wrought iron,” along with a redirect to the appropriate page?
Part III: Building Your Catalog
161
Chapter 11: Mastering Search
Search Terms
Using the Search Terms List
The Search Terms list displays all of the search query terms that have been submitted by visitors to your store. Each term in the list can be edited, and new terms added to the list.
To display the Search Terms list: 1. From the Admin panel, select Catalog > Search Terms. 2. Click the row of any record to edit the search term. To delete a search term: 1. In the list, select the checkbox of the term to the deleted. 2. Set the Actions list to “Delete.” 3. Click the Submit button.
To learn more about Action controls, see: “List Filters and Controls,” on page 173.
Catalog > Search Terms
162
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 11: Mastering Search
Search Terms
Search Term List Definitions
Column Description Displays a checkbox to select records for deletion using the Actions control. Search Query Contains the actual text that was used as a search term. Identifies the store and/or views where the search term is available. Displays how many products were returned in the search results since the last time the term was submitted. Displays the total number of times this term has been used. Displays any synonym assigned to this search term. Displays the URL of an alternate page that is displayed when this search term is used. Displays whether or not the search term is available to be listed as a suggestion in the Quick Search box. Provides an Edit link that can be used to open the record in Edit Mode. You can also click anywhere on the row to open the record in Edit Mode.
Store
Results
Number of Uses
Synonym For
Redirect
Display in Suggested Terms
Action
Part III: Building Your Catalog
163
Chapter 11: Mastering Search
Search Terms
Adding a Search Term
People may use different terminology to describe what is essentially the same product. You can use search terms to “cast a wider net,” and direct people to the most closely matching products in your catalog.
To add a new search term: 1. From the Admin panel, select Catalog > Search Terms.
Catalog > Search Terms
2. Click the Add New button.
Catalog > Search Terms: General Information
3. In the General Information section, in the Search Query box, type the word or
phrase that you want to add as a new search term.
4. Select the Store where the search term will be used. If your store is available in
multiple languages, select the applicable store view.
164
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 11: Mastering Search
Search Terms
5. In the Synonym For field, enter the synonym that you want to associate with this
search term.
6. To redirect the search results to another page in your store, or to a page on
another website, type the full URL of the target page in the Redirect URL field.
7. If you want to offer suggestions as text is typed in the search box, set Display in
Suggested Terms to “Yes.”
8. Click the Save Search button.
Adding Related Search Terms
The Related Search Terms section of a search term record lets you keep a list of terms that are related. You can use the information to keep a running total of how many people are searching for the same thing.
To add related search terms: 1. From the Admin panel, select Catalog > Search Terms. 2. In the list, click to open the search term in edit mode. 3. In the Related Search Terms section, do the following:
a. Click the Reset Filter button to generate a list of all search terms. b. In the first column, select the checkbox of each search term that is related to the term that is listed in the General Information section of the record. c. Click the Save Search button. d. In the first column, set the Search Filter to “Any.”
4. Click the Search button to save the settings.
Related Search Terms
Part III: Building Your Catalog
165
Chapter 11: Mastering Search
Search Terms
Search Term Field Definitions
Field Search Query Description (Required) Contains the actual text that was used as a search term. (Required) Identifies the store and/or views where the search term is available. (Required) Displays how many products were returned in the search results since the last time the term was submitted. Note: Only search terms with results are offered as suggestions in the Quick Search box. Number of Uses (Required) Displays the total number of times this term has been used. This number is used to determine the “Top 5 Search Terms” section of the Dashboard report. If this search term is a synonym for another word, enter the other word in this field. If a search is made for the synonym, the results for the primary search term appear. Enter the full URL of the page that is displayed when this search term is used. The Redirect URL can be a product, category, or content page within your site, or a page on another site. Determines if this search term is available to be listed as a suggestion in the Quick Search box. Options include: Yes / No
Store
Number of results (For the last time placed)
Synonym For
Redirect URL
Display in Suggested Terms
166
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 11: Mastering Search
Using Product Attributes in Search
Using Product Attributes in Search
Any field, or attribute, of a product record can be used as the basis of catalog search. An attribute can be the product name, brand, color, or any other field that is included in the product record. The properties assigned to the attribute determine how and where it can be used in search. The Attribute Frontend Properties section of the attribute definition lets you include or exclude the attribute from Quick Search and Advanced Search, and also assign a search weight to the attribute. For more information, see: Use in Quick Search Use in Advanced Search Search Weight
Attribute Frontend Properties
In addition, the Visibility of the individual product record must be set to make it available for use in search operations. For more information, see:
Visibility Setting in Product Record
Part III: Building Your Catalog
167
Chapter 11: Mastering Search
Using Product Attributes in Search
Weighted Search
Magento Go lets you assign a weight to any product attribute that is used in catalog search. The weight is a numerical score from 1-5 that determines the rank or value of the item.
To set the search properties of an attribute: 1. From the Admin panel, go to Catalog > Attributes > Manage Attributes. 2. Find the attribute in the list, and click to open the record. 3. Scroll down to the Frontend Properties section, and do the following:
a. To include the attribute in Quick Search box queries, set Use in Quick Search to “Yes.” b. To include the attribute as a field on the Advanced Search form, set Use in Advanced Search to “Yes.” c. To establish the search value of the attribute, set Search Weight to a number from 1 to 5.
4. When complete, click the Save Attribute button.
168
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 11: Mastering Search
Reporting and Analysis
Reporting and Analysis
You can check the Search Term reports on a regular basis, to see what people are searching for, and to analyze how well your search terms are performing. Each report shows the results and hits for the specified range of time. Search Term Report Dashboard “Top 5” Reports
Search Term Report
The Search Term report lists the number of results generated from each query term submitted and the number of times each one was submitted, within the range of time specified for the report. The report data can be exported, and opened in Excel for further analysis. If you closely monitor traffic, you can combine the search results from your store with the search results from Google Analytics for a more complete picture of how people arrive at your site, and what they do once they get there.
Reports > Search Terms
Part III: Building Your Catalog
169
Chapter 11: Mastering Search
Reporting and Analysis
To run the Search Term Report 1. From the Admin panel, select Reports > Search Terms. 2. To export the report data, select one of the following from the Export to list:
CSV Exports the search report data to a .csv (comma-separated values) file. Note: Because the first column in the report is “ID,” you may not be able to open the file in Excel. The Open Office spreadsheet is an open source equivalent, which sometimes proves to be a better choice for managing import/export data. Excel Exports the search report to a .xml file. The .xml file can be saved to your computer and opened in Excel.
3. Click the Export button. When prompted, you can either open or save the file. Search Term Report
Column ID Description Contains the record number of each search term that is included in the report, and is used for internal reference. Contains each search term that is included in the report. Identifies the store and/or views where the search term is available. Displays how many products were displayed in the search results during the most recent use of search term. Note: Only search terms with qualified results can be offered as suggestions in the Quick Search box. Hits Displays the total number of uses of this search term.
Search Query
Store
Results
170
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 11: Mastering Search
Reporting and Analysis
Top Search Terms
The Dashboard provides a summary of the top search terms and most recently used search terms during the range of time specified for the report. Each report includes a summary of search term results, and the number of times the term was used. The reports include: Last 5 Search Terms Top 5 Search Terms
Dashboard Top Search Term Reports
Google Analytics
Google Analytics provides detailed statistics about your website visitors, as well information about the effectiveness of your marketing campaigns. For step-bystep instructions, see: “Google Analytics” on page 436.
System > Configuration > Sales > Google API: Google Analytics
Part III: Building Your Catalog
171
Chapter 11: Mastering Search
Back Office Search Tools
Back Office Search Tools
Global Search The Global Search box can be used to quickly find any record in your database. The results list can include customers, products, orders, or any related attribute.
List Filters and Controls There are many lists of data associated with your store, including products, orders, customers, search terms, pages, blocks, banners, and so on. Each list uses the same set of pagination, sorting, filtering, and action controls.
Search Indexing As you work with your product catalog, the search index will periodically need to be refreshed to keep current with changes to the database. Whenever you make changes which might affect the indexing of your catalog, take a moment to refresh the search index.
172
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 11: Mastering Search
Back Office Search Tools
Global Search
The Global Search box is located in the upper-right corner of the Admin panel, and gives you the ability to find any record in the database. The results can include customers, products, orders, or any related attribute.
Global Search
List Filters and Controls
The Admin panel includes many lists of data, including products, orders, customers, search terms, pages, blocks, banners, and so on. Each list has the same basic set of pagination, sorting, filtering, and action controls. To sort a list, simply click the column name in any header.
Sorting the List
Part III: Building Your Catalog
173
Chapter 11: Mastering Search
Back Office Search Tools
List Filters
When working from the Admin panel, you can use the filters across the top of the list to focus the results of the search. Simply enter the value you want to find, and click the Search button.
Search Filters
Action Controls
When working from the Admin panel, you can use the action controls to apply an operation to a single record, or to multiple records. The checkboxes in the first column are used to select each record. The Actions list contains the selection of actions which are available for the list. To apply the action to the selected records, click the Submit button.
Action Controls
174
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 11: Mastering Search
Back Office Search Tools
Refreshing the Search Index
As you work with your product catalog, the search index will periodically need to be refreshed to keep it current with changes made to the database. Whenever you make changes which might affect the indexing of your catalog, take a moment to refresh the search index.
To refresh the search indexing: 1. From the Admin panel, select Catalog > Search Indexing. 2. Click the Refresh Index button.
You are notified that the request is in the queue.
Catalog > Search Indexing
Part III: Building Your Catalog
175
Chapter 11: Mastering Search
Back Office Search Tools
Notes:
_______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________
176
Magento Go User Guide
CHAPTER 12:
Navigation by Category
Categories are the primary way people find products in your catalog. Categories appear in the top navigation of your store, the breadcrumb trail, and in the “layered navigation” which is often found on the left side of a two- or threecolumn page. The category URL usually appears in the address bar of a browser, and is indexed by search engines. For a product to be visible in your store, it must be assigned to at least one category. Each category can have a dedicated landing page with an image, static blocks, a description, list of products. You can also create additional designs for your category pages that become active for a specific period of time.
Category Navigation
Part III: Building Your Catalog
177
Chapter 12: Navigation by Category
Breadcrumb Trail
Breadcrumb Trail
The breadcrumb trail is a set of links that shows where you are in relation to other pages in your store. You can click any link in the breadcrumb trail to return to a previous page. The format and position of the breadcrumb trail varies by theme, but it is usually located in the upper-left, just below the header.
Breadcrumb Trail on Product Detail Page
Breadcrumb Trails on Content Pages
The breadcrumb trail can be configured to appear on CMS content pages, as well as catalog pages.
To show the breadcrumb trail on content pages: 1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. In the Configuration panel on the left, under General, select Web.
System > Configuration > General: Web - Default Pages
3. Click to expand the Default Pages section. 4. Set Show Breadcrumbs for CMS Pages to “Yes.”
178
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 12: Navigation by Category
Top Navigation
Top Navigation
The top navigation of your store includes the highest level of categories that are available in your catalog. You can think of the top navigation as “departments” in your store, and each top-level category page as a destination landing page.
Top Navigation with Subcategories The catalog structure is like an upside down tree, with the root on top. The categories in the top navigation of your store exist one level below the root.
Root Category
Part III: Building Your Catalog
179
Chapter 12: Navigation by Category
Creating Categories
Creating Categories
Every product in your catalog must be assigned to at least one category. Therefore, before you can build your product records, you must first establish the basic category structure of your catalog.
Catalog > Manage Categories
Step 1:
Create a Category
1. From the Admin panel, select Catalog > Manage Categories. 2. In the Categories panel on the left, click to select the level that you want to be the
parent of the new category. This will be the level just above where the category will appear. If you’re starting from the beginning without sample data, there will be only two categories in the list: “Default Category,” which is the root, and “Example Category,” which becomes the first option in the top navigation. Any additional subcategories levels are nested below.
3. Click the Add Subcategory button.
180
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 12: Navigation by Category
Creating Categories
Step 2:
Complete the General Information
Category > Manage Categories: Add Subcategory - General Information
1. Type the Name of the category. 2. Do any of the following:
In the Description box, enter a paragraph or two of descriptive text to accompany the products on the page. At the Image field, click the Browse button to upload an image for the category page. Wait until the next step, and display a static block that contains both text and images instead.
3. Do the following:
a. Enter a descriptive Page Title. b. Complete the Meta Keywords. c. Complete the Meta Description.
4. Set Is Active to “Yes.” 5. If you want to include the subcategory in the top navigation of your store, set
Include in Navigational Menu to “Yes.”
6. Assign a URL Key to the category.
Note: Do not add the “.html” suffix to the URL key, because it is managed by your system configuration.
Part III: Building Your Catalog
181
Chapter 12: Navigation by Category
Creating Categories
Step 2:
Complete the Display Settings
You can configure the category page to display a static block and product list, or just one or the other. A static block can provide additional information, including text, images, and even embedded video on a category landing page.
Category > Manage Categories: Add Subcategory – Display Settings
1. On the Display Settings tab, do the following:
a. Set Display Mode to one of the following: Products Only Static Block Only Static Block and Products
b. If applicable, select the static block you want to appear on the category page from the CMS Block list. c. If you want this category page to display the filter by attribute section of layered navigation, set Is Anchor to “Yes.” d. Clear the checkbox under Default Product Listing Sort By. Then select one of the available values to sort the list. By default, all available attributes are listed. The default values typically include: Best Value Name Price
2. When complete, click the Save Category button.
182
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 12: Navigation by Category
Creating Categories
Moving Categories
To move categories: 1. From the Admin panel, select Catalog > Manage Categories. 2. To move categories, simply drag-and-drop them in a new location. Category
order changes are saved automatically for you.
To delete a category: 1. From the Admin panel, select Catalog > Manage Categories. 2. Click the category you want to delete. 3. Click the Delete Category button to save your changes.
Note: Delete category cannot be reversed, so make sure that you have selected the correct category.
Part III: Building Your Catalog
183
Chapter 12: Navigation by Category
Layered Navigation
Layered Navigation
Layered navigation makes it easy to find a product based on category, price range, or any other available attribute. Layered navigation usually appears in the left column of search results and category pages, and can also be used on the home page. The standard layered navigation includes a “Shop By” list of categories and price range.
Standard Layered Navigation
Anchor Categories
In addition to the standard layered navigation, anchor categories display an additional section that lets you filter the list by attribute value. The attribute section of layered navigation appears when the category is set to “Is Anchor.” Each attribute can be configured to display the results, which is the number of matching records found.
184
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 12: Navigation by Category
Layered Navigation
Layered Navigation with Anchor Categories
The attribute properties, combined with the product properties determine which attributes can be used as filters for layered navigation. Only those with the catalog input type of Dropdown, Multiple Select or Price can be used as filterable attributes. In addition, the number of anchor categories and filterable attributes you have available are determined by your Magento Go plan.
Magento Go Plan Get Going Going Places Go Beyond Go Anywhere
Anchor Categories 50 50 50 200
Filterable Attributes 10 50 50 110
Setting up anchored layered navigation is a two-step process. First of all, you need to set the attribute properties to make it available for use as a filter. Then, make the category an anchor.
Part III: Building Your Catalog
185
Chapter 12: Navigation by Category
Layered Navigation
Step 1:
Set the Attribute Properties
1. From the Admin panel, select Catalog > Attributes > Manage Attributes. 2. Click to open the attribute in Edit mode, and do the following:
a. Scroll down to the Frontend Properties section, and set Use In Layered Navigation to one of the following: Filterable (with results) Filterable (no results)
b. Set Use In Search Results Layered Navigation to “Yes.”
Attribute Frontend Properties for Layered Navigation
Step 2:
Make the Category an Anchor
1. From the Admin panel, select Catalog > Manage Categories. 2. In the Categories panel on the left, click to open the category. 3. On the Display Settings tab, set Is Anchor to “Yes.” 4. Click the Save Category button. 5. To test the setting, go to your store and select the category from the top
navigation. The layered navigation with filters will appear.
186
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 12: Navigation by Category
Layered Navigation
Layered Navigation Settings
You can configure the way layered navigation is displayed, including the product count and price range.
To configure layered navigation: 1. From the Admin panel, select System Configuration. 2. In the Configuration panel on the left, under Catalog, select Catalog. 3. Click to expand the Layered Navigation section. Then, do the following:
a. To display the results after each attribute, set Display Product Count to “Yes.” b. Set Price Navigation Step Calculation to one of the following: Automatic Manual
c. For a manual calculation, enter a number in the Default Price Navigation Step field to determine how the price ranges are grouped. For example, if you enter 100, the prices will appear in groups of 100.
System > Configuration > Catalog: Layered Navigation
Part III: Building Your Catalog
187
Chapter 12: Navigation by Category
General Information
General Information
Setting Name
Description (Required) The category name appears in the navigation, and also in the URL key of the category page and associated product pages. The category description, if used, appears below the category image, and before the product list. The category image, if used, appears at the top of the category page, before the description and product list. Note: As an alternative, you can use a CMS static block in place of the description and image.
Description
Image
Page Title
The category page title appears in the browser tab and title bar. The title should be not more than twelve words in length, and include a combination of primary and secondary keywords. Keywords are used by some search engines, and not by others. You can use a keyword search tool to identify high value keywords that relate to your category. A general rule is to use no
Meta Keywords
188
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 12: Navigation by Category
General Information
Setting
Description more than thirty keywords, or 180 characters. Avoid repeats, and words such as “a,” “an,” “or” and “that.”
Meta Description
Enter a description of the category, using approximately twenty-five words or 150 characters. (Required) If you want this category to be available, select “Yes.” Options include: Yes / No (Required) If you want this category to be included in the top navigation, select “Yes.” If you want this category to be active, but hidden, select “No.” A “hidden” category does not appear in the top navigation, but is still included in layered navigation. Options include: Yes / No
Is Active
Include in Navigation Menu
URL Key
Enter text to represent the category in the URL. You should use all lowercase characters and no spaces. (You can use a hyphen to represent the space between words.) Note: The format of the category URL is determined by your system configuration.
Part III: Building Your Catalog
189
Chapter 12: Navigation by Category
Display Settings
Display Settings
Setting Display Mode
Description Determines the content elements displayed on the category page. Options include: Products Only Static Block Only Static Block and Products
CMS Block
If you want to display a CMS static block at the top of the category page, select the name of the block from the list. When set to “Yes,” includes the “filter by attribute” section in the layered navigation of the category page. Options include: Yes / No (Required) By default, the Best Value, Name, and Price attributes are provided as sorting option for product lists. You can define and add attributes as needed. To customize the sorting option, clear the Use All Available Attributes check box and select the attributes you want to use.
Is Anchor
Available Product Listing Sort By
190
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 12: Navigation by Category
Display Settings
Setting Default Product Listing Sort By
Description (Required) To define the default “Sort By” option, clear the Use Config Settings check box and select an attribute from the list. By default, Magento Go displays price range in increments of 10, 100, and 1000, depending on the price range of the products in the list. You can predefine the Price Step range by specifying your own number in this field by clearing the Use Config Settings check box.
Layered Navigation Price Step
Part III: Building Your Catalog
191
Chapter 12: Navigation by Category
Custom Design
Custom Design
The Custom Design tab lets you to control the look and feel of a category and all assigned product pages, including the content blocks and template layout. Customizing category pages and assigned products will help you promote selected products and categories to increase sales. Customizing category pages and assigned products enables you to differentiate selected products and categories. For example, you can develop specific designs for brands or a special line of products in order to increase sales.
To customize a category page: 1. If the parent category of the selected category has already been customized and
you want to use same settings, set Use Parent Category Settings to “Yes.”
2. If you want the custom settings to apply all the products assigned to this
Category, set Apply to Products to “Yes.” Otherwise, the customization applies only to the category page.
3. To apply a different theme to the category, select the theme you want to use from
the Custom Theme list.
4. To apply the category design to a specific range of time, click the calendar to
select the Active From and Active To dates. Otherwise, the design will take effect when you save the changes to the category. Tip: You can further change the layout of the category page by selecting one of the default layouts.
5. Click the Save Category button to save your changes.
192
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 12: Navigation by Category
Custom Design
Setting Use Parent Category Settings
Description To inherit the design settings from the parent category set this option to “Yes.” Options include: Yes / No To apply the custom settings to all products in the category, set to “Yes.” Options include: Yes / No Select the custom theme you want to apply from the list of available themes. If applying a custom theme for a period of time, enter the beginning date, or select the date from the Calendar. If applying a custom theme for a period of time, enter the ending date, or select the date from the Calendar. To apply a different layout to the category page, select one of the following: No layout updates: This option is preselected by default and does not apply layout changes to the category page. Empty: This option lets you define your own page layout.(Requires an understanding of XML.) 1 column: Applies the 1-column layout to the category page. 2 columns with left bar: Applies the 2 column layout to the category page. 2 columns with right bar: Applies the 2-columns with right bar layout to the category page. 3 columns: Applies the 3 column layout to the category page.
Apply to Products
Custom Theme
Active From
Active To
Page Layout
Custom Layout Update
You can further customize the theme with XML coding. See the Magento Go Design Guide to learn more about customizing themes.
Part III: Building Your Catalog
193
Chapter 12: Navigation by Category
Custom Design
Category Products
The Category Products tab enables you to specify the products that belong to this category.
To assign products to a category: 1. Check the relevant check boxes of the products you want to add. You can use
filters to limit the products that are shown. Use the Reset Filter button to show all products again. You can also assign products to categories when editing products.
2. Click the Save Category button to save your changes.
194
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 12: Navigation by Category
Category View Optimization
Category View Optimization
The Category View Optimization tab appears for products and categories enabled in your system configuration. It lets you install tracking scripts for Google Website Optimizer to test the effectiveness of pages on your site. For more information, see: “Google Website Optimizer,” on page 437.
Part III: Building Your Catalog
195
Chapter 12: Navigation by Category
Category Configuration
Category Configuration
You can use the default category settings to create your entire catalog. However, for even better results, you can make adjustments to the format of the category and products URLs to optimize your catalog for search engines.
Category Depth
The first level of categories is typically used for the top navigation of your store. Below that, you can have as many additional subcategories as needed. The category structure of your catalog can influence how well your site is indexed by search engines. The deeper a category, the less likely it is to be thoroughly indexed. As a general rule, anywhere between one and three levels is considered optimum. However, the maximum number of levels available in your top navigation is determined by your system configuration.
To set the maximum depth of the top navigation: 1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. In the Configuration panel on the left, under Catalog, select Catalog. 3. Click to expand the Category Top Navigation section.
System > Configuration > Catalog: Catalog – Category Top Navigation
4. In the Maximal Depth field, enter the number of subcategory levels you want to
include in the top navigation.
5. Click the Save Config button to save the setting.
196
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 12: Navigation by Category
Category Configuration
Category URL Options
You can configure the URL of pages in your catalog to either include or exclude the category path. By default, all category pages include the category path, as follows: http://yourstore.gostorego.com/furniture/living-room/couch.html
The same product URL without the category path looks like this: http://yourstore.gostorego.com/couch.html
In addition, you can configure your catalog to include or exclude the .html suffix from the category and product URLs. Here’s an example of the same category URL, with, and without the suffix: http://yourstore.gostorego.com/furniture/living-room.html http://yourstore.gostorego.com/living-room
There are different schools of thought as to which is the best approach to take to optimize your catalog for search engines. There are those who believe that the suffix no longer serves any useful purpose, and that pages without the suffix are indexed more effectively by search engines. The most important thing to understand is that the setting is controlled by your system configuration, rather than by hard-coding the suffix into the URL of each category or product page. Whichever approach you decide to take, be consistent, and use the same setting for both the product and category URL.
Part III: Building Your Catalog
197
Chapter 12: Navigation by Category
Category Configuration
To configure the URL suffix: 1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. In the Configuration panel on the left, select Catalog. Then, click to expand the
Search Engine Optimizations section. Then, do the following: a. If you choose to omit the suffix, clear the default “.html” setting from the Product URL Suffix field. b. If you choose to omit the suffix, clear the default “.html” setting from the Category URL Suffix field. Note: If you make this change to an existing catalog, you will need to refresh the Search Indexing (Catalog > Search Indexing) and browser cache (F5). For more information, see: “URL Rewrites,” on page 428.
3. If you choose to omit the category path from product URLs, set Use Categories
Path for Product URLs to “No.”
System > Configuration: Category – Search Engine Optimizations
198
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 12: Navigation by Category
Sitemap
Sitemap
A sitemap is like a table of contents that lists every category and product in your store. Each entry is linked to the corresponding landing page of the category or product. Sitemaps help search engines index your site, and also give visitors a quick overview of the organization of your store and catalog. To display the sitemap, click the link in the footer of your store. The sitemap can be set to display either the list of categories or products. To switch between modes, click the link on the right. The number of lines included per page, and the use of indentation is determined by your system configuration. In addition to the standard sitemap, you can also set up a Google sitemap and robots.txt file, to provide specific instructions to search engines as they visit your site. For more information, see: “Google Sitemap,” on page 431, and “Using a Robots.txt File,” on page 423.
Sitemap by Category
Part III: Building Your Catalog
199
Chapter 12: Navigation by Category
Sitemap
To configure the sitemap: 1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. In the Configuration panel on the left, under Catalog, select Catalog. 3. Click to expand the Sitemap section. 4. Complete the settings according to your preference.
System > Configuration > Catalog: Catalog - Sitemap
5. Scroll down the page and click to expand the Search Engine Optimizations
section. Then, set Autogenerated Site Map to “Enable.”
System > Configuration > Catalog: Catalog – Search Engine Optimizations
6. Click the Save Config button to save the configuration.
200
Magento Go User Guide
CHAPTER 13:
Understanding Product Types
Magento Go’s product catalog is based upon six product types, which are divided into two groups called, “Simple” and “Complex.” However, it’s really not as complex as it sounds, because in this case, the word “complex” conveys the meaning of “compound,” or “one-to-many.” One of the first things you are required to do when adding a new product to your catalog is to specify the product type. So how can you know which one to use, and when should you use one product type over another? By learning to use product types effectively, you can build a catalog that is both flexible and powerful. In this chapter, you will learn the characteristics of each product type, how they differ, and how to set them up.
Manage Products: Add Product – Create Product Settings
Part III: Building Your Catalog
201
Chapter 13: Understanding Product Types
“Standalone” Products
“Standalone” Products
Standalone products can be sold individually, and also in association with one-tomany products.
Simple Products
A simple product is a physical item with a single SKU. Simple products have a variety of pricing and of input controls which make it possible to sell variations of the product. Simple products can be used in association with grouped, bundle, and configurable products.
Virtual Products
Although virtual products do not have a physical presence, they represent something that can be sold, such as a service, warranty, or subscription. Virtual products are not shipped, and therefore have no weight field. Virtual products can be used in association with grouped and bundle products.
Gift Card Products
There are three kinds of gift cards: virtual gift cards are sent by email, physical gift cards are shipped to the recipient, and combined gift cards are a combination of the two. Each has a unique code, which is redeemed during checkout. Gift cards can be used in association with grouped products.
202
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 13: Understanding Product Types
“One-to-Many” Product Relationships
“One-to-Many” Product Relationships
Grouped, configurable, and bundle products have a one-to-many relationship with standalone products, bringing them together “under one roof.”
Grouped Products
A grouped product lets you offer multiple, standalone products as a group. You can offer variations of a single product, or group them by season, theme, or for a promotion. Each product can be purchased separately, or as part of the group.
Configurable Products
A configurable product appears to be a single product with lists of options for each variation. However, each option represents a separate, simple product with a distinct SKU, which makes it possible to track inventory for each variation.
Bundle Products
A bundle product let customers “build their own” from an assortment of options. The bundle could be a gift basket, computer, or anything else that can be customized. Each item in the bundle is a separate, standalone product.
Part III: Building Your Catalog
203
Chapter 13: Understanding Product Types
Creating a Simple Product
Creating a Simple Product
One of the keys to harnessing the power of product types is learning how and when to use a simple, “standalone” product. Simple products can be sold individually, or as part of a one-to-many relationship with the following product types: Grouped Configurable Bundle
In this exercise, you will use the Default attribute set to create a simple product with the required fields.
To create a Simple product: 1. From the Admin panel, go to Catalog > Manage Products.
Catalog > Manage Products
2. In the upper-right corner of the Manage Products page, click the Add Product
button.
204
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 13: Understanding Product Types
Creating a Simple Product
Manage Products: Add Product
3. In the Create Product Settings section, accept the default settings for Attribute
Set and Product Type. Then, click the Continue button.
Manage Products: Add Product - Create Product Settings, Simple Product
The Product Information panel groups related fields by topic. All required fields are marked with a red asterisk (*).
Part III: Building Your Catalog
205
Chapter 13: Understanding Product Types
Creating a Simple Product
Product Information – General, Simple Product
4. On the General tab, complete the required fields as follows:
a. Type the product Name, as you want it to appear in all catalog listings. b. Assign a unique SKU for the product. c. Type the product Weight that will be used for shipping calculations. d. Set Status to “Enabled.” e. Set Tax Class to the appropriate setting for your area. f. Set Visibility to “Catalog, Search.”
5. On the Prices tab, enter the Price you intend to charge for the product. 6. On the Description tab, complete the required fields as follows:
a. Type a Short Description of the product. b. In the Description box, type the main description that will appear on the product view page.
206
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 13: Understanding Product Types
Creating a Simple Product
7. If you plan to use Magento Go to manage your inventory, complete the required
fields on the Inventory tab as follows: a. Under Manage Stock, clear the Use Config Settings checkbox. Then, set Manage Stock to “Yes.” b. In the Qty field, type the quantity of the item currently in stock. c. Set Stock Availability to “In Stock.”
Product Information: Inventory
8. On the Website tab, select the checkbox for the website where the product will be
available for sale.
Product Information: Website
Part III: Building Your Catalog
207
Chapter 13: Understanding Product Types
Creating a Simple Product
9. On the Categories tab, assign the product to the appropriate category, as
follows: a. In the Category tree, click to expand the section where the item belongs. b. Select the checkbox to assign the product to the category.
Product Information: Categories
10. After completing the required fields, click the Save and Continue button. 11. Although not required, there are still more sections of Product Information to
complete. Here’s a good place to start: Meta Information Images
You will find detailed instructions for each section of Product Information in the next chapter.
Points to Remember
A simple product can have custom variants and options with a variety of input controls, which makes it possible to sell many product variations from a single SKU. Custom variants and options are not tracked as separate inventory items. A simple product that is used in a one-to-many relationship with a grouped, configurable, or bundle product type cannot have custom variants and options.
208
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 13: Understanding Product Types
Creating a Virtual Product
Creating a Virtual Product
Although virtual products do not have a physical presence, they represent something that can be sold, such as a service, warranty, or subscription. Virtual products can be sold individually, or as part of a one-to-many relationship with the following product types: Grouped Bundle
The process of creating a virtual product and a simple product is nearly the same. However, because virtual products aren’t shipped, there are no Weight or Use Gift Card fields to complete.
To create a Virtual product: 1. From the Admin panel, go to Catalog > Manage Products. Then in the upperright corner of the Manage Products page, click the Add Product button.
2. In the Create Product Settings section, do the following:
a. Accept the default settings for Attribute Set. b. Make sure the Use Complex Product types checkbox is selected. Then, set the Product Type list to “Virtual Product,” and click the Continue button.
Manage Products: Add Product - Create Product Settings, Virtual Product
The Product Information panel groups related fields by topic. All required fields are marked with a red asterisk (*).
Part III: Building Your Catalog
209
Chapter 13: Understanding Product Types
Creating a Virtual Product
Product Information – General, Virtual Product
3. On the General tab, complete the required fields as follows:
a. Type the product Name, as you want it to appear in all catalog listings. b. Assign a unique SKU for the product. c. Set Status to “Enabled.” d. Set Tax Class to the appropriate setting for your area. e. Set Visibility to “Catalog, Search.”
4. On the Prices tab, enter the Price you intend to charge for the product or service. 5. On the Description tab, complete the required fields as follows:
a. Type a Short Description of the product. b. In the Description box, type the main description that will appear on the product view page.
6. If you’re not going to use Magento Go to manage your inventory, you can skip
this section. Otherwise, complete the required fields on the Inventory tab as follows: a. Under Manage Stock, clear the Use Config Settings checkbox. Then, set Manage Stock to “Yes.” b. In the Qty field, type the quantity of the item currently in stock. c. Set Stock Availability to “In Stock.”
210
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 13: Understanding Product Types
Creating a Virtual Product
7. On the Website tab, select the checkbox for the website where the product or
service will be available for sale.
8. On the Categories tab, assign the product to the appropriate category, as follows:
a. In the Product Category tree, click to expand the section where the item belongs. b. Select the checkbox to assign the product to the category.
9. After completing the required fields, click the Save and Continue button. 10. Although not required, there are still more sections of Product Information to
complete. Here’s a good place to start: Meta Information Images
You will find detailed instructions for each section of Product Information in the next chapter.
Points to Remember
Virtual products can be used for anything that is not physical in nature, such as services, subscriptions, and warranties. Virtual products are much like simple products, but without the Weight and Allow Gift Message fields. Shipping Options appear during checkout only if there is also a physical product in the cart.
Part III: Building Your Catalog
211
Chapter 13: Understanding Product Types
Creating a Gift Card
Creating a Gift Card
There are three kinds of gift card products: virtual gift cards which are sent by email, physical gift cards, which can be shipped to the recipient, and a combination of the two. Each gift card has a unique code, which can be redeemed by only one customer during checkout. Virtual Physical Combined
Step 1:
Create the Gift Card Product
1. From the Admin panel, select Catalog > Manage Products. Then, click the Add
Product button.
2. In the Create Product Settings section, select the Attribute Set you want to use
the product.
Catalog > Manage Products: Add Product - Create Product Settings
3. Make sure the Use Complex Product Types checkbox is selected. Then, set
Product Type to Gift Card and click the Continue button.
4. You can complete most of the Product Information as you would for a simple
product.
5. Click the Save and Continue button.
212
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 13: Understanding Product Types
Creating a Gift Card
Step 2:
Set Up the Gift Card Pricing
1. In the Product Information panel on the left, click Prices. 2. To add predefined gift card prices, click the Add Amount button. Then, enter a
price in the Amount field. Repeat this step to add more pricing options.
3. Set Allow Open Amount to one of the following:
No Yes To require customers to select a predefined gift card amount. To allow customers to enter their own gift card amount.
4. If Allow Open Amount is set to “Yes,” you can enter the minimum and
maximum amounts allowed: Open Amount Min Value Open Amount Max Value
5. Click the Save button.
Catalog > Manage Products: Product Information - Prices
Part III: Building Your Catalog
213
Chapter 13: Understanding Product Types
Creating a Gift Card
Step 3:
Complete the Gift Card Information
1. In the Product Information panel, select Gift Card Information. 2. Set Card Type to one of the following:
Virtual: The gift card will be sent to recipient by email. The order will require an email address of the recipient. Shipping address will not be necessary. Physical: The gift card will be shipped to recipient’s address. Recipient address will be required during purchase. Combined: The gift card will be shipped and emailed to recipient. Recipient’s email and shipping address will be required during purchase.
3. In the Is Redeemable field, specify whether the account that will be created for
this Gift Card product will be redeemable, i.e. able to be transferred to the Store Credit upon creation.
4. Set Lifetime (days) to the number of days left before the gift card expires. If you
do not want to set a limit for the lifetime of the card, leave this field blank.
5. In the Allow Gift Message field, specify whether the customer who purchases
the Gift Card can add a message for the recipient. The message is included for both virtual (emailed) and physical (shipped) gift cards.
6. In the Email Template field, select the template that you want to use for the
notification email that is sent when a gift card account is created.
7. Click the Save button.
Catalog > Manage Products: Product Information – Gift Card Information
214
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 13: Understanding Product Types
Creating a Gift Card
Managing Gift Card Accounts
A gift card account is created for each Gift Card purchased. The value of the gift card can then be applied toward the purchase of a product in your store.
Setting the Gift Card Code Pool
The Code Pool is a pre-generated set of unique gift card codes in a specific format. Codes from the code pool are used each time a gift card account is created. It is the administrator's responsibility to assure there are enough free codes in the code pool for the gift cards. Make sure to generate a code pool before starting to offer Gift Card products. Note: By default, Magento Go generates 1,000 codes. A new pool will not be generated if there are still unused codes available.
To establish the gift card code pool: 1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. In the Configuration panel on the left, under Sales, select Gift Cards. 3. Click to expand the Gift Card Account General Settings section. 4. Click the Generate button to create the new code pool.
When complete, the message, “New code pool was generated” appears.
Gift Card Account General Settings
Part III: Building Your Catalog
215
Chapter 13: Understanding Product Types
Creating a Gift Card
Creating a Gift Card Account
To create a gift card account: 1. From the Admin panel, select Customers > Gift Card Accounts. 2. Click the Add New button. 3. On the Information tab, make sure that Active is set to “Yes.”
This field determines whether the balance of the account can be redeemed in the shopping cart before the products' checkout. Also, the value in this field determines whether the balance of the account can be transferred to a customer's Store Credit.
4. In the Websites field, select the website where this gift card account can be
redeemed.
5. In the Balance field, enter the balance of the gift card account. 6. Enter the Expiration Date for the gift card. If left blank, the gift card account will
not expire.
Customers > Gift Card Accounts: Add New - Information
216
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 13: Understanding Product Types
Creating a Gift Card
7. In the Gift Card Account panel on the left, click Send Gift Card. Then, do the
following: a. In the Recipient Email field, enter the email address to which an email notification of this gift card account will be sent. This field is optional, and no email will be sent if it is left blank. b. In the Recipient Name field, enter the name of the email recipient. c. In the Send Email from the Following Store View field, select the language store view from which an email containing the gift card account number will be sent to the email recipient whose email and name are specified in the previous two fields.
Customers > Gift Card Accounts: Add New – Send Gift Card
8. Do one of the following:
If no recipient has been added, click the Save button to save the gift card. Click the Save & Send Email button to save the changes and send the gift card by email to the recipient.
Viewing Gift Card History
When the gift card account is saved, you will be redirected to the Manage Gift Card Accounts page, where the new account is listed. If you need to update any settings, click to open the record in Edit mode. In addition, you can check the status and balance history of the account. Note: The code and the status of a gift card account cannot be edited.
Part III: Building Your Catalog
217
Chapter 13: Understanding Product Types
Creating a Gift Card
Configuration Settings
Use the System Configuration Gift Card settings to establish the default settings for all gift cards sold through your store.
1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. In the Configuration panel on the left, under Sales, select Gift Cards. 3. Click to expand the Gift Card Email Settings. Then do the following:
a. Set Gift Card Notification Email Sender to the identity that you want to appear as the sender of email notifications from your store. b. Set Gift Card Notification Email Template to the template you want to use for the notification sent.
Configuration: Sales – Gift Card, Gift Card Email Settings
4. To set up the sender of email messages sent from the store, and the gift card
template used, click to expand the Email Sent from Gift Card Account Management section. Then, do the following: a. Set Gift Card Email Sender to the identity that you want to appear as the sender of gift cards from your store. b. Set Gift Card Template to the template you want to use for the gift card.
Configuration: Sales – Gift Card, Email Sent from Gift Card Account Management
218
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 13: Understanding Product Types
Creating a Gift Card
5. Click to expand the Gift Card General Settings section. Then, set the following
fields to the default settings that you want to use for gift card purchases: Redeemable (Yes / No) Lifetime (days) Allow Gift Message (Yes / No) Gift Message Maximum Length Generate Gift Card Account when Order Item is (Ordered / Invoiced)
Configuration: Sales – Gift Card, Gift Card General Settings
Points to Remember
A “code pool” of unique numbers must be generated before a gift card can be offered for sale. Gift cards come in three types: Virtual, Physical, and Combined. Gift cards can be set to “Redeemable” or “Non-Redeemable.” The lifetime of a gift card can be set in days. The value of a gift card can be set to a fixed amount or to an open amount with a minimum and maximum value. A gift card account for the customer is created either at the time of order or at the time of invoice.
Part III: Building Your Catalog
219
Chapter 13: Understanding Product Types
Creating a Grouped Product
Creating a Grouped Product
A grouped product lets you offer multiple, standalone products as a group. You can offer variations of a single product, or group them by season or theme to create a coordinated set. Each product can be purchased separately, or as part of the group.
To create a grouped product: 1. From the Admin panel, select Catalog > Manage Products. Then, click the Add
Product button.
2. In the Create Product Settings section, select the Attribute Set you want to use
the product.
Catalog > Manage Products: Add Product - Create Product Settings
3. Make sure the Use Complex Product Types checkbox is selected. Then, set
Product Type to Grouped Product and click the Continue button.
4. You can complete the main configuration settings as you would for a simple
product, with the following exceptions: a. On the Prices tab, a grouped product record has no Price field or associated price options because the price of each item in the group originates from the associated product record. b. On the Inventory tab, you can set quantity increments and stock availability for the group, as a whole, but the inventory of individual items is managed by the associated product records.
5. Click the Save and Continue button.
220
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 13: Understanding Product Types
Creating a Grouped Product
Adding Associated Products
To define associated products: 1. In the Product Information panel on the left, select the Associated Products. 2. Click the Reset Filter button to list all available products. You can also filter by
available fields in columns and clicking the Search button to display a filtered group of products.
3. Select the checkbox of each product you want to include in the group.
Grouped Product: Associated Products
4. Click the Save button to save your changes.
Part III: Building Your Catalog
221
Chapter 13: Understanding Product Types
Creating a Grouped Product
Configuring Thumbnail Images
The product image that appears in the shopping cart can be set to display the image from the grouped product record, or the thumbnail image of from the associated product for the specific item purchased. This setting applies to all grouped products in the store, or current view.
1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. In the Configuration panel on the left, under Sales, select Checkout. 3. In the Shopping Cart section, set Grouped Product Image to one of the
following: Product Thumbnail Itself Parent Product Thumbnail
4. Click the Save Config button to save the setting.
System > Configuration: Sales – Shopping Cart
Points to Remember
A grouped product is essentially a collection of simple associated products. Simple and virtual products associated with a grouped product cannot have custom variants or options. Each item purchased appears individually in the shopping cart, rather than as part of the group.
222
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 13: Understanding Product Types
Creating a Configurable Product
Creating a Configurable Product
A configurable product appears to the customer as a single product with lists of options for each variation. However, each option represents a separate simple product with a distinct SKU, which makes it possible to track inventory for each variation. Using the example of a tee shirt that comes in three colors and three sizes, it takes nine associated simple product records to cover every possible combination of options. Blue (Small, Medium, Large) Green (Small, Medium, Large) Orange (Small, Medium, Large)
A configurable product gives you the ability to track inventory for each variation, because each variation is actually a separate simple product with a distinct SKU. You could achieve the same effect using a simple product with custom variants and options, but you would not be able to track inventory for the variations. Although a configurable product uses more SKUs, and may initially take a little longer to set up, it can save you time in the long run, it does give you more capability in the long run.
Overview of the Process
Each option or variant, is based on a product attribute that is set up in advance, before the configurable product record is created. A separate attribute is created for each drop-down list. Then, each is loaded with the values needed for the variations. Because these attributes are handled separately, they can also be shared with other products and product types. For example, if your store already has an attribute for color, you don’t need to create another one. But you do need to add the appropriate color values, so they will be available as options. If you have a large catalog with many items that share common attributes, this can represent a significant time savings. The drop-down attributes are then included in an attribute set, which will be used as a template to create the configurable product and associated records. The next step is to create the configurable product record, based on the attribute set you prepared, and complete the basic required fields.
Part III: Building Your Catalog
223
Chapter 13: Understanding Product Types
Creating a Configurable Product
The final part of the process is to add an associated product to the configurable product record for each variation. It is not necessary to create the product records in advance, because they can be generated automatically from the configurable product record. Each associated product is actually a simple product, and is based on the same attribute set that is used to create the configurable product.
Step 1:
Create the “Drop-down” Attributes
1. From the Admin panel, select Catalog > Attributes > Manage Attributes. Then,
click the Add New button.
2. In the Attribute Properties section, do the following:
a. Assign a unique Name to the attribute, using lowercase characters and underscore instead of spaces. (This name is for internal use only.) b. Set Scope to “Global.” c. Set Catalog Input Type for Store Owner to “Dropdown.” d. Set Values Required to “Yes.” e. Set the Apply To list to one of the following: All Products Selected Product Types Then in the list, select “Configurable Product.” You can also select additional product types if you want.
3. Set Use to Create Configurable Product to “Yes.”
224
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 13: Understanding Product Types
Creating a Configurable Product
Catalog > Attributes > Manage Attributes: Add New
4. In the Attribute Information panel on the left, select Manage Label / Options. 5. In the Manage Titles section under Admin, enter a label for the drop-down list.
By default, the same label is used in the Admin panel and store. If you want to use a different label in the store, or if your store is available in multiple languages, enter the appropriate label for each.
Manage Labels / Options: Manage Titles
Part III: Building Your Catalog
225
Chapter 13: Understanding Product Types
Creating a Configurable Product
6. In the Manage Options section, click the Add Option button. Then, do the
following: a. In the text field under Admin, type the first value you want to appear in the list. By default, the same value is used in the Admin panel and store. b. If your store is available in multiple languages, enter the translation of the value in the appropriate text box. Repeat this step to add as many options as needed.
7. To assign a default value for the drop-down list, select Is Default to identify the
option you want to use as the default.
8. To change the order in which the options appear in the drop-down list, enter a
number in the Position column to set the position of each option in relation to the others.
Manage Labels / Options: Manage Options
9. When complete, click the Save Attribute button.
226
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 13: Understanding Product Types
Creating a Configurable Product
Step 2:
Create the Attribute Set
1. From the Admin panel, select Catalog > Attributes > Manage Attribute Sets.
Then, click the Add New Set button.
2. Assign a Name to the attribute set. 3. In the Based On list, select an existing attribute set, such as “Default,” to use as a
template. Then, click the Save Attribute Set button.
Catalog > Attributes > Manage Attribute Sets: Add New Set
4. Starting from the list of Unassigned Attributes, drag and drop each attribute
you want to use as a drop-down list to the center column. You can arrange them in any order.
List of Unassigned Attributes
Part III: Building Your Catalog
227
Chapter 13: Understanding Product Types
Creating a Configurable Product
5.
If you want to group the attributes in their own section of the Product Information panel, do the following: a. Click the Add New button. Note: If prompted by your browser, select “Temporarily Allow Scripted Windows” to continue. Then, click the Add New button again. b. When prompted, enter a name for the new group. Then, click the OK button. The new group appears at the bottom of the Groups column.
Naming a New Group
c. Drag and drop each attribute you want to include, over to the new group.
Dragging an Attribute to the New Group
6. Click the Save Attribute Set button.
228
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 13: Understanding Product Types
Creating a Configurable Product
Step 3:
Create the Configurable Product Record
1. From the Admin panel, select Catalog > Manage Products. Then, click the Add
Product button.
2. In the Create Product Settings section, select the Attribute Set you created for
the product.
Catalog > Manage Products: Add Product - Create Product Settings
3. Make sure the Use Complex Product Types checkbox is selected. Then, set
Product Type to Configurable Product and click the Continue button.
4. Complete the Product Information as you would for a simple product, with the
exception of the following fields: On the Prices tab, the Price is required, but is used as a default price. The price of individual associated products can be adjusted accordingly. On the Inventory tab, Manage Stock is set by default to “No,” because inventory is managed by each associated product.
5. Click the Save and Continue button.
Step 4:
Add the Associated Products
Magento Go provides three different ways to add associated products: Quick Simple Product Creation Create Empty Copy from Configurable
1. In the Product Information panel on the left, select the last option, Associated
Products.
2. Then, use one of the following methods to add the associated products.
Part III: Building Your Catalog
229
Chapter 13: Understanding Product Types
Creating a Configurable Product
Method 1: Quick Simple Product Creation
This method automatically creates the associated products and optionally, assigns a Name and SKU to each one.
1. In the Quick Simple Product Creation section, make sure that the Autogenerate
checkbox is selected for Name and SKU. This optional setting adds the name and SKU from each associated product to those of the configurable product.
2. Complete these fields as follows:
a. Enter the Weight. b. Set Status to “Enabled.” c. Set Visibility to “Not Visible Individually.”
Quick Simple Product Creation
3. To complete the fields for the drop-down lists, do the following:
a. Select the value you need from each list to create the first product. b. Enter the Qty, and set Stock Availability to “’In Stock.” c. Click the Quick Create button to create the associated product record. Repeat this step for the values needed for each associated product. As each associated products is created, it is added to the list at the bottom of the page.
230
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 13: Understanding Product Types
Creating a Configurable Product
Method 2: Create Empty
This method opens a blank Product Information form, which you can complete for each associated product.
1. In the Create Simple Associated Product section, click the Create Empty button.
A pop-up window with a blank Product Information form appears.
2. Complete the required fields as you would for any simple product. 3. Click the Save button to add the associated product to the configurable product
record.
Method 3: Copy from Configurable
This method opens a Product Information form that contains the values already entered for the configurable product. The only fields that need to be completed are the Name, SKU, and values for each drop-down list.
1. In the Create Simple Associated Product section, click the Copy From
Configurable button. A pop-up window with the basic Product Information from the configurable product appears.
2. Complete the following required fields:
SKU Weight
3. Complete the fields with values for each drop-down list. 4. Click the Save button to add the associated product to the configurable product
record.
Part III: Building Your Catalog
231
Chapter 13: Understanding Product Types
Creating a Configurable Product
Configuring Thumbnail Images
The product image that appears in the shopping cart can be set to display the image from the configurable product record, or the thumbnail image of from the associated product for the specific item purchased. This setting applies to all configurable products in the store, or current view.
1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. In the Configuration panel on the left, under Sales, select Checkout. 3. In the Shopping Cart section, set Configurable Product Image to one of the
following: Product Thumbnail Itself Parent Product Thumbnail
4. Click the Save Config button to save the setting.
System > Configuration: Sales – Shopping Cart
232
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 13: Understanding Product Types
Creating a Configurable Product
Overriding Default Prices
Use the Super Products Attributes section to override the default price of an item. The price can be entered as a fixed amount or as a percentage of the default price of the configurable product. The price of the associated product is not used in the calculation. For more information, see: “Importing Configurable Products,” on page 409.
Super Product Attributes Configuration
Additional Inventory Settings
By default, Manage Stock is turned off for a configurable product, because the inventory is managed through each associated product. At times it may be necessary to make inventory settings for the configurable product as a whole, such as setting quantity increments and changing the stock availability.
To enable quantity increments: 1. On the Inventory tab, clear the Use Config Settings checkbox and set Manage
Stock to “Yes.” The Enable Qty Increments field appears.
2. To sell the product in quantity increments, do the following:
a. Below the Enable Qty Increments field, clear the Use Config Settings checkbox. Then, set Enable Qty Increments to “Yes.” b. In the Qty Increments field, enter the number of products that you want to sell together as a single batch.
Part III: Building Your Catalog
233
Chapter 13: Understanding Product Types
Creating a Configurable Product
To set the product as “Out of Stock:” 1. On the Inventory tab, clear the Use Config Settings checkbox and set Manage
Stock to “Yes.” The Stock Availability field appears.
2. To temporarily remove the product from sale, set Stock Availability to “Out of
Stock.”
3. When you are ready to offer the product for sale, set Stock Availability to “In
Stock.”
Points to Remember
A configurable product is essentially a collection of simple products that is presented as a list of drop-down options. The drop-down list values are based on attributes that must be set up in advance with required settings. The attribute Scope must be set to “Global,” and Use to Create Configurable Product must be “True.” The drop-down attributes must be included in an attribute set, which is then used as a template for the configurable product. The simple products associated with a configurable product cannot include custom variants or options, and must be based on the same attribute set that is used to create the configurable product. The associated products can be generated automatically from inside with configurable product record. The image of the product that appears during checkout can be set to display either the “Parent Image” or the “Product Thumbnail Itself.”
234
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 13: Understanding Product Types
Creating a Bundle Product
Creating a Bundle Product
A bundle product let customers “build their own” from an assortment of options. The bundle could be a gift basket, computer, or anything else that can be customized. Each item in the bundle can be based on one of the following product types: Simple Virtual
Step 1:
Create the Bundle Product
1. From the Admin panel, select Catalog > Manage Products. Then, click the Add
Product button.
2. In the Create Product Settings section, select the Attribute Set for the product.
Catalog > Manage Products: Add Product - Create Product Settings
3. Make sure the Use Complex Product Types checkbox is selected. Set Product
Type to Bundle Product, and click the Continue button.
Part III: Building Your Catalog
235
Chapter 13: Understanding Product Types
Creating a Bundle Product
Step 2:
Complete the Product Information
1. Complete the Product Information as you would for a simple product, with the
exception of the following fields: a. On the General tab, set both the SKU and Weight fields to one of the following: Dynamic Fixed If using a Fixed value, enter the actual value in the field to the right.
Bundle Dynamic SKU and Weight
b. On the Prices tab, set the Price to one of the following: Dynamic Fixed If using a Fixed value, enter the actual value in the field to the right. c. On the Prices tab, set the Price View to one of the following: As Low as Price Range
236
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 13: Understanding Product Types
Creating a Bundle Product
Bundle Dynamic Price and Price View
Step 3:
Add Bundle Items
1. In the Product Information panel on the left, select the last option, Bundle
Items.
2. Then in the Shipment section, set Ship Bundle Items to one of the following:
Together Separately
Ship Bundle Items Together
3. In the Bundle Items section, click the Add New Option button.
Add Bundle Item
Part III: Building Your Catalog
237
Chapter 13: Understanding Product Types
Creating a Bundle Product
4. In the Default Title box, enter a label for the bundle item, as you want it to
appear on the Customize Product page. Then, do the following: a. Set the Input Type to one of the following: Drop-down Radio Buttons Checkbox Multiple Select
b. Set Is Required as needed. c. In the Position field, enter the order that you want this item listed in relation to other items included in the bundle.
5. Click the Add Selection button. Then, do the following:
a. Click the Reset Filter button to display the list of products. b. Select the checkbox of each product that you want to include in this item. c. Then, in the Qty to Add column, enter the quantity of each item to be included.
Select the Checkbox of Each Item
6. Click the Add Selected Product(s) to Option button.
238
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 13: Understanding Product Types
Creating a Bundle Product
7. When the items appear in the Bundle Items list, do the following:
a. If you want to prevent the customer from changing the quantity of the item, set User Defined Qty to “No.” Otherwise, accept the default setting of “Yes,” which displays an input box so the customer can enter the quantity. b. To change the order of the items, enter a number in the Position column of each item to determine its position in relation to other items. c. Select the Default option of the item you want to be pre-selected in the form.
Bundle Items
8. Repeat steps 3-7 for each bundle item you want to include. 9. When complete, click the Save button to save the bundle product.
Setting SKU Fixed or Dynamic Description Determines if each item is assigned a variable, dynamic SKU, or if a fixed SKU is used for the bundle. Specifies the weight is calculated based on the items selected, or is a fixed weight for the entire bundle. Specifies whether the product price is shown as a range, from the least expensive component to the most expensive (Price Range), or the least expensive shown (As Low As). Specifies if individual items can be shipped separately.
Weight Fixed or Dynamic
Price View
Ship Bundle Items
Part III: Building Your Catalog
239
Chapter 13: Understanding Product Types
Creating a Bundle Product
Points to Remember
A bundle is a “Build Your Own” product Bundle items can be simple or virtual products, but without custom variants and options The Price View can be set to a price range or “As Low as” The SKU and Weight of a bundle product can be set to either “Fixed” or “Dynamic” The Quantity can be set to a pre-set or user-defined value Items can be shipped together or separately
Troubleshooting Tips
If your product does not appear in your store, check the following settings:
Product Information General Status must be enabled. Visibility must be set to include the catalog. Inventory If managing stock, quantity on hand must be greater than zero. Stock Availability must be set to “In Stock.” Website Categories The product must be assigned to a website. The product must be assigned to a category.
240
Magento Go User Guide
CHAPTER 14:
Product Information
The Product Information panel provides access to the settings which make up a product record. The sections covered in this chapter include: General Prices Meta Information Images Description Design Inventory Websites Categories Product Relationships (Related Products, Up-sells, Cross-sells) Custom Variants and Options Product View Optimization
Manage Products: Product Information
Part III: Building Your Catalog
241
Chapter 14: Product Information
General
General
Product Information: General
Field Descriptions
Field Name Description (Required) The name of the product you want to appear in catalog. The name is also used to auto-generate the URL Key. (Required) The Stock Keeping Unit is a unique identifier for each individual product or service provided. (Required) The weight of the product is a decimal value used for shipping calculations, and refers to the standard measurement system used by shipping carriers in your locale. In the United States, weight is measured in pounds and ounces, whereas countries on the metric system measure weight in grams and kilograms.
SKU
Weight
242
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 14: Product Information
General
Field Status
Description (Required) The Status indicates when the product is ready to be offered for sale in your store. Options include: Enabled / Disabled. (Required) Select the appropriate Tax Class for the product. Options include: None: The item is not subject to tax. Default: The item is subject to the tax rules associated with the “default’ tax class. Taxable Goods: The item is subject to the tax rules associated with the “Taxable Goods” tax class. The manner in which product taxes are calculated is determined by the configuration of your store. For more information, see:
Tax Class
URL Key
The URL Key determines the online address of the product. It is added to the base URL of the store, and appears in the address bar of a browser. The URL Key should be all lowercase characters, with hyphens instead of spaces. Magento initially creates a default, “search engine friendly” URL, based on the product name. Do not type the suffix .html in the URL Key, because use of the suffix is controlled by your store configuration. For more information, go to: System > Configuration > Catalog > Search Engine Optimizations.
Part III: Building Your Catalog
243
Chapter 14: Product Information
General
Field Visibility
Description (Required) Determines the level of visibility the product has throughout the store. Options include: Not Visible Individually: The product may be associated with a one-to-many product, but is not listed in the catalog. Catalog: The product appears in the catalog listing, but is not included in Search results. Search: The product appears in search results, but is not listed in the catalog. Catalog, Search: The product is listed in the catalog and search results.
Allow Gift Message
Displays a Gift Message input box. Options include: Yes: Presents the option to include a gift message for the product in the Shipping Method section of the checkout process. No: Does not offer the gift message option. Use Config: Applies the gift message configuration setting for order items.
Manufacturer
Select the manufacturer of the product. To add new options to the list, see Manage Label / Options. (Required) Select the color of the product. To add new options to the list, see Manage Label / Options. Sets the beginning date for the range of time the product is featured in the “New Product” block on the Home page. The date can be typed directly into the box, or selected from the calendar. Sets the ending date for the range of time the product is featured in the “New Product” block on the Home page. Determines if the product is included in your store’s standard RSS feed. Options include: Yes / No
Color
Set Product as New from Date
Set Product as New to Date
In feed
244
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 14: Product Information
Prices
Prices
Product Information: Prices
Tier Pricing
Tier pricing is used to offer a quantity discount. The discount can be applied to a specific store view or customer group. The tier price is listed on both the Category List and Product Detail pages: On the Category List page, the product listing includes the words, “As Low As: $110.49” On the Product Detail page, the calculated quantity discount appears in a box, with a message that says: Buy 2 for $__._ each and save _% Buy 4 for $__._. each and save _%
Tier Price “As Low as”
Part III: Building Your Catalog
245
Chapter 14: Product Information
Prices
To set a Tier Price: 1. In the Product Information panel on the left, select Prices. 2. In the Tier Price section, click the Add Tier button. T hen, do the following:
a. Select the Website to which the tier pricing applies. b. Select the Customer Group for whom the tier pricing is available. c. In the Qty field, enter the quantity of the item that must be ordered to receive the discount. d. In the Price field, enter the adjusted price of the item.
3. Click the Save button to save your changes.
Tier Pricing
Special Pricing
To offer a Special Price, enter a discounted price and complete the date range fields to establish when the promotion gores into effect. On both the Category List and Product Detail pages, the regular price is crossed out, and the Special Price appears in a bold red font.
Special Pricing
246
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 14: Product Information
Prices
To set a Special Price: 1. I n the Product Information panel on the left, select Prices. 2. Enter the amount of the Special Price. 3. Then, complete the Special Price From Date and Special Price To Date to
define the period of time that the special price is in effect. You can pick the dates from the Calendar to the right of each field.
4. Click the Save button to save your changes. Field Descriptions
Field Price Cost Description The retail price of the product. The actual cost of the product. This amount does not appear to the customer, and can be used to generate revenue reports. Tier pricing is used to offer a quantity discount. The discount can be applied to a specific store view or customer group. To offer a Special Price, enter a discounted price and complete the date range fields to establish when the promotion goes into effect. When available, the retail price is crossed out and the special price appears below in a large, bold font. Special Price From Date Special Price To Date Sets the beginning date for the range of time the Special Price is offered. Sets the ending date for the range of time the Special Price is offered. Determines if the product is available through Google Checkout. Options include: Yes / No
Tier Price
Special Price
Is product available for purchase with Google Checkout
Part III: Building Your Catalog
247
Chapter 14: Product Information
Meta Information
Meta Information
Meta data is your first level of contact with potential customers who are searching for a product. Your title and description are selling tools that will either help to motivate a visitor to click your link or not. It is wise to use a descriptive title and a description that includes relevant words that a potential customer might search. The information is read by search engines that index your site. Although Google no longer places a value on meta keywords, other search engines continue to use the information. It’s a good practice to incorporate high-value keywords in your product titles and related content.
Product Information: Meta Information
Field Descriptions
Field Meta Title Description The title appears in the title bar and tab of your browser, and is also used as the title on a search engine results page (SERP). Enter relevant keywords for the product. Consider using keywords that customers may use to find the product. Write a few sentences to describe the product. Though not visible to the customer, some search engines include the meta description on the search results page.
Meta Keywords
Meta Description
248
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 14: Product Information
Images
Images
Magento Go automatically resizes your main product image for each size needed, so you only need to upload your base image once. Alternatively, for better image management, you might prefer to resize each product image in an image editor and upload one for each image type.
To upload product images: 1. In the Product Information panel on the left, click Images. 2. Click the Browse Files button, and select the product images you want to upload
to your store.
3. When you have selected all your images, click the Upload Files button to upload
the selected images to your store.
4. Complete the information for each image. 5. Click the Save and Continue Edit button any time while you work to save your
information.
Product Information: Images
Part III: Building Your Catalog
249
Chapter 14: Product Information
Images
Field Descriptions
Field Image Label Description Displays a thumbnail of the uploaded image. Provides descriptive text in addition to the image, to improve accessibility and indexing by search engines. Determines the order in which images are displayed in the gallery. The thumbnail image is used in the shopping cart and to display related items. The small image is used in the standard product view page and category listing. The largest product image is used for magnification. Select an image if you do not want it to appear in the image gallery of thumbnails below the main image on the Product Detail page. Select the checkbox of any image you want to remove from the collection. All selected images will be removed after your changes are saved.
Sort Order
Thumbnail
Small Image
Base Image Exclude
Remove
Product Image Placeholders
Magento Go displays a temporary image as a placeholder until permanent product images are available. The initial placeholder image is the Magento logo, which you can replace with placeholder images of your own design.
Product Image Placeholders
250
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 14: Product Information
Images
To upload product image placeholders: 1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. In the Configuration panel on the left, under Catalog, select Catalog. 3. Click to expand the Product Image Placeholders section. Then, do the following:
a. For each image type, click the Browse button to upload the placeholder image you want to use for the Base Image, Small Image, and Thumbnail images. If you like, you can use the same image for each type. b. When complete, click the Save Config button.
System > Configuration > Catalog: Product Image Placeholders
Field Descriptions
Setting Base Image Description The Base Image the highest resolution, and is used to product the “zoom in” magnification effect on the product detail page. The small image is used in the standard product view page and category listing. The thumbnail image is used in the shopping cart and to display related items.
Small Image
Thumbnail
Part III: Building Your Catalog
251
Chapter 14: Product Information
Images
Product Image Watermarks
If you have gone to the expense of creating your own original product images, there is not much you can do to prevent unscrupulous competitors from stealing them with the click of a mouse. However, you can place a watermark on each image, to identify it as your property and make it a less attractive target for bandits. A watermark file can be either a .jpg (jpeg), .gif or .png image.
To upload a product image watermark: 1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. In the Configuration panel on the left, under General, select Design. 3. Click to expand the Product Image Watermarks section. Then, complete the
following steps for each image size (Base, Small, and Thumbnail): a. Enter the Watermark Default Size, in pixels. For example, 200 x 300. b. Enter the Watermark Opacity, as a percentage. For example, .40. c. Click the Browse button and select the Watermark image file to upload. d. Set the Watermark Position to one of the following: Stretch Tile Top/Left Top/Right Bottom/Left Bottom/Right
4. When complete, click the Save Config button.
System > Configuration > General: Design - Product Image Watermarks
252
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 14: Product Information
Images
Field Descriptions
Field Base Image Watermark Default Size Base Image Watermark Opacity, Percent Base Image Watermark Description The default size of the watermark for the Base Image. (For example, 200 x 300) The percentage of opacity of the watermark for the Base Image. The file with the watermark image to be uploaded for the Base Image. (The image file can be .jpg (jpeg), .gif, and .png.) The position of the watermark for the Base Image. Options include: Small Image Thumbnail Image Stretch Tile Top/Left Top/Right Bottom/Left Bottom/Right
Base Image Watermark Position
(Repeat all of the above for the Small Image.) (Repeat all of the above for the Small Image.)
Part III: Building Your Catalog
253
Chapter 14: Product Information
Images
Resizing Catalog Images
Magento Go resizes the product images you upload according to the dimensions specified by the theme. As a best practice, you should standardize the size of your images to ensure that they appear at the highest possible resolution, and maintain the correct proportion. Using images of various sizes and dimensions may impact the quality of the images displayed in your product catalog. One way to ensure that images maintain the correct proportion, or aspect ratio, when scaled is to make each image square. However, you can override the default size by specifying an exact size (in pixels) for any image. This is an easy solution for images that appear blurry or distorted. If you specify a new size for the base image, the associated small image and thumbnail resize automatically.
Design > Themes Editor > Customize (Theme) > Catalog Images
To resize catalog images: 1. From the Admin panel, select Design > Themes Editor.
The thumbnail for your current theme appears on the left, and selection of other available themes appears on the right.
2. Under the thumbnail for your current theme, click Customize. 3. In the Theme Customization panel on the left, select Catalog Images.
The Catalog Images section lists all available catalog images that you can resize. To resize an image, do the following:
254
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 14: Product Information
Images
4. In the Location column, find the image you want to resize. Then, set Image Type
to one of the following: Thumbnail Small Image Base Image
You can select one of the three image types to set to a custom size, and the other two are resized automatically.
5. Enter the size, in pixels, for the image:
Width (px): (Required) If only the width is specified, the image is resized proportionally. Height (px): If both width and height are specified, the image is resized exactly.
6. To restore the size of an image size, do the following:
To restore one catalog image to its default size, click the Reset button to the right of the image. To restore all catalog images to their default sizes, click the Restore Default button in the upper right of the Catalog Images section.
7. To preview your change, first click the Save button. Then click the Preview
button in the upper right to preview the resized image.
8. When finished, click the Save button.
Note: When you resize a catalog image, the change applies to all themes. After resizing a catalog image, you should also update any custom CSS to ensure that the image renders correctly. For more information, see the Magento Go Design Guide.
Part III: Building Your Catalog
255
Chapter 14: Product Information
Description
Description
Product Information: Description
Field Descriptions
Field Description Description (Required) This is the main product description that appears on the product view page. The text should be plain ASCII text, although HTML tags can be added to format the description. Do not paste text directly from a word processor, because it may include print control codes which do not render online. To strip out any stray control codes, save the file as a .txt file, before using the text in the product description. Short Description (Required) Depending on the theme, the Short Description may appear on catalog pages, and is often used in RSS feeds. The WYSIWYG Editor button appears below each field, if it is enabled for your store. For more information, see System > Configuration > General > Content Management > WYSIWYG Option.
256
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 14: Product Information
Description
Using the WYSIWYG Editor
The Editor gives you the ability to create and edit HTML code while working in a “What You See Is What You Get” view of the content. When working in the product catalog, the Editor is accessed by clicking the WYSIWYG Editor button. To learn more, see: “Using the Editor,” on page 101.
Product Information: Description – WYSIWYG Editor
Part III: Building Your Catalog
257
Chapter 14: Product Information
Description
Dynamic Media URLs
Unlike an external link, a Dynamic Media URL is an internal reference to an image or other media asset which has been uploaded to your store’s Media Storage library. The format of a Dynamic Media URL looks like this: {{media url="path/to/image.jpg"}} When enabled, this setting makes it possible to include links to dynamic media assets in both products and categories. For example, when this feature is enabled, you can use the WYSIWYG Editor to insert a link to an image in a product Description field. The use of Dynamic Media URLs can impact the performance of catalog search. If Dynamic Media URLs are included in your catalog, but later the setting is disabled, each reference in your catalog will appear as a broken link. However, the links can be restored by changing the setting to allow Dynamic Media URLs.
To change the Dynamic Media URL setting: 1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. In the Configuration panel on the left, under Catalog, select Catalog. 3. In the Frontend section, set Allow Dynamic Media URLs in Products and
Categories to either “Yes” or “No.”
System > Configuration > General > Content Management
4. Click the Save Config button to save the setting.
258
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 14: Product Information
Design
Design
The Design page lets you apply a custom theme for a period of time, and make updates to the underlying code. For more information, see the Magento Go Design Guide.
To customize the product page: 1. To apply a different theme to the Product Detail page, select the theme you want
to use from the Custom Theme list.
2. To apply the product design to a specific range of time, click the calendar to select
the Active From and Active To dates. Otherwise, the design will take effect when you save the changes to the product.
3. You can further change the layout of the product page by applying a different
Page Layout.
4. Click the Save Category button to save your changes.
Product Information: Design
Part III: Building Your Catalog
259
Chapter 14: Product Information
Design
Field Descriptions
Field Custom Theme Description To apply a custom theme, select the one you want from the list of available themes. If applying a custom theme for a period of time, enter the beginning date, or select the date from the Calendar. If applying a custom theme for a period of time, enter the ending date, or select the date from the Calendar. You can further customize the theme with XML coding. See the Magento Go Design Guide to learn more about customizing themes. Options include: Product Info Column Block after Info Column Page Layout To apply a different layout to the Product Detail page, select one of the following: No layout updates: This option is preselected by default and does not apply layout changes to the category page. Empty: This option is used to define your own layout, such as a 4-column layout. An understanding of XML is required. 1 column: Applies the 1-column layout to the category page. 2 columns with left bar: Applies the 2 column layout to the category page. 2 columns with right bar: Applies the 2-columns with right bar layout to the category page. 3 columns: Applies the 3 column layout to the category page.
Active From
Active To
Custom Layout Update
Display product options in
260
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 14: Product Information
Inventory
Inventory
By default, the Inventory tab displays a short form that is set to not manage stock. To display the full range of inventory management options, follow the instructions below.
Product Information: Inventory (Short Form)
To set up the product inventory: 1. In the Product Information panel, select Inventory. Then, do the following:
a. Clear the checkbox below the Manage Stock field. Then, set Manage Stock to “Yes.” b. In the Qty field, type the number of units you currently have in stock. c. Set Stock Availability to “In Stock.”
2. Click the Save button to save your changes.
Note: You can define both default product inventory settings and global inventory managements settings in the System > Configuration > Catalog > Inventory.
Field Descriptions
Field Manage Stock Description Determines whether or not inventory is managed for this product. Options include: Yes / No Determines the minimum amount of this item that is available for purchase. Determines the maximum number of this item that can be purchased in a single order.
Minimum Qty Allowed in Shopping Cart Maximum Qty Allowed in Shopping Cart
Part III: Building Your Catalog
261
Chapter 14: Product Information
Inventory
Product Information: Inventory (Long Form)
Setting Quantity Increments
If you sell a product in various increments, it is important to set them up properly so you can accurately track inventory. For example, selling wine cases in boxes containing 6 bottles of wine each, you would want each sale to reduce your inventory level by 6 rather than 1.
To set up Quantity Increments: 1. In the Product Information panel, select Inventory. Then, do the following:
a. Set Manage Stock to “Yes.” b. In the Qty field, enter the number of this item in your inventory. c. In the Qty For Item’s Status to become Out of Stock field, enter a number that is 1 less than the quantity you are selling. For example, if you are selling a case of six bottles of wine, enter 5. d. In the Minimum Qty Allowed in Shopping Cart field, enter the number of items sold as a unit. Following the example of a case of six bottles of wine, enter 6.
262
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 14: Product Information
Inventory
e. In the Maximum Qty Allowed in Shopping Cart, enter the maximum number of items you want customers to be able to order. For example, to limit each order to twelve bottles of wine, enter 12. f. In the Notify for Quantity Below field, type a quantity to be used as a threshold to receive notification when the inventory falls below the level. g. To set Enable Qty Increments, clear the Use Config Settings checkbox. Select “Yes,” and do the following: In the Qty Increments field, type the number of items to be sold as a set. For example, if selling a case of wine, type 6 to sell of wine only in increments of 6. h. Set Stock Availability to “In Stock.”
2. Click the Save button to save your changes.
To set the out of stock threshold:
In the Product Information panel, select Inventory. The Qty for Item’s Status to Become Out of Stock field can be modified to define the threshold for an item being out of stock. To reserve an extra amount of stock for discretionary reasons, you can set the value above 0, which is the default.
To change the quantity allowed in cart: 1. In the Product Information panel, select Inventory. 2. Change the Minimum and Maximum Quantity Allowed in Shopping Cart fields
to appropriate values for your product, store, and strategy. Tip: This option is helpful for products in high-demand. If you want to capture a larger number of new customers rather than selling high volumes to high-quantity buyers, you can set a maximum quantity to prevent a high-quantity buyer from taking out your entire inventory.
Part III: Building Your Catalog
263
Chapter 14: Product Information
Inventory
To notify when stock drops below a certain threshold: 1. In the Product Information panel, select Inventory. 2. Clear the Use Config Settings checkbox, and set Notify for Quantity Below to
indicate the level at which you want to be notified. By default, the value is set to 1. Tip: If you need time to restock your inventory, you can change the value of this field to replenish.
Low-Stock Reports
Magento Go allows you to view out-of-stock and low-stock reports from the Admin panel or to export it in CSV file format or as Microsoft Excel format.
To generate the Low Stock Report: 1. From the Admin panel, select Reports > Products > Low Stock. 2. Set Export to one of the following file formats: CSV or Excel. 3. Click the Export button and saved the file on your computer. Field Descriptions
Setting Manage Stock Description Determines if you use full inventory control to manage the items in your catalog. Options include: No: Does not keep track of the number of items currently in stock. (This is the default setting.) Yes: Activates full inventory control to keep track of the number of items currently in stock. (To change the setting, clear the Use Config Settings checkbox and select “Yes.”) Qty Qty For Item’s Status to become Out of Stock Minimum Qty Allowed in Shopping Cart (Required) The quantity of the item in stock. Specifies that below a level of your choosing, the product will become Out of Stock. Determines the minimum amount of this item that is available for purchase. By default, the minimum quantity is set to 1.
264
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 14: Product Information
Inventory
Setting Maximum Qty Allowed in Shopping Cart
Description Determines the maximum number of this item that can be purchased in a single order. By default, the maximum quantity is set to 1000. Determines if customers can use a decimal value rather than a whole number when entering the quantity ordered. Options include: Yes: Permits values to be entered as decimals, rather than whole numbers, which is suitable for products sold by weight, volume or length. No: Quantity values must be entered as whole numbers.
Qty Uses Decimals
Backorders
Options include: No Backorders: Does not accept backorders when product is out of stock. Allow Qty Below 0: Accepts backorders when the quantity falls below zero. Allow Qty Below 0 and Notify Customer: Accepts backorders when the quantity falls below zero, but notifies customers that orders can still be placed.
Notify for Quantity Below
Sends a notification to you when the quantity in stock falls below this number. Allows the product to be sold in quantity increments. Sets the number used as the basis of quantity increments. Determines the current availability of the product. Options include: In Stock: Makes the product available for purchase. Out of Stock: Unless Backorders are activated, prevents the product from being available for purchase and removes the listing from the catalog.
Enable Qty Increments
Qty Increments
Stock Availability
Part III: Building Your Catalog
265
Chapter 14: Product Information
Websites
Websites
If your Magento Go site has multiple stores or views, you can set the scope of a configuration setting, product, category, or attribute, to apply to a specific store or view. The scope provides context for the configuration setting. The Website tab identifies the website, store, and view where the product is available.
Product Information: Websites
To identify the website(s) where the product is available: 1. In the Product Information panel on the left, select Websites. 2. Select the checkbox for each store view where the product is offered for sale.
266
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 14: Product Information
Categories
Categories
Every product in your catalog must be assigned to at least one category. Therefore, before you can build your product records, you must first establish the basic category structure of your catalog. In addition, a product record cannot be saved until it is assigned to at least one category.
Product Information: Categories
To set up the product categories: 1. In the Product Information panel, select Categories. 2. Click the check box of each category where you want the product to appear. Click
the [+] icon to expand a category to reveal its subcategories.
3. Click the Save button to save your changes.
Part III: Building Your Catalog
267
Chapter 14: Product Information
Product Relationships
Product Relationships
All the topics in this section establish relationships between products, and the process of setting them up is essentially the same.
Related Products
Related products are meant to be purchased in addition to the item the customer is viewing. Simply click the checkbox of a product to place it in the shopping cart. The placement of the Related Products block varies according to theme and page layout. In the example below, it appears at the bottom of the Product View page. With a 2 column layout, the Related Product block often appears in the right column.
Related Products offered on Product Detail Page
To set up related products: 1. In the Product Information panel on the left, click Related Products. 2. Click the Reset Filter button in the upper-right to list all the available products,
or use the search filters at the top of each column to find specific products.
3. In the list, select the checkbox in the first column of any product you want to
feature as a related product.
4. Click the Save button to save your changes.
268
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 14: Product Information
Product Relationships
Up-sells
Up-sell products are items that your customer might prefer instead of the product currently viewed. An item offered as an up-sell might be of a higher quality, more popular, or have better profit margin.
To choose up-sell products: 1. In the Product Information panel on the left, click Up-sells. 2. Click the Reset Filter button in the upper-right to list all the available products,
or use the search filters at the top of each column to find specific products.
3. In the list, select the checkbox in the first column of any product you want to
feature as an up-sell.
Up-Sells Offered on Product Detail Page
Part III: Building Your Catalog
269
Chapter 14: Product Information
Product Relationships
Cross-sells
Cross-sell products are similar to impulse purchases positioned next to the cash register in the checkout line of a grocery store. Products offered as a cross-sell appear on the shopping cart page, just before the customer begins the checkout process.
To choose cross-sell products: 1. In the Product Information panel on the left, click Cross-sells. 2. Click the Reset Filter button in the upper-right to list all the available products,
or use the search filters at the top of each column to find specific products.
3. In the list, select the checkbox in the first column of any product you want to
feature as a cross-sell.
Cross-sells Offered During Checkout
270
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 14: Product Information
Custom Variants and Options
Custom Variants and Options
Custom variants and options provide an easy way to offer a selection of product options to the customer. The limitations are that you cannot track inventory based on any variation, and that a product with custom variants and options cannot be used in a one-to-many relationship with a configurable, grouped, or bundle product. Custom variants and options are a good solution if your inventory needs are simple, and you have a limited number of available SKUs.
Product Information – Custom Variants and Options
To set up custom variants and options: 1. From the Admin panel, select Catalog > Manage Products. 2. Click the Add Product button to create a new product, or click the Edit link to
the right of the relevant product to open the edit page.
3. Select Custom Variants and Options on the bottom of left panel to display the
following:
4. Click Add New Options on the top right of this page and complete the following
fields: Title: Input Type: Specify a name for this new property, such as the name Size. Select the type of input that can be given in this field, such as text or dropdown menu, as shown above. Is Required: If “Yes,” indicates that this is a mandatory field, meaning that a customer must select an option in this field in order to purchase this specific product. If there is more than one option, then specify the order in which this option appears in the Sort Order field. 1 indicates that it appears first.
Part III: Building Your Catalog
271
Chapter 14: Product Information
Custom Variants and Options
5. Click the Add New Row button to display the following row in which you can
define the new variation of this product. For example, the product in a certain size and its corresponding price.
6. In the Title field, enter a name of this product variation. 7. In the Price field, enter any difference between the price of the variation and the
price of the product. The variation price is either a mark-up or mark-down of the base price of the product.
8. In the Price Type field, select one of the following options:
Fixed: Specifies that the price of this variation differs from the price of the base product by a fixed monetary amount, such as $1. Percentage: Specifies that the price of this variation differs from the price of the base product by a percentage, such as 10%.
9. In the SKU field, specify the SKU for this variation of the product. The SKU is
actually a suffix that is added to the SKU of the main product record.
10. In the Sort Order field, enter a number to indicate the order in which the option
appears in relation to other options. The number 1 indicates that it appears first.
11. Click the Save button.
Custom Variants and Options: Add New Row
272
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 14: Product Information
Product View Optimization
Product View Optimization
The Product View Optimization tab appears for products and categories if enabled in your system configuration. It lets you install tracking scripts for Google Website Optimizer to test the effectiveness of pages on your site. For more information, see: “Google Website Optimizer,” on page 437.
Product View Optimization – Google Optimizer Scripts
Part III: Building Your Catalog
273
Chapter 14: Product Information
Product View Optimization
Notes:
_______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________
274
Magento Go User Guide
CHAPTER 15:
Managing Attributes
Attributes are the building blocks of your product catalog. Each attribute contains a value that represents a particular characteristic of an inventory item. An attribute set determines which fields are included in the product record, and is used as a template when you create a new product.
Catalog > Attributes > Manage Attributes
Magento Go comes with a default attribute set with a standard selection of product attributes such as Name, Price, Description, and so on. If you want, you can build your entire catalog using only the default attributes and attribute set. You can help your customers find exactly what they want by creating additional attributes that describe specific characteristics of each product. For example, here are a few ways you can use the frontend properties of an attribute to improve your customers’ shopping experience in your store: As input controls for product selection To provide additional information on product view pages As search parameters As the basis of product comparison reports As layered navigation items in the “Shop By” section As the basis of catalog and shopping cart price rules
Part III: Building Your Catalog
275
Chapter 15: Managing Attributes
Attribute Input Types
Attribute Input Types
From the standpoint of the store owner or administrator, attributes are the data entry fields that you complete when creating a product record. The input type that is assigned to an attribute determines the type of data that can be entered and the format of the field or input control. Options include: Text Field: A single line input field for text.
Text Area: A multiple-line input field for entering paragraphs of text such as a product description. You can use the WYSIWYG Editor to format the text with HTML tags, or type the tags directly into the text. For more information, see: “Using the WYSIWYG Editor,” on page 257.
Date: An input field for date values. The date can be typed directly into the field, or selected from a list or calendar “date picker.” The method of input used and format of the date is determined by the system configuration.
Yes/No: Displays a drop-down list with pre-defined options of “Yes” and “No.”
276
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 15: Managing Attributes
Attribute Input Types
Dropdown: Displays a drop-down list of values. Only one item can be selected at a time. The Dropdown input type is a key component of configurable products. For more information, see:
Multiple Select: Displays a drop-down list of values. To select more than one option, hold the Ctrl key down and click each item.
Price: This input type is used to create price fields that are in addition to the predefined attributes, Price, Special Price, Tier Price and Cost. The currency used is determined by your system configuration.
Fixed Product Tax: Lets you define FPT rates based on the requirements of your locale. For more information, see: “Tax Settings,” on page 369.
Part III: Building Your Catalog
277
Chapter 15: Managing Attributes
Attribute Quick Reference
Attribute Quick Reference
Product Type Properties
Some product types have specific requirements for attribute settings. For example, the configurable product type has a specific set of requirements for drop-down attributes which must be set up correctly. The following attributes can be used to identify the attribute with a specific product type:
Property Apply To
Description Identifies the product types which can use the attribute. Visibility must be set to include the catalog. Identifies the attribute one that will be used to create a drop-down list of options for a configurable product.
Use to Create Configurable Product
Data Entry Properties
You can use the following attribute properties to provide assistance during data entry, and to reduce the number of typographical errors in your catalog:
Property Default Value Unique Value Values Required
Description Displays a common entry as a starting value. Prevents duplicate values from being entered. Requires a value to be entered before the record can be saved. Performs a validation check of the data, based on data type, or format.
Input Validation
278
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 15: Managing Attributes
Attribute Quick Reference
Search and Navigation Properties
The following properties determine how the attribute is used in product searches and navigation:
Property Use in Quick Search
Description Lets customers use the Search box to find items based on the value of the attribute. Includes the attribute on the Advanced Search form.
Use in Advanced Search Use in Layered Navigation Use in Search Results Layered Navigation Position
Includes the attribute in the layered navigation that is displayed for category lists. Includes the attribute in the layered navigation that is displayed for search results lists. Determines the position of the attribute when listed with others in the layered navigation list. (Depending on theme) Includes the attribute in the product listing. (Depending on theme) Includes this attribute as an option in the Sort By list, which can be used to sort a product list.
Use in Product Listing
Use for Sorting in Product Listing
Rules and Comparison Properties
The following properties can be used to include an attribute in the product comparison report and promotional rules:
Property Comparable on Frontend Use for Promo Rule Conditions
Description Includes the attribute in the Compare Products report. Allows the attribute to be used as the basis of a condition that triggers a promotional Price Rule or Shopping Cart rule.
Part III: Building Your Catalog
279
Chapter 15: Managing Attributes
Attribute Quick Reference
Presentation Properties
The following properties control the appearance and formatting of the attribute value on the product view page:
Property Visible on Product View Page
Description Includes the attribute on the Additional Information tab of the product view page.
Allow HTML Tags on Frontend Enable WYSIWYG Editor
Permits text fields and areas to be manually tagged with HTML. Makes the WYSIWYG Editor available for tagging a text field or text area with HTML.
WYSIWYG Editor Enabled
280
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 15: Managing Attributes
Managing Labels and Options
Managing Labels and Options
Attribute values and their associated labels are defined on the Manage Labels / Options tab. The title, or label, identifies the attribute during data entry, and to the customer in the store. If your store is available in multiple languages, you can enter a translated label for each language supported.
Manage Attributes: Manage Label / Options
The Manage Options section appears only for Dropdown and Multiple Select input types. A single attribute such as Color, can have many values assigned, although only a few might be used for any given product. You can assign the most common value as the default, to speed up data entry. An attribute with the Dropdown input type can have only one value selected as the default, whereas Multiple Select lists can have multiple default values.
Part III: Building Your Catalog
281
Chapter 15: Managing Attributes
Creating an Attribute
Creating an Attribute
Step 1 Define the Attribute Properties
1. Go to Catalog > Attributes > Manage Attributes, and click the Add Attribute
button.
2. In the Attribute Properties section, complete the following required (*)
properties: a. (Required) Enter a unique Attribute Code to identify the attribute internally. The Attribute Code should be all lowercase characters without spaces. b. (Required) In the Apply To list, choose the product type(s) with which the attribute will be associated. To choose Selected Product Types, hold the Ctrl key down and click each applicable product type.
Attribute Properties
3. Complete the remaining Attribute Properties as needed.
a. Set Scope to specify the range of influence this attribute has in terms of your entire Magento Go installation. b. Set Catalog Input Type for Store Owner to the type of input control you want to be used for this attribute during data entry. c. To avoid duplicate values in this field, set Unique Value to “Yes.”
282
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 15: Managing Attributes
Creating an Attribute
d. If you want to require that a value be entered in this field, set Values Required to “Yes.” e. To test the validity of the entry, set Input Validation for Store Owner to the type of value that the attribute should contain.
4. In the Frontend Properties section, complete as many of the settings as needed.
Frontend Properties
Step 2
Define the Label and Values
1. In the Attribute Information panel on the left. Click Manage Label / Options.
Then, do the following: a. In the Manage Titles section, under Admin, type a descriptive label to identify the field during data entry. b. The next column controls how the label appears in the frontend of your store. Leave the box blank to use the Admin label as the default. c. If your store is available in multiple languages, enter a translated label into each box, as needed.
Part III: Building Your Catalog
283
Chapter 15: Managing Attributes
Creating an Attribute
2.
(For Dropdown and Multiple Select Input Types) In the Manage Options section, click the Add Option button. Then, do the following: a. In the new row, under Admin, type the value as you want it to appear from the Admin panel. b. Enter the value as you want it to appear to the customer in your store. (You can leave this blank to use the Admin value as the default.) c. If applicable, enter a translated value for each language supported. d. Enter a number to determine the Position of this value in relation to other options in the list. e. Select Is Default to have this entry automatically selected. Repeat this step for each value you want to add to the list.
Manage Label / Options
3. When complete, click the Save Attribute button.
The attribute appears in the Manage Attributes list, sorted in alphabetical order by Attribute Code. You can use the Page controls to view each page of the list.
284
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 15: Managing Attributes
Summary of Attribute Properties
Summary of Attribute Properties
Manage Attributes: Properties - Attribute Properties
Property Attribute Code
Description (Required) A unique identifier for internal use. The code can include a combination of lowercase letters (a-z) and numbers (0-9), but must begin with a letter. The Attribute Code cannot include any special characters or spaces, although an underscore (_) can be used to indicate a space. Indicates the range over which the attribute applies. The scope setting is used to limit use of the attribute to a specific website or view. Options include: Store View Website Global
Scope
Part III: Building Your Catalog
285
Chapter 15: Managing Attributes
Summary of Attribute Properties
Property Catalog Input Type for Store Owner
Description Determines the data type and input control that is used to manage the product from the Admin panel. Options include: Text Field: A single line input field for text. Text Area: A multiple-line input field that can display paragraphs of text formatted with HTML. Date: An input field for date values. The date can be typed directly into the field, or selected from a list or calendar. Yes/No: Displays a drop-down list with pre-defined options of “Yes” and “No.” Dropdown: Displays a drop-down list of configurable options, from which only one can be selected. Multiple Select: Displays a drop-down list of configurable options. To select more than one option, hold the Ctrl key down and click each item. Price: This input type is used to create price fields in addition to the predefined attributes, Price, Special Price, Tier Price and Cost. Fixed Product Tax: The Fixed Product Tax input type lets you define FPT rates based on the requirements of your locale.
Default Value
Assigns a starting value to the attribute, to assist with data entry. Note: This option is not available for Multiple Select, Dropdown, or Fixed Product Tax input types. To assign a default value to Multiple Select or Dropdown input types, see Manage Label / Options.
Unique Value
To prevent duplicate values in this field, set Unique Value to “Yes.” Options include: Yes / No To require that a value to be entered in this field before the record can be saved, set Values Required to “Yes.” Options include: Yes / No
Values Required
286
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 15: Managing Attributes
Summary of Attribute Properties
Property Input Validation for Store Owner
Description Performs a validation check of the data entered in the field, based on the following options: None Decimal Number Integer Number Email URL Letters Letters (a-z, A-Z) or Numbers (0-9)
Apply To
(Required) Identifies the product types to which this attribute applies. Options include: All Product Types Selected Product Types Hold the Ctrl key down and click each applicable product type: Simple Product Grouped Product Configurable Product Virtual Product Bundle Product Gift Card
Use to Create Configurable Product
(Dropdown input type only) Select “Yes” if this attribute will be used to create a drop-down list for a configurable product. Options include: Yes / No
Part III: Building Your Catalog
287
Chapter 15: Managing Attributes
Summary of Attribute Properties
Frontend Properties
Manage Attributes: Properties - Frontend Properties
Property Use in Quick Search
Description Select “Yes” if you want people to be able to search on the value of this field. Options include: Yes / No Assign a value from 1 – 5 to weight the search. This is similar to Quick Search with the option of adding each attribute with its own field, rather than having one search field. Options include: Yes / No Tip: Do not include every attribute in Advanced Search, because it may overflow the search page.
Search Weight Use in Advanced Search:
Comparable on Frontend Use In Layered Navigation
Select “Yes” to include this attribute as a row in the Product Comparison report. Options include: Yes / No (Dropdown, Multiple Select and Price input type only) Includes the attribute in the layered navigation ”Shop By” section, which usually appears in the left column of a category page. The section lists products by any attribute that has been set to “Filterable.” You can click any value to display only the products which
288
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 15: Managing Attributes
Summary of Attribute Properties
Property
Description match the filter. Options include: No: The attribute is not included in the layered navigation. Filterable (with results): Lists only the products which match the filterable value. Filterable (no results): Lists all values in the attribute, even if they do not apply to any product listed. If there are no filterable attributes for a category page, the layered navigation section will not appear.
Use In Search Results Layered Navigation Use for Promo Rule Conditions Position
Select “Yes” to include this attribute in Layered Navigation. Options include: Yes / No Select “Yes” if you want this attribute to be available when creating Category and Shopping Cart Price Rules. Options include: Yes / NO This option determines the position of the attribute in the Layered Navigation menu with respect to the other filterable attributes Provides the option of using a simple, “What You See Is What You Get” text editor for entering and formatting text. The editor inserts the HTML tags needed to format. or create numbered or bulleted list. When set to “Yes,” the Allow HTML Tags on Frontend option is not used. (Available for Text Area input type.)
Enable WYSIWYG
Allow HTML tags on Frontend
Select “Yes” if you want to be able to format the content of this field with HTML tags. (Available for Text Field and Text Area input types.)
Visible on Product View Page on Frontend Used in Product Listing
Select “Yes” to include this attribute on the Additional Information tab of the product view page. This attribute can be used with simple and virtual products. Options include: Yes / No (Depends on Design Theme) Select “Yes” to include this attribute in the search results list. All available and assigned Layered Navigation attributes will abide by its results. (Depends on Design Theme) Select “Yes” to be able to sort the catalog list by the value of this attribute. The attribute will appear as an option in the Sort By list.
Used for Sorting in Product Listing
Part III: Building Your Catalog
289
Chapter 15: Managing Attributes
Creating an Attribute Set
Creating an Attribute Set
An attribute set is a collection of attributes that is used as a template for a product record. The attribute set determines the fields which are available during data entry, and the values that appear to the customer. Only an attribute set, rather than individual attributes, can be assigned to a product. If you would like to add only a small number of attributes, you can add them to the Default attribute set. If you sell products, such as cameras, that require specific types of information, it might be better to create a dedicated attribute set that includes the special attributes (fields) needed to describe the product. The use of an attribute is not limited to one set or another. You can assign an attribute to as many different attribute sets as necessary. One of the first steps when creating a product is to choose the attribute set to use as a template for the product record.
Catalog > Attributes > Manage Attribute Sets
To create an attribute set: 1. From the Admin panel, choose Catalog > Attributes> Manage Attribute Sets. 2. Click the Add New Set button to display the Edit Set Name page where you can
define a new attribute set.
Manage Attribute Sets: Edit Set Name
3. In the Name field, specify the name of the attribute set. 4. In the Based On field, select another attribute set from which this attribute set is
to inherit attributes. This option enables you to reuse the attributes already
290
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 15: Managing Attributes
Creating an Attribute Set
defined in a set to build other attribute sets. The simple option is to leave the Default option that appears in this field.
5. Click the Save Attribute Set button open the following page:
The top left of the page shows the name of the attribute set defined earlier. You have the option to edit the name because this value is for internal use. The center of the page shows a hierarchical tree representing Groups for attributes. The right side of the page shows a list of defined attributes that are not assigned to this attribute set.
6. Select the attribute to be assigned to this Group by dragging them from the
Unassigned Attributes area on the right into the relevant Group in the tree in the Groups area in the middle.
7. Click the Save Attribute Set button.
Edit Attribute Set
Note: System Attributes are indicated by an icon with an orange dot. You cannot remove them from Groups but can drag them to another Group within an attribute set.
Part III: Building Your Catalog
291
Chapter 15: Managing Attributes
Creating an Attribute Set
Creating a New Attribute Group
The center of the page shows a hierarchical tree representing groups of attributes. These groups determine how attributes appear in the backend when a product is being edited. This feature enables a logical grouping of attributes.
To create an attribute group: 1. Click the Add New button in the Groups area in the center of the page to display a
popup window where you specify the group name.
2. Specify the name of the new group and click OK. 3. Click and drag attributes from the Unassigned Attributes list into the newly
created group to assign them to this group.
4. You can also click and drag attributes that are already assigned to move them
between groups.
292
Magento Go User Guide
CHAPTER 16:
Promotional Price Rules
Magento Go offers a full spectrum of tools and features that you can use to promote your store. These include options for presenting additional products in order to increase conversion rates and for providing various discounts and promotions. Have you even wanted to create a targeted banner that would appear only for a select group of customers? Or how about an offer of free shipping for those who make purchases which are over a certain amount? In this chapter, you will learn how to set up price rules with conditional actions. Catalog Price Rules Shopping Cart Price Rules Conditions and Actions Related Banners
Part III: Building Your Catalog
293
Chapter 16: Promotional Price Rules
Catalog Price Rules
Catalog Price Rules
Catalog Price Rules are applied to products before they are added to the shopping cart. They can be used to create sales and discounts that do not require a discount code to be entered by customers. The process of defining a Catalog Price Rule consists of three steps: Describe the general information about this rule. Describe the conditions that trigger the rule. Describe the actions which take place when the conditions are met.
Rule Information
To define catalog price rules: 1. From the Admin panel, select Promotions > Catalog Price Rules.
Promotions > Catalog Price Rules
2. Click the Add New button. 3. In the General Information section, do the following:
a. Complete the Rule Name and Description fields. These fields are for internal reference only. b. Set Status to Active. c. Select the Customer Groups to which this rule applies. Tip: To select multiple groups, hold the Shift key down and press the Ctrl key (PC) or the Command key (Mac) for each selection. d. In the From Date and To Date fields, set a date range for the rule to take effect. If you leave the date range empty, then the rule is enabled as soon as it is saved.
4. Define the Conditions and Actions for this rule as described in Defining the
Catalog Price Rules Conditions and Defining the Catalog Price Rules Actions.
294
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 16: Promotional Price Rules
Catalog Price Rules
5. Select Related Banners tab on left and assign banners that are related to this
rule. Click the Reset Filter button to display all banners.
6. Click the Save Rule button to apply this rule and save your changes.
Catalog Price Rules: General Information
Part III: Building Your Catalog
295
Chapter 16: Promotional Price Rules
Catalog Price Rules
Conditions
Once you have set up the general information for the price rule, you must create conditions to determine when the rule is triggered. The properties of any attribute that is used in a price rule must be set to allow for its use in promotional rule conditions.
To define catalog price rule conditions: 1. In the Catalog Price Rule panel on the left, select Conditions.
The first rule, which appears by default, is: If All these Conditions are TRUE. It determines if the rules you define must all be met and all be true.
2. Click the green plus button to display a selection field. A list of Product Attributes
will be available for you to select.
Note: To add a product attribute to these conditions, you must set Use for Promo Rules Conditions to “Yes,” in the Frontend Properties of the attribute. For more information, see: “Attribute Quick Reference,” page 278.
296
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 16: Promotional Price Rules
Catalog Price Rules
Each selected Product Attribute will offer the option to apply different combination conditional limits such as: is, is not, greater than, less than, contains, does not contain, is one of, is not of one of, and many more.
Defining the Condition
3. You can further combine more product attribute conditions by selecting
Conditions Combinations and repeating step 2.
Selecting the Attribute Set for a Condition
4. Click the Apply icon to save this selection.
Tip: Leave Conditions blank to apply to all products.
Part III: Building Your Catalog
297
Chapter 16: Promotional Price Rules
Catalog Price Rules
Actions
Now that you have defined the Conditions that will trigger this rule, you must define the Actions to trigger when Conditions are met.
To define catalog price rule actions: 1. Select the Actions option in the panel on the left to display the following page:
Update Prices By Percentage of Original Price
2. Set Apply to one of the following:
By Percentage of the Original Price: Discounts item by subtracting from original price. For example: Enter 10 in Discount Amount to define a final price that is 10% reduction from the original price. By Fixed Amount: Discounts item by subtracting from original price based on fixed amount. For example: Enter 10 in Discount Amount to define a final price that is $10 reduction from the original price. To Percentage of the Original Price: Discounts item by defining the final price based on percentage. For example: Enter 10 in Discount Amount to define a final price that is 10% of original price. To Fixed Amount: Discounts item by defining the final price by fixed amount. For example: Enter 10 in Discount Amount to define a final price of $10.
3. Enter the Discount Amount. 4. Set Stop Further Rules Processing to “Yes” to stop processing other rules. 5. Click the Save Rule button to save your changes.
Magento Go must recalculate the prices and the priorities of each rule added. Generally, system rules are automatically processed and applied each night. To apply a rule immediately, do one of the following: Click the Save and Apply button. From the Catalog Price Rules list, click the Apply Rules button.
298
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 16: Promotional Price Rules
Shopping Cart Price Rules
Shopping Cart Price Rules
Shopping Cart Price Rules are applied when a customer reaches the Shopping Cart. They can be applied either with or without the customer entering a discount code, and include features not found in traditional coupon tools.
The process of defining a Cart Price Rule consists of three stages: Define the Shopping Cart Price Rule Information to describe the general information about this rule. Define the Shopping Cart Price Rule Conditions to describe the conditions that trigger the rule. Define the Shopping Cart Price Rule Actions to describe the actions that are executed when conditions of this rule are met.
Rule Information
To define a shopping cart price rule: 1. From the Admin panel, select Promotions > Shopping Cart Price Rules. 2. Click the Add New button to create a new rule. 3. Complete the Rule Name and Description fields. These fields are for internal
reference only.
4. In the Status field, select Active. 5. Select the Customer Groups to which this rule applies.
Tip: These are the default customer groups for Magento. They can be edited and added on to by clicking the Customers menu and selecting Customer Groups. Use your keyboards Shift key if you want to select group of attributes or Ctrl (PC) | Command (Mac) key for individual selection.
Part III: Building Your Catalog
299
Chapter 16: Promotional Price Rules
Shopping Cart Price Rules
6. Select a coupon option from the Coupon list.
No Coupon: Define an amount in Uses per Customer to limit this rule if needed. Specific Coupon: Selecting this option will expand Coupon Code and Uses per Coupon. Enter a coupon code and define Uses per Coupon and Uses per Customer for each customer.
7. In the From Date and To Date fields, set a date range for the rule to take effect. If
you leave the date range empty, then the rule is enabled as soon as it is saved.
8. Define the Conditions and Actions for this rule. 9. In the panel on the left, select Related Banners. Then, click the Reset Filter
button to display a list of all available banners.
10. Click the Save Rule button to apply this rule and save your changes.
Promotions > Shopping Cart Price Rules: General Information
300
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 16: Promotional Price Rules
Shopping Cart Price Rules
Conditions
Once you have setup the general information for the price rule, you must create the conditions that specify when the rule is triggered.
To define shopping cart price rule conditions: 1. Select the Conditions option in the panel on the left.
The first rule appears by default, as says: If All these Conditions are TRUE.
2. Click the green plus button to display a selection field. Condition options
available are: Product attribute combination Products subselection Cart Attributes
Note: To add a product attribute to these conditions, you must set Use for Promo Rules Conditions to “Yes” in the Frontend Properties of the attribute. To learn more, see: “Attribute Quick Reference,” on page 278. Each selected attribute offers the option to apply different combination conditional limits such as: is, is not, greater than, less than, contains, does not contain, is one of, is not of one of, and many more.
Shopping Cart Price Rule Condition
3. You can further combine more product attribute conditions by selecting
Conditions Combinations and applying steps 3 – 4.
4. Save this selection of products by clicking the Apply icon.
Note: Leave Conditions blank to apply to all products.
Part III: Building Your Catalog
301
Chapter 16: Promotional Price Rules
Shopping Cart Price Rules
Actions
Now that you have defined the Conditions that will trigger this rule, you must define the Actions to trigger when Conditions are met.
To define shopping cart price rule actions: 1. Select the Actions option in the panel on the left to display the following page: 2. Select one of the discount options from the Apply field:
Percent of product price discount: Discounts item by subtracting from original price. For example: Enter 10 in Discount Amount to define a final price that is 10% reduction from the original price. Fixed amount discount: Discounts item by subtracting from original price of each product in your cart based on fixed amount. For example: Enter 10 in Discount Amount to define a final price that is $10 reduction from the original price. Fixed amount discount for whole cart: Discounts item by defining the final price based on percentage. For example: Enter 10 in Discount Amount to define a final price that is 10% of entire cart. Buy X get Y free: (discount amount is Y) Discounts are applied to the “Y” item.
Shopping Cart Price Rule Actions
302
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 16: Promotional Price Rules
Shopping Cart Price Rules
3. Enter an amount in the Discount Amount field. This is required. 4. In the Maximum Qty Discount is Applied To field, enter an amount to limit the
maximum number of products to which the discount applies.
5. Enter an amount to specify of how often the discount is applied in Discount Qty
Step (Buy X) field if Buy X get Y free (discount amount is Y) is selected.
6. In the Free Shipping field, specify whether to combine the coupon amount with
a free shipping offer, for only the products for which the coupon is valid or for the entire Order, when one of these products is in the shopping cart.
7. Select Yes for Stop Further Rules Processing to stop processing other rules
that have been created.
8. You can further define and specify these rules to be applied to certain or all
products. Leave the conditions field blank to apply this rule to all products. The first rule appears by default: If All these Conditions are TRUE. It specifies whether the rules that you define must all be met and all of them are true.
9. Click the green plus sign
to display a selection field. Condition options
available are: Cart Item Attribute and Product attribute. Note: To add a product attribute to these conditions, you must set Use for Promo Rules Conditions to “Yes” in the Frontend Properties of the attribute. To learn more, see: “Attribute Quick Reference,” on page 278.
10. Each selected Attribute will offer the option to apply different combination
conditional limits such as: is, is not, greater than, less than, contains, does not contain, is one of, is not of one of, and many more.
11. You can further combine more product attribute conditions by selecting
Conditions Combinations and applying steps 8 – 10.
12. Click the Save Rule button to save your changes.
Note: As you add new rules, Magento Go recalculates the prices and the priorities of the rules. Generally, system rules are automatically processed and applied each night. To apply a new rule immediately, you must click the Save and Apply button the rules pages or Apply Rules in Catalog Price Rules list page.
Part III: Building Your Catalog
303
Chapter 16: Promotional Price Rules
Shopping Cart Price Rules
Price Rule Labels
You can create a default labels for Product and Shopping Cart Price Rules which will be used in all store views, or create specific labels for each view.
To create a label: 1. From the open rule, in the Price Rule panel on the left, select Labels. 2. In the Default Label section, enter the text to be used as the Default Rule Label
for All Store Views.
Default Label
3. In the Store View Specific Labels section, enter the translated text for each Main
Store language.
Store View Specific Labels
4. Click the Save Rule button.
304
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 16: Promotional Price Rules
Price Rule Banners
Price Rule Banners
Any banners you have created can be associated with both Catalog Price Rules and Shopping Cart Price Rules for a promotion. To associate a banner with a price rule, both the banner and price rule must already exist.
Shopping Cart Price Rule - Related Banners
To associate a banner with a price rule: 1. From the Admin panel, do one of the following:
Select Promotions > Catalog Price Rules. Select Shopping Cart Price Rules.
2. In the list, click to open the rule to which you want to add the banner. 3. In the Price Rule panel on the left, select Related Banners. 4. In the list of banners, select the checkbox of each banner that you want to
associate with the price rule. Tip: If your banners don’t appear in the table, click the Reset Filter button to clear previous filtering rules.
5. Click the Save Rule button to save your changes.
Part III: Building Your Catalog
305
Chapter 16: Promotional Price Rules
Price Rule Banners
Notes:
_______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________
306
Magento Go User Guide
Part IV: Sales & Fulfillment
CHAPTER 17:
Processing Orders
This chapter describes some of the terms used for handling orders in Magento Go. In addition to creating orders, there are many features in the Magento Go backend that are part of the process of managing and fulfilling orders, such as creating invoices, shipments and credit memos and editing and cancelling orders. What exactly happens when the customer clicks the Place Order button?
Checkout
Part IV: Sales & Fulfillment
309
CHAPTER 17:Processing Orders
Order Process Overview
Order Process Overview
Order Submitted
In the final phase of the checkout process, the customer reviews the order, agrees to the Terms and Conditions, and clicks the Place Order button. The customer receives a confirmation of the order, with a link to the Order #.
Sales Order “Pending”
The sales order appears in the Order list with a status of “Pending.” The payment has not been processed and the order can still be canceled.
Payment Received The order remains “Pending” until payment is received. Depending on the payment action selected, the credit card payment service provider will notify the merchant when the transaction is authorized and in some cases, processed. The status of the invoice is now “Processing.”
310
Magento Go User Guide
CHAPTER 17:Processing Orders Invoice the Order Sometimes an order is invoiced before payment is received. In this example, the invoice is generated and submitted after the credit card payment is authorized and processed. The invoice is generated and submitted, and a copy is sent by email to the customer.
Order Process Overview
Order “Processing” When the customer check the status of the order in the Account Dashboard, The status of the order is “Processing.”
Ship the Order The shipment is submitted, packing slips printed, the customer is notified by email, and the package is shipped.
Order “Complete” When the customer checks the status of the order in the Account Dashboard. The status of this order is “Complete.”
Part IV: Sales & Fulfillment
311
CHAPTER 17:Processing Orders
Terms and Conditions
Terms and Conditions
Custom terms and conditions require the customer to check the box and agree to the terms and conditions before completing the checkout process. Many sites use terms and conditions as a way of creating contractual agreements between the customer and the merchant. You can use it to inform customers of your store’s policies as well as protect yourself against possible issues that may arise.
Terms and Conditions During Checkout
To set up Terms and Conditions: 1. From the Admin panel, select Sales > Terms and Conditions.
Sales > Terms and Conditions
312
Magento Go User Guide
CHAPTER 17:Processing Orders
Terms and Conditions
2. In the upper-right corner, click the Add New button. 3. In the Terms and Conditions Information section, do the following:
a. In the Condition Name field, enter a descriptive title. b. Set the Status to Enabled if you want the new Terms and Conditions to be active upon saving. c. In the Show Content As list, select whether you want to enter the new content as Text or HTML. If you do not know how to use HTML, select Text. Note: If you select HTML, you must use HTML in both the Checkbox Text and Content textboxes. If you select Text, you can enter plain text in both. d. In the Checkbox Text textbox, insert the text, or condition, that you want the customer to agree to during checkout. e. In the Content textbox, complete the terms and conditions that you want the customers to agree to during checkout. f. In the Content Height (CSS), you enter a value to determine the height of the content box. This is useful if you have a long set of terms and conditions, and don’t want to have a long scrolling page.
Part IV: Sales & Fulfillment
313
CHAPTER 17:Processing Orders
Managing Sales Orders
Managing Sales Orders
When an order is made, either from the store or Admin panel, a sales order is created to record the transaction. The sales order can be seen in the Orders list by selecting the Orders option from the Sales menu in the Admin panel. This is only a temporary record. Payment has not yet been processed and the order can still be canceled.
Fulfilling and Completing Orders
After the customer places an order, several processes take place, including the transfer of payment, invoicing, and shipping. In this section, you will learn how to handle an order after it has been received, and process to completion.
Invoicing an Order
An invoice is a record of the receipt of payment for an order. Creating an invoice for an order converts the temporary sales order into a permanent record of the order, which cannot be canceled. Multiple invoices can be created for a single order, each containing as much or as few of the purchased products that you specify.
To invoice an order: 1. From the Admin panel, select Sales > Orders.
314
Magento Go User Guide
CHAPTER 17:Processing Orders
Managing Sales Orders
2. Select the View option on the row of the Pending order under Status column that
you would like to invoice.
3. Click the Invoice button and scroll down to the Shipping Information if you
would like to add a tracking number.
4. Click the Add Tracking Number button and Complete the following:
Carrier: Title: Number: Select a shipping carrier from the menu. Will be filled in by carrier selection. Edit if required. Provide the Tracking number of this order.
5. In Invoice Comments under Invoice History menu, complete the comments as
necessary. Then, in the Invoice Totals section, select the Append Comments checkbox to add the comments to the invoice.
6. Select the Email Copy of Invoice checkbox to send a copy of the invoice to your
customer.
7. Click the Submit Invoice button to process the invoice and capture sales.
Note: If your store requires that you ship before invoicing, click the Ship button, complete the shipping information and submit your shipment. When that is complete, finish the invoicing steps.
Part IV: Sales & Fulfillment
315
CHAPTER 17:Processing Orders
Managing Sales Orders
Shipping an Order
A shipment is a record of the products in an order which have been shipped. Like an invoice, multiple shipments can be created per order, until all of the products in the order are shipped.
To display the shipment detail: 1. From the Admin panel, select Sales > Shipments. 2. Find the shipment in the list, and click to open the record.
Sales > Shipments
316
Magento Go User Guide
CHAPTER 17:Processing Orders
Managing Sales Orders
Creating New Orders
This section describes how to create an order directly from the Admin panel, which is sometimes necessary when an order is received by phone.
To create a new order: 1. From the Admin panel, select Sales > Orders. 2. Click the Create New Order button. The, do one of the following:
Select a customer from the list. Click the Create New Customer button to add a new customer.
3. Select the Store View that relates to the order. 4. Click the Add Products button, and do the following:
a. Select the products to be purchased. Then, click the Add Selected Product(s) to Order button. b. Complete the required fields (*) including customer group, shipping method, and payment method. You can define many options for the order, such as choosing custom prices for products and applying discount codes. c. When the order information is complete, click the Submit Order button. d. To confirm payment and generate an invoice, click the Invoice button. e. Review the invoice, and if correct, click the Submit Invoice button at the bottom of the page.
5. When you are ready to ship the products, click the Ship button and do the
following: a. If required, click the Add Tracking Number button to enter the tracking number received from the shipping service. Using a tracking number gives the customer the ability to review the order from their customer Account Dashboard. b. Review the shipment. You can modify the quantity to be shipped if only part of the order is ready. The order changes to “Completed” status after all products have been shipped.
Part IV: Sales & Fulfillment
317
CHAPTER 17:Processing Orders
Managing Sales Orders
c. Click the Email Copy of Shipment option to automatically send an email to the customer notifying them that their products were shipped. d. Click the Submit Shipment button at the bottom of the page.
6. Click the Back button to return to the orders page where you can create
additional orders as needed.
Editing an Order
Editing will cancel the order, and a new one will be created instead.
To edit an order: 1. From the Admin panel, select Sales > Orders. 2. Select the pending order that you want to edit. 3. Click the Edit button at the top of the screen and click OK on the Warning pop-up
window.
4. Make the changes as necessary and click Submit Order to reprocess this order.
Canceling an Order
Canceling an order will remove it from your bank of pending orders.
To cancel an order: 1. From the Admin panel, select Sales > Orders. 2. Select a pending order that you would like to cancel by clicking the Edit button on
its respective row.
3. Click the Cancel button on top right menu of order page to remove this order.
318
Magento Go User Guide
CHAPTER 17:Processing Orders
Managing Sales Orders
Putting an Order “On Hold”
If customer payment method is not running or the purchased item is temporarily out of stock, you can put a customer’s order on hold.
To put an order on hold: 1. From the Admin panel, select Sales > Orders. 2. Select a pending order that you would like to place on hold by clicking the View
button on its respective row.
3. Do one of the following:
Click the Hold button on top right menu of order page to place the order on hold. To release an order from hold, click the Unhold button.
Handling Backorders
Many stores operate differently. If your store’s inventory is constantly refreshing itself and can do so without delay, Magento Go has provided the option to allow customers to continue ordering to a point that you are comfortable with, even after the stock has reached zero.
To handle backorders: 1. From the Admin panel, select Catalog > Manage Products. 2. Select a predefined product or click the Add Product button. 3. Select the Inventory tab on the left hand panel. 4. In the Backorders field, clear the Use Config Settings checkbox. Then, enter
the appropriate setting. Allow Qty Below 0: Keeps items available in your store after the stock is depleted. Allow Qty Below 0 and Notify Customer: Keeps items available in your store after the stock is depleted, but notifies the customer via email upon purchase.
5. Click the Save button to save your changes.
Part IV: Sales & Fulfillment
319
CHAPTER 17:Processing Orders
Updating the Shopping Cart
Updating the Shopping Cart
Magento Go lets you edit the contents of a customer's shopping cart from the Admin panel. Changes you might make include adding items to a cart, applying a discount, or even adding products that the customer wasn’t able to find in the store. You can update shopping cart items, remove items, and move an item to the customer’s wishlist. Note: Customers must be registered with your store to receive Manage Shopping Cart assistance. The following options are available through Manage Shopping Cart: Updating, removing, or transferring product in the customer’s shopping cart Applying coupon code Adding products to customer’s shopping cart Adding or transferring products to customer’s wishlist Adding products in the comparison list Recently compared products Recently viewed products Last ordered items
Note: To assist a customer for a different language store view, select the appropriate store view from Choose Store View list on the top left.
To update customers shopping cart: 1. To update the number of units for a product, add the amount requested in Qty. 2. To remove an item, select Remove from the Action column. 3. To move an item to the wishlist of the customer’s account, select Move to
Wishlist from the Action column.
4. Click Update Items and Qty’s to update your changes.
320
Magento Go User Guide
CHAPTER 17:Processing Orders
Updating the Shopping Cart
Applying a Coupon Code
You as a merchant can apply a coupon code with Manage Shopping Cart. Applying coupon codes are simple:
To apply a coupon code: 1. Enter a coupon code in Apply Coupon Code. 2. Click Apply to apply the discount to customer’s total.
Adding Products to a Shopping Cart
This tab enables you to find the products that a customer is interested in purchasing. You can use filters to limit the products that are shown.
To add select products to shopping cart: 1. Click the Reset Filter button to show all products. Check the relevant check
boxes of the products for inclusion.
2. Click Add Selected Product(s) to Shopping Cart to update customer’s
shopping cart.
Adding Wishlist Items
This tab enables you move select or all items in the wishlist to the shopping cart.
To add select wishlist items to shopping cart: 1. Check the relevant check boxes of the products for inclusion. 2. Click Add Selected Product(s) to Shopping Cart to update customer’s
shopping cart.
Part IV: Sales & Fulfillment
321
CHAPTER 17:Processing Orders
Updating the Shopping Cart
Adding Comparison Items
This tab enables you move select or all items that a customer has in the comparison list to the shopping cart.
To add products in the comparison list to shopping cart: 1. Check the relevant check boxes of the products for inclusion. 2. Click Add Selected Product(s) to Shopping Cart to update customer’s
shopping cart.
Adding Recently Viewed Items
This tab enables you view all products that had been recently viewed by the customer.
To add select recently viewed products to shopping cart: 1. Check the checkbox of each product you want to include. 2. Click Add Selected Product(s) to Shopping Cart to update customer’s
shopping cart.
Adding Previously Ordered Items
This tab enables you view all orders that had been previously placed by the customer.
To add select previously ordered products to shopping cart: 1. Check the relevant check boxes of the products for inclusion. 2. Click Add Selected Product(s) to Shopping Cart to update customer’s
shopping cart. To directly place an order for the customer, click the Create Order in the upper-right corner. Note: The customer must refresh the shopping cart page in order to view changes made by the store owner.
322
Magento Go User Guide
CHAPTER 17:Processing Orders
Managing Refunds and Store Credit
Managing Refunds and Store Credit
To manage customers return needs, Magento Go has provided the ability to issue refunds, partial refunds, or Gift Cards for exchange purposes, by generating a credit memo. The process to refund an order for a customer can be completed from the Admin panel of your Magento Go store. Note: You can create credit memos only for orders for which invoices were created. Without an invoice, an order is assumed not to be paid so that there is nothing to refund in a credit memo.
To issue a refund: 1. From the Admin panel, select Sales > Orders. 2. Click the View link on the right side of the row of each order to display the Order
view page.
3. Click the Credit Memo button to generate a credit memo. Then, do the following:
a. Scroll down to items to Refund area, and in the Qty to Refund field of the relevant product, specify the quantity of products to refund. b. To specify that this product was actually returned to the store, check the Return to Stock option. c. Click the Email Copy of Credit Memo option, shown below, to automatically send an email to the customer that the order has been refunded. You can add append comments added in Credit Memo Comments adjusted to Refund Totals by checking Append Comments. You can also adjust the refund totals to match your business rules. The following options are available for adjustments: Refund Shipping Adjustment Refund Adjustment Fee
d. If the customer has credit with your store, you can apply the refunds to their credit. Check Refund to Store Credit.
4. Click the Refund Offline button to apply the refunds. To view the list of refunds made in your store 1. From the Admin panel, select Sales > Credit Memos. 2. Click the View link on the right side for the row of each Credit Memo to display
the Credit Memo view page.
Part IV: Sales & Fulfillment
323
CHAPTER 17:Processing Orders
Managing Refunds and Store Credit
Notes:
_______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________
324
Magento Go User Guide
CHAPTER 18:
Shipping Methods
Magento Go supports a wide range of shipping methods and carriers. This chapter shows how to configure the shipping methods and carriers that are available in your store. Shipping Settings Shipping Rates Supported Carriers
Most of the examples in this chapter take place in the Configuration section of the Admin panel. The breadcrumb trail at the beginning of each section shows the path to the configuration settings in the Admin panel.
System Configuration- Shipping Methods
Part IV: Sales & Fulfillment
325
CHAPTER 18:Shipping Methods
Shipping Methods During Checkout
Shipping Methods During Checkout
Shopping Cart: Get a Quote
Checkout: Shipping Method
Order Review: Shipping & Handling Charges
326
Magento Go User Guide
CHAPTER 18:Shipping Methods
Shipping Settings
Shipping Settings
The Shipping Settings establish the point of origin for all shipments made from your store or warehouse.
Configuration: Shipping Settings - Origin
To establish the point of origin: 1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. In the Configuration panel on the left, under Sales, click Shipping Settings. 3. Click to expand the Origin section and complete the following fields to establish
the point of origin used for shipping calculations. Country Region / State ZIP / Postal Code City
4. Click the Save Config button to save the settings.
Part IV: Sales & Fulfillment
327
CHAPTER 18:Shipping Methods
Shipping Rates
Shipping Rates
The Shipping Methods tab manages the configuration for the various shipping methods and carrier services available to your customers during checkout.
Rates
Table Rates Table rate shipping lets you calculate shipping rates based on the combination of several conditions. The rate can be based on Weight v. Destination, Price v. Destination, or # of Items v. Destination. Flat Rate Flat Rate is a simple shipping solution that uses a standard fixed rate per item or per order, regardless of order size or weight. Free Shipping Free Shipping is one of the easiest and most effective promotions you can offer your customers.
328
Magento Go User Guide
CHAPTER 18:Shipping Methods
Shipping Rates
Table Rate Shipping
The Table Rate shipping method lets you set up a table to calculate shipping rates for a combination of conditions. The shipping rate can be based on Weight v. Destination, Price v. Destination, or # of Items v. Destination. For example, if your warehouse is in Los Angeles, it costs less to ship to San Diego than to Vermont. You can use Table Rate shipping to pass these savings on to your customer. Only one set of Table Rate data can be active at any time. The data that is used to calculate the rate is prepared in a spreadsheet and imported into your store. The results appear in the Estimate Shipping and Tax section of the shopping cart when the customer requests a quote.
Shopping Cart: Estimate Shipping and Tax - Table Rates
Step 1:
Complete the Default Settings
The first step is to complete the default settings for table rates, which can be done without changing the scope of the configuration.
To complete the default settings: 1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. In the Configuration panel on the left, under Sales, select “Shipping Methods.” 3. Click to expand the Table Rate section. Then, do the following:
a. Set Enabled to “Yes.” b. In the Title field, type a name for the section of table rate shipping methods that appears during checkout. (The default title is “Best Way.”) c. In the Method Name field, type a name for this table rate shipping method.
Part IV: Sales & Fulfillment
329
CHAPTER 18:Shipping Methods d. Set Condition to one of the methods of calculation: Weight vs. Destination Price vs. Destination # of Items vs. Destination
Shipping Rates
e. Set Include Virtual Products in Price Calculation to “Yes” if you want to be able to apply Table Rate shipping to virtual products. f. If charging a handling fee, set Calculate Handling Fee to either “Fixed” or “Percent.” Then, enter the Handling Fee rate according to the method used to calculate the fee. g. In the Displayed Error Message box, type the message that appears if this method becomes unavailable. h. Set Ship to Applicable Countries to one of the following: All Allowed Countries Specific Countries Then, in the Ship to Specific Countries list, select each country where orders can be shipping using this method. (Hold the Ctrl key down to select multiple options.) i. Type a number in the Sort Order field to determine the order that this method appears during checkout.
4. Click the Save Config button to save your changes.
After you have configured Table Rate shipping, go through the payment process using a different country address each time to make sure the shipping and handling rates are correct.
330
Magento Go User Guide
CHAPTER 18:Shipping Methods
Shipping Rates
Step 2:
Prepare the Data
The second step is to prepare the data and import the values into Magento Go. It is necessary to change the scope of the configuration to the Website where the table rate method will be used. This change causes the Export and Import options to appear, and displays a Use Default checkbox to the right of each option.
To create the table rate data: 1. In the upper-left corner, set the Current Configuration Scope to the Website
where this method will be used. (For example, you can select Default Website.) The Export and Import options appear in the Table Rates section, and Use Default checkboxes appear to the right of each option. Note: While working with a specific scope, you must clear the Use Default checkbox to change any of the current settings.
2. Click the Export CSV button. Then, save the tablerates.csv file to your computer. 3. Open the file in your spreadsheet program.
Part IV: Sales & Fulfillment
331
CHAPTER 18:Shipping Methods
Shipping Rates
4. Complete the table with the appropriate values for the shipping calculation
method used. You can use a wildcard (*) to represent all possible values in any category. The Country column must contain a valid 3-character code for each row. For more information, see: Country Codes,” on page 467.
5. Save the completed tablerates.csv file. 6. Return to the Table Rates configuration, and at the Import field, click the
Browse button. Select your completed tablerates.csv file and import the rates.
Example: Price vs. Destination
This example uses the Price vs. Destination condition to create a set of three different shipping rates based on the amount of the order subtotal for the continental United States, Alaska, and Hawaii.
Country Region/State Zip/Postal Code Order Subtotal (and above) USA USA USA USA USA USA USA USA USA Shipping Price 0 50 100 0 50 100 0 50 100 15 10 5 20 15 10 20 15 10
* * *
AK AK AK HI HI HI
* * * * * * * * *
332
Magento Go User Guide
CHAPTER 18:Shipping Methods
Shipping Rates
Configuration: Shipping Methods – Table Rates
Part IV: Sales & Fulfillment
333
CHAPTER 18:Shipping Methods
Shipping Rates
Flat Rate
Flat rate is a fixed, predefined charge that can be applied per item, or per shipment. Flat rate is a simple solution, especially when used with the flat-rate packaging that is available from some carriers.
Shopping Cart: Estimate Shipping and Tax – Flat Rate
To set up Flat Rate shipping: 1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. In the Configuration panel on the left, under Sales, select Shipping Methods. 3. Click to expand the Flat Rate section. Then, do the following:
a. Set Enabled to “Yes.” Flat Rate now appears as an option in the Estimate Shipping and Tax section of the shopping cart, and also in the Shipping section during checkout. b. Enter a Title for this shipping method. The default is “Flat Rate.” c. In the Method Name field, enter a descriptive label for the method that is used to calculate the rate. The default method name is “Fixed,” and appears next to the rate in the shopping cart. If you charge a handling fee, you can change the Method Name to “Plus Handling” or something else suitable. d. In the Type field, select how the Flat Rate shipping fee is to be applied: None: Disables the payment type. The Flat Rate option is listed in the cart, but with a rate of zero—which is the same as free shipping. Per Order: Charges the single flat rate for the entire order. Per Item: Charges a single flat rate for each item. The rate is multiplied by the number of items in the cart, regardless of whether there are multiple quantities of the same, or of different items.
334
Magento Go User Guide
CHAPTER 18:Shipping Methods e. Type the Price to be charged for the flat rate fee. f. Set Calculate Handling Fee to one of the following methods: Fixed Percent
Shipping Rates
g. If charging a Handling Fee, enter the amount according to the method used for calculating the fee. For example, if the fee is calculating based on a percentage, enter 0.06 for 6%. If using a fixed amount calculation, enter the fee as a decimal. h. In the Displayed Error Message box, type the message that appears if this method becomes unavailable. i. Set Ship to Applicable Countries to one of the following: All Allowed Countries Specific Countries Then, in the Ship to Specific Countries list, select each country where orders can be shipping using this method. (Hold the Ctrl key down to select multiple options.) j. Type a number in the Sort Order field to determine the order in which Flat Rate is listed with other shipping methods during checkout.
4. Click the Save Config button to save these settings.
Part IV: Sales & Fulfillment
335
CHAPTER 18:Shipping Methods
Shipping Rates
Configuration: Shipping Methods – Flat Rate
336
Magento Go User Guide
CHAPTER 18:Shipping Methods
Free Shipping
Free Shipping
Free shipping is one of the most effective promotions you can offer. It can be based on a minimum purchase, or set up as a shopping cart rule that applies when a set of conditions has been met. If both can be applied to the same order, the configuration setting will take precedence over the shopping cart rule. Note: Additional configuration settings may be required for each shipping carrier.
Shopping Cart: Estimate Shipping and Tax – Free Shipping
To set up free shipping: 1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. In the Configuration panel on the left, under Sales, select Shipping Methods. 3. Click to expand the Free Shipping section. Then, do the following:
a. Set Enabled to “Yes.” b. Enter a Title for this shipping method that will be displayed during checkout. c. In the Method Name field, enter a descriptive name for the method. d. In the Minimum Order Amount field, specify the order amount that qualifies an order for free shipping. e. In the Displayed Error Message box, type the message to appear if this method becomes unavailable. f. Set Ship to Applicable Countries to one of the following: All Allowed Countries Specific Countries In the Ship to Specific Countries list, select each country where orders can be shipped. (Hold the Ctrl key down to select multiple options.)
Part IV: Sales & Fulfillment
337
CHAPTER 18:Shipping Methods g. Set Show Method if Not Applicable to one of the following: No: Yes:
Free Shipping
To show the Free Shipping method only when applicable. To always show the Free Shipping method, even if not applicable.
h. Type a number in the Sort Order field to determine the order that this method appears during checkout. i. In the Sort Order field, specify the position of this shipping method in relation to the other shipping methods offered to the customer.
4. When the configuration is complete, click the Save Config button to save the
settings.
Configuration: Shipping Methods - Free Shipping
338
Magento Go User Guide
CHAPTER 18:Shipping Methods
Shipping Carriers
Shipping Carriers
If you have a commercial account with UPS, USPS, FedEx, or DHL, you can offer a shipping option for that carrier. The rates are automatically downloaded, so you do not need to look up the information. Although the configuration options vary for each carrier, they all require your Account Number or User ID, and a Gateway URL which is used to gain access to their system. UPS United Parcel Service offers domestic and international shipping services by land and air to more than 220 countries. USPS The United States Postal Service is the independent postal service of United States government. USPS offers domestic and international shipping services by land and air. FedEx FedEx offers domestic and international shipping services by land and air to more than 220 countries. DHL DHL offers integrated international services and tailored, customer-focused solutions for managing and transporting letters, goods and information. For step-by-step instructions, see: “Shipping Carriers,” on page 453.
Shipping Carrier Configuration
Part IV: Sales & Fulfillment
339
CHAPTER 18:Shipping Methods
Shipping Carriers
Notes:
_______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________
340
Magento Go User Guide
CHAPTER 19:
Payment Methods
Magento Go allows you to easily use a variety of payment methods in your online store. Many are already integrated into Magento Go and you can enable and configure them directly from the Magento Go Admin panel. Follow this guide to learn how to configure the following payment methods: Bank Transfer Cash on Delivery Payment Check or Money Order Purchase Order Zero Subtotal Checkout
Part IV: Sales & Fulfillment
341
CHAPTER 19:Payment Methods
Bank Transfer Payment
Bank Transfer Payment
Magento Go allows you to accept payments from your customers by bank transfer to your merchant bank account.
Bank Transfer Payment
To enable bank transfer payments: 1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. From the Configuration panel on the left, under Sales, select the Payment
Methods tab.
3. Click to expand the Bank Transfer Payment section. Then, do the following:
a. To activate this payment method, set Enabled to “Yes.” b. In the Title field, enter an appropriate name to identify this payment method during checkout process. c. Set New Order Status to “Pending” to identify newly generated orders which have not been processed completely.
342
Magento Go User Guide
CHAPTER 19:Payment Methods
Bank Transfer Payment
d. In the Payment from Applicable Countries field, select the countries where this payment method can be used: All Allowed Countries: Customers from all countries in the default countries list can use this payment method. Specific Countries: Customers from only those countries selected in the Payment from Specific Countries list can use this payment method. (The list appears when you select this option.) e. In the Instructions field, enter instructions for your customers to set up a bank transfer. Depending on the country where your bank is located, and your bank’s requirements for transfers, you might need to include the following information: f. Bank account name Bank account number Bank routing code Bank name Bank address
Set Minimum Order Total and Maximum Order Total to the minimum and maximum order amounts which are required to qualify for this payment method. Note: An order qualifies for the payment method if the total falls between, or exactly matches, the minimum or maximum total values.
g. Enter a numeric value in the Sort Order field, to set the position of Cash on Delivery in the list of payment methods that is displayed during checkout. Enter zero for the top of the sort order list, 1 for the second highest in the list, and so on.
4. When finished, click the Save Config button.
Part IV: Sales & Fulfillment
343
CHAPTER 19:Payment Methods
Cash on Delivery
Cash on Delivery
Magento Go allows you to accept payments from your customers with cash on delivery. With a cash on delivery payment option, also called “collect on delivery,” the customer doesn’t pay until the product is delivered.
Cash On Delivery
To enable cash on delivery payment method: 1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. From the Configuration panel on the left, under Sales, select Payment Methods. 3. Click to expand the Cash on Delivery section. Then, do the following:
a. To activate this payment method, set Enabled to “Yes.” b. In the Title field, enter an appropriate title to identify this payment method during the checkout process of your Magento Go store. c. Set New Order Status to “Pending” until they are processed completely. d. In the Payment from Applicable Countries field, select the countries where this payment method can be used: All Allowed Countries: Customers from all countries in the default countries list can use this payment method. Specific Countries: Customers from only those countries selected can use this payment method. (The list appears when you select this option.)
344
Magento Go User Guide
CHAPTER 19:Payment Methods
Cash on Delivery
Cash On Delivery
e. In the Instructions field, enter instructions for your customers to set up a Cash on Delivery payment. f. Set Minimum Order Total and Maximum Order Total to the minimum and maximum order amounts which are required to qualify for this payment method. Note: An order qualifies for the payment method if the total falls between, or exactly matches, the minimum or maximum total values. g. Enter a numeric value in the Sort Order field, to set the position of Cash on Delivery in the list of payment methods that is displayed during checkout. Enter zero for the top of the sort order list, 1 for the second highest in the list, and so on.
4. When finished, click Save Config.
Part IV: Sales & Fulfillment
345
CHAPTER 19:Payment Methods
Check / Money Order
Check / Money Order
Magento Go allows you to accept payments by check and money order. By default, the Check/Money Order payment method is enabled.
Check / Money Order
To configure checks and money orders: 1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. In the Configuration panel on the left, under Sales, click Payment Methods. 3. Click to expand the Check / Money Order section, and do the following:
a. To activate this payment method, set Enabled to “Yes.” b. Enter an appropriate Title to identify this payment method during checkout. The default entry is “Check / Money Order.”
c. Set New Order Status to display as “Pending” until the order has completed processing.
346
Magento Go User Guide
CHAPTER 19:Payment Methods
Check / Money Order
d. In the Payment from Applicable Countries field, select the countries where this payment method can be used: All Allowed Countries: Customers from all countries in the default countries list can use this payment method. Specific Countries: Customers from only those countries selected in the Payment from Specific Countries list can use this payment method. (The list appears when you select this option.) Note: To define which countries are included in the Allowed Countries list, see System > Configuration > General > Countries Options. e. In the Make Check Payable To field, enter the name of the person to whom the check will be payable. f. In the Send Check To field, enter the street address where the checks will be mailed. g. Set the Minimum Order Total and Maximum Order Total to the minimum and maximum order amounts which are required to qualify for this payment method. Note: An order qualifies if the total falls between, or exactly matches, the minimum or maximum total values. h. Enter a numeric value in the Sort Order field, to set the position of Cash on Delivery in the list of payment methods that is displayed during checkout. Enter zero for the top of the sort order list, 1 for the second highest in the list, and so on.
4. When finished, click the Save Config button.
When the completed configuration is saved, the Checks and Money Order option appears as an option under Payment Information during the checkout process.
Part IV: Sales & Fulfillment
347
CHAPTER 19:Payment Methods
Purchase Order
Purchase Order
The Purchase Order payment method allows commercial buyers to checkout items from your Magento Go store using a purchase order. When selected, a text field is added near the Purchase Order option in the Payment Information page of the checkout process. The customer can populate this field with the purchase order number or other information for the courier.
Purchase Order
To configure Purchase Orders: 1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. In the Configuration panel on the left, under Sales, select Payment Methods. 3. Click to expand the Purchase Order section. Then, do the following:
a. To activate this payment method, set Enabled to “Yes.” b. Enter an appropriate Title to identify this payment method during checkout. c. Set New Order Status to display as “Pending” until the order has completed processing.
348
Magento Go User Guide
CHAPTER 19:Payment Methods
Purchase Order
d. In the Payment from Applicable Countries field, select the countries where this payment method can be used: All Allowed Countries: Customers from all countries in the default countries list can use this payment method. Specific Countries: Customers from only those countries selected in the Payment from Specific Countries list can use this payment method. (The list appears when you select this option.) Note: To define which countries are included in the Allowed Countries list, see System > Configuration > General > Countries Options.
Purchase Order
e. Set the Minimum Order Total and Maximum Order Total to the order amounts which are required to qualify for this payment method. Note: An order qualifies if the total falls between, or exactly matches, the minimum or maximum total values. f. Enter a numeric value in the Sort Order field to set the position of Purchase Order in the list of payment methods displayed during checkout.
4. When finished, click the Save Config button.
Part IV: Sales & Fulfillment
349
CHAPTER 19:Payment Methods
Zero Subtotal Checkout
Zero Subtotal Checkout
If a customer places an order and the subtotal is equal to zero, you can offer them the Zero Subtotal Checkout payment method. This payment method is only applied to the shopping cart if the subtotal equals zero. This will usually happen when the discount covers the whole price of an item and the customer has the option to select Free Shipping for shipping method. Note: The Zero Subtotal Checkout payment method is visible only when an order is created in the Admin panel.
To Setup Zero Subtotal Checkout: 1. In the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. In the Configuration panel on the left, under Sales, select Payment Methods. 3. Click to expand the Zero Subtotal Checkout section.
Zero Subtotal Checkout
350
Magento Go User Guide
CHAPTER 19:Payment Methods Then, do the following:
Zero Subtotal Checkout
a. Enter an appropriate Title to identify this payment method during checkout. b. Set Enabled to “Yes” to activate this payment method. c. Set New Order Status to display as “Pending” until the order has completed processing. Pending: Processing: The order is pending approval and processing. The order is being processed.
d. Set Automatically Invoice All Items according to “Yes” if you want to invoice all items having a zero balance automatically. e. In the Payment from Applicable Countries field, select the countries where this payment method can be used: All Allowed Countries: Customers from all countries in the default countries list can use this payment method. Specific Countries: Customers from only those countries selected in the Payment from Specific Countries list can use this payment method. (The list appears when you select this option.) f. Enter a numeric value in the Sort Order field, to set the position of Cash on Delivery in the list of payment methods that is displayed during checkout. Enter zero for the top of the sort order list, 1 for the second highest in the list, and so on.
4. When finished, click the Save Config button.
Part IV: Sales & Fulfillment
351
CHAPTER 19:Payment Methods
Zero Subtotal Checkout
Notes:
_______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________
352
Magento Go User Guide
CHAPTER 20:
Payment Services & Gateways
Magento Go allows you to easily process payments using variety of payment processing services and gateways. Many are already integrated into Magento Go and you can enable and configure them directly from the Admin panel.
Payment Services
Payment services are ways of adding more value and configuration to your payment processing gateways. 3D Secure Credit Card Validation If you want an additional layer of protection against fraudulent charges or chargebacks for sales in your Magento Go store, you can enable 3D Secure Credit Card Validation. The 3D Secure Credit Card Validation payment service can increase your customers’ confidence in the security of transactions made in your store, and it might also qualify your business for lower processing rates, depending on your merchant account. Kount Fraud Detection Kount Fraud Detection is a credit card fraud detection and prevention solution by Kount, Inc. Their fraud detection tool is integrated with Magento Go and is available for your store. Payment Bridge Styling The payment bridge styling feature lets you customize the look and feel of the payment bridge page in the checkout process.
Payment Gateways
Magento Go supports a wide range of global payment gateway services that provide secure processing of online payment transactions. For step-by-step instructions, see: “Payment Gateways” on page 481.
Part IV: Sales & Fulfillment
353
Chapter 20: Payment Services & Gateways
Worldwide
Worldwide
PayPal With PayPal’s deep integration into Magento Go, you can easily accept credit cards and PayPal payments using PayPal, all while keeping customers on your site. Already have a merchant account? Add PayPal Express checkout to increase conversion. Authorize.Net Authorize.Net payment solutions include free fraud tools, free customer support, a free website seal, and the ability to accept multi-channel payments: online, mail order/telephone order, retail and mobile. CyberSource (SOAP Toolkit) CyberSource, a wholly-owned subsidiary of Visa Inc., is a payment management company. Over 330,000 businesses worldwide use CyberSource to process online payments, streamline fraud management, and simplify payment security. For more information, please visit www.cybersource.com. First Data Global Web Service API The First Data Global Gateway Web Service API enables full-featured, highly secure and reliable eCommerce Web sites and custom retail implementations, including tax and shipping calculators.
North America
PSi Gate PSiGate is a full-service Canadian provider of electronic payment processing services. They deliver a secure interface for your website so you can accept credit card and Interac Online payments with reliable, real-time transaction processing. They ensure maximum performance while taking into account power, security, disaster tolerance and bandwidth requirements. Braintree With Braintree, merchants can accept payment in 134 local currencies and choose to settle in up to 21 different currencies. As an online merchant, the advantage to you of using Braintree is that your customers can save credit card information on file.
354
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 20: Payment Services & Gateways
Europe
Europe
Card Gate Plus Card Gate Plus is a Payment Service Provider for European merchants. We offer credit card billing via your own merchant account and various local billing options like iDEAL (Netherlands), MisterCash (Belgium) and DIRECTebanking (Germany, Austria). DIBS Payment Services DIBS Payment Services is the leading independent provider of functional, secure and innovative payment services for Internet commerce in the Nordic countries. DIBS handles more than 13,000 customer transactions daily in 17 countries. Ogone Direct Link Ogone Payment Services (Payment Service Provider) delivers non-face-toface businesses the payment solutions platform, added value opportunities and technology advancements that become essential for the way payments are performed, managed and secured today. Paybox Direct Paybox is an independent payment service provider based in France, specializing in the European Market. We offer a connection to more than 25 payment methods (debit and credit cards, PayPal, Amex, local payment methods, etc.). Payone.de PAYONE is a leading payment service provider in Germany. Featuring processing of national and international payments and outsourcing of monetary transactions, the payment-Platform Finance Gate makes processes fully automated with the highest performance standards and security in mind. Sage Pay Direct Sage pay is the UK’s largest independent payment service provider, processing millions of secure payments every month for over 33,000 businesses, from start-ups to major online, consumer, and business brands.
Part IV: Sales & Fulfillment
355
Chapter 20: Payment Services & Gateways
Asia
Asia
CCAvenue CCAvenue is the largest and most popular online payment gateway solution in South Asia. With more than 5,000 websites relying on their services, they are a clear leader of online transactions in the region.
Oceania
eWAY Direct Focusing on a high level of standards in technology, innovations and customer care, eWay has become Australia’s award winning payment gateway. eWAY specializes in delivering successful eCommerce payment gateway services to thousands of merchants.
356
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 20: Payment Services & Gateways
Express Checkout
PayPal
PayPal is a global leader in online payments and a fast and secure way for your customers to pay online. With PayPal you can accept payments from all major debit and credit cards as well as PayPal account holders. Since customers don’t even need a PayPal account to pay with PayPal, both you and your customers can get extra convenience without extra effort. PayPal offers a diverse set of payment methods available for merchants of all sizes and business types.
Express Checkout
With this payment method enabled, the “Check out with PayPal” button becomes available on the product view pages, in the shopping cart, and in the mini shopping cart. Clicking the button allows the customer to review the shopping cart price information on the PayPal site and accept PayPal transactions on the PayPal site.
Website Payments Pro
(Permissions)
Country Acceptance: United States, Canada, United Kingdom Accept credit cards and PayPal transactions with PayPal’s all-in-one online payment processing solution. Customers who use Website Payments Pro(Permissions) as a payment method do not need to have a customer account with PayPal. Credit card information is entered directly on your Magento Go store during the checkout process. After the order is placed, the PayPal payment system processes the credit card payments through the Payflow Pro Gateway. When Website Payments Pro is enabled, the Express Checkout payment method is also automatically enabled (it cannot be disabled when Website Payments Pro is enabled). The Website Payments Pro payment method is only applicable to merchants in the United States, Canada, and the United Kingdom. Website Payment Pro(Permission) will accept payments with all major credit card types. It is available in the United States, Canada, and the United Kingdom.
Part IV: Sales & Fulfillment
357
Chapter 20: Payment Services & Gateways
Website Payments Pro Payflow Edition
Website Payment Standard
Country Acceptance: All PayPal supported merchant countries. With the Website Payments Standard payment method, you can accept credit card and PayPal transactions by redirecting the customers to PayPal for approval. For customers with existing PayPal accounts that already have their credit card information, payment is a one-step procedure, as the customer simply needs to click the Pay Now button to complete the transaction. Note: The Website Payments Standard payment method becomes disabled if Website Payments Pro and/or Website Payments Pro Payflow Edition are enabled.
Website Payments Pro Payflow Edition
(includes Express Checkout)
Country Acceptance: United States, United Kingdom Accept credit cards and PayPal transactions with PayPal’s all-in-one online payment processing solution utilizing the Payflow Gateway. With Website Payments Pro (Payflow Edition), customers do not need to have a customer account with PayPal to make a purchase using their merchant system. Customers enter their credit card information within the Payment Information page during the checkout process directly on your Magento Go store. Once an order is submitted in your Magento Go store with this payment method, the PayPal payment system processes the credit card payments through the Payflow Pro Gateway. When Website Payments Pro is enabled, the Express Checkout for Payflow Pro payment method is automatically enabled. It uses the Website Payments Pro Payflow Edition API credentials for connecting to PayPal. Note: The Website Payments Pro Payflow Edition payment method is available only for customers using Visa, MasterCard, Switch/Maestro, and Solo credit card types in the United States and the United Kingdom.
358
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 20: Payment Services & Gateways
Payflow Pro Gateway
Payflow Pro Gateway
(optional Express Checkout)
Country Acceptance: United States, Australia, New Zealand If you already have a merchant account with another provider, you can still accept credit card payments through the Payflow Pro Gateway service. Customers using this payment method do not need to have a customer account with PayPal. Credit card information is entered during the checkout process. After the order is placed, the PayPal payment system processes credit card payments through the Payflow Pro Gateway. The Payflow Pro Gateway payment method is only available to merchants in the United States, Australia, and New Zealand. All major credit card types are accepted. American Express cards require signing an additional agreement. You can learn more at http://www.paypal.com/amexupdate. Before you begin to use Payflow Pro Gateway, you need to have a Payflow Pro account with PayPal. You will use the account information provided to you during registration in the API/Integration fields when configuring it in your Magento Go admin panel.
Part IV: Sales & Fulfillment
359
Chapter 20: Payment Services & Gateways
Getting Started With PayPal
Getting Started With PayPal
Step 1: Set up a PayPal Business Account
1. Go to merchant.paypal.com and click the Get Started button to create a new
account.
Get Started with PayPal
2. On the next page, do one of the following:
If you already have a regular PayPal account, you can simply log in to your existing account to sign up for a payment solution. To open a PayPal account, click the Create New Account button, select your business location and language preference, and click the Create New Account button again to get started.
3. Complete the required fields with your business information, and click the
Continue button to register.
360
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 20: Payment Services & Gateways
Setting Up a PayPal Sandbox Account
4. After you complete the sign-up process, log in to your account and click the
Profile link.
5. On the Profile Summary page, click the API Access link under Account
Information. Then, click the Grant API Permissions link and record your API credentials. You will need them to configure your PayPal payment settings for Magento Go. Note: After you have a business account, you can get your credentials through a shortcut in the PayPal section of Magento Go. Under the API/integration Settings bar click the button. Enter your PayPal Business account login information to view your API credentials as displayed below.
Setting Up a PayPal Sandbox Account
The PayPal Sandbox is a testing environment that is a duplicate of the live PayPal site, except that no real money changes hands. The Sandbox allows you to test your entire integration before submitting transactions to the live PayPal environment. You can also create and manage test accounts, and view emails and API credentials for those test accounts. The PayPal Sandbox can be used to test the following: Website Payments Standard Website Payments Pro Website Payments Pro Payflow Edition Express Checkout
Part IV: Sales & Fulfillment
361
Chapter 20: Payment Services & Gateways
Setting Up a PayPal Sandbox Account
Step 1:
Create a “Buyer” Sandbox Account
1. Go to developer.paypal.com and log in. If you don’t already have an account, you
need to create one.
PayPal Sandbox
2. Select Test Accounts from the left side panel. 3. Under New test account, click Preconfigured to create a new test account. 4. Complete the information requested, and make sure to select the Buyer account
type.
362
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 20: Payment Services & Gateways
Setting Up a PayPal Sandbox Account
Note: Be sure to record this account email and password, as you will use it to simulate a payment transaction.
5.
Click Create Account to create this buyer test account.
Step 2:
Create a “Seller” Sandbox Account
1. Go to the PayPal developer site and log in.
http://developer.paypal.com If you don’t already have an account, you will need to create one.
2. After logging in, select Test Accounts and click the Create Test Account link. 3. Under New test account, click Preconfigured to create a new test account. 4. Enter all the information necessary. Make sure the Seller account type is
selected.
Part IV: Sales & Fulfillment
363
Chapter 20: Payment Services & Gateways
Setting Up a PayPal Sandbox Account
Note: Be sure to record this account email and password, as you will use it to simulate a payment transaction.
5. Click Create Account to create this account.
Step 3:
Configure the Sandbox Account in Magento Go
1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. In the Configuration panel on the left, click the PayPal tab. 3. Enter the Email address associated with your PayPal Merchant Account in the
Email Associated with PayPal Merchant Account field.
4. Check the Website Payments Standard check box to enable the payment
method.
5. Change the Sandbox Mode option to Yes.
364
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 20: Payment Services & Gateways
Setting Up PayPal Express Checkout
Website Payments Standard Settings
6. Click Save to save these changes. 7. Once configured, place test transactions to ensure your PayPal setup is capturing
and processing orders properly.
Setting Up PayPal Express Checkout
Country acceptance: Australia, Austria, Belgium, Canada, China, France, Germany, Italy, Japan, Netherlands, Poland, Spain, Switzerland, United Kingdom, United States PayPal Express Checkout displays the “Check Out With PayPal” button on product view pages, in the shopping cart, and mini shopping cart. Customers who click the button are transferred to the PayPal website, where they can review their shopping cart information and complete the purchase. Users of PayPal’s Website Payments Pro Payflow Edition, can simply select the Express Checkout checkbox in the Website Payments Pro Payflow section to activate this payment method. Note: PayPal Express Checkout is disabled for orders with multiple shipping addresses.
Part IV: Sales & Fulfillment
365
Chapter 20: Payment Services & Gateways
Setting Up PayPal Express Checkout
To set up PayPal Express Checkout: 1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. In the Configuration panel on the left, under Sales, select PayPal. 3. Select a Merchant Country.
Merchant Account
4. Under Select a PayPal Solution, select the Express Checkout (Permissions)
checkbox.
5. Complete the configuration in the Express Checkout Settings section. 6. To enable PayPal Express Checkout, click the Setup or change your site
permissions with PayPal button.
PayPal Express Checkout (Permissions) Settings
366
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 20: Payment Services & Gateways
Setting Up PayPal Express Checkout
7. From the PayPal website, log in to your account, or select the option to create a
new account.
8. When asked to permit Magento to contact PayPal and process payments on your
behalf, click I Agree. Then, complete the following information: a. In the Title field, enter a name to identify this payment method to the customer during checkout. This field can be unique for each store view. We recommend that you use the name, “PayPal” for each store view. b. Enter a number in the Sort Order field to determine the sequence in which this payment method appears when listed with others during checkout. c. Set Payment Action to determine how you want payments to be authorized and processed. Options include: Authorization: Payments are authorized only on PayPal’s side; your Magento Go store generates an order. To capture the transaction, create an invoice from the Admin panel. Sale: The payment authorization and sale is completed upon PayPal approval when you generate an order and invoice from the Magento Go Admin panel. d. Set Payment Applicable From to identify the countries where you will accept payment by this method. Options include: All Allowed Countries: Customers from all of the countries in the default countries list can use this payment method. Note: You can define which countries are listed in the default list by modifying the Allowed Countries field located in System > Configuration > General > Countries Options. Specific Countries: Only customers from countries selected in the Countries Payment Applicable From list (it appears when you select this option) may use this payment method. e. Set Shortcut on Shopping Cart to “Enabled” to make the Express Checkout button available on the shopping cart page. f. Set Shortcut Buttons Flavor to the type of image you want to appear next to the Payment Information section during checkout. Options include:
Part IV: Sales & Fulfillment
367
Chapter 20: Payment Services & Gateways
Setting Up PayPal Express Checkout
Dynamic: (Recommended) Allows the image to be changed dynamically by PayPal. When signing up for a PayPal campaign, the appearance of the image changes during the campaign, based on the parameter information that you add to the image URL.
Static: The static images cannot be changed dynamically. When participating in a PayPal campaign, the image code must be manually updated to change the image displayed and restore the default image when the campaign is over.
g. Set Enable PayPal Guest Checkout to determine whether customers must have a PayPal account to make a purchase. Options include: Yes: Permits customers who are not registered with PayPal to make a purchase. In this case, the customer simply needs to enter the credit card information and billing address. When the credit card information is verified by PayPal, the customer can review the payment information and complete the transaction. No: Requires the customer to register with PayPal before making a purchase.
9. When finished, click the Save Config button to save your settings.
368
Magento Go User Guide
CHAPTER 21:
Tax Settings
Magento Go provides a variety of options for defining taxes. Customer and Product Tax classes are used to define Tax Rules. Tax Rules are defined as a combination of a Customer Tax Class, Product Tax Class, and Tax Rates. Each type of customer can be assigned a tax class when you define them and each product is assigned a tax class. Magento Go analyzes the shopping cart of each customer and calculates the appropriate tax according to the class of the customer and the class of the products in the shopping cart and the region (as defined by the customer’s shipping address, billing address or shipping origin).
Setting Up Taxes
Before jumping into tax classes and tax rules, take a look at the general tax settings and make sure taxes are set up according to your business needs.
Step 1:
Set up Tax Classes
1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. Then, in the
Configuration panel on the left, under Sales, select Tax.
2. Click to expand the Tax Classes section.
3. Set Tax Classes for Shipping to one of the following:
None Default Taxable Goods Shipping
Part IV: Sales & Fulfillment
369
Chapter 21: Tax Settings
Setting Up Taxes
Step 2:
Set up Tax Calculation Settings
1. Click to expand the Calculation Settings section.
Then, do the following: a. Set Tax Calculation Method Based On to one of the following areas of the invoice: b. Unit price Row total Total
Set Tax Calculation Based On to one of the following locations, according to your local requirements: Shipping address Billing Address Shipping Origin
c. Set Catalog Prices to one of the following: Excluding Tax Including Tax
d. Set Shipping Prices to one of the following: Excluding Tax Including Tax Note: This applies to shipping amounts defined through the Admin panel, as well as shipping amounts obtained from gateways.
370
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 21: Tax Settings e. Set Apply Customer Tax to one of the following: f. Before Discount After Discount
Setting Up Taxes
Set Apply Discount on Prices to one of the following: Excluding Tax Including Tax Note: If “Apply Tax after Discount” is selected, the applied discount on price, including tax, is calculated based on store tax.
g. Set Apply Tax On to one of the following: Custom price if available Original price only
2. Click to expand the Default Tax Destination Calculation section.
Then, do the following: a. Set Default Country to the country where the tax applies. b. Set Default State to the state where the tax applies. By default, this option is not set, as indicated by the asterisk (*). c. Set Default Post Code to the ZIP or postal code where the tax applies. By default, this option is not set, as indicated by the asterisk (*). Note: These options apply only if the default country is set to United States.
Step 3:
Set up Price Display Settings
1. Click to expand the Price Display Settings section.
Part IV: Sales & Fulfillment
371
Chapter 21: Tax Settings Then, do the following:
Setting Up Taxes
a. Set both Display Product Prices in Catalog and Display Shipping Prices to one of the following: Excluding Tax Including Tax Including and Excluding Tax (displays both)
2. Click to expand the Orders, Invoices, Credit Memos Display Settings section.
Then, do the following: a. Set Display Prices, Display Subtotal, and Display Shipping Amount to one of the following: Excluding Tax Including Tax Including and Excluding Tax (Displays both)
a. Set Include Tax in Grand Total to one of the following: Yes: No: Calculates grand total to include tax. Calculates grand total without tax.
b. Set Display Full Tax Summary to one of the following: Yes: No: Displays tax summary on orders, invoices, and credit memos. Does not display tax summary on orders, invoices, and credit memos.
c. Set Display Zero Tax Subtotal to one of the following: Yes: No: Displays subtotal for orders with zero tax. Does not display subtotal for orders with zero tax.
372
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 21: Tax Settings
Setting Up Taxes
Step 4:
Set Up Fixed Product Taxes
1. Click to expand the Fixed Product Taxes section.
2. Set Enable FPT to one of the following:
Enable: Disable: Enables fixed product taxes (if they exist). Disables fixed product taxes.
3. The options for the following fields are listed below. Set each field to indicate how
fixed product taxes, if used, are displayed throughout your store. a. Set Display Prices in Product Lists to indicate how fixed product taxes, if used, are displayed in your store. (See Display Price Options.) b. Set Display Prices on Product View Page to indicate how fixed product taxes, if used, are displayed in your store. (See Display Price Options.) c. Set Display Prices in Sales Module to indicate how fixed product taxes, if used, are displayed in your store. This option determines the price appearance in the Order Review section of checkout and in the Items Ordered section of a sales order. (See Display Price Options.) d. Set Display Prices in Emails to indicate how fixed product taxes, if used, are displayed in your store. (See Display Price Options.)
Part IV: Sales & Fulfillment
373
Chapter 21: Tax Settings
Setting Up Taxes
Display Price Options Including FPT Only Displays prices with fixed product tax, but not a description of the tax. Displays prices with fixed product tax and its description. Displays prices without fixed product tax, its description, or the price with the tax. Displays prices without fixed product tax.
Including FPT and FPT description
Excluding FPT, FPT description, final price
Excluding FPT
4. Complete the following to determine how discounts, taxes, and subtotals are
applied to Fixed Product Taxes: a. Set Apply Discounts to FPT to one of the following: Yes: No: Applies discount to the fixed product tax amount. Applies discount to the base product price (excluding fixed product tax). b. Set Apply Tax to FPT to one of the following: Yes: No: Applies tax to the fixed product tax. Applies tax to the base price of a product, without the fixed product tax. c. Set Include FPT in Subtotal to one of the following: Yes: No: Calculates fixed product tax into the shopping cart subtotal. Displays fixed product tax below the shopping cart subtototal, but does not calculate the tax into the subtotal.
5. Click the Save Config button to save the settings.
374
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 21: Tax Settings
Retail Tax Calculations
Retail Tax Calculations
This section shows how to set up taxes for retail customers and taxable goods. To set up retail tax calculation, you must configure the following elements: Step 1: Step 2: Step 3: Step 4: Step 5: Set Up a Tax Rate Set Up a Product Tax Class Customer Tax Class Apply the Tax Class Set Up Tax Rules
Step 1:
Set Up a Tax Rate
1. From the Admin panel, go to Sales > Tax > Manage Tax Zones & Rates.
2. From Manage Tax Rates, click the Add New Tax Rate button.
Part IV: Sales & Fulfillment
375
Chapter 21: Tax Settings
Retail Tax Calculations
3. In the Tax Rate Information section, do the following:
a. In the Tax Identifier field, enter a name for the new tax rate. Make sure to not include spaces in this field. This identifier is not visible to customers if the alternate Tax Titles section is used. b. Select the Country and State to which the specific tax applies. c. Set ZIP/Post is Range to Yes to apply the tax to a range of ZIP codes. Then, enter the beginning and ending range of ZIP codes in the following fields: Range From Range To
d. In the Rate Percent field, type the tax rate as a decimal. For example, a tax rate of 9.75% tax rate is entered as 9.75. e. In the Tax Titles section, under English, enter a name for the tax rate. If applicable, enter the translation of the tax rate name for each language supported.
4. Click the Save Rate button to save your changes.
376
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 21: Tax Settings
Retail Tax Calculations
Step 2:
Set Up a Product Tax Class
Product Tax Classes determine which taxes are applied to a product. To configure Product Tax classes, do the following:
1. From the Admin panel, go to Sales > Tax > Product Tax Classes.
2. From Product Tax Classes, click the Add New button.
3. In the Product Tax Class Information section, type the Class Name. Then, click
the Save Class button to save your changes.
The new class appears in the Product Tax Classes list.
Part IV: Sales & Fulfillment
377
Chapter 21: Tax Settings
Retail Tax Calculations
4. To apply the Taxable Goods class to a product from the catalog, go to Catalog >
Manage Products.
5. Open the product record in edit mode, and set Tax Class to Taxable Goods.
6. Click the Save button to save changes.
378
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 21: Tax Settings
Retail Tax Calculations
Step 3:
Set Up a Customer Tax Class
1. From the Admin panel, go to Sales > Tax > Customer Tax Classes.
2. From the Customer Tax Classes list, click the Add New button.
3. In the Customer Tax Class Information section, type a new Class Name.
4. Then, click the Save Class button.
The new class appears in the Customer Tax Classes list.
Part IV: Sales & Fulfillment
379
Chapter 21: Tax Settings
Retail Tax Calculations
Step 4:
Apply the Tax Class
To apply a Tax Class to a Customer Group:
To apply the new class to a customer group from your store, do the following:
1. From the Admin panel, select Customer > Customer Groups.
2. In the Customer Groups list, click to open the Customer Group.
3. In the Customer Group Information section, select the Tax Class and click Save.
380
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 21: Tax Settings
Retail Tax Calculations
To apply a Customer Group to a specific customer: 1. Go to Customers > Manage Customers. Then, from the Manage Customer list,
open the customer record in edit mode.
2. In the Customer Information panel on the left, select Account Information.
Then, select the group from the Customer Group list and click Save.
Step 5:
Set Up Tax Rules
Tax rules are a combination of a customer tax class, product tax class, and tax rate. Tax rules answer the fundamental question: Who gets charged how much, and for which products?
1. From the Admin panel, go to Sales > Tax > Manage Tax Rules.
Part IV: Sales & Fulfillment
381
Chapter 21: Tax Settings
Retail Tax Calculations
2. From the Manage Tax Rules list, click the Add New button.
3. In the Tax Rule Information section, do the following:
a. Type a Name for the tax rule that will be easy to identify. b. Select the Customer Tax Class for the rule. c. Select the Product Tax Class for the rule. d. Select the Tax Rate to apply for the rule. e. In the Priority field, enter a number to determine the importance of this rule in relation to others. Lower numbers take precedence. Tax rules are applied in ascending order, so the rule with a sort order of zero is applied first. Note: If two tax rules have the same priority number, the taxes are added together. Otherwise the taxes are compounded. f. In the Sort Order field, enter a number to determine the order that this rule appears when listed with other rules.
4. When complete, click the Save Rule button.
382
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 21: Tax Settings
Value Added Tax (VAT)
Value Added Tax (VAT)
It is important to configure the Value Added Tax calculation as required for your locale. This example shows how to set up a 20% VAT for a Magento Go retail store operating in the United Kingdom. Note: Be sure to find out the rules and regulations governing VAT for your locale. Follow these steps to configure VAT for your store: Step 1: Step 2: Step 3: Step 4: Step 5: Step 6: Set Up Customer Tax Classes Set Up Product Tax Classes Set Up Tax Zones and Rates Set Up Tax Rules Apply Tax Classes to Products Set Up General Tax Settings
Step 1:
Set Up Customer Tax Classes
1. From the Admin panel, go to Sales > Tax > Customer Tax Classes.
2. Verify the name of the customer tax class to which the VAT applies.
If you need to create a customer tax class, click Add New and create the class.
Part IV: Sales & Fulfillment
383
Chapter 21: Tax Settings
Value Added Tax (VAT)
Step 2:
Set Up Product Tax Classes
1. From the Admin panel, select Sales > Tax > Product Tax Classes.
2. Click the Add New button and add the following classes:
VAT Standard VAT Reduced VAT Zero
3. Click the Save button. The new classes appear in the Product Tax Classes list.
384
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 21: Tax Settings
Value Added Tax (VAT)
Step 3:
Set Up Tax Zones and Rates
1. From the Admin panel, select Sales > Tax > Manage Tax Zones & Rates.
2. Click the Add New Tax Rate button, and add the following new rates:
a. Create a standard value added tax rate with the following settings : Tax Identifier: Country and State: Rate Percent: VAT Standard United Kingdom 20.00
b. Create a reduced value added tax rate with the following settings : Tax Identifier: Country and State: Rate Percent: VAT Reduced United Kingdom 5.00
c. Create a zero value added tax rate with the following settings : Tax Identifier: Country and State: Rate Percent: VAT Zero United Kingdom 0.00
3. Click the Save button. The new rates appear in the Manage Tax Rates list.
Part IV: Sales & Fulfillment
385
Chapter 21: Tax Settings
Value Added Tax (VAT)
Step 4:
Set Up Tax Rules
1. From the Admin panel, select Sales > Tax > Manage Tax Rules.
2. Click the Add New button, and do the following:
a. Create a standard VAT rule with the following settings: Name: VAT Standard
Customer Tax Class: Retail Customer Product Tax Class: Tax Rate: VAT Standard VAT Standard
b. Create a reduced VAT rule with the following settings: Name: VAT Reduced
Customer Tax Class: Retail Customer Product Tax Class: Tax Rate: VAT Reduced VAT Reduced
c. Create a zero VAT rule with the following settings: Name: VAT Zero
Customer Tax Class: Retail Customer Product Tax Class: Tax Rate: VAT Zero VAT Zero
3. Click the Save Rule button for each.
386
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 21: Tax Settings The new rates appear in the Manage Tax Rules list.
Value Added Tax (VAT)
Step 5:
Apply Tax Classes to Products
1. From the Admin panel, select Catalog > Manage Products. 2. Open the record in edit mode, and set Tax Class to the VAT class for the product.
3. Click the Save button to save changes.
Step 6:
Set Up General Tax Settings
Complete the configuration of the general tax settings.
Part IV: Sales & Fulfillment
387
Chapter 21: Tax Settings
Value Added Tax (VAT)
Notes:
_______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________
388
Magento Go User Guide
CHAPTER 22:
Reports
Magento Go provides a wide selection of useful reports to keep you current on everything from the contents of your customers’ shopping carts to their tags. Report data can be downloaded as a CSV or XML data file.
Total Ordered Report
Part IV: Sales & Fulfillment
389
Chapter 22: Reports
Sales Reports
Sales Reports
Sales reports summarize sales information for a designated scope and period of time, and include the following: Orders Tax Invoiced Shipping Refunds Coupons PayPal Settlement Reports
To run the report: 1. From the Admin panel, select Reports > Sales and select the type of Sales
Report you’d like to generate.
2. Define the filters to be used to select the data for the report. Then, click the Show
Report button to generate the report.
3. To export the report data, set the Export to list to either “CSV” or “Excel,” and
click the Export button. Sales Report Orders Description Displays information related to sales orders, including the sales, invoice, refund, shipping, and discount amounts for all orders created or updated during the specified period of time. Displays tax amounts grouped by tax rates which are applied to sales orders invoiced during the specified period. Displays the number of created and invoiced orders and provides invoice-related amounts grouped by tax rates. Provides shipping amount information for each shipping method used in the orders invoiced during the specified period of time.
Tax
Invoiced
Shipping
390
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 22: Reports
Sales Reports
Sales Report Refunds
Description Provides information about refunded sales orders, including those refunded online and offline. Displays order discount aggregation per period and coupon. Provides information about transactions which affect settlement of funds as well as a summary of each currency held by the account, total debits and credits, and beginning and ending balances. Description Allows you to match dates based on either the date the sales order was created or the date it was last updated. Defines the range of time included in the report, as: per day, month, or year. (Required) Defines the date limitations of report.
Coupons
PayPal Settlement Report
Sales Report Filters Match Period To
Period
Date Range (From / To date) Order Status
By default, the report is not filtered by order status. Options include: Processing On Hold Complete Closed Canceled Suspected Fraud Payment Review
Empty Rows
For selected date period, the option may be omitted (by default). If not omitted, each period of the specified date range appears in the report. Sales reports may display expected and actual values. An expected value is the estimated amount to be paid.
Show Actual Values
Part IV: Sales & Fulfillment
391
Chapter 22: Reports
Shopping Cart Reports
Shopping Cart Reports
The shopping cart reports provide a detailed account of cart activity, and include the following reports: Products in Cart Abandoned Carts
Products in Cart
The Products in Cart report lists all products in your store, including the price, the amount of orders placed containing that product.
To run the report: 1. From the Admin panel, select Reports > Shopping Cart. Then, click Products
in cart.
2. To export the report data, set the Export to list to either “CSV” or “Excel,” and
click the Export button.
Abandoned Carts
The Abandoned Carts report lists all registered customers who added products to their Shopping Cart, and then logged out with the items still in the cart before placing an order. Shows the number of line items in the cart, total quantity, total monetary amount of the products, any coupon code the customer may have applied, the timestamps for when the first item was added to the cart and the most recent cart activity.
To run the report: 1. From the Admin panel, select Reports > Shopping Cart. Then, select
Abandoned carts.
2. To export the report data, set the Export to list to either “CSV” or “Excel,” and
click the Export button.
392
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 22: Reports
Product Reports
Product Reports
The Product reports can be used to analyze sales and identify buying patterns. Reports include: Bestsellers Products Ordered Most Viewed Low Stock
Bestsellers Report
The Bestsellers report shows information about products that sell best based on highest quantity across different time periods.
To run the report: 1. From the Admin panel, select Reports > Products > Bestsellers. 2. In the Period field, select the period to include in the report. This field consists of
day, month, and year.
3. In the From and To fields, enter the date limitations of the report. These fields
are required to be specified in order to build a report.
4. The Empty Rows filter specifies whether or not to display periods that do not
contain any sales order information.
5. Click the Show Report button to generate the report. 6. To export the report data, set the Export to list to either “CSV” or “Excel,” and
click the Export button.
Part IV: Sales & Fulfillment
393
Chapter 22: Reports
Product Reports
Products Ordered Report
The products ordered report shows what products are ordered across different time periods.
To run the report: 1. From the Admin panel, select Reports > Products > Products Ordered. 2. Select From and To dates in the fields at the top to specify limitations for the
report. This is required.
3. In the Show By field, select whether to filter by Day, Month, or Year. 4. Click the Refresh button to generate a Products Ordered Report in real time. 5. To export the report data, set the Export to list to either “CSV” or “Excel,” and
click the Export button.
Most Viewed Report
The Most Viewed Products report displays the most often viewed products across different time periods.
To run the report: 1. From the Admin panel, select Reports > Products > Most Viewed. 2. Select From and To dates in the fields at the top to specify limitations for the
report. These fields are required.
3. In the Show By field, select whether to break down the numbers by Day, Month,
or Year.
4. Click the Refresh button to generate a Most Viewed Report in real time. 5. To export the report data, set the Export to list to either “CSV” or “Excel,” and
click the Export button.
394
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 22: Reports
Product Reports
Low Stock Report
The Low Stock report can help you stay aware of the low stock items and replenish their quantity in the inventory. It displays out of stock items and those whose quantity is notified to be lower than the required amount.
To run the report: 1. From the Admin panel, select Reports > Products > Low Stock. 2. This page shows all products with a stock quantity below the required amount.
The table displays three columns: Product Name Product SKU Stock Qty
3. To drill down by Product Name, Product SKU, and Stock Qty, use the filters at
the top of each column, and click Search.
4. To export the report data, set the Export to list to either “CSV” or “Excel,” and
click the Export button.
Part IV: Sales & Fulfillment
395
Chapter 22: Reports
Customer Reports
Customer Reports
The Customer Reports provide a detailed report of all customer activity, including account status and orders. New Accounts Customers by Orders Total Customers by Number of Orders
New Accounts Report
The New Accounts report provides statistics on the number of user accounts created in the system during the specified period. It provides the total number of user accounts created in this period.
To run the report: 1. From the Admin panel, select Reports > Customers > New Accounts. 2. Select From and To dates in the fields at the top to specify limitations of this
report. These fields are required.
3. In the Show By field, select whether to break down the numbers by Day, Month,
or Year.
4. Click the Refresh button to generate the report in real time. 5. To export the report data, set the Export to list to either “CSV” or “Excel,” and
click the Export button.
Customers by Orders Total
This report lists customers who submitted orders during the specified period by to order amount. It also displays the total number of orders, their total average order amount, and the overall amount for all orders submitted during the specified date range.
396
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 22: Reports
Customer Reports
To run the report: 1. From the Admin panel: Select Reports > Customers. Then, choose Customers
by orders total.
2. Select From and To dates in the fields at the top to specify limitations of this
report. These fields are required.
3. In the Show By field, select per Day, Month, or Year to define period per basis of
selected field. This field is required to generate the report.
4. Click the Refresh button to generate a Most Viewed Report in real time. 5. To export the report data, set the Export to list to either “CSV” or “Excel,” and
click the Export button.
Customers by Number of Orders
This report lists customers who submitted orders during the specified period according to the number of orders placed. It also displays the total average order amount, and the overall amount for all orders submitted during the specified date range.
To run the report: 6. From the Admin panel: Select Reports > Customers. Then, choose Customers
by number of orders.
7. Select From and To dates in the fields at the top to specify limitations of this
report. These fields are required.
8. In the Show By field, select per Day, Month, or Year to define period per basis of
selected field. This field is required to generate the report.
9. Click the Refresh button to generate a Most Viewed Report in real time. 10. To export the report data, set the Export to list to either “CSV” or “Excel,” and
click the Export button.
Part IV: Sales & Fulfillment
397
Chapter 22: Reports
Reviews Reports
Reviews Reports
The Reviews reports list all customers who have written reviews, and all products with reviews written about them. Customer Reviews Product Reviews
Customer Reviews
This report provides a list of customers who have submitted product reviews in your Magento Go store.
To run the report: 1. From the Admin panel, select Reports > Reviews > Customer Reviews.
Note: From the All Reviews of Customer page that opens, you can sort through these reviews, remove them, or change their status.
2. The list of customers who created product reviews can be sorted by ascending or
descending based on the number of reviews. Product reviews of each customer can be viewed in detail by clicking Show Reviews in the right-most column of the respective customer.
3. To export the report data, set the Export to list to either “CSV” or “Excel,” and
click the Export button.
398
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 22: Reports
Reviews Reports
Product Reviews
The Product Reviews report lists all the products that customers have written reviews about, and provides a link to each review.
To run the report: 1. From the Admin panel, select Reports > Reviews > Product Reviews. 2. The products list can be sorted by ascending or descending based on:
Product name Number of reviews Average review rating Average approved rating Last review date
3. Reviews for each product can be viewed in detail by clicking Show Reviews in the
right-most column of the respective product.
4. To export the report, set the Export to list to either “CSV” or “Excel,” and click
Export.
Product Reviews Report
Part IV: Sales & Fulfillment
399
Chapter 22: Reports
Tag Reports
Tag Reports
The Tag reports list the tags created during the specified time period, and provide insight into which customers are tagging products, which products are getting tagged, and which tags are the most popular. Customers Products Popular
Customers Tags Report
This report displays a list of customers who have submitted approved tags and the number of approved product tags they have generated.
To run the report: 1. In the Admin panel, select Reports > Tags > Customers. You will be redirected
to Customers Tags report, which includes the following: Customer ID First name Last name Total Tags (created by a single customer) Action (lets you view all tags created by the customer)
2. To view product tags created by a customer, select Show Tags from the rightmost column of the respective customer.
3. To export the report data, set the Export to list to either “CSV” or “Excel,” and
click the Export button.
400
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 22: Reports
Tag Reports
Products Tags Report
This report lists all products that have approved tags as well as the number of unique approved and total approved tags.
To run the report: 1. From the Admin panel, select Reports > Tags > Products. You will be
redirected to report page.
2. Click the Show Tags link on the right to view each tags generated for a product,
the number of times it has been used, and from which store view.
3. The products tags list can be sorted in ascending or descending or by:
Customer ID Product name Number of unique tags (Total number of unique tags for the product.) Number of total tags (Total number of tags generated for the product.) Action: (Shows Tags link to view all tags created by the customer.)
4. To export the report data, set the Export to list to either “CSV” or “Excel,” and
click the Export button.
Product Tags Report
Part IV: Sales & Fulfillment
401
Chapter 22: Reports
Tag Reports
Popular Tags Report
This report displays lists all approved tags, and the number of times each tag has been used in your store.
To run the report: 1. From the Admin panel, select Reports > Tags > Popular. You will be redirected
to the Popular Tags report page.
2. The report will display the following columns:
Tag name: Popularity: Action: The name of the created tag. The number of times a tag was created by different customers. Show Details link that lets you view the name of the creator, the product for which it was created for, and the store view in which it was submitted.
3. To export the report data, set the Export to list to either “CSV” or “Excel,” and
click the Export button.
Popular Tags Report
402
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 22: Reports
Search Terms Report
Search Terms Report
The Search Terms Report provides a list of all terms searched on your Magento Go store. The report displays: Search query: The term that has been searched. Results: Specifies number of times a specific search term was used by a customer in your store. Hits: Specifies number of products in total that were displayed as results of searched that contained a particular search.
To run the report: 1. In the Admin panel, select Reports > Search Terms. You will be redirected to
the Search Terms report page.
2. To edit a search term, simply click the row. You will be redirected to the Edit
search term page.
3. To export the report data, set the Export to list to either “CSV” or “Excel,” and
click the Export button.
Search Terms Report
Part IV: Sales & Fulfillment
403
Chapter 22: Reports
Refresh Statistics
Refresh Statistics
It is important to use the Refresh Statistics tool to generate the data necessary for reporting. Sales Reports may not be available until you use the Refresh Statistics. What’s more, Reports may simply be blank if you have not run Refresh Statistics at least once recently.
To refresh statistics: 1. From the Admin panel, select Reports > Refresh Statistics. You will be
redirected to Refresh Statistics page.
2. Check all statistics that you need to process. 3. Select the time period from the Actions list at the top right. Your options are:
Refresh Statistics for the Last Day Refresh Lifetime Statistics
4. Click the Submit button to refresh.
Tip: If you have never run the Refresh Statistics tool, your reports simply show up as blank. It is recommended to run this function daily before generating reports.
Refresh Statistics
404
Magento Go User Guide
Part V: Improving Operations
CHAPTER 23:
Importing and Exporting Data
If you have more than a handful of customers or products, you probably don’t want to spend a lot of time creating records for them one by one. Magento Go's Import/Export tool gives you the ability to manage multiple customer and product records in a single operation. Magento Go uses the Comma Separated Value (CSV) file as a standard for importing and exporting both product and customer information. Data to be imported must be saved as a CSV file, where each data element is separated by a comma. Most spreadsheet and database applications can create CSV files. If you are working with a Mac, you should save the data in the CSV (Windows) format.
System > Import / Export
Part V: Improving Operations
407
Chapter 21: Importing and Exporting Data
Importing Data
Importing Data
The following instructions explain how to import data into your Magento Go store from a comma-separated value (CSV) file.
To import a product or customer: 1. From the Admin panel, select System > Import/Export > Import.
System > Import / Export
2. Set the Entity Type list to either “Products” or “Customers.”
Import Settings
3. Then, select one of the following Import Behavior options:
Append Complex Data: Adds new or edited products or customers to your store’s database. Magento Go will not create duplicate entries for existing products and customers included in your CSV file Replace Existing Complex Data: Completely replaces your existing data or portions thereof. Deleted Entries: Completely deletes your existing database or portions thereof.
4. Click Choose File and locate the CSV file in your file system.
408
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 21: Importing and Exporting Data
Importing Data
Note: The total size of uploadable files must not exceed 110 MB and must be saved with UTF-8 encoding. Check your spreadsheet or database application documentation for information about saving a CSV file with UTF-8 encoding.
5. Click Check Data to validate the uploaded file. Then, do one of the following:
If the file is valid, a "File is valid!" message appears. To import the data, click the Import button. If the file contains errors, you are notified of the errors and given the opportunity to skip the rows with errors. To continue importing valid data, click the Import button.
To confirm a successful import: 1. From the Admin panel, click System > Tasks Notifications. A successful import
generates a notification confirming the customer or product import.
2. After the successful import of product information, navigate to Catalog >
Manage Products. You should now be able to see the new or edited products which have been imported to your store.
3. Repeat this step for your imported customers list by navigating to Customers >
Manage Customers.
Importing Configurable Products
This technique explains how to use a .CSV file to associate simple products to a configurable product record. Before you begin, make sure that the data meets the following requirements: The simple products that you want to associate with the configurable product must not have custom variants or options. All products must have unique SKU numbers. The simple products must share the same attribute set as the configurable product. There must be at least one super attribute assigned to the configurable product, and this attribute must be set in the simple product, as well.
Part V: Improving Operations
409
Chapter 21: Importing and Exporting Data
Importing Data
To import a Configurable Product: 1. Create the configurable product record, as well as the associated simple products
according to the requirements described above.
2. Before importing the data, enter the following values in the respective columns of
the associated simple products, as well as the configurable product record: Column _type _super_products_sku _super_attribute_code Value configurable The SKU of the associated product. The name of the attribute that is being used as the Super Attribute. The attribute properties must be set to the following: Scope: Global Input Type: Dropdown Use to Create Configurable Product: Yes _super_attribute_option The name assigned to an option in the Super Attribute. For example, you can use shoe_size as a Super Attribute with options of 10, 11, and 12 to make a price correction of +1, +2, or +3. This is a dollar amount that can be added for Super Attribute options which need price adjustments.
_super_attribute_price_corr
410
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 21: Importing and Exporting Data
Importing Data
Importing Product Images
If you have a large quantity of images to upload, you can streamline the process and save time by importing them in a single step. This process is commonly referred to as a "bulk" import. It's simply a list of data that is uploaded at the same time. Magento Go does not automatically associate an imported image with its respective product. You must follow a few simple steps to make sure that your imported images can be associated with the right products.
Step 1:
Export Your Product Data
The first step is to export the data from your store and save it to your hard disk as a CSV file.
Step 2:
Edit the CSV File
The quickest way to become familiar with the structure of the data is to open the exported file in your favorite spreadsheet program. There you will see how each row represents a record, and each column represents an attribute, or field of data. The type of data, or attribute, in each column is indicated in the header row at the top. After you become familiar with the layout, you will see how easy it is to edit the data file directly in the worksheet. Here are some rules to remember about referencing image files: When entering data for multiple images into a spreadsheet, the image file names must immediately follow the product to which they belong. You can leave all other columns blank, unless they are applicable. (For example: Referencing multiple upsell or related products, etc.) Each file name must begin with a forward slash. (For example: /imagebase.jpg) Image file names are case sensitive, so pay attention to your use of upper-and lowercase characters in both the file names and extensions. (For example: /image-base.jpg is not same as /image-BASE.jpg)
Part V: Improving Operations
411
Chapter 21: Importing and Exporting Data
Importing Data
Step 3:
Save Your Changes
When you are finished editing, and save your changes to a CSV file, you might be prompted to specify the file format to be used. The total size of uploadable files must not exceed 110 MB and must be saved with UTF-8 encoding. Check your spreadsheet or database application documentation for information about saving a CSV file with UTF-8 encoding. Note: When working in Excel, it is absolutely critical to select “Yes” when prompted to "leave out incompatible features."
Step 4:
Import the Edited CSV File and Image Files
The last step is to import the data back into your store. You can save time by zipping the image files before you begin the upload process. There are many zip utilities available for both the PC and Mac platforms. If you are working with the latest Windows or Mac operating systems, you may already have an archiving tool available. Check your system documentation for more information.
To import your images: 1. From the Admin panel, go to System > Import/Export > Import. 2. In the Entity Type list, select Product Images. 3. Click the Choose File button to select your zipped product image file on your
hard drive.
4. Click the Upload Images button to import your images into Magento Go. When
the import is complete, you will receive a Validation Results message . Your data is now in the queue, waiting to be processed. It may take a while, so be patient. You can check the status by refreshing the page. If you are still not able to see your edited products or new images, try refreshing the search index.
To refresh the search index: 1. Go to Catalog > Search Indexing. 2. Click the Refresh Index button.
412
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 21: Importing and Exporting Data
Exporting Data
Exporting Data
The best way to become familiar with the structure of your customer and product information is to export the data and open it in a spreadsheet. Once you become familiar with the process, you will find that it is an efficient way to manage large amounts of data. To export customers:
1. From the Admin panel, click System > Import/Export > Export.
2. Set the Entity Type list to “Customers.” The system generates entity attributes
that are relevant to customers.
3. Scroll down and click the Continue button to export the data to a CSV file. 4. Open the file in your favorite spreadsheet, and edit as needed.
Export Customer Entity Attributes
Part V: Improving Operations
413
Chapter 21: Importing and Exporting Data
Exporting Data
To export products: 1. From the Admin panel, click System > Import/Export > Export. 2. Set the Entity Type list to “Products.” The system generates a list of entity
attributes that are relevant to your products. By default, all attributes are exported to the CSV file. In the Entity Attributes list, select the Skip check box for any attributes that you want to exclude from the CSV file. You can use the Filter controls to limit the records exported.
3. Scroll down and click the Continue button to export the data to a CSV file. 4. Open the saved file in your favorite spreadsheet and edit as needed.
Tip: The Macintosh version of Microsoft Office supports multiple CSV file formats. When saving your CSV file, be sure to save it as a CSV (MS Windows) file type.
Export Product Entity Attributes
414
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 21: Importing and Exporting Data
Working with Product CSV Files
Working with Product CSV Files
Step 1: Optimize Your Attributes
First, you want to make sure your attributes are optimized. What we mean by optimized is that you’ve removed the attributes that you will not need and have created attributes that you will need. For more information, see: “Product System Attributes” on page 510, and “Customer System Attributes” on page 514.
Step 2:
Export and Edit
After you have optimized your attributes, export your product information. Once exported, open this file in a Microsoft Excel or a simple text editor. If you’re editing in a text editor, you must include each new product on a new line. The attributes that you define must be separated with commas, and must be in the same order as the first row. If you’re editing in Excel, each product will be on a new line. The attributes that you define will fall into the column of the attribute that is listed in the first row.
Note: When saving changes to the CSV file that you edit in Excel, it is absolutely critical that when Excel asks you what format you wish to save, select Yes to leave out incompatible features.
Step 3:
Import and Refresh Index
Finally, after you’ve defined and saved your products in the CSV file, import them back into your Magento Go store. After you have imported your new products, it will be queued to import. This may take a little while, so be patient. You can check the status of this by refreshing the page. Once the Import products task has finished, you must refresh the search index. To do this, go to Catalog > Search Indexing and click Refresh Index.
Part V: Improving Operations
415
Chapter 21: Importing and Exporting Data
Working with Product CSV Files
Common Issues
Missing or Incorrect Values The most common problem store owners experience with importing CSV files is missing values or incorrect values. During the import process, Magento Go checks your data to ensure that it’s correct. It will report which rows and items are missing or incorrect. Be sure to go back and fix these issues. Duplicated Products Another common problem is duplicated products. Currently, if a product that you’re importing already exists in your catalog it will duplicate this. To avoid this issue, be sure that you’re either importing to an empty catalog or that you aren’t re-importing products that you already have online.
Custom Attributes
Custom attributes are any attributes that you create yourself. Attributes can be created for organization and product management, as well as to be used for comparing certain types of products. For example, a store carrying electronics, including hard drives, would certainly want to create a disk space attribute that would be used to define and compare hard drive storage sizes.
416
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 21: Importing and Exporting Data
Working With Customer CSV Files
Working With Customer CSV Files
Step 1: Optimize Your Attributes
First, you want to make sure your attributes are optimized. What we mean by optimized is that you’ve removed the attributes that you will not need and created attributes that you will need. For more information, see: “General Customer Attributes,” on page 515.
Step 2:
Export and Edit
After you have optimized your attributes, export your customer information. Once exported, open the file in a Microsoft Excel or in your favorite spreadsheet application. The attributes that you define will fall into the column of the attribute that is listed in the first row. Note: When saving changes to the CSV file that you edit in Excel, it is absolutely critical that when Excel asks you what format you wish to save, select Yes to leave out incompatible features.
Step 3:
Import and Refresh Index
Finally, after you’ve defined and saved your customers in the CSV file, import them back into your Magento Go store. For more information, see: “Importing Data,” on page 408. After you have imported your customers, it will be queued to import. This may take a little while, so be patient. You can check the status of this by refreshing the page. After the customer data has been imported, you must refresh the search index.
To refresh the index:
Go to Catalog > Search Indexing, and click the Refresh Index button. The most common problem storeowners experience with importing CSV files is missing values or incorrect values. During the import process, Magento Go checks your data to ensure that it’s correct. It will report which rows and items are missing or incorrect. Be sure to go back and fix these issues.
Part V: Improving Operations
417
Chapter 21: Importing and Exporting Data
Working With Customer CSV Files
Notes:
_______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________
418
Magento Go User Guide
CHAPTER 24:
Site Maintenance
There will be times when it’s necessary to perform maintenance on your site. In this chapter, you will learn how to display a temporary splash page while your site is temporarily unavailable. Topics covered include: Removing the “Under Construction” message Working in Maintenance Mode Task Notifications
“Under Construction” Message
When you first start building your store, the store displays an “Under Construction” message above the header of each page of the store and Admin panel. When you are ready to start taking orders, follow these instructions to remove the demo notice.
“Under Construction” Message
Part V: Improving Operations
419
Chapter 24: Site Maintenance
Maintenance Mode
To remove the demo notice: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. In the Configuration panel on the left, under General, select Design. Click to expand the HTML Head section. Set Display Demo Store Notice to “No.” Click the Save Config button to save your changes. To confirm that the message has been removed, visit the home page of your store to confirm that the “Under Construction” message has been removed.
Maintenance Mode
Maintenance mode can be used when your site is under construction, or when changes are being made. It adds a splash page to let visitors know that your site is undergoing maintenance. When working on your site, it is recommended that you block access to the store. It is better to alert customers that changes are being made, rather than disrupt their experience with technical difficulties. Displaying a “503 page” while in Maintenance Mode alerts search engines that your site still exists, and prevents them from removing your site from their index.
To use Maintenance Mode: 1. In the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. In the Configuration panel on the left, under General, select Maintenance Mode. 3. Click to expand the Maintenance Mode Options section.
System > Configuration > General > Maintenance Mode > Maintenance Mode Options
4. Set Enable Maintenance Mode to “Yes.”
420
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 24: Site Maintenance
Task Notifications
5. Set Maintenance Mode Page to “503 Service Unavailable.” 6. In the Whitelist field, enter your IP address, so you will be permitted access to
your store while others are redirected to the “Services Unavailable” page. Note: With the CMS Pages > Content Management option, the 503 page may be customized to make it more visitor friendly.
Task Notifications
A bank of completed tasks and updates are sent to the Task Notification section. There is also an option to connect Task Notifications to an email address.
To manage task notifications: 1. From the Admin panel, select System > Task Notifications. 2. In the list, select the checkbox of each messages you want to remove, or mark as
read. Or, you can use the following links: Select All / Unselect All Select Visible / Unselect Visible
3. In the Actions menu select either “Remove” or “Mark as Read.” 4. Click the Submit button.
Connecting Task Notifications to an Outside Email
To connect task notifications to an outside email: 1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. On the General tab, click to expand the Task Notifications section. 3. In the Task Notifications Recipients field, enter the email address you would
like to receive notifications in.
4. Click the Save Config button to save your changes.
Note: Because of the amount of traffic that comes through Task Notifications, it is recommended that you create a specific email account for this option if you choose to export them.
Part V: Improving Operations
421
Chapter 24: Site Maintenance
Task Notifications
Notes:
_______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________
422
Magento Go User Guide
CHAPTER 25:
SEO Best Practices
Search engine optimization is both a science and an art. Because the technology is constantly evolving, there is no single solution that will ensure your site makes it to the top of a search engine results page (SERP). There are however, many best practices that, if followed, will improve your chances of success.
Using a Robots.txt File
Robots.txt, often pronounced “robots dot text,” is a text file that is checked whenever search engine robots visit your web site. Search engine robots, or search engine “bots,” are machines that index web content, including your store. The robots.txt file is currently the standard for determining which information on a web site gets indexed. When a search engine robot visits your web site, it first looks for a robots.txt file. If one is found, the search engine robot follows the instructions in the file. For example, the following instructions tell all visiting search engine robots not to visit or index any pages on your web site. The first line, “User-agent: *” tells the robot that the rules listed below apply to all robots. The “Disallow: /” tells the robot not to visit any page on the site. Example: robots.txt User-agent: * Disallow: / It should be noted that some robots completely ignore any rules defined in a robots.txt file, especially harmful bots that scour the web looking for vulnerabilities or contact information. In terms of configuring robots.txt, however, we’re only concerned with search engine robots - the ones that follow the rules and play nice! With that said, let’s take a look at how you can use robots.txt in your Magento Go store.
Part V: Improving Operations
423
Chapter 25: SEO Best Practices
Using a Robots.txt File
Generating the File
Your Magento Go store already has a robots.txt file that is set to “INDEX, FOLLOW.” This default setting directs all search engine bots to index all pages and follow links. It is generally in your best interest to have your content indexed by search engines—especially your product pages. The Default Robots option can be set to one of the following: NOINDEX, FOLLOW: Pages are not indexed, but search engine bots are allowed to follow links from applicable pages* INDEX, NOFOLLOW: Pages are indexed, but search engine bots do not follow links. NOINDEX, NOFOLLOW: Pages are not indexed, and search engine bots do not follow links. Note: Applicable pages are those that are not excluded using the “Disallow: “ feature of robots.txt.
To create a custom robots.txt file: 1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration > Design. 2. Click to expand the Search Engine Robots section.
System > Configuration > Design > Search Engine Robots
424
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 25: SEO Best Practices
Using a Robots.txt File
3. Set Default Robots to “Custom Instructions.” Then, complete the instructions as
follows: a. Specify whether the instructions apply to all bots or only to specific ones. To apply to all bots, type: User-agent: * To apply to specific bots, type the bot name, such as: User-agent: googlebot b. List the files or directories that you want to prevent the bots from indexing by listing them in the following pattern: To disallow a directory, type: Disallow: /folder/ To disallow a file, type: Disallow: /folder/filename.html
4. Set Reset to Default to “No.” 5. Click the Save Changes button to save the new configurations.
Examples
Imagine that you have a store with a set of pages and folders that you don’t want indexed by all search engine bots. The pages and folders you may want to prevent from being indexed are:
/terms-of-service.html /special-offers.html /referral-discounts.html /customer/ /review/ /media/
Part V: Improving Operations
425
Chapter 25: SEO Best Practices
Using a Robots.txt File
Sample Robots.txt File
User-agent: * Disallow: /terms-of-service.html Disallow: /special-offers.html Disallow: /referral-discounts.html Disallow: /customer/ Disallow: /review/ Disallow: /media/ And that’s it! Make sure to save your changes so that they take effect. To preview your robots.txt file, go to [your-store-name].gostorego.com/robots.txt and verify that it reflects the customizations you made.
426
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 25: SEO Best Practices
URL Keys
URL Keys
URL rewrites help keep your product and category page URLs readable for visitors and manageable by search engine indexing spiders. Every time you create a new product or category, a name-based URL is automatically generated. Your first experience with URL rewrites will likely be on the General Product Information page when you add a new product. The URL key is actually a static URL. When you create a product, a default URL key is created from the product name. For example, the URL Key for Funky Green Aviator Hat is funky-greenaviator-hat. User friendly URL: http://mymagentostore.com/apparel/accessories/funky-green-aviator-hat.html One can better appreciate this by understanding a little technical fact about databases: they don’t like fancy descriptive titles; they prefer dry, unique identifiers. When you create a new product, a database row with a unique product ID is generated. This also applies to categories and subcategories. With URL rewrites, users don’t have to see this. System based URL: http://mymagentostore.com/catalog/product/view/id/150
Part V: Improving Operations
427
Chapter 25: SEO Best Practices
URL Rewrites
URL Rewrites
A URL rewrite changes a dynamic URL to one that is static, readable, and search engine friendly. Take a look at Figure 1 for a good comparison. A dynamic URL is generated in real time, and contains a query string that may include variables such as product ID, sort order, and the page where the request was made. A static URL is a fixed address to the page. Your online store must be optimized for both customers and search engines. Static, readable URLs make it easier for customers to find products, navigate through your store, and bookmark products. They are also critical in helping index your site in search engines. Search engines use spiders or bots to scour the Web, searching for pages to index. As they crawl through your site, they identify relevant key words, and a myriad of other factors, which are ultimately used to determine the ranking of your site.
Protecting Your “Link Juice”
If your product pages are dynamically generated, Google will not be able to index them very well. If a variable such as product ID changes, the product page will be lost. Search engines hate dead links, and they have a negative effect on your ranking. Multiple URLs to the same content will also create duplication of content, which can also negatively hurt your search engine rankings. Using URL rewrites will help search engine index your site, and also enhance customer experience.
To change a product URL: 1. From the Admin panel, click Catalog > Manage Products. 2. From the Manage Products page, find the product you’d like to modify in the list.
If you have hundreds of products, do a filtered search using the column inputs at the top of the table. Then click Edit link in the right-most column of that product.
3. Say you decide this hat is not as funky as it initially seemed. Marketing research
tells you this product will sell better with the keyword, “party hat” so you decide to re-brand the product. No problem, simply change your product Name and URL key – both found under General tab. Note: You’ll notice a checkbox under URL key labeled “Create Permanent Redirect for old URL.” It is recommended to leave this checked. It will redirect
428
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 25: SEO Best Practices
URL Rewrites
links from the old URL (i.e. /funky-green-aviator-hat.html) to the new one (i.e. /green-aviator-party-hat.html). This is important because somebody might have linked to this product using the old URL. When they request the old URL, they will be redirected to the new page. This helps your search engine rankings, because it prevents it from being considered as duplicate content.
4. Click the Save button to save your changes.
URL Redirection 301 and 302
If you’ve ever had to create new URL Rewrite rules for redirecting products, categories, or pages, you have had to decide whether to do a permanent redirect (301) or temporary redirect (302). As their names suggest, one is used for temporarily moved pages and the other for permanently moved pages. Unfortunately, this difference can sometimes be ambiguous. We’re going to discuss the difference between permanent and temporary redirects as well as their effects on SEO. As a general rule of thumb, there are very few situations where a 302 redirect would be most appropriate. The reason for this is because of how search engines interpret 301 and 302 redirects. When a search engine encounters a 301 redirect, it will index the new page and make a note so that it credits the new page for all links directed towards the old one. On the contrary, a 302 redirect will tell the search engine to index the new page while also keeping and indexing the old one. This is sometimes considered “double dipping” and can result in duplication of content in the eyes of the search engine crawlers. The difference is quite subtle. Visitors to your online store will not notice a difference between the two. From the perspective of SEO, however, it could affect your store’s search ranking. When in doubt, it is considered a best practice to use a 301 redirect, because it is used more often.
Part V: Improving Operations
429
Chapter 25: SEO Best Practices
Using Third-Party Scripts
Using Third-Party Scripts
Third-party applications such as analytics and affiliate programs often require you to copy a section of code or script to your site. Sometimes the code contains a tracking number needed by the application to interact with your site . Magento Go gives you the ability to insert miscellaneous scripts into the following sections of the HTML page, directly from the Admin panel: HTML Head: Footer: Places the script directly before the closing </head> tag. Places the script directly before the </body> closing tag.
To install a third-party script: 1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. In the Configuration panel on the left, under General, select Design. 3. Click to expand the Footer section. Then, paste the script directly into the
Miscellaneous HTML box.
4. Click the Save Config button.
System > Configuration > General > Design: Footer
To refresh search indexing: 1. From the Admin panel, select Catalog > Search Indexing. 2. Click the Refresh button.
When complete, the embedded code will be available on your site.
430
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 25: SEO Best Practices
Google Sitemap
Google Sitemap
One way to improve your store’s indexing by search engines is to create a sitemap. A sitemap is essentially an index of all the pages on your site, including catalog pages, product pages, and content pages.
Your sitemap should be updated as frequently as the content on your site changes, which could be daily, weekly, or monthly. The frequency and priority for each type of content is determined by your system configuration.
Step 1:
Generate the Sitemap
To generate a Google sitemap: 1. From the Admin panel, select Catalog > Google Sitemap. 2. In the Sitemap section, click the Add New button.
Catalog > Google Sitemap
3. In the Filename field, enter: “ sitemap.xml” 4. Click the Save & Generate button to create the sitemap.
To view the sitemap, click the Link for Google. To update the sitemap, click the Generate link.
Sitemap Link for Google
Part V: Improving Operations
431
Chapter 25: SEO Best Practices
Google Sitemap
Step 2:
Submit Your Sitemap to Google
Google Webmaster Tools is a free service by Google that helps you optimize your site for indexing. After you have generated a Google Sitemap, the next step is to submit it to Google Webmaster Tools.
To submit your sitemap to Google Webmaster Tools: 1. Go to Google Webmaster Tools and do one of the following:
Log in to your existing account. Create a new account, and log in.
2. After you log in to your account, click the Add a Site button.
Add a Site
3. When prompted, enter your store address (i.e. mystore.gostorego.com) and click
Continue.
4. Do one of the following to verify that you are the owner of the site:
Add a DNS record to your domain If you manage your domain, you can create a new DNS record to prove domain ownership. Add a meta tag to your Home page To add a Meta tag, go to System > Configuration > Design > HTML Head and type the text in the Miscellaneous Scripts box.
432
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 25: SEO Best Practices
Google Sitemap
5. After your site has been verified, it will appear in the Sites list. Click the name of
your store to display the Sitemap Dashboard.
Google Webmaster Tools
6. Click the Submit a Sitemap button.
Submit a Sitemap
7. Enter the path to the Google Sitemap that you created for your store.
You can find the path at Catalog > Google Sitemaps, in the Link for Google column. Google adds your store domain as a prefix, so you only need the second part of the URL, after the “dot com.” It will look something like this: /media/xxxx/sitemaps/sitemap.xml If might help to copy and paste the full link into Notepad, and then copy only the part that you need.
8. Verify that the link to the sitemap is working correctly, and that the URLs have
been added to Google Webmaster Tools. It will show the number of pages indexed, according to your sitemap.
Part V: Improving Operations
433
Chapter 25: SEO Best Practices
Google Sitemap
Configuring Your Google Sitemap
You can configure the frequency and priority that the sitemap is updated for each type of content from the Admin panel of your Magento Go store. Here’s how:
To configure the frequency of the update: 1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. In the Configuration panel on the left, under Catalog, select Google Sitemap. 3. Click to expand the Categories Options section, and do the following:
a. Set the Frequency of the update to one of the following: Always Hourly Daily Weekly Monthly Yearly Never
b. Set the Priority of the scan to a value between 0.0 and 1.0.
Google Sitemap Categories Options
4. Click to expand the Products Options section, and set the Frequency and
Priority, as needed.
5. Click to expand the CMS Pages Options section, and set the Frequency and
Priority, as needed.
6. Click the Save Config button to save your settings.
434
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 25: SEO Best Practices
Google Sitemap
To set the operating parameters: 1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. In the Configuration panel on the left, under Catalog, select Google Sitemap. 3. Click to expand the Generation Settings section, and make any changes
necessary.
4. Click the Save Config button to save the settings.
Google Sitemap Generation Settings
Part V: Improving Operations
435
Chapter 25: SEO Best Practices
Google Analytics
Google Analytics
Google Analytics provides detailed statistics about your website visitors, as well as information about the effectiveness of your marketing campaigns. For field descriptions, see: Configuration: Google API - Google Analytics
Step 1:
Create a Google Analytics Account
It is easy to create a Google Analytics account. The process takes about five minutes.
1. Go to the Google Analytics site and click Sign Up Now to create your account. 2. Next, create a new profile for your Magento Go store. When prompted for your
store address, enter one of the following: yourstore.gostorego.com your own custom domain
3. Click the Finish button to save your profile. 4. When the tracking code instructions page appears, record your Web Property ID.
You will need it to complete the next step.
Step 2:
Configure Your Store for Google Analytics
After you have created a Google Analytics account and have your Web Property ID, you must complete the configuration from the Admin panel of your store.
1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. In the Configuration panel on the left, under Sales, select Google API. 3. Click to expand the Google Analytics section. Then, do the following:
a. Set Enable to “Yes.” b. In the Account Number field, type your Web Property ID. Make sure to include the “UA-” suffix that precedes the number. The format of the Web Property ID is: UA-########-##. The number can be found on your Google Analytics account page, and also in the Google Analytics code for your site.
4. Click the Save Config button to save your changes.
It takes a few minutes to verify and track your store. Check the Tracking Status on your Google Analytics profile page to confirm that your Google Account is Receiving Data from your store.
436
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 25: SEO Best Practices
Google Analytics
Google Website Optimizer
System > Configuration > Sales > Google API - Google Website Optimizer If Google Optimizer is enabled for your store, each product and category will include a Product View Optimization tab that you can use to test the performance of the page. The Google Website Optimizer setting allows you to enable or disable Google Website Optimizer for product and category pages. For a detailed description of each field in the Google Optimizer section, see the following article in the Magento Go Knowledge Base: Configuration: Google API - Google Website Optimizer.
To configure your store for Google Website Optimizer: 1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. In the Configuration panel on the left, under Sales, select Google API. 3. Click to expand the Google Website Optimizer section. 4. To activate Google Website Optimizer, set Enable to “Yes.” 5. Click the Save Config button to save your changes.
Product View Optimization – Google Optimizer Scripts
Part V: Improving Operations
437
Chapter 25: SEO Best Practices
Google Analytics
Notes:
_______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________
438
Magento Go User Guide
Appendices
Glossary Editor Toolbar Buttons Shipping Carriers Country Codes Payment-Related Services Payment Service Providers Payment Gateways Product System Attributes Customer System Attributes Translating Your Store
Appendices
439
Appendix A:
Glossary
above the fold The web page content that is immediately visible in the browser window; section of a page that is displayed without the need to scroll. Administrative panel; back office; private section of store where orders, catalog, content, and configurations are managed. The text that is displayed in place of an image when the user is unable to view the image. The visible text that is anchored to another page or page section; the literal text of a hyperlink. Application Program Interface: A software interface that lets third-party applications read and write to a system using programming language constructs or statements. A characteristic or property of a product; anything that describes a product. Examples of product attributes include color, size, weight, and price. To give a service permission to perform certain actions or to access resources. Product price, less coupons or discounts, plus freight and applicable taxes. The average is determined by adding the beginning cost of inventory each month, plus the ending cost of inventory for the last month of the period. Promotional graphics displayed either horizontally on the top of a web page or vertically on the left or right margins. Website advertisements are often displayed as banners. Business to Business: A type of business transaction between two business entities that are not the final consumers of the goods or services. Business to Consumer: Business transactions between a business entity and a consumer.
Admin panel
alt text
anchor text
API
attribute
authorization
average inventory cost
banner
B2B
B2C
440
Magento Go User Guide
Appendix A: Glossary
batch processing
To perform a task or make a change to multiple items all at once, without manual repetition. The percentage of visitors to your site that leave without viewing any other pages. A unique identity that defines a particular product or group of products. A navigation aid that helps the user to keep track of their location within your store. A retail business with a permanent physical location, as opposed to being entirely virtual. A hyperlink that fails to send the user to its intended web page. The canonical meta tag redirects search engines to the correct URL, when seemingly duplicate content is encountered on the server. The process of converting the authorized amount into a billable transaction. Transactions cannot be captured until authorized, and authorizations cannot be captured until the goods or services have been shipped. A person who opens a credit card account and is authorized to make purchases. A set of products that share particular characteristics or attributes. A marketing term that indicates a goal has been reached. If the goal is to sell a product, conversion is reached when a visitor to your site becomes a buyer. The percentage of visitors who are converted into buyers. The process of gathering the payment and shipping information that is necessary to complete the purchase of items in the shopping cart. In the final step, the customer reviews and places the order.
bounce rate
brand
breadcrumb
brick and mortar
broken link
canonical URL
capture
cardholder
category
conversion
conversion rate
checkout process
Magento Go User Guide
441
Appendix A: Glossary
CMS
Content Management System: A software system that is used to create, edit, and maintain content on a website. Comma Separated Values: A type of file used to store data values which are separated from each other by commas. Card Verification Method: A way to verify the identity of the customer by confirming a 3-digit or 4-digit credit card security code with the payment processor. A document issued by the merchant to a customer to write off an outstanding balance because of overcharge, rebate, or return of goods. Cascading Style Sheets: A style sheet language that controls the appearance of HTML documents; a way to control the appearance of text, graphics, lists, links, and all other elements on a web page. The address of a website on the web; what the customer types in their browser address bar to access the store. The process for subscribing email recipients by requiring them to take a secondary step to confirm that they want to receive emails. A web page that displays different content depending on the user request. A term or phrase used in a search to filter for content that is of significant importance to that term or phrase. Frequently Asked Questions. Short for favorites icon; a 16x16 or 32x32 pixel icon associated with a website; is displayed in the browser address bar and next to the site name in a bookmark list. Freight On Board: A shipping term indicating who is responsible for paying transportation charges.
CSV
CVM
credit memo
CSS
domain
double opt-in
dynamic content
keyword
FAQ favicon
FOB
442
Magento Go User Guide
Appendix A: Glossary
fulfillment gateway
The process of managing customer shipments. A transaction bridge between a customer and a payment processing service that is used to transfer money between the customer and the merchant. The difference between the cost and price of a product. The first home page a visitor sees when they access your website URL. Considered the most important page on your website according to search engine indexers. HyperText Markup Language: A standard for tagging and structuring text, images, videos, and other media on a web page. A document that provides a detailed description of a purchase, including products purchased, quantity, price, shipping cost, sales tax, and total. A scripting language used with HTML to produce dynamic effects and interactions on web pages. A page on your site where a visitor arrives after clicking a link or advertisement. The value and authority transferred from one web page to another via hyperlinks (or links). Link juice affects a website’s page rank, a factor used to rank a search engine results page. A set of configurations that defines the user’s language, country, tax rate, and other settings. The process of signing into an online account. The amount subtracted from the original price of a product. A percentage added to the cost of an item to determine the retail price. An account with a bank or financial institution that makes it possible to accept credit card transactions.
gross margin
home page
HTML
invoice
JavaScript
landing page
link juice
locale
login markdown
markup
merchant account
Magento Go User Guide
443
Appendix A: Glossary
meta tags
Information in a web page that is not displayed on the page itself, but is used by search engines to determine the page title, description, and page keywords. The primary group of web page links that a customer uses to navigate around the website; the navigation links to the most important categories or pages on an online store. The process by which a user consents to receiving emails from an online store. A document that is usually included in a shipped package that describes the contents. Packing slips do not include financial or account information. A service that charges your customers’ credit cards and sends the funds to your merchant account, for deposit into your business bank account. Payment Card Industry: Refers to debit and credit cards and their associated businesses. A written sales contract between a buyer and seller that describes the merchandise or service to be purchased from a vendor. A document that explains the merchant’s policies for handling customer information. A method used to alert browsers and search engines that a page has been moved. 301 Redirect: Permanent change 302 Redirect: Temporary change
navigation
opt-in
packing slip
payment gateway
PCI
purchase order (PO)
privacy policy
redirect
relative link
A hyperlink that includes only the address of the linked page that is relative to the linking page, rather than the full URL. A document that explains the merchant’s rules regarding the return of products by customers. A file placed on a website that tells search engine crawlers which pages not to index.
return policy
robots.txt
444
Magento Go User Guide
Appendix A: Glossary
RSS feed
Really Simple Syndication: A technology that creates web content syndication and allows web users to subscribe to product feeds, websites, and blogs. Software as a Service: A software delivery model where the vendor provides the software and hosting environment, and customers pay for the service by subscription or per use. Information that is used by the SSL protocol to establish a secure connection. Search Engine Optimization: The process of improving a website’s search engine rankings in order to increase valued visitors. Settlement occurs when the acquiring bank and the issuer exchange funds and the proceeds are deposited into the merchant account. A company that transports packages. Common carriers include UPS, FedEx, DHL, and USPS. A grouping of products that the customer wishes to purchase at the end of their shopping session. A page that provides search engines with an efficient, alternate route through your site. Stock Keeping Unit: A number or code assigned to a product to identify the product, options, price, and manufacturer. A promotional page with a product or advertisement; normally displayed before the home page. A validation and security mechanism that identifies the merchant and encrypts credit card and other sensitive information. Content that does not change frequently. See also dynamic content.
SaaS
security certificate
SEO
settlement
shipping carrier
shopping cart
sitemap
SKU
splash page
SSL certificate
static content
Magento Go User Guide
445
Appendix A: Glossary
static block
A fixed content block that can be displayed on various content pages in a store. A package that contains graphics and appearance information, and customizes the look and feel of the store. A notification email sent to the customer when a transaction is processed. Uniform Resource Locator: The unique address of a page on the internet. Refers to the degree to which a product or service is easy to use by its customers. What You See Is What You Get: An editor that displays formatted text as it will appear in its final published form. Extensible Markup Language: A markup format derived from SGML that it used to format information for publication and distribution.
theme
transactional email
URL
usability
WYSIWYG
XML
446
Magento Go User Guide
Appendix B:
Editor Toolbar Buttons
Styles and Fonts
List Description Styles
Format
Font Family
Font Size
Character Format
Button Description Bold
Italic
Underline
Strikeout
Subscript
Superscript
Magento Go User Guide
447
Appendix B: Editor Toolbar Buttons
Special Characters
Button Description Insert Symbol
Insert Non-Breaking Space
Color
Button Description Select Text Color
Select Background Color
Paragraph Format
Button Description Left Justify
Center
Right Justify
Full Justify
Outdent
Indent
Blockquote
Insert Page Break
448
Magento Go User Guide
Appendix B: Editor Toolbar Buttons
Lists
Button Description Bulleted (Unordered) List
Numbered (Ordered) List
Rules
Button Description Insert Simple Horizontal Rule
Insert Formatted Horizontal Rule
Images and Media
Button Description Insert Media
Insert / Edit Image
Links and Anchors
Button Description Insert / Edit Link
Remove Link
Insert / Edit Anchor
Magento Go User Guide
449
Appendix B: Editor Toolbar Buttons
Tables
Button Description Insert / Modify Table
Table Row Properties
Table Cell Properties
Insert Row Above
Insert Row Below
Remove Column
Split Merged Table Cells
Merge Table Cells
Layers
Button Description Insert New Layer
Move Layer Forward
Move Layer Backward
Toggle Absolute Positioning
450
Magento Go User Guide
Appendix B: Editor Toolbar Buttons
Variables and Apps
Button Description Insert Variable
Insert / Edit Attributes
Insert Frontend App
Editing Tools
Button Description Undo
Redo
Cut
Copy
Paste
Paste as Plain Text
Paste from Word
Find
Find and Replace
Spellchecker (not installed)
Magento Go User Guide
451
Appendix B: Editor Toolbar Buttons
Button
Description Mark as Deletion
Mark as Insertion
Citation
Abbreviation
Acronym
Help
Coding Tools
Button Description Remove Formatting
Cleanup Messy Code
Workspace Preferences
Button Description Toggle Fullscreen Mode
Display Visual Control Characters (On / Off)
Toggle Guidelines / Invisible Elements
Set Typing Direction Left-to-Right
Set Typing Direction Right-to-Left
452
Magento Go User Guide
Appendix C:
Shipping Carriers
This appendix contains detailed configuration instructions for the following shipping carriers: UPS USPS FedEx (Deprecated) FedEx DHL
We frequently make updates and add new service providers, so please visit our Knowledge Base for the most current information.
Magento Go User Guide
453
Appendix C: Shipping Carriers
UPS
UPS
System > Configuration > Sales > Shipping Methods United Parcel Service offers shipping services domestic and international to more than 220 countries. UPS delivers letters, documents, packages by land and air.
Step 1:
Open a Shipping Account
To offer this shipping method to your customers, you must first open an account with UPS.
Step 2:
Configure Your Store
1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. In the Configuration panel on the left, under Sales, select Shipping Methods. 3. Click to expand the UPS section. Then, do the following:
a. Set Enabled to “Yes.” b. Set UPS Type to one of the following: United Parcel Service In the Gateway URL field, enter the URL that is used to calculate UPS shipping rates. This field is preset by default, and normally does not need to be changed. United Parcel Service XML Enter the following UPS credentials: Password Access License Number User ID
Then, complete the following: Mode: Set to Live to send data to the UPS shipping system over a secure connection. (While working in Development mode, data is not transmitted over the network.) Gateway XML URL: Set the URL that is used to connect with UPS while sending requests by XML file.
454
Magento Go User Guide
Appendix C: Shipping Carriers Order of Shipment:
UPS Set the region where the shipment originates. rates with UPS. Shipper Number: If you have negotiated special rates with UPS, type the six-digit number assigned to you by UPS.
Enable Negotiated Rates: Set to “Yes” if you have negotiated special
4. Complete the remaining fields as follows:
a. In the Title field, type the name of this shipping option as it will appear in checkout. b. In the Container field, specify the typical packaging type that is used for shipment. c. Set Destination Type to one of the following: Commercial: Residential: Most of your shipments are business to business (B2B). Most of your shipments are business to consumer. (B2C)
d. Set Weight Unit to the system used for measuring product weight in your store. The weight system supported by UPS varies by country. If in doubt, ask UPS which weight system you should use. Options include: LBS KGS
e. Set Pickup Method to one of the following: f. Regular Daily Pickup On Call Air One Time Pickup Letter Center Customer Counter
Set Maximum Package Weight to the amount supported by UPS.
g. Set Minimum Package Weight to the amount supported by UPS. The weight is based on the standard unit of measurement used by shipping carriers in your locale. In the United States, the weight is represented in ounces and pounds. h. Set Calculate Handling Fee to one of the following: Fixed: Percent: To calculate shipping based on a fixed rate. To calculate shipping based on a percentage of the order amount.
Magento Go User Guide
455
Appendix C: Shipping Carriers i. Set Handling Applied to one of the following: j. Per Order Per Package
UPS
In the Allowed Methods list, select each UPS method offered to your customers. The methods appear under UPS during checkout. (Hold the Ctrl key down to select multiple options.)
k. Set Free Method to the type of UPS service you want to use for offers of free shipping. l. Set Free Shipping with Minimum Order Amount to one of the following: Enable: To offer free shipping based on a minimum order. Then, type the Minimum Order Amount for Free Shipping. Disable: To not offer free shipping based on a minimum order.
m. In the Displayed Error Message box, type the message customers see if UPS shipping becomes unavailable. n. Set Ship to Applicable Countries to one of the following: All Allowed Countries Specific Countries If applicable, set Ship to Specific Countries to each country where your customers are allowed to ship by UPS. (Hold the Ctrl key down to select multiple options.) o. Set Debug to “Yes” to create a log file with the details of UPS shipments made from your store. p. Set Show Method if Not Applicable to one of the following: Yes: To list all UPS shipping methods to customers, regardless of their availability. No: To list only the methods which are available to customers.
q. In the Sort Order field, type a numeric value to determine the order in which UPS appears when listed with other shipping methods during checkout. The number with the highest priority is 0, which puts it at the top of the list.
5. When complete, click the Save Config button to save your changes.
456
Magento Go User Guide
Appendix C: Shipping Carriers
USPS
USPS
System > Configuration > Sales > Shipping Methods United States Postal Service is the independent postal service of United States government. USPS offers shipping services to domestic and international, including letters, postcards, packages, documents, and packages by land and air.
Step 1:
Open a Shipping Account
To offer this shipping method to your customers, you must first open an account with USPS.
Step 2:
Configure Your Store
1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. In the left panel, under Sales, click Shipping Methods. 3. Click to expand the USPS section. Then, complete the following:
a. Set Enabled to “Yes.” b. The Gateway URL is needed to access USPS shipping rates. The field is preset by default, and normally does not need to be changed. c. Enter a Title for this shipping method that will appear during checkout. d. Enter the User ID for your USPS account. e. Set Container to the type of packaging usually used to ship products ordered from your store. Options include: f. Variable Flat-Rate Box Flat-Rate Envelope Rectangular Non-rectangular
In the Size list, select the option that describes the typical package shipped from your store: Regular Large Oversize
Magento Go User Guide
457
Appendix C: Shipping Carriers g. Set Machinable to one of the following: Yes: No: If your typical package can be processed by machine. If your typical package must be processed manually.
USPS
h. Enter the Maximum Package Weight that you will ship by USPS. By default, this field is set to 70. You can leave the value as it is unless you have special arrangements with USPS. i. In the Calculate Handling Fee list, select one of the following methods: Fixed Fee Percent
The handling fee is an additional charge that is added to the shipping cost. It is optional and not shown to the customer. In the Handling Applied list, select one of the following: Per Order Per Package
In the Handling Fee field, enter the handling fee value – either a fixed amount or percentage depending on which you selected in Calculate Handling Fee field. j. In the Allowed Methods list, select each USPS method offered to your customers. The methods will appear under USPS during checkout. (Hold the Ctrl key down to select multiple options.) k. Set the Free Method list to the method you want to use for free shipping. l. Set the Free Shipping with Minimum Order Amount to one of the following: Enable: To provide free shipping for orders that meet the minimum amount specified. Then, in the field below, enter the Minimum Order Amount for Free Shipping. Disable: To not provide free shipping based on a minimum order amount.
m. In the Displayed Error Message box, type the message customers see if USPS shipping becomes unavailable.
458
Magento Go User Guide
Appendix C: Shipping Carriers n. Set Ship to Applicable Countries to one of the following: All Allowed Countries Specific Countries
USPS
If applicable, set Ship to Specific Countries to each country where your customers are allowed to ship by USPS. (Hold the Ctrl key down to select multiple options.) o. Set Show Method if Not Applicable to one of the following: Yes: To list all USPS shipping methods to customers, regardless of their availability. No: To list only the methods which are currently available.
p. Set Debug to “Yes” to create a log file of USPS shipments. q. In the Sort Order field, type a numeric value to determine the order in which USPS appears when listed with other shipping methods during checkout.
4. When the configuration is complete, click the Save Config button to save
settings.
Magento Go User Guide
459
Appendix C: Shipping Carriers
FedEx
FedEx
System > Configuration > Sales > Shipping Methods FedEx offers shipping services domestic and international to more than 220 countries which include delivering letters, documents, packages by land and air. To offer this shipping method to your customers, you need to setup an account with FedEx.
Step 1:
Open a Shipping Account
To offer this method to your customers, you must first open an account with FedEx.
Step 2:
Configure Your Store
1. From the Admin panel, choose System > Configuration. 2. In the left Configuration panel, under Sales, click Shipping Methods. 3. Click to expand the FedEx section. Then, do the following:
a. Set Enabled for Checkout to “Yes.” b. Enter a Title for this shipping method that will appear during checkout. c. Complete the following credentials from your FedEx account: Account ID: Meter Number: Key: Password: Your FedEx account ID, without hyphens. The number of your FedEx meter. Your FedEx account key. Your FedEx password.
d. Set Sandbox Mode to one of the following: Yes: No: To enable Sandbox Mode to test the configuration. To disable Sandbox Mode when ready to offer FedEx shipping on your site. e. In the Packaging list, select the container type that you typically use to package the products ordered from your store. f. In the Dropoff list, select the pick-up method you will be using for delivery. You can determine this based on the deal you have established with FedEx.
460
Magento Go User Guide
Appendix C: Shipping Carriers Regular Pickup:
FedEx If you are doing a high volume of shipments, it is cost-effective to arrange for regular pickups. To call and request a FedEx courier to pick-up shipments. To drop off shipments at your nearby FedEx drop box.
Request Courier:
Drop Box:
Business Service Center: To drop off shipments at your local FedEx business service center. Station: Tot drop off shipments at your local FedEx station.
g. Set Calculate Handling Fee to one of the following: Fixed Percent
The handling fee is an additional charge that is added to the shipping cost. It is optional and not shown to the customer. h. Set Handling Applied to one of the following: i. Per Order Per Package
In the Handling Fee field, enter the handling fee as either a fixed amount or percentage, depending on which method you have chosen to use. Set Residential Delivery to one of the following: Yes No
j.
k. In the Allowed Methods list, select each FedEx method offered to your customers. The methods will appear under FedEx during checkout. (Hold the Ctrl key down to select multiple options.) l. Set the Free Method list to the method you want to use for free shipping. following: Enable: To provide free shipping for orders that meet the minimum amount specified. Then, in the field below, enter the Minimum Order Amount for Free Shipping. Disable: To not provide free shipping based on a minimum order amount.
m. Set the Free Shipping with Minimum Order Amount to one of the
Magento Go User Guide
461
Appendix C: Shipping Carriers
FedEx
n. In the Displayed Error Message box, type the message customers see if FedEx shipping becomes unavailable. o. Set Ship to Applicable Countries to one of the following: All Allowed Countries Specific Countries
If applicable, set the Ship to Specific Countries list to each country where your customers are allowed to ship by FedEx. (Hold the Ctrl key down to select multiple options.) p. Set Debug to “Yes” to create a log file of FedEx shipments. q. Set Show Method if Not Applicable to one of the following: Yes: To list all FedEx shipping methods to customers, regardless of their availability. No: r. To list only the methods which are currently available.
In the Sort Order field, type a numeric value to determine the order in which FedEx appears when listed with other shipping methods during checkout.
4. When the configuration is complete, click the Save Config button to save
settings.
462
Magento Go User Guide
Appendix C: Shipping Carriers
DHL
DHL
System > Configuration > Sales > Shipping Methods DHL offers shipping services internationally only offering services by air and ocean freight, road and rail transportation, and international mail services to its customers to more than 220 countries.
Step 1:
Open a Shipping Account
To offer this method to your customers, you must first open an account with DHL.
Step 2:
Configure Your Store
1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. In the Configuration panel on the left, under Sales, select Shipping Methods. 3. Click to expand the DHL section. Then, do the following:
a. Set Enabled to “Yes.” b. The Gateway URL is used to access DHL shipping rates. The field is preset by default, and normally does not need to be changed. c. Give a Title to this shipping method that will appear during checkout. d. Complete your DHL account credentials: Access ID Password Account Number Shipping Key (International) Shipping Key
e. Set Shipment Type to one of the following: Letter: Package: If most of your shipments are letters. If most of your shipments are packages.
Magento Go User Guide
463
Appendix C: Shipping Carriers f. (Optional) The handling fee appears as an additional charge added to the shipping cost. If including a handling fee, do the following: a) Set Calculate Handling Fee to one of the following: Fixed Percent
DHL
b) Set Handling Applied to one of the following: Per Order Per Package
g. In the Package Description field, type a description of the typical package shipped. The default is Big Box. h. Enter the Handling Fee amount, based on the method you have chosen to calculate the amount. i. If the charge is based on a fixed fee, enter the amount as a decimal. For example: 4.90 If the charge is based on a percent. For example, to charge 6%, enter: .06
If your shipments are subject to international duty charges, set Shipment Dutiable to “Yes.”
j.
Enter the Maximum Package Weight to be shipped by DHL. By default, the weight is set to 150lbs, which is the maximum accepted.
k. Set Shipment Duty Payment Type to identify the party who is responsible to pay international duty charges. Options include: Sender: Receiver: Third Party: l. The party sending the package pays the duty. The party receiving the package pays the duty. The duty is paid by another person or company.
In the Allowed Methods list, select each DHL method offered to your customers. The methods will appear under DHL during checkout. (Hold the Ctrl key down to select multiple options.)
m. In the Displayed Error Message box, type the message customers see when DHL shipping becomes unavailable.
464
Magento Go User Guide
Appendix C: Shipping Carriers n. To configure free shipping, do the following: a) Select the Free Method you want to use for free shipping. b) Set Free Shipping with Minimum Order Amount to one of the following: Enable: Disable: To offer free shipping based on minimum order. To not offer free shipping based on minimum order.
DHL
c) In the Minimum Order Amount for Free Shipping field, type the smallest order total that qualifies for free shipping. o. To provide additional protection for shipments, set Additional Protection Enabled to “Yes.” Then, do the following: a) In the Additional Protection Min Subtotal field, enter the smallest order subtotal that qualifies to receive additional protection. b) Set Additional Protection Value to one of the following: Configuration Then, in the Additional Protection Configuration Value field, type the amount of additional protection to offer. Subtotal Subtotal with Discount
c) To determine the exact value that is used to qualify for additional protection, set Additional Protection Value Rounding Method to one of the following: To Lower To Upper Round
p. Set Shipment Contains Hazardous Materials to one of the following: Yes: No: Shipments contain hazardous materials. Shipments do not contain hazardous materials.
q. Complete the following to describe the size of your default package: Default Package Length Default Package Width Default Package Height
Magento Go User Guide
465
Appendix C: Shipping Carriers r. Complete the following to specify each day of the week that you ship packages. (Hold the Ctrl key down to select multiple options.) Domestic Shipment Days International Shipment Days
DHL
s. Set Ship to Applicable Countries to one of the following: All Allowed Countries Specific Countries If applicable, set the Ship to Specific Countries list to each country where your customers are allowed to ship by DHL. (Hold the Ctrl key down to select multiple options.) t. Set Show Method if Not Applicable to one of the following: Yes: To list all DHL shipping methods to customers, regardless of their availability. No: To list only the methods which are currently available.
u. Set Debug to “Yes” to create a log file of DHL shipments. v. In the Sort Order field, type a numeric value to determine the order in which DHL appears when listed with other shipping methods during checkout.
4. When complete, click the Save Config button to save settings.
466
Magento Go User Guide
Appendix D:
Country Codes
This partial list of country codes is provided for your convenience. You can find the complete list online, using your favorite search engine. Argentina Australia Austria Belgium Brazil Canada China Denmark Finland France Germany India Italy Japan Mexico Netherlands New Zealand Norway Poland Spain United Kingdom United States AR AU AT BE BR CA CN DK FI FR DE IN IT JP MX NL NZ NO PL ES GB US ARG AUS AUT BEL BRA CAN CHN DNK FIN FRA DEU IND ITA JPN MEX NLD NZL NOR POL ESP GBR USA
Magento Go User Guide
467
Appendix E:
Payment-Related Services
3D Secure Credit Card Validation Kount Fraud Detection
We frequently make updates and add new service providers, so please visit our Knowledge Base for the most current information.
468
Magento Go User Guide
Appendix E: Payment-Related Services
3D Secure Credit Card Validation
3D Secure Credit Card Validation
System > Configuration > Payment Services If you want an additional layer of protection against fraudulent charges or chargebacks for sales in your Magento Go store, you can enable 3D Secure Credit Card Validation. The 3D Secure Credit Card Validation payment service can increase your customers’ confidence in the security of transactions made in your store, and it might also qualify your business for lower processing rates, depending on your merchant account. This service works only with eligible payment gateways, which must be enabled by the administrator of your Magento Go store. The 3D Secure Credit Card Validation payment service enables Verified by VISA and MasterCard SecureCode payer authentication for purchases made by VISA or MasterCard credit cards. Your customers use either the Verified by Visa authentication or the MasterCard SecureCode in addition to their credit card account numbers. (Customers can set up authentication for their credit cards either before they shop or during the purchasing process.) When customers check out of your Magento Go store, they enter additional security information with their credit card information. The 3D Secure Credit Card Validation service works with the following payment gateways in Magento Go: Authorize.Net PayPal Website Payments Pro (Payflow Edition) Payflow Pro Gateway
Note: Sage Pay Direct has 3D Secure Card Validation that is integrated within the Sage Pay Direct gateway itself. If you’re using Sage Pay Direct, you don’t need to read this article or set up this service module separately. Just make sure to enable and configure 3D Secure Card Validation in your Sage Pay Merchant account.
Magento Go User Guide
469
Appendix E: Payment-Related Services
3D Secure Credit Card Validation
To enable 3D Secure Credit Card Validation:
Step 1: Set up a merchant plug-in application (MPI) to enable 3D Secure Credit Card Validation for your Magento Go store Step 2: Step 3: Configure 3D Secure Credit Card Validation in Magento Go Enable the 3D Secure Credit Card Validation payment service for applicable payment gateways
Step 1:
Enable 3D Secure Credit Card Validation
Do one of the following: Set up a merchant plug-in application (MPI) to enable 3D Secure Credit Card Validation Alternatively, you can use a hosted service to perform the authentication process for you. For more information about merchant requirements, see the websites for Verified by VISA and MasterCard SecureCode payer authentication.
Step 2:
Configure 3D Secure Credit Card Validation i
1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. From the Configuration panel on the left, under Sales, select Payment Services. 3. Click to expand the 3D Secure Credit Card Validation section. Then, do the
following: a. Enter the following information for your 3D Secure Credit Card Validationenabled account: Processor ID Merchant ID Password
470
Magento Go User Guide
Appendix E: Payment-Related Services b. Do one of the following:
3D Secure Credit Card Validation
When you are ready to test the configuration and process test transactions, set Test Mode to “Yes.” When you are ready to “go live” with the 3D Secure Credit Card Validation payment service, set Test Mode to “No.”
c. To record the details of all exchanges between your Magento Go store and the 3D Secure Credit Card Validation payment service in a log file, set Debug to “Yes.” Note: In accordance with PCI Data Security Standards, credit card information is not recorded in the log file.
4. When finished, click the Save Config button.
Step 3:
Enable the service in applicable payment gateways
Currently, 3D Secure Credit Card Validation works with the following payment gateways: Authorize.Net: To enable the 3D Secure Credit Card Validation payment service with this payment gateway, see Payment Gateways: Authorize.Net. PayPal Website Payments Pro (Payflow Edition): To enable the 3D Secure Credit Card Validation payment service with this payment gateway, see Payment Gateways: Website Payments Pro Payflow Edition. PayPal Payflow Pro Gateway: To enable the 3D Secure Credit Card Validation payment service with this payment gateway, see Payment Gateways: Payflow Pro Gateway. Look for more payment gateways to use with the 3D Secure service in future releases of Magento Go.
Magento Go User Guide
471
Appendix E: Payment-Related Services
Kount Fraud Detection
Kount Fraud Detection
System > Configuration > Sales > Payment Services The Kount Fraud Detection service targets Internet fraud by detecting networks of programs that have been designed to defraud online merchants. The application detects fraud related to credit cards, checks, and PayPal, and then tracks the transactions, so that illegal or suspect Financial activity can be stopped. As the merchant, you set up credit card validation rules in the Kount system to monitor transactions related to your online store. For field descriptions, see the article, Configuration: Payment Services Kount Fraud Detection in the Magento Go Knowledge Base
Step 1:
Open a Kount Fraud Detection merchant account
The first step is to establish a Kount Fraud Detection merchant account. As you go through the process, take note of the following information, which you will need to complete the configuration in Magento Go: Kount Merchant ID Certificate Password
For more information about opening a merchant account, visit the Kount website.
Step 2:
Configure Kount Fraud Detection for your store
1. From the Admin panel of Magento Go, select System > Configuration >
Payment Services.
2. In the Configuration panel on the left, under Sales, click Payment Services. 3. Click to expand the Kount Fraud Detection section, and do the following:
a. Set Enabled to “Yes.” b. Enter your Kount Merchant ID from your Kount Fraud Detection merchant account. c. In the RIS Certificate field, select the RIS (Risk Inquiry System) certificate to upload. This is the RIS Certificate File that is requested in the Kount Agent Web Console (AWC). If not uploaded, the generic Kount Certificate is used. d. In the Certificate Password field, enter the password for the RIS Certificate. e. Set Test Mode as needed, to “Yes” or “No.”
4. When finished, click the Save Config button to save the settings.
472
Magento Go User Guide
Appendix F:
Payment Service Providers
CCAvenue Google Checkout Paybox Direct
We frequently make updates and add new service providers, so please visit our Knowledge Base for the most current information.
Magento Go User Guide
473
Appendix F: Payment Service Providers
CCAvenue
CCAvenue
System > Configuration > Sales > Payment Methods CCAvenue is a payment service provider that offers payment gateway services for merchants in India. To set up a CCAvenue payment gateway, first set up a merchant account, then configure it in your Magento Go store.
Step 1:
Open a Merchant Account
The first step is to establish a CCAvenue merchant account. As you go through the process, take note of the following information, which you will need to complete the configuration in Magento Go: Merchant ID/User ID 32 –bit Working Key
For more information about opening a CCAvenue merchant account, visit their website at www.ccavenue.com.
Step 2:
Configure Your Store
1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. In the Configuration panel on the left, under Sales, select Payment Method. 3. Click to expand the CCAvenue section. Then, do the following:
a. To activate this payment method, set Enabled to “Yes.” b. In the Title field, enter an appropriate title to identify this payment method during checkout. c. Enter the following information from your CCAvenue merchant account: d. Merchant ID/User ID 32-bit Working Key
(Optional) Enter a Transaction ID prefix. If you do this, it is recommended that you assign the Transaction ID prefix once only and avoid changing it in the future.
474
Magento Go User Guide
Appendix F: Payment Service Providers
CCAvenue
e. In the Payment from Applicable Countries list, select the countries where this payment method can be used: All Allowed Countries: Customers from all countries in the default countries list can use this payment method. Specific Countries: Customers from only those countries selected in the Payment from Specific Countries list can use this payment method. Then in the Payment from Specific Countries list, select each country where the CCAvenue payment method is accepted. Note: To change the countries in the Allowed Countries list, see System > Configuration > General > Countries Options. f. In the Sort Order field, type a numeric value to determine the order in which CCAvenue appears when listed with other shipping methods during checkout. Enter 0 for the top of the sort order list, 1 for the second highest in the list, and so on. g. Set Test Mode to one of the following: Yes: No: To test the configuration in the sandbox and run test transactions. When you’re ready to “go live” in production mode with CCAvenue.
h. Set Debug to “Yes” to create a log file of all exchanges between your store and CCAvenue. Note: In accordance with PCI Data Security Standards, credit card information is not recorded in the log file.
4. When finished, click the Save Config button.
Magento Go User Guide
475
Appendix F: Payment Service Providers
Google Checkout
Google Checkout
System > Configuration > Sales > Google API Magento Go allows you to integrate your store with Google Checkout. With Google Checkout, customers can pay for purchases in their shopping cart using the Google Checkout payment processing system. Note: Be sure to sign up for a Google Checkout merchant account before starting the configuration of Google Checkout from the Admin panel of your Magento Go store.
Step 1:
Open a Merchant Account
The first step is to establish a Google Checkout merchant account. As you go through the process, take note of the following information, which you will need to complete the configuration in Magento Go: Merchant ID Merchant Key
For more information about opening a Google Checkout merchant account for your Magento Go store, see the Google Checkout website.
Step 2:
Configure Your Store
1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. From the Configuration panel on the left, under Sales, select Google API. 3. Click to expand the Google API section. Then, do the following:
a. To activate this payment method, set Enabled to “Yes.” b. In the Title field, enter an appropriate title to identify this payment method during the checkout process of your Magento Go store. c. Set Test Mode to one of the following: Yes: To test the configuration in the sandbox and process test transactions. No: When you are ready to “go live” with Google Checkout.
476
Magento Go User Guide
Appendix F: Payment Service Providers
Google Checkout
d. Set Secure Callback URL to “Yes” to enable real-time secure transmission of order information from your Magento Go checkout to Google’s payment processing system. Note: This option must be set to “Yes” for live Google Checkout transactions. e. Set Debug to “Yes” to create a log file of all exchanges between your store and Google Checkout. Note: In accordance with PCI Data Security Standards, credit card information is not recorded in the log file. f. Enter the following credentials from your Google Checkout merchant account: Merchant ID: This option can be found on Google Checkout website at Settings > Integration. Merchant Key: This is a unique code used to secure communication between Google and your Magento Go store. The code verifies the integrity of any messages exchanged between your store and the Google Checkout system. It can be the URL of any CMS page, product page, or catalog page in your Magento Go store. If left blank, the customer is redirected to your Home page. g. Choose a Checkout Image Style from the available list. h. Select the Location for Google Checkout from the list of available options. i. In the New Order Status field, specify how you want processed orders to be identified. This setting is visible to the customer and is used for identification purposes. j. (Optional) You can specify a Continue Shopping URL where customers are redirected if they click the Continue Shopping link. If you leave this field blank, the URL redirects to your Home page. k. To hide shopping cart contents after the Google Checkout button is clicked, set Hide Cart Contents to “Yes.” (The shopping cart contents become visible again if the customer clicks Edit Cart.) l. If your checkout request is cut off because it is too big, set Disable Default Tax Tables to “Yes.”
4. When finished, click the Save Config button.
Magento Go User Guide
477
Appendix F: Payment Service Providers
Paybox Direct
Paybox Direct
System > Configuration > Sales > Payment Methods Paybox Services provides merchant accounts and eCommerce payment services for merchants in Europe.
Step 1:
Open a Merchant Account
The first step is to establish a Paybox merchant account. As you go through the process, take note of the following information, which you will need to complete the configuration in Magento Go: Site Number (TPE) Rank Number Activated Key Primary Payment Server URL Backup Payment Server URL
For more information about opening a Paybox merchant account, visit www.paybox.com.
Step 2:
Configure Your Store
1. From the Admin panel of Magento Go, select System > Configuration >
Payment Methods.
2. Click to expand the Paybox Direct section. Then, do the following:
a. Set Enabled to “Yes.” b. In the Title field, enter the name for this payment method that customers will see during checkout. By default, the title is set to “Paybox Direct.” c. Enter the following credentials from your Paybox Direct merchant account: Site Number (TPE) Rank Number Activated Key Primary Payment Server URL Backup Payment Server URL
478
Magento Go User Guide
Appendix F: Payment Service Providers
Paybox Direct
d. Set Debug to “Yes” to create a log file of all exchanges between your store and Paybox Direct. Note: In accordance with Payment Card Industry Data Security Standards (PCI DSS), credit card information is not recorded in the log file. a. When you are ready to “go live” with the Paybox Direct payment method, set New Order Status to Processing. b. Set Payment Action to one of the following: Authorize Only: To authorize the transaction, but not transfer money to your account. Authorize and Capture: To authorize the transaction and also transfer money to your account. c. In the Credit Card Types list, select each credit card that can be used with this payment method. d. In the Payment from Applicable Countries list, select the countries where this payment method can be used: All Allowed Countries: Customers from all countries in the default countries list can use this payment method. Specific Countries: Customers from only those countries selected in the Payment from Specific Countries list can use this payment method. Then in the Payment from Specific Countries list, select each country where Paybox Direct is accepted. Note: To change the countries in the Allowed Countries list, see System > Configuration > General > Countries Options. e. In the Sort Order field, type a numeric value to determine the order in which Paybox Direct appears when listed with other shipping methods during checkout. Enter 0 for the top of the sort order list, 1 for the second highest in the list, and so on.
3. When finished, click the Save Config button to save the settings.
Magento Go User Guide
479
Appendix G:
PCI Compliance Guidelines
Every merchant who handles customer credit card information is required by the Payment Card Industry (PCI) to conduct business within these guidelines: Build and maintain a secure network, and maintain a firewall on the server to protect data. Do not use vendor-supplied defaults for system passwords and security parameters. Protect stored customer data and encrypt the transmission of cardholder data and other sensitive information across public networks. Use and regularly update antivirus software, and develop and maintain secure systems and applications. Restrict physical access to customer data, and provide access only to those with business need-to-know. Assign each person with computer access a unique ID. Track and monitor all access to network resources and cardholder data. Regularly test security systems and processes, and perform a quarterly network vulnerability scan. Maintain an Information Security Policy. Report to the Payment Card Industry according to the requirements of your merchant level. Your Magento Go store is hosted in a PCI compliant, “Tier 4” data center. However, in addition to maintaining a secure hosting environment, there are additional requirements which are the responsibility of each merchant. For small businesses that process fewer than 20,000 credit card transactions per year, the PCI Compliance guidelines can be considered a set of best practices. If you conduct your online business within these parameters, you will enjoy the satisfaction of knowing that you are doing all within your power to provide your customers with a safe and secure shopping experience. As your business grows, your PCI reporting requirements will increase in proportion to your merchant level. To learn more, visit the PCI Security Standards Council website.
480
Magento Go User Guide
Appendix H:
Payment Gateways
Magento Go supports a wide range of payment gateways that provide secure processing of online transactions in all parts of the world. This Appendix provides step-by-step configuration instructions for the following gateways: Authorize.Net Braintree Card Gate Plus CyberSource (SOAP Toolkit) DIBS Payment Services eWAY Direct First Data Global Gateway Web Service API Ogone DirectLlink PAYONE PSiGate SagePay Direct
We frequently make updates and add new service providers, so please visit our Knowledge Base for the most current information.
Magento Go User Guide
481
Appendix H: Payment Gateways
Authorize.Net
Authorize.Net
System > Configuration > Sales > Payment Methods Authorize.Net is a payment gateway that gives merchants the ability to accept credit card and electronic check payments quickly and inexpensively. This article explains how to set up Authorize.Net for your Magento Go store.
Step 1:
Open a Merchant Account
The first step is to establish an Authorize.Net merchant account. Magento Go has partnered with Authorize.net to offer you preferred terms. Visit Authorize.net to take advantage of their special pricing for Magento merchants. As you go through the process, take note of the following information, which you will need to complete the configuration in Magento Go: API Login ID Transaction Key
For more information about opening an Authorize.Net merchant account, visit www.authorize.net.
Step 2:
Configure Your Store
1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. From the Configuration panel on the left, under Sales, select the Payment
Methods tab.
3. Click to expand the Authorize.Net section. Then, do the following:
a. To activate this payment method, set Enabled to “Yes.” b. To enable the Authorize.Net Customer Information Manager (CIM), set Enable CIM to “Yes.” Authorize.Net Customer Information Manager (CIM) lets you store sensitive customer payment information on the Authorize.Net secure servers, to simplify PCI compliance and processing payments for returning customers and recurring transactions. Note: If you enable CIM, 3D Secure Card Validation becomes disabled.
482
Magento Go User Guide
Appendix H: Payment Gateways
Authorize.Net
c. In the Title field, enter an appropriate title to identify this payment method during the checkout process of your Magento Go store, or use the default. d. Set Payment Action to one of the following: Authorize Only: After an order is submitted, Authorize.Net authorizes the transaction. Your Magento Go store administrator must log in to the merchant account on Authorize.Net to capture the transaction. Authorize and Capture: A payment is authorized and captured on the Authorize.Net site, and the back end of your Magento Go store generates an order and an invoice. e. Enter the API Login ID for your Authorize.Net merchant account. f. Enter the Transaction Key for your Authorize.Net merchant account.
g. Set Test Mode to one of the following: Yes: If you are ready to test the configuration and process test transactions. No: If you are ready to “go live” with the Authorize.Net.
h. Set Debug to “Yes” to create a log file of all exchanges between your store and Authorize.Net. i. In the Accepted Currency list, select each currency that is accepted as payment in your store. j. If you want to email the customer when the order is processed, set Email Customer to “Yes.” k. In the Merchant’s Email field, enter the email address of your store. l. In the Credit Card Types list, select each credit card which can be used with this payment method. (Hold the Ctrl key down to select multiple options.) m. To require that customers enter a card verification code (CVC), set Credit Card Verification to “Yes.” The Card Verification Value, also known as the Card Security Code, provides an additional level of security for online transactions. n. In the Payment from Applicable Countries list, select the countries where this payment method can be used:
Magento Go User Guide
483
Appendix H: Payment Gateways All Allowed Countries:
Authorize.Net Customers from all countries in the default countries list can use this payment method. Customers from only those countries selected in the Payment from Specific Countries list can use this payment method. Then in the Payment from Specific Countries list, select each country where Authorize.Net is accepted.
Specific Countries:
Note: To change the countries in the Allowed Countries list, see System > Configuration > General > Countries Options. o. Set Enable 3D Secure Card Validation on Frontend to “Yes” to provide an additional level of fraud protection. p. In the Minimum Order Total and Maximum Order Total fields, specify the minimum and maximum order totals that qualify for this payment method. If an order exactly matches the minimum or maximum total, it qualifies for this payment method. q. In the Sort Order field, type a numeric value to determine the order in which Authorize.Net appears when listed with other shipping methods during checkout. Enter 0 for the top of the sort order list, 1 for the second highest in the list, and so on.
4. When finished, click the Save Config button.
484
Magento Go User Guide
Appendix H: Payment Gateways
Braintree
Braintree
System > Configuration > Sales > Payment Methods Braintree merchants can accept payment in 134 local currencies and choose to settle in up to 21 different currencies. As an online merchant, the advantage to you of using Braintree is that your customers can save credit card information on file. If you use Braintree’s Vault feature, you can also use saved credit card information when placing orders as your store’s administrator working from your store’s back office. After the information is saved, only the last four digits of the credit card are visible. This article explains how to set up Braintree for your Magento Go store.
Step 1:
Open a Merchant Account
The first step is to establish a Braintree merchant account. As you go through the process, take note of the following information, which you will need to complete the configuration in Magento Go: Environment Merchant ID Public Key Private Key
For more information about opening a merchant account, visit www.braintreepayments.com.
Step 2:
Configure Your Store
1. From the Admin panel of Magento Go, select System > Configuration >
Payment Methods.
2. In the Configuration panel on the left, under Sales, click Payment Methods. 3. Click to expand the Braintree section, and do the following:
a. Set Enabled to “Yes.” b. In the Title field, enter the name for this payment method that customers will see during checkout. By default, the title is set to “Braintree.” c. Set Payment Action to one of the following:
Magento Go User Guide
485
Appendix H: Payment Gateways Authorize Only:
Braintree The payment is authorized by Braintree but not captured until you generate the invoice for the order. The payment is authorized by Braintree and the transaction is processed immediately.
Sale:
d. Enter the following credentials from your Braintree merchant account: Environment Merchant ID Public Key Private Key
e. Set Enable Vault to “Yes” or “No,” according to your preference. For more information, see www.braintreepayments.com. f. In the Credit Card Types list, select each credit card that can be used with this payment method. g. In the Sort Order field, type a numeric value to determine the order in which Braintree appears when listed with other shipping methods during checkout. Enter 0 for the top of the sort order list, 1 for the second highest in the list, and so on.
4. When finished, click the Save Config button to save the settings.
486
Magento Go User Guide
Appendix H: Payment Gateways
Card Gate Plus
Card Gate Plus
System > Configuration > Sales > Payment Methods Card Gate Plus is a leading payment service provider based in the Netherlands. Card Gate accepts credit cards and also supports local solutions such as iDEAL.
Step 1:
Open a Merchant Account
The first step is to establish a Card Gate Plus merchant account. As you go through the process, take note of the following information, which you will need to complete the configuration in Magento Go: Site ID Hash Key
For more information about opening a Card Gate Plus merchant account, visit www.cardgate.com.
Step 2:
Configure Your Store
1. From the Admin panel of Magento Go, select System > Configuration >
Payment Methods.
2. On the Payment Methods tab, click to expand the Card Gate Plus section. Then,
do the following: a. Set Enabled to “Yes.” b. In the Title field, enter the name for this payment method that customers will see during checkout. By default, the title is set to “Card Gate Plus.” c. Enter the following credentials from your Card Gate Plus merchant account: Site ID Hash Key
d. In the Payment from Applicable Countries list, select the countries where this payment method can be used:
Magento Go User Guide
487
Appendix H: Payment Gateways All Allowed Countries:
Card Gate Plus Customers from all countries in the default countries list can use this payment method. Customers from only those countries selected in the Payment from Specific Countries list can use this payment method. Then in the Payment from Specific Countries list, select each country where the Card Gate Plus payment method will be accepted.
Specific Countries:
Note: To change the countries in the Allowed Countries list, see System > Configuration > General > Countries Options. e. In the Sort Order field, type a numeric value to determine the order in which Card Gate Plus appears when listed with other shipping methods during checkout. Enter 0 for the top of the sort order list, 1 for the second highest in the list, and so on. f. Set Test Mode to one of the following: Yes: No: To test the configuration in the sandbox and run test transactions. When ready to “go live” in production mode Card Gate Plus.
g. Set Debug to “Yes” to create a log file of all exchanges between your store and Card Gate Plus. Note: In accordance with Payment Card Industry Data Security Standards (PCI DSS), credit card information is not recorded in the log file.
3. When finished, click the Save Config button to save the settings.
Note: When a customer places an order, they will be redirected to Card Gate Plus’s checkout page where they enter their credit card information.
488
Magento Go User Guide
Appendix H: Payment Gateways
CyberSource (SOAP Toolkit)
CyberSource (SOAP Toolkit)
System > Configuration > Sales > Payment Methods CyberSource offers global payment services for small, medium, and large businesses. The company also owns the Authorize.net service, which is designed specifically for businesses with less than $3M in annual online sales.
Step 1:
Open a Merchant Account
The first step is to establish a CyberSource merchant account. For more information, visit the CyberSource Support Center.
Step 2:
Generate a Security Key
A transaction security key must be generated before you can configure the CyberSource SOAP Toolkit for your Magento Go store.
1. Log in to the CyberSource Business Center. 2. In the left panel, click Account Management. Then, click Transaction Security
Keys and do the following: a. Select Security Keys for the SOAP Toolkit API. b. Click Generate Key.
3. As soon as the transaction security key is generated, copy it and save in a
convenient place where you can refer to it during the configuration of your store.
Step 3:
Configure Your Store
1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration > Payment Methods. 2. On the Payment Methods tab, click to expand the CyberSource (SOAP Toolkit)
section. Then, do the following: a. Set Enabled to “Yes.” b. In the Title field, enter the name for this payment method that customers will see during checkout. By default, the title is set to: Credit Card (CyberSource). c. In the Merchant ID field, enter the Merchant ID or User Name, that is associated with your CyberSource merchant account.
Magento Go User Guide
489
Appendix H: Payment Gateways
CyberSource (SOAP Toolkit)
d. In the Security Key field, paste the transaction security key that was generated in Step 2. e. In the Merchant’s Email field, enter the email address that is associated with your CyberSource merchant account. f. Set Email Customer to one of the following: Yes: To send the customer an Email Receipt for each transaction processed by the Virtual Terminal. No: To not send the customer an Email Receipt for each transaction processed by the Virtual Terminal. Note: This setting has no effect on transactional email messages sent from your Magento Go store. g. Set Payment Action to one of the following: Authorization: To authorize the transaction but not transfer funds to your account. Sale: To authorize the transaction and also transfer funds to your account. h. In the Credit Card Types list, select each credit card that can be used in your store with this payment. i. If you want to require that customers enter a card verification code (CVC), set Credit Card Verification to “Yes.” j. In the Payment from Applicable Countries list, select the countries where this payment method can be used: All Allowed Countries: Customers from all countries in the default countries list can use this payment method. Specific Countries: Customers from only those countries selected in the Payment from Specific Countries list can use this payment method. Then in the Payment from Specific Countries list, select each country where the CyberSource payment method is accepted. Note: To change the countries in the Allowed Countries list, see System > Configuration > General > Countries Options.
490
Magento Go User Guide
Appendix H: Payment Gateways
CyberSource (SOAP Toolkit)
k. If you accept payments from Japan, set Enable Japanese Payment Options to “Yes.” Then, select one of the following options from the JPO Payment Method list: Single Payment Bonus Payment Installment Then, enter the Number of Installment Payments as 0-9. l. Revolving Payment
Set Test Mode to one of the following: Yes: No: To test the configuration in the sandbox and run test transactions. When ready to “go live” in production mode CyberSource.
m. Set Debug to “Yes” to create a log file of all exchanges between your store and CyberSource. Note: In accordance with PCI Data Security Standards, credit card information is not recorded in the log file. n. In the Sort Order field, type a numeric value to determine the order in which CyberSource appears when listed with other shipping methods during checkout. Enter 0 for the top of the sort order list, 1 for the second highest in the list, and so on.
3. When finished, click the Save Config button to save the settings.
Using a CyberSource Test Account
A CyberSource Test Account gives you the opportunity to become familiar with the entire payment process and run test transactions without making changes to your Magento Go store or to your CyberSource merchant account.
To set up your test account: 1. Follow the instructions on the CyberSource site to register for a test account. 2. Select Test Mode.
Magento Go User Guide
491
Appendix H: Payment Gateways
DIBS Payment Services
DIBS Payment Services
System > Configuration > Sales > Payment Methods DIBS Payment Services is a European Payment Service Provider that offers payment services in Denmark.
Step 1:
Open a Merchant Account
The first step is to establish a DIBS Payment Services merchant account. As you go through the process, take note of the following information, which you will need to complete the configuration in Magento Go: Merchant ID Login Password Key 1 Key 2
For more information about opening a DIBS Payment Services merchant account, visit their site at www.dibspayment.com.
Step 2:
Configure Your Store
1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. From the Configuration panel on the left, under Sales, select Payment Method. 3. Click to expand the DIBS Payment Services section. Then, do the following:
a. To activate this payment method, set Enabled to “Yes.” b. In the Title field, enter an appropriate title to identify this payment method during the checkout process of your Magento Go store. c. Enter the following information from your DIBS Payment Services merchant account: Merchant ID Login Password Key 1 Key 2
492
Magento Go User Guide
Appendix H: Payment Gateways
DIBS Payment Services
d. (Optional) Enter a Transaction ID prefix. If you do this, it is recommended that you assign the Transaction ID prefix once only and avoid changing it in the future. e. Set Test Mode to one of the following: Yes: No: To test the configuration in the sandbox and run test transactions. When ready to “go live” in production mode with DIBS Payment Services. f. Set Debug to “Yes” to create a log file of all exchanges between your store and DIBS Payment Services. Note: In accordance with PCI Data Security Standards, credit card information is not recorded in the log file. g. Set Payment Action to one of the following: Authorize Only: To authorize the transaction, but not transfer money to your account. Authorize and Capture: To authorize the transaction and also transfer money to your account. h. In the Credit Card Types list, select each credit card which can be used with this payment method. Accepted credit card types include American Express, Visa, MasterCard, JCB, Switch/Maestro, and Other. i. If you want to require customers to enter a card verification code (CVC), set Credit Card Verification to “Yes.” The Card Verification Value, also known as the Card Security Code, provides an additional level of security for online transactions. j. In the Accepted Currency list, select each currency that is accepted as payment in your store. k. In the Payment from Applicable Countries list, select the countries where this payment method can be used: All Allowed Countries: Customers from all countries in the default countries list can use this payment method. Specific Countries: Customers from only those countries selected in the Payment from Specific Countries list can use this payment method. Then in the Payment from Specific Countries list, select each country where the DIBS Payment Services is accepted.
Magento Go User Guide
493
Appendix H: Payment Gateways
DIBS Payment Services
Note: To change the countries in the Allowed Countries list, see System > Configuration > General > Countries Options. l. In the Sort Order field, type a numeric value to determine the order in which DIBS Payment Systems appears when listed with other shipping methods during checkout. Enter 0 for the top of the sort order list, 1 for the second highest in the list, and so on.
4. When finished, click the Save Config button.
494
Magento Go User Guide
Appendix H: Payment Gateways
eWAY Direct
eWAY Direct
System > Configuration > Sales > Payment Methods eWAY offers a multitude of payment processing services for merchants based in Australia. This article explains how to configure the eWAY Direct payment method for your Magento Go store.
Step 1:
Open a Merchant Account
The first step is to establish an eWAY merchant account. As you go through the process, take note of the following information which you will need to complete the configuration in Magento Go: Customer ID
Step 2:
Configure Your Store
1. From the Admin panel of Magento Go, select System > Configuration >
Payment Methods.
2. On the Payment Methods tab, click to expand the eWAY Direct section. Then,
do the following: a. Set Enabled to “Yes.” b. In the Title field, enter the name for this payment method that customers will see during checkout. By default, the title is set to: eWay Direct. c. In the Customer ID field, enter the eWAY Customer ID associated with your merchant account. d. In the Accepted Currency list, select each type of currency that is acceptable as payment in your store. e. Set Debug to “Yes” to create a log file of all exchanges between your store and eWAY Direct. Note: In accordance with PCI Data Security Standards, credit card information is not recorded in the log file. f. In the Credit Card Types list, select each credit card that can be used with this payment method. g. If you want to require that customers must enter a card verification code (CVC), set Credit Card Verification to “Yes.”
Magento Go User Guide
495
Appendix H: Payment Gateways
eWAY Direct
h. In the Payment from Applicable Countries list, select the countries where this payment method can be used: All Allowed Countries: Customers from all countries in the default countries list can use this payment method. Specific Countries: Customers from only those countries selected in the Payment from Specific Countries list can use this payment method. Then in the Payment from Specific Countries list, select each country where the eWAY Direct is accepted. Note: To change the countries in the Allowed Countries list, see System > Configuration > General > Countries Options. i. In the Sort Order field, type a numeric value to determine the order in which eWAY Direct appears when listed with other shipping methods during checkout. Enter 0 for the top of the sort order list, 1 for the second highest in the list, and so on.
3. When finished, click the Save Config button to save the settings.
Using an eWAY Test Account
An eWAY Test Account gives you the opportunity to become familiar with the entire payment process and run test transactions without making changes to your Magento Go store or to your eWAY merchant account.
To set up your test account: 1. Follow the testing instructions on the eWAY website to activate your test account. 2. Then, set Test Mode to “Yes” to begin testing.
496
Magento Go User Guide
Appendix H: Payment Gateways
First Data Global Gateway Web Service API
First Data Global Gateway Web Service API
System > Configuration > Sales > Payment Methods The First Data Global Gateway Web Service API enables full-featured, highly secure and reliable eCommerce Web sites and custom retail implementations, and includes tax and shipping calculators. After you integrate the Global Gateway API payment module into your Magento Go store, when your customers purchase items from your store all payment details are processed automatically. The Global Gateway Connect service passes information from your website to the First Data Global Gateway through an order form. The Global Gateway Connect service collects the customer’s secure transaction information (for example, credit card number and expiration date) and processes the secure transaction for you on their secure Web server. You can then review transaction activity by visiting the Global Gateway Virtual Terminal.
Step 1:
Open a Merchant Account
The first step is to establish a First Data Global Gateway Web Service merchant account. As you go through the process, take note of the following information, which you will need to complete the configuration in Magento Go: Digital certificate: A file that you download from the First Data software download center. A digital certificate is a key used on the Internet to identify a company or organization and secure transactions between two parties. When you sign up for the Global Gateway API service, you receive a digital certificate. The Global Gateway API software uses this certificate to send SSL-secured payment transactions to the gateway service. For more information about opening a First Data Global Gateway merchant account, visit their site at www.firstdata.com.
Step 2:
Configure Your Store
1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. From the Configuration panel on the left, under Sales, select Payment Methods. 3. Expand the First Data Global Gateway Web Service API section. Then, do the
following:
Magento Go User Guide
497
Appendix H: Payment Gateways
First Data Global Gateway Web Service API
a. To activate this payment method, set Enabled to “Yes.” b. In the Title field, enter an appropriate title to identify this payment method during checkout. c. Choose the Certificate file that you downloaded from the First Data software download center. d. (Optional) Enter a Transaction ID prefix. If you do this, it is recommended that you assign the transaction ID prefix once only and avoid changing it in the future. e. Set Test Mode to one of the following: Yes: No: f. To test the configuration in the sandbox and run test transactions. When ready to “go live” in production mode with First Data Global.
Set Debug to “Yes” to create a log file of all exchanges between your store and First Data Global. Note: In accordance with PCI Data Security Standards, credit card information is not recorded in the log file.
g. Set Payment Action to one of the following: Authorize Only: After an order is submitted, First Data Global Gateway Web Service authorizes the transaction. Your Magento Go store administrator must log in to the merchant account for First Data Global Gateway Web Service to capture the transaction. Authorize and Capture: A payment is authorized and captured on the First Data Global Gateway Web Service site, and the back-end of your Magento Go store generates an order and an invoice. h. In the Credit Card Types list, select each credit card that can be used with this payment method. Accepted credit card types include: American Express, Visa, MasterCard, and JCB. i. If you want to require customers to enter a card verification code (CVC), set Credit Card Verification to “Yes.” The Card Verification Value, also known as the Card Security Code, provides an additional level of security for online transactions.
498
Magento Go User Guide
Appendix H: Payment Gateways j.
First Data Global Gateway Web Service API
In the Payment from Applicable Countries list, select the countries where this payment method can be used: All Allowed Countries: Customers from all countries in the default countries list can use this payment method. Specific Countries: Customers from only those countries selected in the Payment from Specific Countries list can use this payment method. Then in the Payment from Specific Countries list, select each country where First Data Global is accepted. Note: To change the countries in the Allowed Countries list, see System > Configuration > General > Countries Options.
k. In the Sort Order field, type a numeric value to determine the order in which First Data Global appears when listed with other shipping methods during checkout. Enter 0 for the top of the sort order list, 1 for the second highest in the list, and so on.
4. When finished, click the Save Config button.
Magento Go User Guide
499
Appendix H: Payment Gateways
Ogone DirectLink
Ogone DirectLink
System > Configuration > Sales > Payment Methods Ogone is a leading European Payment Service Provider that offers payment services to more than thirty-five countries. Setting up the Ogone payment gateway for your Magento Go store is a three-step process. Step 1: Set up an Ogone merchant account. Step 2: Configure Ogone from the Admin panel of your Magento Go store. Step 3: Set up the Ogone Payment Bridge to provide access from the IP address of your store.
Step 1:
Open a Merchant Account
The first step is to establish an Ogone merchant account. As you go through the process, take note of the following information, which you will need to complete the configuration in Magento Go: PSPID USERID PSWD SHA-IN Pass phrase
For more information about opening an Ogone merchant account, visit www.ogone.com.
Step 2:
Configure Your Store
1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. From the Configuration panel on the left, under Sales, select Payment Method.
500
Magento Go User Guide
Appendix H: Payment Gateways
Ogone DirectLink
3. Click to expand the Ogone Direct Link section. Then, do the following:
a. Set Enabled to “Yes.” b. Set Test Mode to one of the following: Yes: No: To test the configuration and process test transactions. When ready to “go live” with Ogone Direct Link.
c. In the Title field, enter an appropriate title to identify this payment method in the checkout settings of the Payment Information page of your Magento Go online store. d. Complete the PSPID, USERID, PSWD, and SHA-IN Pass phrase fields with the account information provided by Ogone. e. In the Payment Action field, choose how you want payments to be authorized: Authorization: After an order is submitted, Ogone authorizes the transaction. Your Magento Go store administrator must log in to the merchant account on Ogone and capture the transaction. Direct Sale: A payment is authorized and captured on Ogone’s site, and the backend of your Magento Go store generates an order and an invoice. f. In the Credit Card Types field, select the credit card types to accept. Options include American Express, Visa, MasterCard, Discover, and Other (other card types approved by Ogone). g. In the Payment from Applicable Countries list, select the countries where this payment method can be used: All Allowed Countries: Customers from all countries in the default countries list can use this payment method. Specific Countries: Customers from only those countries selected in the Payment from Specific Countries list can use this payment method. Then in the Payment from Specific Countries list, select each country where the Ogone payment method is accepted. Note: To change the countries in the Allowed Countries list, see System > Configuration > General > Countries Options.
4. Click Save Config to save your settings.
Magento Go User Guide
501
Appendix H: Payment Gateways
Ogone DirectLink
Step 3:
Configure the Payment Bridge IP Address
1. Log in to your Ogone Merchant Account. 2. From the menu, select Configuration > Technical information. 3. Click the Data and origin verification tab. 4. In the section Checks for Ogone DirectLink and Ogone Batch (Automatic),
enter this IP address: 184.106.43.60 Note: Leave the ‘URL of the merchant page containing the payment from that will call the page’ field empty. It is not required by Magento Go.
5. Click Confirm and return to your Home page to save changes.
Managing Canceled Orders
A canceled order should be processed first through the Magento Go Admin panel, before it is processed through the Ogone merchant interface. If the order is canceled first through the Ogone interface, the status of the Magento Go order changes to “Processing” and cannot be changed.
To cancel an order: 1. From the Admin panel, go to Sales > Orders. 2. Find the order in the list, and in the first column, select the checkbox. 3. In the upper-right, set the Actions list to Cancel. Then, click the Submit button.
The Status of the order changes to Canceled.
4. Complete the cancellation process from your Ogone merchant account, according
to the instructions provided by Ogone.
502
Magento Go User Guide
Appendix H: Payment Gateways
PAYONE.de
PAYONE.de
System > Configuration > Sales > Payment Methods PAYONE is a leading payment service provider based in Germany. The company offers a “Shop Module” plug-in to their Finance Gate system that is designed specifically for the Magento platform.
Step 1:
Open a PAYONE Merchant Account
The first step is to establish a PAYONE merchant account. As you go through the process, take note of the following information which you will need to complete the configuration: Merchant ID Payment Portal ID Payment Portal Key Sub Account ID Gateway URL
For more information, visit: www.payone.de
Step 2:
Configure Your Store
1. From the Admin panel of Magento Go, select System > Configuration >
Payment Methods.
2. Click to expand the PAYONE.de section. Then, do the following:
a. Set Enabled to “Yes.” b. In the Title field, enter the name for this payment method that will appear to customers during the checkout process. By default, the Title is set to “Credit Card (PAYONE.de).” c. Enter the following credentials from your PAYONE merchant account: Merchant ID Payment Portal ID Payment Portal Key Sub Account ID Gateway URL
Magento Go User Guide
503
Appendix H: Payment Gateways d. Set Test Mode to one of the following: Yes: No: To test the configuration and process test transactions.
PAYONE.de
When ready to “go live” with the PAYONE payment method.
e. Set Debug to “Yes” to create a log file of all exchanges between your store and PAYONE. Note: In accordance with PCI Data Security Standards, no credit card information is saved in the log file. f. Set Payment Action to one of the following: Authorize Only: Authorizes the transaction but does not transfer money to your account. Authorize and Capture: Authorizes the transaction and also transfers money to your account. g. In the Credit Card Types list, select each credit card that can be used with this payment method. h. If you want to require customers to enter a card verification code (CVC), set Credit Card Verification to “Yes.” i. In the Accepted Currency list, select each currency that is accepted as payment in your store. j. In the Payment from Applicable Countries list, select each country where the PAYONE payment method is accepted. k. In the Sort Order field, type a numeric value to determine the order in which PAYONE appears when listed with other shipping methods during checkout. Enter 0 for the top of the sort order list, 1 for the second highest in the list, and so on.
3. When finished, click the Save Config button to save changes.
504
Magento Go User Guide
Appendix H: Payment Gateways
PSi Gate
PSi Gate
System > Configuration > Sales > Payment Methods PSiGate Merchant Services provides merchant accounts and eCommerce payment services for merchants in the United States and Canada.
Step 1:
Open a Merchant Account
The first step is to establish a PSiGate merchant account. As you go through the process, take note of the following information, which you will need to complete the configuration in Magento Go: Store ID Passphrase
For more information about opening a PSiGate merchant account, visit: www.psigate.com
Step 2:
Configure Your Store
1. From the Admin panel of Magento Go, select System > Configuration >
Payment Methods.
2. Click to expand the PSiGate section. Then, do the following:
a. Set Enabled to “Yes.” b. In the Title field, enter the name for this payment method that customers will see during checkout. By default, the title is set to PSiGate. c. Enter the following credentials from your PSiGate merchant account: Store ID Passphrase
d. Set Payment Action to one of the following: Authorize Only: The payment is authorized by PSiGate but not captured until you generate the invoice for the order. Sale: The payment is authorized by PSiGate and the transaction is immediately processed. e. Set Debug to “Yes” to create a log file of all exchanges between your store and PSiGate.
Magento Go User Guide
505
Appendix H: Payment Gateways
PSi Gate
Note: In accordance with Payment Card Industry Data Security Standards (PCI DSS), credit card information is not saved in the log file. f. Set Test Mode to one of the following: Yes: No: To test the configuration and process test transactions. To “go live” with the PSiGate payment method.
g. In the Credit Card Types list, select each credit card which can be used with this payment method. h. If you want to require customers to enter a card verification code (CVC), set Credit Card Verification to “Yes.” i. Type in the Minimum Order Total and Maximum Order Total to specify the order amount range that qualifies to use this payment method. j. In the Sort Order field, type a numeric value to determine the order in which PSiGate appears when listed with other shipping methods during checkout. Enter 0 for the top of the sort order list, 1 for the second highest in the list, and so on.
3. When finished, click the Save Config button to save the settings.
506
Magento Go User Guide
Appendix H: Payment Gateways
Sage Pay Direct
Sage Pay Direct
System > Configuration > Sales > Payment Methods Sage Pay is the UK’s largest independent payment service provider, processing millions of secure payments every month for over 33,000 businesses. Note: Sage Pay has a security feature that requires entering an IP address of the originating payment request. Use the following IP address to enable your Magento Go store’s transactions when using Sage pay: 184.106.43.60 To implement the Sage Pay Direct payment gateway, follow these general steps: Step 1: Step 2: Step 3: Open a Sage Pay Direct merchant account. Configure Sage Pay in Magento Go (Optional) Use a Sage Pay Simulator Account to test your setup.
Step 1:
Open a Merchant Account
The first step is to open a Sage Pay Direct merchant account. Sage Pay offers support and answers to common questions on their Support & FAQs page.
Step 2:
Configure Your Store
1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. In the Configuration panel on the left, under Sales, select Payment Methods. 3. Click to expand the Sage Pay Direct section. Then, do the following:
a. Set Enabled to “Yes.” b. In the Vendor Name field, type the name that is associated with your Sage Pay merchant account. c. Set Payment Action to one of the following: Authorize Only: After an order is submitted, Sage Pay authorizes the transaction. Your Magento Go store administrator must log in to the merchant account on Sage Pay to capture the transaction. Authorize and Capture: A payment is authorized and captured on the Sage Pay site, and the back-end of your Magento Go store generates an order and an invoice.
Magento Go User Guide
507
Appendix H: Payment Gateways
Sage Pay Direct
d. In the Title field, enter the name for this payment method that customers see during checkout. e. Set Operation Mode to one of the following: Simulator: To enter test transactions using a simulated Sage Pay account. Test: To enter test transactions using your Sage Pay merchant account, but without processing the transactions. Live: To “go live” with your Sage Pay merchant account. This is the final step after you complete all testing and are ready to process transactions. f. (Optional) Enter a Transaction ID prefix. If you do this, it is recommended that you assign the Transaction ID prefix once only and avoid changing it in the future. g. Set Debug to “Yes” to create a log file of all exchanges between your store and Sage Pay Direct. Note: In accordance with PCI Data Security Standards, credit card information is not recorded in the log file. h. In the Credit Card Types list, select each credit card that can be used with this payment method. i. If you want to require that customers enter a card verification code (CVC), set Credit Card Verification to “Yes.” The Card Verification Value, also known as the Card Security Code, provides an additional level of security for online transactions. j. If you want to enable an additional layer of fraud protection for your transactions, set 3D Secure Card Verification to “Yes.”
508
Magento Go User Guide
Appendix H: Payment Gateways
Sage Pay Direct
k. In the Payment from Applicable Countries list, select the countries where this payment method can be used: All Allowed Countries: Customers from all countries in the default countries list can use this payment method. Specific Countries: Customers from only those countries selected in the Payment from Specific Countries list can use this payment method. Then in the Payment from Specific Countries list, select each country where Sage Pay Direct is accepted. Note: To change the countries in the Allowed Countries list, see System > Configuration > General > Countries Options. l. In the Sort Order field, type a numeric value to determine the order in which Sage Pay Direct appears when listed with other shipping methods during checkout. Enter 0 for the top of the sort order list, 1 for the second highest in the list, and so on.
4. When finished, click the Save Config button.
Magento Go User Guide
509
Appendix I:
Product System Attributes
The following product system attributes are required for the operation of your Magento Go store, and cannot be deleted.
General Attributes
Attribute Code name Description The name of the product. This name is visible on your product description page as well as anywhere this product is listed. It is used by customers to identify the product. Description of the product. This is an important field, especially as a selling tool, because it is the main way customers learn about the product. A shorter description of the product that customers will immediately see when viewing the product description page. The Stock-Keeping Unit. This is the unique product identification number that you would use to track this product and its quantity in your inventory system. The product weight in ounces. This field specifies the “from” date that the product is considered new, and would be featured in your “new products” listings. This field specifies the “to” date that the product is considered new, and would be featured in your “new products” listings. If this field is set to ‘enabled’, then the product will be available for purchase. If this field is set to ‘disabled’ it will not be visible in the catalog. The URL key (or the product identifying portion) of the product’s web address. For example, if the URL key is ‘my-sample-product’, then the address might be Value Text Required Yes
description
String
Yes
short_description
Text
Yes
sku
Alphanumeric (A-Z,0-9)
Yes
weight news_from_date
Numeric Date and Time
Yes No
news_to_date
Date and Time
No
status
Binary (1, 0)
Yes
url_key
Text
No
510
Magento Go User Guide
Appendix I: Product System Attributes
Attribute Code
Description ‘example.gostorego.com/category/my-sampleproduct.html’
Value
Required
visibility
Specify whether this product is visible from the catalog, search, both, or neither. Values include: 0 (Not Visible Individually) 1 (Catalog) 2 (Search) 3 (Catalog, Search)
Numeric
Yes
gift_message_available This field specifies if a message can be included with this product purchase. Can be set to yes, no, or use config. Values include: Yes / No / Use Config is_imported Determines if this product can be included in product RSS feeds. Yes, No No Text No
Price Attributes
Attribute Code price special_price Description The price of the product. The special sale price for the product during the special sale period. This field specifies the “from” date that the product will be on sale for the special sale price. This field specifies the “to’ date that the product will be on sale for the special sale price. Specify the tax class ID, which will determine which tax rules to apply to the product. The value is based on the id # next to each product tax class. enable_googlecheckout Determines if the product can be purchased using Google Checkout. This field can be set to either Yes or No. Yes, No No Value Numeric Numeric Required Yes No
special_from_date
Date and Time
No
special_to_date
Date and Time
No
tax_class_id
Integer
Yes
Magento Go User Guide
511
Appendix I: Product System Attributes
Meta Information Attributes
Attribute Code meta_title Description The meta title of the product. This meta title is visible only to search engines. The meta keywords of the product. Keywords are visible only to search engines. The meta description of the product is visible only to search engines. Value Text Required No
meta_keyword
Text
No
meta_description
Text
No
Image Attributes
Attribute Code image Description The URL (address) of the base image, or the main image of the product that is displayed when customer clicks the image in the description page. The URL (address) of the thumbnail image, or the product image shown in product listings. The URL (address) of the small image, or the image that will be displayed in the product description page. Value URL Required No
thumbnail
URL
No
small_image
URL
No
Design Attributes
Attribute Code custom_design Description If you want to use a custom design for the product description page, specify it in this field. The date to begin using the custom design for the product description page. The date to stop using the custom design for the product description page. Value Yes, No 55 No
custom_design_from
Date and Time
No
custom_design_to
Date and Time
No
custom_layout_update Use custom XML to modify the product description page layout. XML No
512
Magento Go User Guide
Appendix I: Product System Attributes
Attribute Code page_layout
Description Specify the layout of the product description page using a predefined layout. Values include: No layout updates Empty 1 column 2 columns with left bar 2 columns with right bar 3 columns
Value Text
55 No
options_container
If this product has options, this field specifies whether these options will be displayed in the product information column or in the block below the price. Values include: Product Info Column / Block After Info Column
Text
No
Card-Specific Attributes
Attribute Code allow_open_amount Description Specify whether the dollar value of the gift card can be specified by the customer. The minimum gift card amount if the gift card allows open amounts. The maximum gift card amount if the gift card allows open amounts. Value Text Required Yes
open_amount_min
Numeric
No
open_amount_max
Numeric
No
Pre-loaded Attributes
Attribute Code color Description The color of the product. This is especially useful for identification and description when you have multiple colors of the same product. The cost of the product. (For internal purposes only.) The name of the manufacturer of the product. This field can be used by customers to narrow search results to specific manufacturers. Value Text Required No
cost
Numeric
No
manufacturer
Text
No
Magento Go User Guide
513
Appendix J:
Customer System Attributes
Magento Go includes the most common customer attributes that most merchants need to maintain, such as the customer name, email, date of birth, and address— including street, city, ZIP code, and country code. These customer system attributes are required by Magento Go, and cannot be deleted.
Editing Customer Attributes
Some customer attributes can be edited, as follows:
To edit customer attributes: 1. From the Admin panel, select one of the following:
Customers > Attributes > Manage Customer Attribute Manage Customer Address Attributes
2. Select the customer attribute to be edited and set the properties, as needed, using
the list below for reference.
3. Click the Save Attribute button to save your changes.
Property Default Value Description If your product requires consistent or repetitive default values, entering a value here will prepopulate this field. You can however edit the field in product editor if you wish. This field will not be active for Multiple Select or Dropdown list. If you have a Dropdown or Multiple Select Input Type, you will be able to select the Default Value in the Manage Label / Options tab. Specifies whether or not this attribute needs to be authenticated before it is accepted. (For example, Email address.) In this field you can specify a minimum and maximum amount of characters for this field. If this attribute requires an answer from customers select Yes.
Input Validation
Minimum/Maximum Length Values Required
514
Magento Go User Guide
Appendix J: Customer System Attributes
Input/Output Filter
Property Strip HTML Tags Description Removes any HTML coding entered into the field by customers or visitors to your site. Renders any HTML coding entered into the field inoperable.
Escape HTML Entities
Frontend Properties
Show on Frontend: Select “Yes” to show this attribute field in your store.
General Customer Attributes
This section lists all customer attributes used by your Magento Go store.
Attribute Code website_id
Description The website to which the customer is associated. The default options are either Admin or Main Website. Customers who are also associated with Admin cannot log in and make purchases from your store. The customer group to associate this customer with. The default customer groups in Magento Go are General and Retailer, but these can be customized. Precedes the customer’s first name and is part of their full name. Examples: Mr., Mrs., Miss, Ms., Rev. The customer’s first, or given, name. The customer’s middle name or initial. The customer’s last, or family, name. The name suffix that follows the customer’s full name, often providing additional information about the person. Examples: Ph.D., J.D., Pharm.D., K.B.E. Customer’s email address.
Data Type string
Required Yes
group_id
string
Yes
prefix
string
No
firstname middlename lastname suffix
string string string string
Yes Yes Yes No
email
string
Yes
Magento Go User Guide
515
Appendix J: Customer System Attributes
dob taxvat gender
Date of birth, formatted as MM/DD/YY Tax or VAT ID number of customer. Customer gender.
mm/dd/yy alphanumeric male, female
No No No
Customer Address Attributes
Attribute Code prefix Description Precedes the customer’s first name and is part of their full name. Examples: Mr., Mrs., Miss, Ms., Rev. The customer’s first, or given, name. The customer’s middle name or initial. The customer’s last, or family, name. The name suffix that follows the customer’s full name, often providing additional information about the person. Examples: Ph.D., J.D., Pharm.D., K.B.E. Company or business name if the address belongs to a business. The street address usually includes a home or business building number, street name, and suite or apartment number. The city or town for the address. The country where this address is located. The state or province where the address is located. The postal or ZIP code associated with the address. The telephone number at the address. The fax number at the address. number number Data Type string Required No
firstname middlename lastname suffix
string string string string
Yes No Yes No
company
string
No
street
string
Yes
city country_id region postcode telephone fax
string string string
Yes Yes No Yes Yes No
516
Magento Go User Guide
Appendix K:
Translating Your Store
Magento Go gives you the ability to create up to three separate views of your store. Each view can be used to target a specific language or demographic. Once you have created multiple store views, you can translate them into other languages. When you translate a website into a different language, you can use the Theme Text Editor to translate all of the text in the theme for that website, even if the theme wasn’t originally designed in that language.
Changing the Locale
Text that appears to be “hard-coded” on the pages of your store can be translated into a different language, according to store view. This text includes navigational titles and links such as “My Cart” and “My Account.” You can do a global translation of all the text in the interface by changing the locale of the view. Changing the “locale” causes a different translation table to be referenced to generate the text that is displayed throughout the site. After changing the locale, you can use the Theme Text Editor to fine-tune the translation by making manual “spot changes” to any text in the interface. To learn more, see the Magento Go Design Guide.
To change the locale of a view: 1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. In the upper-left corner, set the Current Configuration Scope to the store view
that needs to be translated.
3. On the General configuration page, click to expand the Locale Options section.
Magento Go User Guide
517
Appendix K: Translating Your Store
Locale Options
1. Set Locale to the new language for the store view. 2. Click Save to save your changes.
Catalog
Content such as Categories and Products are created by you, so they cannot be translated using the system configuration method. However, Magento Go provides a process to make the translation as easy as possible.
To translate categories: 1. In the Admin panel, select Catalog > Manage Categories. 2. In the Choose Store View list in the right column, select a language. 3. Select a category or sub-category from the category tree in the left column. 4. Deselect the Use Default Value boxes of the fields, such as Name,
Description, and Page title, for all values you want to translate.
5. Enter the translated content into the necessary fields; for example:
Furniture:Muebles
6. When you finish translating the category, click the Save Category button to
save your changes.
518
Magento Go User Guide
Appendix K: Translating Your Store
Products
To translate your products: 1. From the Admin panel, select Catalog > Manage Products. 2. Click to open the product record that you want to translate. 3. In the Choose Store View list in the right column, select a language. 4. Deselect the Use Default Value boxes of the fields, such as Name, Description,
and Page title, for all values you want to translate.
5. Enter the translated content into the necessary fields. Be sure to convert the Meta
Information and Descriptions if necessary.
6. Click the Save button to save your changes.
CMS Content
CMS content cannot be translated in the same way that catalog content can be translated. Duplicate pages, blocks, banners, and polls must be created for each language.
To translate CMS Pages: 1. From the Admin panel, select CMS > Pages > Manage Content. 2. Click the Add New Page button to create your new, duplicate page. 3. In the Page Information section, select your language in the Store View field, to
assign this page to the store view.
4. Complete the rest of your duplicated page and click the Save Page button to save
your changes.
Magento Go User Guide
519
Appendix K: Translating Your Store
Static Blocks
To translate a Static Block: 1. From the Admin panel, select CMS > Static Block. 2. Click the Add New Block button to begin creating your translated Static Block. 3. In the Page Information section, select your language in the Store View field, to
assign this Block to the store view.
4. Complete the content and click the Save Page button to save your changes
Banners
To translate a banner: 1. From the Admin panel, select CMS > Banners. 2. Click the Add New Banner button to create your banner to translate. 3. From the Banner Properties page, select the Content tab in the left column. 4. In the Store View Specific Content box deselect the Use Default box next to the
language into which the banner will be translated.
5. In the drop-down box, use the insert tools to add your banner.
Polls
To translate polls: 1. From the Admin panel, select CMS > Polls. 2. Click the Add New Poll button to begin translating your poll. 3. In the Poll Information section, select your language in the Visible In field, to
assign this poll to the store view.
4. Complete the rest of your poll and click the Save Page button to save your
changes.
520
Magento Go User Guide
Index
# of Items v. Destination, 329 &Copy;, 113 .html suffix, 197 .ico, 87 Banner, 115 Gift Card, 16 New Page, 96 New Tax Rate, 375 New Template, 138 Node, 106 Subcategory, 180 Tags, 15, 131 Tier, 246 Tracking Number, 315 Add to Cart, from Wishlist, 136 Compare, 12, 121 Wishlist, 13, 125, 136 additional information, attribute, 275 Add-Ons, 41 address bar, browser, 87 Adjustment Fee, 323 Adjustment Refund, 323 Admin Login, 2, 19, 37 password, 27 panel, 37, 440 permissions, 54 search tools, 172 URL, 2 Admin UI, Advanced Configuration, 45 Administrator permissions, 54 Advanced Search, 13, 150, 153, 156, 167 speed, 153 Allow Countries Store Information, 46 Allow Dynamic Media URLs, 258 Gift Message, 244 HTML tags on Frontend, attribute, 289 Open Amount, gift card, 213 Allowed Currencies, 48
1 Column, 97, 114 2 Columns with Left Bar, 78, 97, 114 2 Column with Right Bar, 79, 80, 97, 114 3 Columns, 79, 97, 114 301 Redirect, 444 302 Redirect, 429, 444 3D Secure Credit Card Validation, 353 Configure, 469 404 Page Not Found page, 91 503 Service Unavailable, 91, 420, 421
A
“A” record, 30 Abandoned Carts Report, 392 About Us page, 90, 105 above the fold, 12, 440 accept orders, 46 accessibility, 85 account Admin locked, 54 customer register, 64 Magento, 3, 25 account dashboard, 25 action controls, 172, 174 action, price rule, 120 Actions list, 174 Actions, catalog price rule, 298 Actions, shopping cart price rule, 302 Active Domain, 31 Active From / To custom theme, product, 260 Add
Magento Go User Guide
521
Index
Alt tag, 103 Alt text, 85, 440 anchor category, 182, 184, 186 anchor text, 440 Apache, 32 API, 440 Append Complex Data, 408 Apply To attribute, 287 As Low as, Price View, 236 Associate to Website, customer account, 71 associated products configurable product, 224 grouped product, 221 attribute, 153, 156, 167, 223, 275, 440 create, 282 optimize, 415, 417 product, 22 quick reference, 278 value, 184 Attribute Code, 282, 285 Attribute Frontend Properties, 167 attribute group create, 228, 292 attribute properties, 185, 224, 282, 285 for layered navigation, 186 configurable product, 224 attribute set, 223, 275 configurable product, 227, 229 create, 290 groups, 292 authorization, 440 Authorize.Net, 354 configure, 482 average inventory cost, 440 Banner Rotator, 119 Base Image, 250 placeholder, 251 Batch processing, 441 Bestsellers Dashboard, 43 Report, 393 billing information, checkout, 17 Block after Info Column, 260 block, content, 89 blog, 5 Bounce rate, 441 Braintree, 354 configure, 485 brand, 441 advocates, 125 branding, 30, 89 breadcrumb, 441 breadcrumb trail, 177, 178 configure, 178 brick and mortar, 441 broken link, 441 Bundle product 203 create, 235 Items, 237
C
canonical URL, 441 capture, 441 Card Gate Plus, 355 configure, 487 cardholder, 441 data, protection of 480 Card-Specific Attributes, 513 carriers, 23 Cash on Delivery configure, 344 Cash on Delivery Payment, 341 catalog catalog structure, 179, 199 catalog, category structure, 180 translating, 518 catalog images resize, 254 Catalog Input Type for Store Owner, 224, 282, 286 Catalog menu, 38 Catalog New Product List, 119 catalog price rules 120, 293, 294 conditions, 296 create, 294
B
B2B, 440 B2C, 440 back office, 37, 172 backorders, 319, 265 backup, content, 96 Balance, gift card, 216 Bank Transfer, 341 Bank Transfer Payment configure, 342 banner, 79. 96, 114, 440 create, 115 type, 114, 116 translating, 520
522
Magento Go User Guide
Index
catalog search, 149 use of dynamic media URLs, 258 Catalog Search Settings, 152 categories, 441 categories, create, 180 Categories, Product Information, 267 category, 156 assign product to, 208 configuration, 196 delete, 183 depth, 196 image, 177 move, 183 navigation, 156, 177 page, 11 products, 194, 267 structure, 267 URL, 177, 197 URL Suffix, 198 category design date range, 192 Category Display Settings, 182 Category View Optimization, 195 catelog price rule actions. CCAvenue, 356 Configure, 474 Change Theme, 82 Chapter/Section, 108 Character Format, editor buttons, 447 Check / Money Order 341 configure, 346 Checkbox, input type, 238 checkout 9, 17 configure, 222 cross-sell, 270 shipping methods, 326 terms and conditions, 312 Checkout Options, 64 Checkout process, 441 PayPal Access, 68 checkout, faster, 63 Choose Plan, 28 Choose Store View, 60 CMS, 89, 442 Block, category, 190 content, translating, 519 Home page, 100 menu, 40 page, 105 Page Hierarchy, 110 pages, 106 Static Block create, 111 Code Pool, gift card, 215 Coding Tools, editor buttons, 452 Color, 244 editor buttons, 448 column header, sort by, 173 column layout, 12, 80 change, 121, 123 Combined gift card, 212, 214 Comma Separated Value file, 407 community, 125 Comodo, security certificate, 32 Comparable on Front-end, attribute, 288 Compare Products, 121 Enable Feature, 123 Report, 122 show block, 121 Complex products, 201 Conditions and Actions, 293 Conditions, catalog price rule, 120, 296 shopping cart price rule, 301 Configurable product 203 create, 223 import, 409, 410 inventory settings, 233 Configuration Super Product Attributes, 233 Web, 113 configuration utilities, 41 Contact Information, 20, 26 Contact Us 52 configure, 53 content, 11, 89 area, 78 area, banner in, 116 create new page, 96 editing, 92 user-generated, 126 content blocks, create, 111 Content Heading, 94, 98 Content Management, 110 content management system, 89 content page breadcrumb trail, 178 manage, 105 organize, 105 parent/child, 105 conversion, 8
Magento Go User Guide
523
Index
conversion rate, 441 Copy from Configurable, 229, 231 copyright notice, 113 country, 46 country codes, 467 coupon code 16 apply, 321 Coupons Report, 391 Create an Account PayPal Access, 67 Create Empty, 229, 231 Create Permanent Redirect for old URL, 428 Create Product Settings, 201, 209 credit cards, 22 credit memo, 323, 442 create, 323 Cross-sell, 16, 270 CSS, 39, 101, 255, 442 CSS Editor, 21, 80, 84 CSS stylesheet, 94 CSV Files 145, 170, 407, 412, 413, 417, 442 Customer, 417 product, 415 currencies, 20 currency configure, 48 rates and symbols, 49 Current Configuration Scope, 61, 331 Current Theme, 83 Custom Design, 192 category, 192 Custom Email, 51 Custom Layout Update category, 193 product, 260 Custom Role, create, 56 Custom Theme, 193 category, 192 product, 259, 260 Custom Variable, 117, 139 Custom Variants and Options, 223, 271 with Simple product, 208 Customer Account Dashboard, 127 PayPal Access, 68 Wishlist, 136 Customer Account, 39, 63 create, 71 information, 63 customer activity, 38 Customer Address, 73 Customer Address Attributes, 516 customer engagement, 125 Customer Group 70 add new, 70 Tax Class, 380 Customer Reports, 396 Customers by Number of Orders, 396 Customers by Orders Total, 396 New Accounts, 396 Customer Reviews, 398 Customer Service, 17 Customer Service page, 90 Customer System Attributes, 514 Customer Tax Classes, 379 Add New, 379 Customers by Number of Orders, 397 Customers by Orders Total, 396 Customers Tags Report, 400 CVM, 442 CyberSource (SOAP Toolkit), 354 configure, 489 Test Account, 491
D
Dashboard, 19, 38, 169 configuration, 45 settings, 44 Search Terms, 171 Using, 42 Data Entry Properties, attribute, 278 Date, input type, 276 Decimal Number validation check, 287 Default attribute set, 290 Country, 46 Pages, 178 Home page, 100 robots, 424 store view, 62 Tax Destination Calculation, 371 Template, email, 138 Value, attribute, 286 Delete Category, 183 demo notice, 420 Description category, 188 Meta Data, 99 product, 256 Product Information, 256 Design, 21 Product Information, 259
524
Magento Go User Guide
Index
Design menu, 39 Design Settings Editor, 21, 84 DHL, 339 Configure, 463 DIBS Payment Services, 355 configure, 492 discount codes, 16 Display Demo Store Notice, 420 Display in Suggested Terms, 163 Display Mode category, 182, 190 Display Product Count layered navigation, 187 Display product options in, 260 Display Product Prices in Catalog, 372 Display Settings category, 182, 190 Display Shipping Prices, 372 DNS, 31, 432 documentation, 5 domain 442 configure, 31 name, 30 dot com, 30 double opt-in, 442 newsletter, 143 drop-down list, 223 Dropdown, input type, 185, 277, 238 Dynamic content, 119, 442 information, 89 Price, Bundle, 236 SKU, Bundle, 236 Weight, Bundle, 236 Dynamic Media URL, 103 product, 258 dynamic URL, 428 add new, 138 configure, 141 gift card notification, 214 Email validation check, 287 Emails Shipment, 318 embed video, 104 Enable Chapter/Section, 108 Cookies page, 91 Pagination, content page, 107 WYSIWYG, attribute, 289 encrypted channel, 17 Entity Attributes, 413 Entity Type, 412 Estimate Shipping and Tax, 16, 329 Flat Rate, 334 eWAY Direct, 356 configure. Test Account, 496 Excel, 170 Exclude, image, 250 Expiration Date, gift card, 216 Export 407, 413, 415 CSV, Table Rates, 331 newsletter subscribers, 145 search term report, 170 Express Checkout, PayPal, 357 extensions 34-36 eye-tracking, 10
F
FAQ, 442 favicon, 87, 442 FedEx, 339 Configure, 460 file conversion, 87 File/URL, 104 Filterable in layered navitatation, 186 filterable attributes, 185 filtered list, 184 filtered navigation, 13 First Data Global Gateway Web Service API 354 configure, 497 First Page After Login, 65 five stars, review, 126 Fixed Price, Bundle, 236 Price Type, 272
E
Edit Attribute Set, 290, 291 Editing Tools, editor buttons, 451 Editor, 101 toolbar, 101, 447 Email a Friend, 15, 125, 135 limits per hour, 135 email address store, 51 Email copy of invoice, 315 Email Options, 53 email template 137
Magento Go User Guide
525
Index
Product Tax, input type, 277 SKU, Bundle, 236 Weight, Bundle, 236 Fixed Product Taxes, 373, 374 Display Price Options, 374 Flat Rate, 328, 334 configure, 334 FOB, 442 footer, 16, 96, 150, 153, 154, 199, 430 links, 12, 112 Footer, banner in, 116 form search, 150 forum, community 4 Frame Skip, 108 Free Shipping, 328, 337 configure, 337 Frontend App, 96, 119 Frontend Properties, attribute, 275, 288 Frontend, Catalog Configuration, 157 fulfilling an order, 314, 443 Fullscreen button, editor 93 global marketplace, 20 Global Search, 172, 173 Glossary, 440 Go Anywhere Plan layered navigation, 185 Go Beyond Plan layered navigation, 185 GoDaddy, 31 security certificate, 32 Going Places Plan layered navigation, 185 Google Analytics, 169, 171, 436 API, 171 Checkout, 476247 configure, 436 create account, 436 Optimizer Scripts, 437 ranking, 126 Google Sitemap, 199, 431 Categories Options, 434 configure, 434 frequency, 431 Frequency, 434 generate, 431 Generation Settings, 435 Priority, 434 submit, 432 Google Webmaster Tools, 432 Google Website Optimizer, 195, 273, 437 configure, 437 grid format, search results, 156 Gross margin, 443 Grouped product, 203, 220 create, 220 guest checkout, 63, 64 subscription, newsletter, 143
G
Gateway, 443 General Attributes, 510 Contact, 51 Customer Attributes, 515 customer group, 70 Information, Category, 188 Product Information, 242 Generation Settings, Google Sitemap, 435 Get a Quote, 326 Get Going Plan layered navigation, 185 Gift Card 323 Accounts, 215 Balance, 216 Create, 212 Email Settings, 218 expiration date, 216 Gift Message, 214 History, 217 Information, 214 message length, 219 Pool, 215 Prices, 213 product, 202 Type, 214
H
header, 16, 78, 150, 178 banner in, 116 logo, 84 heading levels, content, 94 height, image, 255 hidden category, 189 Hierarchy Menu, 110 default layout, 110 hierarchy tree, page, 106 Hits, search term, 170 Home page, 8, 90, 443
526
Magento Go User Guide
Index
changing default page, 100 house list, 63 HTML, 78, 92, 94, 98, 101, 257, 443 HTML Head, 87, 430 Render Metadata, 108 HTML link, content, 103 https, 17, 32 Inventory, 207 settings, configurable product, 233 Inventory, Product Information, 261 invoice, 311, 443 Invoiced Report, 390 Invoicing, 314 IP address, 30 poll voting from, 134 Is Active category, 189 Is Anchor, 182, 184, 186, 190
I
image Alt text, 85 Attributes, 512 category, 188 size, product, 254 thumbnail, 14 images import, product, 411 Product Information, 249 Images and Media, editor buttons, 449 Import 407 Behavior, 408 Configurable product, 410 currency rates, 49 duplicate products, 415 product images, 411 Settings, 408 Importing Configurable Products, 409 Importing Data, 408 In feed, 244 In Stock, 210 Include in Advanced Search, 153 Navigation Menu, 189 Information Security Policy, 480 input controls, 22 attribute, 275 Input Type attribute, 276 Bundle Items, 238 Custom Variants and Options, 271 layered navigation, 185 Input Validation for Store Owner, 287 Insert Frontend Apps, 119 Insert Image, 102 content page, 99, 102 Insert Media, 104 Insert Variable, email, 140 Integer Number validation check, 287 internal links, in content, 101
J
JavaScript, 39, 443
K
keyword, 11, 442 keywords, 131 Meta Data, 99 Knowledge Base, 4 Kount Fraud Detection, 353 Configure, 472
L
Label and Values, attribute, 283 Labels and Options, attribute, 281 landing page, 126, 179, 199, 443 category, 182 search results, 161 language, 12, 46 changing, 61 configure, 47 in email, 138 Language Preference, 20 languages, 20, 59 launch store, 23 layered navigation, 11, 156, 177, 184, 190 attribute, 184, 275 configure, 187 filters, 185 Price Navigation Step, 187 Layers, editor buttons, 450 layout, 78 Left Column, banner in, 116 Letters validation check, 287 Lifetime, gift card, 214 link create, 101
Magento Go User Guide
527
Index
juice, 428, 443 online image, 102 URL, 101 Links and Anchors, editor buttons, 449 List Controls, 172, 173 Filters, 172, 173, 174 format, search results, 156 Mode, 158 Style, content menu, 109 Lists, editor buttons, 449 Locale, 443 changing, 517 Options, 47 locked account, 54 log in, 2, 443 Magento account, 25, 27 login credentials, 3, 19, 54 Login Options customer, 65 Login or Create an Account PayPal Access, 67 logo, 80 email, 86 files, 84 image size, 84 Image Alt, 85 page layout, 80 Low Stock Report, 264, 393, 395 Manufacturer, 244 markdown, 443 marketplace Magento Connect, 41 markup, 443 Maximal Depth, top navigation, 196 Maximum Qty Allowed in Shopping Cart, 261 Media button, 104 media file, 104 Media Storage, 98, 102, 116, 258 Menu Detalization, 109 Menu Layout, content, 109 Merchant Account, 443 merchant credibility, 66 Meta Data, 99, 110 Meta Description category, 181, 189 product, 248 Meta Information Attributes, 512 Product Information, 248 Meta Keywords category, 188 product, 248 Meta Tags, 444 Meta Title product, 248 Mini Shopping Cart, 15 Minimum Qty Allowed in Shopping Cart, 261 Miscellaneous HTML, 430 misspelled words, search term, 13, 161 moderate reviews, 128 Modern Theme, 80 Most Viewed Products, Dashboard, 43 Report, 393, 394 multiple copies, content, 96 multiple invoices, 314 Multiple Select, input type, 185, 238, 277 multiple stores products in, 266 My Customizations, 82 Go Extensions, 35 Orders, 15 Products and Services, 32, 35
M
Magento account, 25 Connect, 34 password, 27 Trusted Extensions badge, 35 Magento Go plan anchor categories, 185 Maintenance Mode, 91, 419, 420 Manage Attribute Sets, 290 Attributes, 168, 186, 275 Categories, 123, 180 Content, 92 Label / Options, 225, 281 Page Hierarchy, 105 Ratings, 129 Stock, 210, 261, 262 Stores, 59, 62 Tax Zones & Rates, 375
N
Name category, 188
528
Magento Go User Guide
Index
product, 242 navigation, 11, 131, 444, 177 column layout, 78 filtered, 13 Menu, 107, 108 nested pages, 108 New Accounts Report, 396 newsletter configuration, 142 confirmation, 143 menu, 40 subscribe, 12 Newsletters, 142 Next/Previous content page, 108 Nickname, of reviewer, 126 Node node, add, 105 Properties, 107 Not Logged In, customer group, 70 Number of Uses, Search Term, 163, 166 Numbers (0-9) validation check, 287 Orders, Invoices, Credit Memos Display Settings, 372 out of stock threshold, 263
P
packing slip, 444 padlock symbol, 17 Page Controls Search Results list, 156, 157 Page Hierarchy, 96, 105 configuration, 110 Page Information, 93 Add New Page, 97 page layout, 78, 97 banners, 114 category, 123, 193 product, 259, 260 Page Title category, 188 pages, content, 89 pagination, 105, 108 links, search results, 157 Paragraph Format, editor buttons, 448 Parent Category, 192 Parent Product Thumbnail, 222, 232 parent/child, content pages, 105 partial refunds, 323 password 25, 66 change, 27 Password Management customer account, 72 path to purchase, 8 Paybox Direct, 355 Configure, 478 Payflow Pro Gateway, PayPal, 359 Payment Bridge Styling, 353 payment gateway, 353, 444, 481 payment information, checkout, 17 Payment Methods, 341 payment received, 310 Payment Services, 353, 468, 473 Payments, 22 Payone.de, 355 configure, 503 PayPal, 22, 354, 357 account, 66 Getting Started, 360 Sandbox Account, 361-363 PayPal Access, 65, 66 PayPal Express Checkout Setting Up, 365
O
Ogone DirectLink, 355 configure, 500 one-to-many relationships, 203 Open Amount Value, gift card, 213 Open Link, Same Window, 113 optimize attributes import / export, 417 opt-in, 444 order cancel, 318 “Complete”, 311 Create new, 317 edit, 318 invoiced, 311 "On Hold", 319 “Processing", 311 process, 310 review, 9, 17 shipped, 311 submitted, 310 Orders Creating, 317 Dashboard, 43 New, 317 Report, 390 Sales, 314
Magento Go User Guide
529
Index
PayPal Settlement Report, 391 PCI, 444 PCI Compliance, 22, 32 Guidelines, 480 Pending Review Status, 127 Percentage Price Type, 272 Permissions, 54 Physical gift card, 212, 214 place order, 9, 309 placeholders, product image, 250 plan, 21, 32, 59 upgrade, 28 PO, 444 Poll Answers, 133 configure, 134 Manager, 133 Question, 133 translating, 520 Polls, 125, 132 multiple, 132 Popular Search Terms, 150, 154 Report, 402 Tags, 12 Position, attribute, 289 Pre-loaded Attributes, 513 Presentation Properties, attribute, 280 Press Releases page, 105 Preview content page, 94 Price attributes, 511 input type, 185, 277 Range, Price View, 236 Rule Banners, 120, 305 Rules, 39, 275, 293 Step, layered navigation, category, 191 Type, Custom Variants and Options, 272 View, Bundle, 236, 239 Price v. Destination, 329 Prices, Product Information, 245 Privacy Policy, 16, 96, 112, 444 Proceed to Checkout, 16, 17 product additional information, 14 attributes, 167 assign to category, 267 catalog, 38 category, 180 compare, attribute, 275 Detail page, 8, 14, 178 description, 14 list, 8, 12, 156 category, 182 properties, 185 reviews, 125, 126, 399 troubleshooting, 240 types, 201 URL, change, 428 URL Suffix, 198 variations, 223 product image placeholders, 250, 251 watermarks, 252 Product in Website, 207 Product Info Column, 260 Product Information, 241 Product Listing Sort By, 158 Product Relationships, 268 Product Reports, 393 Bestsellers, 393 Low Stock, 393 Most Viewed, 393 Products Ordered, 393 Product System Attributes, 510 Product Tax Classes, 377 Add New, 377 Product Thumbnail Itself, 222, 232 Product Type Properties, attribute, 278 Product View Optimization, 273 Products 22 translating, 519 in Cart Report, 392 Ordered Report, 393, 394 per Page, 158 Tags Report, 401 promotion, 11, 294 Promotions menu, 39 PSi Gate, 354 configure, 505 Published, status, 100 purchase order, 341, 444 configure, 348
Q
Qty Increments, 265 Quantity Below, 264 Quantity Increments, 262 Query Length, Search, 152
530
Magento Go User Guide
Index
query text, 156 Quick Access Links, 12 Search, 150, 151, 156, 167 Simple Product Creation, 229, 230 approve, 127 moderate, 128 Reviews Reports, 398 Customer Reviews, 398 Product Reviews, 398 Right Column, banner in, 116 robot, 423 Robots.txt, 199, 423, 444 sample file, 426 role, Admin access, 54 root category, 62, 179 RSS Feed, 244, 445 Rules and Comparison Properties, attribute, 279 Rules, editor buttons, 449
R
Radio Button, input type, 238 ranking, Google, 126 improve, 154 rating system create, 129 review, 126 Recently Viewed Products, 15, 119 Redeemable, gift card, 214 Redirect, 444 URL, Search Term, 166 Refresh, 83, 430 Index, 175, 412, 415 Statistics, 404 Search Index, 175 Refund Offline, 323 Shipping, 323 to Store Credit, 323 refunds, 322, 323 Refunds Report, 391 registered customers, 63 registrars, domain, 30 registration streamlined, 66 Related Banners, 293 Products, 14, 268 Promotions, banner, 120 Relative Link, 444 Remove, image, 250 Replace Existing Complex Data, 408 Reports, 389 menu, 40 Reset Filter, 194 resizing images, 254 resolution, logo, 84 Results Count, Search Suggestions, 152 Results, Search Term, 163, 170 Retail Tax Calculations, 375 Retailer, customer group, 70 Return Policy, 444 review order, 9 reviews
S
SaaS, 445 Sage Pay Direct, 355 configure, 507 sales charts, 43 email, configure 141 order 314 pending, 310 process, 10 representative, 51 Sales Report Filters, 391 Sales Reports, 390 Coupons, 390 Invoiced, 390 Orders, 390 PayPal Settlement, 390 Refunds, 390 Shipping, 390 Tax, 390 sample data, 90 sample pages, 89 Sandbox Account, PayPal setting up, 361 scope, 60, 266 attribute, 285 search, 13, 149 methods, 150 misspellings, 13 parameters, attribute, 275 Recommendations, 152 Suggestions, Enable, 152 query, 156, 163 suggestions, 13 synonyms, 13
Magento Go User Guide
531
Index
Search and Navigation Properties, attribute, 279 search box configuration, 151 search engine, 85, 89, 99, 131, 197, 423 ranking, 154, 428 results page, 423 robots, 424 Search Engine Optimizations, 155, 198 Search Index, Refresh, 175 Search Indexing, 172, 198 Search Results list, 13, 149, 156 Search Term Add New, 164 close match, 151 delete, 162 edit, 162 frequency, 151 Information, 159 suggestions, 151 Report, 159, 169 Search Terms, 13, 159 configure, 155 managing, 160 Related, 165 Report, 403 Top, 171 search tools, back office, 172 Search Weight, 167, 168 attribute, 288 seasonal promotion, 11 secure checkout, 32 security certificate 445 custom, 32 shared, 32 Select Range Dashboard, 42 select record, 174 self-serve, 63 SEO, 423, 445 SERP, 423 Set Input Validation for Store Owner, 283 Set Product as New from/to Date, 244 Settlement, 445 Share Wishlist, 136 Ship Bundle Items, 237, 239 ship order, 311 Shipment Email, 318 shipments, 316 Shipping, 23 & Handling Charges, 326 Carrier, 339, 445, 453 information, checkout, 17 Methods, 325 Table Rates, 333 Shipping Rates, 325, 328 Report, 390 Setting configure, 327 settings, 325 Shipping Settings, Origin, 327 Shop By, 156, 184 Shopping Cart 9, 16, 445 add products, 321 add Wishlist items, 321 previously orders items, 322 product thumbnail, 222 quantity, 263 update, 320 page, 270 thumbnail images, 232 Shopping Cart Price Rules, 120, 293, 299 create, 299 Shopping Cart Reports, 392 Abandoned Carts, 392 Products in Cart, 392 shopping experience, 14 Short Description product, 256 Show / Hide Editor, 98 Show per Page, 158 search results, 157 Show/Hide Editor, 92 Simple product, 201, 202 Create, 204 Sitemap, 199, 445 configure, 200 SKU, 242, 445 Bundle, 239 Custom Variants and Options, 272 Small Image, 250 placeholder, 251 Sort By category, 190 search results, 157 Special Characters, editor buttons, 448 Price, 13, 246 splash page, 420, 445 SSL, 32 Certificate, 32, 445 standalone products, 202
532
Magento Go User Guide
Index
star rating, 126 Start My Store, 19 start-up page, Admin Panel, 44 static block 446 category, 182 create, 111 translating, 520 Static Content, 445 Status product, 243 Published, 100 Stock Availability, 210, 265 Stop Further Rules Processing, 298 Store email addresses, 51 credit, 323 Information, 46 configure, 50 Name, 30, 50 URL, 2, 30 View 59, 266 Dashboard, 42 stores, multiple, 60 Styles and Fonts, editor buttons, 447 subcategories, 179 Submit Invoice, 317 subscribe, newsletter, 12 subscribers, managing, 145 subscription list, 142 newsletter, configuration, 142 suggestions, search, 13, 160 Super Attribute, 409, 410 Super Products Attributes, 233 support site, 5 supported carriers, 325 symbols currency, 49 synonyms, 13 search term, 161 System Attributes, 291 System menu, 41 Export and Import, 331 Tables, editor buttons, 450 tag approve, 131 cloud, 150, 154 Tag Reports, 400 Customers, 400 Popular, 400 Products, 400 Tags, 12, 125, 131 Task Notifications, 419, 421 Recipients, 421 Tax configure, 369 Calculation Method Based On, 370 settings, 369 Tax Class 369 customer group, 380 product, 243, 387 Tax Classes for Shipping, 369 Tax Rate, 375 Add New, 375 Information, 376 Tax Report, 390 Tax Rules, 20, 386 set up, 381 template configure sales email 141 newsletter confirmation, 143 Terms and Conditions, 17, 312 create, 312 Text Area, input type, 276 Text Field, input type, 276 theme, 12, 21, 94, 446 banners, 114 choosing, 81 Theme Customization, 84 Theme Editor, 84 themes, 39, 77 Themes Editor, 77, 81, 254 third-party tools and services, 34 Script, 430 three-column format content, 95 Thumbnail, 250 placeholder, 251 gallery, 14 images, configurable product, 232 images, rouped product, 222 Tier Pricing, 245
T
Table Rate configure, 329 data, 331 Shipping, 329 Table Rates, 328 example, 332
Magento Go User Guide
533
Index
time zone, 46 toll-free number, 16 toolbar buttons Editor, 92 “Top 5” Reports, 169 top navigation, 80, 179 depth of, 196 include in, 189 Top Search Terms, 171 tracking scripts, 195 Transactional Email, 138, 137, 446 logo, 86 Translating Your Store, 517 tree, page hierarchy, 105 trust badge, 16 Trusted Extensions, 35, 41 trusted partners, 22 Use Complex Product Types, 209, 212, 220, 229, 235 for Promo Rule Conditions, attribute, 289 in Advanced Search, 167, 168, 288 in Layered Navigation, 186, 288 in Quick Search, 167, 168, 288 in Search Results Layered Navigation, 186, 289 Parent Category Settings, 193 to Create Configurable Product, 224, 287 Used for Sorting in Product Listing, 289 Used in Product Listing, 289 User Name, 25, 37 User-agent, 423 user-generated content, 126 USPS, 339 Configure, 457
U
Unassigned Attributes, 227, 292 "Under Construction" message, 23 remove, 419 Under Version Control, 96 Unique Value attribute, 286 unlock Admin, 58 unsubscribe, request to, 145 Upload Files Media Storage, 98 product image, 249 UPS, 339, 454 Configure, 454 Up-sells, 15, 269 URL, 446 Canonical. S change product, 428 dynamic, 428 insert link, 112 redirection, 429 rewrites, 427-428 suffix, 197 validation check, 287 secure session, 32 store, 30 URL Key, 427 category, 189 content page, 105 node, 106, 107 product, 243 Usability, 446
V
validation check, data entry, 287 Value Added Tax, 383 Product Tax Classes, 384 Values Required attribute, 286 variable custom, 117 in banner, 117 in block, 118 in email template, 137, 139 Variables and Apps, editor buttons, 451 VAT, 383 Tax Zones and Rates, 385 Reduced, 384 Standard, 384 Zero, 384 VeriSign, security certificate, 32 version control, 96 video, 104 tutorials, 4 view, 266 View As, search results, 157 views, multiple store, 60 Virtual Gift Card, 212, 214 Virtual product, 202 Create, 209 Visibility product, 167, 244 Visible on Product View Page on Front-end, 289 visual presentation, 89 voice, 89 Votes Count, Poll, 133
534
Magento Go User Guide
Index
Word Count, Search, 152 work week, configure, 47 Workspace Preferences, editor buttons, 452 www, 30 WYSIWYG Editor, 101, 256, 258, 446 Using, 257
W
Watermark 252 Opacity, 252 Position, 252 webinar, 5 Webservicex, 49 website, 266 Website Payment Standard, PayPal, 358 Website Payments Pro (Permissions), PayPal, 357 Website Payments Pro Payflow Edition, PayPal, 358 Websites, Product Information, 266 Weight, 242 Bundle, 239 Weight v. Destination, 329 Weighted Search, 168 Welcome email, 2, 19, 37 width, image, 255 Wishlist, 15, 136 items, add to shopping cart, 321
X
XML, 145, 170, 193, 446,
Y
Yes/No, input type, 276 YouTube video, 104
Z
Zero Subtotal Checkout, 341 configure, 350 zoom, product image, 14
Magento Go User Guide
535
Note: This document is subject to change without notice. We recommend that, rather than print this document, that you visit the Magento Go support site to download the latest version.
Ver: 1.2.0
Error! No text of specified style in document. Error! No text of specified style in document.Error! No text of specifi
Important Notice
Magento reserves the right to make corrections, modifications, enhancements, improvements, and other changes to its products and services at any time and to discontinue any product or service without notice. Customers should obtain the latest relevant information before placing orders and should verify that such information is current and complete. All products are sold subject to Magento's terms and conditions of sale supplied at the time of order acknowledgment. Magento warrants performance of its products to the specifications applicable at the time of sale in accordance with Magento's standard warranty. Testing and other quality control techniques are used to the extent Magento deems necessary to support this warranty. Except where mandated by government requirements, testing of all parameters of each product is not necessarily performed. Magento assumes no liability for applications assistance or customer product design. Customers are responsible for their products and applications using Magento components. To minimize the risks associated with customer products and applications, customers should provide adequate design and operating safeguards. Magento does not warrant or represent that any license, either express or implied, is granted under any Magento patent right, copyright, mask work right, or other Magento intellectual property rights relating to any combination, machine, or process in which Magento products or services are used. Information published by Magento regarding third-party products or services does not constitute a license from Magento to use such products or services or a warranty or endorsement thereof. Use of such information may require a license from a third party under the patents or other intellectual property of the third party, or a license from Magento under the patents or other intellectual property of Magento. Resale of Magento products or services with statements different from or beyond the parameters stated by Magento for that product or service voids all express and any implied warranties for the associated Magento product or service and is an unfair and deceptive business practice. Magento is not responsible or liable for any such statements. All company and brand products and service names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders. Magento™ is a trademark of Magento Copyright © 2012 Magento A division of X.commerce, Inc., an eBay Company
Contents
Part I: Getting Started CHAPTER 1: Magento Go Will Take You Places! 1
Your Login Credentials ........................................................................................... 2 For Your Records ............................................................................................ 3 Where to Find Help .................................................................................................. 4
CHAPTER 2:
A Quick Tour
7
The Path to Purchase.............................................................................................. 8 Home Page ............................................................................................................. 10 Category Page ....................................................................................................... 11 Search Results Page ............................................................................................. 13 Product Detail Page .............................................................................................. 14 Shopping Cart Page .............................................................................................. 16 Checkout Page ...................................................................................................... 17
CHAPTER 3:
Quick Start Guide
19
Start My Store ........................................................................................................ 19
CHAPTER 4:
Your Magento Account
25
Updating Your Contact Information .................................................................... 26 Changing Your Password .................................................................................... 27 Upgrading Your Plan............................................................................................. 28 Setting Up a Custom Domain ............................................................................... 30 Adding a Custom SSL Certificate ........................................................................ 32 Using Magento Connect ....................................................................................... 34
Magento Go User Guide
v
Contents
CHAPTER 5:
Your Back Office
37
Admin Panel ........................................................................................................... 38 Using the Dashboard ............................................................................................ 42 Sales Charts .................................................................................................. 43 Summary Reports .......................................................................................... 43 Dashboard Settings ....................................................................................... 44 Updating Your Store Information ........................................................................ 46 Countries Options .......................................................................................... 46 Locale Options ............................................................................................... 47 Currency Setup .............................................................................................. 48 Store Contact Information ............................................................................. 50 Store Email Addresses .................................................................................. 51 Configuring the Contact Us Form ....................................................................... 52 Managing Permissions ......................................................................................... 54 Creating an Admin User ................................................................................ 54 Creating a Custom Role ................................................................................ 56 Unlocking User Accounts .............................................................................. 58 Multiple Store Views ............................................................................................. 59 Understanding Store Scope .......................................................................... 60 Changing the Store Language ............................................................................. 61 Changing the Default Store View .................................................................. 62
CHAPTER 6:
Customer Accounts
63
Customer Accounts .............................................................................................. 64 Customer Login Options ...................................................................................... 65 PayPal Access ............................................................................................... 66 Setting Up PayPal Access ............................................................................. 69 Setting Up Customer Groups ............................................................................... 70 Creating a Customer Account ............................................................................. 71 Adding a Customer Address ......................................................................... 73
Part II: Design & Content CHAPTER 7: Themes and Page Layout 77
Understanding Page Layout ................................................................................ 78 Home Page Layout ........................................................................................ 80
vi
Magento Go User Guide
Contents Choosing a Theme ................................................................................................ 81 Changing the Current Theme ........................................................................ 83 Adding Your Logos ............................................................................................... 84 Header Logo .................................................................................................. 84 Email Logo ..................................................................................................... 86 Favicon .......................................................................................................... 87
CHAPTER 8:
Creating Content
89
Sample Content Pages ......................................................................................... 90 Editing a Content Page ......................................................................................... 92 Creating a New Page ............................................................................................. 96 Changing the Home Page ........................................................................... 100 Using the Editor ................................................................................................... 101 Inserting Links ............................................................................................. 101 Inserting Images .......................................................................................... 102 Embedding Video ........................................................................................ 104 Organizing Your Pages ....................................................................................... 105 Adding Nodes .............................................................................................. 105 Page Hierarchy Configuration ..................................................................... 110 Creating Blocks of Content ................................................................................ 111 Changing the Footer ........................................................................................... 112 Changing the Copyright Notice ................................................................... 113 Creating Banners ................................................................................................ 114 Inserting Variables ....................................................................................... 117 Using Custom Variables .............................................................................. 117 Inserting a Frontend App ............................................................................. 119 Adding Related Promotions ......................................................................... 120 Changing the Column Layout ............................................................................ 121 Compare Products ....................................................................................... 121 Troubleshooting ........................................................................................... 121
CHAPTER 9:
Creating Brand Advocates
125
Product Reviews ................................................................................................. 126 Moderating Reviews .................................................................................... 128 Managing Ratings ........................................................................................ 129 Tags ...................................................................................................................... 131 Polls ...................................................................................................................... 132
Magento Go User Guide
vii
Contents Configuring the Poll ..................................................................................... 134 Email a Friend ...................................................................................................... 135 Add to Wishlist .................................................................................................... 136
CHAPTER 10: Managing Email & Newsletters
137
Adding a New Email Template ........................................................................... 138 Using Custom Variables in Email ...................................................................... 139 Configuring Email Templates ............................................................................ 139 Newsletters .......................................................................................................... 142 Subscription Options ................................................................................... 142 Preview the Newsletter Confirmation Template .......................................... 143 Managing Your List of Subscribers ............................................................. 145 Managing Requests to Unsubscribe ........................................................... 145
Part III: Building Your Catalog CHAPTER 11: Mastering Search 149
Storefront Search Tools ..................................................................................... 150 Quick Search ............................................................................................... 151 Advanced Search ........................................................................................ 153 Popular Search Terms ........................................................................................ 154 Using the Search Results List ........................................................................... 156 Page Controls .............................................................................................. 157 Search Terms ....................................................................................................... 159 Managing Search Terms ............................................................................. 160 Using the Search Terms List ....................................................................... 162 Adding a Search Term................................................................................. 164 Using Product Attributes in Search .................................................................. 167 Weighted Search ......................................................................................... 168 Reporting and Analysis ...................................................................................... 169 Search Term Report .................................................................................... 169 Top Search Terms ....................................................................................... 171 Google Analytics .......................................................................................... 171 Back Office Search Tools ................................................................................... 172 Global Search .............................................................................................. 173 List Filters and Controls ............................................................................... 173 Refreshing the Search Index ....................................................................... 175
viii
Magento Go User Guide
Contents
CHAPTER 12: Navigation by Category
177
Breadcrumb Trail................................................................................................. 178 Breadcrumb Trails on Content Pages ......................................................... 178 Top Navigation .................................................................................................... 179 Creating Categories ............................................................................................ 180 Moving Categories ....................................................................................... 183 Layered Navigation ............................................................................................. 184 Anchor Categories ....................................................................................... 184 Layered Navigation Settings ....................................................................... 187 General Information ............................................................................................ 188 Display Settings .................................................................................................. 190 Custom Design .................................................................................................... 192 Category Products .............................................................................................. 194 Category View Optimization ............................................................................... 195 Category Configuration ...................................................................................... 196 Category Depth ........................................................................................... 196 Category URL Options ................................................................................ 197 Sitemap ................................................................................................................ 199
CHAPTER 13: Understanding Product Types
201
“Standalone” Products ....................................................................................... 202 “One-to-Many” Product Relationships ............................................................. 203 Creating a Simple Product ................................................................................. 204 Points to Remember .................................................................................... 208 Creating a Virtual Product .................................................................................. 209 Points to Remember .................................................................................... 211 Creating a Gift Card ............................................................................................ 212 Managing Gift Card Accounts ..................................................................... 215 Configuration Settings ................................................................................. 218 Points to Remember .................................................................................... 219 Creating a Grouped Product .............................................................................. 220 Configuring Thumbnail Images ................................................................... 222 Points to Remember .................................................................................... 222 Creating a Configurable Product ....................................................................... 223 Overview of the Process.............................................................................. 223
Magento Go User Guide
ix
Contents Configuring Thumbnail Images ................................................................... 232 Overriding Default Prices............................................................................. 233 Additional Inventory Settings ....................................................................... 233 Points to Remember .................................................................................... 234 Creating a Bundle Product ................................................................................. 235 Points to Remember .................................................................................... 240 Troubleshooting Tips.......................................................................................... 240
CHAPTER 14: Product Information
241
General ................................................................................................................. 242 Prices .................................................................................................................... 245 Tier Pricing .................................................................................................. 245 Special Pricing ............................................................................................. 246 Meta Information ................................................................................................. 248 Images .................................................................................................................. 249 Product Image Placeholders ....................................................................... 250 Product Image Watermarks ......................................................................... 252 Resizing Catalog Images............................................................................. 254 Description ........................................................................................................... 256 Using the WYSIWYG Editor ........................................................................ 257 Design .................................................................................................................. 259 Inventory .............................................................................................................. 261 Websites ............................................................................................................... 266 Categories ............................................................................................................ 267 Product Relationships ........................................................................................ 268 Related Products ......................................................................................... 268 Up-sells ........................................................................................................ 269 Cross-sells ................................................................................................... 270 Custom Variants and Options ............................................................................ 271 Product View Optimization ................................................................................. 273
CHAPTER 15: Managing Attributes
275
Attribute Input Types .......................................................................................... 276 Attribute Quick Reference .................................................................................. 278 Managing Labels and Options ........................................................................... 281
x
Magento Go User Guide
Contents Creating an Attribute........................................................................................... 282 Summary of Attribute Properties ....................................................................... 285 Creating an Attribute Set .................................................................................... 290 Creating a New Attribute Group .................................................................. 292
CHAPTER 16: Promotional Price Rules
293
Catalog Price Rules............................................................................................. 294 Conditions .................................................................................................... 296 Actions ......................................................................................................... 298 Shopping Cart Price Rules ................................................................................. 299 Rule Information .......................................................................................... 299 Conditions .................................................................................................... 301 Actions ......................................................................................................... 302 Price Rule Labels ........................................................................................ 304 Price Rule Banners ............................................................................................. 305
Part IV: Sales & Fulfillment CHAPTER 17: Processing Orders 309
Order Process Overview .................................................................................... 310 Terms and Conditions ........................................................................................ 312 Managing Sales Orders ...................................................................................... 314 Fulfilling and Completing Orders ................................................................. 314 Invoicing an Order ....................................................................................... 314 Shipping an Order ....................................................................................... 316 Creating New Orders ................................................................................... 317 Editing an Order .......................................................................................... 318 Canceling an Order ..................................................................................... 318 Putting an Order “On Hold” ......................................................................... 319 Handling Backorders ................................................................................... 319 Updating the Shopping Cart .............................................................................. 320 Applying a Coupon Code ............................................................................ 321 Adding Products to a Shopping Cart ........................................................... 321 Adding Wishlist Items .................................................................................. 321 Adding Comparison Items ........................................................................... 322 Adding Recently Viewed Items .................................................................... 322 Adding Previously Ordered Items ................................................................ 322 Managing Refunds and Store Credit ................................................................. 323
Magento Go User Guide
xi
Contents
CHAPTER 18: Shipping Methods
325
Shipping Methods During Checkout ................................................................. 326 Shipping Settings ................................................................................................ 327 Shipping Rates .................................................................................................... 328 Rates ........................................................................................................... 328 Table Rate Shipping .................................................................................... 329 Flat Rate ...................................................................................................... 334 Free Shipping ...................................................................................................... 337 Shipping Carriers ................................................................................................ 339
CHAPTER 19: Payment Methods
341
Bank Transfer Payment ...................................................................................... 342 Cash on Delivery ................................................................................................. 344 Check / Money Order .......................................................................................... 346 Purchase Order ................................................................................................... 348 Zero Subtotal Checkout ...................................................................................... 350
CHAPTER 20: Payment Services & Gateways
353
Payment Services................................................................................................ 353 Payment Gateways.............................................................................................. 353 Worldwide .................................................................................................... 354 North America.............................................................................................. 354 Europe ......................................................................................................... 355 Asia .............................................................................................................. 356 Oceania ....................................................................................................... 356 PayPal ................................................................................................................... 357 Express Checkout ....................................................................................... 357 Website Payments Pro ................................................................................ 357 Website Payment Standard ......................................................................... 358 Website Payments Pro Payflow Edition ...................................................... 358 Payflow Pro Gateway .................................................................................. 359 Getting Started With PayPal ........................................................................ 360 Setting Up a PayPal Sandbox Account ....................................................... 361 Setting Up PayPal Express Checkout ......................................................... 365
xii
Magento Go User Guide
Contents
CHAPTER 21: Tax Settings
369
Setting Up Taxes ................................................................................................. 369 Retail Tax Calculations ....................................................................................... 375 Value Added Tax (VAT) ....................................................................................... 383
CHAPTER 22: Reports
389
Sales Reports ...................................................................................................... 390 Shopping Cart Reports ....................................................................................... 392 Products in Cart ........................................................................................... 392 Abandoned Carts ......................................................................................... 392 Product Reports .................................................................................................. 393 Bestsellers Report ....................................................................................... 393 Products Ordered Report ............................................................................ 394 Most Viewed Report .................................................................................... 394 Low Stock Report ........................................................................................ 395 Customer Reports ............................................................................................... 396 New Accounts Report .................................................................................. 396 Customers by Orders Total ......................................................................... 396 Customers by Number of Orders ................................................................ 397 Reviews Reports ................................................................................................. 398 Customer Reviews ...................................................................................... 398 Product Reviews .......................................................................................... 399 Tag Reports ......................................................................................................... 400 Customers Tags Report .............................................................................. 400 Products Tags Report.................................................................................. 401 Popular Tags Report ................................................................................... 402 Search Terms Report .......................................................................................... 403 Refresh Statistics ................................................................................................ 404
Part V: Improving Operations CHAPTER 23: Importing and Exporting Data 407
Importing Data ..................................................................................................... 408 Importing Configurable Products ................................................................. 409 Importing Product Images ........................................................................... 411 Exporting Data ..................................................................................................... 413
Magento Go User Guide
xiii
Contents Working with Product CSV Files ....................................................................... 415 Common Issues........................................................................................... 416 Custom Attributes ........................................................................................ 416 Working With Customer CSV Files .................................................................... 417
CHAPTER 24: Site Maintenance
419
“Under Construction” Message ......................................................................... 419 Maintenance Mode .............................................................................................. 420 Task Notifications ............................................................................................... 421
CHAPTER 25: SEO Best Practices
423
Using a Robots.txt File ....................................................................................... 423 Generating the File ...................................................................................... 424 URL Keys ............................................................................................................. 427 URL Rewrites ....................................................................................................... 428 Protecting Your “Link Juice” ........................................................................ 428 URL Redirection 301 and 302 ..................................................................... 429 Using Third-Party Scripts ................................................................................... 430 Google Sitemap ................................................................................................... 431 Configuring Your Google Sitemap............................................................... 434 Google Analytics ................................................................................................. 436 Google Website Optimizer ................................................................................. 437
Appendices Appendix A: Appendix B: Appendix C: Glossary Editor Toolbar Buttons Shipping Carriers 440 447 453
UPS ....................................................................................................................... 454 USPS ..................................................................................................................... 457 FedEx .................................................................................................................... 460 DHL ....................................................................................................................... 463
xiv
Magento Go User Guide
Contents
Appendix D: Appendix E:
Country Codes Payment-Related Services
467 468
3D Secure Credit Card Validation ...................................................................... 469 Kount Fraud Detection........................................................................................ 472
Appendix F:
Payment Service Providers
473
CCAvenue ............................................................................................................ 474 Google Checkout ................................................................................................. 476 Paybox Direct ...................................................................................................... 478
Appendix G: Appendix H:
PCI Compliance Guidelines Payment Gateways
480 481
Authorize.Net ....................................................................................................... 482 Braintree ............................................................................................................... 485 Card Gate Plus ..................................................................................................... 487 CyberSource (SOAP Toolkit) ............................................................................. 489 DIBS Payment Services ...................................................................................... 492 eWAY Direct ......................................................................................................... 495 First Data Global Gateway Web Service API .................................................... 497 Ogone DirectLink ................................................................................................ 500 PAYONE.de .......................................................................................................... 503 PSi Gate ................................................................................................................ 505 Sage Pay Direct ................................................................................................... 507
Appendix I: Product System Attributes Appendix J: Customer System Attributes
510 514
Editing Customer Attributes .............................................................................. 514 General Customer Attributes ............................................................................. 515 Customer Address Attributes ............................................................................ 516
Magento Go User Guide
xv
Contents
Appendix K:
Translating Your Store
517
Changing the Locale ........................................................................................... 517 Catalog ........................................................................................................ 518 Products ...................................................................................................... 519 CMS Content ............................................................................................... 519 Static Blocks ................................................................................................ 520 Banners ....................................................................................................... 520 Polls ............................................................................................................. 520
Index
521
xvi
Magento Go User Guide
Part I: Getting Started
Chapter 1:
Your Login Credentials
CHAPTER 1:
Magento Go Will Take You Places!
Welcome to Magento Go, an online service that helps small business merchants like you build powerful stores to sell products and services, quickly and easily. With Magento Go there is no software to install, and no servers to manage. We handle the technology, so you can focus on running and growing your business. To get started, we recommend that you sign up for a free 30-day trial. If you’re in a hurry to get started, you can sign up right away for one of our monthly plans. Our plans are available without any setup or transaction fees, and include 24/7 customer support to help to you get going. Let’s begin!
Part I: Getting Started
1
Chapter 1: Magento Go Will Take You Places!
Your Login Credentials
Your Login Credentials
Welcome to the Magento community! You are now a member of the fastestgrowing and most dynamic community of eCommerce merchants and developers in the world! Before you go any further, let’s make sure you have all the information you need to access your Magento Go account and services.
Welcome Email The Welcome email and log in instructions you received contain important information about your account. Make sure to keep them in a safe place where they can be easily found.
Store URL The store URL takes you to the Home page of your store. It is based on the domain name you chose when you opened your account. If you installed the sample data, it may look something like this: mystore.gostorego.com
Admin URL The admin URL takes you to the login page to the “back office” Admin panel of your store. The address is the same as for your store, but it ends with /admin. mystore.gostorego.com/admin
2
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 1: Magento Go Will Take You Places!
Your Login Credentials
Your Magento Account Your Magento account provides access to information about your current products and services, account settings, billing history, and support resources. Simply visit the Magento Go site and click the Login link. http://go.magento.com
For Your Records
It’s a good idea to keep a record of your login credentials and the email address that are associated with your account. Write them down, and keep the information in a safe, but convenient place. Store URL: Admin URL: ________________________________________________ ________________________________________________
Admin Login
User Name: Password: ________________________________________________ ________________________________________________
Magento Account Login
User Name: Password: Email Address: ________________________________________________ ________________________________________________ ________________________________________________
Part I: Getting Started
3
Chapter 1: Magento Go Will Take You Places!
Where to Find Help
Where to Find Help
Magento provides a wide range of support resources to help you get up and running in a hurry. Please let us know how we can be of assistance!
Knowledge Base The Magento Go Knowledge Base is continually updated with the latest information. You’ll find a link to the Knowledge Base in the top navigation of the Magento Go site, and in the Admin panel of your store. Go there now!
Video Tutorials A picture is worth a thousand words! Check our support site for the latest Magento Go video tutorials. Go there now!
Community Forum Here’s a chance to meet other users, share tips, and ask questions. Be sure to join the Magento Go community, so you can learn, and also share your experience and knowledge with others. Go there now!
4
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 1: Magento Go Will Take You Places!
Where to Find Help
Support Site Have a question? Please let us know how we can help you succeed. To access our support site, click the Support link in the upper-right corner of the Admin panel. Go there now!
Blog Keep up with the latest product news, trends, and featured stores on the Magento Go blog. Go there now!
Webinars Sign up to attend a free webinar, taught by a Magento expert. Go there now!
Guides Learn everything you need to know about building your store by downloading the complete set of documentation from our website. Go there now!
Part I: Getting Started
5
Chapter 1: Magento Go Will Take You Places!
Where to Find Help
Notes:
_______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________
6
Magento Go User Guide
CHAPTER 2:
A Quick Tour
In this guide, you’ll find just about everything you need to build your store, manage your store, and expand your store. Build Your Store Manage Your Store Expand Your Store
There’s a lot to learn, and the best place to begin is right here. So, let’s take a look around your store!
The Home Page
Part I: Getting Started
7
Chapter 2: A Quick Tour
The Path to Purchase
The Path to Purchase
The ultimate purpose of your store is to sell products, and the path a visitor follows that leads to a sale is called the path to purchase. The term conversion refers to the process of transforming a visitor into a paying customer. Here are the main pages in your Magento Go store that shoppers visit along the way.
Home Your Home page is like the front display window of your store. It is the primary landing page of your site, and is designed to entice visitors to come inside for a closer look.
Product List This page lists items that the shopper wants to see. The selection can be based on category or attribute, such as price, size, color, and so on. Any item can be examined more closely, or placed directly into the shopping cart.
Product Detail The Product Detail page provides detailed information about a specific item. Shoppers can read reviews, add the product to their wishlists, compare it to other products, share the link with friends, and most importantly, place the item into their shopping carts.
8
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 2: A Quick Tour
The Path to Purchase
Shopping Cart The Shopping Cart lists each item by price and quantity selected, and calculates the subtotal. Shoppers can apply discount coupons and gift cards, and generate an estimate for shipping and tax charges.
Checkout During Checkout, the necessary billing, shipping, and payment information is gathered to complete the order. New customers can open an account or if they prefer, checkout as a guest. Regular customers can speed through checkout by logging in to their accounts.
Review and Place Order The final step in the checkout process is to review the order, including any additional charges, and approve the purchase. This visitor is now your customer!
Part I: Getting Started
9
Chapter 2: A Quick Tour
Home Page
Home Page
Did you know that most people spend only a few seconds on a page before they decide to stay or go somewhere else? That’s not long to make an impression! If you were to do an eye-tracking study of this page, you would discover that the eyes of most people gravitate toward the “Free Shipping” offer in the upper-left corner. Shoppers love free shipping, but there’s more to it than that. For most people, that general area on the page is the “sweet spot.” Studies show that people also love photographs, especially of other people. Whatever design you choose, everything on the page should move visitors along toward the next step in the sales process. The idea is to guide their attention, in a cohesive flow from one point of interest to the next.
Home Page
10
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 2: A Quick Tour
Category Page
Category Page
People who find your site through a search engine may land on a category page with a list of products, and miss your Home page entirely. All the more reason to make sure that category pages have interesting content! The categories that you create for your catalog become the navigation options that appear across the top of your site. They can also be found in the breadcrumb trail, and in the layered navigation that runs down the left column of some pages. In addition to the standard list of products, you can add images, video, and keyword-rich descriptions to category pages. You can even create special designs that are timed to appear for a promotion or season. The product description provides shoppers with enough information to merit a closer look. While those in a hurry—who know what they’re looking for—might just add the product to their shopping carts and go!
Product List by Category
Part I: Getting Started
11
Chapter 2: A Quick Tour
Category Page Here’s a different take on a category page that uses a two-column, rather than three-column layout. You can have fun experimenting with different column layouts, and even apply different layouts to different categories—all within the same theme. You might be surprised by what you discover! This page lists only the products in the category, without the added distraction of images or text. There is nothing wrong with this straight-forward approach. In fact, there is a distinct advantage to having products listed “above the fold,” because people don’t have to scroll down to see them. It’s good to remember that most people who arrive at a category page are often in a hurry, and might be looking for something specific.
Product List by Category
12
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 2: A Quick Tour
Search Results Page
Search Results Page
Did you know that people who use search are nearly twice as likely to make a purchase as those who rely on navigation alone? You might consider these shoppers to be “pre-qualified.” Your Magento Go store has a Quick Search box in the upper-right corner, and a link to Advanced Search in the footer. Magento Go keeps track of all the search terms shoppers submit through your site, so you can see exactly what they’re looking for. You can offer suggestions, and enter synonyms and common misspellings. Then, display a specific page when a search term is entered.
Search Results List
Part I: Getting Started
13
Chapter 2: A Quick Tour
Product Detail Page
Product Detail Page
The Product Detail page is where you make the pitch. The first thing that catches your eye is the product image with a high-resolution zoom, and a thumbnail gallery of additional images. In addition to the price and availability, there’s a tabbed section with the product description and addition information. Depending on the product, there may also be additional options to select or configure. In addition to the featured product, you can offer the shopper a hand-picked selection of related products, and suggest other products they might find interesting. As you learn more about your customers, you can target offers and personalize promotions. As you can see on the next page, the shopping experience becomes much more personalized for customers who shop while logged in to their accounts.
Product Detail
14
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 2: A Quick Tour
Product Detail Page
Part I: Getting Started
15
Chapter 2: A Quick Tour
Shopping Cart Page
Shopping Cart Page
The Shopping Cart is where the total cost of the order can be determined, based on estimated shipping and tax. This is also where coupon codes and gift cards can be applied toward the purchase price. The shopper can change the quantity of items in the cart, or delete items if necessary. The Shopping Cart is a great place to display your trust badges and seals. You should also include a link to your Privacy Policy in the footer. Many merchants put their toll-free number in the header, so it is always readily available. Just like standing in the checkout line, the Shopping Cart is an ideal opportunity to offer one last item. You can carefully select certain items to be offered whenever a specific item is in the Shopping Cart. It’s the classic cross-sell, “Would you like some fries with that?”
Shopping Cart
16
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 2: A Quick Tour
Checkout Page
Checkout Page
As soon as the customer clicks the “Proceed to Checkout” button, the transaction shifts to a secure, encrypted channel. A padlock symbol appears in the address bar of the browser, and the URL changes from “http” to “https.” From this point on, the goal is to gather the information necessary to complete the transaction. The Checkout page leads the customer through each step of the process, starting with the billing, shipping, and payment information, and finally a review of the order. Customers who are logged into their accounts can skip some of these steps, if the information is already in their accounts. The last step is for the customer to agree to the terms and conditions of the sale, and place the order. To learn what happens next, see: “Order Process Overview,” on page 310.
Checkout
Part I: Getting Started
17
Chapter 2: A Quick Tour
Checkout Page
Notes:
_______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________
18
Magento Go User Guide
CHAPTER 3:
Quick Start Guide
Magento Go leads you through the process of setting up your store, step-by-step. You can refer to this chapter for more detailed information as you go through the “Start My Store” process. When you’re done, your store will be ready to go live!
Start My Store
To launch Start My Store: 1. Log in to the Admin panel with the credentials you received in your Welcome
email.
2. From the Dashboard, click Start My Store. You will find it in the upper-left
corner of the orange header at the top of the page. To close the guide, click anywhere in the orange bar at the top of the page.
Admin Panel: Start My Store
Part I: Getting Started
19
Chapter 3: Quick Start Guide
Start My Store
Step 1:
Language Preference
Magento Go gives you the ability to participate in the global marketplace, with support for multiple languages, currencies, and tax rules. When your store is first created, the language is set to English (United States). You can change the language and add additional languages, depending on your plan. To learn more, see: “Locale Options,” on page 47.
Start My Store: Language Preference
Step 2:
Contact Information
Get started right away by letting customers know who you are and how to reach you. Your contact information appears on email messages, invoices, packing slips, and newsletters sent to your customers. To learn more, see: “Store Contact Information,” on page 50.
Start My Store: Contact Information
20
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 3: Quick Start Guide
Start My Store
Step 3:
Design
Magento Go helps you create compelling and professional stores that engage your customers, regardless of your design skills. You can use a theme “right out of the box,” or customize it with your own design. You can use the Design Settings Editor to make simple changes, or work directly with the CSS Editor for more creative control. To learn more, see “Understanding Page Layout,” on page 78.
Start My Store: Design
Step 4:
Plan
As your business grows, Magento Go can grow with you. With a wide range of configurable features and a variety of plans to meet your needs as the size of your business grows, Magento Go is the ideal way to launch your online business. To learn more, see: “Upgrading Your Plan,” on page 28.
Start My Store: Plan
Part I: Getting Started
21
Chapter 3: Quick Start Guide
Start My Store
Step 5:
Products
Magento Go lets you create a wide variety of products, with custom attributes and input controls. You will learn how to create configurable products with dropdown lists of options, grouped and customizable products, gift cards, and more. To learn more, see: “Understanding Product Types,” on page 201.
Start My Store: Products
Step 6:
Payments
Magento Go lets you accept credit cards and alternative payments directly from your store through PayPal and other trusted partners. Our payment systems are safe for your customers and provide you with the security and PCI compliance that you need to confidently sell online. To learn more, see: “Payment Methods,” on page 341.
Start My Store: Payments
22
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 3: Quick Start Guide
Start My Store
Step 7:
Shipping
Magento Go supports a wide range of shipping methods and carriers offering services in all parts of the world. To learn more, see: “Shipping Methods,” on page 325.
Start My Store: Shipping
Step 8:
Get Going
When you are ready to launch your store and open for business, click the Go button to remove the demo store notice and officially launch your store. With the “Under Construction” message removed, you’re open for business! To learn more, see: “Site Maintenance,” on page 419.
Start My Store: Get Going
Part I: Getting Started
23
Chapter 3: Quick Start Guide
Start My Store
Notes:
_______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________
24
Magento Go User Guide
CHAPTER 4:
Your Magento Account
You can find the information related to the products and services you have signed up to receive, as well as your contact and billing information in your Magento account. Your Magento account has a separate login from your store, and can be accessed from either the Magento website or the Admin panel of your store.
To log in to your Magento account: 1. Point your browser to the Magento Go site:
http://go.magento.com
2. In the upper-right corner, click the Log In link.
3. Enter your User Name or Email Address, and Password, and click the Log In
button. Your User Name appears next to a placeholder image.
4. Click your User Name to open your Magento account dashboard.
Part I: Getting Started
25
Chapter 4: Your Magento Account
Updating Your Contact Information
Updating Your Contact Information
Your contact information was entered when you first opened your account. It can be updated and expanded as needed to include additional information, such as your photo, signature line, and a detailed profile.
Account Settings: Contact Information
To update your contact information: 1. In the panel on the left under Account Settings, click Contact Information. 2. Make any changes that are necessary. 3. When complete, click the Save button.
26
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 4: Your Magento Account
Changing Your Password
Changing Your Password
Initially, the password for your Magento account and store Admin panel are the same. If you decide to change your Magento account password, make sure to keep a record of it with the rest of your login credentials. Changing your Magento account password has no effect on the Admin password for your store.
Account Settings: Change Password
To change your Magento password: 1. In the panel on the left under Account Settings, click Change Password. 2. Type your Current Password. 3. Type your New Password. Then in the Confirm New Password box, type it
again.
4. Click the Save button.
Part I: Getting Started
27
Chapter 4: Your Magento Account
Upgrading Your Plan
Upgrading Your Plan
Magento Go offers several plans that are designed to meet your needs as your business grows. Please visit our site to learn more about each plan. If you started with a free trial, you can upgrade to a paid plan and keep all of your data, if you upgrade within the thirty-day trial period. Your plan can be upgraded—and downgraded—at any time from your Magento account dashboard.
My Account: Upgrade to Paid Plan
To upgrade your plan: 1. From your account panel, click the Upgrade to Paid Plan link. 2. Find the plan that is right for you, and click the Choose Plan button.
My Account: Upgrade to Paid Plan - Choose Plan
28
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 4: Your Magento Account
Upgrading Your Plan
3. Complete the billing and payment information, and click the Review Order
button.
My Account: Upgrade to Paid Plan – Billing Information
4. After reviewing your order, click the Confirm your Plan button. 5. A confirmation email with a link to your invoice will be sent to the email address
that is associated with your account.
Part I: Getting Started
29
Chapter 4: Your Magento Account
Setting Up a Custom Domain
Setting Up a Custom Domain
A domain name is an address that makes it easy for people to find your store. It is also tool for branding your store. Affordable domain names can be purchased from numerous domain registrars and Internet hosting companies. To learn more about domain names, visit the Internet Corporation for Assigned Names and Numbers (ICANN) at www.icann.org. When you first set up your Magento Go store, you choose a store name. This name becomes part of the URL for your store, such as “mystore.gostorego.com.” However, most merchants prefer to have their own, custom “dot com” domain, such as www.mystore.com. Magento Go makes it easy to assign a custom domain to your store. The process takes three steps: Step 1: Step 2: Step 3: Add the domain to Magento Go Point the domain to your store Set your store’s Active Domain
After you have set it up, it takes about 24-48 hours for the change to take effect. When the process is complete, you will see your Magento Go store home page when you visit the URL of your custom domain.
Step 1:
Add the Domain to Magento Go
1. From your account panel, under Products and Services, click the Add link next to
Custom URL. (If you have multiple stores, click the link next to the correct store.)
2. Type the custom URL for your Magento Go store, and click OK.
Step 2:
Point the Domain to Your Store
After you add the domain to your Magento Go account, follow the instructions from your domain registrar to point the “A” record of your domain to the following IP address: 173.203.30.100 Your registrar might manage this in a slightly different way. We suggest that you contact your registrar directly, or consult their knowledge base for instructions.
30
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 4: Your Magento Account
Setting Up a Custom Domain
To configure your domain with GoDaddy: 1. Log in to your GoDaddy.com account. 2. In the Domains menu, under My Account, select Domain Management. 3. Select your domain name, and click Manage Domain. 4. Under DNS Manager, click Launch. 5. At the top of the Zone File list, click Add Record. 6. When prompted to Add DNS Record, set Record type to A (Host), and click OK.
Then, complete the following settings: Host Name: IP Address: TTL: @ 173.203.30.100 1 Hour
When complete, click OK.
7. Click the Save Zone File button to save your changes.
Note: It can take up to forty-eight hours for the DNS changes to take effect. We recommend that you wait a day or two before completing the next step. If you’re not sure, point your browser to the new domain and see what happens. Your domain will display a temporary home page until it is associated with your store.
Step 3:
Set Your Store’s Active Domain
The final step is to select your custom domain as the “Active Domain” for your Magento Go store.
1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. In the Configuration panel on the left, under General, click Web. 3. Click to expand the Active Domain section. Then, in the list of active domains,
select your custom domain.
4. Click the Save Config button to save changes.
Now, when you point your browser to your custom domain, you will see the home page of your Magento Go store.
Part I: Getting Started
31
Chapter 4: Your Magento Account
Setting Up a Custom Domain
Adding a Custom SSL Certificate
All Magento Go stores are initially equipped with a shared SSL certificate and secure checkout process which meet the requirements of the Payment Card Industry (PCI). To learn more, see: “PCI Compliance Guidelines,” on page 480. A secure session is established whenever a customer begins the checkout process, where sensitive information is shared. During the secure transaction, the URL prefix changes from: http:// to https:// https://[yourstore].gostorego.com Even if you have a custom domain, your customers will be redirected to the shared, secure environment during checkout. A shared security certificate is an easy and affordable way to provide secure transactions for your customers. A Custom SSL Certificate makes it possible for your customers to complete a purchase transaction from your site, without being redirected from your custom domain. If your store is on the Going Places, Go Beyond, or Go Anywhere plan, you can add a Custom SSL Certificate. The certificate can be purchased from any Certificate Authority (CA), such as VeriSign, and GeoTrust, Comodo, and GoDaddy. Note: If asked to specify the server type when purchasing a SSL certificate, select Apache.
My Account: My Products and Services – Custom SSL
32
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 4: Your Magento Account
Setting Up a Custom Domain
To set up a Custom SSL Certificate: 1. Log in to your Magento account. 2. From your account panel, under Products and Services, click the Add link next to
Custom SSL Certificate. (If you have multiple stores, click the link next to the correct store.)
3. Enter your payment information, and click Go.
After this step, a technical support team member will contact you to complete the set up process.
Part I: Getting Started
33
Chapter 4: Your Magento Account
Using Magento Connect
Using Magento Connect
Magento Go can be customized by adding Trusted Extensions from Magento Connect. Magento Connect offers a wide range of third-party tools and services, including: Site management utilities Marketing tools and services Customer experience add-ons Themes and more!
New extensions and services are always being added, so stop by often to see what’s new. magentoconnect.com
Magento Connect
34
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 4: Your Magento Account
Using Magento Connect
Step 1:
Purchase a Trusted Extension
Extensions help you attract customers, add features, manage your store more effectively and much, much more. Look for the Magento Connect Trusted Extensions badge, and find the extension you need to succeed.
To purchase an extension: 1. Log in to your Magento account. 2. Find the Magento Go Trusted Extension that you want to install. 3. Set the Platform list to Magento Go. Then, do one of the following:
For a free extension, click the Get It Now button. Then when prompted, click the Place Order button. For a paid extension, click the Buy Now button. When prompted, complete your Billing Address and Payment Information, and click the Place Order button. When the order is complete, you will receive the confirmation message, “Your extension has been installed.”
4. To verify the installation, click View in My Account. You will find the extension
listed in the My Products and Services section, under My Go Extensions.
My Account: My Products and Services – My Go Extensions
Part I: Getting Started
35
Chapter 4: Your Magento Account
Using Magento Connect
Step 2:
Activate the Extension
1. Log in to your Magento customer account. 2. To view your Magento Go Extensions, from the My Account dashboard, click My
Go Extensions.
3. If you have multiple stores, set the Store Name list to the store where the
extension is installed.
4. Find the extension in the list. Then in the Status column, click Disabled to
change the status to Enabled. Note: If you ever want to disable this extension in the future, simply click Enabled to change the status to Disabled. For more information, see the instructions provided by the extension developer.
My Go Extensions: Status Enabled
36
Magento Go User Guide
CHAPTER 5:
Your Back Office
The Admin panel is your “virtual back office,” and gives you the ability to control all aspects of your online store. In this chapter, you will learn how to find your way around the menus, commands, configuration utilities, and reports that make up the Admin panel.
To log in to the Admin panel: 1. In the address bar of your browser, type the domain for your store, followed by
/admin. If you have a standard domain such as mystore, type this: http://mystore.gostorego.com/admin If you have a custom domain such as mystore.com, type this: http://www.mystore.com/admin
2. Type your User Name and Password, and click the Log In button.
If you don’t remember your User Name or Password, you can find them in the Welcome email you received when your store was created.
Admin Login
Part I: Getting Started
37
Chapter 5: Your Back Office
Admin Panel
Admin Panel
All of the commands you need to manage your store are located in the top navigation of the Admin panel. Over time, you’ll learn to use them all!
Dashboard The Dashboard provides an overview of the sales and customer activity on your site. It is usually the first page that appears after you log in to the Admin panel.
Sales Menu The Sales menu is where you can find everything related to processing an order, including current and past orders, invoices, shipments, credit memos, terms and conditions, and taxes.
Catalog Menu The Catalog menu controls everything related to your product catalog, including products, categories, attributes, URL rewrites, search terms and indexing, product reviews, ratings and tags, Google Content and Google Sitemap.
38
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 5: Your Back Office
Admin Panel
Design Menu The Design menu lets you change the design of your store by customizing and applying different themes, editing text, moving blocks, and making code changes with CSS and JavaScript.
Customers Menu The Customers menu lets you manage customer accounts, groups, and gift cards. You can also add new attributes, or specialized fields, to the customer record.
Promotions Menu The Promotions menu lets you set up Catalog and Shopping Cart Price Rules, which trigger an action whenever a set of conditions is met. Rules can be used to extend a discount to a customer group or product, or be based upon the items in the shopping cart.
Part I: Getting Started
39
Chapter 5: Your Back Office
Admin Panel
Newsletter Menu The Newsletter menu is used to manage the list of subscibers to any newsletters you publish.
CMS Menu The CMS menu lets you create new content pages and edit existing ones. In addition, you can create static blocks of content, and set up dynamic frontend apps, such as a rotating banner or list of new products. You can also create polls and monitor the responses.
Reports Menu The Reports menu provides a broad selection of reports on every aspect of your store, including sales, shopping cart, products, customers, reviews, tags, and search terms.
40
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 5: Your Back Office
Admin Panel
System Menu The System menu provides configuration utilities for every aspect of your store. In addition, you can manage your account, set permissions, import/export data, manage email templates, currency and translations, and create additional store views.
Add-Ons The Add-Ons command provides access to the Magento Connect marketplace, where you will find Trusted Extensions for your store.
Part I: Getting Started
41
Chapter 5: Your Back Office
Using the Dashboard
Using the Dashboard
The Dashboard is the first page that appears after you log in to the Admin panel, and gives an overview of your sales and the customer activity on your site.
To set the date range:
Set Select Range to one of the following: Last 24 Hours Last 7 Days Current Month YTD 2YTD
To adjust the scope of the report:
Set Choose Store View to limit the reports to a specific website or store view. (The availability of additional store views is determined by your plan.)
Dashboard
42
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 5: Your Back Office
Using the Dashboard
Sales Charts
The charts at the top of the Dashboard provide a quick snapshot of your orders and amounts, within the specified date range. Orders The Orders tab shows the number of orders during the time range specified. Amounts The Amounts tab shows the revenue during the time range specified. The block below the charts displays the current revenue, quantity, tax, and shipping amounts of your orders.
Summary Reports
The blocks on the left of the Dashboard provide summary information about your lifetime sales, average order amount, last five orders, and search terms. The tabs at the bottom provide quick reports about your best-selling and most viewed products, new customers and those who have purchased the most.
Bestsellers Lists your best-selling products, showing the price and quantity ordered.
Most Viewed Products Lists the most recently viewed products and the number of times viewed.
New Customers Lists recently registered customers.
Customers Lists the customers who have ordered the most during the specified range of time.
Part I: Getting Started
43
Chapter 5: Your Back Office
Using the Dashboard
Dashboard Settings
The Dashboard is displayed by default as the start-up page for the Admin panel. If you prefer, you can change the configuration so you see a different page when you log in. You can also set the starting dates used in Dashboard reports, and disable the display of the charts section.
To set the starting dates: 1. From the Admin panel, go to System > Configuration.
2. Then in Configuration panel on the left, under General, select Reports. 3. In the Dashboard section, do the following:
a. Set Year-To-Date Starts to the month and year that the current year began. b. Set Current Month Starts to the current month.
System > Configuration > Reports > Dashboard
44
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 5: Your Back Office
Using the Dashboard
To change the Admin startup page: 1. From the Admin panel, go to System > Configuration. Then in the
Configuration panel on the left, under Advanced, select Admin.
2. In the Admin UI section, set Startup Page to the page you want to appear
whenever you log in to the Admin Panel.
3. Click the Save Config button to save the setting.
System > Configuration > Advanced > Admin > Admin UI
To use static data:
If you have a lot of data to process, the performance of the Dashboard can be improved by turning off the display of real time data.
1. From the Admin panel, go to System > Configuration. Then in the
Configuration panel on the left, under Sales, select Sales.
2. Click to expand the Dashboard section. Then, set Use Aggregated Data (beta)
to “Yes.”
To disable the chart: 1. From the Admin panel, go to System > Configuration. Then in the
Configuration panel on the left, under Advanced, select Admin.
System > Configuration > Advanced > Admin > Dashboard
2. In the Dashboard section, set Enable Charts to “No.” 3. Click the Save Config button to save the setting.
A message on the Dashboard indicates that the chart is disabled.
Part I: Getting Started
45
Chapter 5: Your Back Office
Updating Your Store Information
Updating Your Store Information
If you completed the Start My Store steps, then you have already entered some of your store settings. Now, you will learn where these settings are located in the Admin panel, so you can complete the configuration. We’ll start from a global perspective to configure your country, language, and time zone, and work our way down to the local level.
Countries Options
1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. On the General page, click to expand the Countries Options section. 3. Set Default Country to the country where your business is located. 4. In the Allow Countries list, select each country from which you accept orders. By
default, all countries in the list are selected. (To select individual countries, hold the Ctrl key down and click each option.)
5. When finished, click the Save Config button.
System > Configuration > General > Countries Options
46
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 5: Your Back Office
Updating Your Store Information
Locale Options
The Locale Options configure your time zone and language, and identify the days of your work week.
1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. On the General page, click to expand the Locale Options section. 3. Select your Timezone from the list. 4. Set Locale to the language for your store. 5. Set First Day of the Week to the day that is considered to be the first day of the
week in your area.
6. In the Weekend Days list, select the days which falls on a weekend in your area.
(Hold the Ctrl key down to select more than one option.)
7. When finished, click the Save Config button.
System > Configuration > General > Locale Options
Part I: Getting Started
47
Chapter 5: Your Back Office
Updating Your Store Information
Currency Setup
Magento Go lets you customize your store for currencies that are used in more than two hundred countries around the world.
1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. On the General page, click to expand the Currency Setup section. 3. Set Base Currency to the primary currency that is used for online transactions. 4. Set Default Display Currency to the currency used to display pricing in your
store.
5. In the Allowed Currencies list, select all currencies you accept. (To select
multiple currencies, hold the Ctrl key down and click each option.)
6. When finished, click the Save Config button.
System > Configuration > General > Currency Setup > Currency Options
48
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 5: Your Back Office
Updating Your Store Information
Currency Rates and Symbols
In addition to setting your accepted currencies, you can also manage currency rates for your store. If accepting payment in currencies from other currencies, it is important to carefully manage currency rates, because they can fluctuate and directly affect your bottom line. Currency rates can be set manually, or imported from the Webservicex Import Service.
To set currency rates: 1. From the Admin panel, select System > Manage Currency > Rates.
The Manage Currency Rates page displays a table with currency rates in relation to your base currency rate (the default currency rate for your store).
2. Do one of the following:
To manually control currency rates, click the field in the column for the currency, and type the changes. An alternative is to import the latest currency rates from Webservicex Import Service by clicking Import. This updates your currency rates to the most current rates.
3. When complete, click the Save Currency Rates button. To customize currency symbols:
Currency symbols are used throughout your store, and appear in product prices, store orders, invoices, and so on.
1. From the Admin panel, select System > Manage Currency > Symbols.
Each enabled currency for your store appears in the Currency list.
2. Enter a custom symbol to use for each currency, or choose the standard symbol
by selecting the Use Standard checkbox to the right of each currency.
3. When complete, click the Save Currency Symbols button.
Part I: Getting Started
49
Chapter 5: Your Back Office
Updating Your Store Information
Store Contact Information
Your store contact information includes the store name and address, telephone number and email addresses. The information appears on email messages, invoices, and other communications sent to your customers.
To complete your store contact information: 1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration.
2. On the General page, click to expand the Store Information section. 3. Type your Store Name, as you want it to appear on customer communications. 4. Type your Store Contact Telephone number, formatted as you want it to appear
on customer communications.
5. In the Store Contact Address box, type the mailing address of your store.
System > Configuration > General > Store Information
50
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 5: Your Back Office
Updating Your Store Information
Store Email Addresses
You can use five different email addresses to represent distinct functions or departments within your business. Each identity and its associated email address can appear as the “sender” of automated email messages which are sent to your customer. In addition to three predefined email identities, there are two additional custom identities that you can set up according to your preference. General Contact Sales Representative Customer Support
To enter your store email addresses: 1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. In the Configuration panel on the left, under General, click Store Email
Addresses.
3. Click to expand the General Contact section. Then, do the following:
a. In the Sender Name box, type the name that you want to appear as the sender of email messages associated with the General Contact identity. b. In the Sender Email box, type the associated email address.
System > Configuration > Store Email Addresses > General Contact
4. Repeat the process to configure the email addresses for the two predefined email
addresses, and the custom email addresses, as needed: Sales Representative Customer Support Custom Email 1 Custom Email 2
5. When complete, click the Save Config button.
To learn more, see: “Managing Email & Newsletters,” on page 137.
Part I: Getting Started
51
Chapter 5: Your Back Office
Configuring the Contact Us Form
Configuring the Contact Us Form
The Contact Us link in the footer of the page provides an easy way for customers to contact you. The form is enabled by default, but can be configured to send inquiries to a specific email address, and to reply from a specific identity.
Contact Us Form
52
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 5: Your Back Office
Configuring the Contact Us Form
To configure the Contact Us form: 1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. In the Configuration panel on the left, under General, click Contacts. 3. Click to expand the Email Options section. Then, do the following:
a. Enter the email address that the Contact form should Send Emails To. b. Set Email Sender to the identity you want to use for any replies sent in response to inquiries you receive. c. Select the Email Template that is used to format the data that you receive from the form.
System > Configuration > General > Contacts > Email Options
Part I: Getting Started
53
Chapter 5: Your Back Office
Managing Permissions
Managing Permissions
Magento Go uses roles and permissions to provide different levels of access to the Admin panel. Each person who needs access to the Admin panel is assigned a role and set of permissions which determines the level of access. The number of Admin accounts that you can create is determined by your plan. When your store is first set up, the login credentials you receive have full permissions. However, you can restrict the level of permissions for other people who work on your site. For example, a designer can be given access to only the Design area of the site, and not to areas that contain customer and sales information. When the designer logs in to the Admin panel, the first page displayed will be the Theme Editor, rather than the Dashboard. As a security measure, user accounts are locked after six failed attempts to log in. The account can be unlocked by another user who has Administrator permissions.
Creating an Admin User
As a best practice, you should have more than one user account that has full Administrator permissions. That way, you can use one account for your everyday Administrative activities, and reserve the other as a “Super Admin” account.
System > Permissions > Users
54
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 5: Your Back Office
Managing Permissions
To create an additional Admin account: 1. From the Admin panel, select System > Permissions > Users. 2. Click the Add New User button.
System > Permissions > Users – Account Info
3. In the Account Information section, do the following:
a. Enter the User Name for account. The User Name should be something easy to remember, and is not casesensitive. b. Complete the following information: First Name Last Name Email address This email address must differ from the one associated with your original Admin account. c. Assign the Password for the account. The password should be seven or more characters long, and include both letters and numbers. d. In the Password Confirmation box, repeat the password to make sure it was entered correctly.
4. Set This Account is to “Active.”
Part I: Getting Started
55
Chapter 5: Your Back Office
Managing Permissions
5. In the User Information panel on the left, click User Role. Then, in the list of
Roles, select Administrators. (Initially, it will be the only role available.)
Permissions: Users – Add New, User Role
6. When complete, click the Save User button.
You now have two accounts with Administrator permissions.
Creating a Custom Role
To give someone restricted access, the first step is to create a role with the appropriate level of permissions. After the role is created, you will add the new user, set up the login credentials, and assign the role to the user account.
System > Permissions > Roles
Step 1:
Define the Role
1. From the Admin panel, select System > Permissions > Roles. 2. Click the Add New Role button. 3. In the Role Name box, type a descriptive name for the new role.
Permissions: Roles - Role Name
56
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 5: Your Back Office
Managing Permissions
4. In the Role Information panel on the left, click Role Resources. 5. Set Role Access to “Custom.” Then in the Resources tree, select the checkbox of
each area of the Admin panel that you a person with this role to have access.
System > Permissions > Roles - Role Resources
6. When complete, click the Save Role button.
Step 2:
Add the New User
1. From the Admin panel, select System > Permissions > Users. 2. Click the Add New User button. 3. In the Account Information section, do the following:
a. Assign a User Name for the account. The User Name should be something easy to remember, and is not casesensitive. b. Complete the following information: First Name Last Name Email address
c. Assign the Password for the account. The password should be seven or more characters long, and include both letters and numbers. d. In the Password Confirmation box, repeat the password to make sure it was entered correctly.
Part I: Getting Started
57
Chapter 5: Your Back Office
Managing Permissions
4. Set This Account is to “Active.” 5. In the User Information panel on the left, click User Role. Then, in the list of
Roles, select the option for the role you want to assign to the new user.
Permissions: Users – Add New, User Role
6. When complete, click the Save User button.
Unlocking User Accounts
For the security of your site, a user account will be locked after six failed attempts to log in to the Admin panel. The account can be unlocked by any other user with full Administrator permissions.
To unlock a user: 1. From the Admin panel, select System > Permissions > Locked.
Any locked user accounts appear in the list.
2. In the list, select the checkbox of the locked account. 3. Set the Actions list in the upper-right corner of the list to “Unlock.”
Permissions > Locked: Action - Unlock
4. Click the Submit button to unlock the user account.
58
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 5: Your Back Office
Multiple Store Views
Multiple Store Views
Magento Go lets you create up to three separate views of your store, according to the capabilities of your plan. Usually, store views are used to offer support for multiple languages, but they can also be used to target a specific demographic. If your current plan supports only one language, you will need to upgrade your plan before you can create multiple store views. For more information, see: “Upgrading Your Plan,” on page 28.
System > Configuration > Manage Stores
To create a store view: 1. From the Admin panel, select System > Manage Stores. 2. Click the Create Store View button to display the New Store View page. 3. Under Store View Information, complete the following fields:
a. Set Store to “Main Store.” b. In the Name field, assign a meaningful name to the store view. c. If using the store view for a language, you can use the store language for the name. (For example, Spanish.) d. In the Store Code field, assign a meaningful code to identify the store. e. Set Status to “Enable” to activate the store view. f. (Optional) In the Sort Order field, enter a number to determine the sequence in which this view appears when listed with other views.
4. Click the Save Store View button to save your changes.
Part I: Getting Started
59
Chapter 5: Your Back Office
Multiple Store Views
Understanding Store Scope
If your Magento Go site has multiple stores or views, you can set the scope of a configuration setting, product, category, or attribute, to apply to a specific store or view. The scope provides context for the configuration setting. The “Choose Store View” list box in the upper-left corner of most pages is used to set the configuration scope for items on that page. If an admin user’s access is restricted to a specific store or view, the list includes only the areas they have permission to access.
Choose Store View on Dashboard
60
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 5: Your Back Office
Changing the Store Language
Changing the Store Language
You can instantly translate a store view by changing the locale. Changing the “locale” doesn’t actually translate the text word-for-word, but references a different translation table that is used to generate the text displayed throughout the site. After changing the locale, you can fine-tune the translation by using the Theme Text Editor to make additional changes. To learn more, see the Magento Go Design Guide.
To change the locale of a view: 1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. In the upper-left corner, set the Current Configuration Scope to the store
view that needs to be translated.
3. On the General configuration page, click to expand the Locale Options
section.
Locale Options
4. Set Locale to the new language for the store view. 5. Click Save to save your changes.
To learn more, see: “Changing the Locale,” on page 517.
Part I: Getting Started
61
Chapter 5: Your Back Office
Changing the Store Language
Changing the Default Store View
The Manage Stores tool allows you to choose the view that is used for the primary store. Customers can then switch from the primary view to another.
To change the default store view: 1. From the Admin panel, select System > Manage Stores. 2. In the Manage Stores list, click to open the store view you would like to use as
your default store view. Then, do the following: a. Set Root Category to the category you want to use as the default for all stores. Note: Currently Magento Go supports one root category per store. The selected root category becomes the default for all store views. To learn more, see: “Top Navigation,” on page 179. b. Set Default Store View to the store view you want to use as the default. If you are using Store Views for different languages, the Default Store View will determine the default language of your store.
3. Click the Save Store button to save your changes.
62
Magento Go User Guide
CHAPTER 6:
Customer Accounts
Visitors to your site are encouraged to register and open an account with your store. The header of every page extends an invitation to “Log in or register” and provides a “quick access” link to the account Login page. Faster Checkout
Registered customers move through checkout faster, because much of the information needed to process the order is already in their accounts. You can specify whether you want to require customers to register before making a purchase, or will accept purchases from “guests.” Ability to Self-Serve
Registered customers can update their information, check the status of orders, and even reorder from their Account Dashboard. Build Your “House List”
You can use information from customer accounts, including order history, to create customer groups, targeted mailings, and price rules.
Customer Account Dashboard
Part I: Getting Started
63
Chapter 6: Customer Accounts
Changing the Store Language
Customer Accounts
You can configure your store to allow unregistered customers to make purchases as guests, or require that they register to create an account. Registered customers can move through checkout faster, and track the status of their orders.
Customer Account Login
To set your guest checkout preference: 1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. In the Configuration panel on the left, under Sales, select Checkout. 3. Click to expand the Checkout Options section. 4. Then, set Allow Guest Checkout to your preference. 5. Click the Save Config button to save your setting.
Checkout Options
64
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 6: Customer Accounts
Customer Login Options
Customer Login Options
To streamline the experience for customers who log in to their accounts, you can offer the convenience of PayPal Access and choose which page to display when they log in to their accounts. Enable PayPal Access PayPal Access lets your customers use information that is already in their PayPal account when opening a new account with your store. This means less typing and fewer passwords to remember, which is good! First Page After Login When customers first log in to their account, you have the option to display their Account Dashboard, or to let them continue shopping. It’s a matter of preference. Displaying the Account Dashboard can help customers to become familiar with the features available through their accounts.
To configure the customer login options: 1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. In the Configuration panel on the left, under Customers, select Customer
Configuration.
3. Click to expand the Login Options section, and do the following: 4. To Enable Log in with PayPal Access, select “Yes.” 5. To Redirect Customer to Account Dashboard after Logging in, select “Yes.” 6. Click the Save Config button to save your settings.
System > Configuration > Customers: Customer Configuration – Login Options
Part I: Getting Started
65
Chapter 6: Customer Accounts
Customer Login Options
PayPal Access
PayPal is the world leader in online payment solutions, used by over 100 million customers and accepted by millions of stores worldwide. Magento Go and PayPal have joined forces to bring you PayPal Access—a streamlined registration process that makes it easier than ever for people to open an account with your store. When customers with PayPal Access register with your store, they no longer have to type their address or contact information, because it is read directly from their PayPal account. Benefits for you: Streamlined sign-up and checkout Access to 100M active, verified accounts Enhances merchant credibility
Benefits for your customers: Fewer forms to complete Fewer passwords to remember Easier to register with your store
PayPal Access gives your customers an easier and faster way to register with your store and access their accounts.
How It Looks to Your Customers
When you enable PayPal Access for your Magento Go store, the following changes take place:
Header:
The PayPal Access login button appears in the header, after the Welcome message and “Log In or register” links.
PayPal Access Login
66
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 6: Customer Accounts
Customer Login Options
Create an Account Page:
The “Create an Account” page now invites customers to log in with PayPal and skip the registration!
Create an Account
Log In Page:
The “Login or Create an Account” page includes a new option to “Log In Using Your PayPal Access Account.”
Login or Create an Account
Part I: Getting Started
67
Chapter 6: Customer Accounts
Customer Login Options
Account Dashboard:
The Account Dashboard gives customers the ability to link or unlink their store accounts to their PayPal accounts.
Account Dashboard
Checkout Process:
When customers proceed to checkout, they are invited to “Log In Using Your PayPal Access Account.”
Checkout Process
68
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 6: Customer Accounts
Customer Login Options
Setting Up PayPal Access
It is easy to set up PayPal Access for your Magento Go store. Here’s how:
To enable PayPal Access: 1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. In the Configuration panel on the left, under Customers, select Customer
Configuration.
3. Click to expand the Login Options section. 4. Set Enable Log in with PayPal Access to “Yes.” 5. Click the Save Config button to save your changes.
For the most current information about the full range of PayPal services for Magento Go merchants, see: “Understanding PayPal” in our Knowledge Base.
Part I: Getting Started
69
Chapter 6: Customer Accounts
Setting Up Customer Groups
Setting Up Customer Groups
Customer groups give you the ability to offer different pricing and promotions to customers based upon their demographic or order history. Each customer is initially assigned to one of the following default customer groups: General Not Logged In Retailer
You can create, modify and manage these groups to fit your needs and strategy.
To create a Customer Group: 1. From the Admin panel, select Customers > Customer Groups.
Customers > Customer Groups
2. Click the Add New Customer Group button. Then in the Group Information
section, do the following: a. Enter a descriptive Group Name. For example: Wholesaler b. Select an appropriate Tax Class for the group.
Group Information
3. Click the Save Customer Group button to save your configuration.
70
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 6: Customer Accounts
Creating a Customer Account
Creating a Customer Account
Customers usually create their own accounts from your store. However, you can also create customer accounts directly from the Admin panel, which is useful for customers who prefer to order by phone.
To create a customer: 1. From the Admin panel, choose Customers > Manage Customers. 2. Click the Add New button.
Customers > Manage Customers
3. In the Associate to Website list, select one of the following:
Admin Main Website
You can associate a customer to the Admin website to require that orders are placed only through the Admin panel. Customers associated with the Admin website cannot log in to their accounts from the store.
4. Assign the customer to a Customer Group.
Tip: To change the Default Group assignment, select System > Configuration > [CUSTOMERS] > Customer Configuration and assign a new Customer Group in Default Group.
5. Complete the rest of the customer information.
Part I: Getting Started
71
Chapter 6: Customer Accounts
Creating a Customer Account
Customer Information
6. In the Password Management section, do one of the following:
Manually assign a password. Select the Send auto-generated password checkbox to generate a random password after the customer information is saved.
Password Management
7. Select the Save and Continue Edit button to save the customer settings.
72
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 6: Customer Accounts
Creating a Customer Account
Adding a Customer Address
To add an address to a customer: 1. Select Addresses tab on left column and complete the customer Address
information.
2. Assign a Default Address to this new address by checking either Default Billing
Address or Default Shipping Address to the right.
3. To add a new address, click Add New Address in Customer Addresses box.
Follow steps as above and assign a default address if needed.
4. Click the Save Customer button to save your changes.
Customer Information - Addresses
Part I: Getting Started
73
Chapter 6: Customer Accounts
Creating a Customer Account
Notes:
_______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________
74
Magento Go User Guide
Part II: Design & Content
CHAPTER 7:
Themes and Page Layout
Magento Go includes a growing library of professionally-designed themes which you can use “off the shelf,” or customize to suit your needs. In this chapter, you will learn the basics of page layout, how to preview and apply a theme, and brand your store and email messages with your logo. Understanding Page Layout Choosing a Theme Adding Logos
To learn more about customizing themes, see the Magento Go Design Guide.
Design > Themes Editor
Part II: Design & Content
77
Chapter 7: Themes and Page Layout
Understanding Page Layout
Understanding Page Layout
Each page of your store has a fixed header and footer, with a content area that is divided into one, two, or three columns. The manner in which page layouts are used throughout your store is determined by the theme. In addition, you can apply different layouts to any content page you create, including your home page.
1 Column The “1 Column” layout can be used to create a dramatic home page with a large image or focal point. It’s also a good choice for any content page that has a large amount of text, or a combination of text, images, and video. A single-column layout can give the appearance of multiple columns if the text is formatted into columns using HTML and CSS.
2 Columns with Left Bar The “2 Columns with Left Bar” layout is often used for pages with navigation on the left, such as a catalog or search results pages with “layered navigation.” It is also an excellent choice for home pages that need additional navigation, or blocks of supporting content on the left.
78
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 7: Themes and Page Layout
Understanding Page Layout
2 Columns with Right Bar The “2 Columns with Right Bar” layout is the one that is used for the home page examples in this guide. The main content area is large enough for an eye-catching image or banner. This layout is also often used for Product View pages that have blocks of supporting content on the right.
3 Columns The “3 Column” layout has a center column that is wide enough for a column of text, with room on each side for additional navigation and blocks of supporting content. The Customer Service page in the sample data is based on the 3 Column layout. (You will find a link to that page in the footer of your store.)
Part II: Design & Content
79
Chapter 7: Themes and Page Layout
Understanding Page Layout
Home Page Layout
The Home page that is featured in this guide is based on the “Modern Theme,” with a “2 Columns with Right Bar” layout. It’s a clean design, but the logo uses space which might otherwise be available for the top navigation. When choosing a theme, look for the best use of space for the content you want to display. Colors, fonts, and styles can all be changed, but the column layouts are fixed templates that determine how the space in the content area is allocated, although the column position and widths can be modified in the CSS Editor. To learn more about page layout and theme customization, see the Magento Go Design Guide.
“2 Column with Right Bar” Layout
80
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 7: Themes and Page Layout
Choosing a Theme
Choosing a Theme
You can preview any theme using the actual content from your store, without interrupting the operation of your site. While in Preview mode, you can explore each menu and option. Make sure to examine every page to see how items are arranged within the space. Note: To preview a theme, your browser must be set to allow pop-ups.
To preview a theme: 1. From the Admin panel, select Design > Themes Editor.
Design > Themes Editor
2. Click the Preview link below the thumbnail image of any theme. A preview
window opens to show how the theme looks when applied to your store.
Part II: Design & Content
81
Chapter 7: Themes and Page Layout
Choosing a Theme
Previewing the “Texture” Theme
3. To try a different theme, select its name from the Change Theme list in the
upper-left corner of the page, and click the Change Theme button.
4. To close the preview window, click the Quit Preview button at the top of the
page.
5. When you find a theme you want to try, make a copy that you can edit.
a. Click the Duplicate link below the thumbnail image of the theme you want to copy. b. Enter a new Theme Name and Description if you like, and click the Save button. A new copy of the theme you have chosen, called by the name you have assigned, appears in the left column under My Customizations. This is now your working copy of the theme.
82
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 7: Themes and Page Layout
Choosing a Theme
Changing the Current Theme
To apply the new theme to your store: 1. From the Theme Editor, under Current Theme, scroll down to the My
Customizations section.
2. Under the thumbnail image of your theme, click Apply.
Your new theme now appears at the top of the list under Current Theme.
3. To see the new theme in your store, open a new tab or browser window and type
your store URL in the address bar. If you have a standard domain such as mystore, type this: http://mystore.gostorego.com If you have a custom domain such as mystore.com, type this: http://www.mystore.com If the new theme doesn’t immediately appear, press the Refresh (F5) button.
Applying a Theme
Part II: Design & Content
83
Chapter 7: Themes and Page Layout
Adding Your Logos
Adding Your Logos
Your Magento Go store uses three different logo files. The first appears in the header of your store, the second on email messages sent from your store, and the third is the favicon in the address bar of your browser. To achieve the best resolution, it’s best to upload your logo images at their actual display size, rather than resize them in the code. If you want to use the exact size of the sample logo in a theme, you can right-click the logo to find the exact width and height of the image. The information is listed under Properties. You can also use the CSS Editor to modify the dimensions and relative position of the logo, if necessary. For more information, see the Magento Go Design Guide.
Header Logo
Your store logo appears in the upper-left header of your store with a clickable link back to your home page. The general size and position of the store logo file is determined by the theme.
To upload the Header logo: 1. From the Theme Editor, under Current Theme, scroll down to the My
Customizations section.
2. Under the thumbnail image of your theme, click Customize. 3. In the Theme Customization panel on the left, click Design Settings Editor.
Theme Customization: Design Settings Editor - Header Settings
84
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 7: Themes and Page Layout
Adding Your Logos
Adding Alt Text
The Alt text that is associated with an image appears whenever a visitor to your site hovers over the image with their mouse. The text is indexed by search engines, and also improves the accessibility of your site for people who use screen readers. It’s a best practice to include Alt text for each image on your site.
Logo Image Alt Text
To add Alt text to your logo: 1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. In the Configuration panel on the left, under General, select Design. 3. Click to expand the Header section. 4. Type the Logo Image Alt text that you want to appear whenever someone hovers
over your logo.
System > Configuration > General > Design > Header
5. Click the Save Config button.
Part II: Design & Content
85
Chapter 7: Themes and Page Layout
Adding Your Logos
Email Logo
This logo appears at the top of automated email messages sent to customers. These messages are referred to as “transactional emails” and are based on templates. To learn more, see: “Adding a New Email Template,” on page 138.
To upload your Email logo: 1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. In the Configuration panel on the left, under Design, select Transactional
Emails.
System > Configuration > Design > Transactional Emails
3. Click the Browse button and select the Logo Image from your computer. 4. In the Logo Image Alt field, type the Alt text you want to use for the image. 5. When complete, click the Save Config button.
Logo Image on Transactional Email
86
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 7: Themes and Page Layout
Adding Your Logos
Favicon
The favicon (short for favorite icon) is the little icon in your browser address bar before the URL. The favicon also appears on the tab of each browser page. By default, the Magento logo is the favicon that appears in your Magento Go store.
Default Magento Favicon
Favicons are generally 16x16 pixels or 32x32 pixels in size. Although Magento accepts .ico, .png, .jpg, .jpeg, .apng and .svg file types, not all browsers support these formats. The safest format to use for a favicon file is an .ico. Many free favicon converter tools are available online to convert other, more common image types, like .pngs, .gifs, and .jpegs to the .ico format. Because Magento Go does not convert an image from one format to another, any file conversion should take place before the file is uploaded to your store.
Step 1:
Create a favicon
1. Create a 16x16 or 32x32 graphic image of our logo, using in the image editor of
your choice.
2. Use one of the available online tools to convert the image to the .ico format.
Name the file “favicon.ico” and save it to your computer.
Step 2:
Upload the favicon to your store
1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. In the Configuration panel on the left, under General, select Design. Then, click
to expand the HTML Head section.
3. In the Favicon Icon field, click the Browse button to find your favicon file. 4. Click the Save Config button to save your changes.
Part II: Design & Content
87
Chapter 7: Themes and Page Layout
Adding Your Logos
Notes:
_______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________
88
Magento Go User Guide
CHAPTER 8:
Creating Content
The old adage, “content is king” is as true now as ever. The quality of your content helps distinguish your store from others, increases your visibility to search engines, provides support to your customers, and gives them more reason to come back. Your content should reflect the branding of your store, including both the visual presentation and the voice that is used to convey your message. Your Magento Go store includes a powerful content management system (CMS) that is used to create and maintain the information that is available on your site. To help you get started, your store has several sample pages and blocks of content, which you can modify with your own information, or replace with others of your own design. Pages Content pages appear in the main content area of your site, according to the column layout of the page. A page can be linked to other pages, and incorporated into the navigation of your site. You can organize your content pages into hierarchy with menus and navigation. Each page has a URL that appears in the address bar of the browser. Content pages are indexed by search engines, and can be leveraged to improve the visibility of your store. Blocks A block is a chunk of information that can be included on a page, or positioned in a column to the left or right of the main content area of a page. A block can include static information such as text, images, video, and dynamic information such as data from your catalog.
Part II: Design & Content
89
Chapter 8: Creating Content
Sample Content Pages
Sample Content Pages
Magento Go comes with several default content pages that you can use to get started. At the very least, you will need to update the Home, About Us, and Customer Service pages to replace the sample data with content that is suitable for your store. The other pages do not contain sample data, but can be improved by incorporating the visual presentation and voice of your brand.
Home This sample Home page is based on the “2 columns with right bar” layout. The main content area of this page includes a static image and a dynamic list of new products.
About Us This sample About Us page is based on the “1 column” layout, but uses HTML to create three columns of text. You can use this page as a template, or try a different approach. By default, a link to the About Us page appears in the footer of your store.
Customer Service This sample Customer Service page is based on the “3-columns” layout, and can be used as a template for your own information. By default, a link to the Customer Services page appears in the footer of your store.
90
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 8: Creating Content
Sample Content Pages
Page Not Found The “404” Page Not Found page is based on the “2 columns with left bar” layout, and is named for the response code that is returned when a page cannot be found. This page appears if there is a broken link on your site, or if a URL to a page no longer exists.
Enable Cookies The Enable Cookies page appears if a visitor to your site does not have cookies enabled for their browser. The page provides step-by-step, illustrated instructions to enable cookies for the most popular browsers. The page is based on the “1 column” layout.
Service Unavailable The “503” Service Unavailable page is named for the response code that is returned when a server is unavailable. This page can be set to appear when your store is in Maintenance Mode.
Part II: Design & Content
91
Chapter 8: Creating Content
Editing a Content Page
Editing a Content Page
All content pages on your site use HTML tags to format the text. Unlike a word processor, Magento Go’s content editor inserts the proper codes directly into the text, even if you don't know HTML. You can work in the “what you see is what you get” text mode, or directly with the HTML. The Show/Hide Editor button lets you toggle between the two modes. If you don’t yet know HTML, you can learn some basic coding by using the editor. The toolbar of the editor provides a rich assortment of formatting options and tools. For the complete list of toolbar buttons, see: Editor Toolbar Buttons on page 447.
To edit an existing content page: 1. From the Admin panel, select CMS > Pages > Manage Content. 2. In the Manage Pages list, click to select the page you want to edit.
CMS > Pages > Manage Content
92
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 8: Creating Content
Editing a Content Page
3. In the Page Information panel on the left, select Content. The page appears in
the content editor.
CMS > Pages > Manage Content > Content
4. If you prefer to work in full screen mode, click the Fullscreen button. Click the
button again to return to the content editor.
Fullscreen Button
5. From the content editor, click the Show/Hide Editor button to view the code.
Then, click the button again to return to the content editor.
Part II: Design & Content
93
Chapter 8: Creating Content
Editing a Content Page
Underlying HTML Code
6. In the Content Heading box, type the text that you want to use as the main
heading at the top of the page. This text is tagged with the HTML heading level 1 (<h1>). The format of the <h1> tag is determined by the CSS stylesheet that is associated with the page. By default, the editor uses the CSS stylesheet from the current theme.
7. Click the Preview button to see how the page appears when published to your
site. Then, close the Preview window to return to the content editor.
Preview Page
94
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 8: Creating Content
Editing a Content Page
The sample “About Us” page is based on a 1-column layout, but uses HTML to create a three-column format. If you like the layout of this page, you can carefully type over the text, without interfering with the underlying code.
8. Complete your content, using the formatting buttons in the toolbar, as you would
with any text editor.
9. Because this page is live on your site, click the Preview button to check the
content and formatting before saving your changes. Then, close the Preview window to return to the content editor.
10. When the page is complete, click the Save button. The updated page is
immediately published to your store.
Part II: Design & Content
95
Chapter 8: Creating Content
Creating a New Page
Creating a New Page
The process of adding a new content page to your store is essentially the same for any type of page you create. Any page can include static text, images, and blocks, and dynamic frontend apps and banners. In addition, you can use Page Hierarchy to provide structure and navigation for your body of content. A Privacy Policy is one of the first content pages you should create. When the page is ready, you can include it as a link in the footer of your store.
Step 1:
Add a New Page
1. From the Admin panel, select CMS > Pages > Manage Content. 2. Click the Add New Page button. 3. In the Page Information section, do the following:
a. Enter a Title for the new page. b. Enter a URL Key for the page that is based upon the Title. It should be all lowercase characters, with hyphens instead of spaces. The URL Key is added to the base URL for your store, to create the online address for the page. c. In the Store View list, select each view where this page will be available. d. Set Status to “Disabled.” (This will be changed when the page is ready to publish.) e. Set Under Version Control to one of the following: Yes: To keep a backup of previous versions of the page, named New Page 1, New page 2, and so on. No: To write over previous version of the page.
Note: This option is set to “Yes” by default. If you make frequent changes, we recommend setting this to “No” to avoid creating multiple copies which are only slightly different from each other.
96
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 8: Creating Content
Creating a New Page
Add New Page: Page Information
4. With the required fields complete, click the Save and Continue Edit button.
Step 2:
Select the Page Layout
1. In the Page Information panel on the left, select Design. 2. In the Page Layout section, set Layout to one of the following:
1 column 2 columns with left bar 2 columns with right bar 3 columns
Page Information: Page Layout
Part II: Design & Content
97
Chapter 8: Creating Content
Creating a New Page
Step 3:
Complete the Content
1. In the Page Information panel on the left, select Content. 2. In the Content Heading box, type the text you want to appear as the main
heading at the top of the page.
3. Complete the remaining content, as you want it to appear in the main content
column, according to the page layout selected. The content can include text, images, video and audio, banners, and lists of dynamic data. For more information on the range of possibilities, see the Magento Go Design Guide.
4. To insert an image, do the following:
a. Click the Show / Hide Editor button to view the code. Then, click the Insert Image button. b. From Media Storage, click the Browse Files button. c. Find the image on your computer, and click the Upload Files button. The image appears in Media Storage.
Media Storage: Insert File
d. Click the thumbnail of the image and click the Insert File button. The required code appears in the edit box. The image code is inserted into the HTML of the page.
98
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 8: Creating Content
Creating a New Page
Insert Image (Code View)
5. Click the Show / Hide Editor button to return to the content editor, where the
image appears in relation to the rest of the content on the page.
6. Complete the content, and preview your work as needed. 7. Click the Save and Continue Edit button.
Step 4:
Complete the Meta Data
1. In the Page Information panel on the left, select Meta Data. 2. Complete the Keywords and Description for the page. This information is used
by search engines to index the page.
Page Information: Meta Data
Part II: Design & Content
99
Chapter 8: Creating Content
Creating a New Page
Step 5:
Publish the Page
1. In the Page Information panel on the left, select Page Information. 2. Set Status to “Published.” 3. Click the Save Page button.
Changing the Home Page
Your Home page is like the front window of your store, and should showcase both your brand and your merchandise. You can experiment with different column layouts and content, and create Home pages that change with the season.
1. To make a page appear as the Home page of your store, do the following:
a. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. b. In the Configuration panel on the left under General, select Web. c. In the Default Pages section, set CMS Home Page to your new page.
System > Configuration > Web: Default Pages
2. Click the Save Config button to save the setting.
The new page is now the Home page for your store.
100
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 8: Creating Content
Using the Editor
Using the Editor
Magento Go provides an easy way to create and format content without having to learn or write any HTML or CSS code. The Editor gives you the ability to create and edit HTML code while working in a “What You See Is What You Get” view of the content. When working in the product catalog, the Editor is accessed by clicking the WYSIWYG Editor button.
Inserting Links
One of the best things you can do to improve the indexing of your site by search engines is to create internal links to other content pages in your site. In addition, you might want to provide a link to an outside site, as well. When you offer a link to an outside site, you should set the link to open in a new window, so the visitor doesn’t leave your store.
To create a link: 1. Highlight the text where you want to create the link. Then, in the Editor toolbar,
click the Link button.
Link Button
2. In the Link URL field, type the web address of the page to be linked. 3. Set Target to one of the following:
Open link in the same window Open in a new window
4. In the Title field, enter the tooltip text that appears when someone hovers over
the link.
5. Click the Insert button to create the link.
Part II: Design & Content
101
Chapter 8: Creating Content
Using the Editor
Inserting Images
You can insert a link to an image that resides on another server, or link to an image from your store’s Media Storage library.
Method 1: Link to an Online Image
Use this method to link to an image that is available online, but resides on another server. You must have the URL of the image to complete the process.
1. Position your cursor in the text where you want the image to appear. 2.
In the Editor toolbar, click the Insert Image button.
Insert Image Button
3. In the Image URL field, paste the full Web address to the image. 4. In the Image Description field, write a brief description of the image. 5. In the Title field, write a relevant title for the image. 6. Click the Insert button to complete the process.
Method 2: Link to an Image in Media Storage
1. From the Editor, click the Show / Hide Editor button to display the content in
Code view.
2. Position the cursor where you want the code to be inserted. Then, click the Insert
Image button.
3. To upload a new image to Media Storage, do the following:
a. Click the Browse Files button. Then, find the file on your computer. b. Find the file on your computer. Click to select it, and click the Open button to copy the file name to Media Storage. c. Click the Upload File button to add the image to Media Storage.
102
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 8: Creating Content
Using the Editor
4. To insert a HTML link to the file, click to select the image. Then, click the Insert
File button.
Media Storage: Insert File
The code is inserted as a Dynamic Media URL, and looks something like this: <img src="{{media url="go-logo_1.png"}}" alt="" />
5. To complete the Alt tag, position the cursor between the double-quotes, and type
the text.
6. To return to the Editor, click the Show / Hide Editor button.
Part II: Design & Content
103
Chapter 8: Creating Content
Using the Editor
Embedding Video
You can easily embed links to videos into your content pages. This example shows how to use the Media button in the Editor toolbar to embed a YouTube video in a content page.
To embed video: 1. From the Editor, click the Insert Media button.
Insert Media button
2. In the File/URL field, type the URL to the media file you want to embed. For
example, it could be a link to a YouTube video.
3. Click the Insert button to complete the process.
Embedded Video
104
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 8: Creating Content
Organizing Your Pages
Organizing Your Pages
Magento Go’s Page Hierarchy system gives you the ability to organize your content pages and add pagination, navigation, and menus. If you plan to publish large amounts of content on a regular basis, you can use Page Hierarchy to help you manage the content, and make it easy for people to find articles of interest. Page hierarchy can be managed from an individual CMS page and also by using the Manage Page Hierarchy command.
CMS > Pages > Manage Hierarchy
Adding Nodes
A node is a reference that identifies related pieces of content, and is used to organize content pages into a structure of parent/child relationships. A parent node is like a folder which can contain child nodes and pages. The relative position of each node and page in the hierarchy is shown as a tree on the left side of the Manage Pages Hierarchy page. A node can contain other nodes and content pages, and a single content page can be associated with multiple nodes and other content pages. The following example shows how to create a node with simple navigation to content pages. Although the node does not have a content page associated with it, it does have a URL Key which can be referenced elsewhere in your site. For example, you can create a node called “Press Releases” with navigation to individual press releases. Then, include the link on your About Us page.
Part II: Design & Content
105
Chapter 8: Creating Content
Organizing Your Pages
Step 1:
Create a Node
1. From the Admin panel, select CMS > Pages > Manage Hierarchy. 2. Click the Add Node button. 3. In the Page Properties section, type a Title for the node. Then create a suitable
URL Key using all lowercase characters, with hyphens instead of spaces.
4. Click the Save Pages Hierarchy button to save the node. The node appears as a
folder in the tree.
Step 2:
Add Pages to the Node
1. In the hierarchy tree, click to open the node. 2. Scroll down to the CMS pages section, and select the checkbox of each page you
want to include.
Add Selected Pages to Tree
3. Click the Add Selected Pages(s) to Tree button. Each selected page appears in
the tree below the node folder.
Hierarchy Tree with Node and Associated Pages
106
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 8: Creating Content
Organizing Your Pages
Step 3:
Add Navigation
1. In the tree, click to open the node. 2. In the Pagination Options for Nested Pages section, set Enable Pagination to
“Yes.”
3. In the Navigation Menu Options section, and set Enable Navigation Menu to
“Yes.”
4. Scroll back up to the Node Properties section, and click the Preview link.
Previewing the Node with Menu and Page Navigation
5. Click the Save Pages Hierarchy button to save the settings. Node Properties
Setting Title Description (Required) The Title of the node appears in the browser tab and title bar of the page. (Required) The URL key becomes part of the address to the page. Click this link to preview the page.
URL Key
Preview
Part II: Design & Content
107
Chapter 8: Creating Content
Organizing Your Pages
Render Metadata in HTML Head
Setting First Description Identifies this as the first page in the collection. Options include: Yes / No. Determines if links to the next and previous pages are displayed. Options include: Yes / No. Enables chapter and section divisions. A section appears only for top-level nodes and pages, and defines the hierarchy for SEO. Options include: Yes / No. Identifies this as a chapter or section. Options include: Yes / No.
Next/Previous
Enable Chapter/Section
Chapter/Section
Pagination Options for Nested Pages
Setting Enable Pagination Description Enables pagination for nested pages. Options include: Frame Use Parent Yes No
Determines how many links are displayed at once. If the current frame doesn’t include links to all available pages, creates a link from the current position to the next group of pages, plus or minus this value.
Frame Skip
Navigation Menu Options
Setting Enable Navigation Menu Description Displays a side navigation panel for
108
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 8: Creating Content
Organizing Your Pages
Setting
Description content pages in the hierarchy. Options include: Yes / No.
Menu Layout
Determines where the navigation menu appears. Options include: Use Default Content Left Column Right Column
Menu Detalization
Determines the pages included in the navigation menu. Options include: Only Children: Includes only subpages in the navigation. Neighbors and Children: Includes subpages and co-existing pages.
Maximal Depth
Determines the number of node levels included in the navigation menu. Determines whether the menu is based on a bulleted or numbered list. Options include: Unordered (bullet) Ordered (numbered)
List Type
List Style
Determines the style of bullet used for unordered lists, and the number style for ordered lists. Options include: Default Circle, Disc, Square Ordered list options include: Numbers (1, 2, 3, …) Lower Alpha (a, b, c, …) Upper Alpha (A, B, C, …) Lower Roman (i, ii, iii, …) Upper Roman (I, II, III, …)
Part II: Design & Content
109
Chapter 8: Creating Content
Organizing Your Pages
Page Hierarchy Configuration
The basic operation of Page Hierarchy is determined by your system configuration. Here’s where to look to change the basic settings:
To configure the page hierarchy settings: 1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. In the Configuration panel on the left, under General, select Content
Management.
3. Click to expand the CMS Page Hierarchy section, and make any changes that are
necessary.
System > Configuration > General > Content Management: CMS Page Hierarchy
4. Click to expand the CMS Versioning section, and make any changes necessary. 5. Click the Save Config button to save your changes.
Setting Enable Hierarchy Functionality Description Enables the use of page hierarchy. Options include: Yes / No Lets you associate meta data with pages in the hierarchy. Options include: Yes / No Determines the default menu style. Options include: Content Left Column Right Column
Enable Hierarchy Metadata
Default Layout for Hierarchy Menu
110
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 8: Creating Content
Creating Blocks of Content
Creating Blocks of Content
Magento Go gives you the ability to create blocks of content that can be used throughout your store. Static blocks can be added to any page, or group of pages, and used as a Frontend App. To learn more, see the Magento Go Design Guide.
To create a static block: 1. From the Admin panel, select CMS > Static Blocks. 2. Click the Add New Block button. Then, do the following:
a. Assign a descriptive Block Title. b. Assign a unique Identifier to the block. Use all lowercase characters, with underscores instead of spaces. The identifier is used for internal reference. c. Select the Store View(s) where this content block will be visible. d. Set Status to “Enabled” to make the block visible in the store. e. Complete the Content for the block. You can use the Editor to format text, create links and tables, add images, video, and audio.
3. When complete, click the Save Block button.
CMS > Static Blocks: Add New – General Information
Part II: Design & Content
111
Chapter 8: Creating Content
Changing the Footer
Changing the Footer
The page links in the footer of your site are located in static block that is easy to change. If you have created a Privacy Policy page, you can include a link to the page in the footer.
Footer Links
To add a link to a page in the footer: 1. From the Admin panel, go to CMS > Static Blocks. 2. In the Static Blocks list, click to open the Footer Links block. 3. To insert a new link, do the following:
a. Position the insertion point at the end of a line and press the Enter key to insert a new line. b. Type the text, as you want it to appear in the footer link. Then, drag to select the text you typed. c. In the toolbar, click the Insert Link button. d. In the Link URL box, type the URL Key for the page. For example, the URL Key for your Privacy Policy page might be “privacy-policy.”
Insert Link
112
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 8: Creating Content e. Set Target to “Open Link in Same Window.” f.
Changing the Footer
In the Title box, type the text you want to appear when someone hovers over the link.
g. Click the Save Block button to save the changes.
Changing the Copyright Notice
While you’re working in the footer, here’s another thing you can do. Because you own the content that you create, your site should include a copyright notice that declares your company as the legal owner of the content.
To change the copyright notice: 1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. In the Configuration panel on the left, under General, click Design. 3. Click to expand the Footer section. 4. In the Copyright text box, type the copyright notice that you want to appear in
the footer of each page. You can use the &Copy; character code to insert a copyright symbol.
System > Configuration > Web > Footer
Part II: Design & Content
113
Chapter 8: Creating Content
Creating Banners
Creating Banners
Banners display an image or block content, and can be set to appear for a specific period of time for a promotion. You can create a banner that appears only for certain customer groups, or when price rule conditions apply. When designing banners for your store, you should take into consideration both the page layout and the theme you are using. To make it easy, each banner type is associated with a specific area of the page. Although the header and footer are a fixed width, the width of the content area and left and right columns varies according to page layout.
2 Columns with Left Bar
2 Columns with Right Bar
3 Columns
1 Column
114
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 8: Creating Content
Creating Banners
To create a banner: 1. From the Admin panel, select CMS > Banners.
CMS > Banners
2. Click the Add Banner button. 3. In the Banner Name field, enter an appropriate name for the banner. 4. Set Active option to “Yes.” 5. In the Applies To list, do one of the following:
Select Any Banner Type. Select one of the Specified Banner Types. Then in the list, choose the banner type you want to use. (To select more than one, hold the Ctrl key down and click each option.)
Specific Banner Types
Part II: Design & Content
115
Chapter 8: Creating Content
Creating Banners
6. In the Banner Information panel on the left, select Content. Then in the Default
Content section, type or paste any HTML code needed to define the banner.
7. To insert an image, click the Insert Image button and select the image from
Media Storage.
Banner Default Content
8. The default content you have created is initially available to all store views. To
customize the content for view, clear the Use Default check box, and complete the content for the each view.
9. Click the Save Banner button to save your changes.
Banner Type Content Area Description The width of the main content area varies, depending on the column layout. The bottom section of the page contains the footer links and copyright notice. The top section of the page contains your logo, account links, search box, and top navigation. The left column of a two- or threecolumn layout. The right column of a two-or threecolumn layout.
Footer
Header
Left Column
Right Column
116
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 8: Creating Content
Creating Banners
Inserting Variables
You will recognize some of the variables in the list as the contact names for your store. In addition to these, you can create additional variables and include them in your content.
To insert a variable: 1. From the Default Content section, click the Insert Variable button. 2. Then in the list, click to select the variable you want to insert. 3. Click the Save Banner button to save your changes.
Insert Variable
Using Custom Variables
Custom variables can be incorporated into email templates, static blocks, and content pages. Variables might be considered an advanced topic, but they actually easy to create and use. Here’s how:
Step 1:
Define the Variable
1. From the Admin panel, select System > Custom Variable to display a list of
defined variables.
2. Click the Add New Variable button to be redirected to custom variable page. 3. Enter an identifier in the Variable Code field. Use all lowercase characters,
without spaces. (For example: store_hours.)
Part II: Design & Content
117
Chapter 8: Creating Content
Creating Banners
4. Enter a name in the Variable Name field for internal reference. 5. In the Variable HTML Value text field, enter content using basic HTML tags. You
can also forgo this option and enter plain text in the Variable Plain Value field.
6. Click the Save button to save your changes.
Note: The HTML code for this example would be
{{CustomVar code= "store_hours"}}
Step 2:
Add the Variable to the Block
1. From the Admin panel, select CMS > Static Block. 2. Do one of the following:
Click to edit a predefined block. Click the Add New Block button to create a new static block.
3. Complete the General Information. 4. From the Editor, click the Insert Variable button, or expand the default insert list
by clicking Show/Hide Editor and click Insert Variable.
5. Select the custom variable that you created. 6. Click the Save Block button to save your changes.
118
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 8: Creating Content
Creating Banners
Inserting a Frontend App
A Frontend App is a predefined block of dynamic content which can be incorporated into banners and other content. For example, types of Frontend Apps include: Banner Rotator Catalog New Product List Recently Viewed Products
To learn more about Frontend Apps, see the Magento Go Design Guide.
To insert a frontend app: 1. From the Default Content section, click the Insert Frontend Apps button. 2. Then in the list, click to select the type of app you want to insert. 3. Click the Save Banner button to save your changes.
Insert Frontend App
Part II: Design & Content
119
Chapter 8: Creating Content
Creating Banners
Adding Related Promotions
A price rule is an action that is applied when a set of conditions is met. Price rules can be set up that perform an action, based upon a set of conditions. To learn more, see: “Promotional Price Rules,” on page 293.
To add a related promotion: 1. In the Banner Information panel on the left, select Related Promotions. 2. Do one of the following:
In the Related Shopping Cart Price Rules section, select the checkbox of each price rule which you want to associate with this banner. In the Related Catalog Price Rules, select the checkbox of each price rule which you want to associate with this banner.
3. Click the Save Banner button to save your changes.
Related Promotions
120
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 8: Creating Content
Changing the Column Layout
Changing the Column Layout
You can achieve some interesting results if you experiment with different column layouts. For example, some of the built-in blocks are associated with a specific column. As a result, they might be available, but have nowhere to go. Just because your theme uses a certain layout, doesn’t mean that you can’t change it!
Compare Products
Compare Products is an example of a block that is set up to appear in the far right column, or side bar. It provides a detailed, side-by-side comparison of two or more products. You can customize the report to include additional attributes, or remove ones that you don’t want to include. Here’s how it works:
To compare products: 1. From your store, select a category from the top navigation. 2. For each product that you want to compare, click the Add to Compare link. 3. In the Compare Products block in the right column, click the Compare button.
The report opens in a new window.
4. To clear the Compare Products list, click the Clear All link.
Troubleshooting
But what if the Compare Products block doesn’t appear in your store? The Compare feature could be turned off, or your theme could be using a single column layout for the category list page.
Part II: Design & Content
121
Chapter 8: Creating Content
Changing the Column Layout
Add to Compare
Compare Products Report
122
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 8: Creating Content
Changing the Column Layout
Enabling the Compare Feature
Compare Products can be enabled and disabled by changing a single setting in your system configuration.
To enable Compare Products: 1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. In the Configuration panel on the left, under General, select Feature. 3. Click to expand the Compare Products section. Then, set Enable Compare
Products to “Yes.”
System > Configuration > General: Feature - Compare Products
4. Click the Save Config button to save your setting.
Changing the Column Layout
The Product Compare block is initially associated with the right column. So if your theme uses a one-column format, the Product Compare block won’t appear. You can make it show up by changing the page layout of the category from the one-column layout to the two-column layout with right bar.
To change the category column layout: 1. From the Admin panel, select Catalog > Manage Categories. 2. In the Categories tree, select the category level you want to change. 3. On the Custom Design tab, set Page Layout to “2 columns with right bar.” 4. Click the Save Category button.
Part II: Design & Content
123
Chapter 8: Creating Content
Changing the Column Layout
Notes:
_______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________
124
Magento Go User Guide
CHAPTER 9:
Creating Brand Advocates
Your Magento Go store has many features which you can use to build a sense of community, and keep customers engaged. In this chapter, you’ll learn how to use these tools to turn your customers into advocates of your brand: Product Reviews Tags Polls Add to Wishlist Email a Friend
Opportunities for Customer Engagement
Part II: Design & Content
125
Chapter 9: Creating Brand Advocates
Product Reviews
Product Reviews
Product reviews help build a sense of community, and are considered to be more credible than any advertising money can buy. In fact, Google gives sites with product reviews a higher ranking than those without. For those who find your site by searching for a specific product, a product review can become the landing page of your store. Product reviews help people find your store, keep them engaged, and often lead to a sale. Five Star Rating
The five star rating system can include any parameters you want. Initially, the reviewer’s evaluation is based on the default parameters of Value, Quality, and Price. The score appears below the title on the product list and detail pages. Read a Review A link to existing product reviews appears below the product name on the product detail page. If no reviews have been written, the customer is invited to “Be the first to review this product.”
Write a Review The reviewer gives the product a score from one to five stars, based on the rating parameters you want to use. The review text and summary can be typed or pasted into the form. As an option, a reviewer can provide a Nickname to appear as a “byline” when the review is published.
126
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 9: Creating Brand Advocates
Product Reviews
Submit the Review When a review is submitted, it appears in the list of reviews with a status of “Pending” until it is approved for publication.
Accept for Moderation The moderator can open a review in Edit mode, and after making any changes that are necessary, change the status to “Approved” or “Not Approved.
Publish Review If approved, the reviewer’s score is added to the “five star” rating of the product, and the review appears at the bottom of the Product Detail page.
Customer Dashboard All reviews written by customers are listed in their Account Dashboard. Customers can view the details, but not edit or delete the review.
Part II: Design & Content
127
Chapter 9: Creating Brand Advocates
Product Reviews
Moderating Reviews
Customers can write reviews for any product in your catalog. This can be done from the product view page by clicking the “Be the first to review this product” link. If the product already has been reviewed, there will be a “Write Your Own Review” section where the customer review it and give it a star rating. The number of stars indicates the satisfaction rating. Visitors to your site can click the Review(s) link to read the reviews and write their own. When a review is submitted, it is sent for moderation. When approved, the review is published in your store.
To edit and approve customer reviews: 1. From the Admin panel, select Catalog > Reviews and Ratings > Customer
Reviews > Pending Reviews.
Catalog > Reviews and Ratings > Customer Reviews > Pending Reviews
2. In the list, click a pending review to view the details, and edit if necessary. 3. To approve a pending review, change the Status field from “Pending” to
“Approved.” To reject a review, select “Not Approved.”
4. Click the Save Review button to save your changes.
128
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 9: Creating Brand Advocates
Product Reviews
Managing Ratings
Magento Go lets you create your own rating system, using terminology that relates to your products and customers.
Catalog > Reviews and Ratings > Manage Ratings
To create your own ratings: 1. From the Admin panel, select Catalog > Reviews and Ratings > Manage
Ratings.
2. Click the Add New button. 3. In the Rating Title section, enter the Default Value for the new rating. Then,
enter the translation for each language supported by your store.
Manage Ratings - Rating Title
Part II: Design & Content
129
Chapter 9: Creating Brand Advocates
Product Reviews
4. In the Rating Visibility section, select each store view where the rating will be
used. (Hold down the Ctrl key to select multiple options.)
Manage Ratings: Rating Visibility
5. To save the new rating, click the Save Rating button.
The new rating is now included in the list of “5 star” ratings.
Write Your Own Review
130
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 9: Creating Brand Advocates
Tags
Tags
Tags are one-word descriptors that act as keywords. They can be assigned to products by registered customers who are logged in, or by guests. They help customers organize and remember the products that they have seen, offer quick navigation, and help search engines index your store. Each product page has an Add Your Tags field at the bottom of the page in your store. To add a tag, a customer simply needs to enter a tag and click the Add Tags button.
Add Your Tags
To add a tag: 1. From any Product Detail page, scroll down to the Product Tags section at the
bottom of the page.
2. Type your tags in the Add Your Tags text box.
To enter multiple tags, separate each with a blank space. To enter a phrase, enclose the text in single quotes.
3. Click the Add Tags button.
The tag will be submitted for review and published on the site when approved.
To edit and approve a tag: 1. In the Admin panel, select Catalog >Tags > Pending Tags. 2. Select a pending tag.
From this screen, you can modify the tag (if misspelled) and change its Status.
3. To approve the tag, change the Status from Pending to Approved. To
disapprove, change this to Disapproved.
4. Click the Save Tag button to save changes.
Part II: Design & Content
131
Chapter 9: Creating Brand Advocates
Polls
Polls
Polls are powerful marketing tools, and Magento Go makes it easy to find out your customers’ opinions on just about everything. A poll occupies a small amount of space on the pages and is likely to be answered by many people. The poll results appear immediately after a response is submitted.
Community Poll on Home Page
If you set up multiple polls, a new poll will appear each time the page is visited or refreshed.
Community Poll on Product Detail Page
132
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 9: Creating Brand Advocates
Polls
To create a poll: 1. From the Admin panel, select CMS > Polls.
Poll Manager
2. In the upper-right corner of the Poll Manager, click the Add New button. 3. In the Poll Information section, enter the Poll Question. This is the question that
will appear in the Community Poll box.
4. The Status field is “Open” by default. To remove the poll from your store, set
Status to “Closed.”
5. In the Visible In list, select each store view where you want the poll to appear. 6. In the Poll Information panel on the left, select Poll Answers. Then, do the
following: a. Click the Add New Answer button to add a new answer. b. In the Answer Title field, enter the answer as it will appear in the website. c. To weight an answer, enter a number in the Votes Count field. The number will increment each time a customer chooses the answer. Repeat this step to add more answers.
Assigned Answers
7. Click the Save Poll button to save your poll.
Part II: Design & Content
133
Chapter 9: Creating Brand Advocates
Polls
Configuring the Poll
You can protect the poll results by preventing people from voting multiple times from the same IP Address.
To configure poll voting: 1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. In the Configuration panel on the left, under General, select Web. 3. Click to expand the Polls section, and set Disallow Voting in a Poll Multiple
Times from Same IP-address to “Yes.”
4. Click the Save Config button to save the setting.
System > Configuration > General: Web - Polls
134
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 9: Creating Brand Advocates
Email a Friend
Email a Friend
The Email a Friend link makes it easy for your customers to share links to products with their friends. A customer can send only five messages an hour.
To email a friend: 1. On the Product Detail page, click the Email a Friend link. When prompted,
either log into your customer account or register to open an account.
2. Complete the Message and recipient Name and Email Address.
To send the message to more than one person, click the Add Recipient button and complete the recipient information.
3. When ready to send the message, click the Send Email button.
Email a Friend
Message Received
Part II: Design & Content
135
Chapter 9: Creating Brand Advocates
Email a Friend
Add to Wishlist
Customers can add products to their Wishlist, and then share it with their friends. The Wishlist is maintained in the customer’s Account Dashboard, where it can be updated, or added to the Shopping Cart.
To add a product to the Wishlist: 1. Click the Add to Wishlist link. If you are logged in, your customer account will
open to the My Wishlist page.
Add to Wishlist
2. To share your Wishlist with friends, click the Share Wishlist button. 3. To purchase the item, click the Add to Cart button.
Wishlist in Account Dashboard
136
Magento Go User Guide
CHAPTER 10:
Managing Email & Newsletters
There are many opportunities to communicate with your customers from your store. Email messages are sent to welcome new accounts, when an order is invoiced, when an account changes, a shopping cart abandoned, and when products come back in stock. Magento Go includes a set of default templates that are designed for a variety of circumstances. These messages are referred to as "transactional emails" because they are sent automatically. In this chapter, you’ll learn how to: Create new email templates Use variables in email templates
System > Transactional Emails
Part II: Design & Content
137
Chapter 10: Managing Email & Newsletters
Adding a New Email Template
Adding a New Email Template
Make sure to take the time to preview the content of each email template to make sure that it is consistent with your message and branding. You can customize any email template and create new ones by editing the text, changing the HTML, modifying the CSS, and inserting variables.
To add a new template: 1. From the Admin panel, select System > Transactional Emails. 2. Click the Add New Template button. 3. In the Template list, select a default template from the list of predefined
templates.
Transactional Emails: Load Default Template
4. In the Locale list, select the language for the email, and click the Load Template
button.
Transactional Emails: Template Information
138
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 10: Managing Email & Newsletters
Adding a New Email Template
5. In the Template Information section, do the following:
a. Enter a Template Name for the new email template. b. In the Template Subject field, type the text to appear in the Subject header of the message. c. Complete the Template Content, according to your needs.
6. To insert a variable, do the following:
a. Position the cursor in the text where you want the variable to appear. b. Click the Insert Variable button. c. In the list of available variables, click the variable you want to insert into the template.
Using Custom Variables in Email
Custom variables are reusable pieces of information that can be created once and used in multiple places, such as email templates, blocks, and content pages.
Step 1:
Define the Variable
1. From the Admin panel, select System > Custom Variable. 2. Click the Add New Variable button. 3. Enter an identifier in the Variable Code field. Use all lowercase characters,
without spaces. (For example: store_hours.)
4. Enter a Variable Name, which is used for internal reference. Then, do one of the
following: In the Variable HTML Value text field, enter any content you want to include, using basic HTML tags. This option allows you to format the value. In the Variable Plain Value field, enter the variable value as plain text.
Part II: Design & Content
139
Chapter 10: Managing Email & Newsletters
Adding a New Email Template
System > Custom Variable
5. Click the Save button to save your changes.
Note: The HTML code for this example would be:
{{CustomVar code= "store_hours"}}
Step 2:
Add the Variable to the Email Template
1. From the Admin panel, select System > Transactional Emails. 2. Do one of the following:
Click to edit a predefined template. Click the Add New Template button to create a new one.
3. In the Template Content field, position the cursor where you want to insert the
custom variable.
4. Click the Insert Variable button, and select the custom variable to insert.
140
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 10: Managing Email & Newsletters
Adding a New Email Template
5. Click the Save Template button to save your changes.
Configuring Email Templates
The email template that is used to generate each transactional sales message is determined by your system configuration. If you create new templates, make sure to update your configuration so the correct template is used for each message sent.
To assign templates to a transactional messages: 1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. In the Configuration panel on the left, under Sales, select Sales Emails. Then,
select the appropriate templates for each of the following sections: Order and Order Comments Invoice and Invoice Comments Shipment and Shipment Comments Credit Memo and Credit Memo Comments
3. When complete, click the Save Config button to save your changes.
Part II: Design & Content
141
Chapter 10: Managing Email & Newsletters
Newsletters
Newsletters
Magento Go provides newsletter functionality enabling store administrators to enroll customers who have registered to receive newsletters. You can use this subscription list to send newsletters through a third- party service provider.
Newsletter Sign-Up
Subscription Options
To configure newsletter settings for your store: 1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. In the Configuration
panel on the left, under Customers, select Newsletter.
Configuration: Customers – Newsletter – Subscription Options
142
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 10: Managing Email & Newsletters
Newsletters
2. Click to expand the Subscription Options section, and do the following:
a. Set Need to Confirm to “Yes” to require each subscription to be confirmed by email. This double opt-in technique requires customers to confirm twice to reduce the number of customers who consider your newsletter to be spam. b. Set allow Guest Subscription to “Yes” to allow visitors to your site to subscribe without opening an account.
3. Click the Save Config button to save the settings.
Preview the Newsletter Confirmation Template
Magento Go has a standard set of newsletter templates, including a confirmation template, and others to confirm a request to subscribe or unsubscribe. You should preview each of the templates, and make any changes necessary to keep the message consistent with your voice and brand.
To modify the newsletter template: 1. From the Admin panel, select System > Transactional Emails. 2. In the Template List, select “Newsletter Subscription Confirmation.” Then, click
the Load Template button.
3. Click the Preview button, to open the template in a new window. 4. If you want to make changes, do the following:
a. Enter a new Template Name. b. Make any changes necessary to the Template Content.
5. Click the Save Template button.
Part II: Design & Content
143
Chapter 10: Managing Email & Newsletters
Newsletters
To update the default confirmation template: 1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. In the Configuration panel on the left, under Customers, select Newsletter. 3. Click to expand the Subscription Options section, and make any changes that
are necessary.
Subscription Options
4. Click the Save Config button to save your changes.
144
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 10: Managing Email & Newsletters
Newsletters
Managing Your List of Subscribers
Magento Go allows store administrators to manage a list of newsletter subscribers. You can export the list as a CSV or XML file. You can also unsubscribe and delete newsletter subscribers.
To export a subscriber list: 1. From the Admin panel, select Newsletter > Newsletter Subscribers. 2. Click the Reset Filter button to load the complete subscriber list. Then, do one of
the following: To select all subscribers, click the Select All link in the upper-left corner of the list. To select individual subscribers, select the checkbox of each record. To select only the records with a Status of “Subscribed,” set the search filter for the Status column to “Subscribed.” Then, click the Search button.
3. To export the selected subscribers, set the Export to list to one of the following:
CSV XML
4. Then, click the Export button. 5. When prompted, Save the file to your computer.
Managing Requests to Unsubscribe
To unsubscribe to the newsletter: 1. From the Admin panel, select System > Newsletter. 2. Click the Reset Filter button. 3. To select all available users, click Select All or you can select individual
subscribers by checking on their corresponding boxes.
4. Set the Actions list to “Unsubscribe.” 5. Click the Submit button to save your changes.
Part II: Design & Content
145
Chapter 10: Managing Email & Newsletters
Newsletters
Notes:
_______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________
146
Magento Go User Guide
Part III: Building Your Catalog
Part III: Building Your Catalog
147
CHAPTER 11:
Mastering Search
Research shows that people who use search are more likely to make a purchase than those who rely on navigation alone. In fact, according to some studies, people who use search are nearly twice as likely to make a purchase. Magento Go has a powerful search engine which you can use as is, or fine-tune to make it even more effective. In this chapter, you will learn how to take full advantage of catalog search, by shaping the way search terms are used, and monitoring the results.
Search Results List
Part III: Building Your Catalog
149
Chapter 11: Mastering Search
Storefront Search Tools
Storefront Search Tools
Your Magento Go store includes a variety of search methods to help customers find products, and also to improve the indexing of your store by search engines.
Quick Search The Quick Search box is located in the header of each page, and helps visitors find products in your catalog. The search term can be either a full or partial match or any other word or phrase to describe a product.
Advanced Search Advanced Search provides an easy way for people to search your catalog by typing text directly into a form. You can configure the form to include any fields from your product catalog. The link to Advanced Search is in the footer of your store.
Popular Search Terms The Popular Search Terms page lists search terms as a “tag cloud,” using text size to indicate the popularity of the term. The link to the Popular Search Terms page is in the footer of your store.
150
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 11: Mastering Search
Storefront Search Tools
Quick Search
The Quick Search box in the upper-right corner helps visitors find products in your catalog. The search term can be the full or partial product name, or any other word or phrase that describes the product.
Quick Search with Suggestions
In addition to the product names and terms from your catalog, you can configure the search to offer close matches, display search term frequency, and to make suggestions as text is typed.
To configure the search box: 1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. In the Configuration panel on the left, under Catalog, select Catalog. Then, click
to expand the Catalog Search section.
System > Configuration > Catalog: Catalog – Catalog Search
3. Complete the settings according to your preference. 4. Click the Save Config button to save your changes.
Part III: Building Your Catalog
151
Chapter 11: Mastering Search
Storefront Search Tools
Catalog Search Settings
Setting Minimal Query Length Description The minimal number of characters required for a valid search term. The maximum number of characters accepted in a valid search term. The maximum number of words accepted in a valid search term. If set to “Yes,” the Search box offers up to ten suggestions as text is typed. Options include: Yes / No Note: This option can impact the performance of the search. Show Results Count for Each Suggestion Shows the number of times each suggested search term has been used by others. Only search terms with actual results are offered as suggestions. Options include: Yes / No Enable Search Recommendations If set to “Yes,” the Search box displays a list of close matches based on search queries made by other people. Options include: Yes / No
Maximum Query Length
Maximum Query Words Count
Enable Search Suggestions
152
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 11: Mastering Search
Storefront Search Tools
Advanced Search
Advanced Search provides an easy way for people to search your catalog by entering what they are looking for directly into a form. Because the form contains multiple fields, a single search can include several parameters. The result of the search is a list of the products which match the values entered in the form. The link to Advanced Search is in the footer of your store. Each field in the form corresponds to an attribute from a product record. You can determine which fields to include by setting the attribute properties to “Include in Advanced Search.” As a best practice, you should include only the fields that your customers are most likely to use to find a product, because using too many can impact the speed of the search.
Advanced Search
Part III: Building Your Catalog
153
Chapter 11: Mastering Search
Popular Search Terms
Popular Search Terms
The Popular Search Terms pages lists search terms which have been entered by visitors to your store, and ranks them by popularity. Search terms are listed in a “tag cloud” format, where the size of the text indicates the popularity of the term. The link to the Popular Search Terms page is located in the footer of your store. You can leverage your growing selection of search terms by including them on the Popular Search Terms page. Because the Search Terms page is indexed by search engines, any terms included on the page will help improve your search engine ranking, and the visibility of your store.
Popular Search Terms
154
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 11: Mastering Search
Popular Search Terms
To enable Popular Search Terms: 1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. In the Configuration panel on the left, under Catalog, select Catalog. Then, do
the following: a. Click to expand the Search Engine Optimizations section. b. Set Popular Search Terms to “Enable.”
3. Click the Save Config button to save the setting.
Part III: Building Your Catalog
155
Chapter 11: Mastering Search
Using the Search Results List
Using the Search Results List
The Search Results list displays all products which match the query text submitted through the Quick Search box or Advanced Search form. The Search Results list and the Product list are actually the same list. The only difference is that one is the result of a search query, and the other is the result of category navigation. The products can be displayed in either a grid or list format, and the records can be sorted by any number of parameters. Page controls are used to sort the list, change the format, and to advance from one page to the next. The left column of the Search Results page may also include layered navigation under the “Shop By” heading, which lists products by category and attribute. You can control the format and operation of the Search Results list from System > Configuration.
Search Results List
156
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 11: Mastering Search
Using the Search Results List
Page Controls
Control Description View As Displays the list in either a Grid or List format. Sort By Changes the sort order of the list. Show Per Page Changes how may products are shown per page. Pagination Links Lets the user navigate to other pages in the search results list.
To configure the list: 1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. In the Configuration panel on the left, under Catalog, select Catalog. Then, click
to expand the Frontend section.
3. Complete the settings according to your preference, and click the Save Config
button.
Catalog Frontend Search Configuration
Part III: Building Your Catalog
157
Chapter 11: Mastering Search
Using the Search Results List
Configuration Settings
Setting List Mode Description Determines the format of the search results list. Options include: Grid Only: Formats the list as a grid of rows and columns. Each product appears in a single cell of the grid. List Only: Formats the list with each product on a separate row. Grid (default) / List: By default, products appear in Grid View. List (default) / Grid: By default, products appear in List View. Products per Page on Grid Allowed Values Determines the number of products displayed in Grid View. To provide a selection of options, enter multiple values separated by commas. Determines the number of products displayed per page by default, in Grid View. Determines the number of products displayed per page by default, in List View. If set to “Yes,” includes the “ALL” option in the “Show per Page” control. Determines the sort order of the search results list. The selection of options is determined by the Display Settings of the category and the available attributes. The default is set to “Use All Available Attributes,” and typically includes: Best Value Name Price
Products per Page on Grid Default Value
Products per Page on List Default Value
Allow All Products per Page
Product Listing Sort By
158
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 11: Mastering Search
Search Terms
Search Terms
Search Terms List The Search Terms list displays all search query terms submitted by visitors to your store. You can use the information to learn more about what your customers are looking for, and to display targeted search results and landing pages.
Search Term Information Every search term in the list can be edited, and new terms added. The Search Term information page records how many times the term has been entered, and any synonyms, landing pages, and related search terms associated with the term.
Search Term Report The Search Term report lists the number of results generated from each query term submitted, and the number of times each was submitted within the range of time specified for the report. The report data can be exported, and opened in Excel for further analysis.
Part III: Building Your Catalog
159
Chapter 11: Mastering Search
Search Terms
Managing Search Terms
The stronger your store’s search capability, the sooner shoppers will be able to find what they want. And the sooner they find what they want, the more likely they will make a purchase. You can learn what your customers are looking for by examining the list of search terms they have used in your store. Perhaps they’re looking for a product you don’t carry. If enough people are looking for the same product, perhaps it’s time to add it to your catalog.
Suggestions
Search terms can be suggested as text is typed into the Quick Search box. Up to ten qualified search terms can appear as suggestions below the search box. Only search terms which have been submitted from your store and have produced results are offered as suggestions.
Quick Search Box with Suggested Search Term
If a search returns no results, and there is not an alternate landing page set up for the term, a close match is offered as a possible solution. The text, “Did you mean:” appears with a list of possible “close match” suggestions.
Search Results List without Results
160
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 11: Mastering Search
Search Terms
Landing Pages
Magento Go lets you associate each search term with a specific landing page. The landing page can be a content page, a category page, a product detail page, or even a page on a different site. When people look for a product that you don’t carry, rather than leave them empty handed, why not redirect them to a similar product in your catalog? Or, if you exchange referrals with another store, you might send some business their way. The source of the referral would show up in their analytics, and they might return the favor.
Synonyms
You can improve the effectiveness of catalog search by including different terms that people may use to describe the same item. For example, you don’t want to lose a sale just because someone is looking for a “sofa,” and your product is listed as a “couch.” You can expand your ability to capture a broader range of search terms by entering the words, “sofa, “davenport,” and “loveseat” as synonyms for “couch.” Then, you can direct them all to the same landing page.
Trapping Misspelled Words
You can use search terms to capture common misspellings and redirect them to the appropriate page. For example, if you sell wrought iron patio furniture, you know that many people misspell the term as “rod iron,” or “rot iron.” Why not enter them as search terms and synonyms for “wrought iron,” along with a redirect to the appropriate page?
Part III: Building Your Catalog
161
Chapter 11: Mastering Search
Search Terms
Using the Search Terms List
The Search Terms list displays all of the search query terms that have been submitted by visitors to your store. Each term in the list can be edited, and new terms added to the list.
To display the Search Terms list: 1. From the Admin panel, select Catalog > Search Terms. 2. Click the row of any record to edit the search term. To delete a search term: 1. In the list, select the checkbox of the term to the deleted. 2. Set the Actions list to “Delete.” 3. Click the Submit button.
To learn more about Action controls, see: “List Filters and Controls,” on page 173.
Catalog > Search Terms
162
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 11: Mastering Search
Search Terms
Search Term List Definitions
Column Description Displays a checkbox to select records for deletion using the Actions control. Search Query Contains the actual text that was used as a search term. Identifies the store and/or views where the search term is available. Displays how many products were returned in the search results since the last time the term was submitted. Displays the total number of times this term has been used. Displays any synonym assigned to this search term. Displays the URL of an alternate page that is displayed when this search term is used. Displays whether or not the search term is available to be listed as a suggestion in the Quick Search box. Provides an Edit link that can be used to open the record in Edit Mode. You can also click anywhere on the row to open the record in Edit Mode.
Store
Results
Number of Uses
Synonym For
Redirect
Display in Suggested Terms
Action
Part III: Building Your Catalog
163
Chapter 11: Mastering Search
Search Terms
Adding a Search Term
People may use different terminology to describe what is essentially the same product. You can use search terms to “cast a wider net,” and direct people to the most closely matching products in your catalog.
To add a new search term: 1. From the Admin panel, select Catalog > Search Terms.
Catalog > Search Terms
2. Click the Add New button.
Catalog > Search Terms: General Information
3. In the General Information section, in the Search Query box, type the word or
phrase that you want to add as a new search term.
4. Select the Store where the search term will be used. If your store is available in
multiple languages, select the applicable store view.
164
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 11: Mastering Search
Search Terms
5. In the Synonym For field, enter the synonym that you want to associate with this
search term.
6. To redirect the search results to another page in your store, or to a page on
another website, type the full URL of the target page in the Redirect URL field.
7. If you want to offer suggestions as text is typed in the search box, set Display in
Suggested Terms to “Yes.”
8. Click the Save Search button.
Adding Related Search Terms
The Related Search Terms section of a search term record lets you keep a list of terms that are related. You can use the information to keep a running total of how many people are searching for the same thing.
To add related search terms: 1. From the Admin panel, select Catalog > Search Terms. 2. In the list, click to open the search term in edit mode. 3. In the Related Search Terms section, do the following:
a. Click the Reset Filter button to generate a list of all search terms. b. In the first column, select the checkbox of each search term that is related to the term that is listed in the General Information section of the record. c. Click the Save Search button. d. In the first column, set the Search Filter to “Any.”
4. Click the Search button to save the settings.
Related Search Terms
Part III: Building Your Catalog
165
Chapter 11: Mastering Search
Search Terms
Search Term Field Definitions
Field Search Query Description (Required) Contains the actual text that was used as a search term. (Required) Identifies the store and/or views where the search term is available. (Required) Displays how many products were returned in the search results since the last time the term was submitted. Note: Only search terms with results are offered as suggestions in the Quick Search box. Number of Uses (Required) Displays the total number of times this term has been used. This number is used to determine the “Top 5 Search Terms” section of the Dashboard report. If this search term is a synonym for another word, enter the other word in this field. If a search is made for the synonym, the results for the primary search term appear. Enter the full URL of the page that is displayed when this search term is used. The Redirect URL can be a product, category, or content page within your site, or a page on another site. Determines if this search term is available to be listed as a suggestion in the Quick Search box. Options include: Yes / No
Store
Number of results (For the last time placed)
Synonym For
Redirect URL
Display in Suggested Terms
166
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 11: Mastering Search
Using Product Attributes in Search
Using Product Attributes in Search
Any field, or attribute, of a product record can be used as the basis of catalog search. An attribute can be the product name, brand, color, or any other field that is included in the product record. The properties assigned to the attribute determine how and where it can be used in search. The Attribute Frontend Properties section of the attribute definition lets you include or exclude the attribute from Quick Search and Advanced Search, and also assign a search weight to the attribute. For more information, see: Use in Quick Search Use in Advanced Search Search Weight
Attribute Frontend Properties
In addition, the Visibility of the individual product record must be set to make it available for use in search operations. For more information, see:
Visibility Setting in Product Record
Part III: Building Your Catalog
167
Chapter 11: Mastering Search
Using Product Attributes in Search
Weighted Search
Magento Go lets you assign a weight to any product attribute that is used in catalog search. The weight is a numerical score from 1-5 that determines the rank or value of the item.
To set the search properties of an attribute: 1. From the Admin panel, go to Catalog > Attributes > Manage Attributes. 2. Find the attribute in the list, and click to open the record. 3. Scroll down to the Frontend Properties section, and do the following:
a. To include the attribute in Quick Search box queries, set Use in Quick Search to “Yes.” b. To include the attribute as a field on the Advanced Search form, set Use in Advanced Search to “Yes.” c. To establish the search value of the attribute, set Search Weight to a number from 1 to 5.
4. When complete, click the Save Attribute button.
168
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 11: Mastering Search
Reporting and Analysis
Reporting and Analysis
You can check the Search Term reports on a regular basis, to see what people are searching for, and to analyze how well your search terms are performing. Each report shows the results and hits for the specified range of time. Search Term Report Dashboard “Top 5” Reports
Search Term Report
The Search Term report lists the number of results generated from each query term submitted and the number of times each one was submitted, within the range of time specified for the report. The report data can be exported, and opened in Excel for further analysis. If you closely monitor traffic, you can combine the search results from your store with the search results from Google Analytics for a more complete picture of how people arrive at your site, and what they do once they get there.
Reports > Search Terms
Part III: Building Your Catalog
169
Chapter 11: Mastering Search
Reporting and Analysis
To run the Search Term Report 1. From the Admin panel, select Reports > Search Terms. 2. To export the report data, select one of the following from the Export to list:
CSV Exports the search report data to a .csv (comma-separated values) file. Note: Because the first column in the report is “ID,” you may not be able to open the file in Excel. The Open Office spreadsheet is an open source equivalent, which sometimes proves to be a better choice for managing import/export data. Excel Exports the search report to a .xml file. The .xml file can be saved to your computer and opened in Excel.
3. Click the Export button. When prompted, you can either open or save the file. Search Term Report
Column ID Description Contains the record number of each search term that is included in the report, and is used for internal reference. Contains each search term that is included in the report. Identifies the store and/or views where the search term is available. Displays how many products were displayed in the search results during the most recent use of search term. Note: Only search terms with qualified results can be offered as suggestions in the Quick Search box. Hits Displays the total number of uses of this search term.
Search Query
Store
Results
170
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 11: Mastering Search
Reporting and Analysis
Top Search Terms
The Dashboard provides a summary of the top search terms and most recently used search terms during the range of time specified for the report. Each report includes a summary of search term results, and the number of times the term was used. The reports include: Last 5 Search Terms Top 5 Search Terms
Dashboard Top Search Term Reports
Google Analytics
Google Analytics provides detailed statistics about your website visitors, as well information about the effectiveness of your marketing campaigns. For step-bystep instructions, see: “Google Analytics” on page 436.
System > Configuration > Sales > Google API: Google Analytics
Part III: Building Your Catalog
171
Chapter 11: Mastering Search
Back Office Search Tools
Back Office Search Tools
Global Search The Global Search box can be used to quickly find any record in your database. The results list can include customers, products, orders, or any related attribute.
List Filters and Controls There are many lists of data associated with your store, including products, orders, customers, search terms, pages, blocks, banners, and so on. Each list uses the same set of pagination, sorting, filtering, and action controls.
Search Indexing As you work with your product catalog, the search index will periodically need to be refreshed to keep current with changes to the database. Whenever you make changes which might affect the indexing of your catalog, take a moment to refresh the search index.
172
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 11: Mastering Search
Back Office Search Tools
Global Search
The Global Search box is located in the upper-right corner of the Admin panel, and gives you the ability to find any record in the database. The results can include customers, products, orders, or any related attribute.
Global Search
List Filters and Controls
The Admin panel includes many lists of data, including products, orders, customers, search terms, pages, blocks, banners, and so on. Each list has the same basic set of pagination, sorting, filtering, and action controls. To sort a list, simply click the column name in any header.
Sorting the List
Part III: Building Your Catalog
173
Chapter 11: Mastering Search
Back Office Search Tools
List Filters
When working from the Admin panel, you can use the filters across the top of the list to focus the results of the search. Simply enter the value you want to find, and click the Search button.
Search Filters
Action Controls
When working from the Admin panel, you can use the action controls to apply an operation to a single record, or to multiple records. The checkboxes in the first column are used to select each record. The Actions list contains the selection of actions which are available for the list. To apply the action to the selected records, click the Submit button.
Action Controls
174
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 11: Mastering Search
Back Office Search Tools
Refreshing the Search Index
As you work with your product catalog, the search index will periodically need to be refreshed to keep it current with changes made to the database. Whenever you make changes which might affect the indexing of your catalog, take a moment to refresh the search index.
To refresh the search indexing: 1. From the Admin panel, select Catalog > Search Indexing. 2. Click the Refresh Index button.
You are notified that the request is in the queue.
Catalog > Search Indexing
Part III: Building Your Catalog
175
Chapter 11: Mastering Search
Back Office Search Tools
Notes:
_______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________
176
Magento Go User Guide
CHAPTER 12:
Navigation by Category
Categories are the primary way people find products in your catalog. Categories appear in the top navigation of your store, the breadcrumb trail, and in the “layered navigation” which is often found on the left side of a two- or threecolumn page. The category URL usually appears in the address bar of a browser, and is indexed by search engines. For a product to be visible in your store, it must be assigned to at least one category. Each category can have a dedicated landing page with an image, static blocks, a description, list of products. You can also create additional designs for your category pages that become active for a specific period of time.
Category Navigation
Part III: Building Your Catalog
177
Chapter 12: Navigation by Category
Breadcrumb Trail
Breadcrumb Trail
The breadcrumb trail is a set of links that shows where you are in relation to other pages in your store. You can click any link in the breadcrumb trail to return to a previous page. The format and position of the breadcrumb trail varies by theme, but it is usually located in the upper-left, just below the header.
Breadcrumb Trail on Product Detail Page
Breadcrumb Trails on Content Pages
The breadcrumb trail can be configured to appear on CMS content pages, as well as catalog pages.
To show the breadcrumb trail on content pages: 1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. In the Configuration panel on the left, under General, select Web.
System > Configuration > General: Web - Default Pages
3. Click to expand the Default Pages section. 4. Set Show Breadcrumbs for CMS Pages to “Yes.”
178
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 12: Navigation by Category
Top Navigation
Top Navigation
The top navigation of your store includes the highest level of categories that are available in your catalog. You can think of the top navigation as “departments” in your store, and each top-level category page as a destination landing page.
Top Navigation with Subcategories The catalog structure is like an upside down tree, with the root on top. The categories in the top navigation of your store exist one level below the root.
Root Category
Part III: Building Your Catalog
179
Chapter 12: Navigation by Category
Creating Categories
Creating Categories
Every product in your catalog must be assigned to at least one category. Therefore, before you can build your product records, you must first establish the basic category structure of your catalog.
Catalog > Manage Categories
Step 1:
Create a Category
1. From the Admin panel, select Catalog > Manage Categories. 2. In the Categories panel on the left, click to select the level that you want to be the
parent of the new category. This will be the level just above where the category will appear. If you’re starting from the beginning without sample data, there will be only two categories in the list: “Default Category,” which is the root, and “Example Category,” which becomes the first option in the top navigation. Any additional subcategories levels are nested below.
3. Click the Add Subcategory button.
180
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 12: Navigation by Category
Creating Categories
Step 2:
Complete the General Information
Category > Manage Categories: Add Subcategory - General Information
1. Type the Name of the category. 2. Do any of the following:
In the Description box, enter a paragraph or two of descriptive text to accompany the products on the page. At the Image field, click the Browse button to upload an image for the category page. Wait until the next step, and display a static block that contains both text and images instead.
3. Do the following:
a. Enter a descriptive Page Title. b. Complete the Meta Keywords. c. Complete the Meta Description.
4. Set Is Active to “Yes.” 5. If you want to include the subcategory in the top navigation of your store, set
Include in Navigational Menu to “Yes.”
6. Assign a URL Key to the category.
Note: Do not add the “.html” suffix to the URL key, because it is managed by your system configuration.
Part III: Building Your Catalog
181
Chapter 12: Navigation by Category
Creating Categories
Step 2:
Complete the Display Settings
You can configure the category page to display a static block and product list, or just one or the other. A static block can provide additional information, including text, images, and even embedded video on a category landing page.
Category > Manage Categories: Add Subcategory – Display Settings
1. On the Display Settings tab, do the following:
a. Set Display Mode to one of the following: Products Only Static Block Only Static Block and Products
b. If applicable, select the static block you want to appear on the category page from the CMS Block list. c. If you want this category page to display the filter by attribute section of layered navigation, set Is Anchor to “Yes.” d. Clear the checkbox under Default Product Listing Sort By. Then select one of the available values to sort the list. By default, all available attributes are listed. The default values typically include: Best Value Name Price
2. When complete, click the Save Category button.
182
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 12: Navigation by Category
Creating Categories
Moving Categories
To move categories: 1. From the Admin panel, select Catalog > Manage Categories. 2. To move categories, simply drag-and-drop them in a new location. Category
order changes are saved automatically for you.
To delete a category: 1. From the Admin panel, select Catalog > Manage Categories. 2. Click the category you want to delete. 3. Click the Delete Category button to save your changes.
Note: Delete category cannot be reversed, so make sure that you have selected the correct category.
Part III: Building Your Catalog
183
Chapter 12: Navigation by Category
Layered Navigation
Layered Navigation
Layered navigation makes it easy to find a product based on category, price range, or any other available attribute. Layered navigation usually appears in the left column of search results and category pages, and can also be used on the home page. The standard layered navigation includes a “Shop By” list of categories and price range.
Standard Layered Navigation
Anchor Categories
In addition to the standard layered navigation, anchor categories display an additional section that lets you filter the list by attribute value. The attribute section of layered navigation appears when the category is set to “Is Anchor.” Each attribute can be configured to display the results, which is the number of matching records found.
184
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 12: Navigation by Category
Layered Navigation
Layered Navigation with Anchor Categories
The attribute properties, combined with the product properties determine which attributes can be used as filters for layered navigation. Only those with the catalog input type of Dropdown, Multiple Select or Price can be used as filterable attributes. In addition, the number of anchor categories and filterable attributes you have available are determined by your Magento Go plan.
Magento Go Plan Get Going Going Places Go Beyond Go Anywhere
Anchor Categories 50 50 50 200
Filterable Attributes 10 50 50 110
Setting up anchored layered navigation is a two-step process. First of all, you need to set the attribute properties to make it available for use as a filter. Then, make the category an anchor.
Part III: Building Your Catalog
185
Chapter 12: Navigation by Category
Layered Navigation
Step 1:
Set the Attribute Properties
1. From the Admin panel, select Catalog > Attributes > Manage Attributes. 2. Click to open the attribute in Edit mode, and do the following:
a. Scroll down to the Frontend Properties section, and set Use In Layered Navigation to one of the following: Filterable (with results) Filterable (no results)
b. Set Use In Search Results Layered Navigation to “Yes.”
Attribute Frontend Properties for Layered Navigation
Step 2:
Make the Category an Anchor
1. From the Admin panel, select Catalog > Manage Categories. 2. In the Categories panel on the left, click to open the category. 3. On the Display Settings tab, set Is Anchor to “Yes.” 4. Click the Save Category button. 5. To test the setting, go to your store and select the category from the top
navigation. The layered navigation with filters will appear.
186
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 12: Navigation by Category
Layered Navigation
Layered Navigation Settings
You can configure the way layered navigation is displayed, including the product count and price range.
To configure layered navigation: 1. From the Admin panel, select System Configuration. 2. In the Configuration panel on the left, under Catalog, select Catalog. 3. Click to expand the Layered Navigation section. Then, do the following:
a. To display the results after each attribute, set Display Product Count to “Yes.” b. Set Price Navigation Step Calculation to one of the following: Automatic Manual
c. For a manual calculation, enter a number in the Default Price Navigation Step field to determine how the price ranges are grouped. For example, if you enter 100, the prices will appear in groups of 100.
System > Configuration > Catalog: Layered Navigation
Part III: Building Your Catalog
187
Chapter 12: Navigation by Category
General Information
General Information
Setting Name
Description (Required) The category name appears in the navigation, and also in the URL key of the category page and associated product pages. The category description, if used, appears below the category image, and before the product list. The category image, if used, appears at the top of the category page, before the description and product list. Note: As an alternative, you can use a CMS static block in place of the description and image.
Description
Image
Page Title
The category page title appears in the browser tab and title bar. The title should be not more than twelve words in length, and include a combination of primary and secondary keywords. Keywords are used by some search engines, and not by others. You can use a keyword search tool to identify high value keywords that relate to your category. A general rule is to use no
Meta Keywords
188
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 12: Navigation by Category
General Information
Setting
Description more than thirty keywords, or 180 characters. Avoid repeats, and words such as “a,” “an,” “or” and “that.”
Meta Description
Enter a description of the category, using approximately twenty-five words or 150 characters. (Required) If you want this category to be available, select “Yes.” Options include: Yes / No (Required) If you want this category to be included in the top navigation, select “Yes.” If you want this category to be active, but hidden, select “No.” A “hidden” category does not appear in the top navigation, but is still included in layered navigation. Options include: Yes / No
Is Active
Include in Navigation Menu
URL Key
Enter text to represent the category in the URL. You should use all lowercase characters and no spaces. (You can use a hyphen to represent the space between words.) Note: The format of the category URL is determined by your system configuration.
Part III: Building Your Catalog
189
Chapter 12: Navigation by Category
Display Settings
Display Settings
Setting Display Mode
Description Determines the content elements displayed on the category page. Options include: Products Only Static Block Only Static Block and Products
CMS Block
If you want to display a CMS static block at the top of the category page, select the name of the block from the list. When set to “Yes,” includes the “filter by attribute” section in the layered navigation of the category page. Options include: Yes / No (Required) By default, the Best Value, Name, and Price attributes are provided as sorting option for product lists. You can define and add attributes as needed. To customize the sorting option, clear the Use All Available Attributes check box and select the attributes you want to use.
Is Anchor
Available Product Listing Sort By
190
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 12: Navigation by Category
Display Settings
Setting Default Product Listing Sort By
Description (Required) To define the default “Sort By” option, clear the Use Config Settings check box and select an attribute from the list. By default, Magento Go displays price range in increments of 10, 100, and 1000, depending on the price range of the products in the list. You can predefine the Price Step range by specifying your own number in this field by clearing the Use Config Settings check box.
Layered Navigation Price Step
Part III: Building Your Catalog
191
Chapter 12: Navigation by Category
Custom Design
Custom Design
The Custom Design tab lets you to control the look and feel of a category and all assigned product pages, including the content blocks and template layout. Customizing category pages and assigned products will help you promote selected products and categories to increase sales. Customizing category pages and assigned products enables you to differentiate selected products and categories. For example, you can develop specific designs for brands or a special line of products in order to increase sales.
To customize a category page: 1. If the parent category of the selected category has already been customized and
you want to use same settings, set Use Parent Category Settings to “Yes.”
2. If you want the custom settings to apply all the products assigned to this
Category, set Apply to Products to “Yes.” Otherwise, the customization applies only to the category page.
3. To apply a different theme to the category, select the theme you want to use from
the Custom Theme list.
4. To apply the category design to a specific range of time, click the calendar to
select the Active From and Active To dates. Otherwise, the design will take effect when you save the changes to the category. Tip: You can further change the layout of the category page by selecting one of the default layouts.
5. Click the Save Category button to save your changes.
192
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 12: Navigation by Category
Custom Design
Setting Use Parent Category Settings
Description To inherit the design settings from the parent category set this option to “Yes.” Options include: Yes / No To apply the custom settings to all products in the category, set to “Yes.” Options include: Yes / No Select the custom theme you want to apply from the list of available themes. If applying a custom theme for a period of time, enter the beginning date, or select the date from the Calendar. If applying a custom theme for a period of time, enter the ending date, or select the date from the Calendar. To apply a different layout to the category page, select one of the following: No layout updates: This option is preselected by default and does not apply layout changes to the category page. Empty: This option lets you define your own page layout.(Requires an understanding of XML.) 1 column: Applies the 1-column layout to the category page. 2 columns with left bar: Applies the 2 column layout to the category page. 2 columns with right bar: Applies the 2-columns with right bar layout to the category page. 3 columns: Applies the 3 column layout to the category page.
Apply to Products
Custom Theme
Active From
Active To
Page Layout
Custom Layout Update
You can further customize the theme with XML coding. See the Magento Go Design Guide to learn more about customizing themes.
Part III: Building Your Catalog
193
Chapter 12: Navigation by Category
Custom Design
Category Products
The Category Products tab enables you to specify the products that belong to this category.
To assign products to a category: 1. Check the relevant check boxes of the products you want to add. You can use
filters to limit the products that are shown. Use the Reset Filter button to show all products again. You can also assign products to categories when editing products.
2. Click the Save Category button to save your changes.
194
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 12: Navigation by Category
Category View Optimization
Category View Optimization
The Category View Optimization tab appears for products and categories enabled in your system configuration. It lets you install tracking scripts for Google Website Optimizer to test the effectiveness of pages on your site. For more information, see: “Google Website Optimizer,” on page 437.
Part III: Building Your Catalog
195
Chapter 12: Navigation by Category
Category Configuration
Category Configuration
You can use the default category settings to create your entire catalog. However, for even better results, you can make adjustments to the format of the category and products URLs to optimize your catalog for search engines.
Category Depth
The first level of categories is typically used for the top navigation of your store. Below that, you can have as many additional subcategories as needed. The category structure of your catalog can influence how well your site is indexed by search engines. The deeper a category, the less likely it is to be thoroughly indexed. As a general rule, anywhere between one and three levels is considered optimum. However, the maximum number of levels available in your top navigation is determined by your system configuration.
To set the maximum depth of the top navigation: 1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. In the Configuration panel on the left, under Catalog, select Catalog. 3. Click to expand the Category Top Navigation section.
System > Configuration > Catalog: Catalog – Category Top Navigation
4. In the Maximal Depth field, enter the number of subcategory levels you want to
include in the top navigation.
5. Click the Save Config button to save the setting.
196
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 12: Navigation by Category
Category Configuration
Category URL Options
You can configure the URL of pages in your catalog to either include or exclude the category path. By default, all category pages include the category path, as follows: http://yourstore.gostorego.com/furniture/living-room/couch.html
The same product URL without the category path looks like this: http://yourstore.gostorego.com/couch.html
In addition, you can configure your catalog to include or exclude the .html suffix from the category and product URLs. Here’s an example of the same category URL, with, and without the suffix: http://yourstore.gostorego.com/furniture/living-room.html http://yourstore.gostorego.com/living-room
There are different schools of thought as to which is the best approach to take to optimize your catalog for search engines. There are those who believe that the suffix no longer serves any useful purpose, and that pages without the suffix are indexed more effectively by search engines. The most important thing to understand is that the setting is controlled by your system configuration, rather than by hard-coding the suffix into the URL of each category or product page. Whichever approach you decide to take, be consistent, and use the same setting for both the product and category URL.
Part III: Building Your Catalog
197
Chapter 12: Navigation by Category
Category Configuration
To configure the URL suffix: 1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. In the Configuration panel on the left, select Catalog. Then, click to expand the
Search Engine Optimizations section. Then, do the following: a. If you choose to omit the suffix, clear the default “.html” setting from the Product URL Suffix field. b. If you choose to omit the suffix, clear the default “.html” setting from the Category URL Suffix field. Note: If you make this change to an existing catalog, you will need to refresh the Search Indexing (Catalog > Search Indexing) and browser cache (F5). For more information, see: “URL Rewrites,” on page 428.
3. If you choose to omit the category path from product URLs, set Use Categories
Path for Product URLs to “No.”
System > Configuration: Category – Search Engine Optimizations
198
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 12: Navigation by Category
Sitemap
Sitemap
A sitemap is like a table of contents that lists every category and product in your store. Each entry is linked to the corresponding landing page of the category or product. Sitemaps help search engines index your site, and also give visitors a quick overview of the organization of your store and catalog. To display the sitemap, click the link in the footer of your store. The sitemap can be set to display either the list of categories or products. To switch between modes, click the link on the right. The number of lines included per page, and the use of indentation is determined by your system configuration. In addition to the standard sitemap, you can also set up a Google sitemap and robots.txt file, to provide specific instructions to search engines as they visit your site. For more information, see: “Google Sitemap,” on page 431, and “Using a Robots.txt File,” on page 423.
Sitemap by Category
Part III: Building Your Catalog
199
Chapter 12: Navigation by Category
Sitemap
To configure the sitemap: 1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. In the Configuration panel on the left, under Catalog, select Catalog. 3. Click to expand the Sitemap section. 4. Complete the settings according to your preference.
System > Configuration > Catalog: Catalog - Sitemap
5. Scroll down the page and click to expand the Search Engine Optimizations
section. Then, set Autogenerated Site Map to “Enable.”
System > Configuration > Catalog: Catalog – Search Engine Optimizations
6. Click the Save Config button to save the configuration.
200
Magento Go User Guide
CHAPTER 13:
Understanding Product Types
Magento Go’s product catalog is based upon six product types, which are divided into two groups called, “Simple” and “Complex.” However, it’s really not as complex as it sounds, because in this case, the word “complex” conveys the meaning of “compound,” or “one-to-many.” One of the first things you are required to do when adding a new product to your catalog is to specify the product type. So how can you know which one to use, and when should you use one product type over another? By learning to use product types effectively, you can build a catalog that is both flexible and powerful. In this chapter, you will learn the characteristics of each product type, how they differ, and how to set them up.
Manage Products: Add Product – Create Product Settings
Part III: Building Your Catalog
201
Chapter 13: Understanding Product Types
“Standalone” Products
“Standalone” Products
Standalone products can be sold individually, and also in association with one-tomany products.
Simple Products
A simple product is a physical item with a single SKU. Simple products have a variety of pricing and of input controls which make it possible to sell variations of the product. Simple products can be used in association with grouped, bundle, and configurable products.
Virtual Products
Although virtual products do not have a physical presence, they represent something that can be sold, such as a service, warranty, or subscription. Virtual products are not shipped, and therefore have no weight field. Virtual products can be used in association with grouped and bundle products.
Gift Card Products
There are three kinds of gift cards: virtual gift cards are sent by email, physical gift cards are shipped to the recipient, and combined gift cards are a combination of the two. Each has a unique code, which is redeemed during checkout. Gift cards can be used in association with grouped products.
202
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 13: Understanding Product Types
“One-to-Many” Product Relationships
“One-to-Many” Product Relationships
Grouped, configurable, and bundle products have a one-to-many relationship with standalone products, bringing them together “under one roof.”
Grouped Products
A grouped product lets you offer multiple, standalone products as a group. You can offer variations of a single product, or group them by season, theme, or for a promotion. Each product can be purchased separately, or as part of the group.
Configurable Products
A configurable product appears to be a single product with lists of options for each variation. However, each option represents a separate, simple product with a distinct SKU, which makes it possible to track inventory for each variation.
Bundle Products
A bundle product let customers “build their own” from an assortment of options. The bundle could be a gift basket, computer, or anything else that can be customized. Each item in the bundle is a separate, standalone product.
Part III: Building Your Catalog
203
Chapter 13: Understanding Product Types
Creating a Simple Product
Creating a Simple Product
One of the keys to harnessing the power of product types is learning how and when to use a simple, “standalone” product. Simple products can be sold individually, or as part of a one-to-many relationship with the following product types: Grouped Configurable Bundle
In this exercise, you will use the Default attribute set to create a simple product with the required fields.
To create a Simple product: 1. From the Admin panel, go to Catalog > Manage Products.
Catalog > Manage Products
2. In the upper-right corner of the Manage Products page, click the Add Product
button.
204
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 13: Understanding Product Types
Creating a Simple Product
Manage Products: Add Product
3. In the Create Product Settings section, accept the default settings for Attribute
Set and Product Type. Then, click the Continue button.
Manage Products: Add Product - Create Product Settings, Simple Product
The Product Information panel groups related fields by topic. All required fields are marked with a red asterisk (*).
Part III: Building Your Catalog
205
Chapter 13: Understanding Product Types
Creating a Simple Product
Product Information – General, Simple Product
4. On the General tab, complete the required fields as follows:
a. Type the product Name, as you want it to appear in all catalog listings. b. Assign a unique SKU for the product. c. Type the product Weight that will be used for shipping calculations. d. Set Status to “Enabled.” e. Set Tax Class to the appropriate setting for your area. f. Set Visibility to “Catalog, Search.”
5. On the Prices tab, enter the Price you intend to charge for the product. 6. On the Description tab, complete the required fields as follows:
a. Type a Short Description of the product. b. In the Description box, type the main description that will appear on the product view page.
206
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 13: Understanding Product Types
Creating a Simple Product
7. If you plan to use Magento Go to manage your inventory, complete the required
fields on the Inventory tab as follows: a. Under Manage Stock, clear the Use Config Settings checkbox. Then, set Manage Stock to “Yes.” b. In the Qty field, type the quantity of the item currently in stock. c. Set Stock Availability to “In Stock.”
Product Information: Inventory
8. On the Website tab, select the checkbox for the website where the product will be
available for sale.
Product Information: Website
Part III: Building Your Catalog
207
Chapter 13: Understanding Product Types
Creating a Simple Product
9. On the Categories tab, assign the product to the appropriate category, as
follows: a. In the Category tree, click to expand the section where the item belongs. b. Select the checkbox to assign the product to the category.
Product Information: Categories
10. After completing the required fields, click the Save and Continue button. 11. Although not required, there are still more sections of Product Information to
complete. Here’s a good place to start: Meta Information Images
You will find detailed instructions for each section of Product Information in the next chapter.
Points to Remember
A simple product can have custom variants and options with a variety of input controls, which makes it possible to sell many product variations from a single SKU. Custom variants and options are not tracked as separate inventory items. A simple product that is used in a one-to-many relationship with a grouped, configurable, or bundle product type cannot have custom variants and options.
208
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 13: Understanding Product Types
Creating a Virtual Product
Creating a Virtual Product
Although virtual products do not have a physical presence, they represent something that can be sold, such as a service, warranty, or subscription. Virtual products can be sold individually, or as part of a one-to-many relationship with the following product types: Grouped Bundle
The process of creating a virtual product and a simple product is nearly the same. However, because virtual products aren’t shipped, there are no Weight or Use Gift Card fields to complete.
To create a Virtual product: 1. From the Admin panel, go to Catalog > Manage Products. Then in the upperright corner of the Manage Products page, click the Add Product button.
2. In the Create Product Settings section, do the following:
a. Accept the default settings for Attribute Set. b. Make sure the Use Complex Product types checkbox is selected. Then, set the Product Type list to “Virtual Product,” and click the Continue button.
Manage Products: Add Product - Create Product Settings, Virtual Product
The Product Information panel groups related fields by topic. All required fields are marked with a red asterisk (*).
Part III: Building Your Catalog
209
Chapter 13: Understanding Product Types
Creating a Virtual Product
Product Information – General, Virtual Product
3. On the General tab, complete the required fields as follows:
a. Type the product Name, as you want it to appear in all catalog listings. b. Assign a unique SKU for the product. c. Set Status to “Enabled.” d. Set Tax Class to the appropriate setting for your area. e. Set Visibility to “Catalog, Search.”
4. On the Prices tab, enter the Price you intend to charge for the product or service. 5. On the Description tab, complete the required fields as follows:
a. Type a Short Description of the product. b. In the Description box, type the main description that will appear on the product view page.
6. If you’re not going to use Magento Go to manage your inventory, you can skip
this section. Otherwise, complete the required fields on the Inventory tab as follows: a. Under Manage Stock, clear the Use Config Settings checkbox. Then, set Manage Stock to “Yes.” b. In the Qty field, type the quantity of the item currently in stock. c. Set Stock Availability to “In Stock.”
210
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 13: Understanding Product Types
Creating a Virtual Product
7. On the Website tab, select the checkbox for the website where the product or
service will be available for sale.
8. On the Categories tab, assign the product to the appropriate category, as follows:
a. In the Product Category tree, click to expand the section where the item belongs. b. Select the checkbox to assign the product to the category.
9. After completing the required fields, click the Save and Continue button. 10. Although not required, there are still more sections of Product Information to
complete. Here’s a good place to start: Meta Information Images
You will find detailed instructions for each section of Product Information in the next chapter.
Points to Remember
Virtual products can be used for anything that is not physical in nature, such as services, subscriptions, and warranties. Virtual products are much like simple products, but without the Weight and Allow Gift Message fields. Shipping Options appear during checkout only if there is also a physical product in the cart.
Part III: Building Your Catalog
211
Chapter 13: Understanding Product Types
Creating a Gift Card
Creating a Gift Card
There are three kinds of gift card products: virtual gift cards which are sent by email, physical gift cards, which can be shipped to the recipient, and a combination of the two. Each gift card has a unique code, which can be redeemed by only one customer during checkout. Virtual Physical Combined
Step 1:
Create the Gift Card Product
1. From the Admin panel, select Catalog > Manage Products. Then, click the Add
Product button.
2. In the Create Product Settings section, select the Attribute Set you want to use
the product.
Catalog > Manage Products: Add Product - Create Product Settings
3. Make sure the Use Complex Product Types checkbox is selected. Then, set
Product Type to Gift Card and click the Continue button.
4. You can complete most of the Product Information as you would for a simple
product.
5. Click the Save and Continue button.
212
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 13: Understanding Product Types
Creating a Gift Card
Step 2:
Set Up the Gift Card Pricing
1. In the Product Information panel on the left, click Prices. 2. To add predefined gift card prices, click the Add Amount button. Then, enter a
price in the Amount field. Repeat this step to add more pricing options.
3. Set Allow Open Amount to one of the following:
No Yes To require customers to select a predefined gift card amount. To allow customers to enter their own gift card amount.
4. If Allow Open Amount is set to “Yes,” you can enter the minimum and
maximum amounts allowed: Open Amount Min Value Open Amount Max Value
5. Click the Save button.
Catalog > Manage Products: Product Information - Prices
Part III: Building Your Catalog
213
Chapter 13: Understanding Product Types
Creating a Gift Card
Step 3:
Complete the Gift Card Information
1. In the Product Information panel, select Gift Card Information. 2. Set Card Type to one of the following:
Virtual: The gift card will be sent to recipient by email. The order will require an email address of the recipient. Shipping address will not be necessary. Physical: The gift card will be shipped to recipient’s address. Recipient address will be required during purchase. Combined: The gift card will be shipped and emailed to recipient. Recipient’s email and shipping address will be required during purchase.
3. In the Is Redeemable field, specify whether the account that will be created for
this Gift Card product will be redeemable, i.e. able to be transferred to the Store Credit upon creation.
4. Set Lifetime (days) to the number of days left before the gift card expires. If you
do not want to set a limit for the lifetime of the card, leave this field blank.
5. In the Allow Gift Message field, specify whether the customer who purchases
the Gift Card can add a message for the recipient. The message is included for both virtual (emailed) and physical (shipped) gift cards.
6. In the Email Template field, select the template that you want to use for the
notification email that is sent when a gift card account is created.
7. Click the Save button.
Catalog > Manage Products: Product Information – Gift Card Information
214
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 13: Understanding Product Types
Creating a Gift Card
Managing Gift Card Accounts
A gift card account is created for each Gift Card purchased. The value of the gift card can then be applied toward the purchase of a product in your store.
Setting the Gift Card Code Pool
The Code Pool is a pre-generated set of unique gift card codes in a specific format. Codes from the code pool are used each time a gift card account is created. It is the administrator's responsibility to assure there are enough free codes in the code pool for the gift cards. Make sure to generate a code pool before starting to offer Gift Card products. Note: By default, Magento Go generates 1,000 codes. A new pool will not be generated if there are still unused codes available.
To establish the gift card code pool: 1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. In the Configuration panel on the left, under Sales, select Gift Cards. 3. Click to expand the Gift Card Account General Settings section. 4. Click the Generate button to create the new code pool.
When complete, the message, “New code pool was generated” appears.
Gift Card Account General Settings
Part III: Building Your Catalog
215
Chapter 13: Understanding Product Types
Creating a Gift Card
Creating a Gift Card Account
To create a gift card account: 1. From the Admin panel, select Customers > Gift Card Accounts. 2. Click the Add New button. 3. On the Information tab, make sure that Active is set to “Yes.”
This field determines whether the balance of the account can be redeemed in the shopping cart before the products' checkout. Also, the value in this field determines whether the balance of the account can be transferred to a customer's Store Credit.
4. In the Websites field, select the website where this gift card account can be
redeemed.
5. In the Balance field, enter the balance of the gift card account. 6. Enter the Expiration Date for the gift card. If left blank, the gift card account will
not expire.
Customers > Gift Card Accounts: Add New - Information
216
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 13: Understanding Product Types
Creating a Gift Card
7. In the Gift Card Account panel on the left, click Send Gift Card. Then, do the
following: a. In the Recipient Email field, enter the email address to which an email notification of this gift card account will be sent. This field is optional, and no email will be sent if it is left blank. b. In the Recipient Name field, enter the name of the email recipient. c. In the Send Email from the Following Store View field, select the language store view from which an email containing the gift card account number will be sent to the email recipient whose email and name are specified in the previous two fields.
Customers > Gift Card Accounts: Add New – Send Gift Card
8. Do one of the following:
If no recipient has been added, click the Save button to save the gift card. Click the Save & Send Email button to save the changes and send the gift card by email to the recipient.
Viewing Gift Card History
When the gift card account is saved, you will be redirected to the Manage Gift Card Accounts page, where the new account is listed. If you need to update any settings, click to open the record in Edit mode. In addition, you can check the status and balance history of the account. Note: The code and the status of a gift card account cannot be edited.
Part III: Building Your Catalog
217
Chapter 13: Understanding Product Types
Creating a Gift Card
Configuration Settings
Use the System Configuration Gift Card settings to establish the default settings for all gift cards sold through your store.
1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. In the Configuration panel on the left, under Sales, select Gift Cards. 3. Click to expand the Gift Card Email Settings. Then do the following:
a. Set Gift Card Notification Email Sender to the identity that you want to appear as the sender of email notifications from your store. b. Set Gift Card Notification Email Template to the template you want to use for the notification sent.
Configuration: Sales – Gift Card, Gift Card Email Settings
4. To set up the sender of email messages sent from the store, and the gift card
template used, click to expand the Email Sent from Gift Card Account Management section. Then, do the following: a. Set Gift Card Email Sender to the identity that you want to appear as the sender of gift cards from your store. b. Set Gift Card Template to the template you want to use for the gift card.
Configuration: Sales – Gift Card, Email Sent from Gift Card Account Management
218
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 13: Understanding Product Types
Creating a Gift Card
5. Click to expand the Gift Card General Settings section. Then, set the following
fields to the default settings that you want to use for gift card purchases: Redeemable (Yes / No) Lifetime (days) Allow Gift Message (Yes / No) Gift Message Maximum Length Generate Gift Card Account when Order Item is (Ordered / Invoiced)
Configuration: Sales – Gift Card, Gift Card General Settings
Points to Remember
A “code pool” of unique numbers must be generated before a gift card can be offered for sale. Gift cards come in three types: Virtual, Physical, and Combined. Gift cards can be set to “Redeemable” or “Non-Redeemable.” The lifetime of a gift card can be set in days. The value of a gift card can be set to a fixed amount or to an open amount with a minimum and maximum value. A gift card account for the customer is created either at the time of order or at the time of invoice.
Part III: Building Your Catalog
219
Chapter 13: Understanding Product Types
Creating a Grouped Product
Creating a Grouped Product
A grouped product lets you offer multiple, standalone products as a group. You can offer variations of a single product, or group them by season or theme to create a coordinated set. Each product can be purchased separately, or as part of the group.
To create a grouped product: 1. From the Admin panel, select Catalog > Manage Products. Then, click the Add
Product button.
2. In the Create Product Settings section, select the Attribute Set you want to use
the product.
Catalog > Manage Products: Add Product - Create Product Settings
3. Make sure the Use Complex Product Types checkbox is selected. Then, set
Product Type to Grouped Product and click the Continue button.
4. You can complete the main configuration settings as you would for a simple
product, with the following exceptions: a. On the Prices tab, a grouped product record has no Price field or associated price options because the price of each item in the group originates from the associated product record. b. On the Inventory tab, you can set quantity increments and stock availability for the group, as a whole, but the inventory of individual items is managed by the associated product records.
5. Click the Save and Continue button.
220
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 13: Understanding Product Types
Creating a Grouped Product
Adding Associated Products
To define associated products: 1. In the Product Information panel on the left, select the Associated Products. 2. Click the Reset Filter button to list all available products. You can also filter by
available fields in columns and clicking the Search button to display a filtered group of products.
3. Select the checkbox of each product you want to include in the group.
Grouped Product: Associated Products
4. Click the Save button to save your changes.
Part III: Building Your Catalog
221
Chapter 13: Understanding Product Types
Creating a Grouped Product
Configuring Thumbnail Images
The product image that appears in the shopping cart can be set to display the image from the grouped product record, or the thumbnail image of from the associated product for the specific item purchased. This setting applies to all grouped products in the store, or current view.
1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. In the Configuration panel on the left, under Sales, select Checkout. 3. In the Shopping Cart section, set Grouped Product Image to one of the
following: Product Thumbnail Itself Parent Product Thumbnail
4. Click the Save Config button to save the setting.
System > Configuration: Sales – Shopping Cart
Points to Remember
A grouped product is essentially a collection of simple associated products. Simple and virtual products associated with a grouped product cannot have custom variants or options. Each item purchased appears individually in the shopping cart, rather than as part of the group.
222
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 13: Understanding Product Types
Creating a Configurable Product
Creating a Configurable Product
A configurable product appears to the customer as a single product with lists of options for each variation. However, each option represents a separate simple product with a distinct SKU, which makes it possible to track inventory for each variation. Using the example of a tee shirt that comes in three colors and three sizes, it takes nine associated simple product records to cover every possible combination of options. Blue (Small, Medium, Large) Green (Small, Medium, Large) Orange (Small, Medium, Large)
A configurable product gives you the ability to track inventory for each variation, because each variation is actually a separate simple product with a distinct SKU. You could achieve the same effect using a simple product with custom variants and options, but you would not be able to track inventory for the variations. Although a configurable product uses more SKUs, and may initially take a little longer to set up, it can save you time in the long run, it does give you more capability in the long run.
Overview of the Process
Each option or variant, is based on a product attribute that is set up in advance, before the configurable product record is created. A separate attribute is created for each drop-down list. Then, each is loaded with the values needed for the variations. Because these attributes are handled separately, they can also be shared with other products and product types. For example, if your store already has an attribute for color, you don’t need to create another one. But you do need to add the appropriate color values, so they will be available as options. If you have a large catalog with many items that share common attributes, this can represent a significant time savings. The drop-down attributes are then included in an attribute set, which will be used as a template to create the configurable product and associated records. The next step is to create the configurable product record, based on the attribute set you prepared, and complete the basic required fields.
Part III: Building Your Catalog
223
Chapter 13: Understanding Product Types
Creating a Configurable Product
The final part of the process is to add an associated product to the configurable product record for each variation. It is not necessary to create the product records in advance, because they can be generated automatically from the configurable product record. Each associated product is actually a simple product, and is based on the same attribute set that is used to create the configurable product.
Step 1:
Create the “Drop-down” Attributes
1. From the Admin panel, select Catalog > Attributes > Manage Attributes. Then,
click the Add New button.
2. In the Attribute Properties section, do the following:
a. Assign a unique Name to the attribute, using lowercase characters and underscore instead of spaces. (This name is for internal use only.) b. Set Scope to “Global.” c. Set Catalog Input Type for Store Owner to “Dropdown.” d. Set Values Required to “Yes.” e. Set the Apply To list to one of the following: All Products Selected Product Types Then in the list, select “Configurable Product.” You can also select additional product types if you want.
3. Set Use to Create Configurable Product to “Yes.”
224
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 13: Understanding Product Types
Creating a Configurable Product
Catalog > Attributes > Manage Attributes: Add New
4. In the Attribute Information panel on the left, select Manage Label / Options. 5. In the Manage Titles section under Admin, enter a label for the drop-down list.
By default, the same label is used in the Admin panel and store. If you want to use a different label in the store, or if your store is available in multiple languages, enter the appropriate label for each.
Manage Labels / Options: Manage Titles
Part III: Building Your Catalog
225
Chapter 13: Understanding Product Types
Creating a Configurable Product
6. In the Manage Options section, click the Add Option button. Then, do the
following: a. In the text field under Admin, type the first value you want to appear in the list. By default, the same value is used in the Admin panel and store. b. If your store is available in multiple languages, enter the translation of the value in the appropriate text box. Repeat this step to add as many options as needed.
7. To assign a default value for the drop-down list, select Is Default to identify the
option you want to use as the default.
8. To change the order in which the options appear in the drop-down list, enter a
number in the Position column to set the position of each option in relation to the others.
Manage Labels / Options: Manage Options
9. When complete, click the Save Attribute button.
226
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 13: Understanding Product Types
Creating a Configurable Product
Step 2:
Create the Attribute Set
1. From the Admin panel, select Catalog > Attributes > Manage Attribute Sets.
Then, click the Add New Set button.
2. Assign a Name to the attribute set. 3. In the Based On list, select an existing attribute set, such as “Default,” to use as a
template. Then, click the Save Attribute Set button.
Catalog > Attributes > Manage Attribute Sets: Add New Set
4. Starting from the list of Unassigned Attributes, drag and drop each attribute
you want to use as a drop-down list to the center column. You can arrange them in any order.
List of Unassigned Attributes
Part III: Building Your Catalog
227
Chapter 13: Understanding Product Types
Creating a Configurable Product
5.
If you want to group the attributes in their own section of the Product Information panel, do the following: a. Click the Add New button. Note: If prompted by your browser, select “Temporarily Allow Scripted Windows” to continue. Then, click the Add New button again. b. When prompted, enter a name for the new group. Then, click the OK button. The new group appears at the bottom of the Groups column.
Naming a New Group
c. Drag and drop each attribute you want to include, over to the new group.
Dragging an Attribute to the New Group
6. Click the Save Attribute Set button.
228
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 13: Understanding Product Types
Creating a Configurable Product
Step 3:
Create the Configurable Product Record
1. From the Admin panel, select Catalog > Manage Products. Then, click the Add
Product button.
2. In the Create Product Settings section, select the Attribute Set you created for
the product.
Catalog > Manage Products: Add Product - Create Product Settings
3. Make sure the Use Complex Product Types checkbox is selected. Then, set
Product Type to Configurable Product and click the Continue button.
4. Complete the Product Information as you would for a simple product, with the
exception of the following fields: On the Prices tab, the Price is required, but is used as a default price. The price of individual associated products can be adjusted accordingly. On the Inventory tab, Manage Stock is set by default to “No,” because inventory is managed by each associated product.
5. Click the Save and Continue button.
Step 4:
Add the Associated Products
Magento Go provides three different ways to add associated products: Quick Simple Product Creation Create Empty Copy from Configurable
1. In the Product Information panel on the left, select the last option, Associated
Products.
2. Then, use one of the following methods to add the associated products.
Part III: Building Your Catalog
229
Chapter 13: Understanding Product Types
Creating a Configurable Product
Method 1: Quick Simple Product Creation
This method automatically creates the associated products and optionally, assigns a Name and SKU to each one.
1. In the Quick Simple Product Creation section, make sure that the Autogenerate
checkbox is selected for Name and SKU. This optional setting adds the name and SKU from each associated product to those of the configurable product.
2. Complete these fields as follows:
a. Enter the Weight. b. Set Status to “Enabled.” c. Set Visibility to “Not Visible Individually.”
Quick Simple Product Creation
3. To complete the fields for the drop-down lists, do the following:
a. Select the value you need from each list to create the first product. b. Enter the Qty, and set Stock Availability to “’In Stock.” c. Click the Quick Create button to create the associated product record. Repeat this step for the values needed for each associated product. As each associated products is created, it is added to the list at the bottom of the page.
230
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 13: Understanding Product Types
Creating a Configurable Product
Method 2: Create Empty
This method opens a blank Product Information form, which you can complete for each associated product.
1. In the Create Simple Associated Product section, click the Create Empty button.
A pop-up window with a blank Product Information form appears.
2. Complete the required fields as you would for any simple product. 3. Click the Save button to add the associated product to the configurable product
record.
Method 3: Copy from Configurable
This method opens a Product Information form that contains the values already entered for the configurable product. The only fields that need to be completed are the Name, SKU, and values for each drop-down list.
1. In the Create Simple Associated Product section, click the Copy From
Configurable button. A pop-up window with the basic Product Information from the configurable product appears.
2. Complete the following required fields:
SKU Weight
3. Complete the fields with values for each drop-down list. 4. Click the Save button to add the associated product to the configurable product
record.
Part III: Building Your Catalog
231
Chapter 13: Understanding Product Types
Creating a Configurable Product
Configuring Thumbnail Images
The product image that appears in the shopping cart can be set to display the image from the configurable product record, or the thumbnail image of from the associated product for the specific item purchased. This setting applies to all configurable products in the store, or current view.
1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. In the Configuration panel on the left, under Sales, select Checkout. 3. In the Shopping Cart section, set Configurable Product Image to one of the
following: Product Thumbnail Itself Parent Product Thumbnail
4. Click the Save Config button to save the setting.
System > Configuration: Sales – Shopping Cart
232
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 13: Understanding Product Types
Creating a Configurable Product
Overriding Default Prices
Use the Super Products Attributes section to override the default price of an item. The price can be entered as a fixed amount or as a percentage of the default price of the configurable product. The price of the associated product is not used in the calculation. For more information, see: “Importing Configurable Products,” on page 409.
Super Product Attributes Configuration
Additional Inventory Settings
By default, Manage Stock is turned off for a configurable product, because the inventory is managed through each associated product. At times it may be necessary to make inventory settings for the configurable product as a whole, such as setting quantity increments and changing the stock availability.
To enable quantity increments: 1. On the Inventory tab, clear the Use Config Settings checkbox and set Manage
Stock to “Yes.” The Enable Qty Increments field appears.
2. To sell the product in quantity increments, do the following:
a. Below the Enable Qty Increments field, clear the Use Config Settings checkbox. Then, set Enable Qty Increments to “Yes.” b. In the Qty Increments field, enter the number of products that you want to sell together as a single batch.
Part III: Building Your Catalog
233
Chapter 13: Understanding Product Types
Creating a Configurable Product
To set the product as “Out of Stock:” 1. On the Inventory tab, clear the Use Config Settings checkbox and set Manage
Stock to “Yes.” The Stock Availability field appears.
2. To temporarily remove the product from sale, set Stock Availability to “Out of
Stock.”
3. When you are ready to offer the product for sale, set Stock Availability to “In
Stock.”
Points to Remember
A configurable product is essentially a collection of simple products that is presented as a list of drop-down options. The drop-down list values are based on attributes that must be set up in advance with required settings. The attribute Scope must be set to “Global,” and Use to Create Configurable Product must be “True.” The drop-down attributes must be included in an attribute set, which is then used as a template for the configurable product. The simple products associated with a configurable product cannot include custom variants or options, and must be based on the same attribute set that is used to create the configurable product. The associated products can be generated automatically from inside with configurable product record. The image of the product that appears during checkout can be set to display either the “Parent Image” or the “Product Thumbnail Itself.”
234
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 13: Understanding Product Types
Creating a Bundle Product
Creating a Bundle Product
A bundle product let customers “build their own” from an assortment of options. The bundle could be a gift basket, computer, or anything else that can be customized. Each item in the bundle can be based on one of the following product types: Simple Virtual
Step 1:
Create the Bundle Product
1. From the Admin panel, select Catalog > Manage Products. Then, click the Add
Product button.
2. In the Create Product Settings section, select the Attribute Set for the product.
Catalog > Manage Products: Add Product - Create Product Settings
3. Make sure the Use Complex Product Types checkbox is selected. Set Product
Type to Bundle Product, and click the Continue button.
Part III: Building Your Catalog
235
Chapter 13: Understanding Product Types
Creating a Bundle Product
Step 2:
Complete the Product Information
1. Complete the Product Information as you would for a simple product, with the
exception of the following fields: a. On the General tab, set both the SKU and Weight fields to one of the following: Dynamic Fixed If using a Fixed value, enter the actual value in the field to the right.
Bundle Dynamic SKU and Weight
b. On the Prices tab, set the Price to one of the following: Dynamic Fixed If using a Fixed value, enter the actual value in the field to the right. c. On the Prices tab, set the Price View to one of the following: As Low as Price Range
236
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 13: Understanding Product Types
Creating a Bundle Product
Bundle Dynamic Price and Price View
Step 3:
Add Bundle Items
1. In the Product Information panel on the left, select the last option, Bundle
Items.
2. Then in the Shipment section, set Ship Bundle Items to one of the following:
Together Separately
Ship Bundle Items Together
3. In the Bundle Items section, click the Add New Option button.
Add Bundle Item
Part III: Building Your Catalog
237
Chapter 13: Understanding Product Types
Creating a Bundle Product
4. In the Default Title box, enter a label for the bundle item, as you want it to
appear on the Customize Product page. Then, do the following: a. Set the Input Type to one of the following: Drop-down Radio Buttons Checkbox Multiple Select
b. Set Is Required as needed. c. In the Position field, enter the order that you want this item listed in relation to other items included in the bundle.
5. Click the Add Selection button. Then, do the following:
a. Click the Reset Filter button to display the list of products. b. Select the checkbox of each product that you want to include in this item. c. Then, in the Qty to Add column, enter the quantity of each item to be included.
Select the Checkbox of Each Item
6. Click the Add Selected Product(s) to Option button.
238
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 13: Understanding Product Types
Creating a Bundle Product
7. When the items appear in the Bundle Items list, do the following:
a. If you want to prevent the customer from changing the quantity of the item, set User Defined Qty to “No.” Otherwise, accept the default setting of “Yes,” which displays an input box so the customer can enter the quantity. b. To change the order of the items, enter a number in the Position column of each item to determine its position in relation to other items. c. Select the Default option of the item you want to be pre-selected in the form.
Bundle Items
8. Repeat steps 3-7 for each bundle item you want to include. 9. When complete, click the Save button to save the bundle product.
Setting SKU Fixed or Dynamic Description Determines if each item is assigned a variable, dynamic SKU, or if a fixed SKU is used for the bundle. Specifies the weight is calculated based on the items selected, or is a fixed weight for the entire bundle. Specifies whether the product price is shown as a range, from the least expensive component to the most expensive (Price Range), or the least expensive shown (As Low As). Specifies if individual items can be shipped separately.
Weight Fixed or Dynamic
Price View
Ship Bundle Items
Part III: Building Your Catalog
239
Chapter 13: Understanding Product Types
Creating a Bundle Product
Points to Remember
A bundle is a “Build Your Own” product Bundle items can be simple or virtual products, but without custom variants and options The Price View can be set to a price range or “As Low as” The SKU and Weight of a bundle product can be set to either “Fixed” or “Dynamic” The Quantity can be set to a pre-set or user-defined value Items can be shipped together or separately
Troubleshooting Tips
If your product does not appear in your store, check the following settings:
Product Information General Status must be enabled. Visibility must be set to include the catalog. Inventory If managing stock, quantity on hand must be greater than zero. Stock Availability must be set to “In Stock.” Website Categories The product must be assigned to a website. The product must be assigned to a category.
240
Magento Go User Guide
CHAPTER 14:
Product Information
The Product Information panel provides access to the settings which make up a product record. The sections covered in this chapter include: General Prices Meta Information Images Description Design Inventory Websites Categories Product Relationships (Related Products, Up-sells, Cross-sells) Custom Variants and Options Product View Optimization
Manage Products: Product Information
Part III: Building Your Catalog
241
Chapter 14: Product Information
General
General
Product Information: General
Field Descriptions
Field Name Description (Required) The name of the product you want to appear in catalog. The name is also used to auto-generate the URL Key. (Required) The Stock Keeping Unit is a unique identifier for each individual product or service provided. (Required) The weight of the product is a decimal value used for shipping calculations, and refers to the standard measurement system used by shipping carriers in your locale. In the United States, weight is measured in pounds and ounces, whereas countries on the metric system measure weight in grams and kilograms.
SKU
Weight
242
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 14: Product Information
General
Field Status
Description (Required) The Status indicates when the product is ready to be offered for sale in your store. Options include: Enabled / Disabled. (Required) Select the appropriate Tax Class for the product. Options include: None: The item is not subject to tax. Default: The item is subject to the tax rules associated with the “default’ tax class. Taxable Goods: The item is subject to the tax rules associated with the “Taxable Goods” tax class. The manner in which product taxes are calculated is determined by the configuration of your store. For more information, see:
Tax Class
URL Key
The URL Key determines the online address of the product. It is added to the base URL of the store, and appears in the address bar of a browser. The URL Key should be all lowercase characters, with hyphens instead of spaces. Magento initially creates a default, “search engine friendly” URL, based on the product name. Do not type the suffix .html in the URL Key, because use of the suffix is controlled by your store configuration. For more information, go to: System > Configuration > Catalog > Search Engine Optimizations.
Part III: Building Your Catalog
243
Chapter 14: Product Information
General
Field Visibility
Description (Required) Determines the level of visibility the product has throughout the store. Options include: Not Visible Individually: The product may be associated with a one-to-many product, but is not listed in the catalog. Catalog: The product appears in the catalog listing, but is not included in Search results. Search: The product appears in search results, but is not listed in the catalog. Catalog, Search: The product is listed in the catalog and search results.
Allow Gift Message
Displays a Gift Message input box. Options include: Yes: Presents the option to include a gift message for the product in the Shipping Method section of the checkout process. No: Does not offer the gift message option. Use Config: Applies the gift message configuration setting for order items.
Manufacturer
Select the manufacturer of the product. To add new options to the list, see Manage Label / Options. (Required) Select the color of the product. To add new options to the list, see Manage Label / Options. Sets the beginning date for the range of time the product is featured in the “New Product” block on the Home page. The date can be typed directly into the box, or selected from the calendar. Sets the ending date for the range of time the product is featured in the “New Product” block on the Home page. Determines if the product is included in your store’s standard RSS feed. Options include: Yes / No
Color
Set Product as New from Date
Set Product as New to Date
In feed
244
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 14: Product Information
Prices
Prices
Product Information: Prices
Tier Pricing
Tier pricing is used to offer a quantity discount. The discount can be applied to a specific store view or customer group. The tier price is listed on both the Category List and Product Detail pages: On the Category List page, the product listing includes the words, “As Low As: $110.49” On the Product Detail page, the calculated quantity discount appears in a box, with a message that says: Buy 2 for $__._ each and save _% Buy 4 for $__._. each and save _%
Tier Price “As Low as”
Part III: Building Your Catalog
245
Chapter 14: Product Information
Prices
To set a Tier Price: 1. In the Product Information panel on the left, select Prices. 2. In the Tier Price section, click the Add Tier button. T hen, do the following:
a. Select the Website to which the tier pricing applies. b. Select the Customer Group for whom the tier pricing is available. c. In the Qty field, enter the quantity of the item that must be ordered to receive the discount. d. In the Price field, enter the adjusted price of the item.
3. Click the Save button to save your changes.
Tier Pricing
Special Pricing
To offer a Special Price, enter a discounted price and complete the date range fields to establish when the promotion gores into effect. On both the Category List and Product Detail pages, the regular price is crossed out, and the Special Price appears in a bold red font.
Special Pricing
246
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 14: Product Information
Prices
To set a Special Price: 1. I n the Product Information panel on the left, select Prices. 2. Enter the amount of the Special Price. 3. Then, complete the Special Price From Date and Special Price To Date to
define the period of time that the special price is in effect. You can pick the dates from the Calendar to the right of each field.
4. Click the Save button to save your changes. Field Descriptions
Field Price Cost Description The retail price of the product. The actual cost of the product. This amount does not appear to the customer, and can be used to generate revenue reports. Tier pricing is used to offer a quantity discount. The discount can be applied to a specific store view or customer group. To offer a Special Price, enter a discounted price and complete the date range fields to establish when the promotion goes into effect. When available, the retail price is crossed out and the special price appears below in a large, bold font. Special Price From Date Special Price To Date Sets the beginning date for the range of time the Special Price is offered. Sets the ending date for the range of time the Special Price is offered. Determines if the product is available through Google Checkout. Options include: Yes / No
Tier Price
Special Price
Is product available for purchase with Google Checkout
Part III: Building Your Catalog
247
Chapter 14: Product Information
Meta Information
Meta Information
Meta data is your first level of contact with potential customers who are searching for a product. Your title and description are selling tools that will either help to motivate a visitor to click your link or not. It is wise to use a descriptive title and a description that includes relevant words that a potential customer might search. The information is read by search engines that index your site. Although Google no longer places a value on meta keywords, other search engines continue to use the information. It’s a good practice to incorporate high-value keywords in your product titles and related content.
Product Information: Meta Information
Field Descriptions
Field Meta Title Description The title appears in the title bar and tab of your browser, and is also used as the title on a search engine results page (SERP). Enter relevant keywords for the product. Consider using keywords that customers may use to find the product. Write a few sentences to describe the product. Though not visible to the customer, some search engines include the meta description on the search results page.
Meta Keywords
Meta Description
248
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 14: Product Information
Images
Images
Magento Go automatically resizes your main product image for each size needed, so you only need to upload your base image once. Alternatively, for better image management, you might prefer to resize each product image in an image editor and upload one for each image type.
To upload product images: 1. In the Product Information panel on the left, click Images. 2. Click the Browse Files button, and select the product images you want to upload
to your store.
3. When you have selected all your images, click the Upload Files button to upload
the selected images to your store.
4. Complete the information for each image. 5. Click the Save and Continue Edit button any time while you work to save your
information.
Product Information: Images
Part III: Building Your Catalog
249
Chapter 14: Product Information
Images
Field Descriptions
Field Image Label Description Displays a thumbnail of the uploaded image. Provides descriptive text in addition to the image, to improve accessibility and indexing by search engines. Determines the order in which images are displayed in the gallery. The thumbnail image is used in the shopping cart and to display related items. The small image is used in the standard product view page and category listing. The largest product image is used for magnification. Select an image if you do not want it to appear in the image gallery of thumbnails below the main image on the Product Detail page. Select the checkbox of any image you want to remove from the collection. All selected images will be removed after your changes are saved.
Sort Order
Thumbnail
Small Image
Base Image Exclude
Remove
Product Image Placeholders
Magento Go displays a temporary image as a placeholder until permanent product images are available. The initial placeholder image is the Magento logo, which you can replace with placeholder images of your own design.
Product Image Placeholders
250
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 14: Product Information
Images
To upload product image placeholders: 1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. In the Configuration panel on the left, under Catalog, select Catalog. 3. Click to expand the Product Image Placeholders section. Then, do the following:
a. For each image type, click the Browse button to upload the placeholder image you want to use for the Base Image, Small Image, and Thumbnail images. If you like, you can use the same image for each type. b. When complete, click the Save Config button.
System > Configuration > Catalog: Product Image Placeholders
Field Descriptions
Setting Base Image Description The Base Image the highest resolution, and is used to product the “zoom in” magnification effect on the product detail page. The small image is used in the standard product view page and category listing. The thumbnail image is used in the shopping cart and to display related items.
Small Image
Thumbnail
Part III: Building Your Catalog
251
Chapter 14: Product Information
Images
Product Image Watermarks
If you have gone to the expense of creating your own original product images, there is not much you can do to prevent unscrupulous competitors from stealing them with the click of a mouse. However, you can place a watermark on each image, to identify it as your property and make it a less attractive target for bandits. A watermark file can be either a .jpg (jpeg), .gif or .png image.
To upload a product image watermark: 1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. In the Configuration panel on the left, under General, select Design. 3. Click to expand the Product Image Watermarks section. Then, complete the
following steps for each image size (Base, Small, and Thumbnail): a. Enter the Watermark Default Size, in pixels. For example, 200 x 300. b. Enter the Watermark Opacity, as a percentage. For example, .40. c. Click the Browse button and select the Watermark image file to upload. d. Set the Watermark Position to one of the following: Stretch Tile Top/Left Top/Right Bottom/Left Bottom/Right
4. When complete, click the Save Config button.
System > Configuration > General: Design - Product Image Watermarks
252
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 14: Product Information
Images
Field Descriptions
Field Base Image Watermark Default Size Base Image Watermark Opacity, Percent Base Image Watermark Description The default size of the watermark for the Base Image. (For example, 200 x 300) The percentage of opacity of the watermark for the Base Image. The file with the watermark image to be uploaded for the Base Image. (The image file can be .jpg (jpeg), .gif, and .png.) The position of the watermark for the Base Image. Options include: Small Image Thumbnail Image Stretch Tile Top/Left Top/Right Bottom/Left Bottom/Right
Base Image Watermark Position
(Repeat all of the above for the Small Image.) (Repeat all of the above for the Small Image.)
Part III: Building Your Catalog
253
Chapter 14: Product Information
Images
Resizing Catalog Images
Magento Go resizes the product images you upload according to the dimensions specified by the theme. As a best practice, you should standardize the size of your images to ensure that they appear at the highest possible resolution, and maintain the correct proportion. Using images of various sizes and dimensions may impact the quality of the images displayed in your product catalog. One way to ensure that images maintain the correct proportion, or aspect ratio, when scaled is to make each image square. However, you can override the default size by specifying an exact size (in pixels) for any image. This is an easy solution for images that appear blurry or distorted. If you specify a new size for the base image, the associated small image and thumbnail resize automatically.
Design > Themes Editor > Customize (Theme) > Catalog Images
To resize catalog images: 1. From the Admin panel, select Design > Themes Editor.
The thumbnail for your current theme appears on the left, and selection of other available themes appears on the right.
2. Under the thumbnail for your current theme, click Customize. 3. In the Theme Customization panel on the left, select Catalog Images.
The Catalog Images section lists all available catalog images that you can resize. To resize an image, do the following:
254
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 14: Product Information
Images
4. In the Location column, find the image you want to resize. Then, set Image Type
to one of the following: Thumbnail Small Image Base Image
You can select one of the three image types to set to a custom size, and the other two are resized automatically.
5. Enter the size, in pixels, for the image:
Width (px): (Required) If only the width is specified, the image is resized proportionally. Height (px): If both width and height are specified, the image is resized exactly.
6. To restore the size of an image size, do the following:
To restore one catalog image to its default size, click the Reset button to the right of the image. To restore all catalog images to their default sizes, click the Restore Default button in the upper right of the Catalog Images section.
7. To preview your change, first click the Save button. Then click the Preview
button in the upper right to preview the resized image.
8. When finished, click the Save button.
Note: When you resize a catalog image, the change applies to all themes. After resizing a catalog image, you should also update any custom CSS to ensure that the image renders correctly. For more information, see the Magento Go Design Guide.
Part III: Building Your Catalog
255
Chapter 14: Product Information
Description
Description
Product Information: Description
Field Descriptions
Field Description Description (Required) This is the main product description that appears on the product view page. The text should be plain ASCII text, although HTML tags can be added to format the description. Do not paste text directly from a word processor, because it may include print control codes which do not render online. To strip out any stray control codes, save the file as a .txt file, before using the text in the product description. Short Description (Required) Depending on the theme, the Short Description may appear on catalog pages, and is often used in RSS feeds. The WYSIWYG Editor button appears below each field, if it is enabled for your store. For more information, see System > Configuration > General > Content Management > WYSIWYG Option.
256
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 14: Product Information
Description
Using the WYSIWYG Editor
The Editor gives you the ability to create and edit HTML code while working in a “What You See Is What You Get” view of the content. When working in the product catalog, the Editor is accessed by clicking the WYSIWYG Editor button. To learn more, see: “Using the Editor,” on page 101.
Product Information: Description – WYSIWYG Editor
Part III: Building Your Catalog
257
Chapter 14: Product Information
Description
Dynamic Media URLs
Unlike an external link, a Dynamic Media URL is an internal reference to an image or other media asset which has been uploaded to your store’s Media Storage library. The format of a Dynamic Media URL looks like this: {{media url="path/to/image.jpg"}} When enabled, this setting makes it possible to include links to dynamic media assets in both products and categories. For example, when this feature is enabled, you can use the WYSIWYG Editor to insert a link to an image in a product Description field. The use of Dynamic Media URLs can impact the performance of catalog search. If Dynamic Media URLs are included in your catalog, but later the setting is disabled, each reference in your catalog will appear as a broken link. However, the links can be restored by changing the setting to allow Dynamic Media URLs.
To change the Dynamic Media URL setting: 1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. In the Configuration panel on the left, under Catalog, select Catalog. 3. In the Frontend section, set Allow Dynamic Media URLs in Products and
Categories to either “Yes” or “No.”
System > Configuration > General > Content Management
4. Click the Save Config button to save the setting.
258
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 14: Product Information
Design
Design
The Design page lets you apply a custom theme for a period of time, and make updates to the underlying code. For more information, see the Magento Go Design Guide.
To customize the product page: 1. To apply a different theme to the Product Detail page, select the theme you want
to use from the Custom Theme list.
2. To apply the product design to a specific range of time, click the calendar to select
the Active From and Active To dates. Otherwise, the design will take effect when you save the changes to the product.
3. You can further change the layout of the product page by applying a different
Page Layout.
4. Click the Save Category button to save your changes.
Product Information: Design
Part III: Building Your Catalog
259
Chapter 14: Product Information
Design
Field Descriptions
Field Custom Theme Description To apply a custom theme, select the one you want from the list of available themes. If applying a custom theme for a period of time, enter the beginning date, or select the date from the Calendar. If applying a custom theme for a period of time, enter the ending date, or select the date from the Calendar. You can further customize the theme with XML coding. See the Magento Go Design Guide to learn more about customizing themes. Options include: Product Info Column Block after Info Column Page Layout To apply a different layout to the Product Detail page, select one of the following: No layout updates: This option is preselected by default and does not apply layout changes to the category page. Empty: This option is used to define your own layout, such as a 4-column layout. An understanding of XML is required. 1 column: Applies the 1-column layout to the category page. 2 columns with left bar: Applies the 2 column layout to the category page. 2 columns with right bar: Applies the 2-columns with right bar layout to the category page. 3 columns: Applies the 3 column layout to the category page.
Active From
Active To
Custom Layout Update
Display product options in
260
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 14: Product Information
Inventory
Inventory
By default, the Inventory tab displays a short form that is set to not manage stock. To display the full range of inventory management options, follow the instructions below.
Product Information: Inventory (Short Form)
To set up the product inventory: 1. In the Product Information panel, select Inventory. Then, do the following:
a. Clear the checkbox below the Manage Stock field. Then, set Manage Stock to “Yes.” b. In the Qty field, type the number of units you currently have in stock. c. Set Stock Availability to “In Stock.”
2. Click the Save button to save your changes.
Note: You can define both default product inventory settings and global inventory managements settings in the System > Configuration > Catalog > Inventory.
Field Descriptions
Field Manage Stock Description Determines whether or not inventory is managed for this product. Options include: Yes / No Determines the minimum amount of this item that is available for purchase. Determines the maximum number of this item that can be purchased in a single order.
Minimum Qty Allowed in Shopping Cart Maximum Qty Allowed in Shopping Cart
Part III: Building Your Catalog
261
Chapter 14: Product Information
Inventory
Product Information: Inventory (Long Form)
Setting Quantity Increments
If you sell a product in various increments, it is important to set them up properly so you can accurately track inventory. For example, selling wine cases in boxes containing 6 bottles of wine each, you would want each sale to reduce your inventory level by 6 rather than 1.
To set up Quantity Increments: 1. In the Product Information panel, select Inventory. Then, do the following:
a. Set Manage Stock to “Yes.” b. In the Qty field, enter the number of this item in your inventory. c. In the Qty For Item’s Status to become Out of Stock field, enter a number that is 1 less than the quantity you are selling. For example, if you are selling a case of six bottles of wine, enter 5. d. In the Minimum Qty Allowed in Shopping Cart field, enter the number of items sold as a unit. Following the example of a case of six bottles of wine, enter 6.
262
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 14: Product Information
Inventory
e. In the Maximum Qty Allowed in Shopping Cart, enter the maximum number of items you want customers to be able to order. For example, to limit each order to twelve bottles of wine, enter 12. f. In the Notify for Quantity Below field, type a quantity to be used as a threshold to receive notification when the inventory falls below the level. g. To set Enable Qty Increments, clear the Use Config Settings checkbox. Select “Yes,” and do the following: In the Qty Increments field, type the number of items to be sold as a set. For example, if selling a case of wine, type 6 to sell of wine only in increments of 6. h. Set Stock Availability to “In Stock.”
2. Click the Save button to save your changes.
To set the out of stock threshold:
In the Product Information panel, select Inventory. The Qty for Item’s Status to Become Out of Stock field can be modified to define the threshold for an item being out of stock. To reserve an extra amount of stock for discretionary reasons, you can set the value above 0, which is the default.
To change the quantity allowed in cart: 1. In the Product Information panel, select Inventory. 2. Change the Minimum and Maximum Quantity Allowed in Shopping Cart fields
to appropriate values for your product, store, and strategy. Tip: This option is helpful for products in high-demand. If you want to capture a larger number of new customers rather than selling high volumes to high-quantity buyers, you can set a maximum quantity to prevent a high-quantity buyer from taking out your entire inventory.
Part III: Building Your Catalog
263
Chapter 14: Product Information
Inventory
To notify when stock drops below a certain threshold: 1. In the Product Information panel, select Inventory. 2. Clear the Use Config Settings checkbox, and set Notify for Quantity Below to
indicate the level at which you want to be notified. By default, the value is set to 1. Tip: If you need time to restock your inventory, you can change the value of this field to replenish.
Low-Stock Reports
Magento Go allows you to view out-of-stock and low-stock reports from the Admin panel or to export it in CSV file format or as Microsoft Excel format.
To generate the Low Stock Report: 1. From the Admin panel, select Reports > Products > Low Stock. 2. Set Export to one of the following file formats: CSV or Excel. 3. Click the Export button and saved the file on your computer. Field Descriptions
Setting Manage Stock Description Determines if you use full inventory control to manage the items in your catalog. Options include: No: Does not keep track of the number of items currently in stock. (This is the default setting.) Yes: Activates full inventory control to keep track of the number of items currently in stock. (To change the setting, clear the Use Config Settings checkbox and select “Yes.”) Qty Qty For Item’s Status to become Out of Stock Minimum Qty Allowed in Shopping Cart (Required) The quantity of the item in stock. Specifies that below a level of your choosing, the product will become Out of Stock. Determines the minimum amount of this item that is available for purchase. By default, the minimum quantity is set to 1.
264
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 14: Product Information
Inventory
Setting Maximum Qty Allowed in Shopping Cart
Description Determines the maximum number of this item that can be purchased in a single order. By default, the maximum quantity is set to 1000. Determines if customers can use a decimal value rather than a whole number when entering the quantity ordered. Options include: Yes: Permits values to be entered as decimals, rather than whole numbers, which is suitable for products sold by weight, volume or length. No: Quantity values must be entered as whole numbers.
Qty Uses Decimals
Backorders
Options include: No Backorders: Does not accept backorders when product is out of stock. Allow Qty Below 0: Accepts backorders when the quantity falls below zero. Allow Qty Below 0 and Notify Customer: Accepts backorders when the quantity falls below zero, but notifies customers that orders can still be placed.
Notify for Quantity Below
Sends a notification to you when the quantity in stock falls below this number. Allows the product to be sold in quantity increments. Sets the number used as the basis of quantity increments. Determines the current availability of the product. Options include: In Stock: Makes the product available for purchase. Out of Stock: Unless Backorders are activated, prevents the product from being available for purchase and removes the listing from the catalog.
Enable Qty Increments
Qty Increments
Stock Availability
Part III: Building Your Catalog
265
Chapter 14: Product Information
Websites
Websites
If your Magento Go site has multiple stores or views, you can set the scope of a configuration setting, product, category, or attribute, to apply to a specific store or view. The scope provides context for the configuration setting. The Website tab identifies the website, store, and view where the product is available.
Product Information: Websites
To identify the website(s) where the product is available: 1. In the Product Information panel on the left, select Websites. 2. Select the checkbox for each store view where the product is offered for sale.
266
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 14: Product Information
Categories
Categories
Every product in your catalog must be assigned to at least one category. Therefore, before you can build your product records, you must first establish the basic category structure of your catalog. In addition, a product record cannot be saved until it is assigned to at least one category.
Product Information: Categories
To set up the product categories: 1. In the Product Information panel, select Categories. 2. Click the check box of each category where you want the product to appear. Click
the [+] icon to expand a category to reveal its subcategories.
3. Click the Save button to save your changes.
Part III: Building Your Catalog
267
Chapter 14: Product Information
Product Relationships
Product Relationships
All the topics in this section establish relationships between products, and the process of setting them up is essentially the same.
Related Products
Related products are meant to be purchased in addition to the item the customer is viewing. Simply click the checkbox of a product to place it in the shopping cart. The placement of the Related Products block varies according to theme and page layout. In the example below, it appears at the bottom of the Product View page. With a 2 column layout, the Related Product block often appears in the right column.
Related Products offered on Product Detail Page
To set up related products: 1. In the Product Information panel on the left, click Related Products. 2. Click the Reset Filter button in the upper-right to list all the available products,
or use the search filters at the top of each column to find specific products.
3. In the list, select the checkbox in the first column of any product you want to
feature as a related product.
4. Click the Save button to save your changes.
268
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 14: Product Information
Product Relationships
Up-sells
Up-sell products are items that your customer might prefer instead of the product currently viewed. An item offered as an up-sell might be of a higher quality, more popular, or have better profit margin.
To choose up-sell products: 1. In the Product Information panel on the left, click Up-sells. 2. Click the Reset Filter button in the upper-right to list all the available products,
or use the search filters at the top of each column to find specific products.
3. In the list, select the checkbox in the first column of any product you want to
feature as an up-sell.
Up-Sells Offered on Product Detail Page
Part III: Building Your Catalog
269
Chapter 14: Product Information
Product Relationships
Cross-sells
Cross-sell products are similar to impulse purchases positioned next to the cash register in the checkout line of a grocery store. Products offered as a cross-sell appear on the shopping cart page, just before the customer begins the checkout process.
To choose cross-sell products: 1. In the Product Information panel on the left, click Cross-sells. 2. Click the Reset Filter button in the upper-right to list all the available products,
or use the search filters at the top of each column to find specific products.
3. In the list, select the checkbox in the first column of any product you want to
feature as a cross-sell.
Cross-sells Offered During Checkout
270
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 14: Product Information
Custom Variants and Options
Custom Variants and Options
Custom variants and options provide an easy way to offer a selection of product options to the customer. The limitations are that you cannot track inventory based on any variation, and that a product with custom variants and options cannot be used in a one-to-many relationship with a configurable, grouped, or bundle product. Custom variants and options are a good solution if your inventory needs are simple, and you have a limited number of available SKUs.
Product Information – Custom Variants and Options
To set up custom variants and options: 1. From the Admin panel, select Catalog > Manage Products. 2. Click the Add Product button to create a new product, or click the Edit link to
the right of the relevant product to open the edit page.
3. Select Custom Variants and Options on the bottom of left panel to display the
following:
4. Click Add New Options on the top right of this page and complete the following
fields: Title: Input Type: Specify a name for this new property, such as the name Size. Select the type of input that can be given in this field, such as text or dropdown menu, as shown above. Is Required: If “Yes,” indicates that this is a mandatory field, meaning that a customer must select an option in this field in order to purchase this specific product. If there is more than one option, then specify the order in which this option appears in the Sort Order field. 1 indicates that it appears first.
Part III: Building Your Catalog
271
Chapter 14: Product Information
Custom Variants and Options
5. Click the Add New Row button to display the following row in which you can
define the new variation of this product. For example, the product in a certain size and its corresponding price.
6. In the Title field, enter a name of this product variation. 7. In the Price field, enter any difference between the price of the variation and the
price of the product. The variation price is either a mark-up or mark-down of the base price of the product.
8. In the Price Type field, select one of the following options:
Fixed: Specifies that the price of this variation differs from the price of the base product by a fixed monetary amount, such as $1. Percentage: Specifies that the price of this variation differs from the price of the base product by a percentage, such as 10%.
9. In the SKU field, specify the SKU for this variation of the product. The SKU is
actually a suffix that is added to the SKU of the main product record.
10. In the Sort Order field, enter a number to indicate the order in which the option
appears in relation to other options. The number 1 indicates that it appears first.
11. Click the Save button.
Custom Variants and Options: Add New Row
272
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 14: Product Information
Product View Optimization
Product View Optimization
The Product View Optimization tab appears for products and categories if enabled in your system configuration. It lets you install tracking scripts for Google Website Optimizer to test the effectiveness of pages on your site. For more information, see: “Google Website Optimizer,” on page 437.
Product View Optimization – Google Optimizer Scripts
Part III: Building Your Catalog
273
Chapter 14: Product Information
Product View Optimization
Notes:
_______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________
274
Magento Go User Guide
CHAPTER 15:
Managing Attributes
Attributes are the building blocks of your product catalog. Each attribute contains a value that represents a particular characteristic of an inventory item. An attribute set determines which fields are included in the product record, and is used as a template when you create a new product.
Catalog > Attributes > Manage Attributes
Magento Go comes with a default attribute set with a standard selection of product attributes such as Name, Price, Description, and so on. If you want, you can build your entire catalog using only the default attributes and attribute set. You can help your customers find exactly what they want by creating additional attributes that describe specific characteristics of each product. For example, here are a few ways you can use the frontend properties of an attribute to improve your customers’ shopping experience in your store: As input controls for product selection To provide additional information on product view pages As search parameters As the basis of product comparison reports As layered navigation items in the “Shop By” section As the basis of catalog and shopping cart price rules
Part III: Building Your Catalog
275
Chapter 15: Managing Attributes
Attribute Input Types
Attribute Input Types
From the standpoint of the store owner or administrator, attributes are the data entry fields that you complete when creating a product record. The input type that is assigned to an attribute determines the type of data that can be entered and the format of the field or input control. Options include: Text Field: A single line input field for text.
Text Area: A multiple-line input field for entering paragraphs of text such as a product description. You can use the WYSIWYG Editor to format the text with HTML tags, or type the tags directly into the text. For more information, see: “Using the WYSIWYG Editor,” on page 257.
Date: An input field for date values. The date can be typed directly into the field, or selected from a list or calendar “date picker.” The method of input used and format of the date is determined by the system configuration.
Yes/No: Displays a drop-down list with pre-defined options of “Yes” and “No.”
276
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 15: Managing Attributes
Attribute Input Types
Dropdown: Displays a drop-down list of values. Only one item can be selected at a time. The Dropdown input type is a key component of configurable products. For more information, see:
Multiple Select: Displays a drop-down list of values. To select more than one option, hold the Ctrl key down and click each item.
Price: This input type is used to create price fields that are in addition to the predefined attributes, Price, Special Price, Tier Price and Cost. The currency used is determined by your system configuration.
Fixed Product Tax: Lets you define FPT rates based on the requirements of your locale. For more information, see: “Tax Settings,” on page 369.
Part III: Building Your Catalog
277
Chapter 15: Managing Attributes
Attribute Quick Reference
Attribute Quick Reference
Product Type Properties
Some product types have specific requirements for attribute settings. For example, the configurable product type has a specific set of requirements for drop-down attributes which must be set up correctly. The following attributes can be used to identify the attribute with a specific product type:
Property Apply To
Description Identifies the product types which can use the attribute. Visibility must be set to include the catalog. Identifies the attribute one that will be used to create a drop-down list of options for a configurable product.
Use to Create Configurable Product
Data Entry Properties
You can use the following attribute properties to provide assistance during data entry, and to reduce the number of typographical errors in your catalog:
Property Default Value Unique Value Values Required
Description Displays a common entry as a starting value. Prevents duplicate values from being entered. Requires a value to be entered before the record can be saved. Performs a validation check of the data, based on data type, or format.
Input Validation
278
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 15: Managing Attributes
Attribute Quick Reference
Search and Navigation Properties
The following properties determine how the attribute is used in product searches and navigation:
Property Use in Quick Search
Description Lets customers use the Search box to find items based on the value of the attribute. Includes the attribute on the Advanced Search form.
Use in Advanced Search Use in Layered Navigation Use in Search Results Layered Navigation Position
Includes the attribute in the layered navigation that is displayed for category lists. Includes the attribute in the layered navigation that is displayed for search results lists. Determines the position of the attribute when listed with others in the layered navigation list. (Depending on theme) Includes the attribute in the product listing. (Depending on theme) Includes this attribute as an option in the Sort By list, which can be used to sort a product list.
Use in Product Listing
Use for Sorting in Product Listing
Rules and Comparison Properties
The following properties can be used to include an attribute in the product comparison report and promotional rules:
Property Comparable on Frontend Use for Promo Rule Conditions
Description Includes the attribute in the Compare Products report. Allows the attribute to be used as the basis of a condition that triggers a promotional Price Rule or Shopping Cart rule.
Part III: Building Your Catalog
279
Chapter 15: Managing Attributes
Attribute Quick Reference
Presentation Properties
The following properties control the appearance and formatting of the attribute value on the product view page:
Property Visible on Product View Page
Description Includes the attribute on the Additional Information tab of the product view page.
Allow HTML Tags on Frontend Enable WYSIWYG Editor
Permits text fields and areas to be manually tagged with HTML. Makes the WYSIWYG Editor available for tagging a text field or text area with HTML.
WYSIWYG Editor Enabled
280
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 15: Managing Attributes
Managing Labels and Options
Managing Labels and Options
Attribute values and their associated labels are defined on the Manage Labels / Options tab. The title, or label, identifies the attribute during data entry, and to the customer in the store. If your store is available in multiple languages, you can enter a translated label for each language supported.
Manage Attributes: Manage Label / Options
The Manage Options section appears only for Dropdown and Multiple Select input types. A single attribute such as Color, can have many values assigned, although only a few might be used for any given product. You can assign the most common value as the default, to speed up data entry. An attribute with the Dropdown input type can have only one value selected as the default, whereas Multiple Select lists can have multiple default values.
Part III: Building Your Catalog
281
Chapter 15: Managing Attributes
Creating an Attribute
Creating an Attribute
Step 1 Define the Attribute Properties
1. Go to Catalog > Attributes > Manage Attributes, and click the Add Attribute
button.
2. In the Attribute Properties section, complete the following required (*)
properties: a. (Required) Enter a unique Attribute Code to identify the attribute internally. The Attribute Code should be all lowercase characters without spaces. b. (Required) In the Apply To list, choose the product type(s) with which the attribute will be associated. To choose Selected Product Types, hold the Ctrl key down and click each applicable product type.
Attribute Properties
3. Complete the remaining Attribute Properties as needed.
a. Set Scope to specify the range of influence this attribute has in terms of your entire Magento Go installation. b. Set Catalog Input Type for Store Owner to the type of input control you want to be used for this attribute during data entry. c. To avoid duplicate values in this field, set Unique Value to “Yes.”
282
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 15: Managing Attributes
Creating an Attribute
d. If you want to require that a value be entered in this field, set Values Required to “Yes.” e. To test the validity of the entry, set Input Validation for Store Owner to the type of value that the attribute should contain.
4. In the Frontend Properties section, complete as many of the settings as needed.
Frontend Properties
Step 2
Define the Label and Values
1. In the Attribute Information panel on the left. Click Manage Label / Options.
Then, do the following: a. In the Manage Titles section, under Admin, type a descriptive label to identify the field during data entry. b. The next column controls how the label appears in the frontend of your store. Leave the box blank to use the Admin label as the default. c. If your store is available in multiple languages, enter a translated label into each box, as needed.
Part III: Building Your Catalog
283
Chapter 15: Managing Attributes
Creating an Attribute
2.
(For Dropdown and Multiple Select Input Types) In the Manage Options section, click the Add Option button. Then, do the following: a. In the new row, under Admin, type the value as you want it to appear from the Admin panel. b. Enter the value as you want it to appear to the customer in your store. (You can leave this blank to use the Admin value as the default.) c. If applicable, enter a translated value for each language supported. d. Enter a number to determine the Position of this value in relation to other options in the list. e. Select Is Default to have this entry automatically selected. Repeat this step for each value you want to add to the list.
Manage Label / Options
3. When complete, click the Save Attribute button.
The attribute appears in the Manage Attributes list, sorted in alphabetical order by Attribute Code. You can use the Page controls to view each page of the list.
284
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 15: Managing Attributes
Summary of Attribute Properties
Summary of Attribute Properties
Manage Attributes: Properties - Attribute Properties
Property Attribute Code
Description (Required) A unique identifier for internal use. The code can include a combination of lowercase letters (a-z) and numbers (0-9), but must begin with a letter. The Attribute Code cannot include any special characters or spaces, although an underscore (_) can be used to indicate a space. Indicates the range over which the attribute applies. The scope setting is used to limit use of the attribute to a specific website or view. Options include: Store View Website Global
Scope
Part III: Building Your Catalog
285
Chapter 15: Managing Attributes
Summary of Attribute Properties
Property Catalog Input Type for Store Owner
Description Determines the data type and input control that is used to manage the product from the Admin panel. Options include: Text Field: A single line input field for text. Text Area: A multiple-line input field that can display paragraphs of text formatted with HTML. Date: An input field for date values. The date can be typed directly into the field, or selected from a list or calendar. Yes/No: Displays a drop-down list with pre-defined options of “Yes” and “No.” Dropdown: Displays a drop-down list of configurable options, from which only one can be selected. Multiple Select: Displays a drop-down list of configurable options. To select more than one option, hold the Ctrl key down and click each item. Price: This input type is used to create price fields in addition to the predefined attributes, Price, Special Price, Tier Price and Cost. Fixed Product Tax: The Fixed Product Tax input type lets you define FPT rates based on the requirements of your locale.
Default Value
Assigns a starting value to the attribute, to assist with data entry. Note: This option is not available for Multiple Select, Dropdown, or Fixed Product Tax input types. To assign a default value to Multiple Select or Dropdown input types, see Manage Label / Options.
Unique Value
To prevent duplicate values in this field, set Unique Value to “Yes.” Options include: Yes / No To require that a value to be entered in this field before the record can be saved, set Values Required to “Yes.” Options include: Yes / No
Values Required
286
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 15: Managing Attributes
Summary of Attribute Properties
Property Input Validation for Store Owner
Description Performs a validation check of the data entered in the field, based on the following options: None Decimal Number Integer Number Email URL Letters Letters (a-z, A-Z) or Numbers (0-9)
Apply To
(Required) Identifies the product types to which this attribute applies. Options include: All Product Types Selected Product Types Hold the Ctrl key down and click each applicable product type: Simple Product Grouped Product Configurable Product Virtual Product Bundle Product Gift Card
Use to Create Configurable Product
(Dropdown input type only) Select “Yes” if this attribute will be used to create a drop-down list for a configurable product. Options include: Yes / No
Part III: Building Your Catalog
287
Chapter 15: Managing Attributes
Summary of Attribute Properties
Frontend Properties
Manage Attributes: Properties - Frontend Properties
Property Use in Quick Search
Description Select “Yes” if you want people to be able to search on the value of this field. Options include: Yes / No Assign a value from 1 – 5 to weight the search. This is similar to Quick Search with the option of adding each attribute with its own field, rather than having one search field. Options include: Yes / No Tip: Do not include every attribute in Advanced Search, because it may overflow the search page.
Search Weight Use in Advanced Search:
Comparable on Frontend Use In Layered Navigation
Select “Yes” to include this attribute as a row in the Product Comparison report. Options include: Yes / No (Dropdown, Multiple Select and Price input type only) Includes the attribute in the layered navigation ”Shop By” section, which usually appears in the left column of a category page. The section lists products by any attribute that has been set to “Filterable.” You can click any value to display only the products which
288
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 15: Managing Attributes
Summary of Attribute Properties
Property
Description match the filter. Options include: No: The attribute is not included in the layered navigation. Filterable (with results): Lists only the products which match the filterable value. Filterable (no results): Lists all values in the attribute, even if they do not apply to any product listed. If there are no filterable attributes for a category page, the layered navigation section will not appear.
Use In Search Results Layered Navigation Use for Promo Rule Conditions Position
Select “Yes” to include this attribute in Layered Navigation. Options include: Yes / No Select “Yes” if you want this attribute to be available when creating Category and Shopping Cart Price Rules. Options include: Yes / NO This option determines the position of the attribute in the Layered Navigation menu with respect to the other filterable attributes Provides the option of using a simple, “What You See Is What You Get” text editor for entering and formatting text. The editor inserts the HTML tags needed to format. or create numbered or bulleted list. When set to “Yes,” the Allow HTML Tags on Frontend option is not used. (Available for Text Area input type.)
Enable WYSIWYG
Allow HTML tags on Frontend
Select “Yes” if you want to be able to format the content of this field with HTML tags. (Available for Text Field and Text Area input types.)
Visible on Product View Page on Frontend Used in Product Listing
Select “Yes” to include this attribute on the Additional Information tab of the product view page. This attribute can be used with simple and virtual products. Options include: Yes / No (Depends on Design Theme) Select “Yes” to include this attribute in the search results list. All available and assigned Layered Navigation attributes will abide by its results. (Depends on Design Theme) Select “Yes” to be able to sort the catalog list by the value of this attribute. The attribute will appear as an option in the Sort By list.
Used for Sorting in Product Listing
Part III: Building Your Catalog
289
Chapter 15: Managing Attributes
Creating an Attribute Set
Creating an Attribute Set
An attribute set is a collection of attributes that is used as a template for a product record. The attribute set determines the fields which are available during data entry, and the values that appear to the customer. Only an attribute set, rather than individual attributes, can be assigned to a product. If you would like to add only a small number of attributes, you can add them to the Default attribute set. If you sell products, such as cameras, that require specific types of information, it might be better to create a dedicated attribute set that includes the special attributes (fields) needed to describe the product. The use of an attribute is not limited to one set or another. You can assign an attribute to as many different attribute sets as necessary. One of the first steps when creating a product is to choose the attribute set to use as a template for the product record.
Catalog > Attributes > Manage Attribute Sets
To create an attribute set: 1. From the Admin panel, choose Catalog > Attributes> Manage Attribute Sets. 2. Click the Add New Set button to display the Edit Set Name page where you can
define a new attribute set.
Manage Attribute Sets: Edit Set Name
3. In the Name field, specify the name of the attribute set. 4. In the Based On field, select another attribute set from which this attribute set is
to inherit attributes. This option enables you to reuse the attributes already
290
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 15: Managing Attributes
Creating an Attribute Set
defined in a set to build other attribute sets. The simple option is to leave the Default option that appears in this field.
5. Click the Save Attribute Set button open the following page:
The top left of the page shows the name of the attribute set defined earlier. You have the option to edit the name because this value is for internal use. The center of the page shows a hierarchical tree representing Groups for attributes. The right side of the page shows a list of defined attributes that are not assigned to this attribute set.
6. Select the attribute to be assigned to this Group by dragging them from the
Unassigned Attributes area on the right into the relevant Group in the tree in the Groups area in the middle.
7. Click the Save Attribute Set button.
Edit Attribute Set
Note: System Attributes are indicated by an icon with an orange dot. You cannot remove them from Groups but can drag them to another Group within an attribute set.
Part III: Building Your Catalog
291
Chapter 15: Managing Attributes
Creating an Attribute Set
Creating a New Attribute Group
The center of the page shows a hierarchical tree representing groups of attributes. These groups determine how attributes appear in the backend when a product is being edited. This feature enables a logical grouping of attributes.
To create an attribute group: 1. Click the Add New button in the Groups area in the center of the page to display a
popup window where you specify the group name.
2. Specify the name of the new group and click OK. 3. Click and drag attributes from the Unassigned Attributes list into the newly
created group to assign them to this group.
4. You can also click and drag attributes that are already assigned to move them
between groups.
292
Magento Go User Guide
CHAPTER 16:
Promotional Price Rules
Magento Go offers a full spectrum of tools and features that you can use to promote your store. These include options for presenting additional products in order to increase conversion rates and for providing various discounts and promotions. Have you even wanted to create a targeted banner that would appear only for a select group of customers? Or how about an offer of free shipping for those who make purchases which are over a certain amount? In this chapter, you will learn how to set up price rules with conditional actions. Catalog Price Rules Shopping Cart Price Rules Conditions and Actions Related Banners
Part III: Building Your Catalog
293
Chapter 16: Promotional Price Rules
Catalog Price Rules
Catalog Price Rules
Catalog Price Rules are applied to products before they are added to the shopping cart. They can be used to create sales and discounts that do not require a discount code to be entered by customers. The process of defining a Catalog Price Rule consists of three steps: Describe the general information about this rule. Describe the conditions that trigger the rule. Describe the actions which take place when the conditions are met.
Rule Information
To define catalog price rules: 1. From the Admin panel, select Promotions > Catalog Price Rules.
Promotions > Catalog Price Rules
2. Click the Add New button. 3. In the General Information section, do the following:
a. Complete the Rule Name and Description fields. These fields are for internal reference only. b. Set Status to Active. c. Select the Customer Groups to which this rule applies. Tip: To select multiple groups, hold the Shift key down and press the Ctrl key (PC) or the Command key (Mac) for each selection. d. In the From Date and To Date fields, set a date range for the rule to take effect. If you leave the date range empty, then the rule is enabled as soon as it is saved.
4. Define the Conditions and Actions for this rule as described in Defining the
Catalog Price Rules Conditions and Defining the Catalog Price Rules Actions.
294
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 16: Promotional Price Rules
Catalog Price Rules
5. Select Related Banners tab on left and assign banners that are related to this
rule. Click the Reset Filter button to display all banners.
6. Click the Save Rule button to apply this rule and save your changes.
Catalog Price Rules: General Information
Part III: Building Your Catalog
295
Chapter 16: Promotional Price Rules
Catalog Price Rules
Conditions
Once you have set up the general information for the price rule, you must create conditions to determine when the rule is triggered. The properties of any attribute that is used in a price rule must be set to allow for its use in promotional rule conditions.
To define catalog price rule conditions: 1. In the Catalog Price Rule panel on the left, select Conditions.
The first rule, which appears by default, is: If All these Conditions are TRUE. It determines if the rules you define must all be met and all be true.
2. Click the green plus button to display a selection field. A list of Product Attributes
will be available for you to select.
Note: To add a product attribute to these conditions, you must set Use for Promo Rules Conditions to “Yes,” in the Frontend Properties of the attribute. For more information, see: “Attribute Quick Reference,” page 278.
296
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 16: Promotional Price Rules
Catalog Price Rules
Each selected Product Attribute will offer the option to apply different combination conditional limits such as: is, is not, greater than, less than, contains, does not contain, is one of, is not of one of, and many more.
Defining the Condition
3. You can further combine more product attribute conditions by selecting
Conditions Combinations and repeating step 2.
Selecting the Attribute Set for a Condition
4. Click the Apply icon to save this selection.
Tip: Leave Conditions blank to apply to all products.
Part III: Building Your Catalog
297
Chapter 16: Promotional Price Rules
Catalog Price Rules
Actions
Now that you have defined the Conditions that will trigger this rule, you must define the Actions to trigger when Conditions are met.
To define catalog price rule actions: 1. Select the Actions option in the panel on the left to display the following page:
Update Prices By Percentage of Original Price
2. Set Apply to one of the following:
By Percentage of the Original Price: Discounts item by subtracting from original price. For example: Enter 10 in Discount Amount to define a final price that is 10% reduction from the original price. By Fixed Amount: Discounts item by subtracting from original price based on fixed amount. For example: Enter 10 in Discount Amount to define a final price that is $10 reduction from the original price. To Percentage of the Original Price: Discounts item by defining the final price based on percentage. For example: Enter 10 in Discount Amount to define a final price that is 10% of original price. To Fixed Amount: Discounts item by defining the final price by fixed amount. For example: Enter 10 in Discount Amount to define a final price of $10.
3. Enter the Discount Amount. 4. Set Stop Further Rules Processing to “Yes” to stop processing other rules. 5. Click the Save Rule button to save your changes.
Magento Go must recalculate the prices and the priorities of each rule added. Generally, system rules are automatically processed and applied each night. To apply a rule immediately, do one of the following: Click the Save and Apply button. From the Catalog Price Rules list, click the Apply Rules button.
298
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 16: Promotional Price Rules
Shopping Cart Price Rules
Shopping Cart Price Rules
Shopping Cart Price Rules are applied when a customer reaches the Shopping Cart. They can be applied either with or without the customer entering a discount code, and include features not found in traditional coupon tools.
The process of defining a Cart Price Rule consists of three stages: Define the Shopping Cart Price Rule Information to describe the general information about this rule. Define the Shopping Cart Price Rule Conditions to describe the conditions that trigger the rule. Define the Shopping Cart Price Rule Actions to describe the actions that are executed when conditions of this rule are met.
Rule Information
To define a shopping cart price rule: 1. From the Admin panel, select Promotions > Shopping Cart Price Rules. 2. Click the Add New button to create a new rule. 3. Complete the Rule Name and Description fields. These fields are for internal
reference only.
4. In the Status field, select Active. 5. Select the Customer Groups to which this rule applies.
Tip: These are the default customer groups for Magento. They can be edited and added on to by clicking the Customers menu and selecting Customer Groups. Use your keyboards Shift key if you want to select group of attributes or Ctrl (PC) | Command (Mac) key for individual selection.
Part III: Building Your Catalog
299
Chapter 16: Promotional Price Rules
Shopping Cart Price Rules
6. Select a coupon option from the Coupon list.
No Coupon: Define an amount in Uses per Customer to limit this rule if needed. Specific Coupon: Selecting this option will expand Coupon Code and Uses per Coupon. Enter a coupon code and define Uses per Coupon and Uses per Customer for each customer.
7. In the From Date and To Date fields, set a date range for the rule to take effect. If
you leave the date range empty, then the rule is enabled as soon as it is saved.
8. Define the Conditions and Actions for this rule. 9. In the panel on the left, select Related Banners. Then, click the Reset Filter
button to display a list of all available banners.
10. Click the Save Rule button to apply this rule and save your changes.
Promotions > Shopping Cart Price Rules: General Information
300
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 16: Promotional Price Rules
Shopping Cart Price Rules
Conditions
Once you have setup the general information for the price rule, you must create the conditions that specify when the rule is triggered.
To define shopping cart price rule conditions: 1. Select the Conditions option in the panel on the left.
The first rule appears by default, as says: If All these Conditions are TRUE.
2. Click the green plus button to display a selection field. Condition options
available are: Product attribute combination Products subselection Cart Attributes
Note: To add a product attribute to these conditions, you must set Use for Promo Rules Conditions to “Yes” in the Frontend Properties of the attribute. To learn more, see: “Attribute Quick Reference,” on page 278. Each selected attribute offers the option to apply different combination conditional limits such as: is, is not, greater than, less than, contains, does not contain, is one of, is not of one of, and many more.
Shopping Cart Price Rule Condition
3. You can further combine more product attribute conditions by selecting
Conditions Combinations and applying steps 3 – 4.
4. Save this selection of products by clicking the Apply icon.
Note: Leave Conditions blank to apply to all products.
Part III: Building Your Catalog
301
Chapter 16: Promotional Price Rules
Shopping Cart Price Rules
Actions
Now that you have defined the Conditions that will trigger this rule, you must define the Actions to trigger when Conditions are met.
To define shopping cart price rule actions: 1. Select the Actions option in the panel on the left to display the following page: 2. Select one of the discount options from the Apply field:
Percent of product price discount: Discounts item by subtracting from original price. For example: Enter 10 in Discount Amount to define a final price that is 10% reduction from the original price. Fixed amount discount: Discounts item by subtracting from original price of each product in your cart based on fixed amount. For example: Enter 10 in Discount Amount to define a final price that is $10 reduction from the original price. Fixed amount discount for whole cart: Discounts item by defining the final price based on percentage. For example: Enter 10 in Discount Amount to define a final price that is 10% of entire cart. Buy X get Y free: (discount amount is Y) Discounts are applied to the “Y” item.
Shopping Cart Price Rule Actions
302
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 16: Promotional Price Rules
Shopping Cart Price Rules
3. Enter an amount in the Discount Amount field. This is required. 4. In the Maximum Qty Discount is Applied To field, enter an amount to limit the
maximum number of products to which the discount applies.
5. Enter an amount to specify of how often the discount is applied in Discount Qty
Step (Buy X) field if Buy X get Y free (discount amount is Y) is selected.
6. In the Free Shipping field, specify whether to combine the coupon amount with
a free shipping offer, for only the products for which the coupon is valid or for the entire Order, when one of these products is in the shopping cart.
7. Select Yes for Stop Further Rules Processing to stop processing other rules
that have been created.
8. You can further define and specify these rules to be applied to certain or all
products. Leave the conditions field blank to apply this rule to all products. The first rule appears by default: If All these Conditions are TRUE. It specifies whether the rules that you define must all be met and all of them are true.
9. Click the green plus sign
to display a selection field. Condition options
available are: Cart Item Attribute and Product attribute. Note: To add a product attribute to these conditions, you must set Use for Promo Rules Conditions to “Yes” in the Frontend Properties of the attribute. To learn more, see: “Attribute Quick Reference,” on page 278.
10. Each selected Attribute will offer the option to apply different combination
conditional limits such as: is, is not, greater than, less than, contains, does not contain, is one of, is not of one of, and many more.
11. You can further combine more product attribute conditions by selecting
Conditions Combinations and applying steps 8 – 10.
12. Click the Save Rule button to save your changes.
Note: As you add new rules, Magento Go recalculates the prices and the priorities of the rules. Generally, system rules are automatically processed and applied each night. To apply a new rule immediately, you must click the Save and Apply button the rules pages or Apply Rules in Catalog Price Rules list page.
Part III: Building Your Catalog
303
Chapter 16: Promotional Price Rules
Shopping Cart Price Rules
Price Rule Labels
You can create a default labels for Product and Shopping Cart Price Rules which will be used in all store views, or create specific labels for each view.
To create a label: 1. From the open rule, in the Price Rule panel on the left, select Labels. 2. In the Default Label section, enter the text to be used as the Default Rule Label
for All Store Views.
Default Label
3. In the Store View Specific Labels section, enter the translated text for each Main
Store language.
Store View Specific Labels
4. Click the Save Rule button.
304
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 16: Promotional Price Rules
Price Rule Banners
Price Rule Banners
Any banners you have created can be associated with both Catalog Price Rules and Shopping Cart Price Rules for a promotion. To associate a banner with a price rule, both the banner and price rule must already exist.
Shopping Cart Price Rule - Related Banners
To associate a banner with a price rule: 1. From the Admin panel, do one of the following:
Select Promotions > Catalog Price Rules. Select Shopping Cart Price Rules.
2. In the list, click to open the rule to which you want to add the banner. 3. In the Price Rule panel on the left, select Related Banners. 4. In the list of banners, select the checkbox of each banner that you want to
associate with the price rule. Tip: If your banners don’t appear in the table, click the Reset Filter button to clear previous filtering rules.
5. Click the Save Rule button to save your changes.
Part III: Building Your Catalog
305
Chapter 16: Promotional Price Rules
Price Rule Banners
Notes:
_______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________
306
Magento Go User Guide
Part IV: Sales & Fulfillment
CHAPTER 17:
Processing Orders
This chapter describes some of the terms used for handling orders in Magento Go. In addition to creating orders, there are many features in the Magento Go backend that are part of the process of managing and fulfilling orders, such as creating invoices, shipments and credit memos and editing and cancelling orders. What exactly happens when the customer clicks the Place Order button?
Checkout
Part IV: Sales & Fulfillment
309
CHAPTER 17:Processing Orders
Order Process Overview
Order Process Overview
Order Submitted
In the final phase of the checkout process, the customer reviews the order, agrees to the Terms and Conditions, and clicks the Place Order button. The customer receives a confirmation of the order, with a link to the Order #.
Sales Order “Pending”
The sales order appears in the Order list with a status of “Pending.” The payment has not been processed and the order can still be canceled.
Payment Received The order remains “Pending” until payment is received. Depending on the payment action selected, the credit card payment service provider will notify the merchant when the transaction is authorized and in some cases, processed. The status of the invoice is now “Processing.”
310
Magento Go User Guide
CHAPTER 17:Processing Orders Invoice the Order Sometimes an order is invoiced before payment is received. In this example, the invoice is generated and submitted after the credit card payment is authorized and processed. The invoice is generated and submitted, and a copy is sent by email to the customer.
Order Process Overview
Order “Processing” When the customer check the status of the order in the Account Dashboard, The status of the order is “Processing.”
Ship the Order The shipment is submitted, packing slips printed, the customer is notified by email, and the package is shipped.
Order “Complete” When the customer checks the status of the order in the Account Dashboard. The status of this order is “Complete.”
Part IV: Sales & Fulfillment
311
CHAPTER 17:Processing Orders
Terms and Conditions
Terms and Conditions
Custom terms and conditions require the customer to check the box and agree to the terms and conditions before completing the checkout process. Many sites use terms and conditions as a way of creating contractual agreements between the customer and the merchant. You can use it to inform customers of your store’s policies as well as protect yourself against possible issues that may arise.
Terms and Conditions During Checkout
To set up Terms and Conditions: 1. From the Admin panel, select Sales > Terms and Conditions.
Sales > Terms and Conditions
312
Magento Go User Guide
CHAPTER 17:Processing Orders
Terms and Conditions
2. In the upper-right corner, click the Add New button. 3. In the Terms and Conditions Information section, do the following:
a. In the Condition Name field, enter a descriptive title. b. Set the Status to Enabled if you want the new Terms and Conditions to be active upon saving. c. In the Show Content As list, select whether you want to enter the new content as Text or HTML. If you do not know how to use HTML, select Text. Note: If you select HTML, you must use HTML in both the Checkbox Text and Content textboxes. If you select Text, you can enter plain text in both. d. In the Checkbox Text textbox, insert the text, or condition, that you want the customer to agree to during checkout. e. In the Content textbox, complete the terms and conditions that you want the customers to agree to during checkout. f. In the Content Height (CSS), you enter a value to determine the height of the content box. This is useful if you have a long set of terms and conditions, and don’t want to have a long scrolling page.
Part IV: Sales & Fulfillment
313
CHAPTER 17:Processing Orders
Managing Sales Orders
Managing Sales Orders
When an order is made, either from the store or Admin panel, a sales order is created to record the transaction. The sales order can be seen in the Orders list by selecting the Orders option from the Sales menu in the Admin panel. This is only a temporary record. Payment has not yet been processed and the order can still be canceled.
Fulfilling and Completing Orders
After the customer places an order, several processes take place, including the transfer of payment, invoicing, and shipping. In this section, you will learn how to handle an order after it has been received, and process to completion.
Invoicing an Order
An invoice is a record of the receipt of payment for an order. Creating an invoice for an order converts the temporary sales order into a permanent record of the order, which cannot be canceled. Multiple invoices can be created for a single order, each containing as much or as few of the purchased products that you specify.
To invoice an order: 1. From the Admin panel, select Sales > Orders.
314
Magento Go User Guide
CHAPTER 17:Processing Orders
Managing Sales Orders
2. Select the View option on the row of the Pending order under Status column that
you would like to invoice.
3. Click the Invoice button and scroll down to the Shipping Information if you
would like to add a tracking number.
4. Click the Add Tracking Number button and Complete the following:
Carrier: Title: Number: Select a shipping carrier from the menu. Will be filled in by carrier selection. Edit if required. Provide the Tracking number of this order.
5. In Invoice Comments under Invoice History menu, complete the comments as
necessary. Then, in the Invoice Totals section, select the Append Comments checkbox to add the comments to the invoice.
6. Select the Email Copy of Invoice checkbox to send a copy of the invoice to your
customer.
7. Click the Submit Invoice button to process the invoice and capture sales.
Note: If your store requires that you ship before invoicing, click the Ship button, complete the shipping information and submit your shipment. When that is complete, finish the invoicing steps.
Part IV: Sales & Fulfillment
315
CHAPTER 17:Processing Orders
Managing Sales Orders
Shipping an Order
A shipment is a record of the products in an order which have been shipped. Like an invoice, multiple shipments can be created per order, until all of the products in the order are shipped.
To display the shipment detail: 1. From the Admin panel, select Sales > Shipments. 2. Find the shipment in the list, and click to open the record.
Sales > Shipments
316
Magento Go User Guide
CHAPTER 17:Processing Orders
Managing Sales Orders
Creating New Orders
This section describes how to create an order directly from the Admin panel, which is sometimes necessary when an order is received by phone.
To create a new order: 1. From the Admin panel, select Sales > Orders. 2. Click the Create New Order button. The, do one of the following:
Select a customer from the list. Click the Create New Customer button to add a new customer.
3. Select the Store View that relates to the order. 4. Click the Add Products button, and do the following:
a. Select the products to be purchased. Then, click the Add Selected Product(s) to Order button. b. Complete the required fields (*) including customer group, shipping method, and payment method. You can define many options for the order, such as choosing custom prices for products and applying discount codes. c. When the order information is complete, click the Submit Order button. d. To confirm payment and generate an invoice, click the Invoice button. e. Review the invoice, and if correct, click the Submit Invoice button at the bottom of the page.
5. When you are ready to ship the products, click the Ship button and do the
following: a. If required, click the Add Tracking Number button to enter the tracking number received from the shipping service. Using a tracking number gives the customer the ability to review the order from their customer Account Dashboard. b. Review the shipment. You can modify the quantity to be shipped if only part of the order is ready. The order changes to “Completed” status after all products have been shipped.
Part IV: Sales & Fulfillment
317
CHAPTER 17:Processing Orders
Managing Sales Orders
c. Click the Email Copy of Shipment option to automatically send an email to the customer notifying them that their products were shipped. d. Click the Submit Shipment button at the bottom of the page.
6. Click the Back button to return to the orders page where you can create
additional orders as needed.
Editing an Order
Editing will cancel the order, and a new one will be created instead.
To edit an order: 1. From the Admin panel, select Sales > Orders. 2. Select the pending order that you want to edit. 3. Click the Edit button at the top of the screen and click OK on the Warning pop-up
window.
4. Make the changes as necessary and click Submit Order to reprocess this order.
Canceling an Order
Canceling an order will remove it from your bank of pending orders.
To cancel an order: 1. From the Admin panel, select Sales > Orders. 2. Select a pending order that you would like to cancel by clicking the Edit button on
its respective row.
3. Click the Cancel button on top right menu of order page to remove this order.
318
Magento Go User Guide
CHAPTER 17:Processing Orders
Managing Sales Orders
Putting an Order “On Hold”
If customer payment method is not running or the purchased item is temporarily out of stock, you can put a customer’s order on hold.
To put an order on hold: 1. From the Admin panel, select Sales > Orders. 2. Select a pending order that you would like to place on hold by clicking the View
button on its respective row.
3. Do one of the following:
Click the Hold button on top right menu of order page to place the order on hold. To release an order from hold, click the Unhold button.
Handling Backorders
Many stores operate differently. If your store’s inventory is constantly refreshing itself and can do so without delay, Magento Go has provided the option to allow customers to continue ordering to a point that you are comfortable with, even after the stock has reached zero.
To handle backorders: 1. From the Admin panel, select Catalog > Manage Products. 2. Select a predefined product or click the Add Product button. 3. Select the Inventory tab on the left hand panel. 4. In the Backorders field, clear the Use Config Settings checkbox. Then, enter
the appropriate setting. Allow Qty Below 0: Keeps items available in your store after the stock is depleted. Allow Qty Below 0 and Notify Customer: Keeps items available in your store after the stock is depleted, but notifies the customer via email upon purchase.
5. Click the Save button to save your changes.
Part IV: Sales & Fulfillment
319
CHAPTER 17:Processing Orders
Updating the Shopping Cart
Updating the Shopping Cart
Magento Go lets you edit the contents of a customer's shopping cart from the Admin panel. Changes you might make include adding items to a cart, applying a discount, or even adding products that the customer wasn’t able to find in the store. You can update shopping cart items, remove items, and move an item to the customer’s wishlist. Note: Customers must be registered with your store to receive Manage Shopping Cart assistance. The following options are available through Manage Shopping Cart: Updating, removing, or transferring product in the customer’s shopping cart Applying coupon code Adding products to customer’s shopping cart Adding or transferring products to customer’s wishlist Adding products in the comparison list Recently compared products Recently viewed products Last ordered items
Note: To assist a customer for a different language store view, select the appropriate store view from Choose Store View list on the top left.
To update customers shopping cart: 1. To update the number of units for a product, add the amount requested in Qty. 2. To remove an item, select Remove from the Action column. 3. To move an item to the wishlist of the customer’s account, select Move to
Wishlist from the Action column.
4. Click Update Items and Qty’s to update your changes.
320
Magento Go User Guide
CHAPTER 17:Processing Orders
Updating the Shopping Cart
Applying a Coupon Code
You as a merchant can apply a coupon code with Manage Shopping Cart. Applying coupon codes are simple:
To apply a coupon code: 1. Enter a coupon code in Apply Coupon Code. 2. Click Apply to apply the discount to customer’s total.
Adding Products to a Shopping Cart
This tab enables you to find the products that a customer is interested in purchasing. You can use filters to limit the products that are shown.
To add select products to shopping cart: 1. Click the Reset Filter button to show all products. Check the relevant check
boxes of the products for inclusion.
2. Click Add Selected Product(s) to Shopping Cart to update customer’s
shopping cart.
Adding Wishlist Items
This tab enables you move select or all items in the wishlist to the shopping cart.
To add select wishlist items to shopping cart: 1. Check the relevant check boxes of the products for inclusion. 2. Click Add Selected Product(s) to Shopping Cart to update customer’s
shopping cart.
Part IV: Sales & Fulfillment
321
CHAPTER 17:Processing Orders
Updating the Shopping Cart
Adding Comparison Items
This tab enables you move select or all items that a customer has in the comparison list to the shopping cart.
To add products in the comparison list to shopping cart: 1. Check the relevant check boxes of the products for inclusion. 2. Click Add Selected Product(s) to Shopping Cart to update customer’s
shopping cart.
Adding Recently Viewed Items
This tab enables you view all products that had been recently viewed by the customer.
To add select recently viewed products to shopping cart: 1. Check the checkbox of each product you want to include. 2. Click Add Selected Product(s) to Shopping Cart to update customer’s
shopping cart.
Adding Previously Ordered Items
This tab enables you view all orders that had been previously placed by the customer.
To add select previously ordered products to shopping cart: 1. Check the relevant check boxes of the products for inclusion. 2. Click Add Selected Product(s) to Shopping Cart to update customer’s
shopping cart. To directly place an order for the customer, click the Create Order in the upper-right corner. Note: The customer must refresh the shopping cart page in order to view changes made by the store owner.
322
Magento Go User Guide
CHAPTER 17:Processing Orders
Managing Refunds and Store Credit
Managing Refunds and Store Credit
To manage customers return needs, Magento Go has provided the ability to issue refunds, partial refunds, or Gift Cards for exchange purposes, by generating a credit memo. The process to refund an order for a customer can be completed from the Admin panel of your Magento Go store. Note: You can create credit memos only for orders for which invoices were created. Without an invoice, an order is assumed not to be paid so that there is nothing to refund in a credit memo.
To issue a refund: 1. From the Admin panel, select Sales > Orders. 2. Click the View link on the right side of the row of each order to display the Order
view page.
3. Click the Credit Memo button to generate a credit memo. Then, do the following:
a. Scroll down to items to Refund area, and in the Qty to Refund field of the relevant product, specify the quantity of products to refund. b. To specify that this product was actually returned to the store, check the Return to Stock option. c. Click the Email Copy of Credit Memo option, shown below, to automatically send an email to the customer that the order has been refunded. You can add append comments added in Credit Memo Comments adjusted to Refund Totals by checking Append Comments. You can also adjust the refund totals to match your business rules. The following options are available for adjustments: Refund Shipping Adjustment Refund Adjustment Fee
d. If the customer has credit with your store, you can apply the refunds to their credit. Check Refund to Store Credit.
4. Click the Refund Offline button to apply the refunds. To view the list of refunds made in your store 1. From the Admin panel, select Sales > Credit Memos. 2. Click the View link on the right side for the row of each Credit Memo to display
the Credit Memo view page.
Part IV: Sales & Fulfillment
323
CHAPTER 17:Processing Orders
Managing Refunds and Store Credit
Notes:
_______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________
324
Magento Go User Guide
CHAPTER 18:
Shipping Methods
Magento Go supports a wide range of shipping methods and carriers. This chapter shows how to configure the shipping methods and carriers that are available in your store. Shipping Settings Shipping Rates Supported Carriers
Most of the examples in this chapter take place in the Configuration section of the Admin panel. The breadcrumb trail at the beginning of each section shows the path to the configuration settings in the Admin panel.
System Configuration- Shipping Methods
Part IV: Sales & Fulfillment
325
CHAPTER 18:Shipping Methods
Shipping Methods During Checkout
Shipping Methods During Checkout
Shopping Cart: Get a Quote
Checkout: Shipping Method
Order Review: Shipping & Handling Charges
326
Magento Go User Guide
CHAPTER 18:Shipping Methods
Shipping Settings
Shipping Settings
The Shipping Settings establish the point of origin for all shipments made from your store or warehouse.
Configuration: Shipping Settings - Origin
To establish the point of origin: 1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. In the Configuration panel on the left, under Sales, click Shipping Settings. 3. Click to expand the Origin section and complete the following fields to establish
the point of origin used for shipping calculations. Country Region / State ZIP / Postal Code City
4. Click the Save Config button to save the settings.
Part IV: Sales & Fulfillment
327
CHAPTER 18:Shipping Methods
Shipping Rates
Shipping Rates
The Shipping Methods tab manages the configuration for the various shipping methods and carrier services available to your customers during checkout.
Rates
Table Rates Table rate shipping lets you calculate shipping rates based on the combination of several conditions. The rate can be based on Weight v. Destination, Price v. Destination, or # of Items v. Destination. Flat Rate Flat Rate is a simple shipping solution that uses a standard fixed rate per item or per order, regardless of order size or weight. Free Shipping Free Shipping is one of the easiest and most effective promotions you can offer your customers.
328
Magento Go User Guide
CHAPTER 18:Shipping Methods
Shipping Rates
Table Rate Shipping
The Table Rate shipping method lets you set up a table to calculate shipping rates for a combination of conditions. The shipping rate can be based on Weight v. Destination, Price v. Destination, or # of Items v. Destination. For example, if your warehouse is in Los Angeles, it costs less to ship to San Diego than to Vermont. You can use Table Rate shipping to pass these savings on to your customer. Only one set of Table Rate data can be active at any time. The data that is used to calculate the rate is prepared in a spreadsheet and imported into your store. The results appear in the Estimate Shipping and Tax section of the shopping cart when the customer requests a quote.
Shopping Cart: Estimate Shipping and Tax - Table Rates
Step 1:
Complete the Default Settings
The first step is to complete the default settings for table rates, which can be done without changing the scope of the configuration.
To complete the default settings: 1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. In the Configuration panel on the left, under Sales, select “Shipping Methods.” 3. Click to expand the Table Rate section. Then, do the following:
a. Set Enabled to “Yes.” b. In the Title field, type a name for the section of table rate shipping methods that appears during checkout. (The default title is “Best Way.”) c. In the Method Name field, type a name for this table rate shipping method.
Part IV: Sales & Fulfillment
329
CHAPTER 18:Shipping Methods d. Set Condition to one of the methods of calculation: Weight vs. Destination Price vs. Destination # of Items vs. Destination
Shipping Rates
e. Set Include Virtual Products in Price Calculation to “Yes” if you want to be able to apply Table Rate shipping to virtual products. f. If charging a handling fee, set Calculate Handling Fee to either “Fixed” or “Percent.” Then, enter the Handling Fee rate according to the method used to calculate the fee. g. In the Displayed Error Message box, type the message that appears if this method becomes unavailable. h. Set Ship to Applicable Countries to one of the following: All Allowed Countries Specific Countries Then, in the Ship to Specific Countries list, select each country where orders can be shipping using this method. (Hold the Ctrl key down to select multiple options.) i. Type a number in the Sort Order field to determine the order that this method appears during checkout.
4. Click the Save Config button to save your changes.
After you have configured Table Rate shipping, go through the payment process using a different country address each time to make sure the shipping and handling rates are correct.
330
Magento Go User Guide
CHAPTER 18:Shipping Methods
Shipping Rates
Step 2:
Prepare the Data
The second step is to prepare the data and import the values into Magento Go. It is necessary to change the scope of the configuration to the Website where the table rate method will be used. This change causes the Export and Import options to appear, and displays a Use Default checkbox to the right of each option.
To create the table rate data: 1. In the upper-left corner, set the Current Configuration Scope to the Website
where this method will be used. (For example, you can select Default Website.) The Export and Import options appear in the Table Rates section, and Use Default checkboxes appear to the right of each option. Note: While working with a specific scope, you must clear the Use Default checkbox to change any of the current settings.
2. Click the Export CSV button. Then, save the tablerates.csv file to your computer. 3. Open the file in your spreadsheet program.
Part IV: Sales & Fulfillment
331
CHAPTER 18:Shipping Methods
Shipping Rates
4. Complete the table with the appropriate values for the shipping calculation
method used. You can use a wildcard (*) to represent all possible values in any category. The Country column must contain a valid 3-character code for each row. For more information, see: Country Codes,” on page 467.
5. Save the completed tablerates.csv file. 6. Return to the Table Rates configuration, and at the Import field, click the
Browse button. Select your completed tablerates.csv file and import the rates.
Example: Price vs. Destination
This example uses the Price vs. Destination condition to create a set of three different shipping rates based on the amount of the order subtotal for the continental United States, Alaska, and Hawaii.
Country Region/State Zip/Postal Code Order Subtotal (and above) USA USA USA USA USA USA USA USA USA Shipping Price 0 50 100 0 50 100 0 50 100 15 10 5 20 15 10 20 15 10
* * *
AK AK AK HI HI HI
* * * * * * * * *
332
Magento Go User Guide
CHAPTER 18:Shipping Methods
Shipping Rates
Configuration: Shipping Methods – Table Rates
Part IV: Sales & Fulfillment
333
CHAPTER 18:Shipping Methods
Shipping Rates
Flat Rate
Flat rate is a fixed, predefined charge that can be applied per item, or per shipment. Flat rate is a simple solution, especially when used with the flat-rate packaging that is available from some carriers.
Shopping Cart: Estimate Shipping and Tax – Flat Rate
To set up Flat Rate shipping: 1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. In the Configuration panel on the left, under Sales, select Shipping Methods. 3. Click to expand the Flat Rate section. Then, do the following:
a. Set Enabled to “Yes.” Flat Rate now appears as an option in the Estimate Shipping and Tax section of the shopping cart, and also in the Shipping section during checkout. b. Enter a Title for this shipping method. The default is “Flat Rate.” c. In the Method Name field, enter a descriptive label for the method that is used to calculate the rate. The default method name is “Fixed,” and appears next to the rate in the shopping cart. If you charge a handling fee, you can change the Method Name to “Plus Handling” or something else suitable. d. In the Type field, select how the Flat Rate shipping fee is to be applied: None: Disables the payment type. The Flat Rate option is listed in the cart, but with a rate of zero—which is the same as free shipping. Per Order: Charges the single flat rate for the entire order. Per Item: Charges a single flat rate for each item. The rate is multiplied by the number of items in the cart, regardless of whether there are multiple quantities of the same, or of different items.
334
Magento Go User Guide
CHAPTER 18:Shipping Methods e. Type the Price to be charged for the flat rate fee. f. Set Calculate Handling Fee to one of the following methods: Fixed Percent
Shipping Rates
g. If charging a Handling Fee, enter the amount according to the method used for calculating the fee. For example, if the fee is calculating based on a percentage, enter 0.06 for 6%. If using a fixed amount calculation, enter the fee as a decimal. h. In the Displayed Error Message box, type the message that appears if this method becomes unavailable. i. Set Ship to Applicable Countries to one of the following: All Allowed Countries Specific Countries Then, in the Ship to Specific Countries list, select each country where orders can be shipping using this method. (Hold the Ctrl key down to select multiple options.) j. Type a number in the Sort Order field to determine the order in which Flat Rate is listed with other shipping methods during checkout.
4. Click the Save Config button to save these settings.
Part IV: Sales & Fulfillment
335
CHAPTER 18:Shipping Methods
Shipping Rates
Configuration: Shipping Methods – Flat Rate
336
Magento Go User Guide
CHAPTER 18:Shipping Methods
Free Shipping
Free Shipping
Free shipping is one of the most effective promotions you can offer. It can be based on a minimum purchase, or set up as a shopping cart rule that applies when a set of conditions has been met. If both can be applied to the same order, the configuration setting will take precedence over the shopping cart rule. Note: Additional configuration settings may be required for each shipping carrier.
Shopping Cart: Estimate Shipping and Tax – Free Shipping
To set up free shipping: 1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. In the Configuration panel on the left, under Sales, select Shipping Methods. 3. Click to expand the Free Shipping section. Then, do the following:
a. Set Enabled to “Yes.” b. Enter a Title for this shipping method that will be displayed during checkout. c. In the Method Name field, enter a descriptive name for the method. d. In the Minimum Order Amount field, specify the order amount that qualifies an order for free shipping. e. In the Displayed Error Message box, type the message to appear if this method becomes unavailable. f. Set Ship to Applicable Countries to one of the following: All Allowed Countries Specific Countries In the Ship to Specific Countries list, select each country where orders can be shipped. (Hold the Ctrl key down to select multiple options.)
Part IV: Sales & Fulfillment
337
CHAPTER 18:Shipping Methods g. Set Show Method if Not Applicable to one of the following: No: Yes:
Free Shipping
To show the Free Shipping method only when applicable. To always show the Free Shipping method, even if not applicable.
h. Type a number in the Sort Order field to determine the order that this method appears during checkout. i. In the Sort Order field, specify the position of this shipping method in relation to the other shipping methods offered to the customer.
4. When the configuration is complete, click the Save Config button to save the
settings.
Configuration: Shipping Methods - Free Shipping
338
Magento Go User Guide
CHAPTER 18:Shipping Methods
Shipping Carriers
Shipping Carriers
If you have a commercial account with UPS, USPS, FedEx, or DHL, you can offer a shipping option for that carrier. The rates are automatically downloaded, so you do not need to look up the information. Although the configuration options vary for each carrier, they all require your Account Number or User ID, and a Gateway URL which is used to gain access to their system. UPS United Parcel Service offers domestic and international shipping services by land and air to more than 220 countries. USPS The United States Postal Service is the independent postal service of United States government. USPS offers domestic and international shipping services by land and air. FedEx FedEx offers domestic and international shipping services by land and air to more than 220 countries. DHL DHL offers integrated international services and tailored, customer-focused solutions for managing and transporting letters, goods and information. For step-by-step instructions, see: “Shipping Carriers,” on page 453.
Shipping Carrier Configuration
Part IV: Sales & Fulfillment
339
CHAPTER 18:Shipping Methods
Shipping Carriers
Notes:
_______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________
340
Magento Go User Guide
CHAPTER 19:
Payment Methods
Magento Go allows you to easily use a variety of payment methods in your online store. Many are already integrated into Magento Go and you can enable and configure them directly from the Magento Go Admin panel. Follow this guide to learn how to configure the following payment methods: Bank Transfer Cash on Delivery Payment Check or Money Order Purchase Order Zero Subtotal Checkout
Part IV: Sales & Fulfillment
341
CHAPTER 19:Payment Methods
Bank Transfer Payment
Bank Transfer Payment
Magento Go allows you to accept payments from your customers by bank transfer to your merchant bank account.
Bank Transfer Payment
To enable bank transfer payments: 1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. From the Configuration panel on the left, under Sales, select the Payment
Methods tab.
3. Click to expand the Bank Transfer Payment section. Then, do the following:
a. To activate this payment method, set Enabled to “Yes.” b. In the Title field, enter an appropriate name to identify this payment method during checkout process. c. Set New Order Status to “Pending” to identify newly generated orders which have not been processed completely.
342
Magento Go User Guide
CHAPTER 19:Payment Methods
Bank Transfer Payment
d. In the Payment from Applicable Countries field, select the countries where this payment method can be used: All Allowed Countries: Customers from all countries in the default countries list can use this payment method. Specific Countries: Customers from only those countries selected in the Payment from Specific Countries list can use this payment method. (The list appears when you select this option.) e. In the Instructions field, enter instructions for your customers to set up a bank transfer. Depending on the country where your bank is located, and your bank’s requirements for transfers, you might need to include the following information: f. Bank account name Bank account number Bank routing code Bank name Bank address
Set Minimum Order Total and Maximum Order Total to the minimum and maximum order amounts which are required to qualify for this payment method. Note: An order qualifies for the payment method if the total falls between, or exactly matches, the minimum or maximum total values.
g. Enter a numeric value in the Sort Order field, to set the position of Cash on Delivery in the list of payment methods that is displayed during checkout. Enter zero for the top of the sort order list, 1 for the second highest in the list, and so on.
4. When finished, click the Save Config button.
Part IV: Sales & Fulfillment
343
CHAPTER 19:Payment Methods
Cash on Delivery
Cash on Delivery
Magento Go allows you to accept payments from your customers with cash on delivery. With a cash on delivery payment option, also called “collect on delivery,” the customer doesn’t pay until the product is delivered.
Cash On Delivery
To enable cash on delivery payment method: 1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. From the Configuration panel on the left, under Sales, select Payment Methods. 3. Click to expand the Cash on Delivery section. Then, do the following:
a. To activate this payment method, set Enabled to “Yes.” b. In the Title field, enter an appropriate title to identify this payment method during the checkout process of your Magento Go store. c. Set New Order Status to “Pending” until they are processed completely. d. In the Payment from Applicable Countries field, select the countries where this payment method can be used: All Allowed Countries: Customers from all countries in the default countries list can use this payment method. Specific Countries: Customers from only those countries selected can use this payment method. (The list appears when you select this option.)
344
Magento Go User Guide
CHAPTER 19:Payment Methods
Cash on Delivery
Cash On Delivery
e. In the Instructions field, enter instructions for your customers to set up a Cash on Delivery payment. f. Set Minimum Order Total and Maximum Order Total to the minimum and maximum order amounts which are required to qualify for this payment method. Note: An order qualifies for the payment method if the total falls between, or exactly matches, the minimum or maximum total values. g. Enter a numeric value in the Sort Order field, to set the position of Cash on Delivery in the list of payment methods that is displayed during checkout. Enter zero for the top of the sort order list, 1 for the second highest in the list, and so on.
4. When finished, click Save Config.
Part IV: Sales & Fulfillment
345
CHAPTER 19:Payment Methods
Check / Money Order
Check / Money Order
Magento Go allows you to accept payments by check and money order. By default, the Check/Money Order payment method is enabled.
Check / Money Order
To configure checks and money orders: 1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. In the Configuration panel on the left, under Sales, click Payment Methods. 3. Click to expand the Check / Money Order section, and do the following:
a. To activate this payment method, set Enabled to “Yes.” b. Enter an appropriate Title to identify this payment method during checkout. The default entry is “Check / Money Order.”
c. Set New Order Status to display as “Pending” until the order has completed processing.
346
Magento Go User Guide
CHAPTER 19:Payment Methods
Check / Money Order
d. In the Payment from Applicable Countries field, select the countries where this payment method can be used: All Allowed Countries: Customers from all countries in the default countries list can use this payment method. Specific Countries: Customers from only those countries selected in the Payment from Specific Countries list can use this payment method. (The list appears when you select this option.) Note: To define which countries are included in the Allowed Countries list, see System > Configuration > General > Countries Options. e. In the Make Check Payable To field, enter the name of the person to whom the check will be payable. f. In the Send Check To field, enter the street address where the checks will be mailed. g. Set the Minimum Order Total and Maximum Order Total to the minimum and maximum order amounts which are required to qualify for this payment method. Note: An order qualifies if the total falls between, or exactly matches, the minimum or maximum total values. h. Enter a numeric value in the Sort Order field, to set the position of Cash on Delivery in the list of payment methods that is displayed during checkout. Enter zero for the top of the sort order list, 1 for the second highest in the list, and so on.
4. When finished, click the Save Config button.
When the completed configuration is saved, the Checks and Money Order option appears as an option under Payment Information during the checkout process.
Part IV: Sales & Fulfillment
347
CHAPTER 19:Payment Methods
Purchase Order
Purchase Order
The Purchase Order payment method allows commercial buyers to checkout items from your Magento Go store using a purchase order. When selected, a text field is added near the Purchase Order option in the Payment Information page of the checkout process. The customer can populate this field with the purchase order number or other information for the courier.
Purchase Order
To configure Purchase Orders: 1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. In the Configuration panel on the left, under Sales, select Payment Methods. 3. Click to expand the Purchase Order section. Then, do the following:
a. To activate this payment method, set Enabled to “Yes.” b. Enter an appropriate Title to identify this payment method during checkout. c. Set New Order Status to display as “Pending” until the order has completed processing.
348
Magento Go User Guide
CHAPTER 19:Payment Methods
Purchase Order
d. In the Payment from Applicable Countries field, select the countries where this payment method can be used: All Allowed Countries: Customers from all countries in the default countries list can use this payment method. Specific Countries: Customers from only those countries selected in the Payment from Specific Countries list can use this payment method. (The list appears when you select this option.) Note: To define which countries are included in the Allowed Countries list, see System > Configuration > General > Countries Options.
Purchase Order
e. Set the Minimum Order Total and Maximum Order Total to the order amounts which are required to qualify for this payment method. Note: An order qualifies if the total falls between, or exactly matches, the minimum or maximum total values. f. Enter a numeric value in the Sort Order field to set the position of Purchase Order in the list of payment methods displayed during checkout.
4. When finished, click the Save Config button.
Part IV: Sales & Fulfillment
349
CHAPTER 19:Payment Methods
Zero Subtotal Checkout
Zero Subtotal Checkout
If a customer places an order and the subtotal is equal to zero, you can offer them the Zero Subtotal Checkout payment method. This payment method is only applied to the shopping cart if the subtotal equals zero. This will usually happen when the discount covers the whole price of an item and the customer has the option to select Free Shipping for shipping method. Note: The Zero Subtotal Checkout payment method is visible only when an order is created in the Admin panel.
To Setup Zero Subtotal Checkout: 1. In the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. In the Configuration panel on the left, under Sales, select Payment Methods. 3. Click to expand the Zero Subtotal Checkout section.
Zero Subtotal Checkout
350
Magento Go User Guide
CHAPTER 19:Payment Methods Then, do the following:
Zero Subtotal Checkout
a. Enter an appropriate Title to identify this payment method during checkout. b. Set Enabled to “Yes” to activate this payment method. c. Set New Order Status to display as “Pending” until the order has completed processing. Pending: Processing: The order is pending approval and processing. The order is being processed.
d. Set Automatically Invoice All Items according to “Yes” if you want to invoice all items having a zero balance automatically. e. In the Payment from Applicable Countries field, select the countries where this payment method can be used: All Allowed Countries: Customers from all countries in the default countries list can use this payment method. Specific Countries: Customers from only those countries selected in the Payment from Specific Countries list can use this payment method. (The list appears when you select this option.) f. Enter a numeric value in the Sort Order field, to set the position of Cash on Delivery in the list of payment methods that is displayed during checkout. Enter zero for the top of the sort order list, 1 for the second highest in the list, and so on.
4. When finished, click the Save Config button.
Part IV: Sales & Fulfillment
351
CHAPTER 19:Payment Methods
Zero Subtotal Checkout
Notes:
_______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________
352
Magento Go User Guide
CHAPTER 20:
Payment Services & Gateways
Magento Go allows you to easily process payments using variety of payment processing services and gateways. Many are already integrated into Magento Go and you can enable and configure them directly from the Admin panel.
Payment Services
Payment services are ways of adding more value and configuration to your payment processing gateways. 3D Secure Credit Card Validation If you want an additional layer of protection against fraudulent charges or chargebacks for sales in your Magento Go store, you can enable 3D Secure Credit Card Validation. The 3D Secure Credit Card Validation payment service can increase your customers’ confidence in the security of transactions made in your store, and it might also qualify your business for lower processing rates, depending on your merchant account. Kount Fraud Detection Kount Fraud Detection is a credit card fraud detection and prevention solution by Kount, Inc. Their fraud detection tool is integrated with Magento Go and is available for your store. Payment Bridge Styling The payment bridge styling feature lets you customize the look and feel of the payment bridge page in the checkout process.
Payment Gateways
Magento Go supports a wide range of global payment gateway services that provide secure processing of online payment transactions. For step-by-step instructions, see: “Payment Gateways” on page 481.
Part IV: Sales & Fulfillment
353
Chapter 20: Payment Services & Gateways
Worldwide
Worldwide
PayPal With PayPal’s deep integration into Magento Go, you can easily accept credit cards and PayPal payments using PayPal, all while keeping customers on your site. Already have a merchant account? Add PayPal Express checkout to increase conversion. Authorize.Net Authorize.Net payment solutions include free fraud tools, free customer support, a free website seal, and the ability to accept multi-channel payments: online, mail order/telephone order, retail and mobile. CyberSource (SOAP Toolkit) CyberSource, a wholly-owned subsidiary of Visa Inc., is a payment management company. Over 330,000 businesses worldwide use CyberSource to process online payments, streamline fraud management, and simplify payment security. For more information, please visit www.cybersource.com. First Data Global Web Service API The First Data Global Gateway Web Service API enables full-featured, highly secure and reliable eCommerce Web sites and custom retail implementations, including tax and shipping calculators.
North America
PSi Gate PSiGate is a full-service Canadian provider of electronic payment processing services. They deliver a secure interface for your website so you can accept credit card and Interac Online payments with reliable, real-time transaction processing. They ensure maximum performance while taking into account power, security, disaster tolerance and bandwidth requirements. Braintree With Braintree, merchants can accept payment in 134 local currencies and choose to settle in up to 21 different currencies. As an online merchant, the advantage to you of using Braintree is that your customers can save credit card information on file.
354
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 20: Payment Services & Gateways
Europe
Europe
Card Gate Plus Card Gate Plus is a Payment Service Provider for European merchants. We offer credit card billing via your own merchant account and various local billing options like iDEAL (Netherlands), MisterCash (Belgium) and DIRECTebanking (Germany, Austria). DIBS Payment Services DIBS Payment Services is the leading independent provider of functional, secure and innovative payment services for Internet commerce in the Nordic countries. DIBS handles more than 13,000 customer transactions daily in 17 countries. Ogone Direct Link Ogone Payment Services (Payment Service Provider) delivers non-face-toface businesses the payment solutions platform, added value opportunities and technology advancements that become essential for the way payments are performed, managed and secured today. Paybox Direct Paybox is an independent payment service provider based in France, specializing in the European Market. We offer a connection to more than 25 payment methods (debit and credit cards, PayPal, Amex, local payment methods, etc.). Payone.de PAYONE is a leading payment service provider in Germany. Featuring processing of national and international payments and outsourcing of monetary transactions, the payment-Platform Finance Gate makes processes fully automated with the highest performance standards and security in mind. Sage Pay Direct Sage pay is the UK’s largest independent payment service provider, processing millions of secure payments every month for over 33,000 businesses, from start-ups to major online, consumer, and business brands.
Part IV: Sales & Fulfillment
355
Chapter 20: Payment Services & Gateways
Asia
Asia
CCAvenue CCAvenue is the largest and most popular online payment gateway solution in South Asia. With more than 5,000 websites relying on their services, they are a clear leader of online transactions in the region.
Oceania
eWAY Direct Focusing on a high level of standards in technology, innovations and customer care, eWay has become Australia’s award winning payment gateway. eWAY specializes in delivering successful eCommerce payment gateway services to thousands of merchants.
356
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 20: Payment Services & Gateways
Express Checkout
PayPal
PayPal is a global leader in online payments and a fast and secure way for your customers to pay online. With PayPal you can accept payments from all major debit and credit cards as well as PayPal account holders. Since customers don’t even need a PayPal account to pay with PayPal, both you and your customers can get extra convenience without extra effort. PayPal offers a diverse set of payment methods available for merchants of all sizes and business types.
Express Checkout
With this payment method enabled, the “Check out with PayPal” button becomes available on the product view pages, in the shopping cart, and in the mini shopping cart. Clicking the button allows the customer to review the shopping cart price information on the PayPal site and accept PayPal transactions on the PayPal site.
Website Payments Pro
(Permissions)
Country Acceptance: United States, Canada, United Kingdom Accept credit cards and PayPal transactions with PayPal’s all-in-one online payment processing solution. Customers who use Website Payments Pro(Permissions) as a payment method do not need to have a customer account with PayPal. Credit card information is entered directly on your Magento Go store during the checkout process. After the order is placed, the PayPal payment system processes the credit card payments through the Payflow Pro Gateway. When Website Payments Pro is enabled, the Express Checkout payment method is also automatically enabled (it cannot be disabled when Website Payments Pro is enabled). The Website Payments Pro payment method is only applicable to merchants in the United States, Canada, and the United Kingdom. Website Payment Pro(Permission) will accept payments with all major credit card types. It is available in the United States, Canada, and the United Kingdom.
Part IV: Sales & Fulfillment
357
Chapter 20: Payment Services & Gateways
Website Payments Pro Payflow Edition
Website Payment Standard
Country Acceptance: All PayPal supported merchant countries. With the Website Payments Standard payment method, you can accept credit card and PayPal transactions by redirecting the customers to PayPal for approval. For customers with existing PayPal accounts that already have their credit card information, payment is a one-step procedure, as the customer simply needs to click the Pay Now button to complete the transaction. Note: The Website Payments Standard payment method becomes disabled if Website Payments Pro and/or Website Payments Pro Payflow Edition are enabled.
Website Payments Pro Payflow Edition
(includes Express Checkout)
Country Acceptance: United States, United Kingdom Accept credit cards and PayPal transactions with PayPal’s all-in-one online payment processing solution utilizing the Payflow Gateway. With Website Payments Pro (Payflow Edition), customers do not need to have a customer account with PayPal to make a purchase using their merchant system. Customers enter their credit card information within the Payment Information page during the checkout process directly on your Magento Go store. Once an order is submitted in your Magento Go store with this payment method, the PayPal payment system processes the credit card payments through the Payflow Pro Gateway. When Website Payments Pro is enabled, the Express Checkout for Payflow Pro payment method is automatically enabled. It uses the Website Payments Pro Payflow Edition API credentials for connecting to PayPal. Note: The Website Payments Pro Payflow Edition payment method is available only for customers using Visa, MasterCard, Switch/Maestro, and Solo credit card types in the United States and the United Kingdom.
358
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 20: Payment Services & Gateways
Payflow Pro Gateway
Payflow Pro Gateway
(optional Express Checkout)
Country Acceptance: United States, Australia, New Zealand If you already have a merchant account with another provider, you can still accept credit card payments through the Payflow Pro Gateway service. Customers using this payment method do not need to have a customer account with PayPal. Credit card information is entered during the checkout process. After the order is placed, the PayPal payment system processes credit card payments through the Payflow Pro Gateway. The Payflow Pro Gateway payment method is only available to merchants in the United States, Australia, and New Zealand. All major credit card types are accepted. American Express cards require signing an additional agreement. You can learn more at http://www.paypal.com/amexupdate. Before you begin to use Payflow Pro Gateway, you need to have a Payflow Pro account with PayPal. You will use the account information provided to you during registration in the API/Integration fields when configuring it in your Magento Go admin panel.
Part IV: Sales & Fulfillment
359
Chapter 20: Payment Services & Gateways
Getting Started With PayPal
Getting Started With PayPal
Step 1: Set up a PayPal Business Account
1. Go to merchant.paypal.com and click the Get Started button to create a new
account.
Get Started with PayPal
2. On the next page, do one of the following:
If you already have a regular PayPal account, you can simply log in to your existing account to sign up for a payment solution. To open a PayPal account, click the Create New Account button, select your business location and language preference, and click the Create New Account button again to get started.
3. Complete the required fields with your business information, and click the
Continue button to register.
360
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 20: Payment Services & Gateways
Setting Up a PayPal Sandbox Account
4. After you complete the sign-up process, log in to your account and click the
Profile link.
5. On the Profile Summary page, click the API Access link under Account
Information. Then, click the Grant API Permissions link and record your API credentials. You will need them to configure your PayPal payment settings for Magento Go. Note: After you have a business account, you can get your credentials through a shortcut in the PayPal section of Magento Go. Under the API/integration Settings bar click the button. Enter your PayPal Business account login information to view your API credentials as displayed below.
Setting Up a PayPal Sandbox Account
The PayPal Sandbox is a testing environment that is a duplicate of the live PayPal site, except that no real money changes hands. The Sandbox allows you to test your entire integration before submitting transactions to the live PayPal environment. You can also create and manage test accounts, and view emails and API credentials for those test accounts. The PayPal Sandbox can be used to test the following: Website Payments Standard Website Payments Pro Website Payments Pro Payflow Edition Express Checkout
Part IV: Sales & Fulfillment
361
Chapter 20: Payment Services & Gateways
Setting Up a PayPal Sandbox Account
Step 1:
Create a “Buyer” Sandbox Account
1. Go to developer.paypal.com and log in. If you don’t already have an account, you
need to create one.
PayPal Sandbox
2. Select Test Accounts from the left side panel. 3. Under New test account, click Preconfigured to create a new test account. 4. Complete the information requested, and make sure to select the Buyer account
type.
362
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 20: Payment Services & Gateways
Setting Up a PayPal Sandbox Account
Note: Be sure to record this account email and password, as you will use it to simulate a payment transaction.
5.
Click Create Account to create this buyer test account.
Step 2:
Create a “Seller” Sandbox Account
1. Go to the PayPal developer site and log in.
http://developer.paypal.com If you don’t already have an account, you will need to create one.
2. After logging in, select Test Accounts and click the Create Test Account link. 3. Under New test account, click Preconfigured to create a new test account. 4. Enter all the information necessary. Make sure the Seller account type is
selected.
Part IV: Sales & Fulfillment
363
Chapter 20: Payment Services & Gateways
Setting Up a PayPal Sandbox Account
Note: Be sure to record this account email and password, as you will use it to simulate a payment transaction.
5. Click Create Account to create this account.
Step 3:
Configure the Sandbox Account in Magento Go
1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. In the Configuration panel on the left, click the PayPal tab. 3. Enter the Email address associated with your PayPal Merchant Account in the
Email Associated with PayPal Merchant Account field.
4. Check the Website Payments Standard check box to enable the payment
method.
5. Change the Sandbox Mode option to Yes.
364
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 20: Payment Services & Gateways
Setting Up PayPal Express Checkout
Website Payments Standard Settings
6. Click Save to save these changes. 7. Once configured, place test transactions to ensure your PayPal setup is capturing
and processing orders properly.
Setting Up PayPal Express Checkout
Country acceptance: Australia, Austria, Belgium, Canada, China, France, Germany, Italy, Japan, Netherlands, Poland, Spain, Switzerland, United Kingdom, United States PayPal Express Checkout displays the “Check Out With PayPal” button on product view pages, in the shopping cart, and mini shopping cart. Customers who click the button are transferred to the PayPal website, where they can review their shopping cart information and complete the purchase. Users of PayPal’s Website Payments Pro Payflow Edition, can simply select the Express Checkout checkbox in the Website Payments Pro Payflow section to activate this payment method. Note: PayPal Express Checkout is disabled for orders with multiple shipping addresses.
Part IV: Sales & Fulfillment
365
Chapter 20: Payment Services & Gateways
Setting Up PayPal Express Checkout
To set up PayPal Express Checkout: 1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. In the Configuration panel on the left, under Sales, select PayPal. 3. Select a Merchant Country.
Merchant Account
4. Under Select a PayPal Solution, select the Express Checkout (Permissions)
checkbox.
5. Complete the configuration in the Express Checkout Settings section. 6. To enable PayPal Express Checkout, click the Setup or change your site
permissions with PayPal button.
PayPal Express Checkout (Permissions) Settings
366
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 20: Payment Services & Gateways
Setting Up PayPal Express Checkout
7. From the PayPal website, log in to your account, or select the option to create a
new account.
8. When asked to permit Magento to contact PayPal and process payments on your
behalf, click I Agree. Then, complete the following information: a. In the Title field, enter a name to identify this payment method to the customer during checkout. This field can be unique for each store view. We recommend that you use the name, “PayPal” for each store view. b. Enter a number in the Sort Order field to determine the sequence in which this payment method appears when listed with others during checkout. c. Set Payment Action to determine how you want payments to be authorized and processed. Options include: Authorization: Payments are authorized only on PayPal’s side; your Magento Go store generates an order. To capture the transaction, create an invoice from the Admin panel. Sale: The payment authorization and sale is completed upon PayPal approval when you generate an order and invoice from the Magento Go Admin panel. d. Set Payment Applicable From to identify the countries where you will accept payment by this method. Options include: All Allowed Countries: Customers from all of the countries in the default countries list can use this payment method. Note: You can define which countries are listed in the default list by modifying the Allowed Countries field located in System > Configuration > General > Countries Options. Specific Countries: Only customers from countries selected in the Countries Payment Applicable From list (it appears when you select this option) may use this payment method. e. Set Shortcut on Shopping Cart to “Enabled” to make the Express Checkout button available on the shopping cart page. f. Set Shortcut Buttons Flavor to the type of image you want to appear next to the Payment Information section during checkout. Options include:
Part IV: Sales & Fulfillment
367
Chapter 20: Payment Services & Gateways
Setting Up PayPal Express Checkout
Dynamic: (Recommended) Allows the image to be changed dynamically by PayPal. When signing up for a PayPal campaign, the appearance of the image changes during the campaign, based on the parameter information that you add to the image URL.
Static: The static images cannot be changed dynamically. When participating in a PayPal campaign, the image code must be manually updated to change the image displayed and restore the default image when the campaign is over.
g. Set Enable PayPal Guest Checkout to determine whether customers must have a PayPal account to make a purchase. Options include: Yes: Permits customers who are not registered with PayPal to make a purchase. In this case, the customer simply needs to enter the credit card information and billing address. When the credit card information is verified by PayPal, the customer can review the payment information and complete the transaction. No: Requires the customer to register with PayPal before making a purchase.
9. When finished, click the Save Config button to save your settings.
368
Magento Go User Guide
CHAPTER 21:
Tax Settings
Magento Go provides a variety of options for defining taxes. Customer and Product Tax classes are used to define Tax Rules. Tax Rules are defined as a combination of a Customer Tax Class, Product Tax Class, and Tax Rates. Each type of customer can be assigned a tax class when you define them and each product is assigned a tax class. Magento Go analyzes the shopping cart of each customer and calculates the appropriate tax according to the class of the customer and the class of the products in the shopping cart and the region (as defined by the customer’s shipping address, billing address or shipping origin).
Setting Up Taxes
Before jumping into tax classes and tax rules, take a look at the general tax settings and make sure taxes are set up according to your business needs.
Step 1:
Set up Tax Classes
1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. Then, in the
Configuration panel on the left, under Sales, select Tax.
2. Click to expand the Tax Classes section.
3. Set Tax Classes for Shipping to one of the following:
None Default Taxable Goods Shipping
Part IV: Sales & Fulfillment
369
Chapter 21: Tax Settings
Setting Up Taxes
Step 2:
Set up Tax Calculation Settings
1. Click to expand the Calculation Settings section.
Then, do the following: a. Set Tax Calculation Method Based On to one of the following areas of the invoice: b. Unit price Row total Total
Set Tax Calculation Based On to one of the following locations, according to your local requirements: Shipping address Billing Address Shipping Origin
c. Set Catalog Prices to one of the following: Excluding Tax Including Tax
d. Set Shipping Prices to one of the following: Excluding Tax Including Tax Note: This applies to shipping amounts defined through the Admin panel, as well as shipping amounts obtained from gateways.
370
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 21: Tax Settings e. Set Apply Customer Tax to one of the following: f. Before Discount After Discount
Setting Up Taxes
Set Apply Discount on Prices to one of the following: Excluding Tax Including Tax Note: If “Apply Tax after Discount” is selected, the applied discount on price, including tax, is calculated based on store tax.
g. Set Apply Tax On to one of the following: Custom price if available Original price only
2. Click to expand the Default Tax Destination Calculation section.
Then, do the following: a. Set Default Country to the country where the tax applies. b. Set Default State to the state where the tax applies. By default, this option is not set, as indicated by the asterisk (*). c. Set Default Post Code to the ZIP or postal code where the tax applies. By default, this option is not set, as indicated by the asterisk (*). Note: These options apply only if the default country is set to United States.
Step 3:
Set up Price Display Settings
1. Click to expand the Price Display Settings section.
Part IV: Sales & Fulfillment
371
Chapter 21: Tax Settings Then, do the following:
Setting Up Taxes
a. Set both Display Product Prices in Catalog and Display Shipping Prices to one of the following: Excluding Tax Including Tax Including and Excluding Tax (displays both)
2. Click to expand the Orders, Invoices, Credit Memos Display Settings section.
Then, do the following: a. Set Display Prices, Display Subtotal, and Display Shipping Amount to one of the following: Excluding Tax Including Tax Including and Excluding Tax (Displays both)
a. Set Include Tax in Grand Total to one of the following: Yes: No: Calculates grand total to include tax. Calculates grand total without tax.
b. Set Display Full Tax Summary to one of the following: Yes: No: Displays tax summary on orders, invoices, and credit memos. Does not display tax summary on orders, invoices, and credit memos.
c. Set Display Zero Tax Subtotal to one of the following: Yes: No: Displays subtotal for orders with zero tax. Does not display subtotal for orders with zero tax.
372
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 21: Tax Settings
Setting Up Taxes
Step 4:
Set Up Fixed Product Taxes
1. Click to expand the Fixed Product Taxes section.
2. Set Enable FPT to one of the following:
Enable: Disable: Enables fixed product taxes (if they exist). Disables fixed product taxes.
3. The options for the following fields are listed below. Set each field to indicate how
fixed product taxes, if used, are displayed throughout your store. a. Set Display Prices in Product Lists to indicate how fixed product taxes, if used, are displayed in your store. (See Display Price Options.) b. Set Display Prices on Product View Page to indicate how fixed product taxes, if used, are displayed in your store. (See Display Price Options.) c. Set Display Prices in Sales Module to indicate how fixed product taxes, if used, are displayed in your store. This option determines the price appearance in the Order Review section of checkout and in the Items Ordered section of a sales order. (See Display Price Options.) d. Set Display Prices in Emails to indicate how fixed product taxes, if used, are displayed in your store. (See Display Price Options.)
Part IV: Sales & Fulfillment
373
Chapter 21: Tax Settings
Setting Up Taxes
Display Price Options Including FPT Only Displays prices with fixed product tax, but not a description of the tax. Displays prices with fixed product tax and its description. Displays prices without fixed product tax, its description, or the price with the tax. Displays prices without fixed product tax.
Including FPT and FPT description
Excluding FPT, FPT description, final price
Excluding FPT
4. Complete the following to determine how discounts, taxes, and subtotals are
applied to Fixed Product Taxes: a. Set Apply Discounts to FPT to one of the following: Yes: No: Applies discount to the fixed product tax amount. Applies discount to the base product price (excluding fixed product tax). b. Set Apply Tax to FPT to one of the following: Yes: No: Applies tax to the fixed product tax. Applies tax to the base price of a product, without the fixed product tax. c. Set Include FPT in Subtotal to one of the following: Yes: No: Calculates fixed product tax into the shopping cart subtotal. Displays fixed product tax below the shopping cart subtototal, but does not calculate the tax into the subtotal.
5. Click the Save Config button to save the settings.
374
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 21: Tax Settings
Retail Tax Calculations
Retail Tax Calculations
This section shows how to set up taxes for retail customers and taxable goods. To set up retail tax calculation, you must configure the following elements: Step 1: Step 2: Step 3: Step 4: Step 5: Set Up a Tax Rate Set Up a Product Tax Class Customer Tax Class Apply the Tax Class Set Up Tax Rules
Step 1:
Set Up a Tax Rate
1. From the Admin panel, go to Sales > Tax > Manage Tax Zones & Rates.
2. From Manage Tax Rates, click the Add New Tax Rate button.
Part IV: Sales & Fulfillment
375
Chapter 21: Tax Settings
Retail Tax Calculations
3. In the Tax Rate Information section, do the following:
a. In the Tax Identifier field, enter a name for the new tax rate. Make sure to not include spaces in this field. This identifier is not visible to customers if the alternate Tax Titles section is used. b. Select the Country and State to which the specific tax applies. c. Set ZIP/Post is Range to Yes to apply the tax to a range of ZIP codes. Then, enter the beginning and ending range of ZIP codes in the following fields: Range From Range To
d. In the Rate Percent field, type the tax rate as a decimal. For example, a tax rate of 9.75% tax rate is entered as 9.75. e. In the Tax Titles section, under English, enter a name for the tax rate. If applicable, enter the translation of the tax rate name for each language supported.
4. Click the Save Rate button to save your changes.
376
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 21: Tax Settings
Retail Tax Calculations
Step 2:
Set Up a Product Tax Class
Product Tax Classes determine which taxes are applied to a product. To configure Product Tax classes, do the following:
1. From the Admin panel, go to Sales > Tax > Product Tax Classes.
2. From Product Tax Classes, click the Add New button.
3. In the Product Tax Class Information section, type the Class Name. Then, click
the Save Class button to save your changes.
The new class appears in the Product Tax Classes list.
Part IV: Sales & Fulfillment
377
Chapter 21: Tax Settings
Retail Tax Calculations
4. To apply the Taxable Goods class to a product from the catalog, go to Catalog >
Manage Products.
5. Open the product record in edit mode, and set Tax Class to Taxable Goods.
6. Click the Save button to save changes.
378
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 21: Tax Settings
Retail Tax Calculations
Step 3:
Set Up a Customer Tax Class
1. From the Admin panel, go to Sales > Tax > Customer Tax Classes.
2. From the Customer Tax Classes list, click the Add New button.
3. In the Customer Tax Class Information section, type a new Class Name.
4. Then, click the Save Class button.
The new class appears in the Customer Tax Classes list.
Part IV: Sales & Fulfillment
379
Chapter 21: Tax Settings
Retail Tax Calculations
Step 4:
Apply the Tax Class
To apply a Tax Class to a Customer Group:
To apply the new class to a customer group from your store, do the following:
1. From the Admin panel, select Customer > Customer Groups.
2. In the Customer Groups list, click to open the Customer Group.
3. In the Customer Group Information section, select the Tax Class and click Save.
380
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 21: Tax Settings
Retail Tax Calculations
To apply a Customer Group to a specific customer: 1. Go to Customers > Manage Customers. Then, from the Manage Customer list,
open the customer record in edit mode.
2. In the Customer Information panel on the left, select Account Information.
Then, select the group from the Customer Group list and click Save.
Step 5:
Set Up Tax Rules
Tax rules are a combination of a customer tax class, product tax class, and tax rate. Tax rules answer the fundamental question: Who gets charged how much, and for which products?
1. From the Admin panel, go to Sales > Tax > Manage Tax Rules.
Part IV: Sales & Fulfillment
381
Chapter 21: Tax Settings
Retail Tax Calculations
2. From the Manage Tax Rules list, click the Add New button.
3. In the Tax Rule Information section, do the following:
a. Type a Name for the tax rule that will be easy to identify. b. Select the Customer Tax Class for the rule. c. Select the Product Tax Class for the rule. d. Select the Tax Rate to apply for the rule. e. In the Priority field, enter a number to determine the importance of this rule in relation to others. Lower numbers take precedence. Tax rules are applied in ascending order, so the rule with a sort order of zero is applied first. Note: If two tax rules have the same priority number, the taxes are added together. Otherwise the taxes are compounded. f. In the Sort Order field, enter a number to determine the order that this rule appears when listed with other rules.
4. When complete, click the Save Rule button.
382
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 21: Tax Settings
Value Added Tax (VAT)
Value Added Tax (VAT)
It is important to configure the Value Added Tax calculation as required for your locale. This example shows how to set up a 20% VAT for a Magento Go retail store operating in the United Kingdom. Note: Be sure to find out the rules and regulations governing VAT for your locale. Follow these steps to configure VAT for your store: Step 1: Step 2: Step 3: Step 4: Step 5: Step 6: Set Up Customer Tax Classes Set Up Product Tax Classes Set Up Tax Zones and Rates Set Up Tax Rules Apply Tax Classes to Products Set Up General Tax Settings
Step 1:
Set Up Customer Tax Classes
1. From the Admin panel, go to Sales > Tax > Customer Tax Classes.
2. Verify the name of the customer tax class to which the VAT applies.
If you need to create a customer tax class, click Add New and create the class.
Part IV: Sales & Fulfillment
383
Chapter 21: Tax Settings
Value Added Tax (VAT)
Step 2:
Set Up Product Tax Classes
1. From the Admin panel, select Sales > Tax > Product Tax Classes.
2. Click the Add New button and add the following classes:
VAT Standard VAT Reduced VAT Zero
3. Click the Save button. The new classes appear in the Product Tax Classes list.
384
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 21: Tax Settings
Value Added Tax (VAT)
Step 3:
Set Up Tax Zones and Rates
1. From the Admin panel, select Sales > Tax > Manage Tax Zones & Rates.
2. Click the Add New Tax Rate button, and add the following new rates:
a. Create a standard value added tax rate with the following settings : Tax Identifier: Country and State: Rate Percent: VAT Standard United Kingdom 20.00
b. Create a reduced value added tax rate with the following settings : Tax Identifier: Country and State: Rate Percent: VAT Reduced United Kingdom 5.00
c. Create a zero value added tax rate with the following settings : Tax Identifier: Country and State: Rate Percent: VAT Zero United Kingdom 0.00
3. Click the Save button. The new rates appear in the Manage Tax Rates list.
Part IV: Sales & Fulfillment
385
Chapter 21: Tax Settings
Value Added Tax (VAT)
Step 4:
Set Up Tax Rules
1. From the Admin panel, select Sales > Tax > Manage Tax Rules.
2. Click the Add New button, and do the following:
a. Create a standard VAT rule with the following settings: Name: VAT Standard
Customer Tax Class: Retail Customer Product Tax Class: Tax Rate: VAT Standard VAT Standard
b. Create a reduced VAT rule with the following settings: Name: VAT Reduced
Customer Tax Class: Retail Customer Product Tax Class: Tax Rate: VAT Reduced VAT Reduced
c. Create a zero VAT rule with the following settings: Name: VAT Zero
Customer Tax Class: Retail Customer Product Tax Class: Tax Rate: VAT Zero VAT Zero
3. Click the Save Rule button for each.
386
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 21: Tax Settings The new rates appear in the Manage Tax Rules list.
Value Added Tax (VAT)
Step 5:
Apply Tax Classes to Products
1. From the Admin panel, select Catalog > Manage Products. 2. Open the record in edit mode, and set Tax Class to the VAT class for the product.
3. Click the Save button to save changes.
Step 6:
Set Up General Tax Settings
Complete the configuration of the general tax settings.
Part IV: Sales & Fulfillment
387
Chapter 21: Tax Settings
Value Added Tax (VAT)
Notes:
_______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________
388
Magento Go User Guide
CHAPTER 22:
Reports
Magento Go provides a wide selection of useful reports to keep you current on everything from the contents of your customers’ shopping carts to their tags. Report data can be downloaded as a CSV or XML data file.
Total Ordered Report
Part IV: Sales & Fulfillment
389
Chapter 22: Reports
Sales Reports
Sales Reports
Sales reports summarize sales information for a designated scope and period of time, and include the following: Orders Tax Invoiced Shipping Refunds Coupons PayPal Settlement Reports
To run the report: 1. From the Admin panel, select Reports > Sales and select the type of Sales
Report you’d like to generate.
2. Define the filters to be used to select the data for the report. Then, click the Show
Report button to generate the report.
3. To export the report data, set the Export to list to either “CSV” or “Excel,” and
click the Export button. Sales Report Orders Description Displays information related to sales orders, including the sales, invoice, refund, shipping, and discount amounts for all orders created or updated during the specified period of time. Displays tax amounts grouped by tax rates which are applied to sales orders invoiced during the specified period. Displays the number of created and invoiced orders and provides invoice-related amounts grouped by tax rates. Provides shipping amount information for each shipping method used in the orders invoiced during the specified period of time.
Tax
Invoiced
Shipping
390
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 22: Reports
Sales Reports
Sales Report Refunds
Description Provides information about refunded sales orders, including those refunded online and offline. Displays order discount aggregation per period and coupon. Provides information about transactions which affect settlement of funds as well as a summary of each currency held by the account, total debits and credits, and beginning and ending balances. Description Allows you to match dates based on either the date the sales order was created or the date it was last updated. Defines the range of time included in the report, as: per day, month, or year. (Required) Defines the date limitations of report.
Coupons
PayPal Settlement Report
Sales Report Filters Match Period To
Period
Date Range (From / To date) Order Status
By default, the report is not filtered by order status. Options include: Processing On Hold Complete Closed Canceled Suspected Fraud Payment Review
Empty Rows
For selected date period, the option may be omitted (by default). If not omitted, each period of the specified date range appears in the report. Sales reports may display expected and actual values. An expected value is the estimated amount to be paid.
Show Actual Values
Part IV: Sales & Fulfillment
391
Chapter 22: Reports
Shopping Cart Reports
Shopping Cart Reports
The shopping cart reports provide a detailed account of cart activity, and include the following reports: Products in Cart Abandoned Carts
Products in Cart
The Products in Cart report lists all products in your store, including the price, the amount of orders placed containing that product.
To run the report: 1. From the Admin panel, select Reports > Shopping Cart. Then, click Products
in cart.
2. To export the report data, set the Export to list to either “CSV” or “Excel,” and
click the Export button.
Abandoned Carts
The Abandoned Carts report lists all registered customers who added products to their Shopping Cart, and then logged out with the items still in the cart before placing an order. Shows the number of line items in the cart, total quantity, total monetary amount of the products, any coupon code the customer may have applied, the timestamps for when the first item was added to the cart and the most recent cart activity.
To run the report: 1. From the Admin panel, select Reports > Shopping Cart. Then, select
Abandoned carts.
2. To export the report data, set the Export to list to either “CSV” or “Excel,” and
click the Export button.
392
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 22: Reports
Product Reports
Product Reports
The Product reports can be used to analyze sales and identify buying patterns. Reports include: Bestsellers Products Ordered Most Viewed Low Stock
Bestsellers Report
The Bestsellers report shows information about products that sell best based on highest quantity across different time periods.
To run the report: 1. From the Admin panel, select Reports > Products > Bestsellers. 2. In the Period field, select the period to include in the report. This field consists of
day, month, and year.
3. In the From and To fields, enter the date limitations of the report. These fields
are required to be specified in order to build a report.
4. The Empty Rows filter specifies whether or not to display periods that do not
contain any sales order information.
5. Click the Show Report button to generate the report. 6. To export the report data, set the Export to list to either “CSV” or “Excel,” and
click the Export button.
Part IV: Sales & Fulfillment
393
Chapter 22: Reports
Product Reports
Products Ordered Report
The products ordered report shows what products are ordered across different time periods.
To run the report: 1. From the Admin panel, select Reports > Products > Products Ordered. 2. Select From and To dates in the fields at the top to specify limitations for the
report. This is required.
3. In the Show By field, select whether to filter by Day, Month, or Year. 4. Click the Refresh button to generate a Products Ordered Report in real time. 5. To export the report data, set the Export to list to either “CSV” or “Excel,” and
click the Export button.
Most Viewed Report
The Most Viewed Products report displays the most often viewed products across different time periods.
To run the report: 1. From the Admin panel, select Reports > Products > Most Viewed. 2. Select From and To dates in the fields at the top to specify limitations for the
report. These fields are required.
3. In the Show By field, select whether to break down the numbers by Day, Month,
or Year.
4. Click the Refresh button to generate a Most Viewed Report in real time. 5. To export the report data, set the Export to list to either “CSV” or “Excel,” and
click the Export button.
394
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 22: Reports
Product Reports
Low Stock Report
The Low Stock report can help you stay aware of the low stock items and replenish their quantity in the inventory. It displays out of stock items and those whose quantity is notified to be lower than the required amount.
To run the report: 1. From the Admin panel, select Reports > Products > Low Stock. 2. This page shows all products with a stock quantity below the required amount.
The table displays three columns: Product Name Product SKU Stock Qty
3. To drill down by Product Name, Product SKU, and Stock Qty, use the filters at
the top of each column, and click Search.
4. To export the report data, set the Export to list to either “CSV” or “Excel,” and
click the Export button.
Part IV: Sales & Fulfillment
395
Chapter 22: Reports
Customer Reports
Customer Reports
The Customer Reports provide a detailed report of all customer activity, including account status and orders. New Accounts Customers by Orders Total Customers by Number of Orders
New Accounts Report
The New Accounts report provides statistics on the number of user accounts created in the system during the specified period. It provides the total number of user accounts created in this period.
To run the report: 1. From the Admin panel, select Reports > Customers > New Accounts. 2. Select From and To dates in the fields at the top to specify limitations of this
report. These fields are required.
3. In the Show By field, select whether to break down the numbers by Day, Month,
or Year.
4. Click the Refresh button to generate the report in real time. 5. To export the report data, set the Export to list to either “CSV” or “Excel,” and
click the Export button.
Customers by Orders Total
This report lists customers who submitted orders during the specified period by to order amount. It also displays the total number of orders, their total average order amount, and the overall amount for all orders submitted during the specified date range.
396
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 22: Reports
Customer Reports
To run the report: 1. From the Admin panel: Select Reports > Customers. Then, choose Customers
by orders total.
2. Select From and To dates in the fields at the top to specify limitations of this
report. These fields are required.
3. In the Show By field, select per Day, Month, or Year to define period per basis of
selected field. This field is required to generate the report.
4. Click the Refresh button to generate a Most Viewed Report in real time. 5. To export the report data, set the Export to list to either “CSV” or “Excel,” and
click the Export button.
Customers by Number of Orders
This report lists customers who submitted orders during the specified period according to the number of orders placed. It also displays the total average order amount, and the overall amount for all orders submitted during the specified date range.
To run the report: 6. From the Admin panel: Select Reports > Customers. Then, choose Customers
by number of orders.
7. Select From and To dates in the fields at the top to specify limitations of this
report. These fields are required.
8. In the Show By field, select per Day, Month, or Year to define period per basis of
selected field. This field is required to generate the report.
9. Click the Refresh button to generate a Most Viewed Report in real time. 10. To export the report data, set the Export to list to either “CSV” or “Excel,” and
click the Export button.
Part IV: Sales & Fulfillment
397
Chapter 22: Reports
Reviews Reports
Reviews Reports
The Reviews reports list all customers who have written reviews, and all products with reviews written about them. Customer Reviews Product Reviews
Customer Reviews
This report provides a list of customers who have submitted product reviews in your Magento Go store.
To run the report: 1. From the Admin panel, select Reports > Reviews > Customer Reviews.
Note: From the All Reviews of Customer page that opens, you can sort through these reviews, remove them, or change their status.
2. The list of customers who created product reviews can be sorted by ascending or
descending based on the number of reviews. Product reviews of each customer can be viewed in detail by clicking Show Reviews in the right-most column of the respective customer.
3. To export the report data, set the Export to list to either “CSV” or “Excel,” and
click the Export button.
398
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 22: Reports
Reviews Reports
Product Reviews
The Product Reviews report lists all the products that customers have written reviews about, and provides a link to each review.
To run the report: 1. From the Admin panel, select Reports > Reviews > Product Reviews. 2. The products list can be sorted by ascending or descending based on:
Product name Number of reviews Average review rating Average approved rating Last review date
3. Reviews for each product can be viewed in detail by clicking Show Reviews in the
right-most column of the respective product.
4. To export the report, set the Export to list to either “CSV” or “Excel,” and click
Export.
Product Reviews Report
Part IV: Sales & Fulfillment
399
Chapter 22: Reports
Tag Reports
Tag Reports
The Tag reports list the tags created during the specified time period, and provide insight into which customers are tagging products, which products are getting tagged, and which tags are the most popular. Customers Products Popular
Customers Tags Report
This report displays a list of customers who have submitted approved tags and the number of approved product tags they have generated.
To run the report: 1. In the Admin panel, select Reports > Tags > Customers. You will be redirected
to Customers Tags report, which includes the following: Customer ID First name Last name Total Tags (created by a single customer) Action (lets you view all tags created by the customer)
2. To view product tags created by a customer, select Show Tags from the rightmost column of the respective customer.
3. To export the report data, set the Export to list to either “CSV” or “Excel,” and
click the Export button.
400
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 22: Reports
Tag Reports
Products Tags Report
This report lists all products that have approved tags as well as the number of unique approved and total approved tags.
To run the report: 1. From the Admin panel, select Reports > Tags > Products. You will be
redirected to report page.
2. Click the Show Tags link on the right to view each tags generated for a product,
the number of times it has been used, and from which store view.
3. The products tags list can be sorted in ascending or descending or by:
Customer ID Product name Number of unique tags (Total number of unique tags for the product.) Number of total tags (Total number of tags generated for the product.) Action: (Shows Tags link to view all tags created by the customer.)
4. To export the report data, set the Export to list to either “CSV” or “Excel,” and
click the Export button.
Product Tags Report
Part IV: Sales & Fulfillment
401
Chapter 22: Reports
Tag Reports
Popular Tags Report
This report displays lists all approved tags, and the number of times each tag has been used in your store.
To run the report: 1. From the Admin panel, select Reports > Tags > Popular. You will be redirected
to the Popular Tags report page.
2. The report will display the following columns:
Tag name: Popularity: Action: The name of the created tag. The number of times a tag was created by different customers. Show Details link that lets you view the name of the creator, the product for which it was created for, and the store view in which it was submitted.
3. To export the report data, set the Export to list to either “CSV” or “Excel,” and
click the Export button.
Popular Tags Report
402
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 22: Reports
Search Terms Report
Search Terms Report
The Search Terms Report provides a list of all terms searched on your Magento Go store. The report displays: Search query: The term that has been searched. Results: Specifies number of times a specific search term was used by a customer in your store. Hits: Specifies number of products in total that were displayed as results of searched that contained a particular search.
To run the report: 1. In the Admin panel, select Reports > Search Terms. You will be redirected to
the Search Terms report page.
2. To edit a search term, simply click the row. You will be redirected to the Edit
search term page.
3. To export the report data, set the Export to list to either “CSV” or “Excel,” and
click the Export button.
Search Terms Report
Part IV: Sales & Fulfillment
403
Chapter 22: Reports
Refresh Statistics
Refresh Statistics
It is important to use the Refresh Statistics tool to generate the data necessary for reporting. Sales Reports may not be available until you use the Refresh Statistics. What’s more, Reports may simply be blank if you have not run Refresh Statistics at least once recently.
To refresh statistics: 1. From the Admin panel, select Reports > Refresh Statistics. You will be
redirected to Refresh Statistics page.
2. Check all statistics that you need to process. 3. Select the time period from the Actions list at the top right. Your options are:
Refresh Statistics for the Last Day Refresh Lifetime Statistics
4. Click the Submit button to refresh.
Tip: If you have never run the Refresh Statistics tool, your reports simply show up as blank. It is recommended to run this function daily before generating reports.
Refresh Statistics
404
Magento Go User Guide
Part V: Improving Operations
CHAPTER 23:
Importing and Exporting Data
If you have more than a handful of customers or products, you probably don’t want to spend a lot of time creating records for them one by one. Magento Go's Import/Export tool gives you the ability to manage multiple customer and product records in a single operation. Magento Go uses the Comma Separated Value (CSV) file as a standard for importing and exporting both product and customer information. Data to be imported must be saved as a CSV file, where each data element is separated by a comma. Most spreadsheet and database applications can create CSV files. If you are working with a Mac, you should save the data in the CSV (Windows) format.
System > Import / Export
Part V: Improving Operations
407
Chapter 21: Importing and Exporting Data
Importing Data
Importing Data
The following instructions explain how to import data into your Magento Go store from a comma-separated value (CSV) file.
To import a product or customer: 1. From the Admin panel, select System > Import/Export > Import.
System > Import / Export
2. Set the Entity Type list to either “Products” or “Customers.”
Import Settings
3. Then, select one of the following Import Behavior options:
Append Complex Data: Adds new or edited products or customers to your store’s database. Magento Go will not create duplicate entries for existing products and customers included in your CSV file Replace Existing Complex Data: Completely replaces your existing data or portions thereof. Deleted Entries: Completely deletes your existing database or portions thereof.
4. Click Choose File and locate the CSV file in your file system.
408
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 21: Importing and Exporting Data
Importing Data
Note: The total size of uploadable files must not exceed 110 MB and must be saved with UTF-8 encoding. Check your spreadsheet or database application documentation for information about saving a CSV file with UTF-8 encoding.
5. Click Check Data to validate the uploaded file. Then, do one of the following:
If the file is valid, a "File is valid!" message appears. To import the data, click the Import button. If the file contains errors, you are notified of the errors and given the opportunity to skip the rows with errors. To continue importing valid data, click the Import button.
To confirm a successful import: 1. From the Admin panel, click System > Tasks Notifications. A successful import
generates a notification confirming the customer or product import.
2. After the successful import of product information, navigate to Catalog >
Manage Products. You should now be able to see the new or edited products which have been imported to your store.
3. Repeat this step for your imported customers list by navigating to Customers >
Manage Customers.
Importing Configurable Products
This technique explains how to use a .CSV file to associate simple products to a configurable product record. Before you begin, make sure that the data meets the following requirements: The simple products that you want to associate with the configurable product must not have custom variants or options. All products must have unique SKU numbers. The simple products must share the same attribute set as the configurable product. There must be at least one super attribute assigned to the configurable product, and this attribute must be set in the simple product, as well.
Part V: Improving Operations
409
Chapter 21: Importing and Exporting Data
Importing Data
To import a Configurable Product: 1. Create the configurable product record, as well as the associated simple products
according to the requirements described above.
2. Before importing the data, enter the following values in the respective columns of
the associated simple products, as well as the configurable product record: Column _type _super_products_sku _super_attribute_code Value configurable The SKU of the associated product. The name of the attribute that is being used as the Super Attribute. The attribute properties must be set to the following: Scope: Global Input Type: Dropdown Use to Create Configurable Product: Yes _super_attribute_option The name assigned to an option in the Super Attribute. For example, you can use shoe_size as a Super Attribute with options of 10, 11, and 12 to make a price correction of +1, +2, or +3. This is a dollar amount that can be added for Super Attribute options which need price adjustments.
_super_attribute_price_corr
410
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 21: Importing and Exporting Data
Importing Data
Importing Product Images
If you have a large quantity of images to upload, you can streamline the process and save time by importing them in a single step. This process is commonly referred to as a "bulk" import. It's simply a list of data that is uploaded at the same time. Magento Go does not automatically associate an imported image with its respective product. You must follow a few simple steps to make sure that your imported images can be associated with the right products.
Step 1:
Export Your Product Data
The first step is to export the data from your store and save it to your hard disk as a CSV file.
Step 2:
Edit the CSV File
The quickest way to become familiar with the structure of the data is to open the exported file in your favorite spreadsheet program. There you will see how each row represents a record, and each column represents an attribute, or field of data. The type of data, or attribute, in each column is indicated in the header row at the top. After you become familiar with the layout, you will see how easy it is to edit the data file directly in the worksheet. Here are some rules to remember about referencing image files: When entering data for multiple images into a spreadsheet, the image file names must immediately follow the product to which they belong. You can leave all other columns blank, unless they are applicable. (For example: Referencing multiple upsell or related products, etc.) Each file name must begin with a forward slash. (For example: /imagebase.jpg) Image file names are case sensitive, so pay attention to your use of upper-and lowercase characters in both the file names and extensions. (For example: /image-base.jpg is not same as /image-BASE.jpg)
Part V: Improving Operations
411
Chapter 21: Importing and Exporting Data
Importing Data
Step 3:
Save Your Changes
When you are finished editing, and save your changes to a CSV file, you might be prompted to specify the file format to be used. The total size of uploadable files must not exceed 110 MB and must be saved with UTF-8 encoding. Check your spreadsheet or database application documentation for information about saving a CSV file with UTF-8 encoding. Note: When working in Excel, it is absolutely critical to select “Yes” when prompted to "leave out incompatible features."
Step 4:
Import the Edited CSV File and Image Files
The last step is to import the data back into your store. You can save time by zipping the image files before you begin the upload process. There are many zip utilities available for both the PC and Mac platforms. If you are working with the latest Windows or Mac operating systems, you may already have an archiving tool available. Check your system documentation for more information.
To import your images: 1. From the Admin panel, go to System > Import/Export > Import. 2. In the Entity Type list, select Product Images. 3. Click the Choose File button to select your zipped product image file on your
hard drive.
4. Click the Upload Images button to import your images into Magento Go. When
the import is complete, you will receive a Validation Results message . Your data is now in the queue, waiting to be processed. It may take a while, so be patient. You can check the status by refreshing the page. If you are still not able to see your edited products or new images, try refreshing the search index.
To refresh the search index: 1. Go to Catalog > Search Indexing. 2. Click the Refresh Index button.
412
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 21: Importing and Exporting Data
Exporting Data
Exporting Data
The best way to become familiar with the structure of your customer and product information is to export the data and open it in a spreadsheet. Once you become familiar with the process, you will find that it is an efficient way to manage large amounts of data. To export customers:
1. From the Admin panel, click System > Import/Export > Export.
2. Set the Entity Type list to “Customers.” The system generates entity attributes
that are relevant to customers.
3. Scroll down and click the Continue button to export the data to a CSV file. 4. Open the file in your favorite spreadsheet, and edit as needed.
Export Customer Entity Attributes
Part V: Improving Operations
413
Chapter 21: Importing and Exporting Data
Exporting Data
To export products: 1. From the Admin panel, click System > Import/Export > Export. 2. Set the Entity Type list to “Products.” The system generates a list of entity
attributes that are relevant to your products. By default, all attributes are exported to the CSV file. In the Entity Attributes list, select the Skip check box for any attributes that you want to exclude from the CSV file. You can use the Filter controls to limit the records exported.
3. Scroll down and click the Continue button to export the data to a CSV file. 4. Open the saved file in your favorite spreadsheet and edit as needed.
Tip: The Macintosh version of Microsoft Office supports multiple CSV file formats. When saving your CSV file, be sure to save it as a CSV (MS Windows) file type.
Export Product Entity Attributes
414
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 21: Importing and Exporting Data
Working with Product CSV Files
Working with Product CSV Files
Step 1: Optimize Your Attributes
First, you want to make sure your attributes are optimized. What we mean by optimized is that you’ve removed the attributes that you will not need and have created attributes that you will need. For more information, see: “Product System Attributes” on page 510, and “Customer System Attributes” on page 514.
Step 2:
Export and Edit
After you have optimized your attributes, export your product information. Once exported, open this file in a Microsoft Excel or a simple text editor. If you’re editing in a text editor, you must include each new product on a new line. The attributes that you define must be separated with commas, and must be in the same order as the first row. If you’re editing in Excel, each product will be on a new line. The attributes that you define will fall into the column of the attribute that is listed in the first row.
Note: When saving changes to the CSV file that you edit in Excel, it is absolutely critical that when Excel asks you what format you wish to save, select Yes to leave out incompatible features.
Step 3:
Import and Refresh Index
Finally, after you’ve defined and saved your products in the CSV file, import them back into your Magento Go store. After you have imported your new products, it will be queued to import. This may take a little while, so be patient. You can check the status of this by refreshing the page. Once the Import products task has finished, you must refresh the search index. To do this, go to Catalog > Search Indexing and click Refresh Index.
Part V: Improving Operations
415
Chapter 21: Importing and Exporting Data
Working with Product CSV Files
Common Issues
Missing or Incorrect Values The most common problem store owners experience with importing CSV files is missing values or incorrect values. During the import process, Magento Go checks your data to ensure that it’s correct. It will report which rows and items are missing or incorrect. Be sure to go back and fix these issues. Duplicated Products Another common problem is duplicated products. Currently, if a product that you’re importing already exists in your catalog it will duplicate this. To avoid this issue, be sure that you’re either importing to an empty catalog or that you aren’t re-importing products that you already have online.
Custom Attributes
Custom attributes are any attributes that you create yourself. Attributes can be created for organization and product management, as well as to be used for comparing certain types of products. For example, a store carrying electronics, including hard drives, would certainly want to create a disk space attribute that would be used to define and compare hard drive storage sizes.
416
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 21: Importing and Exporting Data
Working With Customer CSV Files
Working With Customer CSV Files
Step 1: Optimize Your Attributes
First, you want to make sure your attributes are optimized. What we mean by optimized is that you’ve removed the attributes that you will not need and created attributes that you will need. For more information, see: “General Customer Attributes,” on page 515.
Step 2:
Export and Edit
After you have optimized your attributes, export your customer information. Once exported, open the file in a Microsoft Excel or in your favorite spreadsheet application. The attributes that you define will fall into the column of the attribute that is listed in the first row. Note: When saving changes to the CSV file that you edit in Excel, it is absolutely critical that when Excel asks you what format you wish to save, select Yes to leave out incompatible features.
Step 3:
Import and Refresh Index
Finally, after you’ve defined and saved your customers in the CSV file, import them back into your Magento Go store. For more information, see: “Importing Data,” on page 408. After you have imported your customers, it will be queued to import. This may take a little while, so be patient. You can check the status of this by refreshing the page. After the customer data has been imported, you must refresh the search index.
To refresh the index:
Go to Catalog > Search Indexing, and click the Refresh Index button. The most common problem storeowners experience with importing CSV files is missing values or incorrect values. During the import process, Magento Go checks your data to ensure that it’s correct. It will report which rows and items are missing or incorrect. Be sure to go back and fix these issues.
Part V: Improving Operations
417
Chapter 21: Importing and Exporting Data
Working With Customer CSV Files
Notes:
_______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________
418
Magento Go User Guide
CHAPTER 24:
Site Maintenance
There will be times when it’s necessary to perform maintenance on your site. In this chapter, you will learn how to display a temporary splash page while your site is temporarily unavailable. Topics covered include: Removing the “Under Construction” message Working in Maintenance Mode Task Notifications
“Under Construction” Message
When you first start building your store, the store displays an “Under Construction” message above the header of each page of the store and Admin panel. When you are ready to start taking orders, follow these instructions to remove the demo notice.
“Under Construction” Message
Part V: Improving Operations
419
Chapter 24: Site Maintenance
Maintenance Mode
To remove the demo notice: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. In the Configuration panel on the left, under General, select Design. Click to expand the HTML Head section. Set Display Demo Store Notice to “No.” Click the Save Config button to save your changes. To confirm that the message has been removed, visit the home page of your store to confirm that the “Under Construction” message has been removed.
Maintenance Mode
Maintenance mode can be used when your site is under construction, or when changes are being made. It adds a splash page to let visitors know that your site is undergoing maintenance. When working on your site, it is recommended that you block access to the store. It is better to alert customers that changes are being made, rather than disrupt their experience with technical difficulties. Displaying a “503 page” while in Maintenance Mode alerts search engines that your site still exists, and prevents them from removing your site from their index.
To use Maintenance Mode: 1. In the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. In the Configuration panel on the left, under General, select Maintenance Mode. 3. Click to expand the Maintenance Mode Options section.
System > Configuration > General > Maintenance Mode > Maintenance Mode Options
4. Set Enable Maintenance Mode to “Yes.”
420
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 24: Site Maintenance
Task Notifications
5. Set Maintenance Mode Page to “503 Service Unavailable.” 6. In the Whitelist field, enter your IP address, so you will be permitted access to
your store while others are redirected to the “Services Unavailable” page. Note: With the CMS Pages > Content Management option, the 503 page may be customized to make it more visitor friendly.
Task Notifications
A bank of completed tasks and updates are sent to the Task Notification section. There is also an option to connect Task Notifications to an email address.
To manage task notifications: 1. From the Admin panel, select System > Task Notifications. 2. In the list, select the checkbox of each messages you want to remove, or mark as
read. Or, you can use the following links: Select All / Unselect All Select Visible / Unselect Visible
3. In the Actions menu select either “Remove” or “Mark as Read.” 4. Click the Submit button.
Connecting Task Notifications to an Outside Email
To connect task notifications to an outside email: 1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. On the General tab, click to expand the Task Notifications section. 3. In the Task Notifications Recipients field, enter the email address you would
like to receive notifications in.
4. Click the Save Config button to save your changes.
Note: Because of the amount of traffic that comes through Task Notifications, it is recommended that you create a specific email account for this option if you choose to export them.
Part V: Improving Operations
421
Chapter 24: Site Maintenance
Task Notifications
Notes:
_______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________
422
Magento Go User Guide
CHAPTER 25:
SEO Best Practices
Search engine optimization is both a science and an art. Because the technology is constantly evolving, there is no single solution that will ensure your site makes it to the top of a search engine results page (SERP). There are however, many best practices that, if followed, will improve your chances of success.
Using a Robots.txt File
Robots.txt, often pronounced “robots dot text,” is a text file that is checked whenever search engine robots visit your web site. Search engine robots, or search engine “bots,” are machines that index web content, including your store. The robots.txt file is currently the standard for determining which information on a web site gets indexed. When a search engine robot visits your web site, it first looks for a robots.txt file. If one is found, the search engine robot follows the instructions in the file. For example, the following instructions tell all visiting search engine robots not to visit or index any pages on your web site. The first line, “User-agent: *” tells the robot that the rules listed below apply to all robots. The “Disallow: /” tells the robot not to visit any page on the site. Example: robots.txt User-agent: * Disallow: / It should be noted that some robots completely ignore any rules defined in a robots.txt file, especially harmful bots that scour the web looking for vulnerabilities or contact information. In terms of configuring robots.txt, however, we’re only concerned with search engine robots - the ones that follow the rules and play nice! With that said, let’s take a look at how you can use robots.txt in your Magento Go store.
Part V: Improving Operations
423
Chapter 25: SEO Best Practices
Using a Robots.txt File
Generating the File
Your Magento Go store already has a robots.txt file that is set to “INDEX, FOLLOW.” This default setting directs all search engine bots to index all pages and follow links. It is generally in your best interest to have your content indexed by search engines—especially your product pages. The Default Robots option can be set to one of the following: NOINDEX, FOLLOW: Pages are not indexed, but search engine bots are allowed to follow links from applicable pages* INDEX, NOFOLLOW: Pages are indexed, but search engine bots do not follow links. NOINDEX, NOFOLLOW: Pages are not indexed, and search engine bots do not follow links. Note: Applicable pages are those that are not excluded using the “Disallow: “ feature of robots.txt.
To create a custom robots.txt file: 1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration > Design. 2. Click to expand the Search Engine Robots section.
System > Configuration > Design > Search Engine Robots
424
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 25: SEO Best Practices
Using a Robots.txt File
3. Set Default Robots to “Custom Instructions.” Then, complete the instructions as
follows: a. Specify whether the instructions apply to all bots or only to specific ones. To apply to all bots, type: User-agent: * To apply to specific bots, type the bot name, such as: User-agent: googlebot b. List the files or directories that you want to prevent the bots from indexing by listing them in the following pattern: To disallow a directory, type: Disallow: /folder/ To disallow a file, type: Disallow: /folder/filename.html
4. Set Reset to Default to “No.” 5. Click the Save Changes button to save the new configurations.
Examples
Imagine that you have a store with a set of pages and folders that you don’t want indexed by all search engine bots. The pages and folders you may want to prevent from being indexed are:
/terms-of-service.html /special-offers.html /referral-discounts.html /customer/ /review/ /media/
Part V: Improving Operations
425
Chapter 25: SEO Best Practices
Using a Robots.txt File
Sample Robots.txt File
User-agent: * Disallow: /terms-of-service.html Disallow: /special-offers.html Disallow: /referral-discounts.html Disallow: /customer/ Disallow: /review/ Disallow: /media/ And that’s it! Make sure to save your changes so that they take effect. To preview your robots.txt file, go to [your-store-name].gostorego.com/robots.txt and verify that it reflects the customizations you made.
426
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 25: SEO Best Practices
URL Keys
URL Keys
URL rewrites help keep your product and category page URLs readable for visitors and manageable by search engine indexing spiders. Every time you create a new product or category, a name-based URL is automatically generated. Your first experience with URL rewrites will likely be on the General Product Information page when you add a new product. The URL key is actually a static URL. When you create a product, a default URL key is created from the product name. For example, the URL Key for Funky Green Aviator Hat is funky-greenaviator-hat. User friendly URL: http://mymagentostore.com/apparel/accessories/funky-green-aviator-hat.html One can better appreciate this by understanding a little technical fact about databases: they don’t like fancy descriptive titles; they prefer dry, unique identifiers. When you create a new product, a database row with a unique product ID is generated. This also applies to categories and subcategories. With URL rewrites, users don’t have to see this. System based URL: http://mymagentostore.com/catalog/product/view/id/150
Part V: Improving Operations
427
Chapter 25: SEO Best Practices
URL Rewrites
URL Rewrites
A URL rewrite changes a dynamic URL to one that is static, readable, and search engine friendly. Take a look at Figure 1 for a good comparison. A dynamic URL is generated in real time, and contains a query string that may include variables such as product ID, sort order, and the page where the request was made. A static URL is a fixed address to the page. Your online store must be optimized for both customers and search engines. Static, readable URLs make it easier for customers to find products, navigate through your store, and bookmark products. They are also critical in helping index your site in search engines. Search engines use spiders or bots to scour the Web, searching for pages to index. As they crawl through your site, they identify relevant key words, and a myriad of other factors, which are ultimately used to determine the ranking of your site.
Protecting Your “Link Juice”
If your product pages are dynamically generated, Google will not be able to index them very well. If a variable such as product ID changes, the product page will be lost. Search engines hate dead links, and they have a negative effect on your ranking. Multiple URLs to the same content will also create duplication of content, which can also negatively hurt your search engine rankings. Using URL rewrites will help search engine index your site, and also enhance customer experience.
To change a product URL: 1. From the Admin panel, click Catalog > Manage Products. 2. From the Manage Products page, find the product you’d like to modify in the list.
If you have hundreds of products, do a filtered search using the column inputs at the top of the table. Then click Edit link in the right-most column of that product.
3. Say you decide this hat is not as funky as it initially seemed. Marketing research
tells you this product will sell better with the keyword, “party hat” so you decide to re-brand the product. No problem, simply change your product Name and URL key – both found under General tab. Note: You’ll notice a checkbox under URL key labeled “Create Permanent Redirect for old URL.” It is recommended to leave this checked. It will redirect
428
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 25: SEO Best Practices
URL Rewrites
links from the old URL (i.e. /funky-green-aviator-hat.html) to the new one (i.e. /green-aviator-party-hat.html). This is important because somebody might have linked to this product using the old URL. When they request the old URL, they will be redirected to the new page. This helps your search engine rankings, because it prevents it from being considered as duplicate content.
4. Click the Save button to save your changes.
URL Redirection 301 and 302
If you’ve ever had to create new URL Rewrite rules for redirecting products, categories, or pages, you have had to decide whether to do a permanent redirect (301) or temporary redirect (302). As their names suggest, one is used for temporarily moved pages and the other for permanently moved pages. Unfortunately, this difference can sometimes be ambiguous. We’re going to discuss the difference between permanent and temporary redirects as well as their effects on SEO. As a general rule of thumb, there are very few situations where a 302 redirect would be most appropriate. The reason for this is because of how search engines interpret 301 and 302 redirects. When a search engine encounters a 301 redirect, it will index the new page and make a note so that it credits the new page for all links directed towards the old one. On the contrary, a 302 redirect will tell the search engine to index the new page while also keeping and indexing the old one. This is sometimes considered “double dipping” and can result in duplication of content in the eyes of the search engine crawlers. The difference is quite subtle. Visitors to your online store will not notice a difference between the two. From the perspective of SEO, however, it could affect your store’s search ranking. When in doubt, it is considered a best practice to use a 301 redirect, because it is used more often.
Part V: Improving Operations
429
Chapter 25: SEO Best Practices
Using Third-Party Scripts
Using Third-Party Scripts
Third-party applications such as analytics and affiliate programs often require you to copy a section of code or script to your site. Sometimes the code contains a tracking number needed by the application to interact with your site . Magento Go gives you the ability to insert miscellaneous scripts into the following sections of the HTML page, directly from the Admin panel: HTML Head: Footer: Places the script directly before the closing </head> tag. Places the script directly before the </body> closing tag.
To install a third-party script: 1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. In the Configuration panel on the left, under General, select Design. 3. Click to expand the Footer section. Then, paste the script directly into the
Miscellaneous HTML box.
4. Click the Save Config button.
System > Configuration > General > Design: Footer
To refresh search indexing: 1. From the Admin panel, select Catalog > Search Indexing. 2. Click the Refresh button.
When complete, the embedded code will be available on your site.
430
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 25: SEO Best Practices
Google Sitemap
Google Sitemap
One way to improve your store’s indexing by search engines is to create a sitemap. A sitemap is essentially an index of all the pages on your site, including catalog pages, product pages, and content pages.
Your sitemap should be updated as frequently as the content on your site changes, which could be daily, weekly, or monthly. The frequency and priority for each type of content is determined by your system configuration.
Step 1:
Generate the Sitemap
To generate a Google sitemap: 1. From the Admin panel, select Catalog > Google Sitemap. 2. In the Sitemap section, click the Add New button.
Catalog > Google Sitemap
3. In the Filename field, enter: “ sitemap.xml” 4. Click the Save & Generate button to create the sitemap.
To view the sitemap, click the Link for Google. To update the sitemap, click the Generate link.
Sitemap Link for Google
Part V: Improving Operations
431
Chapter 25: SEO Best Practices
Google Sitemap
Step 2:
Submit Your Sitemap to Google
Google Webmaster Tools is a free service by Google that helps you optimize your site for indexing. After you have generated a Google Sitemap, the next step is to submit it to Google Webmaster Tools.
To submit your sitemap to Google Webmaster Tools: 1. Go to Google Webmaster Tools and do one of the following:
Log in to your existing account. Create a new account, and log in.
2. After you log in to your account, click the Add a Site button.
Add a Site
3. When prompted, enter your store address (i.e. mystore.gostorego.com) and click
Continue.
4. Do one of the following to verify that you are the owner of the site:
Add a DNS record to your domain If you manage your domain, you can create a new DNS record to prove domain ownership. Add a meta tag to your Home page To add a Meta tag, go to System > Configuration > Design > HTML Head and type the text in the Miscellaneous Scripts box.
432
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 25: SEO Best Practices
Google Sitemap
5. After your site has been verified, it will appear in the Sites list. Click the name of
your store to display the Sitemap Dashboard.
Google Webmaster Tools
6. Click the Submit a Sitemap button.
Submit a Sitemap
7. Enter the path to the Google Sitemap that you created for your store.
You can find the path at Catalog > Google Sitemaps, in the Link for Google column. Google adds your store domain as a prefix, so you only need the second part of the URL, after the “dot com.” It will look something like this: /media/xxxx/sitemaps/sitemap.xml If might help to copy and paste the full link into Notepad, and then copy only the part that you need.
8. Verify that the link to the sitemap is working correctly, and that the URLs have
been added to Google Webmaster Tools. It will show the number of pages indexed, according to your sitemap.
Part V: Improving Operations
433
Chapter 25: SEO Best Practices
Google Sitemap
Configuring Your Google Sitemap
You can configure the frequency and priority that the sitemap is updated for each type of content from the Admin panel of your Magento Go store. Here’s how:
To configure the frequency of the update: 1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. In the Configuration panel on the left, under Catalog, select Google Sitemap. 3. Click to expand the Categories Options section, and do the following:
a. Set the Frequency of the update to one of the following: Always Hourly Daily Weekly Monthly Yearly Never
b. Set the Priority of the scan to a value between 0.0 and 1.0.
Google Sitemap Categories Options
4. Click to expand the Products Options section, and set the Frequency and
Priority, as needed.
5. Click to expand the CMS Pages Options section, and set the Frequency and
Priority, as needed.
6. Click the Save Config button to save your settings.
434
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 25: SEO Best Practices
Google Sitemap
To set the operating parameters: 1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. In the Configuration panel on the left, under Catalog, select Google Sitemap. 3. Click to expand the Generation Settings section, and make any changes
necessary.
4. Click the Save Config button to save the settings.
Google Sitemap Generation Settings
Part V: Improving Operations
435
Chapter 25: SEO Best Practices
Google Analytics
Google Analytics
Google Analytics provides detailed statistics about your website visitors, as well as information about the effectiveness of your marketing campaigns. For field descriptions, see: Configuration: Google API - Google Analytics
Step 1:
Create a Google Analytics Account
It is easy to create a Google Analytics account. The process takes about five minutes.
1. Go to the Google Analytics site and click Sign Up Now to create your account. 2. Next, create a new profile for your Magento Go store. When prompted for your
store address, enter one of the following: yourstore.gostorego.com your own custom domain
3. Click the Finish button to save your profile. 4. When the tracking code instructions page appears, record your Web Property ID.
You will need it to complete the next step.
Step 2:
Configure Your Store for Google Analytics
After you have created a Google Analytics account and have your Web Property ID, you must complete the configuration from the Admin panel of your store.
1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. In the Configuration panel on the left, under Sales, select Google API. 3. Click to expand the Google Analytics section. Then, do the following:
a. Set Enable to “Yes.” b. In the Account Number field, type your Web Property ID. Make sure to include the “UA-” suffix that precedes the number. The format of the Web Property ID is: UA-########-##. The number can be found on your Google Analytics account page, and also in the Google Analytics code for your site.
4. Click the Save Config button to save your changes.
It takes a few minutes to verify and track your store. Check the Tracking Status on your Google Analytics profile page to confirm that your Google Account is Receiving Data from your store.
436
Magento Go User Guide
Chapter 25: SEO Best Practices
Google Analytics
Google Website Optimizer
System > Configuration > Sales > Google API - Google Website Optimizer If Google Optimizer is enabled for your store, each product and category will include a Product View Optimization tab that you can use to test the performance of the page. The Google Website Optimizer setting allows you to enable or disable Google Website Optimizer for product and category pages. For a detailed description of each field in the Google Optimizer section, see the following article in the Magento Go Knowledge Base: Configuration: Google API - Google Website Optimizer.
To configure your store for Google Website Optimizer: 1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. In the Configuration panel on the left, under Sales, select Google API. 3. Click to expand the Google Website Optimizer section. 4. To activate Google Website Optimizer, set Enable to “Yes.” 5. Click the Save Config button to save your changes.
Product View Optimization – Google Optimizer Scripts
Part V: Improving Operations
437
Chapter 25: SEO Best Practices
Google Analytics
Notes:
_______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________
438
Magento Go User Guide
Appendices
Glossary Editor Toolbar Buttons Shipping Carriers Country Codes Payment-Related Services Payment Service Providers Payment Gateways Product System Attributes Customer System Attributes Translating Your Store
Appendices
439
Appendix A:
Glossary
above the fold The web page content that is immediately visible in the browser window; section of a page that is displayed without the need to scroll. Administrative panel; back office; private section of store where orders, catalog, content, and configurations are managed. The text that is displayed in place of an image when the user is unable to view the image. The visible text that is anchored to another page or page section; the literal text of a hyperlink. Application Program Interface: A software interface that lets third-party applications read and write to a system using programming language constructs or statements. A characteristic or property of a product; anything that describes a product. Examples of product attributes include color, size, weight, and price. To give a service permission to perform certain actions or to access resources. Product price, less coupons or discounts, plus freight and applicable taxes. The average is determined by adding the beginning cost of inventory each month, plus the ending cost of inventory for the last month of the period. Promotional graphics displayed either horizontally on the top of a web page or vertically on the left or right margins. Website advertisements are often displayed as banners. Business to Business: A type of business transaction between two business entities that are not the final consumers of the goods or services. Business to Consumer: Business transactions between a business entity and a consumer.
Admin panel
alt text
anchor text
API
attribute
authorization
average inventory cost
banner
B2B
B2C
440
Magento Go User Guide
Appendix A: Glossary
batch processing
To perform a task or make a change to multiple items all at once, without manual repetition. The percentage of visitors to your site that leave without viewing any other pages. A unique identity that defines a particular product or group of products. A navigation aid that helps the user to keep track of their location within your store. A retail business with a permanent physical location, as opposed to being entirely virtual. A hyperlink that fails to send the user to its intended web page. The canonical meta tag redirects search engines to the correct URL, when seemingly duplicate content is encountered on the server. The process of converting the authorized amount into a billable transaction. Transactions cannot be captured until authorized, and authorizations cannot be captured until the goods or services have been shipped. A person who opens a credit card account and is authorized to make purchases. A set of products that share particular characteristics or attributes. A marketing term that indicates a goal has been reached. If the goal is to sell a product, conversion is reached when a visitor to your site becomes a buyer. The percentage of visitors who are converted into buyers. The process of gathering the payment and shipping information that is necessary to complete the purchase of items in the shopping cart. In the final step, the customer reviews and places the order.
bounce rate
brand
breadcrumb
brick and mortar
broken link
canonical URL
capture
cardholder
category
conversion
conversion rate
checkout process
Magento Go User Guide
441
Appendix A: Glossary
CMS
Content Management System: A software system that is used to create, edit, and maintain content on a website. Comma Separated Values: A type of file used to store data values which are separated from each other by commas. Card Verification Method: A way to verify the identity of the customer by confirming a 3-digit or 4-digit credit card security code with the payment processor. A document issued by the merchant to a customer to write off an outstanding balance because of overcharge, rebate, or return of goods. Cascading Style Sheets: A style sheet language that controls the appearance of HTML documents; a way to control the appearance of text, graphics, lists, links, and all other elements on a web page. The address of a website on the web; what the customer types in their browser address bar to access the store. The process for subscribing email recipients by requiring them to take a secondary step to confirm that they want to receive emails. A web page that displays different content depending on the user request. A term or phrase used in a search to filter for content that is of significant importance to that term or phrase. Frequently Asked Questions. Short for favorites icon; a 16x16 or 32x32 pixel icon associated with a website; is displayed in the browser address bar and next to the site name in a bookmark list. Freight On Board: A shipping term indicating who is responsible for paying transportation charges.
CSV
CVM
credit memo
CSS
domain
double opt-in
dynamic content
keyword
FAQ favicon
FOB
442
Magento Go User Guide
Appendix A: Glossary
fulfillment gateway
The process of managing customer shipments. A transaction bridge between a customer and a payment processing service that is used to transfer money between the customer and the merchant. The difference between the cost and price of a product. The first home page a visitor sees when they access your website URL. Considered the most important page on your website according to search engine indexers. HyperText Markup Language: A standard for tagging and structuring text, images, videos, and other media on a web page. A document that provides a detailed description of a purchase, including products purchased, quantity, price, shipping cost, sales tax, and total. A scripting language used with HTML to produce dynamic effects and interactions on web pages. A page on your site where a visitor arrives after clicking a link or advertisement. The value and authority transferred from one web page to another via hyperlinks (or links). Link juice affects a website’s page rank, a factor used to rank a search engine results page. A set of configurations that defines the user’s language, country, tax rate, and other settings. The process of signing into an online account. The amount subtracted from the original price of a product. A percentage added to the cost of an item to determine the retail price. An account with a bank or financial institution that makes it possible to accept credit card transactions.
gross margin
home page
HTML
invoice
JavaScript
landing page
link juice
locale
login markdown
markup
merchant account
Magento Go User Guide
443
Appendix A: Glossary
meta tags
Information in a web page that is not displayed on the page itself, but is used by search engines to determine the page title, description, and page keywords. The primary group of web page links that a customer uses to navigate around the website; the navigation links to the most important categories or pages on an online store. The process by which a user consents to receiving emails from an online store. A document that is usually included in a shipped package that describes the contents. Packing slips do not include financial or account information. A service that charges your customers’ credit cards and sends the funds to your merchant account, for deposit into your business bank account. Payment Card Industry: Refers to debit and credit cards and their associated businesses. A written sales contract between a buyer and seller that describes the merchandise or service to be purchased from a vendor. A document that explains the merchant’s policies for handling customer information. A method used to alert browsers and search engines that a page has been moved. 301 Redirect: Permanent change 302 Redirect: Temporary change
navigation
opt-in
packing slip
payment gateway
PCI
purchase order (PO)
privacy policy
redirect
relative link
A hyperlink that includes only the address of the linked page that is relative to the linking page, rather than the full URL. A document that explains the merchant’s rules regarding the return of products by customers. A file placed on a website that tells search engine crawlers which pages not to index.
return policy
robots.txt
444
Magento Go User Guide
Appendix A: Glossary
RSS feed
Really Simple Syndication: A technology that creates web content syndication and allows web users to subscribe to product feeds, websites, and blogs. Software as a Service: A software delivery model where the vendor provides the software and hosting environment, and customers pay for the service by subscription or per use. Information that is used by the SSL protocol to establish a secure connection. Search Engine Optimization: The process of improving a website’s search engine rankings in order to increase valued visitors. Settlement occurs when the acquiring bank and the issuer exchange funds and the proceeds are deposited into the merchant account. A company that transports packages. Common carriers include UPS, FedEx, DHL, and USPS. A grouping of products that the customer wishes to purchase at the end of their shopping session. A page that provides search engines with an efficient, alternate route through your site. Stock Keeping Unit: A number or code assigned to a product to identify the product, options, price, and manufacturer. A promotional page with a product or advertisement; normally displayed before the home page. A validation and security mechanism that identifies the merchant and encrypts credit card and other sensitive information. Content that does not change frequently. See also dynamic content.
SaaS
security certificate
SEO
settlement
shipping carrier
shopping cart
sitemap
SKU
splash page
SSL certificate
static content
Magento Go User Guide
445
Appendix A: Glossary
static block
A fixed content block that can be displayed on various content pages in a store. A package that contains graphics and appearance information, and customizes the look and feel of the store. A notification email sent to the customer when a transaction is processed. Uniform Resource Locator: The unique address of a page on the internet. Refers to the degree to which a product or service is easy to use by its customers. What You See Is What You Get: An editor that displays formatted text as it will appear in its final published form. Extensible Markup Language: A markup format derived from SGML that it used to format information for publication and distribution.
theme
transactional email
URL
usability
WYSIWYG
XML
446
Magento Go User Guide
Appendix B:
Editor Toolbar Buttons
Styles and Fonts
List Description Styles
Format
Font Family
Font Size
Character Format
Button Description Bold
Italic
Underline
Strikeout
Subscript
Superscript
Magento Go User Guide
447
Appendix B: Editor Toolbar Buttons
Special Characters
Button Description Insert Symbol
Insert Non-Breaking Space
Color
Button Description Select Text Color
Select Background Color
Paragraph Format
Button Description Left Justify
Center
Right Justify
Full Justify
Outdent
Indent
Blockquote
Insert Page Break
448
Magento Go User Guide
Appendix B: Editor Toolbar Buttons
Lists
Button Description Bulleted (Unordered) List
Numbered (Ordered) List
Rules
Button Description Insert Simple Horizontal Rule
Insert Formatted Horizontal Rule
Images and Media
Button Description Insert Media
Insert / Edit Image
Links and Anchors
Button Description Insert / Edit Link
Remove Link
Insert / Edit Anchor
Magento Go User Guide
449
Appendix B: Editor Toolbar Buttons
Tables
Button Description Insert / Modify Table
Table Row Properties
Table Cell Properties
Insert Row Above
Insert Row Below
Remove Column
Split Merged Table Cells
Merge Table Cells
Layers
Button Description Insert New Layer
Move Layer Forward
Move Layer Backward
Toggle Absolute Positioning
450
Magento Go User Guide
Appendix B: Editor Toolbar Buttons
Variables and Apps
Button Description Insert Variable
Insert / Edit Attributes
Insert Frontend App
Editing Tools
Button Description Undo
Redo
Cut
Copy
Paste
Paste as Plain Text
Paste from Word
Find
Find and Replace
Spellchecker (not installed)
Magento Go User Guide
451
Appendix B: Editor Toolbar Buttons
Button
Description Mark as Deletion
Mark as Insertion
Citation
Abbreviation
Acronym
Help
Coding Tools
Button Description Remove Formatting
Cleanup Messy Code
Workspace Preferences
Button Description Toggle Fullscreen Mode
Display Visual Control Characters (On / Off)
Toggle Guidelines / Invisible Elements
Set Typing Direction Left-to-Right
Set Typing Direction Right-to-Left
452
Magento Go User Guide
Appendix C:
Shipping Carriers
This appendix contains detailed configuration instructions for the following shipping carriers: UPS USPS FedEx (Deprecated) FedEx DHL
We frequently make updates and add new service providers, so please visit our Knowledge Base for the most current information.
Magento Go User Guide
453
Appendix C: Shipping Carriers
UPS
UPS
System > Configuration > Sales > Shipping Methods United Parcel Service offers shipping services domestic and international to more than 220 countries. UPS delivers letters, documents, packages by land and air.
Step 1:
Open a Shipping Account
To offer this shipping method to your customers, you must first open an account with UPS.
Step 2:
Configure Your Store
1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. In the Configuration panel on the left, under Sales, select Shipping Methods. 3. Click to expand the UPS section. Then, do the following:
a. Set Enabled to “Yes.” b. Set UPS Type to one of the following: United Parcel Service In the Gateway URL field, enter the URL that is used to calculate UPS shipping rates. This field is preset by default, and normally does not need to be changed. United Parcel Service XML Enter the following UPS credentials: Password Access License Number User ID
Then, complete the following: Mode: Set to Live to send data to the UPS shipping system over a secure connection. (While working in Development mode, data is not transmitted over the network.) Gateway XML URL: Set the URL that is used to connect with UPS while sending requests by XML file.
454
Magento Go User Guide
Appendix C: Shipping Carriers Order of Shipment:
UPS Set the region where the shipment originates. rates with UPS. Shipper Number: If you have negotiated special rates with UPS, type the six-digit number assigned to you by UPS.
Enable Negotiated Rates: Set to “Yes” if you have negotiated special
4. Complete the remaining fields as follows:
a. In the Title field, type the name of this shipping option as it will appear in checkout. b. In the Container field, specify the typical packaging type that is used for shipment. c. Set Destination Type to one of the following: Commercial: Residential: Most of your shipments are business to business (B2B). Most of your shipments are business to consumer. (B2C)
d. Set Weight Unit to the system used for measuring product weight in your store. The weight system supported by UPS varies by country. If in doubt, ask UPS which weight system you should use. Options include: LBS KGS
e. Set Pickup Method to one of the following: f. Regular Daily Pickup On Call Air One Time Pickup Letter Center Customer Counter
Set Maximum Package Weight to the amount supported by UPS.
g. Set Minimum Package Weight to the amount supported by UPS. The weight is based on the standard unit of measurement used by shipping carriers in your locale. In the United States, the weight is represented in ounces and pounds. h. Set Calculate Handling Fee to one of the following: Fixed: Percent: To calculate shipping based on a fixed rate. To calculate shipping based on a percentage of the order amount.
Magento Go User Guide
455
Appendix C: Shipping Carriers i. Set Handling Applied to one of the following: j. Per Order Per Package
UPS
In the Allowed Methods list, select each UPS method offered to your customers. The methods appear under UPS during checkout. (Hold the Ctrl key down to select multiple options.)
k. Set Free Method to the type of UPS service you want to use for offers of free shipping. l. Set Free Shipping with Minimum Order Amount to one of the following: Enable: To offer free shipping based on a minimum order. Then, type the Minimum Order Amount for Free Shipping. Disable: To not offer free shipping based on a minimum order.
m. In the Displayed Error Message box, type the message customers see if UPS shipping becomes unavailable. n. Set Ship to Applicable Countries to one of the following: All Allowed Countries Specific Countries If applicable, set Ship to Specific Countries to each country where your customers are allowed to ship by UPS. (Hold the Ctrl key down to select multiple options.) o. Set Debug to “Yes” to create a log file with the details of UPS shipments made from your store. p. Set Show Method if Not Applicable to one of the following: Yes: To list all UPS shipping methods to customers, regardless of their availability. No: To list only the methods which are available to customers.
q. In the Sort Order field, type a numeric value to determine the order in which UPS appears when listed with other shipping methods during checkout. The number with the highest priority is 0, which puts it at the top of the list.
5. When complete, click the Save Config button to save your changes.
456
Magento Go User Guide
Appendix C: Shipping Carriers
USPS
USPS
System > Configuration > Sales > Shipping Methods United States Postal Service is the independent postal service of United States government. USPS offers shipping services to domestic and international, including letters, postcards, packages, documents, and packages by land and air.
Step 1:
Open a Shipping Account
To offer this shipping method to your customers, you must first open an account with USPS.
Step 2:
Configure Your Store
1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. In the left panel, under Sales, click Shipping Methods. 3. Click to expand the USPS section. Then, complete the following:
a. Set Enabled to “Yes.” b. The Gateway URL is needed to access USPS shipping rates. The field is preset by default, and normally does not need to be changed. c. Enter a Title for this shipping method that will appear during checkout. d. Enter the User ID for your USPS account. e. Set Container to the type of packaging usually used to ship products ordered from your store. Options include: f. Variable Flat-Rate Box Flat-Rate Envelope Rectangular Non-rectangular
In the Size list, select the option that describes the typical package shipped from your store: Regular Large Oversize
Magento Go User Guide
457
Appendix C: Shipping Carriers g. Set Machinable to one of the following: Yes: No: If your typical package can be processed by machine. If your typical package must be processed manually.
USPS
h. Enter the Maximum Package Weight that you will ship by USPS. By default, this field is set to 70. You can leave the value as it is unless you have special arrangements with USPS. i. In the Calculate Handling Fee list, select one of the following methods: Fixed Fee Percent
The handling fee is an additional charge that is added to the shipping cost. It is optional and not shown to the customer. In the Handling Applied list, select one of the following: Per Order Per Package
In the Handling Fee field, enter the handling fee value – either a fixed amount or percentage depending on which you selected in Calculate Handling Fee field. j. In the Allowed Methods list, select each USPS method offered to your customers. The methods will appear under USPS during checkout. (Hold the Ctrl key down to select multiple options.) k. Set the Free Method list to the method you want to use for free shipping. l. Set the Free Shipping with Minimum Order Amount to one of the following: Enable: To provide free shipping for orders that meet the minimum amount specified. Then, in the field below, enter the Minimum Order Amount for Free Shipping. Disable: To not provide free shipping based on a minimum order amount.
m. In the Displayed Error Message box, type the message customers see if USPS shipping becomes unavailable.
458
Magento Go User Guide
Appendix C: Shipping Carriers n. Set Ship to Applicable Countries to one of the following: All Allowed Countries Specific Countries
USPS
If applicable, set Ship to Specific Countries to each country where your customers are allowed to ship by USPS. (Hold the Ctrl key down to select multiple options.) o. Set Show Method if Not Applicable to one of the following: Yes: To list all USPS shipping methods to customers, regardless of their availability. No: To list only the methods which are currently available.
p. Set Debug to “Yes” to create a log file of USPS shipments. q. In the Sort Order field, type a numeric value to determine the order in which USPS appears when listed with other shipping methods during checkout.
4. When the configuration is complete, click the Save Config button to save
settings.
Magento Go User Guide
459
Appendix C: Shipping Carriers
FedEx
FedEx
System > Configuration > Sales > Shipping Methods FedEx offers shipping services domestic and international to more than 220 countries which include delivering letters, documents, packages by land and air. To offer this shipping method to your customers, you need to setup an account with FedEx.
Step 1:
Open a Shipping Account
To offer this method to your customers, you must first open an account with FedEx.
Step 2:
Configure Your Store
1. From the Admin panel, choose System > Configuration. 2. In the left Configuration panel, under Sales, click Shipping Methods. 3. Click to expand the FedEx section. Then, do the following:
a. Set Enabled for Checkout to “Yes.” b. Enter a Title for this shipping method that will appear during checkout. c. Complete the following credentials from your FedEx account: Account ID: Meter Number: Key: Password: Your FedEx account ID, without hyphens. The number of your FedEx meter. Your FedEx account key. Your FedEx password.
d. Set Sandbox Mode to one of the following: Yes: No: To enable Sandbox Mode to test the configuration. To disable Sandbox Mode when ready to offer FedEx shipping on your site. e. In the Packaging list, select the container type that you typically use to package the products ordered from your store. f. In the Dropoff list, select the pick-up method you will be using for delivery. You can determine this based on the deal you have established with FedEx.
460
Magento Go User Guide
Appendix C: Shipping Carriers Regular Pickup:
FedEx If you are doing a high volume of shipments, it is cost-effective to arrange for regular pickups. To call and request a FedEx courier to pick-up shipments. To drop off shipments at your nearby FedEx drop box.
Request Courier:
Drop Box:
Business Service Center: To drop off shipments at your local FedEx business service center. Station: Tot drop off shipments at your local FedEx station.
g. Set Calculate Handling Fee to one of the following: Fixed Percent
The handling fee is an additional charge that is added to the shipping cost. It is optional and not shown to the customer. h. Set Handling Applied to one of the following: i. Per Order Per Package
In the Handling Fee field, enter the handling fee as either a fixed amount or percentage, depending on which method you have chosen to use. Set Residential Delivery to one of the following: Yes No
j.
k. In the Allowed Methods list, select each FedEx method offered to your customers. The methods will appear under FedEx during checkout. (Hold the Ctrl key down to select multiple options.) l. Set the Free Method list to the method you want to use for free shipping. following: Enable: To provide free shipping for orders that meet the minimum amount specified. Then, in the field below, enter the Minimum Order Amount for Free Shipping. Disable: To not provide free shipping based on a minimum order amount.
m. Set the Free Shipping with Minimum Order Amount to one of the
Magento Go User Guide
461
Appendix C: Shipping Carriers
FedEx
n. In the Displayed Error Message box, type the message customers see if FedEx shipping becomes unavailable. o. Set Ship to Applicable Countries to one of the following: All Allowed Countries Specific Countries
If applicable, set the Ship to Specific Countries list to each country where your customers are allowed to ship by FedEx. (Hold the Ctrl key down to select multiple options.) p. Set Debug to “Yes” to create a log file of FedEx shipments. q. Set Show Method if Not Applicable to one of the following: Yes: To list all FedEx shipping methods to customers, regardless of their availability. No: r. To list only the methods which are currently available.
In the Sort Order field, type a numeric value to determine the order in which FedEx appears when listed with other shipping methods during checkout.
4. When the configuration is complete, click the Save Config button to save
settings.
462
Magento Go User Guide
Appendix C: Shipping Carriers
DHL
DHL
System > Configuration > Sales > Shipping Methods DHL offers shipping services internationally only offering services by air and ocean freight, road and rail transportation, and international mail services to its customers to more than 220 countries.
Step 1:
Open a Shipping Account
To offer this method to your customers, you must first open an account with DHL.
Step 2:
Configure Your Store
1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. In the Configuration panel on the left, under Sales, select Shipping Methods. 3. Click to expand the DHL section. Then, do the following:
a. Set Enabled to “Yes.” b. The Gateway URL is used to access DHL shipping rates. The field is preset by default, and normally does not need to be changed. c. Give a Title to this shipping method that will appear during checkout. d. Complete your DHL account credentials: Access ID Password Account Number Shipping Key (International) Shipping Key
e. Set Shipment Type to one of the following: Letter: Package: If most of your shipments are letters. If most of your shipments are packages.
Magento Go User Guide
463
Appendix C: Shipping Carriers f. (Optional) The handling fee appears as an additional charge added to the shipping cost. If including a handling fee, do the following: a) Set Calculate Handling Fee to one of the following: Fixed Percent
DHL
b) Set Handling Applied to one of the following: Per Order Per Package
g. In the Package Description field, type a description of the typical package shipped. The default is Big Box. h. Enter the Handling Fee amount, based on the method you have chosen to calculate the amount. i. If the charge is based on a fixed fee, enter the amount as a decimal. For example: 4.90 If the charge is based on a percent. For example, to charge 6%, enter: .06
If your shipments are subject to international duty charges, set Shipment Dutiable to “Yes.”
j.
Enter the Maximum Package Weight to be shipped by DHL. By default, the weight is set to 150lbs, which is the maximum accepted.
k. Set Shipment Duty Payment Type to identify the party who is responsible to pay international duty charges. Options include: Sender: Receiver: Third Party: l. The party sending the package pays the duty. The party receiving the package pays the duty. The duty is paid by another person or company.
In the Allowed Methods list, select each DHL method offered to your customers. The methods will appear under DHL during checkout. (Hold the Ctrl key down to select multiple options.)
m. In the Displayed Error Message box, type the message customers see when DHL shipping becomes unavailable.
464
Magento Go User Guide
Appendix C: Shipping Carriers n. To configure free shipping, do the following: a) Select the Free Method you want to use for free shipping. b) Set Free Shipping with Minimum Order Amount to one of the following: Enable: Disable: To offer free shipping based on minimum order. To not offer free shipping based on minimum order.
DHL
c) In the Minimum Order Amount for Free Shipping field, type the smallest order total that qualifies for free shipping. o. To provide additional protection for shipments, set Additional Protection Enabled to “Yes.” Then, do the following: a) In the Additional Protection Min Subtotal field, enter the smallest order subtotal that qualifies to receive additional protection. b) Set Additional Protection Value to one of the following: Configuration Then, in the Additional Protection Configuration Value field, type the amount of additional protection to offer. Subtotal Subtotal with Discount
c) To determine the exact value that is used to qualify for additional protection, set Additional Protection Value Rounding Method to one of the following: To Lower To Upper Round
p. Set Shipment Contains Hazardous Materials to one of the following: Yes: No: Shipments contain hazardous materials. Shipments do not contain hazardous materials.
q. Complete the following to describe the size of your default package: Default Package Length Default Package Width Default Package Height
Magento Go User Guide
465
Appendix C: Shipping Carriers r. Complete the following to specify each day of the week that you ship packages. (Hold the Ctrl key down to select multiple options.) Domestic Shipment Days International Shipment Days
DHL
s. Set Ship to Applicable Countries to one of the following: All Allowed Countries Specific Countries If applicable, set the Ship to Specific Countries list to each country where your customers are allowed to ship by DHL. (Hold the Ctrl key down to select multiple options.) t. Set Show Method if Not Applicable to one of the following: Yes: To list all DHL shipping methods to customers, regardless of their availability. No: To list only the methods which are currently available.
u. Set Debug to “Yes” to create a log file of DHL shipments. v. In the Sort Order field, type a numeric value to determine the order in which DHL appears when listed with other shipping methods during checkout.
4. When complete, click the Save Config button to save settings.
466
Magento Go User Guide
Appendix D:
Country Codes
This partial list of country codes is provided for your convenience. You can find the complete list online, using your favorite search engine. Argentina Australia Austria Belgium Brazil Canada China Denmark Finland France Germany India Italy Japan Mexico Netherlands New Zealand Norway Poland Spain United Kingdom United States AR AU AT BE BR CA CN DK FI FR DE IN IT JP MX NL NZ NO PL ES GB US ARG AUS AUT BEL BRA CAN CHN DNK FIN FRA DEU IND ITA JPN MEX NLD NZL NOR POL ESP GBR USA
Magento Go User Guide
467
Appendix E:
Payment-Related Services
3D Secure Credit Card Validation Kount Fraud Detection
We frequently make updates and add new service providers, so please visit our Knowledge Base for the most current information.
468
Magento Go User Guide
Appendix E: Payment-Related Services
3D Secure Credit Card Validation
3D Secure Credit Card Validation
System > Configuration > Payment Services If you want an additional layer of protection against fraudulent charges or chargebacks for sales in your Magento Go store, you can enable 3D Secure Credit Card Validation. The 3D Secure Credit Card Validation payment service can increase your customers’ confidence in the security of transactions made in your store, and it might also qualify your business for lower processing rates, depending on your merchant account. This service works only with eligible payment gateways, which must be enabled by the administrator of your Magento Go store. The 3D Secure Credit Card Validation payment service enables Verified by VISA and MasterCard SecureCode payer authentication for purchases made by VISA or MasterCard credit cards. Your customers use either the Verified by Visa authentication or the MasterCard SecureCode in addition to their credit card account numbers. (Customers can set up authentication for their credit cards either before they shop or during the purchasing process.) When customers check out of your Magento Go store, they enter additional security information with their credit card information. The 3D Secure Credit Card Validation service works with the following payment gateways in Magento Go: Authorize.Net PayPal Website Payments Pro (Payflow Edition) Payflow Pro Gateway
Note: Sage Pay Direct has 3D Secure Card Validation that is integrated within the Sage Pay Direct gateway itself. If you’re using Sage Pay Direct, you don’t need to read this article or set up this service module separately. Just make sure to enable and configure 3D Secure Card Validation in your Sage Pay Merchant account.
Magento Go User Guide
469
Appendix E: Payment-Related Services
3D Secure Credit Card Validation
To enable 3D Secure Credit Card Validation:
Step 1: Set up a merchant plug-in application (MPI) to enable 3D Secure Credit Card Validation for your Magento Go store Step 2: Step 3: Configure 3D Secure Credit Card Validation in Magento Go Enable the 3D Secure Credit Card Validation payment service for applicable payment gateways
Step 1:
Enable 3D Secure Credit Card Validation
Do one of the following: Set up a merchant plug-in application (MPI) to enable 3D Secure Credit Card Validation Alternatively, you can use a hosted service to perform the authentication process for you. For more information about merchant requirements, see the websites for Verified by VISA and MasterCard SecureCode payer authentication.
Step 2:
Configure 3D Secure Credit Card Validation i
1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. From the Configuration panel on the left, under Sales, select Payment Services. 3. Click to expand the 3D Secure Credit Card Validation section. Then, do the
following: a. Enter the following information for your 3D Secure Credit Card Validationenabled account: Processor ID Merchant ID Password
470
Magento Go User Guide
Appendix E: Payment-Related Services b. Do one of the following:
3D Secure Credit Card Validation
When you are ready to test the configuration and process test transactions, set Test Mode to “Yes.” When you are ready to “go live” with the 3D Secure Credit Card Validation payment service, set Test Mode to “No.”
c. To record the details of all exchanges between your Magento Go store and the 3D Secure Credit Card Validation payment service in a log file, set Debug to “Yes.” Note: In accordance with PCI Data Security Standards, credit card information is not recorded in the log file.
4. When finished, click the Save Config button.
Step 3:
Enable the service in applicable payment gateways
Currently, 3D Secure Credit Card Validation works with the following payment gateways: Authorize.Net: To enable the 3D Secure Credit Card Validation payment service with this payment gateway, see Payment Gateways: Authorize.Net. PayPal Website Payments Pro (Payflow Edition): To enable the 3D Secure Credit Card Validation payment service with this payment gateway, see Payment Gateways: Website Payments Pro Payflow Edition. PayPal Payflow Pro Gateway: To enable the 3D Secure Credit Card Validation payment service with this payment gateway, see Payment Gateways: Payflow Pro Gateway. Look for more payment gateways to use with the 3D Secure service in future releases of Magento Go.
Magento Go User Guide
471
Appendix E: Payment-Related Services
Kount Fraud Detection
Kount Fraud Detection
System > Configuration > Sales > Payment Services The Kount Fraud Detection service targets Internet fraud by detecting networks of programs that have been designed to defraud online merchants. The application detects fraud related to credit cards, checks, and PayPal, and then tracks the transactions, so that illegal or suspect Financial activity can be stopped. As the merchant, you set up credit card validation rules in the Kount system to monitor transactions related to your online store. For field descriptions, see the article, Configuration: Payment Services Kount Fraud Detection in the Magento Go Knowledge Base
Step 1:
Open a Kount Fraud Detection merchant account
The first step is to establish a Kount Fraud Detection merchant account. As you go through the process, take note of the following information, which you will need to complete the configuration in Magento Go: Kount Merchant ID Certificate Password
For more information about opening a merchant account, visit the Kount website.
Step 2:
Configure Kount Fraud Detection for your store
1. From the Admin panel of Magento Go, select System > Configuration >
Payment Services.
2. In the Configuration panel on the left, under Sales, click Payment Services. 3. Click to expand the Kount Fraud Detection section, and do the following:
a. Set Enabled to “Yes.” b. Enter your Kount Merchant ID from your Kount Fraud Detection merchant account. c. In the RIS Certificate field, select the RIS (Risk Inquiry System) certificate to upload. This is the RIS Certificate File that is requested in the Kount Agent Web Console (AWC). If not uploaded, the generic Kount Certificate is used. d. In the Certificate Password field, enter the password for the RIS Certificate. e. Set Test Mode as needed, to “Yes” or “No.”
4. When finished, click the Save Config button to save the settings.
472
Magento Go User Guide
Appendix F:
Payment Service Providers
CCAvenue Google Checkout Paybox Direct
We frequently make updates and add new service providers, so please visit our Knowledge Base for the most current information.
Magento Go User Guide
473
Appendix F: Payment Service Providers
CCAvenue
CCAvenue
System > Configuration > Sales > Payment Methods CCAvenue is a payment service provider that offers payment gateway services for merchants in India. To set up a CCAvenue payment gateway, first set up a merchant account, then configure it in your Magento Go store.
Step 1:
Open a Merchant Account
The first step is to establish a CCAvenue merchant account. As you go through the process, take note of the following information, which you will need to complete the configuration in Magento Go: Merchant ID/User ID 32 –bit Working Key
For more information about opening a CCAvenue merchant account, visit their website at www.ccavenue.com.
Step 2:
Configure Your Store
1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. In the Configuration panel on the left, under Sales, select Payment Method. 3. Click to expand the CCAvenue section. Then, do the following:
a. To activate this payment method, set Enabled to “Yes.” b. In the Title field, enter an appropriate title to identify this payment method during checkout. c. Enter the following information from your CCAvenue merchant account: d. Merchant ID/User ID 32-bit Working Key
(Optional) Enter a Transaction ID prefix. If you do this, it is recommended that you assign the Transaction ID prefix once only and avoid changing it in the future.
474
Magento Go User Guide
Appendix F: Payment Service Providers
CCAvenue
e. In the Payment from Applicable Countries list, select the countries where this payment method can be used: All Allowed Countries: Customers from all countries in the default countries list can use this payment method. Specific Countries: Customers from only those countries selected in the Payment from Specific Countries list can use this payment method. Then in the Payment from Specific Countries list, select each country where the CCAvenue payment method is accepted. Note: To change the countries in the Allowed Countries list, see System > Configuration > General > Countries Options. f. In the Sort Order field, type a numeric value to determine the order in which CCAvenue appears when listed with other shipping methods during checkout. Enter 0 for the top of the sort order list, 1 for the second highest in the list, and so on. g. Set Test Mode to one of the following: Yes: No: To test the configuration in the sandbox and run test transactions. When you’re ready to “go live” in production mode with CCAvenue.
h. Set Debug to “Yes” to create a log file of all exchanges between your store and CCAvenue. Note: In accordance with PCI Data Security Standards, credit card information is not recorded in the log file.
4. When finished, click the Save Config button.
Magento Go User Guide
475
Appendix F: Payment Service Providers
Google Checkout
Google Checkout
System > Configuration > Sales > Google API Magento Go allows you to integrate your store with Google Checkout. With Google Checkout, customers can pay for purchases in their shopping cart using the Google Checkout payment processing system. Note: Be sure to sign up for a Google Checkout merchant account before starting the configuration of Google Checkout from the Admin panel of your Magento Go store.
Step 1:
Open a Merchant Account
The first step is to establish a Google Checkout merchant account. As you go through the process, take note of the following information, which you will need to complete the configuration in Magento Go: Merchant ID Merchant Key
For more information about opening a Google Checkout merchant account for your Magento Go store, see the Google Checkout website.
Step 2:
Configure Your Store
1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. From the Configuration panel on the left, under Sales, select Google API. 3. Click to expand the Google API section. Then, do the following:
a. To activate this payment method, set Enabled to “Yes.” b. In the Title field, enter an appropriate title to identify this payment method during the checkout process of your Magento Go store. c. Set Test Mode to one of the following: Yes: To test the configuration in the sandbox and process test transactions. No: When you are ready to “go live” with Google Checkout.
476
Magento Go User Guide
Appendix F: Payment Service Providers
Google Checkout
d. Set Secure Callback URL to “Yes” to enable real-time secure transmission of order information from your Magento Go checkout to Google’s payment processing system. Note: This option must be set to “Yes” for live Google Checkout transactions. e. Set Debug to “Yes” to create a log file of all exchanges between your store and Google Checkout. Note: In accordance with PCI Data Security Standards, credit card information is not recorded in the log file. f. Enter the following credentials from your Google Checkout merchant account: Merchant ID: This option can be found on Google Checkout website at Settings > Integration. Merchant Key: This is a unique code used to secure communication between Google and your Magento Go store. The code verifies the integrity of any messages exchanged between your store and the Google Checkout system. It can be the URL of any CMS page, product page, or catalog page in your Magento Go store. If left blank, the customer is redirected to your Home page. g. Choose a Checkout Image Style from the available list. h. Select the Location for Google Checkout from the list of available options. i. In the New Order Status field, specify how you want processed orders to be identified. This setting is visible to the customer and is used for identification purposes. j. (Optional) You can specify a Continue Shopping URL where customers are redirected if they click the Continue Shopping link. If you leave this field blank, the URL redirects to your Home page. k. To hide shopping cart contents after the Google Checkout button is clicked, set Hide Cart Contents to “Yes.” (The shopping cart contents become visible again if the customer clicks Edit Cart.) l. If your checkout request is cut off because it is too big, set Disable Default Tax Tables to “Yes.”
4. When finished, click the Save Config button.
Magento Go User Guide
477
Appendix F: Payment Service Providers
Paybox Direct
Paybox Direct
System > Configuration > Sales > Payment Methods Paybox Services provides merchant accounts and eCommerce payment services for merchants in Europe.
Step 1:
Open a Merchant Account
The first step is to establish a Paybox merchant account. As you go through the process, take note of the following information, which you will need to complete the configuration in Magento Go: Site Number (TPE) Rank Number Activated Key Primary Payment Server URL Backup Payment Server URL
For more information about opening a Paybox merchant account, visit www.paybox.com.
Step 2:
Configure Your Store
1. From the Admin panel of Magento Go, select System > Configuration >
Payment Methods.
2. Click to expand the Paybox Direct section. Then, do the following:
a. Set Enabled to “Yes.” b. In the Title field, enter the name for this payment method that customers will see during checkout. By default, the title is set to “Paybox Direct.” c. Enter the following credentials from your Paybox Direct merchant account: Site Number (TPE) Rank Number Activated Key Primary Payment Server URL Backup Payment Server URL
478
Magento Go User Guide
Appendix F: Payment Service Providers
Paybox Direct
d. Set Debug to “Yes” to create a log file of all exchanges between your store and Paybox Direct. Note: In accordance with Payment Card Industry Data Security Standards (PCI DSS), credit card information is not recorded in the log file. a. When you are ready to “go live” with the Paybox Direct payment method, set New Order Status to Processing. b. Set Payment Action to one of the following: Authorize Only: To authorize the transaction, but not transfer money to your account. Authorize and Capture: To authorize the transaction and also transfer money to your account. c. In the Credit Card Types list, select each credit card that can be used with this payment method. d. In the Payment from Applicable Countries list, select the countries where this payment method can be used: All Allowed Countries: Customers from all countries in the default countries list can use this payment method. Specific Countries: Customers from only those countries selected in the Payment from Specific Countries list can use this payment method. Then in the Payment from Specific Countries list, select each country where Paybox Direct is accepted. Note: To change the countries in the Allowed Countries list, see System > Configuration > General > Countries Options. e. In the Sort Order field, type a numeric value to determine the order in which Paybox Direct appears when listed with other shipping methods during checkout. Enter 0 for the top of the sort order list, 1 for the second highest in the list, and so on.
3. When finished, click the Save Config button to save the settings.
Magento Go User Guide
479
Appendix G:
PCI Compliance Guidelines
Every merchant who handles customer credit card information is required by the Payment Card Industry (PCI) to conduct business within these guidelines: Build and maintain a secure network, and maintain a firewall on the server to protect data. Do not use vendor-supplied defaults for system passwords and security parameters. Protect stored customer data and encrypt the transmission of cardholder data and other sensitive information across public networks. Use and regularly update antivirus software, and develop and maintain secure systems and applications. Restrict physical access to customer data, and provide access only to those with business need-to-know. Assign each person with computer access a unique ID. Track and monitor all access to network resources and cardholder data. Regularly test security systems and processes, and perform a quarterly network vulnerability scan. Maintain an Information Security Policy. Report to the Payment Card Industry according to the requirements of your merchant level. Your Magento Go store is hosted in a PCI compliant, “Tier 4” data center. However, in addition to maintaining a secure hosting environment, there are additional requirements which are the responsibility of each merchant. For small businesses that process fewer than 20,000 credit card transactions per year, the PCI Compliance guidelines can be considered a set of best practices. If you conduct your online business within these parameters, you will enjoy the satisfaction of knowing that you are doing all within your power to provide your customers with a safe and secure shopping experience. As your business grows, your PCI reporting requirements will increase in proportion to your merchant level. To learn more, visit the PCI Security Standards Council website.
480
Magento Go User Guide
Appendix H:
Payment Gateways
Magento Go supports a wide range of payment gateways that provide secure processing of online transactions in all parts of the world. This Appendix provides step-by-step configuration instructions for the following gateways: Authorize.Net Braintree Card Gate Plus CyberSource (SOAP Toolkit) DIBS Payment Services eWAY Direct First Data Global Gateway Web Service API Ogone DirectLlink PAYONE PSiGate SagePay Direct
We frequently make updates and add new service providers, so please visit our Knowledge Base for the most current information.
Magento Go User Guide
481
Appendix H: Payment Gateways
Authorize.Net
Authorize.Net
System > Configuration > Sales > Payment Methods Authorize.Net is a payment gateway that gives merchants the ability to accept credit card and electronic check payments quickly and inexpensively. This article explains how to set up Authorize.Net for your Magento Go store.
Step 1:
Open a Merchant Account
The first step is to establish an Authorize.Net merchant account. Magento Go has partnered with Authorize.net to offer you preferred terms. Visit Authorize.net to take advantage of their special pricing for Magento merchants. As you go through the process, take note of the following information, which you will need to complete the configuration in Magento Go: API Login ID Transaction Key
For more information about opening an Authorize.Net merchant account, visit www.authorize.net.
Step 2:
Configure Your Store
1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. From the Configuration panel on the left, under Sales, select the Payment
Methods tab.
3. Click to expand the Authorize.Net section. Then, do the following:
a. To activate this payment method, set Enabled to “Yes.” b. To enable the Authorize.Net Customer Information Manager (CIM), set Enable CIM to “Yes.” Authorize.Net Customer Information Manager (CIM) lets you store sensitive customer payment information on the Authorize.Net secure servers, to simplify PCI compliance and processing payments for returning customers and recurring transactions. Note: If you enable CIM, 3D Secure Card Validation becomes disabled.
482
Magento Go User Guide
Appendix H: Payment Gateways
Authorize.Net
c. In the Title field, enter an appropriate title to identify this payment method during the checkout process of your Magento Go store, or use the default. d. Set Payment Action to one of the following: Authorize Only: After an order is submitted, Authorize.Net authorizes the transaction. Your Magento Go store administrator must log in to the merchant account on Authorize.Net to capture the transaction. Authorize and Capture: A payment is authorized and captured on the Authorize.Net site, and the back end of your Magento Go store generates an order and an invoice. e. Enter the API Login ID for your Authorize.Net merchant account. f. Enter the Transaction Key for your Authorize.Net merchant account.
g. Set Test Mode to one of the following: Yes: If you are ready to test the configuration and process test transactions. No: If you are ready to “go live” with the Authorize.Net.
h. Set Debug to “Yes” to create a log file of all exchanges between your store and Authorize.Net. i. In the Accepted Currency list, select each currency that is accepted as payment in your store. j. If you want to email the customer when the order is processed, set Email Customer to “Yes.” k. In the Merchant’s Email field, enter the email address of your store. l. In the Credit Card Types list, select each credit card which can be used with this payment method. (Hold the Ctrl key down to select multiple options.) m. To require that customers enter a card verification code (CVC), set Credit Card Verification to “Yes.” The Card Verification Value, also known as the Card Security Code, provides an additional level of security for online transactions. n. In the Payment from Applicable Countries list, select the countries where this payment method can be used:
Magento Go User Guide
483
Appendix H: Payment Gateways All Allowed Countries:
Authorize.Net Customers from all countries in the default countries list can use this payment method. Customers from only those countries selected in the Payment from Specific Countries list can use this payment method. Then in the Payment from Specific Countries list, select each country where Authorize.Net is accepted.
Specific Countries:
Note: To change the countries in the Allowed Countries list, see System > Configuration > General > Countries Options. o. Set Enable 3D Secure Card Validation on Frontend to “Yes” to provide an additional level of fraud protection. p. In the Minimum Order Total and Maximum Order Total fields, specify the minimum and maximum order totals that qualify for this payment method. If an order exactly matches the minimum or maximum total, it qualifies for this payment method. q. In the Sort Order field, type a numeric value to determine the order in which Authorize.Net appears when listed with other shipping methods during checkout. Enter 0 for the top of the sort order list, 1 for the second highest in the list, and so on.
4. When finished, click the Save Config button.
484
Magento Go User Guide
Appendix H: Payment Gateways
Braintree
Braintree
System > Configuration > Sales > Payment Methods Braintree merchants can accept payment in 134 local currencies and choose to settle in up to 21 different currencies. As an online merchant, the advantage to you of using Braintree is that your customers can save credit card information on file. If you use Braintree’s Vault feature, you can also use saved credit card information when placing orders as your store’s administrator working from your store’s back office. After the information is saved, only the last four digits of the credit card are visible. This article explains how to set up Braintree for your Magento Go store.
Step 1:
Open a Merchant Account
The first step is to establish a Braintree merchant account. As you go through the process, take note of the following information, which you will need to complete the configuration in Magento Go: Environment Merchant ID Public Key Private Key
For more information about opening a merchant account, visit www.braintreepayments.com.
Step 2:
Configure Your Store
1. From the Admin panel of Magento Go, select System > Configuration >
Payment Methods.
2. In the Configuration panel on the left, under Sales, click Payment Methods. 3. Click to expand the Braintree section, and do the following:
a. Set Enabled to “Yes.” b. In the Title field, enter the name for this payment method that customers will see during checkout. By default, the title is set to “Braintree.” c. Set Payment Action to one of the following:
Magento Go User Guide
485
Appendix H: Payment Gateways Authorize Only:
Braintree The payment is authorized by Braintree but not captured until you generate the invoice for the order. The payment is authorized by Braintree and the transaction is processed immediately.
Sale:
d. Enter the following credentials from your Braintree merchant account: Environment Merchant ID Public Key Private Key
e. Set Enable Vault to “Yes” or “No,” according to your preference. For more information, see www.braintreepayments.com. f. In the Credit Card Types list, select each credit card that can be used with this payment method. g. In the Sort Order field, type a numeric value to determine the order in which Braintree appears when listed with other shipping methods during checkout. Enter 0 for the top of the sort order list, 1 for the second highest in the list, and so on.
4. When finished, click the Save Config button to save the settings.
486
Magento Go User Guide
Appendix H: Payment Gateways
Card Gate Plus
Card Gate Plus
System > Configuration > Sales > Payment Methods Card Gate Plus is a leading payment service provider based in the Netherlands. Card Gate accepts credit cards and also supports local solutions such as iDEAL.
Step 1:
Open a Merchant Account
The first step is to establish a Card Gate Plus merchant account. As you go through the process, take note of the following information, which you will need to complete the configuration in Magento Go: Site ID Hash Key
For more information about opening a Card Gate Plus merchant account, visit www.cardgate.com.
Step 2:
Configure Your Store
1. From the Admin panel of Magento Go, select System > Configuration >
Payment Methods.
2. On the Payment Methods tab, click to expand the Card Gate Plus section. Then,
do the following: a. Set Enabled to “Yes.” b. In the Title field, enter the name for this payment method that customers will see during checkout. By default, the title is set to “Card Gate Plus.” c. Enter the following credentials from your Card Gate Plus merchant account: Site ID Hash Key
d. In the Payment from Applicable Countries list, select the countries where this payment method can be used:
Magento Go User Guide
487
Appendix H: Payment Gateways All Allowed Countries:
Card Gate Plus Customers from all countries in the default countries list can use this payment method. Customers from only those countries selected in the Payment from Specific Countries list can use this payment method. Then in the Payment from Specific Countries list, select each country where the Card Gate Plus payment method will be accepted.
Specific Countries:
Note: To change the countries in the Allowed Countries list, see System > Configuration > General > Countries Options. e. In the Sort Order field, type a numeric value to determine the order in which Card Gate Plus appears when listed with other shipping methods during checkout. Enter 0 for the top of the sort order list, 1 for the second highest in the list, and so on. f. Set Test Mode to one of the following: Yes: No: To test the configuration in the sandbox and run test transactions. When ready to “go live” in production mode Card Gate Plus.
g. Set Debug to “Yes” to create a log file of all exchanges between your store and Card Gate Plus. Note: In accordance with Payment Card Industry Data Security Standards (PCI DSS), credit card information is not recorded in the log file.
3. When finished, click the Save Config button to save the settings.
Note: When a customer places an order, they will be redirected to Card Gate Plus’s checkout page where they enter their credit card information.
488
Magento Go User Guide
Appendix H: Payment Gateways
CyberSource (SOAP Toolkit)
CyberSource (SOAP Toolkit)
System > Configuration > Sales > Payment Methods CyberSource offers global payment services for small, medium, and large businesses. The company also owns the Authorize.net service, which is designed specifically for businesses with less than $3M in annual online sales.
Step 1:
Open a Merchant Account
The first step is to establish a CyberSource merchant account. For more information, visit the CyberSource Support Center.
Step 2:
Generate a Security Key
A transaction security key must be generated before you can configure the CyberSource SOAP Toolkit for your Magento Go store.
1. Log in to the CyberSource Business Center. 2. In the left panel, click Account Management. Then, click Transaction Security
Keys and do the following: a. Select Security Keys for the SOAP Toolkit API. b. Click Generate Key.
3. As soon as the transaction security key is generated, copy it and save in a
convenient place where you can refer to it during the configuration of your store.
Step 3:
Configure Your Store
1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration > Payment Methods. 2. On the Payment Methods tab, click to expand the CyberSource (SOAP Toolkit)
section. Then, do the following: a. Set Enabled to “Yes.” b. In the Title field, enter the name for this payment method that customers will see during checkout. By default, the title is set to: Credit Card (CyberSource). c. In the Merchant ID field, enter the Merchant ID or User Name, that is associated with your CyberSource merchant account.
Magento Go User Guide
489
Appendix H: Payment Gateways
CyberSource (SOAP Toolkit)
d. In the Security Key field, paste the transaction security key that was generated in Step 2. e. In the Merchant’s Email field, enter the email address that is associated with your CyberSource merchant account. f. Set Email Customer to one of the following: Yes: To send the customer an Email Receipt for each transaction processed by the Virtual Terminal. No: To not send the customer an Email Receipt for each transaction processed by the Virtual Terminal. Note: This setting has no effect on transactional email messages sent from your Magento Go store. g. Set Payment Action to one of the following: Authorization: To authorize the transaction but not transfer funds to your account. Sale: To authorize the transaction and also transfer funds to your account. h. In the Credit Card Types list, select each credit card that can be used in your store with this payment. i. If you want to require that customers enter a card verification code (CVC), set Credit Card Verification to “Yes.” j. In the Payment from Applicable Countries list, select the countries where this payment method can be used: All Allowed Countries: Customers from all countries in the default countries list can use this payment method. Specific Countries: Customers from only those countries selected in the Payment from Specific Countries list can use this payment method. Then in the Payment from Specific Countries list, select each country where the CyberSource payment method is accepted. Note: To change the countries in the Allowed Countries list, see System > Configuration > General > Countries Options.
490
Magento Go User Guide
Appendix H: Payment Gateways
CyberSource (SOAP Toolkit)
k. If you accept payments from Japan, set Enable Japanese Payment Options to “Yes.” Then, select one of the following options from the JPO Payment Method list: Single Payment Bonus Payment Installment Then, enter the Number of Installment Payments as 0-9. l. Revolving Payment
Set Test Mode to one of the following: Yes: No: To test the configuration in the sandbox and run test transactions. When ready to “go live” in production mode CyberSource.
m. Set Debug to “Yes” to create a log file of all exchanges between your store and CyberSource. Note: In accordance with PCI Data Security Standards, credit card information is not recorded in the log file. n. In the Sort Order field, type a numeric value to determine the order in which CyberSource appears when listed with other shipping methods during checkout. Enter 0 for the top of the sort order list, 1 for the second highest in the list, and so on.
3. When finished, click the Save Config button to save the settings.
Using a CyberSource Test Account
A CyberSource Test Account gives you the opportunity to become familiar with the entire payment process and run test transactions without making changes to your Magento Go store or to your CyberSource merchant account.
To set up your test account: 1. Follow the instructions on the CyberSource site to register for a test account. 2. Select Test Mode.
Magento Go User Guide
491
Appendix H: Payment Gateways
DIBS Payment Services
DIBS Payment Services
System > Configuration > Sales > Payment Methods DIBS Payment Services is a European Payment Service Provider that offers payment services in Denmark.
Step 1:
Open a Merchant Account
The first step is to establish a DIBS Payment Services merchant account. As you go through the process, take note of the following information, which you will need to complete the configuration in Magento Go: Merchant ID Login Password Key 1 Key 2
For more information about opening a DIBS Payment Services merchant account, visit their site at www.dibspayment.com.
Step 2:
Configure Your Store
1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. From the Configuration panel on the left, under Sales, select Payment Method. 3. Click to expand the DIBS Payment Services section. Then, do the following:
a. To activate this payment method, set Enabled to “Yes.” b. In the Title field, enter an appropriate title to identify this payment method during the checkout process of your Magento Go store. c. Enter the following information from your DIBS Payment Services merchant account: Merchant ID Login Password Key 1 Key 2
492
Magento Go User Guide
Appendix H: Payment Gateways
DIBS Payment Services
d. (Optional) Enter a Transaction ID prefix. If you do this, it is recommended that you assign the Transaction ID prefix once only and avoid changing it in the future. e. Set Test Mode to one of the following: Yes: No: To test the configuration in the sandbox and run test transactions. When ready to “go live” in production mode with DIBS Payment Services. f. Set Debug to “Yes” to create a log file of all exchanges between your store and DIBS Payment Services. Note: In accordance with PCI Data Security Standards, credit card information is not recorded in the log file. g. Set Payment Action to one of the following: Authorize Only: To authorize the transaction, but not transfer money to your account. Authorize and Capture: To authorize the transaction and also transfer money to your account. h. In the Credit Card Types list, select each credit card which can be used with this payment method. Accepted credit card types include American Express, Visa, MasterCard, JCB, Switch/Maestro, and Other. i. If you want to require customers to enter a card verification code (CVC), set Credit Card Verification to “Yes.” The Card Verification Value, also known as the Card Security Code, provides an additional level of security for online transactions. j. In the Accepted Currency list, select each currency that is accepted as payment in your store. k. In the Payment from Applicable Countries list, select the countries where this payment method can be used: All Allowed Countries: Customers from all countries in the default countries list can use this payment method. Specific Countries: Customers from only those countries selected in the Payment from Specific Countries list can use this payment method. Then in the Payment from Specific Countries list, select each country where the DIBS Payment Services is accepted.
Magento Go User Guide
493
Appendix H: Payment Gateways
DIBS Payment Services
Note: To change the countries in the Allowed Countries list, see System > Configuration > General > Countries Options. l. In the Sort Order field, type a numeric value to determine the order in which DIBS Payment Systems appears when listed with other shipping methods during checkout. Enter 0 for the top of the sort order list, 1 for the second highest in the list, and so on.
4. When finished, click the Save Config button.
494
Magento Go User Guide
Appendix H: Payment Gateways
eWAY Direct
eWAY Direct
System > Configuration > Sales > Payment Methods eWAY offers a multitude of payment processing services for merchants based in Australia. This article explains how to configure the eWAY Direct payment method for your Magento Go store.
Step 1:
Open a Merchant Account
The first step is to establish an eWAY merchant account. As you go through the process, take note of the following information which you will need to complete the configuration in Magento Go: Customer ID
Step 2:
Configure Your Store
1. From the Admin panel of Magento Go, select System > Configuration >
Payment Methods.
2. On the Payment Methods tab, click to expand the eWAY Direct section. Then,
do the following: a. Set Enabled to “Yes.” b. In the Title field, enter the name for this payment method that customers will see during checkout. By default, the title is set to: eWay Direct. c. In the Customer ID field, enter the eWAY Customer ID associated with your merchant account. d. In the Accepted Currency list, select each type of currency that is acceptable as payment in your store. e. Set Debug to “Yes” to create a log file of all exchanges between your store and eWAY Direct. Note: In accordance with PCI Data Security Standards, credit card information is not recorded in the log file. f. In the Credit Card Types list, select each credit card that can be used with this payment method. g. If you want to require that customers must enter a card verification code (CVC), set Credit Card Verification to “Yes.”
Magento Go User Guide
495
Appendix H: Payment Gateways
eWAY Direct
h. In the Payment from Applicable Countries list, select the countries where this payment method can be used: All Allowed Countries: Customers from all countries in the default countries list can use this payment method. Specific Countries: Customers from only those countries selected in the Payment from Specific Countries list can use this payment method. Then in the Payment from Specific Countries list, select each country where the eWAY Direct is accepted. Note: To change the countries in the Allowed Countries list, see System > Configuration > General > Countries Options. i. In the Sort Order field, type a numeric value to determine the order in which eWAY Direct appears when listed with other shipping methods during checkout. Enter 0 for the top of the sort order list, 1 for the second highest in the list, and so on.
3. When finished, click the Save Config button to save the settings.
Using an eWAY Test Account
An eWAY Test Account gives you the opportunity to become familiar with the entire payment process and run test transactions without making changes to your Magento Go store or to your eWAY merchant account.
To set up your test account: 1. Follow the testing instructions on the eWAY website to activate your test account. 2. Then, set Test Mode to “Yes” to begin testing.
496
Magento Go User Guide
Appendix H: Payment Gateways
First Data Global Gateway Web Service API
First Data Global Gateway Web Service API
System > Configuration > Sales > Payment Methods The First Data Global Gateway Web Service API enables full-featured, highly secure and reliable eCommerce Web sites and custom retail implementations, and includes tax and shipping calculators. After you integrate the Global Gateway API payment module into your Magento Go store, when your customers purchase items from your store all payment details are processed automatically. The Global Gateway Connect service passes information from your website to the First Data Global Gateway through an order form. The Global Gateway Connect service collects the customer’s secure transaction information (for example, credit card number and expiration date) and processes the secure transaction for you on their secure Web server. You can then review transaction activity by visiting the Global Gateway Virtual Terminal.
Step 1:
Open a Merchant Account
The first step is to establish a First Data Global Gateway Web Service merchant account. As you go through the process, take note of the following information, which you will need to complete the configuration in Magento Go: Digital certificate: A file that you download from the First Data software download center. A digital certificate is a key used on the Internet to identify a company or organization and secure transactions between two parties. When you sign up for the Global Gateway API service, you receive a digital certificate. The Global Gateway API software uses this certificate to send SSL-secured payment transactions to the gateway service. For more information about opening a First Data Global Gateway merchant account, visit their site at www.firstdata.com.
Step 2:
Configure Your Store
1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. From the Configuration panel on the left, under Sales, select Payment Methods. 3. Expand the First Data Global Gateway Web Service API section. Then, do the
following:
Magento Go User Guide
497
Appendix H: Payment Gateways
First Data Global Gateway Web Service API
a. To activate this payment method, set Enabled to “Yes.” b. In the Title field, enter an appropriate title to identify this payment method during checkout. c. Choose the Certificate file that you downloaded from the First Data software download center. d. (Optional) Enter a Transaction ID prefix. If you do this, it is recommended that you assign the transaction ID prefix once only and avoid changing it in the future. e. Set Test Mode to one of the following: Yes: No: f. To test the configuration in the sandbox and run test transactions. When ready to “go live” in production mode with First Data Global.
Set Debug to “Yes” to create a log file of all exchanges between your store and First Data Global. Note: In accordance with PCI Data Security Standards, credit card information is not recorded in the log file.
g. Set Payment Action to one of the following: Authorize Only: After an order is submitted, First Data Global Gateway Web Service authorizes the transaction. Your Magento Go store administrator must log in to the merchant account for First Data Global Gateway Web Service to capture the transaction. Authorize and Capture: A payment is authorized and captured on the First Data Global Gateway Web Service site, and the back-end of your Magento Go store generates an order and an invoice. h. In the Credit Card Types list, select each credit card that can be used with this payment method. Accepted credit card types include: American Express, Visa, MasterCard, and JCB. i. If you want to require customers to enter a card verification code (CVC), set Credit Card Verification to “Yes.” The Card Verification Value, also known as the Card Security Code, provides an additional level of security for online transactions.
498
Magento Go User Guide
Appendix H: Payment Gateways j.
First Data Global Gateway Web Service API
In the Payment from Applicable Countries list, select the countries where this payment method can be used: All Allowed Countries: Customers from all countries in the default countries list can use this payment method. Specific Countries: Customers from only those countries selected in the Payment from Specific Countries list can use this payment method. Then in the Payment from Specific Countries list, select each country where First Data Global is accepted. Note: To change the countries in the Allowed Countries list, see System > Configuration > General > Countries Options.
k. In the Sort Order field, type a numeric value to determine the order in which First Data Global appears when listed with other shipping methods during checkout. Enter 0 for the top of the sort order list, 1 for the second highest in the list, and so on.
4. When finished, click the Save Config button.
Magento Go User Guide
499
Appendix H: Payment Gateways
Ogone DirectLink
Ogone DirectLink
System > Configuration > Sales > Payment Methods Ogone is a leading European Payment Service Provider that offers payment services to more than thirty-five countries. Setting up the Ogone payment gateway for your Magento Go store is a three-step process. Step 1: Set up an Ogone merchant account. Step 2: Configure Ogone from the Admin panel of your Magento Go store. Step 3: Set up the Ogone Payment Bridge to provide access from the IP address of your store.
Step 1:
Open a Merchant Account
The first step is to establish an Ogone merchant account. As you go through the process, take note of the following information, which you will need to complete the configuration in Magento Go: PSPID USERID PSWD SHA-IN Pass phrase
For more information about opening an Ogone merchant account, visit www.ogone.com.
Step 2:
Configure Your Store
1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. From the Configuration panel on the left, under Sales, select Payment Method.
500
Magento Go User Guide
Appendix H: Payment Gateways
Ogone DirectLink
3. Click to expand the Ogone Direct Link section. Then, do the following:
a. Set Enabled to “Yes.” b. Set Test Mode to one of the following: Yes: No: To test the configuration and process test transactions. When ready to “go live” with Ogone Direct Link.
c. In the Title field, enter an appropriate title to identify this payment method in the checkout settings of the Payment Information page of your Magento Go online store. d. Complete the PSPID, USERID, PSWD, and SHA-IN Pass phrase fields with the account information provided by Ogone. e. In the Payment Action field, choose how you want payments to be authorized: Authorization: After an order is submitted, Ogone authorizes the transaction. Your Magento Go store administrator must log in to the merchant account on Ogone and capture the transaction. Direct Sale: A payment is authorized and captured on Ogone’s site, and the backend of your Magento Go store generates an order and an invoice. f. In the Credit Card Types field, select the credit card types to accept. Options include American Express, Visa, MasterCard, Discover, and Other (other card types approved by Ogone). g. In the Payment from Applicable Countries list, select the countries where this payment method can be used: All Allowed Countries: Customers from all countries in the default countries list can use this payment method. Specific Countries: Customers from only those countries selected in the Payment from Specific Countries list can use this payment method. Then in the Payment from Specific Countries list, select each country where the Ogone payment method is accepted. Note: To change the countries in the Allowed Countries list, see System > Configuration > General > Countries Options.
4. Click Save Config to save your settings.
Magento Go User Guide
501
Appendix H: Payment Gateways
Ogone DirectLink
Step 3:
Configure the Payment Bridge IP Address
1. Log in to your Ogone Merchant Account. 2. From the menu, select Configuration > Technical information. 3. Click the Data and origin verification tab. 4. In the section Checks for Ogone DirectLink and Ogone Batch (Automatic),
enter this IP address: 184.106.43.60 Note: Leave the ‘URL of the merchant page containing the payment from that will call the page’ field empty. It is not required by Magento Go.
5. Click Confirm and return to your Home page to save changes.
Managing Canceled Orders
A canceled order should be processed first through the Magento Go Admin panel, before it is processed through the Ogone merchant interface. If the order is canceled first through the Ogone interface, the status of the Magento Go order changes to “Processing” and cannot be changed.
To cancel an order: 1. From the Admin panel, go to Sales > Orders. 2. Find the order in the list, and in the first column, select the checkbox. 3. In the upper-right, set the Actions list to Cancel. Then, click the Submit button.
The Status of the order changes to Canceled.
4. Complete the cancellation process from your Ogone merchant account, according
to the instructions provided by Ogone.
502
Magento Go User Guide
Appendix H: Payment Gateways
PAYONE.de
PAYONE.de
System > Configuration > Sales > Payment Methods PAYONE is a leading payment service provider based in Germany. The company offers a “Shop Module” plug-in to their Finance Gate system that is designed specifically for the Magento platform.
Step 1:
Open a PAYONE Merchant Account
The first step is to establish a PAYONE merchant account. As you go through the process, take note of the following information which you will need to complete the configuration: Merchant ID Payment Portal ID Payment Portal Key Sub Account ID Gateway URL
For more information, visit: www.payone.de
Step 2:
Configure Your Store
1. From the Admin panel of Magento Go, select System > Configuration >
Payment Methods.
2. Click to expand the PAYONE.de section. Then, do the following:
a. Set Enabled to “Yes.” b. In the Title field, enter the name for this payment method that will appear to customers during the checkout process. By default, the Title is set to “Credit Card (PAYONE.de).” c. Enter the following credentials from your PAYONE merchant account: Merchant ID Payment Portal ID Payment Portal Key Sub Account ID Gateway URL
Magento Go User Guide
503
Appendix H: Payment Gateways d. Set Test Mode to one of the following: Yes: No: To test the configuration and process test transactions.
PAYONE.de
When ready to “go live” with the PAYONE payment method.
e. Set Debug to “Yes” to create a log file of all exchanges between your store and PAYONE. Note: In accordance with PCI Data Security Standards, no credit card information is saved in the log file. f. Set Payment Action to one of the following: Authorize Only: Authorizes the transaction but does not transfer money to your account. Authorize and Capture: Authorizes the transaction and also transfers money to your account. g. In the Credit Card Types list, select each credit card that can be used with this payment method. h. If you want to require customers to enter a card verification code (CVC), set Credit Card Verification to “Yes.” i. In the Accepted Currency list, select each currency that is accepted as payment in your store. j. In the Payment from Applicable Countries list, select each country where the PAYONE payment method is accepted. k. In the Sort Order field, type a numeric value to determine the order in which PAYONE appears when listed with other shipping methods during checkout. Enter 0 for the top of the sort order list, 1 for the second highest in the list, and so on.
3. When finished, click the Save Config button to save changes.
504
Magento Go User Guide
Appendix H: Payment Gateways
PSi Gate
PSi Gate
System > Configuration > Sales > Payment Methods PSiGate Merchant Services provides merchant accounts and eCommerce payment services for merchants in the United States and Canada.
Step 1:
Open a Merchant Account
The first step is to establish a PSiGate merchant account. As you go through the process, take note of the following information, which you will need to complete the configuration in Magento Go: Store ID Passphrase
For more information about opening a PSiGate merchant account, visit: www.psigate.com
Step 2:
Configure Your Store
1. From the Admin panel of Magento Go, select System > Configuration >
Payment Methods.
2. Click to expand the PSiGate section. Then, do the following:
a. Set Enabled to “Yes.” b. In the Title field, enter the name for this payment method that customers will see during checkout. By default, the title is set to PSiGate. c. Enter the following credentials from your PSiGate merchant account: Store ID Passphrase
d. Set Payment Action to one of the following: Authorize Only: The payment is authorized by PSiGate but not captured until you generate the invoice for the order. Sale: The payment is authorized by PSiGate and the transaction is immediately processed. e. Set Debug to “Yes” to create a log file of all exchanges between your store and PSiGate.
Magento Go User Guide
505
Appendix H: Payment Gateways
PSi Gate
Note: In accordance with Payment Card Industry Data Security Standards (PCI DSS), credit card information is not saved in the log file. f. Set Test Mode to one of the following: Yes: No: To test the configuration and process test transactions. To “go live” with the PSiGate payment method.
g. In the Credit Card Types list, select each credit card which can be used with this payment method. h. If you want to require customers to enter a card verification code (CVC), set Credit Card Verification to “Yes.” i. Type in the Minimum Order Total and Maximum Order Total to specify the order amount range that qualifies to use this payment method. j. In the Sort Order field, type a numeric value to determine the order in which PSiGate appears when listed with other shipping methods during checkout. Enter 0 for the top of the sort order list, 1 for the second highest in the list, and so on.
3. When finished, click the Save Config button to save the settings.
506
Magento Go User Guide
Appendix H: Payment Gateways
Sage Pay Direct
Sage Pay Direct
System > Configuration > Sales > Payment Methods Sage Pay is the UK’s largest independent payment service provider, processing millions of secure payments every month for over 33,000 businesses. Note: Sage Pay has a security feature that requires entering an IP address of the originating payment request. Use the following IP address to enable your Magento Go store’s transactions when using Sage pay: 184.106.43.60 To implement the Sage Pay Direct payment gateway, follow these general steps: Step 1: Step 2: Step 3: Open a Sage Pay Direct merchant account. Configure Sage Pay in Magento Go (Optional) Use a Sage Pay Simulator Account to test your setup.
Step 1:
Open a Merchant Account
The first step is to open a Sage Pay Direct merchant account. Sage Pay offers support and answers to common questions on their Support & FAQs page.
Step 2:
Configure Your Store
1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. In the Configuration panel on the left, under Sales, select Payment Methods. 3. Click to expand the Sage Pay Direct section. Then, do the following:
a. Set Enabled to “Yes.” b. In the Vendor Name field, type the name that is associated with your Sage Pay merchant account. c. Set Payment Action to one of the following: Authorize Only: After an order is submitted, Sage Pay authorizes the transaction. Your Magento Go store administrator must log in to the merchant account on Sage Pay to capture the transaction. Authorize and Capture: A payment is authorized and captured on the Sage Pay site, and the back-end of your Magento Go store generates an order and an invoice.
Magento Go User Guide
507
Appendix H: Payment Gateways
Sage Pay Direct
d. In the Title field, enter the name for this payment method that customers see during checkout. e. Set Operation Mode to one of the following: Simulator: To enter test transactions using a simulated Sage Pay account. Test: To enter test transactions using your Sage Pay merchant account, but without processing the transactions. Live: To “go live” with your Sage Pay merchant account. This is the final step after you complete all testing and are ready to process transactions. f. (Optional) Enter a Transaction ID prefix. If you do this, it is recommended that you assign the Transaction ID prefix once only and avoid changing it in the future. g. Set Debug to “Yes” to create a log file of all exchanges between your store and Sage Pay Direct. Note: In accordance with PCI Data Security Standards, credit card information is not recorded in the log file. h. In the Credit Card Types list, select each credit card that can be used with this payment method. i. If you want to require that customers enter a card verification code (CVC), set Credit Card Verification to “Yes.” The Card Verification Value, also known as the Card Security Code, provides an additional level of security for online transactions. j. If you want to enable an additional layer of fraud protection for your transactions, set 3D Secure Card Verification to “Yes.”
508
Magento Go User Guide
Appendix H: Payment Gateways
Sage Pay Direct
k. In the Payment from Applicable Countries list, select the countries where this payment method can be used: All Allowed Countries: Customers from all countries in the default countries list can use this payment method. Specific Countries: Customers from only those countries selected in the Payment from Specific Countries list can use this payment method. Then in the Payment from Specific Countries list, select each country where Sage Pay Direct is accepted. Note: To change the countries in the Allowed Countries list, see System > Configuration > General > Countries Options. l. In the Sort Order field, type a numeric value to determine the order in which Sage Pay Direct appears when listed with other shipping methods during checkout. Enter 0 for the top of the sort order list, 1 for the second highest in the list, and so on.
4. When finished, click the Save Config button.
Magento Go User Guide
509
Appendix I:
Product System Attributes
The following product system attributes are required for the operation of your Magento Go store, and cannot be deleted.
General Attributes
Attribute Code name Description The name of the product. This name is visible on your product description page as well as anywhere this product is listed. It is used by customers to identify the product. Description of the product. This is an important field, especially as a selling tool, because it is the main way customers learn about the product. A shorter description of the product that customers will immediately see when viewing the product description page. The Stock-Keeping Unit. This is the unique product identification number that you would use to track this product and its quantity in your inventory system. The product weight in ounces. This field specifies the “from” date that the product is considered new, and would be featured in your “new products” listings. This field specifies the “to” date that the product is considered new, and would be featured in your “new products” listings. If this field is set to ‘enabled’, then the product will be available for purchase. If this field is set to ‘disabled’ it will not be visible in the catalog. The URL key (or the product identifying portion) of the product’s web address. For example, if the URL key is ‘my-sample-product’, then the address might be Value Text Required Yes
description
String
Yes
short_description
Text
Yes
sku
Alphanumeric (A-Z,0-9)
Yes
weight news_from_date
Numeric Date and Time
Yes No
news_to_date
Date and Time
No
status
Binary (1, 0)
Yes
url_key
Text
No
510
Magento Go User Guide
Appendix I: Product System Attributes
Attribute Code
Description ‘example.gostorego.com/category/my-sampleproduct.html’
Value
Required
visibility
Specify whether this product is visible from the catalog, search, both, or neither. Values include: 0 (Not Visible Individually) 1 (Catalog) 2 (Search) 3 (Catalog, Search)
Numeric
Yes
gift_message_available This field specifies if a message can be included with this product purchase. Can be set to yes, no, or use config. Values include: Yes / No / Use Config is_imported Determines if this product can be included in product RSS feeds. Yes, No No Text No
Price Attributes
Attribute Code price special_price Description The price of the product. The special sale price for the product during the special sale period. This field specifies the “from” date that the product will be on sale for the special sale price. This field specifies the “to’ date that the product will be on sale for the special sale price. Specify the tax class ID, which will determine which tax rules to apply to the product. The value is based on the id # next to each product tax class. enable_googlecheckout Determines if the product can be purchased using Google Checkout. This field can be set to either Yes or No. Yes, No No Value Numeric Numeric Required Yes No
special_from_date
Date and Time
No
special_to_date
Date and Time
No
tax_class_id
Integer
Yes
Magento Go User Guide
511
Appendix I: Product System Attributes
Meta Information Attributes
Attribute Code meta_title Description The meta title of the product. This meta title is visible only to search engines. The meta keywords of the product. Keywords are visible only to search engines. The meta description of the product is visible only to search engines. Value Text Required No
meta_keyword
Text
No
meta_description
Text
No
Image Attributes
Attribute Code image Description The URL (address) of the base image, or the main image of the product that is displayed when customer clicks the image in the description page. The URL (address) of the thumbnail image, or the product image shown in product listings. The URL (address) of the small image, or the image that will be displayed in the product description page. Value URL Required No
thumbnail
URL
No
small_image
URL
No
Design Attributes
Attribute Code custom_design Description If you want to use a custom design for the product description page, specify it in this field. The date to begin using the custom design for the product description page. The date to stop using the custom design for the product description page. Value Yes, No 55 No
custom_design_from
Date and Time
No
custom_design_to
Date and Time
No
custom_layout_update Use custom XML to modify the product description page layout. XML No
512
Magento Go User Guide
Appendix I: Product System Attributes
Attribute Code page_layout
Description Specify the layout of the product description page using a predefined layout. Values include: No layout updates Empty 1 column 2 columns with left bar 2 columns with right bar 3 columns
Value Text
55 No
options_container
If this product has options, this field specifies whether these options will be displayed in the product information column or in the block below the price. Values include: Product Info Column / Block After Info Column
Text
No
Card-Specific Attributes
Attribute Code allow_open_amount Description Specify whether the dollar value of the gift card can be specified by the customer. The minimum gift card amount if the gift card allows open amounts. The maximum gift card amount if the gift card allows open amounts. Value Text Required Yes
open_amount_min
Numeric
No
open_amount_max
Numeric
No
Pre-loaded Attributes
Attribute Code color Description The color of the product. This is especially useful for identification and description when you have multiple colors of the same product. The cost of the product. (For internal purposes only.) The name of the manufacturer of the product. This field can be used by customers to narrow search results to specific manufacturers. Value Text Required No
cost
Numeric
No
manufacturer
Text
No
Magento Go User Guide
513
Appendix J:
Customer System Attributes
Magento Go includes the most common customer attributes that most merchants need to maintain, such as the customer name, email, date of birth, and address— including street, city, ZIP code, and country code. These customer system attributes are required by Magento Go, and cannot be deleted.
Editing Customer Attributes
Some customer attributes can be edited, as follows:
To edit customer attributes: 1. From the Admin panel, select one of the following:
Customers > Attributes > Manage Customer Attribute Manage Customer Address Attributes
2. Select the customer attribute to be edited and set the properties, as needed, using
the list below for reference.
3. Click the Save Attribute button to save your changes.
Property Default Value Description If your product requires consistent or repetitive default values, entering a value here will prepopulate this field. You can however edit the field in product editor if you wish. This field will not be active for Multiple Select or Dropdown list. If you have a Dropdown or Multiple Select Input Type, you will be able to select the Default Value in the Manage Label / Options tab. Specifies whether or not this attribute needs to be authenticated before it is accepted. (For example, Email address.) In this field you can specify a minimum and maximum amount of characters for this field. If this attribute requires an answer from customers select Yes.
Input Validation
Minimum/Maximum Length Values Required
514
Magento Go User Guide
Appendix J: Customer System Attributes
Input/Output Filter
Property Strip HTML Tags Description Removes any HTML coding entered into the field by customers or visitors to your site. Renders any HTML coding entered into the field inoperable.
Escape HTML Entities
Frontend Properties
Show on Frontend: Select “Yes” to show this attribute field in your store.
General Customer Attributes
This section lists all customer attributes used by your Magento Go store.
Attribute Code website_id
Description The website to which the customer is associated. The default options are either Admin or Main Website. Customers who are also associated with Admin cannot log in and make purchases from your store. The customer group to associate this customer with. The default customer groups in Magento Go are General and Retailer, but these can be customized. Precedes the customer’s first name and is part of their full name. Examples: Mr., Mrs., Miss, Ms., Rev. The customer’s first, or given, name. The customer’s middle name or initial. The customer’s last, or family, name. The name suffix that follows the customer’s full name, often providing additional information about the person. Examples: Ph.D., J.D., Pharm.D., K.B.E. Customer’s email address.
Data Type string
Required Yes
group_id
string
Yes
prefix
string
No
firstname middlename lastname suffix
string string string string
Yes Yes Yes No
string
Yes
Magento Go User Guide
515
Appendix J: Customer System Attributes
dob taxvat gender
Date of birth, formatted as MM/DD/YY Tax or VAT ID number of customer. Customer gender.
mm/dd/yy alphanumeric male, female
No No No
Customer Address Attributes
Attribute Code prefix Description Precedes the customer’s first name and is part of their full name. Examples: Mr., Mrs., Miss, Ms., Rev. The customer’s first, or given, name. The customer’s middle name or initial. The customer’s last, or family, name. The name suffix that follows the customer’s full name, often providing additional information about the person. Examples: Ph.D., J.D., Pharm.D., K.B.E. Company or business name if the address belongs to a business. The street address usually includes a home or business building number, street name, and suite or apartment number. The city or town for the address. The country where this address is located. The state or province where the address is located. The postal or ZIP code associated with the address. The telephone number at the address. The fax number at the address. number number Data Type string Required No
firstname middlename lastname suffix
string string string string
Yes No Yes No
company
string
No
street
string
Yes
city country_id region postcode telephone fax
string string string
Yes Yes No Yes Yes No
516
Magento Go User Guide
Appendix K:
Translating Your Store
Magento Go gives you the ability to create up to three separate views of your store. Each view can be used to target a specific language or demographic. Once you have created multiple store views, you can translate them into other languages. When you translate a website into a different language, you can use the Theme Text Editor to translate all of the text in the theme for that website, even if the theme wasn’t originally designed in that language.
Changing the Locale
Text that appears to be “hard-coded” on the pages of your store can be translated into a different language, according to store view. This text includes navigational titles and links such as “My Cart” and “My Account.” You can do a global translation of all the text in the interface by changing the locale of the view. Changing the “locale” causes a different translation table to be referenced to generate the text that is displayed throughout the site. After changing the locale, you can use the Theme Text Editor to fine-tune the translation by making manual “spot changes” to any text in the interface. To learn more, see the Magento Go Design Guide.
To change the locale of a view: 1. From the Admin panel, select System > Configuration. 2. In the upper-left corner, set the Current Configuration Scope to the store view
that needs to be translated.
3. On the General configuration page, click to expand the Locale Options section.
Magento Go User Guide
517
Appendix K: Translating Your Store
Locale Options
1. Set Locale to the new language for the store view. 2. Click Save to save your changes.
Catalog
Content such as Categories and Products are created by you, so they cannot be translated using the system configuration method. However, Magento Go provides a process to make the translation as easy as possible.
To translate categories: 1. In the Admin panel, select Catalog > Manage Categories. 2. In the Choose Store View list in the right column, select a language. 3. Select a category or sub-category from the category tree in the left column. 4. Deselect the Use Default Value boxes of the fields, such as Name,
Description, and Page title, for all values you want to translate.
5. Enter the translated content into the necessary fields; for example:
Furniture:Muebles
6. When you finish translating the category, click the Save Category button to
save your changes.
518
Magento Go User Guide
Appendix K: Translating Your Store
Products
To translate your products: 1. From the Admin panel, select Catalog > Manage Products. 2. Click to open the product record that you want to translate. 3. In the Choose Store View list in the right column, select a language. 4. Deselect the Use Default Value boxes of the fields, such as Name, Description,
and Page title, for all values you want to translate.
5. Enter the translated content into the necessary fields. Be sure to convert the Meta
Information and Descriptions if necessary.
6. Click the Save button to save your changes.
CMS Content
CMS content cannot be translated in the same way that catalog content can be translated. Duplicate pages, blocks, banners, and polls must be created for each language.
To translate CMS Pages: 1. From the Admin panel, select CMS > Pages > Manage Content. 2. Click the Add New Page button to create your new, duplicate page. 3. In the Page Information section, select your language in the Store View field, to
assign this page to the store view.
4. Complete the rest of your duplicated page and click the Save Page button to save
your changes.
Magento Go User Guide
519
Appendix K: Translating Your Store
Static Blocks
To translate a Static Block: 1. From the Admin panel, select CMS > Static Block. 2. Click the Add New Block button to begin creating your translated Static Block. 3. In the Page Information section, select your language in the Store View field, to
assign this Block to the store view.
4. Complete the content and click the Save Page button to save your changes
Banners
To translate a banner: 1. From the Admin panel, select CMS > Banners. 2. Click the Add New Banner button to create your banner to translate. 3. From the Banner Properties page, select the Content tab in the left column. 4. In the Store View Specific Content box deselect the Use Default box next to the
language into which the banner will be translated.
5. In the drop-down box, use the insert tools to add your banner.
Polls
To translate polls: 1. From the Admin panel, select CMS > Polls. 2. Click the Add New Poll button to begin translating your poll. 3. In the Poll Information section, select your language in the Visible In field, to
assign this poll to the store view.
4. Complete the rest of your poll and click the Save Page button to save your
changes.
520
Magento Go User Guide
Index
# of Items v. Destination, 329 &Copy;, 113 .html suffix, 197 .ico, 87 Banner, 115 Gift Card, 16 New Page, 96 New Tax Rate, 375 New Template, 138 Node, 106 Subcategory, 180 Tags, 15, 131 Tier, 246 Tracking Number, 315 Add to Cart, from Wishlist, 136 Compare, 12, 121 Wishlist, 13, 125, 136 additional information, attribute, 275 Add-Ons, 41 address bar, browser, 87 Adjustment Fee, 323 Adjustment Refund, 323 Admin Login, 2, 19, 37 password, 27 panel, 37, 440 permissions, 54 search tools, 172 URL, 2 Admin UI, Advanced Configuration, 45 Administrator permissions, 54 Advanced Search, 13, 150, 153, 156, 167 speed, 153 Allow Countries Store Information, 46 Allow Dynamic Media URLs, 258 Gift Message, 244 HTML tags on Frontend, attribute, 289 Open Amount, gift card, 213 Allowed Currencies, 48
1 Column, 97, 114 2 Columns with Left Bar, 78, 97, 114 2 Column with Right Bar, 79, 80, 97, 114 3 Columns, 79, 97, 114 301 Redirect, 444 302 Redirect, 429, 444 3D Secure Credit Card Validation, 353 Configure, 469 404 Page Not Found page, 91 503 Service Unavailable, 91, 420, 421
A
“A” record, 30 Abandoned Carts Report, 392 About Us page, 90, 105 above the fold, 12, 440 accept orders, 46 accessibility, 85 account Admin locked, 54 customer register, 64 Magento, 3, 25 account dashboard, 25 action controls, 172, 174 action, price rule, 120 Actions list, 174 Actions, catalog price rule, 298 Actions, shopping cart price rule, 302 Active Domain, 31 Active From / To custom theme, product, 260 Add
Magento Go User Guide
521
Index
Alt tag, 103 Alt text, 85, 440 anchor category, 182, 184, 186 anchor text, 440 Apache, 32 API, 440 Append Complex Data, 408 Apply To attribute, 287 As Low as, Price View, 236 Associate to Website, customer account, 71 associated products configurable product, 224 grouped product, 221 attribute, 153, 156, 167, 223, 275, 440 create, 282 optimize, 415, 417 product, 22 quick reference, 278 value, 184 Attribute Code, 282, 285 Attribute Frontend Properties, 167 attribute group create, 228, 292 attribute properties, 185, 224, 282, 285 for layered navigation, 186 configurable product, 224 attribute set, 223, 275 configurable product, 227, 229 create, 290 groups, 292 authorization, 440 Authorize.Net, 354 configure, 482 average inventory cost, 440 Banner Rotator, 119 Base Image, 250 placeholder, 251 Batch processing, 441 Bestsellers Dashboard, 43 Report, 393 billing information, checkout, 17 Block after Info Column, 260 block, content, 89 blog, 5 Bounce rate, 441 Braintree, 354 configure, 485 brand, 441 advocates, 125 branding, 30, 89 breadcrumb, 441 breadcrumb trail, 177, 178 configure, 178 brick and mortar, 441 broken link, 441 Bundle product 203 create, 235 Items, 237
C
canonical URL, 441 capture, 441 Card Gate Plus, 355 configure, 487 cardholder, 441 data, protection of 480 Card-Specific Attributes, 513 carriers, 23 Cash on Delivery configure, 344 Cash on Delivery Payment, 341 catalog catalog structure, 179, 199 catalog, category structure, 180 translating, 518 catalog images resize, 254 Catalog Input Type for Store Owner, 224, 282, 286 Catalog menu, 38 Catalog New Product List, 119 catalog price rules 120, 293, 294 conditions, 296 create, 294
B
B2B, 440 B2C, 440 back office, 37, 172 backorders, 319, 265 backup, content, 96 Balance, gift card, 216 Bank Transfer, 341 Bank Transfer Payment configure, 342 banner, 79. 96, 114, 440 create, 115 type, 114, 116 translating, 520
522
Magento Go User Guide
Index
catalog search, 149 use of dynamic media URLs, 258 Catalog Search Settings, 152 categories, 441 categories, create, 180 Categories, Product Information, 267 category, 156 assign product to, 208 configuration, 196 delete, 183 depth, 196 image, 177 move, 183 navigation, 156, 177 page, 11 products, 194, 267 structure, 267 URL, 177, 197 URL Suffix, 198 category design date range, 192 Category Display Settings, 182 Category View Optimization, 195 catelog price rule actions. CCAvenue, 356 Configure, 474 Change Theme, 82 Chapter/Section, 108 Character Format, editor buttons, 447 Check / Money Order 341 configure, 346 Checkbox, input type, 238 checkout 9, 17 configure, 222 cross-sell, 270 shipping methods, 326 terms and conditions, 312 Checkout Options, 64 Checkout process, 441 PayPal Access, 68 checkout, faster, 63 Choose Plan, 28 Choose Store View, 60 CMS, 89, 442 Block, category, 190 content, translating, 519 Home page, 100 menu, 40 page, 105 Page Hierarchy, 110 pages, 106 Static Block create, 111 Code Pool, gift card, 215 Coding Tools, editor buttons, 452 Color, 244 editor buttons, 448 column header, sort by, 173 column layout, 12, 80 change, 121, 123 Combined gift card, 212, 214 Comma Separated Value file, 407 community, 125 Comodo, security certificate, 32 Comparable on Front-end, attribute, 288 Compare Products, 121 Enable Feature, 123 Report, 122 show block, 121 Complex products, 201 Conditions and Actions, 293 Conditions, catalog price rule, 120, 296 shopping cart price rule, 301 Configurable product 203 create, 223 import, 409, 410 inventory settings, 233 Configuration Super Product Attributes, 233 Web, 113 configuration utilities, 41 Contact Information, 20, 26 Contact Us 52 configure, 53 content, 11, 89 area, 78 area, banner in, 116 create new page, 96 editing, 92 user-generated, 126 content blocks, create, 111 Content Heading, 94, 98 Content Management, 110 content management system, 89 content page breadcrumb trail, 178 manage, 105 organize, 105 parent/child, 105 conversion, 8
Magento Go User Guide
523
Index
conversion rate, 441 Copy from Configurable, 229, 231 copyright notice, 113 country, 46 country codes, 467 coupon code 16 apply, 321 Coupons Report, 391 Create an Account PayPal Access, 67 Create Empty, 229, 231 Create Permanent Redirect for old URL, 428 Create Product Settings, 201, 209 credit cards, 22 credit memo, 323, 442 create, 323 Cross-sell, 16, 270 CSS, 39, 101, 255, 442 CSS Editor, 21, 80, 84 CSS stylesheet, 94 CSV Files 145, 170, 407, 412, 413, 417, 442 Customer, 417 product, 415 currencies, 20 currency configure, 48 rates and symbols, 49 Current Configuration Scope, 61, 331 Current Theme, 83 Custom Design, 192 category, 192 Custom Email, 51 Custom Layout Update category, 193 product, 260 Custom Role, create, 56 Custom Theme, 193 category, 192 product, 259, 260 Custom Variable, 117, 139 Custom Variants and Options, 223, 271 with Simple product, 208 Customer Account Dashboard, 127 PayPal Access, 68 Wishlist, 136 Customer Account, 39, 63 create, 71 information, 63 customer activity, 38 Customer Address, 73 Customer Address Attributes, 516 customer engagement, 125 Customer Group 70 add new, 70 Tax Class, 380 Customer Reports, 396 Customers by Number of Orders, 396 Customers by Orders Total, 396 New Accounts, 396 Customer Reviews, 398 Customer Service, 17 Customer Service page, 90 Customer System Attributes, 514 Customer Tax Classes, 379 Add New, 379 Customers by Number of Orders, 397 Customers by Orders Total, 396 Customers Tags Report, 400 CVM, 442 CyberSource (SOAP Toolkit), 354 configure, 489 Test Account, 491
D
Dashboard, 19, 38, 169 configuration, 45 settings, 44 Search Terms, 171 Using, 42 Data Entry Properties, attribute, 278 Date, input type, 276 Decimal Number validation check, 287 Default attribute set, 290 Country, 46 Pages, 178 Home page, 100 robots, 424 store view, 62 Tax Destination Calculation, 371 Template, email, 138 Value, attribute, 286 Delete Category, 183 demo notice, 420 Description category, 188 Meta Data, 99 product, 256 Product Information, 256 Design, 21 Product Information, 259
524
Magento Go User Guide
Index
Design menu, 39 Design Settings Editor, 21, 84 DHL, 339 Configure, 463 DIBS Payment Services, 355 configure, 492 discount codes, 16 Display Demo Store Notice, 420 Display in Suggested Terms, 163 Display Mode category, 182, 190 Display Product Count layered navigation, 187 Display product options in, 260 Display Product Prices in Catalog, 372 Display Settings category, 182, 190 Display Shipping Prices, 372 DNS, 31, 432 documentation, 5 domain 442 configure, 31 name, 30 dot com, 30 double opt-in, 442 newsletter, 143 drop-down list, 223 Dropdown, input type, 185, 277, 238 Dynamic content, 119, 442 information, 89 Price, Bundle, 236 SKU, Bundle, 236 Weight, Bundle, 236 Dynamic Media URL, 103 product, 258 dynamic URL, 428 add new, 138 configure, 141 gift card notification, 214 Email validation check, 287 Emails Shipment, 318 embed video, 104 Enable Chapter/Section, 108 Cookies page, 91 Pagination, content page, 107 WYSIWYG, attribute, 289 encrypted channel, 17 Entity Attributes, 413 Entity Type, 412 Estimate Shipping and Tax, 16, 329 Flat Rate, 334 eWAY Direct, 356 configure. Test Account, 496 Excel, 170 Exclude, image, 250 Expiration Date, gift card, 216 Export 407, 413, 415 CSV, Table Rates, 331 newsletter subscribers, 145 search term report, 170 Express Checkout, PayPal, 357 extensions 34-36 eye-tracking, 10
F
FAQ, 442 favicon, 87, 442 FedEx, 339 Configure, 460 file conversion, 87 File/URL, 104 Filterable in layered navitatation, 186 filterable attributes, 185 filtered list, 184 filtered navigation, 13 First Data Global Gateway Web Service API 354 configure, 497 First Page After Login, 65 five stars, review, 126 Fixed Price, Bundle, 236 Price Type, 272
E
Edit Attribute Set, 290, 291 Editing Tools, editor buttons, 451 Editor, 101 toolbar, 101, 447 Email a Friend, 15, 125, 135 limits per hour, 135 email address store, 51 Email copy of invoice, 315 Email Options, 53 email template 137
Magento Go User Guide
525
Index
Product Tax, input type, 277 SKU, Bundle, 236 Weight, Bundle, 236 Fixed Product Taxes, 373, 374 Display Price Options, 374 Flat Rate, 328, 334 configure, 334 FOB, 442 footer, 16, 96, 150, 153, 154, 199, 430 links, 12, 112 Footer, banner in, 116 form search, 150 forum, community 4 Frame Skip, 108 Free Shipping, 328, 337 configure, 337 Frontend App, 96, 119 Frontend Properties, attribute, 275, 288 Frontend, Catalog Configuration, 157 fulfilling an order, 314, 443 Fullscreen button, editor 93 global marketplace, 20 Global Search, 172, 173 Glossary, 440 Go Anywhere Plan layered navigation, 185 Go Beyond Plan layered navigation, 185 GoDaddy, 31 security certificate, 32 Going Places Plan layered navigation, 185 Google Analytics, 169, 171, 436 API, 171 Checkout, 476247 configure, 436 create account, 436 Optimizer Scripts, 437 ranking, 126 Google Sitemap, 199, 431 Categories Options, 434 configure, 434 frequency, 431 Frequency, 434 generate, 431 Generation Settings, 435 Priority, 434 submit, 432 Google Webmaster Tools, 432 Google Website Optimizer, 195, 273, 437 configure, 437 grid format, search results, 156 Gross margin, 443 Grouped product, 203, 220 create, 220 guest checkout, 63, 64 subscription, newsletter, 143
G
Gateway, 443 General Attributes, 510 Contact, 51 Customer Attributes, 515 customer group, 70 Information, Category, 188 Product Information, 242 Generation Settings, Google Sitemap, 435 Get a Quote, 326 Get Going Plan layered navigation, 185 Gift Card 323 Accounts, 215 Balance, 216 Create, 212 Email Settings, 218 expiration date, 216 Gift Message, 214 History, 217 Information, 214 message length, 219 Pool, 215 Prices, 213 product, 202 Type, 214
H
header, 16, 78, 150, 178 banner in, 116 logo, 84 heading levels, content, 94 height, image, 255 hidden category, 189 Hierarchy Menu, 110 default layout, 110 hierarchy tree, page, 106 Hits, search term, 170 Home page, 8, 90, 443
526
Magento Go User Guide
Index
changing default page, 100 house list, 63 HTML, 78, 92, 94, 98, 101, 257, 443 HTML Head, 87, 430 Render Metadata, 108 HTML link, content, 103 https, 17, 32 Inventory, 207 settings, configurable product, 233 Inventory, Product Information, 261 invoice, 311, 443 Invoiced Report, 390 Invoicing, 314 IP address, 30 poll voting from, 134 Is Active category, 189 Is Anchor, 182, 184, 186, 190
I
image Alt text, 85 Attributes, 512 category, 188 size, product, 254 thumbnail, 14 images import, product, 411 Product Information, 249 Images and Media, editor buttons, 449 Import 407 Behavior, 408 Configurable product, 410 currency rates, 49 duplicate products, 415 product images, 411 Settings, 408 Importing Configurable Products, 409 Importing Data, 408 In feed, 244 In Stock, 210 Include in Advanced Search, 153 Navigation Menu, 189 Information Security Policy, 480 input controls, 22 attribute, 275 Input Type attribute, 276 Bundle Items, 238 Custom Variants and Options, 271 layered navigation, 185 Input Validation for Store Owner, 287 Insert Frontend Apps, 119 Insert Image, 102 content page, 99, 102 Insert Media, 104 Insert Variable, email, 140 Integer Number validation check, 287 internal links, in content, 101
J
JavaScript, 39, 443
K
keyword, 11, 442 keywords, 131 Meta Data, 99 Knowledge Base, 4 Kount Fraud Detection, 353 Configure, 472
L
Label and Values, attribute, 283 Labels and Options, attribute, 281 landing page, 126, 179, 199, 443 category, 182 search results, 161 language, 12, 46 changing, 61 configure, 47 in email, 138 Language Preference, 20 languages, 20, 59 launch store, 23 layered navigation, 11, 156, 177, 184, 190 attribute, 184, 275 configure, 187 filters, 185 Price Navigation Step, 187 Layers, editor buttons, 450 layout, 78 Left Column, banner in, 116 Letters validation check, 287 Lifetime, gift card, 214 link create, 101
Magento Go User Guide
527
Index
juice, 428, 443 online image, 102 URL, 101 Links and Anchors, editor buttons, 449 List Controls, 172, 173 Filters, 172, 173, 174 format, search results, 156 Mode, 158 Style, content menu, 109 Lists, editor buttons, 449 Locale, 443 changing, 517 Options, 47 locked account, 54 log in, 2, 443 Magento account, 25, 27 login credentials, 3, 19, 54 Login Options customer, 65 Login or Create an Account PayPal Access, 67 logo, 80 email, 86 files, 84 image size, 84 Image Alt, 85 page layout, 80 Low Stock Report, 264, 393, 395 Manufacturer, 244 markdown, 443 marketplace Magento Connect, 41 markup, 443 Maximal Depth, top navigation, 196 Maximum Qty Allowed in Shopping Cart, 261 Media button, 104 media file, 104 Media Storage, 98, 102, 116, 258 Menu Detalization, 109 Menu Layout, content, 109 Merchant Account, 443 merchant credibility, 66 Meta Data, 99, 110 Meta Description category, 181, 189 product, 248 Meta Information Attributes, 512 Product Information, 248 Meta Keywords category, 188 product, 248 Meta Tags, 444 Meta Title product, 248 Mini Shopping Cart, 15 Minimum Qty Allowed in Shopping Cart, 261 Miscellaneous HTML, 430 misspelled words, search term, 13, 161 moderate reviews, 128 Modern Theme, 80 Most Viewed Products, Dashboard, 43 Report, 393, 394 multiple copies, content, 96 multiple invoices, 314 Multiple Select, input type, 185, 238, 277 multiple stores products in, 266 My Customizations, 82 Go Extensions, 35 Orders, 15 Products and Services, 32, 35
M
Magento account, 25 Connect, 34 password, 27 Trusted Extensions badge, 35 Magento Go plan anchor categories, 185 Maintenance Mode, 91, 419, 420 Manage Attribute Sets, 290 Attributes, 168, 186, 275 Categories, 123, 180 Content, 92 Label / Options, 225, 281 Page Hierarchy, 105 Ratings, 129 Stock, 210, 261, 262 Stores, 59, 62 Tax Zones & Rates, 375
N
Name category, 188
528
Magento Go User Guide
Index
product, 242 navigation, 11, 131, 444, 177 column layout, 78 filtered, 13 Menu, 107, 108 nested pages, 108 New Accounts Report, 396 newsletter configuration, 142 confirmation, 143 menu, 40 subscribe, 12 Newsletters, 142 Next/Previous content page, 108 Nickname, of reviewer, 126 Node node, add, 105 Properties, 107 Not Logged In, customer group, 70 Number of Uses, Search Term, 163, 166 Numbers (0-9) validation check, 287 Orders, Invoices, Credit Memos Display Settings, 372 out of stock threshold, 263
P
packing slip, 444 padlock symbol, 17 Page Controls Search Results list, 156, 157 Page Hierarchy, 96, 105 configuration, 110 Page Information, 93 Add New Page, 97 page layout, 78, 97 banners, 114 category, 123, 193 product, 259, 260 Page Title category, 188 pages, content, 89 pagination, 105, 108 links, search results, 157 Paragraph Format, editor buttons, 448 Parent Category, 192 Parent Product Thumbnail, 222, 232 parent/child, content pages, 105 partial refunds, 323 password 25, 66 change, 27 Password Management customer account, 72 path to purchase, 8 Paybox Direct, 355 Configure, 478 Payflow Pro Gateway, PayPal, 359 Payment Bridge Styling, 353 payment gateway, 353, 444, 481 payment information, checkout, 17 Payment Methods, 341 payment received, 310 Payment Services, 353, 468, 473 Payments, 22 Payone.de, 355 configure, 503 PayPal, 22, 354, 357 account, 66 Getting Started, 360 Sandbox Account, 361-363 PayPal Access, 65, 66 PayPal Express Checkout Setting Up, 365
O
Ogone DirectLink, 355 configure, 500 one-to-many relationships, 203 Open Amount Value, gift card, 213 Open Link, Same Window, 113 optimize attributes import / export, 417 opt-in, 444 order cancel, 318 “Complete”, 311 Create new, 317 edit, 318 invoiced, 311 "On Hold", 319 “Processing", 311 process, 310 review, 9, 17 shipped, 311 submitted, 310 Orders Creating, 317 Dashboard, 43 New, 317 Report, 390 Sales, 314
Magento Go User Guide
529
Index
PayPal Settlement Report, 391 PCI, 444 PCI Compliance, 22, 32 Guidelines, 480 Pending Review Status, 127 Percentage Price Type, 272 Permissions, 54 Physical gift card, 212, 214 place order, 9, 309 placeholders, product image, 250 plan, 21, 32, 59 upgrade, 28 PO, 444 Poll Answers, 133 configure, 134 Manager, 133 Question, 133 translating, 520 Polls, 125, 132 multiple, 132 Popular Search Terms, 150, 154 Report, 402 Tags, 12 Position, attribute, 289 Pre-loaded Attributes, 513 Presentation Properties, attribute, 280 Press Releases page, 105 Preview content page, 94 Price attributes, 511 input type, 185, 277 Range, Price View, 236 Rule Banners, 120, 305 Rules, 39, 275, 293 Step, layered navigation, category, 191 Type, Custom Variants and Options, 272 View, Bundle, 236, 239 Price v. Destination, 329 Prices, Product Information, 245 Privacy Policy, 16, 96, 112, 444 Proceed to Checkout, 16, 17 product additional information, 14 attributes, 167 assign to category, 267 catalog, 38 category, 180 compare, attribute, 275 Detail page, 8, 14, 178 description, 14 list, 8, 12, 156 category, 182 properties, 185 reviews, 125, 126, 399 troubleshooting, 240 types, 201 URL, change, 428 URL Suffix, 198 variations, 223 product image placeholders, 250, 251 watermarks, 252 Product in Website, 207 Product Info Column, 260 Product Information, 241 Product Listing Sort By, 158 Product Relationships, 268 Product Reports, 393 Bestsellers, 393 Low Stock, 393 Most Viewed, 393 Products Ordered, 393 Product System Attributes, 510 Product Tax Classes, 377 Add New, 377 Product Thumbnail Itself, 222, 232 Product Type Properties, attribute, 278 Product View Optimization, 273 Products 22 translating, 519 in Cart Report, 392 Ordered Report, 393, 394 per Page, 158 Tags Report, 401 promotion, 11, 294 Promotions menu, 39 PSi Gate, 354 configure, 505 Published, status, 100 purchase order, 341, 444 configure, 348
Q
Qty Increments, 265 Quantity Below, 264 Quantity Increments, 262 Query Length, Search, 152
530
Magento Go User Guide
Index
query text, 156 Quick Access Links, 12 Search, 150, 151, 156, 167 Simple Product Creation, 229, 230 approve, 127 moderate, 128 Reviews Reports, 398 Customer Reviews, 398 Product Reviews, 398 Right Column, banner in, 116 robot, 423 Robots.txt, 199, 423, 444 sample file, 426 role, Admin access, 54 root category, 62, 179 RSS Feed, 244, 445 Rules and Comparison Properties, attribute, 279 Rules, editor buttons, 449
R
Radio Button, input type, 238 ranking, Google, 126 improve, 154 rating system create, 129 review, 126 Recently Viewed Products, 15, 119 Redeemable, gift card, 214 Redirect, 444 URL, Search Term, 166 Refresh, 83, 430 Index, 175, 412, 415 Statistics, 404 Search Index, 175 Refund Offline, 323 Shipping, 323 to Store Credit, 323 refunds, 322, 323 Refunds Report, 391 registered customers, 63 registrars, domain, 30 registration streamlined, 66 Related Banners, 293 Products, 14, 268 Promotions, banner, 120 Relative Link, 444 Remove, image, 250 Replace Existing Complex Data, 408 Reports, 389 menu, 40 Reset Filter, 194 resizing images, 254 resolution, logo, 84 Results Count, Search Suggestions, 152 Results, Search Term, 163, 170 Retail Tax Calculations, 375 Retailer, customer group, 70 Return Policy, 444 review order, 9 reviews
S
SaaS, 445 Sage Pay Direct, 355 configure, 507 sales charts, 43 email, configure 141 order 314 pending, 310 process, 10 representative, 51 Sales Report Filters, 391 Sales Reports, 390 Coupons, 390 Invoiced, 390 Orders, 390 PayPal Settlement, 390 Refunds, 390 Shipping, 390 Tax, 390 sample data, 90 sample pages, 89 Sandbox Account, PayPal setting up, 361 scope, 60, 266 attribute, 285 search, 13, 149 methods, 150 misspellings, 13 parameters, attribute, 275 Recommendations, 152 Suggestions, Enable, 152 query, 156, 163 suggestions, 13 synonyms, 13
Magento Go User Guide
531
Index
Search and Navigation Properties, attribute, 279 search box configuration, 151 search engine, 85, 89, 99, 131, 197, 423 ranking, 154, 428 results page, 423 robots, 424 Search Engine Optimizations, 155, 198 Search Index, Refresh, 175 Search Indexing, 172, 198 Search Results list, 13, 149, 156 Search Term Add New, 164 close match, 151 delete, 162 edit, 162 frequency, 151 Information, 159 suggestions, 151 Report, 159, 169 Search Terms, 13, 159 configure, 155 managing, 160 Related, 165 Report, 403 Top, 171 search tools, back office, 172 Search Weight, 167, 168 attribute, 288 seasonal promotion, 11 secure checkout, 32 security certificate 445 custom, 32 shared, 32 Select Range Dashboard, 42 select record, 174 self-serve, 63 SEO, 423, 445 SERP, 423 Set Input Validation for Store Owner, 283 Set Product as New from/to Date, 244 Settlement, 445 Share Wishlist, 136 Ship Bundle Items, 237, 239 ship order, 311 Shipment Email, 318 shipments, 316 Shipping, 23 & Handling Charges, 326 Carrier, 339, 445, 453 information, checkout, 17 Methods, 325 Table Rates, 333 Shipping Rates, 325, 328 Report, 390 Setting configure, 327 settings, 325 Shipping Settings, Origin, 327 Shop By, 156, 184 Shopping Cart 9, 16, 445 add products, 321 add Wishlist items, 321 previously orders items, 322 product thumbnail, 222 quantity, 263 update, 320 page, 270 thumbnail images, 232 Shopping Cart Price Rules, 120, 293, 299 create, 299 Shopping Cart Reports, 392 Abandoned Carts, 392 Products in Cart, 392 shopping experience, 14 Short Description product, 256 Show / Hide Editor, 98 Show per Page, 158 search results, 157 Show/Hide Editor, 92 Simple product, 201, 202 Create, 204 Sitemap, 199, 445 configure, 200 SKU, 242, 445 Bundle, 239 Custom Variants and Options, 272 Small Image, 250 placeholder, 251 Sort By category, 190 search results, 157 Special Characters, editor buttons, 448 Price, 13, 246 splash page, 420, 445 SSL, 32 Certificate, 32, 445 standalone products, 202
532
Magento Go User Guide
Index
star rating, 126 Start My Store, 19 start-up page, Admin Panel, 44 static block 446 category, 182 create, 111 translating, 520 Static Content, 445 Status product, 243 Published, 100 Stock Availability, 210, 265 Stop Further Rules Processing, 298 Store email addresses, 51 credit, 323 Information, 46 configure, 50 Name, 30, 50 URL, 2, 30 View 59, 266 Dashboard, 42 stores, multiple, 60 Styles and Fonts, editor buttons, 447 subcategories, 179 Submit Invoice, 317 subscribe, newsletter, 12 subscribers, managing, 145 subscription list, 142 newsletter, configuration, 142 suggestions, search, 13, 160 Super Attribute, 409, 410 Super Products Attributes, 233 support site, 5 supported carriers, 325 symbols currency, 49 synonyms, 13 search term, 161 System Attributes, 291 System menu, 41 Export and Import, 331 Tables, editor buttons, 450 tag approve, 131 cloud, 150, 154 Tag Reports, 400 Customers, 400 Popular, 400 Products, 400 Tags, 12, 125, 131 Task Notifications, 419, 421 Recipients, 421 Tax configure, 369 Calculation Method Based On, 370 settings, 369 Tax Class 369 customer group, 380 product, 243, 387 Tax Classes for Shipping, 369 Tax Rate, 375 Add New, 375 Information, 376 Tax Report, 390 Tax Rules, 20, 386 set up, 381 template configure sales email 141 newsletter confirmation, 143 Terms and Conditions, 17, 312 create, 312 Text Area, input type, 276 Text Field, input type, 276 theme, 12, 21, 94, 446 banners, 114 choosing, 81 Theme Customization, 84 Theme Editor, 84 themes, 39, 77 Themes Editor, 77, 81, 254 third-party tools and services, 34 Script, 430 three-column format content, 95 Thumbnail, 250 placeholder, 251 gallery, 14 images, configurable product, 232 images, rouped product, 222 Tier Pricing, 245
T
Table Rate configure, 329 data, 331 Shipping, 329 Table Rates, 328 example, 332
Magento Go User Guide
533
Index
time zone, 46 toll-free number, 16 toolbar buttons Editor, 92 “Top 5” Reports, 169 top navigation, 80, 179 depth of, 196 include in, 189 Top Search Terms, 171 tracking scripts, 195 Transactional Email, 138, 137, 446 logo, 86 Translating Your Store, 517 tree, page hierarchy, 105 trust badge, 16 Trusted Extensions, 35, 41 trusted partners, 22 Use Complex Product Types, 209, 212, 220, 229, 235 for Promo Rule Conditions, attribute, 289 in Advanced Search, 167, 168, 288 in Layered Navigation, 186, 288 in Quick Search, 167, 168, 288 in Search Results Layered Navigation, 186, 289 Parent Category Settings, 193 to Create Configurable Product, 224, 287 Used for Sorting in Product Listing, 289 Used in Product Listing, 289 User Name, 25, 37 User-agent, 423 user-generated content, 126 USPS, 339 Configure, 457
U
Unassigned Attributes, 227, 292 "Under Construction" message, 23 remove, 419 Under Version Control, 96 Unique Value attribute, 286 unlock Admin, 58 unsubscribe, request to, 145 Upload Files Media Storage, 98 product image, 249 UPS, 339, 454 Configure, 454 Up-sells, 15, 269 URL, 446 Canonical. S change product, 428 dynamic, 428 insert link, 112 redirection, 429 rewrites, 427-428 suffix, 197 validation check, 287 secure session, 32 store, 30 URL Key, 427 category, 189 content page, 105 node, 106, 107 product, 243 Usability, 446
V
validation check, data entry, 287 Value Added Tax, 383 Product Tax Classes, 384 Values Required attribute, 286 variable custom, 117 in banner, 117 in block, 118 in email template, 137, 139 Variables and Apps, editor buttons, 451 VAT, 383 Tax Zones and Rates, 385 Reduced, 384 Standard, 384 Zero, 384 VeriSign, security certificate, 32 version control, 96 video, 104 tutorials, 4 view, 266 View As, search results, 157 views, multiple store, 60 Virtual Gift Card, 212, 214 Virtual product, 202 Create, 209 Visibility product, 167, 244 Visible on Product View Page on Front-end, 289 visual presentation, 89 voice, 89 Votes Count, Poll, 133
534
Magento Go User Guide
Index
Word Count, Search, 152 work week, configure, 47 Workspace Preferences, editor buttons, 452 www, 30 WYSIWYG Editor, 101, 256, 258, 446 Using, 257
W
Watermark 252 Opacity, 252 Position, 252 webinar, 5 Webservicex, 49 website, 266 Website Payment Standard, PayPal, 358 Website Payments Pro (Permissions), PayPal, 357 Website Payments Pro Payflow Edition, PayPal, 358 Websites, Product Information, 266 Weight, 242 Bundle, 239 Weight v. Destination, 329 Weighted Search, 168 Welcome email, 2, 19, 37 width, image, 255 Wishlist, 15, 136 items, add to shopping cart, 321
X
XML, 145, 170, 193, 446,
Y
Yes/No, input type, 276 YouTube video, 104
Z
Zero Subtotal Checkout, 341 configure, 350 zoom, product image, 14
Magento Go User Guide
535
